Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
23B-046 (225)
2980 adjusted and electrical wiring is connected correctly. Where possible, complete test operations prior to installation of shaft enclosures. 1 . Operate sanitizing equipment through one complete cycle of use and cleanup, and demonstrate replenishment of chemicals or cleaning fluids in containers of unit . B. Cleaning: Following completion of enclosure walls and ceilings, clean exposed surfaces of finished metal components of chute system. Remove foreign substances and repair imperfections in finishes, but do not remove UL labels. END OF SECTION CHUTES 14560-5 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with chute manufacturer's instructions and recommendations . Assemble components with tight, nonleaking joints; and anchor securely to supporting structure with sufficient anchorages to withstand impact and wind loading stresses on vent units. Provide for thermal expansion movement of chute sections . Except as otherwise indicated, install chutes plumb, without offsets or obstructions, for free fall of materials within chutes . Install chute systems complete with doors, and with safety, sanitizing and fire-resistive components and accessories . B. Coordination with Roofing: Where roof deck curb units are not shown to receive chute roof-termination vent units, anchor vent unit support flange directly to deck before installation of roofing/insulation system. Install counterflashing after roofing/flashing system has been installed. C. Intake and Discharge Doors : Install doors at heights and locations indicated. Provide anchorages, wall/chute interfaces, self-closing operation, self- latching and similar features of installation to comply with labeling and fire-resistive requirements for fire-resistive door construction. Interface door units with throat sections of chutes in a manner which will ensure safe, snag-proof, sanitary depositing of materials in chutes by users. D. Sanitizer Unit : Install sanitizer unit where indicated, cutting and patching chute wall only to extent necessary for installation; maintain fire- resistive construction. Interconnect sanitizer control with door interlock system. E. Interlock System Wiring: Install electrical wiring for operation and control of door interlock system; comply with applicable NECA standards and recommendations. 3 .02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, CLEANING A. Test operate components of chute system upon completion of installation; demonstrate use and safety features to Owner's personnel. Operate doors, locks and interlock system to demonstrate that hardware is CHUTES 14560-4 2980 D. UL Labeled Door Units : Provide UL "B" labeled door units (1 . 0 hour with 30 minute temperature rise of 250 degrees F. (139 degress C) , complete with closers . E. Locks: Equip door latch units with manufacturer' s standard keyed cylinder locks, keyed same for doors of each chute; key removable only with cylinder locked. Furnish 4 nickle-silver keys for each door unit . 1 . Single Door Use: Provide interlock system which locks all other doors of chute when any one door is open. 2 . Fire Protection: Provide interlock system with temperature-rise elements which lock all doors of chute at predetermined, adjustable temperature in chute. 3 . Manual Control Switch: Provide interlock system with manual control stations where indicated, with switch to lock all doors of chute during shut-down hours and service operations . F. Chute Discharge Door Units: Provide manufacturer' s standard fusible-link, fire-protection, self-closing steel door unit of the type label construction even though UL label may not be required. 1 . Direct (Vertical) Discharge: Provide inclined horizontally-rolling shutter-type door unit. 2 . Horizontal Discharge: Provide top-hinged self- closing hopper door with self-latching hardware, bearing UL "B" label . Provide floor leg-brace, designed to absorb impact of material dropping against chute turn unit . Provide drain pipe connection, minimum 2" I .P.S. G. Roof-Termination Vent Units : Provide vent unit with roof-deck flange. Comply with NFPA requirements for full-sized chute extension to 4 feet above roof, with full diameter screened vent area and metal safety cap or glass explosion-release cap. Provide nonferrous metal roof counterflashing and clamping ring, compatible with chute metal. H. Fire Sprinklers : Equip chute with sprinkler heads in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 13, ready for piping connections (as work of another specification section) . Provide access for maintenance of heads. Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide 1/2 inch I .P.S. heads, one located in chute above highest intake door, and one located at intake door on alternate floors. I. Equip spray unit with disinfecting and sanitizing unit, including 1-gal tank and adjustable proportioning valve with by-pass for manual control of sanitizing and flushing operation. / CHUTES 14560-3 2980 fabrication and installation including roof flashing. Distinguish between factory fabrication and field ., assembly work. Show required piping, and wiring connections and conduit runs for wiring. 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications : Firm with at least 5 years of experience in fabrication of chutes similar to those required for project . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1 . Cutler-Federal, Inc. ; Eaton Park, FL 2 . Midland Metalcraft Corp. ; Joliet, IL 3 . Wilkinson Chutes, Inc. ; Stow, OH 2 .02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Provide manufacturer' s standard chute system of type, service, sizes and shapes indicated. Fabricate of metals and finishes as indicated; include support units, expansion joint materials; roof counterflashing and retainer band, roof-termination vent unit; intake chute throat sections located where indicated to accommodate door units as specified, discharge door units of type indicated; sanitizing or flushing units as specified, sprinkler heads where indicated, and manufacturer's standard accessories, fasteners and installation materials . B. Chute Metal : Aluminum-coated cold rolled commercial quality, steel sheet ASTM A463, Type 1 with T1-40 coating, gages as indicated. 1 . Gage: U.S. No. 16 (0 .062 inch thick) . C. Chute Intake Door/Frame Units : Provide self-closing units at each landing and at heights above floor as indicated. Use manufacturer's recommended heights if not otherwise shown. Provide door sizes and door swings as indicated or, if not indicated, provide hinged doors with 180 deg swing for chutes . Equip doors with positive latch and latch handle. Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel door units, AISI Type 304/304 with standard satin finish or No. 3 directional polish. CHUTES 14560-2 2980 SECTION 14560 CHUTES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Types of chutes required include the following: 1 . Linen (laundry) chutes 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching. B. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Sleeves through floors for chutes . C. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry. D. Section 07270 - Firestopping. E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Shaft wall liner and C- H studs . F. Section 09900 - Painting. G. Division 15 - Fire Protection. H. Division 16 - Electrical . 1. 03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA Code: Comply with applicable portions of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 82 Standard on "Incinerators, Waste and Linen Handling Systems and Equipment" . 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data, specifications, standard details, installation instructions and general recommendations for total pre-engineered chute system. Mark-up data sheets to indicate actual selections for sizes and other details of installation. B. Shop Drawings: Submit 1/4 inch scale section/elevation drawing, 1/2 inch scale typical landing plans, and 1-1/2 inch scale details of chute (� CHUTES 14560-1 2980 3 . Perform all retesting required by the governing Code Authority and the owner to verify the �- specified operation and/or p p performance. 3 . 08 OWNER' S INFORMATION A. Submittals : Provide written information necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment of the equipment prior to final acceptance as follows : 1 . Straight-line wiring diagram of as-installed elevator circuits with index of location and function of all components. Mount installation diagrams on masonite panels and leave on the job. Provide 2 final corrected sets within 90 days after job acceptance for the owner' s file. 2 . Lubricating instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants . 3 . Parts catalog for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and instructions . 3 . 09 WARRANTY INSPECTION A. At least 30 days prior to warranty expiration, schedule final inspection and retest with owner's representative. Requirement shall include close examination of all equipment . B. Replace, repair or adjust any equipment found defective and covered by warranty prior to expiration of warranty period. END OF SECTION _0 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-21 2980 C. Hydraulic Elevators : 1 . Insulation Resistance Tests : Test safety circuit, door lock circuit and motor winding circuit at 500 volts . Minimum resistance to ground shall be one megohm. 2 . Running Test : With equipment within 5 degrees of ambient machine room temperature, the following shall be accomplished: a. Insert thermometers in motor winding (shield with cotton waste) . b. Attach pressure gauge to hydraulic piping. c. Check floor to floor performance time, speed, leveling, accuracy and general ride of elevator with no load and full load in car. d. Load car to 125% of rated capacity. Inspect system for leaks . Run car in down direction one floor and after stopping, inspect system for leaks . e. Run fully loaded car continuously for a period of one hour, stopping at each floor in both directions . Stopping time at each floor shall be set so that no fewer than 50 and no more than 60 up starts occur during the hour test period. f. Check floor to floor performance time, leveling accuracy and general ride with full load and no load in the car. 3 . Test Results : a. In all test conditions performance speed and times specified shall be met, leveling accuracy shall be maintained without releveling and general riding quality shall be acceptable to the owner's representative. b. Temperature rise in motor windings shall not exceed 50 degrees Celsius above ambient . c. Pressure in system at full load shall not exceed 400 p.s.i. d. Other than negligible amount of seepage from packing and valve mechanisms, the hydraulic system shall be free of leaks . D. Performance Guarantee: Should these tests develop any defects or poor workmanship, any variance or noncompliance with the requirements of the specified codes and/or ordinances or any variance or noncompliance with the requirements of these specifications, the following work and/or repairs shall be completed at no expense to the owner. 1. Replace all equipment that does not meet Code or specification requirements . 2 . Perform all work and furnish all materials and equipment necessary to complete the specified operation and/or performance. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-20 2980 E. Fabricate and assemble the various parts in the shop insofar as practical to minimize field assembly. Parts which cannot be shop assembled which require close field fit shall be trial assembled in the shop and marked for field erection. 3 .06 CLEANUP A. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of project. B. Remove all loose materials and filing resulting from this work from hoistway surfaces and truss interiors . C. Clean machine room equipment and floor of dirt, oil, and grease. D. Clean hoistway, car, car enclosures, entrances, operating and signal fixtures of dirt, oil, grease and fingermarks . 3 .07 ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION AND TESTS A. General : Final acceptance of the installation shall be made only after all field quality control inspections and tests are complete, all submittals and certificates have been received and the owner's representative satisfied that the following have been satisfactorily completed: 1 . Workmanship and equipment comply with specification. 2 . Contract speed, capacity and floor to floor performance comply with specification. 3 . Performance of following are satisfactory: a. Starting, accelerating, running. b. Decelerating, leveling, stopping. c. Door operation and closing pressure. B. Personnel, Equipment and Instruments : Furnish personnel, equipment, and instruments to perform required tests . The following instruments may be necessary to complete the tests: 1. 50# test weights (larger weights with dollys or wheels are acceptable if weight is certified) . 2 . Multi meter. 3 . 500 volt Megger. 4 . Alternating current voltmeter and ammeter. 5. Stop watch. 6. Celsius calibrated thermometers, minimum of 2 . 7 . Precision tachometer. 8. Pressure gauge for hydraulic elevator test. 9 . Spring scale for door pressure test. 10 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-19 2980 3 . 03 INSTALLATION A. Install each equipment item in accordance with accepted manufacturer' s direction, referenced codes and specifications . B. Install machine room equipment with clearances complying with referenced codes and specifications . C. Install items so that they may be removed by portable hoists or other means for maintenance and/or repair. Components shall be installed in such a manner so that it is not necessary to disassemble another major component to reach the component requiring repair. D. Install items so that access for maintenance is safe and readily available. E. Install equipment to afford maximum safety and continuity of operation. 3 . 04 FIELD CONTROL A. Work at the job site will be checked during the course of installation. Full cooperation with inspectors is mandatory. Any corrective work they require shall be accomplished prior to performing further installation dependent upon or related to the required correction. B. Have Code Authority acceptance inspection performed. Verification that such tests have been completed, all corrective work accomplished and installation approved for issuance of a permit to operate shall be required before acceptance of any unit . 3 . 05 ADJUSTMENTS A. Align guide rails vertically within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 100 feet. Secure joints without gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth surface. B. Balance cars to equalize pressure of roller guide shoes on rails. C. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions . D. Adjust motors, pumps, valves, controllers, leveling switches, limit switches, stopping switches, door operators, and interlocks to achieve required performance levels. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-18 2980 B. Install ADA type handsoff telephones in car. Telephone shall contain an automatic dialer system that shall provide a connection to a phone in an area that is manned 24 hours per day. Automatic dialer system shall have a backup feature that will enable it automatically call a second number should the first number be busy or out of service. The phone shall require no action on the part of the passengers other than the single pressing of a pushbutton. Once the called is answered, communication shall be two way between the car and the emergency response phone. Provisions shall be made for the response phone to activate a visible signal for the hearing handicapped in the faceplate of the car phone that "HELP IS ON THE WAY" . 1 . Phone shall be mounted behind the main car operating panel faceplate. Only the speaker grille, activating pushbutton and the "HELP IS ON THE WAY" signal shall be exposed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 SITE CONDITION INSPECTION A. Prior to beginning the installation of equipment, examine the hoistway and machine room areas and verify that no irregularities exist that would affect quality of execution of work as specified. Particularly, note: 1. Hoistway size and plumbness, wellway lengths . 2 . Sill supports and pockets. 3 . Support areas for brackets, beams, etc. 4. Divider beams . B. Do not proceed with installation until previous work conforms to project requirements. 3 .02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened protective packaging. B. Store materials in original protective packaging. Prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting. C. Protect equipment and exposed finishes during transportation, erection and construction period against damage and stains. D`I HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-17 2980 B. Hoistway Access Switches : Mount without faceplates in entrance frame side jamb at all top floors and bottom floors . 1 C. Emergency Return Switch and Box: Mount in lobby call button faceplate and identify purpose with permanent engraving. Provide flush mounted box with lockable hinged cover below call button to contain keys (one per passenger elevators and one per service elevator) and instructions for emergency use of elevator. Box faceplate material to be similar to call button faceplate and contain engraved legend, "Emergency Only" in 1/2 inch letters . D. Low Oil Indicator: Provide indicator light adjacent to ground floor hoistway entrance to indicate parked car results from low oil . E. Car Position Indicator: Provide individual L.E.D. type position indicator in car entrance transom with floor designations and direction arrows . Faceplate to be stainless steel . F. Car Direction Indicator: Elevator No. 3 only. 1. Stainless steel faceplate with illuminating arrows to indicate car direction; gong to sound as doors open. Locate in each car entrance column. G. Hall Lanterns : Elevators Nos . 1 and 2 only 1 . Provide direction signals illuminating white for up and red for down, with stainless steel faceplates above each hoistway entrance. Lantern shall illuminate indicating the direction of travel, and a gong shall sound a minimum of 5 seconds before the arriving car' s doors open, once for up direction, twice for down direction. 2 . Lantern shall remain illuminated until doors are fully closed. 3 . Hall lantern lenses shall be fabricated from translucent white plastic. Each lens shall be 3 inches in diameter and shall extend beyond the faceplate 1/2 inch. H. Hall Position Indicator: Provide individual L.E.D. type position indicator above each Ground floor entrance transom with floor designations and direction arrows . Faceplate to be stainless steel . 2 .10 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS A. Install fireman's communication systems as required by code. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-16 2980 10 . Lighting: Fluorescent with high-power factory ballasts . 11 . Ceiling and cove lighting fixtures as shown on Architectural drawings . C. Patient/Service Elevator No. 3 : 1 . Shell : Reinforced 14 gauge rigidized stainless steel . Pattern to be selected. Apply sound deadening mastic to exterior. 2 . Top: Reinforced 14 gauge furniture steel with hinged exit and baked enamel finish. Provide a shut down contact to prevent car from moving if exit is open. 3 . Front Return Panels : #14 gauge stainless steel intregal with entrance columns with cutout for operating panel and cabinet for communication equipment . Finish to be satin (150 grit) , grain to run in longest direction of panel . 4 . Entrance Columns and Transom: 14 gauge stainless steel, satin finish. 5 . Car Door Panels : Same construction as hoistway door panels, with rigidized stainless steel facing on car side, pattern to be same as car enclosure. 6 . Base: Rigidized stainless steel, same pattern as car enclosure. 7 . Handrails: Double row of 2 inch by 3/8 inch flat, stainless steel bars on two sides. Top handrail centerline to be 42 inches above the floor. Bottom handrail centerline to be 30 inches above the floor. 8 . Ventilation: 2-speed exhaust blower. 9 . Lighting: Fluorescent with high-power factory ballasts . 10 . Suspended Ceiling: Translucent acrylic plastic diffusers in brushed aluminum frame. 11. Certificate Holder: Stainless steel with heavy plastic protective cover. 12 . Provide one (1) set of protection pads service, patient, and trauma elevator. Pads shall cover two sides and front and rear return panels. Provide appropriate cutouts for access to controls . Pads shall conform to code. 2 .09 CONTROL AND SIGNAL FIXTURES A. Hall Pushbuttons: Provide one riser of flush mounted hall buttons for the passenger elevators and two risers for patient/service elevator 3 adjacent to hoistway entrances with stainless steel faceplates . Fixture shall include pushbuttons for registration of hall calls which shall illuminate to indicate call registration. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-15 2980 7 . Auxiliary Car Operating Panel : Provide in opposite front return panel of passenger elevators , and in side wall adjacent to rear opening for service elevator 3 . Auxiliary car operating panel to contain only passenger use devices . M. Car Top Control Station: Per Code. N. Light and Utility Outlets : Provide lamp receptacle fitted with wire guard and a grounded utility outlet on the top of car. Locate on-off switch in easily accessible position. Locate grounded utility outlet inside cab in base. O. Emergency Exits : Per Code with electrical shutdown contact . 2 . 08 CAR ENCLOSURES A. Elevator car enclosures shall be manufactured by an approved company. Generally, the following features shall be provided. See architectural drawings for details . B. Passenger Elevators Nos. 1 and 2 : 1 . Shell : Reinforced 14 gauge furniture steel with enamel interior finish. Apply sound deadening mastic to interior. 2 . Top: Reinforced 14 gauge furniture steel with hinged exit and baked enamel finish. Provide a shut down contact to prevent car from moving if exit is open. 3 . Front Return Panels and Integral Entrance Columns : 14 gauge stainless steel, satin finish. Entire unit to swing on concealed hinges or pivots for access to intregal car station wiring and fixtures. Secure in closed position with concealed 3 point latch. Provide cabinets with flush doors for service controls and communication equipment, cutouts for pushbuttons, operating permit, etc. . 4. Transom: 14 gauge stainless steel, satin finish. 5. Car Door Panels: Same construction as hoistway door panels, exterior face to be stainless steel, satin finish. 6 . Walls : Plastic laminate panels with stainless steel channels at reveals 7 . Base: 14 gauge stainless steel, satin finish. 8 . Handrails : Double 3/8 inch x 2-1/2 inch stainless steel bars at 30 inches and 42 inches A.F.F. Handrails to be on two sides and rear with ends returned to cab walls. 9 . Ventilation: 2-speed exhaust blower. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-14 2980 H. Header: Constructed of 3/16 inch thick steel and ', shaped to provide stiffening flanges . `` I. Car Door Electrical Contact : Electrical contact to operate in conjunction with the car doors or gate so that elevator cannot operate unless doors or gate are closed or within tolerance allowed by Code. J. Door Operator: 1 . Medium-speed, heavy-duty, DC master door operator capable of opening doors at no less than 1-1/2 inch of door movement . K. Door Reopening and Control Devices : 1 . Provide full height, full screen infrared door protective device. A minimum of 40 beams shall be projected across the opening. In addition to the infrared beams, provide two intregal photo cell devices at 5 inches and 29 inches above the finished floor line. Should any of the infrared beams or the photo cells be interrupted, the doors shall remain open; or, if closing, the doors shall stop and re-open fully. The doors shall remain open for approximately 1 .5 seconds after re- establishment of the screen and/or photo cells . a. Should the entire screen and photo cells become inoperative for any reason, the closing force of the doors shall automatically be reduced to 2 . 5 lbf as required by code. 2 . Door Open Timing Feature: Timing feature shall operate in conjunction with light rays to provide adjustable, reduced, hold open time once rays are broken and re-established. In the event rays are broken beyond an adjustable time, a buzzer shall sound and doors shall try to close at reduced speed (safety screen shall remain effective and shall cause full reversal of the doors) . L. Main Car Operating Panel: To contain the following: 1. Locate controls no more than 48 inches from floor with tactile identification markings to the left of each button or switch. Markings shall be engraved. 2 . Illuminated buttons for each floor served. 3 . Emergency stop, alarm and door control buttons . Stop and alarm shall be no more than 35 inches above the floor. This group of devices shall be clearly separated from the floor button grouping. 4. Switch, light and buzzer for firemen's emergency service. 5. Hands off communication module. 6. Toggle switch operated controls for fan, light, light ray cutout, and inspection mounted behind a locked panel. Dal HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-13 2980 Designations shall be permanently attached, on contrasting color background and 2-1/2 inches high. 1 . Frames for Patient/Service elevator 3 shall have a 3-1/2 inch radius return. C. Door Panels : No. 16 U.S. gauge or equivalent with 2 removable gibs per panel . D. Sight Guards : Same material and finish as door panels . E. Sills : Extruded aluminum. F. Fascia, Toe Guards, Dust and Hanger Covers : No. 14 U.S. gauge furniture steel with manufacturer' s standard enamel finish. G. Struts and Headers: Provide for necessary support of entrances and related materials . H. Provide information to painting subcontractor on prime finish used on hoistway entrances and use of compatible products for final painting. 2 . 07 CAR EQUIPMENT A. Car Frame: Welded or bolted steel channel construction, isolated from jack unit plunger. B. Platform: Constructed of steel or wood. Fireproof the underside. Pan type construction is NOT acceptable. 1 . Platforms for service elevator No. 3 shall be constructed in a similar manner to that required for Class C1 loading as these cars will carry carts, beds, portable equipment, hand trucks, etc. . A formal C1 rating is NOT required. No other elevator components require C1 design or designation. C. Guide Shoes: Spring loaded roller guides D. Floor Covering: To be determined later. See architectural addendum. E. Car Sill : Extruded aluminum - extending full depth of entrance columns to match entrances . F. Toe Guards : Per Code. G. Car Door Hangers and Tracks : Conform to specification on hoistway entrance hangers and tracks . HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-12 2980 terminal blocks, control cabinets, junction boxes or condulets . Provide 10 percent spare conductors throughout . 2 . Conduit : Painted or galvanized steel or aluminum conduit and duct . Conduit size shall be 1/2 inch minimum. a. Flexible conduit exceeding 18 inches in length shall not be used. Flexible heavy-duty service cord, type SO, may be used between fixed car wiring and car door switches for safety edges and light rays . 3 . Traveling Cables : Flame and moisture-resistant outer cover. Include 4 sets of shielded communication wires and car lighting circuits from machine room to car connection points . Prevent traveling cables from rubbing or chafing against hoistway or car items . I . Entrance Equipment : 1 . Door Hangers : 2-point suspension with upthrust adjustment . 2 . Door Tracks : Bar or formed, cold drawn steel with smooth hanger contact surface. Tracks shall be removable for replacement. 3 . Interlocks: Type operable without retiring cam. 4 . Closers : Spring or spirator type. J. Pit Stop Switch: Per Code. K. Floor Numbers : Provide floor numbers within hoistway per Code. 2 . 06 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Provide complete entrances bearing UL fire labels as follows : 1 . Elevator Nos . 1 and 2 : a. Size: 3 ' -6" wide x 7 ' -0" high at Elev. No. 1 . Size: 4 ' -0" wide x 7 ' -0" high at Elev. No. 2 . b. Type: Center opening. c. Door Panel Material and Finish: Stainless Steel, satin finish. d. Door Frame Material and Finish: Stainless Steel, satin finish. 2 . Elevator No. 3 : a. Size: 4 ' -6" wide x 7 ' -0" high. b. Type: Two speed, center opening. c. Material and Finish: Stainless Steel frames . Steel panels with prime finish B. Frames: No. 14 U.S. gauge or equivalent with raised floor designations at height of 60 inches above floor. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-11 2980 maximum descending speed of the elevator to 15 FPM. The exposed adjustments of the valve shall be sealed -- after being set . 2 . 05 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT A. Guide Rails : T-section suitable for travel, car weight and support locations at structural floors . Provide rail backing if necessary to meet Code. B. Buffers : Spring type with blocking and supports . C. Cylinder: Seamless steel pipe. Design head to receive unit type packing and provide means to collect oil at cylinder head and return to oil reservoir. 1 . Protect the cylinder by completely encasing it with schedule 80 PVC pipe. The lower end of the PVC encasement must be completely sealed against leakage and/or penetration of ground water. Test encasement for leaks before installation. D. Plunger: Polished seamless steel tubing or pipe. If plunger length exceeds 24 feet, provide 2 or more sections not exceeding 16 feet in length, or coordinate installation of longer unit at the job site. Join section by internal threaded couplings . Multiple section jack units shall be factory polished while assembled and marked for proper future reassembly. Isolate plunger from car sling. E. Well Hole and Casing: Drill required well hole; remove excess excavated material . Base drilling cost on conditions common to the area, and as indicated by soil test reports on file with the Owner. Install steel pipe, outer protective casing, 18 inch minimum diameter and 1/4 inch minimum wall thickness. Weld 1/2 inch thick steel plate to bottom of casing. Install casing so that pit waterproofing is maintained. After jack unit is set, fill remaining space with loose, clean sand. 1 . Schedule 80 PVC pipe may be substituted for the steel casing. F. Jack Support: Provide steel channels to support jack and transmit loads to building structure. G. Normal Terminal Stopping Devices: Per Code. H. Electrical Wiring: 1. Conductors: Copper throughout with individual wires coded and all connections on identified studs or terminal blocks . Use no splices or similar connections in any wiring except at ti HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-10 2980 2 . 04 MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT A. Arrange equipment in machine room with clearances as required by the applicable code. Provide identifying numbers on pump unit, controller and disconnect switch. B. Pump Unit : Assembled unit consisting of positive displacement pump, induction motor, master-type control valves combining safety features, holding, direction, bypass, stopping and manual lowering functions, shut off valve, oil reservoir with protected vent opening, oil gauge and outlet strainer, drip pan and connections all mounted on isolating pads . Provide thermal unit or comparable means to maintain oil at operating temperature. Enclose with removable sheet steel panels lined with sound- absorbing material . C. Selector: Relay, solid state, hatch swing or moving crosshead type electrically or mechanically coupled to elevator car. D. Controller: Cabinet type, with removable doors and adequate ventilation to dissipate heat . Wire to identified terminal block studs . Identifying symbols or letters identical to those on wiring diagrams permanently marked adjacent to each component on the controller. Provide reduced voltage motor starting circuits. E. Muffler: Provide in discharge oil line near pump unit . Design shall dampen and absorb pulsation and noise in the flow of hydraulic fluid. F. Piping and Oil : Provide piping, connections and oil for the system. Couplings between the pump unit and oil lines shall be isolated. G. Shut-Off Valve: Manual valve in line adjacent to pump unit. Provide second valve in pit adjacent to jack unit . H. Speed Limiting (Rupture) Valve: Provide an automatic shut off valve in the oil supply line at the cylinder inlet . Pipe protruding from the cylinder shall be welded at inlet and threaded to receive shut off valve. When there is a ten percent drop in operating pressure, the automatic shut off valve shall be activated. When activated, this device shall immediately stop the descent of the elevator, and hold the elevator until it is lowered by use of the manual loading feature of the valve. The manual loading feature of the valve shall be arranged to limit the � o HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-9 2980 floor. The system shall instantly cause the elevator to respond to the Medical Emergency call . If the car is not in service and available, the call registered light shall not illuminate. d. Provide a Medical Emergency key-operated switch in the main car operating panel . Activation of this switch will permit registration of a car call from any floor, total control of doors and no interference from hall calls . When the elevator is placed on Medical Emergency from within the car, the hall call buttons shall not illuminate if someone attempts to register a call . e. Once the car is selected to respond to the floor call for Medical Emergency, it shall, upon arrival at the calling floor, remain with the doors open for 10 to 30 seconds . If the car is not placed on Medical Emergency from within the car during this period, the car shall return to normal services automatically. f. Provide in the top section of each car operating panel (approximately 6 ' -0" above the floor) backlighted "MEDICAL EMERGENCY" indicators. These indicators shall flash on and off continuously when the car is assigned to this operation. Flashing shall continue until the car is returned to normal service. 5 . Standby Power Device: All Elevators a. Provide control devices to automatically lower the car nonstop to the lowest landing in the event of loss of normal power supply. The doors shall remain closed until the car reaches the lowest landing at which time they shall open automatically. After a time delay, the doors shall close. The "DOOR OPEN" button shall remain operative after the car has shut down. The car shall automatically resume normal operation upon restoration of normal power supply. b. Device shall be capable of differentiating between actual power failure and manual operation of elevator main line disconnect switch. The device shall NOT function when the main line disconnect switch is manually opened. c. The device shall have a 12 volt DC battery power source located in the machine room. The battery shall be rechargeable lead acid or nickel cadmium having a 10 year minimum life expectancy. A battery condition meter shall be permanently installed in the unit . HYDRAULIC ELMIATORS 14240-8 2980 button is pressed and held until the interlock circuits are established. Resume normal service when the switch is returned to the "OFF" position. Key for this switch shall be removable only in the "OFF" position. C. Door Operation: 1 . Doors shall open automatically when the car arrives at a floor to permit egress of passengers . After the timed interval, the doors shall automatically close. 2 . Provide a momentary contact toggle switch in the car operating panel of Patient/Service Elevator No. 3, which when activated shall increase the transfer time for an adjustable period of 10 to 60 seconds. Registration of a car call, activation of the door close button, or the closing of the doors shall cancel the extended transfer time and restore the normal transfer time. The switch shall be identified "DOOR HOLD" . D. Leveling: 2-way automatic leveling with releveling feature. One way leveling augmented by anti-creep is not acceptable. E. Emergency Features: 1. Emergency Operation: Equip the elevator with control system to operate and recall the cars in fire or other emergency condition. Provide terminals on controller for connection of signal from sensors provided in other sections of the work. 2 . Emergency Lighting and Emergency Alarm Unit : Car- mounted battery unit including solid-state charger and testing means enclosed in common metal container. Battery to be rechargeable lead acid or nickel cadmium with 10-year minimum life expectancy. 3 . Low Oil Control: In the event oil level is insufficient for travel to the top floor, controls shall be provided to return the elevator to the main level and park until oil is added. 4 . Medical Emergency Service: Elevator 3 only a. Equip the elevator with a system for calling the elevator to any floor served by the elevator on an emergency basis independently from normal controls. b. Provide a key-operated momentary pressure switch and call registered light in each elevator lobby. The face plate shall be engraved "MEDICAL EMERGENCY" . Engraved letters shall be filled with red paint. c. When a switch at any landing is activated, the call registered light shall illuminate at that 133 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-7 2980 a. Provide operating devices for the duplex selective/collective automatic elevator system to include a series of car call buttons corresponding to the various landings served and a single riser of hall call button fixtures with UP and DOWN call buttons at intermediate landings and a single hall call buttons at each terminal landing. The microprocessor based system shall be configured to allow either car to respond to registered hall calls to provide the operation as specified. b. Provide a microprocessor based system designed to automatically operate an elevator when one or more car call buttons have been pressed, provided the hoistway door interlock and car door contact circuits have been closed. The elevator shall stop at the first floor reached for which a call has been registered. Stops shall be made in the natural order in which floors are reached, irrespective of the sequence in which the calls have been registered, provided calls are registered sufficiently in advance of arrival of a car at that particular floor to permit the stop to be made. During this operation, the duplex operation shall allow the other car to respond to registered hall calls. Only one car shall respond to any one hall call . Provide a bias count determination language to systematically select which car shall answer the call. c. Cars shall park at any floor within an assigned zone. After unloading a car call passenger, the car shall park at that floor within the zone, providing that no other call commitments are allotted. There shall not be an assigned mandatory park floor for any elevator within a particular zone. d. If a car is taken out of service for any reason or fails to respond to a hall call within a predetermined adjustable time limit of 40 to 120 seconds, all calls shall be transferred to the remaining car, which shall then function as a single car selective/collective elevator until the "out of service" car is returned to operation. B. Independent Service - Elevators 1, 2, and 3 1 . Provide a two position key operated "INDEPENDENT SERVICE SWITCH" in the car operating panel which shall have its positions marked "OFF" and "ON" . When the switch is in the "ON" position, the car shall respond only to calls registered on landing push buttons. Car and hoistway door shall not close until a car button or the "DOOR CLOSE" HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS ` 14240-6 2980 2 . 02 PERFORMANCE A. Speed: + 10% with full load up, no load down. B. Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold up to 125 percent rated load. C. Leveling: + 1/4 inch under any loading condition. D. Pressure: Fluid system components shall be designed and factory tested for 500 p.s.i . Maximum operating pressure shall be 400 p.s .i . 2 .03 OPERATION A. Operational Control: 1 . Selective Collective: Patient/Service Elevator No. 3 . a. Elevator shall opeiate without an attendant from buttons located at each floor and in the car. The registration of a hall call, when the car is idle, shall automatically start the elevator and dispatch it to the corresponding floor. If a call is registered at the floor where the car is idle, the doors shall automatically open. b. Once the direction of travel has been established, the car will not reverse direction until all car calls have been answered or until all hall calls, ahead of the car and corresponding to the direction of car travel, have been answered. c. Car shall slow down and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered calls, in the natural order in which they are approached. As slow down is initiated for a hall call, that call shall be automatically cancelled and the hall button for that direction of travel remain ineffective until the car leaves the floor. Car calls shall be similarly cancelled. The car shall remain at the arrival floor an adjustable time interval to allow passenger transfer. d. The car shall only answer calls corresponding to the direction in which the car is traveling except that it may answer a call in the opposite direction if that call is the highest (or lowest) call registered. e. Registration of a call shall cause the appropriate button to illuminate. When the call is answered, the light shall go out . 2 . Duplex Selective Collective: Elevators Nos. 1 and 2 . 1p3 ( HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-5 2980 D. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD1, Type 1, 1/16 inch thick. ,.N E. Paint : All exposed metal work furnished under this section, except as otherwise noted, shall be cleaned of oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter and factory painted one shop coat of manufacturer' s standard rust-resistant primer. After erection, provide one finish coat of industrial enamel paint . Galvanized metal need not be painted. F. Prime Finish: Clean all surfaces receiving a baked enamel finish of oil, grease, scale, etc. Apply one coat of rust-resistant mineral paint followed by a filler coat over uneven surfaces . Sand smooth and apply final coat of mineral paint . G. Baked Enamel : Prime per "F" above. Apply and bake two (2) additional coats of enamel in the selected solid color. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATOR SCHEDULE A. Passenger Elevators Nos . 1 and 2 : 1 . Rated Load: 3500 pounds . 2 . Rated Speed: 150 feet per minute. 3 . Total Travel : 26 -0" 4 . Floors Served: LL, G, and 1 . 5 . Number of Openings : 3 in line. 6 . Platform Size: 7 ' -0" wd x 6 ' -2 " dp at Elev. No. 1; 8 ' -0" wd x 6 ' -2" dp at Elev. No. 2 . 7 . Net Car Inside: 6 ' -8" wd x 5 ' -4" dp at Elev. No. 1 (must be maintained) ; 7 ' -8" wd x 5 ' -4" dp at Elev. No. 2 (must be maintained) . 8 . Door Size & Type: 3 ' -6" wd x 7 ' -0" center opening. B. Patient/Service Elevator No. 3 : 1 . Rated Load: 5500 pounds . 2 . Rated Speed: 150 feet per minute. 3 . Total Travel : 26 ' -0" 4. Floors Served: LL, G, and 1. 5. Number of Openings : 2 front @ LL and 1 rear @ G. 6. Platform Size: 6 ' -0" wd x 10 ' -0" dp. 7 . Net Car Inside: 5 ' -8" wd x 8 ' -6" dp (must be maintained) . 8. Door Size & Type: 4 ' -6" wd x 7 ' -0" two speed, center opening. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-4 2980 b. Design Information: Indicate equipment lists, reactions and design information on layouts . c. Power Confirmation Sheets: Include hp, code letter, starting current, full load running current, and demand factor for applicable motors . d. Finish Materials : Submit samples . e. Fixtures : Submit cuts or shop drawings . 1 . 06 MAINTENANCE A. The elevator contractor shall furnish maintenance, including 24 hour emergency call back service, on all equipment described herein for a period of 12 months commencing on date of final acceptance of the elevator system. The maintenance shall include systematic examination, adjustment and lubrication of all electrical and mechanical parts whenever required and shall use only genuine, standard parts produced by the manufacturer of the equipment installed. All maintenance work shall be performed by competent personnel under the supervision and in direct employ of the elevator contractor. B. The elevator contractor shall not assign, sell, or in other manner transfer this maintenance obligation to any other contractor. C. Interim: When elevators have been installed to a stage near completion, and declared ready for service prior to completion and final acceptance of the complete elevator system (the start of maintenance and guarantee periods) , the owner may, at his sole discretion, accept these elevators for building use on an interim basis. 1 . During this period prior to final acceptance, the owner will pay a mutually agreed amount per day per unit for maintenance of those elevators accepted for interim use. 1.07 MATERIALS A. Steel: Low carbon, cold rolled to stretcher leveled standard flatness per ASTM A-366 for sheet, ASTM A-36 for structural. B. Stainless Steel: Type 302 or 304 with No. 4 Finish (150 grit) on exposed surfaces per ASTM A-167 . Grain of belting in direction of longest dimension. C. Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B-221; sheet and plate per ASTM B-209 . HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-3 2980 9 . Machine room/pit lighting and convenience outlets . 10 . Sensors for activation of elevator emergency return feature including wiring of sensor signal to controller in elevator machine room. 1 . 03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with the most stringent requirements of the latest editions of the following: 1 . Building Laws : a. Local City of Northhampton, Massachusetts Ordinances and Laws . b. ASME A17 .1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators . c. Massachusetts 524 CMR Elevator Regulations d. Comply with NFPA Codes relating to electrical work, elevators, and fire resistance ratings of hoistway entrances. Comply with NFPA Standard 80 and provide UL label�:d entrances with 1 1/2 hour ratings . e. Comply with ADA Regulations for the Handicapped. 2 . Permits : Obtain and pay for all permits . 1 . 04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Hydraulic Elevators : Canton, Cemco, Dover, Montgomery, Otis, Schindler. B. Car Enclosures : Custom manufactured by Brice Southern, Columbia Elevator Products, Dover, ECI, Gunderlin, Hauenstein & Burmeister, Otis, National, or Tyler Elevator Products in accordance with contract documents . C. Hoistway Entrances: Custom manufactured by Brice Southern, Columbia Elevator Products, Dover, EDI, Gunderlin, Hauenstein & Burmeister, Otis, National, Tyler Elevator Products in accordance with contract documents . 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data for each elevator including capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, controls, finishes, and similar information. 1 . In general, the following are required: a. Scaled Layouts: Equipment arrangement, entrances, enclosures, etc. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-2 2980 SECTION 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Two (2) Passenger Elevators . 2 . One (1) Service Elevator. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Hoistways and Machine Spaces : Plumb hoistways and machine space complete with lighting, ventilation, ladders, access, doors, guards, etc . B. Supports : Supports for equipment reactions, hoist-way entrance sills and guide rails as shown on drawings . C. Blockouts, Cutting, Patching and Finishing: All blockouts in, or cutting of structural members, walls or work specified in other sections, together with patching and finishing of same, including grouting under sills, and around hoistway entrance frames . D. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of machine room walls, floors, ceilings and equipment not installed under this section. E. Guards : Protective enclosure around hoistway openings during construction. F. Electrical: 1. Electrical feeders for normal and standby power through fused disconnect devices to elevator controllers . 2 . Neutral delay standby/normal power transfer switch. 3 . Pair of conductors carrying standby power to the elevator machine room to signal the loss of normal power and presence of standby power. 4. Electrical feeders and disconnect devices for normal and standby car lighting and ventilation power. 5. Car telephone and connection to telephone circuit . 6. Power for construction and testing. 7 . Communication speaker and Fireman's telephone jack, source and wiring to hoistway. 8 . Conduit or duct from elevator hoistways to remote control/signal panels . Y J HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-1 2980 3 . 05 INSTALLATION OF PENETRATING ITEMS A. At penetrations of lead linings, provide lead shields, as required, to maintain continuity of protection. Install shields according to manufacturer' s instructions and as indicated. B. Provide lead linings, sleeves, shields and other protection in an equivalent thickness of the lead used in the protection system being penetrated. C. Secure shields at penetrations using adhesive or wire ties, but not penetrating fasteners, unless indicated on Drawings . D. Outlet Boxes and Conduit : Cover or line with lead sheet lapped over adjacent lead lining. Wrap conduit with lead sheet for 10 inches from box. E. Duct Openings : Line or wrap ducts with lead sheet for distance from partition/ceiling equal to three times the largest opening dimension. Lap lead sheet with adjacent lead lining. F. Piping: Wrap piping with lead sheet for 10 inches from the point of penetration. 3 . 06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After x-ray equipment has been installed and placed in operating condition, the Owner will arrange and pay for a health physicist to test the x-ray protection. B. Make corrections required by the health physicist . C. In the case of defective work, uncover and repair or replace, including work affected thereby. Arrange and pay for additional testing by the health physicist until no more corrections are required. 3 .07 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensures the x-ray protection is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION X-RAY PROTECTION 13091-7 2980 nails along outer edges . Provide shims at intermediate supports . ..,� E. Fastening to Metal Supports : Use drywall screws spaced as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. Cover heads of screws with lead discs recessed flush into surface of board. F. Fastening to Metal Supports : Use drywall screws spaced as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. Install lead strips covering face of framing and wrapped around flange to cover points of screws . G. Two-Layer Systems : Apply a facing sheet of gypsum board over the base sheet using the manufacturer' s recommended bonding adhesive. To ensure a positive bond, maintain pressure on the finish panel until the adhesive has set . H. Install corner beads at external corners . I. Install metal edge trim wherever edge of board would otherwise be exposed or partially exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound. J. Finishing: See Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for joint treatment and preparation for finishing. 3 .04 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FRAMES A. See applicable Sections in Division 8. B. Lead-Lining Frames : Line the inside of frames with sheet lead of thickness not less than that of lead used in doors and walls where the frames are used. Form lead sheet to match the frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across the head, lapping the stops . Form lead shields around areas prepared to receive hardware. Lap lining over lining in walls . C. Hardware: Line covers, escutcheons, and plates, as required, to provide effective shielding at cutouts and penetrations of frames and doors. See Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for other installation requirements . D. Touch up damaged finishes with compatible coating after sanding smooth. E. Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. X-RAY PROTECTION ` 13091-6 2980 D. Rooms with Non-Lead-Lined Partitions : Provide one sign for each lead-lined partition in a room for which all partitions are not lined. Indicate the thickness of sheet lead and the total lead equivalence. Indicate in feet the height of sheet lead above the floor or indicate that the partition has been lined its full height . E. Rooms Where Only Door is Shielded: Provide one sign for each door to a room where only the door has been lined, indicating the thickness of lead. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates in areas to receive x-ray protection before beginning installation to ensure that surfaces and existing conditions are suitable for the installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsuitable conditions have been corrected. B. Concrete Surfaces : Do not proceed until surfaces are clean, dry, and free of depressions or sharp projections that could damage or penetrate the lead sheet . 3 .02 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparing shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure the work will fit properly. 3 .03 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED GYPSUM BOARD A. Install board over supports as indicated. B. Install board with long edge parallel to supports and lead lining facing supports . Provide blocking at end joints. C. Openings: Extend gypsum board into frames of openings, lapping lead lining with lead frames or frame linings . Arrange board around openings so that neither horizontal nor vertical joints occur at corners of openings . D. Install lead strips 1-1/2 inch wide minimum, and same thickness as the lead lining to face of supports and blocking where joints occur. Secure lead strips with X-RAY PROTECTION 13091-5 2980 7 . Shield cutouts for locksets with sheet lead of the same thickness used in the door. Lap lining of cutouts with the door lining. B. Lead-Lined Metal Door Frames : Minimum 16 gage formed steel sheet, with saw-mitered and fully welded corners . 1 . Provide additional reinforcements and internal supports to adequately carry the weight of lead- lined doors . Perform such work prior to installing lead lining. 2 . Line the inside of frames with sheet lead of thickness not less than that used in doors and walls where the frames are used. Form lead sheet to match the frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across the head, lapping the stops . Form lead shields around areas prepared to receive hardware. Fabricate lead lining wide enough to maintain an effective lap with the lead of adjoining shielding. 2 . 04 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS A. Informational Signs, General : Provide signs in rooms as indicated. Fabricate signs from melamine plastic with contrasting color core with engraved lettering, attached with double-sided foam tape. Provide lettering as indicated or as directed by the Owner' s health physicist . Provide signs of sufficient size to contain the required information. 1 . Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard colors . 2 . Indicate lead thicknesses in decimal fraction inches . B. Rooms Where the Level of Protection is Uniform Throughout : Provide one sign for each room indicating the thickness of sheet lead and the total lead equivalence of partitions, ceiling, floor, doors, and other portions of the x-ray protection enclosure. C. Rooms Where the Level of Protection is Not Uniform Throughout: Provide one sign for each room that has different thicknesses of sheet lead in different locations . Indicate in tabular form the thickness of sheet lead and the total lead equivalence of each wall and partition, floor, ceiling, door, and window. Indicate the height above the floor slab to which partitions have been lined with sheet lead or indicate that partitions have been lined their full height. Indicate where thickness of lead changes or is not continuous. X-RAY PROTECTION 13091-4 2980 b. Ameray Company. c. Bar-Ray Products, Inc. d. NELCO (New England Lead Burning Company, Inc. ) e. Radiation Protection Products, Inc . f. Shielding Industries, Inc. 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Lead Sheet : Rolled sheet lead conforming to requirements of FS QQ-L-201, Grade C, or ASTM B749, type L51120 (chemical lead) , 1/16 inch thick, unless indicated otherwise. B. Lead-Lined Gypsum Board: Comply with requirements of ASTM C36 . Provide board not less than 5/8 inch thick, of width and length required for support spacing and to prevent cracking during handling. Laminate a single sheet of lead, thickness as indicated, to back of board. Provide 1-1/2 inch wide lead strips for lapping at joints . C. Accessories and Fasteners : Provide the manufacturer' s standard fasteners and accessories as required for installation, maintaining the same protection as the system. 2 . 03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Lead-Lined Wood Doors : Solid-core, 5 ply flush construction with one or more continuous lead sheets to make up the total lead thickness . 1 . Core: Solid glued wood block or solid particleboard, glued to top and bottom rails and edge stiles . Lead lining may be constructed in the core or between the core and faces, at the manufacturer' s option. 2 . Lead Lining: Extend lead sheet continuously from top to bottom and edge to edge. Assemble lead lining and core with poured lead fasteners or steel bolts . Space lead dowels not more than 1-1/2 inches from door edge and approximately 8 inches on center. Countersink bolt heads and cover with poured lead. 3 . Faces: Minimum 1/50 inch thick natural wood veneer, with cross-band. 4. Face Veneer: Premium-Grade Maple, plain-sliced, slip and balanced matched. 5. Factory-prefit to frames for 1/16 inch clearance at jambs and top and minimum clearance at bottom; premachine for hardware. 6. Finish: See Section 08211, Flush Wood Doors. /0!71 X-RAY PROTECTION 13091-3 2980 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS � A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer' s detailed technical product information and installation instructions for each item of x-ray protection and accessories required. B. Submit shop drawings showing the layout of the entire x-ray protected area. Show special components and installation conditions that are not fully dimensioned or detailed in product data submittals . C. Submit samples for initial selection purposes of prefinished wood doors . 1 . 06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully installed x-ray protection materials and products similar in material, design, and extent to those required for this Project . B. Manufacturer Qualifications : Provide x-ray protection materials, equipment, and accessories produced as standard products by a manufacturer regularly engaged in producing x-ray protection materials . 1 .07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lead-Lined Gypsum Board: Comply with requirements of Section 09250 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements . B. Lead-Lined Steel Door Frames : Comply with requirements of Section 08110 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. C. Lead-Lined Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of applicable Section 08211 for delivery, storage, and handling requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal: 1. Lead Products and Products Fabricated with Lead: a. A & L Lead Company, Inc. X-RAY PROTECTION 13091-2 2980 SECTION 13091 X-RAY PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1. Lead-lined gypsum board. 2 . Lead-lined wood doors . 3 . Lead-lined steel door frames . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood furring. B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Metal framing and furring for gypsum drywall. 1. 03 DEFINITIONS A. Lead Equivalence: The thickness of lead that provides the same attenuation (reduction of radiation upon passing through) under the specified conditions as the material in question. 1 . 04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Lead thicknesses and configurations have been determined by the Owner. The Contractor will not be expected to provide x-ray protection exceeding that physically possible by the materials indicated in the thicknesses and locations indicated. 1. The Owner's radiation protection design report is available to the Contractor upon request. B. Make joints, fasten to substrates, and shield penetrations to maintain the integrity of the shielding system. C. Lead Thicknesses: Provide lead thickness as indicated on drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, the thickness of lead used in doors, door frames, penetration shielding, joint strips, and other items located in a lead-lined assembly shall not be less than that of lead in the assembly where they are installed. X-RAY PROTECTION 13091-1 2980 C. Provide colors and profiles of materials as selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard colors and profiles . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer' s instructions, at locations indicated and coordinated with entrance locations and traffic patterns . END OF SECTION I 0 CARPET ENTRANCE MATS 12690-3 2980 1 . 05 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Except as otherwise indicated herein, sequencing or scheduling for performance of work of this section in relation with other work is Contractor' s option. D. Delay installation of mats until near time of substantial completion for the project . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products or equal : 1 . "Decorib" walk-off entrance mat by Mats, Inc. , Braintree, MA. 2 . "Parkwood Entrance Walk-Off Carpet Matting" by Parkwood Company, Inc. , Medford, MA. 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Carpet-Type Mats : 1 . Construction: Tightly needled rib with nonraveling edges . 2 . Pile Fiber: Heavy denier, solution dyed polypropylene. 3 . Pile Weight : 38 ounces . 4 . Pile Height : High 3/8 inch; low 3/16 inch. 5. Backing: High density foam. 6. Static Performance: Not more than 0 .5 Kv for step and 0 .8 Kv for scuff. 7 . Flammability: UL Class I . B. Shop-fabricate units of floor mat work to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Where not indicated otherwise, provide single unit for each mat installation, but do not exceed manufacturer' s maximum size recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. Where possible, verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication. 1. Surface-Type Applications : Where indicated for surface application (no recess to receive mat) provide tapered vinyl carpet edge moldings with flanges fused to back of mat. 2 . Provide moldings at all 4 edges, with mitered corners. CARPET ENTRANCE MATS 12690-2 2980 SECTION 12690 CARPET ENTRANCE MATS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface-type carpet mat units . B. Provide twice the number of mats required for the project, in order that the Owner will have a clean set of mats while one set is being cleaned. 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames . C. Section 08212 - Panel Wood Doors . D. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer' s specifications and installation instructions for each type of entrance mat. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate. B. Submit samples for each type and color of exposed entrance mat, frames and accessories required. Provide 12 inch square samples of mat materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Hazard Classification: Provide materials bearing UL label and marking, or certification indicating fire hazard classification as determined by ASTM E84 as follows : 1 . Flame spread not more than 25. 2 . Fuel contributed not more than 25 . 3 . Smoke developed not more than 450 . CARPET ENTRANCE MATS 12690-1 2980 2 . Screen: As indicated below, with top edge mounted on, and securely anchored to, a 3-inch-diameter rigid steel spring roller and bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a tubular metal slat with ends of slat protected by plastic caps and saddle and pull attached to slat by screws . a. Material : Vinyl-coated glass fiber fabric . b. Size of Viewing Surface: As indicated. 3 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. "Series 500 Auditorium, " Bretford Manufacturing, Inc. b. "Model C, " Da-Lite Screen Co. , Inc. C. "Luma 2, " Draper Shade & Screen Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 INSTALLATION A. Install projection screens at locations indicated in compliance with screen manufacturer' s instructions . B. Install front projection screens with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction as indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner that produces a smoothly operating screen with plumb and straight vertical edges and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when screen is lowered. 1. Test manually operated units to verify that screen operating components are in optimum functioning condition. 2 . For wall mounted screens, provide wall mounting brackets and extension brackets so screens will clear chalkboards when in the down position. 3 .02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If despite such protection damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition. END OF SECTION (� l PROJECTION SCREENS 11132-3 NNW 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 PROJECTION SCREEN SURFACES, GENERAL A. Measurement of Gain of Screen Viewing Surface: Measure gain of screen viewing surface against that of a magnesium carbonate surface by means of a photogoniometer using test methods and test apparatus per Federal Specification GG-S-00172D(1) for determining effect of reflected light at various viewing angles on screen surfaces . Ratings of 1 . 0 refer to those viewing surfaces having a reflectivity equal to the magnesium carbonate surface. B. Material and Viewing Surface of Front Projection Screens : Obtain screens manufactured from mildew- and flame-resistant fabric of type indicated for each type of screen specified and complying with the following requirements : 1. Matte white viewing surface with minimum gain characteristics complying with Federal Specification GG-S-00172D(1) for Type A screen surface. 2 . Seamless Construction: Provide screens in sizes indicated without seams . 3 . Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew-resistant screen fabrics as determined by Federal Standard 191A/5760 . 4 . Fire Performance Characteristics : Provide projection screen fabrics identical to those materials that have undergone testing and passed requirements for flame resistance as indicated below: a. NFPA 701 per small-scale test . 2 . 02 MANUALLY OPERATED FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS A. Provide manufacturer' s standard units consisting of case, screen, mounting accessories and other components as required for a complete installation and complying with descriptive requirements indicated below. B. Spring-Roller-Operated Projection Screens: Units designed and fabricated for wall or ceiling installation and complying with the following requirements: 1 . Screen Case: Fabricated in one piece from not less than 22-gage steel with flat back design, vinyl-covered or baked-enamel finish, and end caps with integral roller brackets and furnished with universal mounting brackets in finish matching end caps to enable attachment to wall or ceiling. PROJECTION SCREENS 11132-2 2980 SECTION 11132 PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Manually operated front projection screens . 1. 02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer' s product data for each type of screen indicated. B. Submit shop drawings showing layout and types of projection screens . Show the following: 1. Location of screen centerline. 2 . Location of wiring connections . 3 . Anchorage details . 4 . Accessories . 1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from a single manufacturer as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories . B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions . 1 .04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to take place. B. Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. / 0I1 PROJECTION SCREENS 11132-1 11 J;JN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 51 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts WASHD20 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Two-Door Pass-Thru Washer Spec ID: WASHD20 Alvey Washing Equipment Model: SA-5A PANHANDLER Description: Features two vertical-operating, stainless steel doors. Wash chamber is 38.5"w x 25"d x 28"h: accomodates different racks and baskets. 10hp totally enclosed. fan cooled motor. vertically-mounted wash pump. 87 gallon capacity. Designed for washing pots, pans and utensils used in baking and cooking food: adaptable for other applications. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $18300 Dimensions: 78"w x 42.5"d x 96.5"h Weight: 2700.0 Lbs Electrical: 208 AC Amps: 97 Hertz: 60 Phase: Three HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes Plumbing: 3/4" hot water rinse- female pipe connection. 1 1/2" drain line- female pipe connection. Fresh water rinse: requires minimum 12 gpm @ 20 psi line pressure. Fresh water rinse consumption: minimum 5.6 gallon per 30 sec cycle. Heated tank options: electric immersion heaters, steam injector, gas burner (natural or propane), stainless steel steam heated coils. Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8227 Decontamination Soiled Wo Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 50 Report Id: 851 Northampton. Massachusetts WASHDI3 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Dishwaher, High Capacity Spec ID: WASHD13 Hobart Corporation Model: LX30H Description: Built-in booster heater raises temperature of incoming water to 180 degrees F (from 110 or 140 deg F). Machine automatically drains water by means of a built-in pump. Accomodates most racks from 10" x 20" to 20" x 20". 2 minute cycle time. Can wash up to 750 dishes per hour or 1080 glasses per hour. Stainless steel tank, door. and top panel. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Floor - Major Estimated Cost: $3500 Dimensions: 24"w x 26.5"d x 33.75"h Weight: 210.0 Lbs Electrical: 208 Amps: 43.6 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single Dedicated Circuit Required HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes Hardwired: requires 50 Amp dedicated circuit. Minimum AWG wire: 8. Flexible 6' water input and drain hose. Peak drain flow: 10 GPM. Requires flowing water pressure (incoming) of 15-25 prig. Pumped drain: maximum 3 ft. drain height allowed. On skid plates to slide in and out for servicing. SEE CUTSHEETS FOR FURTHER DETAILS ON CONNECTIONS AND CONDUITS. Dept: CO Coffee Shop Room: G376A Coffee Shop- Food Prep Ar Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-0wner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. '^' 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 49 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts WASHD08B Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Spindle Rack Spec ID: WASHD08B HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8227 Decontamination Soiled Wo Qty: 2 Total Quantity: 2 E—Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C=Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. r 00 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 48 Report Id: 851 Northampton. Massachusetts WASHD08 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 ..,� Washer / Disinfector Spec ID: WASHD08 Getinge AB Model: DECOMAT A 8666 Part No: OPTION G= ELECTRICALLY HEATED Description: Cabinetted, one-door. Fully programmable, requires about 30 - 40 min. per cycle, including about 20 minutes for drying phase. Self-diagnos- tic fault messages are displayed. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $38000 Dimensions: 43.7"w x 35.8"d x 73.6"h Electrical: 240 AC Amps: 46 Watts: 17500 Hertz: 60 Phase: Three HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes Electrically heated (Option G): 3/4" connections for cold & hot water: 15 to 115 psig (1-8 bar): maximum flow rate of 8.0 gpm (30 L/min). Drain connection: 2" diameter; 13 gpm (50 L/min) discharge rate. [ALL] Steam heated model (Option V): 2500 Watts. 7 Amps: requires 1/2"steam connection: 45 - 90 prig (3-6 bar). Max. flow: 86 lb/hr at 45 psig. Steam heated model with drying (Option T): 6900 Watts. 18 Amps. Purified Water/High Pressure Supply (Option DV): 3/4" connection. 7-115 psig (0.5-8 bar): maximum flow rate of 3.2 gpm (12 Liters/min). Purified Water/Low Pressure Supply (Option DP): 3/4" connection, 0-7 psig (0-0.5 bar): maximum flow rate of 3.2 gpm (12 Liters/minute). Distilled water is recommended; a volume of 10 gallons is consumed for each rinse cycle. Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8227 Decontamination Soiled Wo Qty: 2 Total Quantity: 2 Loading Trolley & OP Cart (WASHD08A) Getinge AB Model: EXTERNAL LOADING TROLLEY Part No: 498 61 33-00 Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Floor - Major Estimated Cost: 85100 Dimensions: I 25.8"w x 38"d x 29"h [57"h (w/ rack)] HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: B227 Decontamination Soiled Wo Qty: 2 Total Quantity: 2 Spindle Rack (WASHD08B) - Getinge AB Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: 83000 E-Equipment Planner D—Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. , J, 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 47 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts WARMBIS Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Warming Cabinet Spec ID: WARMB15 Blickman Health Industries Inc Model: 7924-SS-D Description: Digital controls. Upper compartment: 4.54 cubic ft. (0.13 cubic mt). Lower compartment: 13.19 cubic ft. (0.37 cubic meters). Includes 3 adjustable shelves. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Floor - Major Estimated Cost: $4053 Dimensions: 30"w x 24"d x 72"h Weight: 340.0 Lbs Electrical: 115 AC Amps: 8.3 Watts: 1500 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: No 3412 BTU/hr: recessing flanges available for built-in installation. Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-241 Clean Supply Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G288 Alcove / Nourishment Area Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 2 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer O-Owner C=Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 00 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 46 Report Id: 851 Northampton. Massachusetts TENTA04 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 �+ Aerosol Treatment Chamber Spec ID: TENTA04 J.H. Emerson Company Model: 7-AT TREATMENT CHAMBER Description: Aerosol treatment and sputum induction chamber protects hospital personnel from exposure to aerosolized drugs and airborne infectious disease. Mobile (2 rear casters). 250 to 460 air changes per hour. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Floor - Major Estimated Cost: $7000 Dimensions: 45"w x 25.5"d x 74"h Weight: 260.0 Lbs Electrical: 110 AC Watts: 150 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: CP Cardio-Pulmonary Test & R Room: G396 Testing/Treatment Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E=Equipment Planner D=Interior Designer 0-Owner C=Contractor V=Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 45 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts TELEV03 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 20" Patient Television Spec ID: TELEV03 Philips Consumer Electronics Model: MAGNAVOX 20" HEALTHCARE Description: Color television with patient remote control. Microprocessor tuning, on screen menu, volume limit controls. 178 channel capability. Closed caption decoding. Pecan finish. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: 0 Specify: 0 Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Countertop - Major Estimated Cost: $355 Dimensions: 20"w x 19.5"d x 18.25"h Weight: 54.0 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Watts: 65 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Wall Mount (TELEV03A) Granada Hospital Group, Inc. Model: HMT:6446AA,6065AA.6043AA,8720 Description: . To include standard wall mounting plate, standard IL bar, back-up plate. and mounting bar. Allows television to be mounted with 15 degree vertical tilt and horizontal movement to allow for best patient movement. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $35 Dimensions: I See manufacturer's literature HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No See clearance requirements and suggested electrical/cabling connection location. Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G301 Waiting Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0=Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. f p '� 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 44 Report Id: 651 Northampton, Massachusetts TDDXX01 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Pay Phone Telecommunicator-TDD Spec ID: TDDXX01 Ultratec, Inc. Model: M240 Description: Vandal-resistant TDD connects to pay phone and does not interfere with standard use of phone. When receiving phone is answered by TDD, motorized drawer opens automatically to expose keyboard. Two line LCD display, 40 characters per line. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Wall - Minor Estimated Cost: $1200 Dimensions: 10.8"w x 11.3"d x 7.0"h Weight: 30.0 Lbs Electrical: 115 AC Amps: 0.8 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Requires connection to phone line. Bolts to underside of most in-door pay phone enclosures. Includes 12 VDC transformer supplying 800 mA. Dept: LB Lobby Room: G380 Telephones Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G422 Vending Alcove / Telephon Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 2 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V—Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 43 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts STILL03C Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Floor Stand for Storage Tank Spec ID: STILL03C Dimensions: I floorstand is 18"h HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8228 Mechanical Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. oo 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 42 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts STILL03 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 i Still, 10 Gallons per Hour Spec ID: STILL03 Barnstead/Thermolyne Corp. Model: A1016-D (240 V, 66 A MODEL) Part No: A1016-F (480 V. 33 A MODEL) Description: Provides 10 gallons distilled water per hour (38 liters per hour). Low water cut-off protects heating elements from burn-out when water supply is interrupted (requires separate 120 Volt power supply). Also available at: 208 Volt, 73 Amps. 3 phase (Model A10164003). Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Estimated Cost: $8821 Dimensions: I dimensions depend on mounting option Weight: 360.0 Lbs Electrical: 240 AC Amps: 66 Phase: Three HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes Floor mount: 37"w x 14"d x 89"h (94cm w x 35.6cm d x 226.1cm h). Feed water (for pretreated water stills): 3/8" NPT. Cooling water: 3/8" NPT: 80 gallons per hour (302.8 liters per hour). Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8228 Mechanical Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 Water Storage Tank. 200 Gallon (STILL03A) Barnstead/Thermolyne Corp. Model: 63049 Description: Tin-coated to protect the purity of the distilled water. Removable cover, water level sight glass, tin-coated draw off faucet with serrated hose nipple. Multiple connections provided for accessories. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Floor - Major Estimated Cost: $5778 Dimensions: 45"w x 37.9"d x 50.25"h Weight: 2000.0 Lbs HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: Yes Dimensions Outlet: 1" NPT. Dist. return: 1/4" NPT. Pump By-Pass Drain: 1" NPT. Pump Weight: 400 lbs. (181.4 kg). Optional floor stand is 18"h (STILL030. Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: B228 Mechanical Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 Floor Stand for Storage Tank (STILL030 Barnstead/Thermolyne Corp. Model: H3230 Description: Stand for 200 gallon storage tank- fabricated of steel angle-iron. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Floor - Major Estimated Cost: $700 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer O-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 41 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts STERP01 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Peroxide Plasma Sterilizer Spec ID: STERP01 Advanced Steril. Products Model: STERRAD 100 Part No: 10100 Description: Low temperature peroxide plasma sterilizer with 3.5 cubic foot chamber capacity. 75 min cycle time includes 5-20 min. vacuum phase, 6 min. injection phase. 44 min. diffusion phase. 15 min. plasma phase, and 5 min. venting phase. 28" x 17" upper shelf: 30" x 17" lower shelf. Each shelf can hold up to 55 pounds. Cycle stage and elapsed time are displayed on front panel and on print out. Articles must be enclosed in Tyvek or polypropylene packaging. System is not compatible with cloth or paper wraps. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Floor - Major Estimated Cost: $106000 Dimensions: 30"w x 40"d x 65.5"h Weight: 770.0 Lbs Electrical: 208 AC Amps: 9.9 Hertz: 60 Phase: Three Dedicated Circuit Required HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: No Unit does not require any plumbing or venting. Requires 5 wire 208 NEMA Receptacle: L21-20R. Requires 5-wire 208, 3-phase. 20-amp dedicated connection. Receptacle required to be w/i 3 meters of unit. 10' power cord provided. Requires 32" x 42" installation space with 5mm/M flat surface. 2" min distance from wall. Requires 3 feet on all sides for service access (unit can be moved away from wall for servicing). Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8213 EtO Sterilization Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D—Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 40 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts STERI25 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 OBS• Recessed Steam Sterilizer Spec ID: STERI25 AMSCO International Model: SERIES 2000 (DISCONTINUED) Part No: VACAMATIC 2033. 2043, 2053 Description: Chamber Size: 24"x 36"x 48". Pre-vacuum and gravity cycles. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $28000 Dimensions: 76"w x 74"d x 74.25"h I SEE CUTSHEETS Weight: 4725.0 Lbs Electrical: 480 AC Phase: Three HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes Consumes 320 gallons of water per hour on avg. (peak-15 gallons min). Dissipates 5000 BTU/hr in front of wall, 9600 BTU/hr behind wall. Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8212 Steam Sterilizers Qty: 2 Total Quantity: 2 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer O-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 39 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts STERE27 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Ethylene Oxide Sterilizer Spec ID: STERE27 3M Health Care Model: 8XL Description: Available in June 1995. Requires use of abater system. 7.9 cubic feet/0.7 cubic meters chamber capacity (20"/510mm w x 38"/ 966mm d x 18"460mm h). 100% ethylene oxide. On casters with screw down feet. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Countertop - Major Estimated Cost: $47250 Dimensions: 37"w x 42"d x 70"h Weight: 650.0 Lbs Electrical: 220 AC Amps: 15 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single Dedicated Circuit Required HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: No 15 AMP dedicated circuit. Power cord included with equipment. VENT LINE: Gas tight copper vent line to the outside; 0.75"/19mm outside diameter (0-100 ft/0-30.5 m). 1"/25mm outside diameter (101- 300 ft/30.6-91.5m). 0.375"/9.5mm N.P.T. female connector at machine. COMPRESSED AIR: 50 psi/3.52 kg/crm> at 7 SCFM/0.2 SCMM. Clean, dry. oil free air. 0.25"/6.4mm NPT female connector at machine. 0.5"/13mm O.D. tubing. SERVICE SPACE: 20"/508mm clearance on left side. right side & top. ROOM VENTILATION: Minimum of 10 air changes per hour in room. LOCAL EXHAUST (OPTIONAL): Requires an exhaust source of 100 CFM/2.83 CMM at 0.06"/1.5mm negative static pressure at the hood. Provide a minimum 4"1102mn sheet metal duct to the outside with the exhaust fan at the exit point. Fan must be spark proof, backward incline blade fan with the motor separate from blower. Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8213 EtO Sterilization Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E—Equipment Planner D—Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 38 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts STERE24 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 EtO Gas Sterilizer � Spec ID: STERE24 3M Health Care Model: 4XL Description: Chamber dimensions: 18"w x 24"d x 16"h (460mm w x 610mm d x 410mm h). With door fully open, front-to-back is 56.5" (1435mm). Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $27825 Dimensions: 30"w x 27.25"d x 27.5"h Electrical: 220 AC Amps: 15 Hertz: 50 Phase: single Dedicated Circuit Required HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: No Leveling feet must be installed and base of unit must not be blocked so unit can circulate air over the electrical components drawing air in through the base of the cabinet. Requires 15 AMP circuit. Power cord included with equipment. VENT LINE: Gas tight copper vent line to the outside: 0.75"/19mm outside diameter (0-100 ft/0-30.5 m). 1"/25mm outside diameter (101- 300ft/30.6-91.5 m). 0.375"/9.5mm N.P.T. female connector at machine. COMPRESSED AIR: 50 psi/3.52 kg/crm> at 7 SCFM/0.2 SCMM. Clean, dry, oil free air. 0.25"/6.4mm NPT female connector at machine. 0.5"/13mm O.D. tubing. SERVICE SPACE: 20"/508mm clearance on left side, right side & top. ROOM VENTILATION: Minimum of 10 air changes per hour in room. LOCAL EXHAUST (OPTIONAL): Requires an exhaust source of 100CFM/2.83 ChM at 0.06"/1.5mm negative static pressure at the hood. Provide a minimum 4"/102mm sheet metal duct to the outside with the exhaust fan at the exit point. Fan must be spark proof, backward incline blade fan with the motor separate from blower. CONSULT THE 3M INSTALLATION GUIDE, INCLUDED IN THE CUT-SHEET BOOK Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8213 EtO Sterilization Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 37 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts STERE23 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 EtO Aerator Spec ID: STERE23 3M Health Care Model: MODEL XL Description: Chamber dimensions are 18"w x 33"d x 16"h, diagonal 40". Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $6825 Dimensions: 30.5"w x 36.5"d x 24.5"h Weight: 225.0 Lbs Electrical: 230 Amps: 15 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: No Requires a 3" diameter exhausting duct: Requires 20" clearance on both sides and front of unit for service access. Vents either directly outside, or to emission control system. Check local code Inside diameter of vent line must be a minimum of 4" in diameter. Inside diameter of branch vent lines must be a minimum of 3" in diam. Static pressure measured at any aerator branch line must be negative at all times: This pressure must be between -1.3mm and -7.6mm of water when the unit is operating. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE. Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: B213 EtO Sterilization Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E—Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. m� 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 36 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts SHELM36 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Wall-Mounted Wire Shelving Spec ID: SHELM36 InterMetro Industries Corp. Model: 12WB3C, 1236C, 1236C Description: Mount consists of two shelf supports and mounting brackets. Bolts or screws not included- select according to wall type. Order shelves separately (36"w specified; 24". 30". 42". 48", 60" also available). Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Minor Estimated Cost: $44 Dimensions: 36"w x 12"d x 20.8"h HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: EN Environmental Services Room: 8225 Housekeeping (in CSS Deco Qty: 1 Dept: EN Environmental Services Room: 6243 Housekeeping Closet (in C Qty: 1 Dept: EN Environmental Services Room: G027 Housekeeping (in SameDay Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 3 E=Equipment Planner D=Interior Designer O-Nner C=Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 35 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts RACKX01 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 X-Ray Film Rack Spec ID: RACKXOI Peter Pepper Products Model: 13118P Description: Steel back panel: clear acrylic front panel. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Minor Estimated Cost: $47 Dimensions: 19.5"w x 1.5"d x 17"h Weight: 7.0 Lbs HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G043 Minor Surgery ("Lump & Bu Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G044 Exam Treatment- Laser Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G045 Exam Treatment- Pain Cont Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G057 Exam Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 4 E=Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V—Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. QR 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 34 Report Id: 651 Northampton. Massachusetts RACKC01 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Crutch Rack Spec ID: RACKC01 Bailey Manufacturing Company Model: 790 Description: Rack stores 30 pair crutches and 10 canes. Made of ash hardwood. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $192 Dimensions: 60"w x 15.5"d x 17"h Weight: 24.0 Lbs HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Estimated weight loaded with 60 crutches & 10 canes is 250 lbs. Reinforce wall. Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G055 Clean Utility Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 33 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts PEGBDOI Planning Project 200D Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Stainless Steel Pegboard Spec ID: PEGBDOI Jamestown Metal Products. Inc. Description: 14-gauge type 304 stainless steel pegboard with holes on 1" centers (2.54cm). Finished smooth. Includes wall bracket. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $2000 Dimensions: 84"w x 1"d x 48"h HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No 6"w zee clips mounted to wall: pegboard rests over clips. Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G088 Storage Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E=Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. a� r it JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 32 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts PASST01 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Pass-Through Assembly Spec ID: PASST01 AMSCO International Description: Set-Down Counter: stainless steel. receives and holds items manually cleaned. For installation through building wall. Pass-Through Window: 1/4" tempered safety glass. Rack-Return Doors: double-pan construction on spring-loaded hinges. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $4560 HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8227 Decontamination Soiled Wo Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E—Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owmer C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 31 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts MOUNT02 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Television Mounting Bracket Spec ID: MOUNT02 Lucasey Manufacturing Corp. Model: LOCKING DOUBLE STUD WALL MOUNT Part No: DSWP6100 Description: For 20" wide televisions. Black wrinkle finish. Swivel platform tilts 7 degrees. 120 lb load limit. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $166 HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-218 On-Call Room Qty: 6 Dup Rooms: 1-219 1-233 1-234 1-235 1-238 Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-224 Child Play Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: GO11 Prep/Recovery Area #4 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G012 Prep/Recovery Area #5 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G013 Prep/Recovery Area #6 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G015 Prep/Recovery Area #7 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G018 Prep/Recovery Area #8 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G020 Prep/Recovery Area #9 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G064 Prep/Recovery Area #15 Qty: 1 pppt: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G066 Prep/Recovery Area #14 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G076 Prep/Recovery Area #13 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G078 Prep/Recovery Area #12 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G079 Prep/Recovery Area #10 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G082 Prep/Recovery Area #11 Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G302 Pediatric Waiting Qty: 1 Dept: CP Cardio-Pulmonary Test & R Room: G388 Exercise Area/Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 21 Bracket for VCR's 14-20"w. 6"h (MOUNT02B) Lucasey Manufacturing Corp. Model: AVDS1420 Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $42 HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-224 Child Play Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G302 Pediatric Waiting Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 2 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 30 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts MOUNT01A Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 �. Monitor Mount Spec ID: MOUNTOlA HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-263A Focused Care Qty: 2 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: GO10 Holding Cubicles 1 - 3 Qty: 3 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G011 Prep/Recovery Area #4 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G012 Prep/Recovery Area #5 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G013 Prep/Recovery Area #6 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G015 Prep/Recovery Area #7 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G018 Prep/Recovery Area #8 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G020 Prep/Recovery Area #9 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G038 Endoscopy Room qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G041 Endoscopy Room Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G043 Minor Surgery ("Lump & Bu Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G044 Exam Treatment- Laser Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: 6045 Exam Treatment- Pain Cont Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G064 Prep/Recovery Area #15 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G066 Prep/Recovery Area #14 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G076 Prep/Recovery Area #13 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G079 Prep/Recovery Area #10 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G082 Prep/Recovery Area #11 Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 21 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-0wner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 29 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts MOUNT01 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Monitor Mount Allowance Spec ID: MOUNT01 GCX Corporation Model: POLYMOUNT Description: Maximum load rating is 80 lbs (35.2kg). Includes wall channel, arm and monitor mounting plate. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $0 HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Allow 14" lateral clearance from centerline of mount for positioning of monitor. Suggest reinforcing wall to accomodate 200 lbs. in case patient or visitors hold onto arm. Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-263A focused Care Qty: 2 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G010 Holding Cubicles 1 - 3 Qty: 3 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G011 Prep/Recovery Area #4 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room:.GO12 Prep/Recovery Area #5 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G013 Prep/Recovery Area #6 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G015 Prep/Recovery Area #7 Qty: i Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G018 Prep/Recovery Area #8 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G020 Prep/Recovery Area #9 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G038 Endoscopy Room Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G041 Endoscopy Room Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G043 Minor Surgery ("Lump & Bu Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G044 Exam Treatment- Laser Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G045 Exam Treatment- Pain Cont Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day - Room: G064 Prep/Recovery Area #15 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G066 Prep/Recovery Area #14 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G076 Prep/Recovery Area #13 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G079 Prep/Recovery Area #10 Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G082 Prep/Recovery Area #11 Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 21 Monitor Mount (MOUNT01A) GCX Corporation Model: POLYMOUNT Description: Includes 31"h wall channel (tall enough to accommodate two monitors). 15" support arm and 14.25"-17.25" mounting plate. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $185 Dimensions: 18"w x 15"d x 31"h E—Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 28 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts MONIT85 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Patient Monitoring System Spec ID: MONIT85 Hewlett-Packard Med. Products Model: OMNICARE 24 MONITORING SYSTEM Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: V Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Countertop - Minor Estimated Cost: $0 HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Monitor Wall Mount (MONIT85C) Hewlett-Packard Med. Products Model: M1180A Description: Uses an adaptor pan to allow the HP M1205A to be used with a standard wall mount. Includes pole mount for plug-in rack and wall channel. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $495 Dimensions: ]see cut-sheets HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G061 Treatment # 3 - Cardiac/T Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G280 Fast Track Treatment Room Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G281 Fast Track Treatment Room Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G292 Treatment # 2 Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: 6294 Treatment # 8 Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G295 Treatment # 7 Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G296 Treatment # 6- GYN Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 7 E=Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0- weer C=Contractor V=Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 27 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts LIGSUI4 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Surgical Light, Dual 22" Heads Spec ID: LIGSUI4 Berchtold Corporation Model: CHROMOPHARE C571/571D, CFWP Part No: CD-834-5704 Description: Xenon/halogen bulbs produce 145.000 lux illuminance at 4500 degrees K. Built-in back-up reserve bulb. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Ceiling Estimated Cost: $22150 Dimensions: 1 5.8' swivel radius: 3.9' h adj arm Weight: 209.0 Lbs Electrical: 110 AC Watts: 220 VA Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Ceiling load (torque): 278 Nm/lighthead x 2 lightheads Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-243 C-Section Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C—Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. q5 r, 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 26 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts LIGMP04 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Single Ceiling Procedure Light Spec ID: LIGMP04 MDT Biologic Company Model: 2410C Description: On/Off switch located on yoke of lamphead. 150W quartz halogen lamp provides 4000 footcandles at 36", color corrected to 4800 degrees K. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Ceiling Estimated Cost: $2200 Dimensions: JSwings through 4'4" radius. 3' vertica Weight: 30.0 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Amps: 1.25 Watts: 150 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Required ceiling height: 8' - 12'. Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G275 Fast Track Treatment Room Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G276 Fast Track Treatment Room Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G278 Fast Track Treatment Room Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G279 Fast Track Treatment Room Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G280 Fast Track Treatment Room Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G281 Fast Track Treatment Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 6 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 25 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts LIGMP03 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Minor Procedure Light, 2-Head Spec ID: LIGHP03 MDT-Biologic Company Model: TWIN REFLECTOR LIGHTING SYSTEM Part No: 2420C Description: On/Off switch located on yoke of lamphead. 150W quartz halogen lamp provides 4000 footcandles at 36 color corrected to 4800 degrees K. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Ceiling Estimated Cost: $3000 Dimensions: 1 60" radius Weight: 42.0 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Amps: 2.5 Watts: 300 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G043 M' or Surgery ("Lump & Bu Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G044 Exam Treatment- Laser Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G045 Exam Treatment- Pain Cont Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G061 Treatment # 3 - Cardiac/T Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G291 Treatment # 1 ENT Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G292 Treatment # 2 Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G294 Treatment # 8 Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G295 Treatment # 7 Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G296 Treatment # 6- GYN Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G420 Eye Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 10 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. �3 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 24 Report Id: 651 Northampton, Massachusetts ILLUXO1 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 1-Panel X-Ray Film Illuminator Spec ID: ILLUX01 Wolf X-Ray Corporation Model: MG-7 Part No: 21104 Description: Roller-grip film retainer: 2-15W lamps: suitable for countertop use. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Minor Estimated Cost: $157 Dimensions: 14.1"w x 5"d x 18.1"h Weight: 14.0 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Watts: 50 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G308 Office- ED Director Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D=Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 23 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts ILLUM82 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Mammography film Illuminator Spec ID: ILLUM82 Maxant/Buckingham div. Eleco Model: MAMMO-LUME Part No: MM-101S Description: Surface-mounted illuminator for simultaneous,viewing of four 18 x 24cm mammography films. Use for verifying proper density of processed films. Keyhole cutouts for simplified surface wall mounting. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $360 Dimensions: 30.1"w x 11"d x 3.9"h Weight: 25.0 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G084 Radiology Viewing Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E—Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V—Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 22 Report Id: 851 Northampton. Massachusetts ILLUM67 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 6-Over-6 Surface Illuminator Spec ID: ILLUM67 S & S X-Ray Products Inc. Model: STREAMLINER III Part No: 143036 Description: Film actuated switching. White baked enamel finish. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $3444 Dimensions: 86"w x 3.13"d x 44"h Weight: 246.0 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Amps: 12.7 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: No Dissipates approximately 1800 BTU/hr to ambient. Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G084 Radiology viewing Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. ow** 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 21 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts ILLUM57 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 4-Panel Surface Illuminator Spec ID: ILLUM57 - S & S X-Ray Products Inc. Model: DELUXE 470 SERIES Part No: 106140 Description: Interiors, backs and sides are finished in white baked on enamel. Fronts are polished stainless steel. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $1212 Dimensions: 56.75"w x 3.2"d x 21.5"h Weight: 100.0 Lbs Electrical: 118 AC Amps: 4.3 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G038 Endoscopy Room Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G041 Endoscopy Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 2 Automatic Switching (ILLUM57A) S & S X-Ray Products Inc. Model: 199A Description: Turns ,iewing panel on when film is inserted into film grip and off when film is removed. Includes flicker free instant start ballast. One per panel. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $70 HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept; SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G038 Endoscopy Room Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G041 Endoscopy Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 2 E—Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer O-Owner C-Contractor V—Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 20 Report Id: 851 Northampton, Massachusetts ILLUM20 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 2-Panel Surface Illuminator Spec ID: ILLUM20 S & S X-Ray Products Inc. Model: STREAMLINER III Part No: 143002 Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: 8499 Dimensions: 28"w x 3.13"d x 22"h Weight: 43.0 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Amps: 2.1 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Mount with midline of viewing panel at eye level: 44" above finished floor (AFF) for seated viewing. 64" AFF for standing viewing. 96" (8 ft.) long power cord with standard NEMA 5-15P plug. Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G044 Exam Treatment- Laser Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G045 Exam Treatment- Pain Cont Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G057 Exam Room Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G061 Treatment # 3 - Cardiac/T Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G287 Alcove Qty: 1 Dept: OH Occupational Health Room: G321 Corridor Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 6 Hospital Grade Plug (ILLUM20A) S & S X-Ray Products Inc. Model: 140281 Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $24 HVAC'Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G044 Exam Treatment- Laser Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G045 Exam Treatment- Pain Cont Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G057 Exam Room Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G061 Treatment # 3 - Cardiac/T Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G287 Alcove Qty: I Dept: OH Occupational Health Room: G321 Corridor Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 6 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 19 Report Id: 851 Northampton, Massachusetts ILLUM03 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Recessed 2-Panel X-Ray Illum. Spec ID: ILLUM03 S & S X-Ray Products Inc. Model: 242ST 200 SERIES Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 - Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $585 Dimensions: 31.25"l x 4.82"d x 19"h Weight: 42.0 Lbs Electrical: 118 AC Amps: 2.2 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-243 C-Section Qty: 1 Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-263A Focused Care Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G043 Minor Surgery ("Lump & Bu Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 3 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C=Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. q7 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 18 Report Id: 651 Northampton. Massachusetts ILLUMOI Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 ■+ 1-Panel Surface Illuminator Spec ID: ILLUM01 Picker International, Inc. Model: FVS ILLUMINATOR ONE SECTION Part No: 251001 Description: Four 15W bulbs yield 900 footcandles at viewing surface. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $224 Dimensions: 14.5"w x 6.44"d x 19.5"h Weight: 21.0 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Amps: 1.2 Watts: 60 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No For standing viewing, place top of illuminator 6' (183cm) AFF. Dept: CP Cardio-Pulmonary Test & R Room: G405 Echocardiography Testing Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 1.8m Line Cord &Polarized Plug (ILLUM01A) Picker International. Inc. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $0 HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: CP Cardio-Pulmonary Test & R Room: G405 Echocardiography Testing Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D—Interior Designer O-Owner C=Contractor V=Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 17 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts ICEMA28 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Icemaker / Dispenser Spec ID: ICEMA28 Hoshizaki America. Inc. Model: DCM-240-BAA Description: Up to 225 pounds ice production in 24 hours. 9 pounds storage cap. Produces cubelets: approx 112" cubed. Stainless steel internal auger. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Countertop - Major Estimated Cost: $3970 Dimensions: 16.5"w x 22"d x 31.5"h Weight: 170.0 Lbs Electrical: 115 AC Amps: 5.8 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes Minimum circuit ampacity: 15 A. Refrigerant: R-12. See cutsheets for plumbing requirements. Water pressure: 7-113 prig. Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-306 Corridor - by LDR's Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G424 Work Area Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 2 E-Equipment Planner D=Interior Designer 0—Owner C-Contractor V—Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 16 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts ICEMA08 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Icemaker / Dispenser Spec ID: ICEMA08 Scotsman Model: NUGGET ICE MAKER/DISPENSER Part No: NDE550AE-IA Description: Air cooled. Integral 25 pound capacity bin. Sandalwood finish. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $2988 Dimensions: 26"w x 22.5"d x 41"h Weight: 267.0 Lbs Electrical: 115 AC Amps: 20 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single Dedicated Circuit Required HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes See manufacturer's literature for planning information. Provide 6" minimum clearance at back for ventilation and utility connections. Requires 3/8" flare potable water inlet connection, and 3/4" F.P.T. Hardwire to service. Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-256 Nourishment Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G030 Nourishment Area Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G288 Alcove / Nourishment Area Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 3 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. �"'*, 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 15 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts HEADW22 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Two-Rail Headwall Spec ID: HEADW22 Hill-Rom Model: HORIZON Description: Suitable for emergency department or same day pre-op/recovery. This system will include, mounting brackets for IV poles, sphygmoma- nometer, standard gas outlets, electrical outlets, suction, and baskets for storage of supplies. This is a 2 rail system. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $4500 Electrical: 120 AC Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: GO10 Holding Cubicles 1 3 Qty: 3 Total Quantity: 3 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer O-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. R1 : 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 14 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts GUNST01 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architectt Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Steam Gun Spec ID: GUNST01 MDT Biologic Company Model: 7510 Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $2500 HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: Yes Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8224 Equipment Cleaning Area Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D=Interior Designer 0-09ner C=Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. { 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 13 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts ETOAL03 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Ethylene Oxide Monitor Alarm Spec ID: ETOAL03 MSA Instrument Division Model: EtOx I Part No: 803011 Description: - Continuous monitoring of EtO in a range of 0-85 ppm at a resolution of 1 ppm. Strip chart recorder output. RS232 output connector, open relay contact. Audible and visual alarms can be manually set. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $3150 Dimensions: 12.4"w x 5"d x 11.9"h Weight: 7.8 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Hertz: 50-60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8213 EtO Sterilization Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 12 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts DIAPE01 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Diaper Changing Station Spec ID: DIAPE01 JBJ Industries. Inc. Model: KOALA BEAR KARE BABY CHANGING Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $215 Dimensions: 22"w x 36"h 15"d closed, 40"d opened HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-307 Public Toilet Qty: 2 Dup Rooms: 1-308 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G056 Public Toilet Qty: 1 Dept: EM Emergency Department Room: G063 Public Toilet Qty: 1 Dept: SP Specimen / Pre-Procedure Room: G335 Toilet - Patient Qty: 3 Dup Rooms: G-332 G-344 Dept: LB Lobby Room: G384 Public Toilet Qty: 2 Dup Rooms: G385 Total Quantity: 9 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 11 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts DESKW02 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Wall Desk Spec ID: DESKW02 Carstens Health Industries Inc Model: WALLAR00 4631 (GREY) Description: Writing surface: 18" x 25.5••. Hold up to 50 lbs. Built in key lock. All steel construction. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $274 Dimensions: 27••w x 4.5•'d x 22.25'•h Weight: 36.0 Lbs HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-227 Exam / Consult Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 10 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts COFFEI5 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Coffeemaker, Plumbed-In Spec ID: COFFE15 Bloomfield Industries Model: INTEGRITY Part No: 9012 Description: Automatic 3-station brewer with hot water tap includes line strainer, brew basket, cord and plug. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 2 Position: Countertop - Major Estimated Cost: $882 Dimensions: 8.6"w x 18"d x 18.8"h Electrical: 120 AC Amps: 15 Watts: 1800 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes Requires connection to source of potable cold water. NEMA 5-15R receptacle. Allow 9" clearance above for carafes on upper warming plates. Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-256 Nourishment Qty: 1 Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: B210 Lounge / Conference Area Qty: 1 Dept: RC Respiratory Care Room: 8239 Nourishment Alcove Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G029 Staff Lounge Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G030 Nourishment Area Qty: 1 Dept: SP Specimen / Pre-Procedure Room: G330 Staff Lockers / Lounge Qty: 1 Dept: CP Cardio-Pulmonary Test & R Room: G408 Staff Lockers/Lounge Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 7 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer O-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. ,,,, 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 9 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts COFFEI3 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Brewer, Plumbed•In, 5 Warmers Spec ID: COFFE13 Bunn-O-Matic Corporation Model: BUNN-OMATIC Part No: RL35 Description: 5 warmers total: 1 "high, med, low" warmer capable of boiling water. Plumbed-in, maintains accurate flow rate regardless of water pressure. Can also be used like pour-over coffeemaker if necessary. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $1130 Dimensions: 24"w x 18.5"d x 23.8"h Weight: 45.0 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Watts: 4605 total Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes Three-wire, single phase. Requires 20 amp. wiring. 114" copper line attaches to flare fitting on flow/control strainer assembly. Water pressure should be 20 to 50 psi: install a regulator on the line if pressure is greater than 90 psi to reduce it to 50 psi. Dept: CO Coffee Shop Room: G376A Coffee Shop- Food Prep Ar Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer O-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 8 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts CLEAS02 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Sonic Cleaner Cabinet Spec ID: CLEAS02 AMSCO International Model: CABINET MODEL Description: Single cleaning chamber without rinsing or drying capability. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $14550 Dimensions: 30"w x 24"d x 46"h Weight: 425.0 Lbs Electrical: 240 Amps: 20 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes Requires 112" NPT cold water connection, 30-50 psig. Requires 112" NPT hot water connection. 30-60 prig. 140 degrees fahrenheit minimum. Requires 1" ID drain connection. Requires 112" NPT purified water connection, gravity flow to pump inlet if optional purfied water rinsing system is specified. Requires 240 Volt, single phase. 3-wire service with neutral + ground connections. Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8227 Decontamination Soiled Wo- Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E=Equipment Planner D=Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V=Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 7 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts CLEAE06A Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Stand for Steris Spec ID: CLEAE06A HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Total space requirements: 45.5"w x 31"d x 68.4"h. 45.5"w with side-mounted pre-filter assembly and operator manual bin. 49.4"h cart and processor together. Add 19" overhead clearance. Operating weight (cart and processor): 375 lbs. (170 kg). NOMINAL CART DIMENSIONS. CART CAN BE DESIGNED TO CUSTOM DIMENSIONS. Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G040 Sub Sterile Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer O-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 6 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts CLEAE06 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 � Endoscope Washer/Disinfector Spec ID: CLEAE06 Steris Corporation Model: SYSTEM 1 PROCESSOR Part No: P1000-20 Description: Peroxyacetic acid sterilization system has 20 minute average cycle. Straight instruments may be transported in case for immediate use to guarantee sterility. The flexible scope processing tray is NOT for transport. Includes one case of sterile concentrate. 5 rolls of printer paper, and filters. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $16200 Dimensions: 32"w x 24"d x 15"h Weight: 85.0 Lbs Electrical: 120 AC Amps: 15 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single Dedicated Circuit Required HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: Yes Locate within 5' of all utility services & 18" away from sink. Requires counter space of 38"w x 24"d x 32"h. Stand-mounted prefilter assembly requires 18"w x 19.5"h with 10" clearance at bottom to allow filter changes. Continuous negative gradient to sink or standpipe drain must be maintained. No hazardous fumes: no special venting req. Potable hot water source with 3/4"male hose connector & quick shut-off valve. Minimum water line size is 3/4" ID minimum: minimum flow rate 4 GPM (15 LPM): pressure 40 - 50 PSI (276-345 KPA): 110 - 118 degrees F (43 - 48 degrees C). Requires GFI-protected hosp grade 20A outlet. NEMA 5-20R receptacle. Locate eyewash and sink in close proximity: concentrated acid must be loaded into the processor. Requires 32" clearance from top of unit. SEE CUT SHEETS. IN CASE OF DISCREPANCIES. STERIS DOCUMENTS ARE AUTHORITATIVE. Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G040 Sub Sterile Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 Stand for Steris (CLEAE06A) Steris Corporation Model: A1900 Description: For easy-access storage of Steris accessories and supplies. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $2795 Dimensions: 36.5"w x 31"d x 36.4"h Weight: 225.0 Lbs E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. a. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 5 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts CABOR06 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston. Massachusetts Project No: 2980 i OR Storage Cabinet. Recessed Spec ID: CABOR06 Blickman Health Industries Inc Model: OPERATING ROOM CONSOLE "ORC" Part No: ES-47 Description: Three solid stainless steel shelves. adjustable on 112" centers. Two glass hinged doors of double shell design. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $1321 Dimensions: 47"w x 18"d x 60"h Weight: 255.0 Lbs HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-243 C-Section Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D=Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 4 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts CABOR05 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 OR Cabinet, Table Accessories Spec ID: CABOR05 Blickman Health Industries Inc Model: OPERATING ROOM CONSOLE "ORC" Part No: TA-35 Description: Pegboard interior (back and side panels: 1/4" masonite pegboard). Solid. double pan doors. Inner door panels have stainless steel channel brackets for holding three removable and adjustable hooks. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $1168 Dimensions: 35"w x 18"d x 60"h Weight: 250.0 Lbs HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: WO Women's Center (Maternity Room: 1-243 C-Section Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 E-Equipment Planner D—Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 3 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts CABOH02 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Overhead Storage Cabinet Spec ID: CABOH02 Manufacturer Unknown Model: STEELCASE SERIES 9000 9BBL6015 Part_ No: TYPICAL Description: Two flipper-type doors with locks. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: D Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Major Estimated Cost: $342 Dimensions: 60"w x 14.9"d x 16.7"h HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G051 Entry/Reception Qty: 2 Total Quantity: 2 E—Equipment Planner D=Interior Designer 0-Owner C—Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 2 Report Id: B51 Northampton, Massachusetts CABEN50 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Endoscope Hanger, Double Spec ID: CABEN50 Olympus Med. Instruments Div Model: DOUBLE HANGER Part No: 55440 Description: For Olympus DES and pre-OES gastroscopes, duodenoscopes, colonoscopes, or EVIS scopes. Supplied with built-in lock and two keys. Secures both scope body and umbilical cord. Constructed of molded plastic. Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 3 Position: Wall - Minor Estimated Cost: $215 Dimensions: 17.5"w x 6.5"d x 5.5"h Weight: 1.0 Lbs HVAC Considerations: No Plumbing Required: No Recommended mounting: 54" to 60" AFF- depends on user preferences. Fastens to wall with screws. Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G038 Endoscopy Room Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G039 Endo Work (Pre-Steris Was Qty: 1 Dept: SS Same/Surgical Day Room: G041 Endoscopy Room Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 3 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 1 Report Id: B51 Northampton. Massachusetts ABATE01 Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 ETD Emission Abater Spec ID: ABATE01 3M Health Care Model: DONALDSON CORPORATION, WORKS Part No: W1 3M TO DEVELOP FOR 4.5.8XL Responsibility Codes: Provide: 0 Install: C Specify: E Accept: 0 Group Code: 1 Position: Major Installation Estimated Cost: $15350 Electrical: 220 AC Amps: 40 Hertz: 60 Phase: Single Dedicated Circuit Required HVAC Considerations: Yes Plumbing Required: No See manufacturer's literature for site planning information. Requires safety vent line connection, a positive or negative exhaust connection (See arrangements 1 and 2 in installation manual). 3M ETD sterilizer must be vented to abator. Provide 36" above. 20" on right. 20" in front, and 4" on left side for service clearance. Dept: CS Central Sterile Supply Room: 8213 EtO Sterilization Qty: 1 Total Quantity: 1 I E—Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. 11 JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Page: 2 Report Id: B51-I Northampton. Massachusetts Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Equipment in Project Index Equip ID Equipment Name Drawing No Page No -------- ---------------------------------------- --------------- ----- STERI25 OBS- Recessed Steam Sterilizer 40 STERPOI Peroxide Plasma Sterilizer 41 STILL03 Still, 10 Gallons per Hour 42 STILL03C Floor Stand for Storage Tank 43 TDDXXOI Pay Phone Telecommunicator-TOD 44 TELEV03 20" Patient Television 45 TENTA04 Aerosol Treatment Chamber 46 WARMB15 Warming Cabinet 47 WASHD08 Washer / Disinfector 48 WASHD08B Spindle Rack 49 WASHDI3 Dishwaher, High Capacity 5O WASHD20 Two-Door Pass-Thru Washer 51 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. I JUN 1996 Cooley Dickinson Hospital Report Id: B51-I Northampton, Massachusetts Planning Project 2000 Shepley Bulfinch Richardson and Abbott Architects Boston, Massachusetts Project No: 2980 Equipment in Project Index Extract Criteria Departments: [ALL ] Vendor: ALL Provider Code: 0 Installer Code: C r Equip ID Equipment Name Drawing No Nage No -------- ---------------------------------------- --------------- ----- ABATE01 ETD Emission Abater 1 CABEN50 Endoscope Hanger. Double 2 CABOH02 Overhead Storage Cabinet 3 CABOR05 OR Cabinet. Table Accessories 4 CABOR06 OR Storage Cabinet. Recessed 5 CLEAE06 Endoscope Washer/Disinfector 6 CLEAE06A Stand for Steris 7 CLEAS02 Sonic Cleaner Cabinet 8 COFFEI3 Brewer. Plumbed-In, 5 Warmers 9 COFFEI5 Coffeemaker. Plumbed-In 10 DESKW02 Wall Desk 11 DIAPE01 Diaper Changing Station 12 ETOAL03 Ethylene Oxide Monitor Alarm 13 GUNST01 Steam Gun 14 HEADW22 Two-Rail Headwall 15 ICEMA08 Icemaker / Dispenser 16 ICEM428 Icemaker / Dispenser 17 ILLUM01 1-Panel Surface Illuminator 18 ILLUM03 Recessed 2-Panel X-Ray Illum. 19 ILLUM20 2-Panel Surface Illuminator 20 ILLUM57 4-Panel Surface Illuminator 21 _ ILLUM67 6-Over-6 Surface Illuminator 22 ILLUM82 Mammography Film Illuminator 23 ILLUX01 1-Panel X-Ray Film Illuminator 24 LIGMP03 Minor Procedure Light. 2-Head 25 LIGMP04 Single Ceiling Procedure Light 26 LIGSUI4 Surgical Light. Dual 22" Heads 27 MONIT85 Patient Monitoring System 28 MOUNT01 Monitor Mount Allowance 29 MOUNTOlA Monitor Mount 30 MOUNT02 Television Mounting Bracket 31 PASST01 Pass-Through Assembly 32 PEGBO01 Stainless Steel Pegboard 33 RACKC01 Crutch Rack 34 RACKX01 X-Ray Film Rack 35 SHELM36 Wall-Mounted Wire Shelving 36 STERE23 EtO Aerator 37 STERE24 EtO Gas Sterilizer 38 STERE27 Ethylene Oxide Sterilizer 39 E-Equipment Planner D-Interior Designer 0-Owner C-Contractor V-Vendor Korbel Associates Inc. r7 l 2980 SECTION 11005 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The following fifty-one (51) pages comprise the Equipment Schedule for the project . The schedule, dated 11 June 1996, was prepared by Korbel Associates, Inc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) q , EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 11005-1 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Install items specified in this section, where indicated or scheduled or if quantities are given, where directed by Architect . Install items in strict accordance with the manufacturer' s installation instructions . END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10990-2 2980 SECTION 10990 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this section includes : 1 . Rubber bumper rails and protective wall coverings . 2 . Specimen pass-through cabinets. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. 1. 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer' s product data and installation instructions for each item specified in this section. B. Submit color samples of finish materials where a color choice is specified, for Architect ' s color selection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 RUBBER BUMPER RAILS A. Rubber Bumper Rails: Model No. E-1 by Pawling Rubber Company or Afco No. CG-2237 by American Floor Products Company, where indicated. 2 .02 SPECIMEN PASS-THROUGH CABINETS A. Specimen pass-through cabinet fabricated of Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish, welded construction with seamless corners and burr-free edges, self- closing doors, stainless steel piano hinges, and chrome plated knobs. Interlock mechanism shall prevent both doors from being open at the same time. B. Product: Model 9813, Specimen Pass-Thru Cabinets as manufactured by Bradley Corp. or equal. OW Q6" MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10990-1 6 rn > 'v d c a C Y cr Q w W 6,L s oti d's ss ss Pd" sy 6 N Lo N n N N N N Z"O� J \04 r co UJ to � o � r •- Ur r N o N BA O Q v �d r T m Mg 1TI Mo --- N cn U a�, N U (p, Q s� a� ab r co Os ur co PG r � O J rn Q c O F— N Ch rn p m O m w E• L a m L y m ` O x Q ~ w a $ E O C d Z y «_. U O m r N V z W co C 0 � — �' O 7 C � m N l6 m cc .mC I— rn Y m oC o -� m c� LL ►- m 3 • m cm m m u cmcn wa mC to ca >, mw E mmm 3 Z C7 Q c v cm 0 m m m � o O 3 � o m �a ¢` cc o °' w U* o Y y w m m m c o o cC °' m m m to a () w . '8 0 r c0 � ctl � L � � O 7 C � V � m O O in Lp `—� m 0 C c0 cm cm 0 c0 � to r a Q � � a' mwiw � c� i.° w3 � � icitn0 �nOIrrL > nwin > i= � � oaC y w cp p a cow v cor• aornorNCOItLO ao w O� Oni O�i 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O r r r' � r r r r N N N N N N O mc� co0vvvvva aavvva vvvvvvvvvvvvv W O � ZC 7C 7UC7C 70007C7C7C7C7aC7C7C7C7C7C7 UC'30007C7C7C7UU' aC7C7C7 x U 0 0 � Cl) rM °C i c a Y cc W [L 6,y s oti — �'s ss ss 6J s r N N O c0 N LU ui U) C✓0 D �!y la, 6�u } Q to N N r Cl) jo w a2 V V se Q s� a� boa db, r r r os �a N r r r O U N z O a � o o OL m a L N C C x A o o m C d D u U. g " z lU to y V co y O C.O L N .2 U N w m x c cm vii o 0 d ° o c 3 �'3 •c 0 � c 3 > > O c U cm =0 / m N m N •� N N N > 47 ... I m c L C an d Q. Q) � V ` m CA Q. l0 O p p p p N QS Of p l0 O p 0 0 c0 l0 C G O X O) 0 0 'p O N O CD A cc U O o 5 c c o c C > a a C7 in U cn cn Q �- in CL H H o in w cn a in f- U w W rn o r N tp m n OD O O r N m m �p Op ai O r N CO v too n ao m o N m a a a (O <D n h n n N CO OD w OD m W O U) to m m co m m n n n n m ao ao m rn m rn rn rn o, 0 8 Z m m m m m m m m m CO) cn c+> m CO m m m m m m C? M m m M M cn m m m m m m m C? m m W C7 C7 C7 C'3 C7 C7 C7 C7 0 0 0 0 U' 0 U' C3 0 C7 Cf C7 C7 U' C7 C7 U' C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C'3 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 cn C, p rn 4.) M _ a � � ti c a Y w Q s b'S ss ss S`y 6� r r r A� N N r N N N N r N N N N N N N N N N a0 LLI U r r r r r N 4d Q2d r r r r r p a��' N0 OS W d2 U U 194, Q s, 9� �o En 06 r r r r W PIP r r r r r r r r r N r r r r r r r r r V �a a r r r r O L Q b l0 N N co � x Y z _ cis c cc o m x x o x A CD p- c c a c c x x ca d L o o z o 0 x W m c c c c ° o c 3 x a C ° v' a OG z w io - c ° m v f, 3 m c :3 3 3 O m > c in x O c j o o c � n~ iaa. c"oU ° o s N '� U O O � Q E z mw '3z � Y � �, n. aacnacn 2 . cn m a o $ a E w I U E m E v d m Y m E u, E Y n o a� o f a� E $ v E m v a A x o E o o 0 0 0 $ o o ° as 'o ° _o o g x ° ° o ° o0 0wz0 � 1: CA _3 � � u'� � E- � � a� 2< 6 ;n � � � 00u'� � � w � zu'� 008 w N M I co n CO 'm O r N M lu to n Co M o r N M t° to n ao Of o N m v u) t0 n ao .a N N N N N N N M M M M M co M M 0 0. O Q O M C9 M M (h (7 OV Z C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C9 C7 C7 C7 C7 C'3 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C'3 (7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 CIO > 0. c n v c cl 0.. U) Y 0: W 0= ------ ---- by oti b�S SS SS a `S' �Sy 6� r p N N N N N N V N N N N ti a� LU UJ J �iy U T 86 QC6 r r r T N �1�-1�1��1T1��1�1 W d2 U U a� Q se �o N T T T T T T r T W b T T T r T T T T T T T r T T r r T T Q 0.� Q O r b N C x z .a g O F C c a _ m Z to E c �o; «° Q x WN Gor� totmn c c —° CD m m m % Eu01 a Z w o ac * ac ac ? m r o v 0 `° `° U o m U o mo cn 45 �mm .3U � ?mmm0 as 6 , UJ o E Y m r m E E E o c E o y o m o 0 m o m s o e e 2 o 3UwcnooJoo ¢ U � �'m 910,U oc Uv o oE v U`o o a c n E ca a .W7 U(ICUD�ol 0 r• O 0) O T N M v to co N co O O T N M 't cD co OD O tT M O O D O O O Of 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O r st 10 0 t` co T N N o Z N N N N N N N N N N N N N N M M M 0 M M M M M M ch M M M M M co M M cq M M(6b (6b 3C� C7 (7C'3C7CJO16 7C7C7C7C7C7C3C'SC7C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 U' (7 C3 C7 C3 C7 C7 C4 � p rn a� U) > ^. C L Y Q Q W s oti b�S SS ss y 6� r r T N N N N r N N N N a� J xa� T Ur r r r r T r N / 9A Q N -X r r T N ov 71�71 CO) V Q S'! 9� �Oy os r x v r T r T r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r' r O oa oa a 0 N z o p tp d M N O r N CM O (a r r r r r r C c O V cm ctl z w m > > c o > > > m m > o ° m 0 x Lf)z c � m m m o m o m a a m m d v v c'�3 v v co U CD d `o a Q 2 0 m `o o fn oC W ¢ OC c cm a, m 0@ rL 0 m 0` u� cm U p c m a m = N _ m a m m a m ; cmi 3 c F- m H t- I- t- > > o o 'o m o " 0 m 0 0 0 3 m E a) 0 'o o m is m E 0 o O 'o 0 o M Cl) F- U F- a CO) a U > = U U z a w n. a 9 H n. a > 0 in c O CU u. ti F ti ti tL u. Q Q U w M m co cO o 07 O M to o r A A 0 N M s to r` � r- Go OD CD r• r- n N co CO ao ao co O N N N N N N N O O O O O O O O O O N N (b m 0 t 7 1 O O M O Z J!o 0cN a Ly a ° cU) n c Y Q w Q 6,y s oti 6�S ss ss �"s sy 6 r r r N N N N N cy LU ti °o = 6,,y C/V �••' r r r r r _I r m� Q CC 26 r r N r N o� ��������������������� W A V r V �e Q s� Oo, OS � N r r r r r r r r r V /�d a r r r r r r r r Q r r r N r Q CA Q O b 00 �Q� N z � O co Q rn m m m E x CM CD x a+ w o c c of LL CG O O 3 c m Y m m'A rZ i E c a LL c ° .�° o U m e G a U m d' c o V ° g o z aZ ®( o U o ° V o E i a E m E ° m` 0 t o o 0 0 x o m 0 0 LU m c0J Uz32inn00 w3cw � w > ° U ¢ u2 g r � 3 m�a co O O r N M V to c0 I- O 1.,Vgm) 0.700 r N M <O I� CD O O r N M LO 0 t- m W] N N N N N N N N M M M M M M M M M sf stto to �A in tO O O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C'3UC7C7C7UUC'30007C7C7UC'3C7C7U U) > M c a c 0. Y Q w W D: s oti b�S ss ss Sy T r r T r N ti dQu� "Y J r2��y W y,� Vr r r T T T r N Bd N m 9n N 01- cn W A V a, Oct s, 9� t T T T T T T T r T T r T T u V¢ T T T T O 000 N G C ! Q Q Q ! m 8 m o $ A A? `m Ea: C7 oa: at c U 0 a: ¢ E °� a: t E m m v to co n rn U m _ op z w E tLL� c ai o $ U W Lu m > > > > c > > y CL 'a = m x c o m m m e > > c CD M (00 E $ $ a°i m m m as m m U z o m 0MLL � � Y as m m � � Q $ waa as T- CCir cr a: cr U m = '� 0 o m m = $ m m o o c °—' m E �, m m d m a� v m cL aai aai aai °—' m m A ¢ o cr o 'o 'o D o c 'o .o 0 o t o E :c :c r s o o co n _ w m U0wO � Zo U = HF- 12cncn0Cncnm0w000Ucn = aaaUa f- waUa W to t0 I- OD to O T N CO T N M � to (O I- co O O r to O T N M v to fit) h co O O � .7 M M M M M M IT v �t to to M to M M to to tO co (D T N M tp p T T T T T T T O 8 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W z � a a a a ¢ m m m ao m ao m m co m ao m M M av ao M m M m M O U U U 0 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C9 C7 C7 C7 0 C7 cx„ U c Y w W 6,y s 0 b�S ss ss a `S' 6� r r r p N It co cn ti C✓O U T r 9A Q 26 T T --17717717TTFI-� Cl) a Ov W A U r v a, a s, a� N V r r T r r r N O W C) 00 N O O ca 'o V) N m 41 A R. Z O m ¢rn °Co O J m E p c m e U x c c 8 O E O O p H �e m m ca rn ca o 04 an d 16 � O � ° 0 w ° E 114 iaagc E Z w c c o O _m �° w E a m `° m w e $ x 19 z E W mt H °o °� a' � LL � 3U E � m z > > > -0 `O U a W m m Y O ®®U N N C_ C '°p O ll. m N (a .0 C O r •O N ..a tm U Q p O O E •> > •`- •Z �7 W O C3 O O Q) •CD O C '�- O m m YU YU O •� V L ` O_O O O C O m a N ° �`- � ° � O O L �O O O O O O (D dj O O d co QQQUw WfACAwOf6pmJacnco) cnJUfnF21- JJ cW (AQ2WUcoU) rn N O T N M eh In (O I- OD CA O T N M �t in co Il. CD O O r N M v O I- CO O O T N M O O O O O O O O T T T T r T r T r T N N N N N N N N N M M M cM M �J M M M MN (M N N N N /yN� /yCQ //yN�/�� N N N MN /yN� MMN N cm MN /yN� MN �C./Y� N CY /NY //yNy�� MMN MMN /yN� MNM N /yN� �N�.//�� N O M L T T T W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W rr) 6 rn > 0. c 'v G a U) Y W Q w W W s oti b�S ss ss o�S Sy — 6� _ T T T T T T T T V N ti ao J �%y = Vj� r T N N Q (PA N N N 26 r N N N (301- N N N N N N N N N Va2 r r r r r U a{ Q s� — a� led� r r r r r r r T r w OS E Q, r N r N r r N r r N r N r N r r r N r N r r N r N r r r V O' GS r r r r r r r r T r r r r r r r r r T r r r r r r Q r r p Q O 00 C CIO � R N z 0 � A vai D O D p8 E E U x xr` co O� v J 11 _ (> O 2 m •°-' 3 m m °-' o � m m m E ? m (o °-' °-' n o x r m r io r m is E r is o is $ ca is ca 7 V z E aaaaa � a o coa a aQm a a a ma CL IL �r 'fl tv O Q y` m �, M i N , m .00 m (, .E .E y m y N N l6 iA m c m � m E m c m Q m O O U m C m p ` m m p 0Ua° HiL (L yi-° m` inaa° H -cj -0i °- LLB -0i a U ooO � f°- wf°- ¢ ciF°-- �°- ¢ M et (n J—Ilc-o� lic--lo-i lco�r-.Jl 1!00. N M tt (n (O h O O O r N M sh (n (O t` O O JO r N M]lt (n (O rl CD p O O � oaococoaoaornrnrnrnrnrnrnrn0) 0) 00OOp Z N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N M M M M� , � i I �r r r r �- r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r N Ix r c a Y Q w W cr \46. s oti b�S SS SS o�S Sy — 6� T T T T V N N �p ti a0 W T T �U/ r T T T r 8A aa� N o 9� Cl) cr) aOd, N N N N N N N WdC� r r r r T T r T r V 19e a s� o� da, r r r r T r r r r W os �" b� N T T N r ±Clj — r r r T N T T r N N Cl) r N T N T N V T r T T CO r T T T r T Q r T r r r r O GQ Q 0 a N C* o z a w O Q E a Z vii U o ca x N m U C c C T c N C C c M C C C O C E > a z w a� 3 a 3 m a �` o a c o m m o m d d m n m x cis _ - z aa � c cn � a o E � YL � aaYL � !n oaaL Ea a a (A w U Q c m p m m :.D a° N m m 3 m d N m Y d Y 0 Nt°- UV� Ui°- aUOWcni ¢ cf)0 xz2z' UaO° F°- F°- zCL a.. � a°. v w W 1.1 co h co CA O r N M In Cfl f� 'T CA O r N M V to CO I� CD CA O r N M tp c0 1� CCI CA O r N .� M M M M �t t! '7 tt er d tf) tf) to lf1 lA to in In LC1 «) <O O <O CO f0 CD CO fO 4D I� I� h 0. 8 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W Z i x U Q T r r r T r T r r T r T T r r r r r T r r r T r r T T r r T r T r r T r T 0 U a ¢ i b c a Y CL Q w W s oti b�S ss ss des Sv, 6� N N N N N N N N N LUa� J ya��Y p iiy — Ur r r r r r r N (96 Q c6 r r T o 9� N 001- /V ad r r y 19! \'e 0 �Od _ cUc r r ¢ r r r O go w o a o� N z ' o E o` .a A ¢ o o a�. co n E [ m 0 `�° °' x •p ! = c m 0 Q 0 W ) ) fn U x in o°'c m o W aU S s o �ov m r o m o - ( O m ° o td rCD 0 o t U o n in m °z ai °LLJ v � v � �° ° v m m o c vio E wUU � — z CA m o 0 ° i 0 = 0 ,c 0 M a . ° ia o ° �umo0OMa 0 w OCOF- c00 c z - 000 x uO"� r N M I n (O O O O r N c9 111 CC 1� O O O r N M q lO 0 ►� O O O r N M V 0 O 0�]]O O O O O O r r r r r r r r N N N N N N N N N N m m m m M M 0.O N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Z i U r r r r r r r r r r T r r r r r r r r r r r r T r r r r r T r r r r r N CDH-JOB NO 2980 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS 15-Jul-96 ABREVIATION FINISH MODEL NO. PT SURFACE MOUNTED PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER. San Jamar T1910 TBK PT/A SURFACE MOUNTED PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER San Jamar T1900 SS SOAP SOAP DISPENSER Install only TPD SURFACE MOUNTED TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER. B-2746 G615 15"GRAB BAR. B-5507.99 15 GB18 18"GRAB BAR. B-5507.99 18 GB24 24"GRAB BAR. B-5507.99 24 GB30 30"GRAB BAR. B-5507.99 30 GB36 36"GRAB BAR. B-5507.99 36 GB42 42"GRAB BAR. B-5507.99 42 GB48 48"GRAB BAR. B-5507.99 48 GBL L-SHAPED GRAB BAR. B-5616.99 M I R MIRROR WITH STAINLESS STEEL FRAME, 18"X 48" B-290 1848 MIR/S FRAMED MIRROR WITH SHELF, 18"X 36. B-292 1836 MIR/F MIRROR WITH STAINLESS STEEL FRAME, 18"X 60" B-290 2460 MIRK MIRROR,UNFRAMED Spec. Sec. 8800 MCP MOP HOLDER B-239 34 CH COAT HOOK. "RR 925 RH ROBE HOOK B-672 SCR SHOWER CURTAIN ROD. B-6107 FS/HP FOLDING SHOWER SEAT. B-517, B-518 'MIRRORS IN PATIENT BATHS HAVE THEIR SIZES NOTED ON SCHEDULE "COAT HOOK IS RIGID RAK STAINLESS STEEL MODEL NUMBERS REFER TO BOBRICK CATALOG NUMBERS 10800 "Bulletin No 135[12/9/91] 2980 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers ' instructions, using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit . Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1 . Use tamper-proof or security type fasteners . 3 . 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items . B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels and protective coatings . 3 . 04 SCHEDULE A. The following comprises the Accessory Schedule. Except where otherwise indicated, model numbers specified are Bobrick model numbers, and are intended to indicate style and quality only, and are not to be construed as limiting competition. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-4 2980 G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. H. Fasteners : Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. 2 . 03 FABRICATION A. No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units . On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer' s name and product model number. B. Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction, without mitered corners . Hang doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when units is closed. 1. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components . 2 . Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. 3 . Provide steel anchorage plates and anchorage components for installation on building finishes . 4. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents . 5. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes which may cause electrolysis . 6 . Hot-dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices . 7 . Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 PREPARATION A. Before starting work notify Architect in writing of any conflicts detrimental to installation or operation of units. B. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage during installation of work of this section. C. Verify with Architect exact location of accessories . Q 3� TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-3 2980 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units . B. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. C. Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories by one of the following (no substitutions) : 1 . American Specialties, Inc . , Yonkers, NY. 2 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. , Clifton Park, NY. 3 . GAMCO, General Accessory Manufacturing Co. , Durant, OK. 2 .02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel : ASTM A167, AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22 gage minimum. B. Brass : Leaded and unleaded, flat products, Federal Specification QQ-B-613 ; rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges, Federal Specification QQ-B-626. C. Sheet Steel : Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A366, 20-gage minimum. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet : ASTM A527, G60 . E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro- deposited on base metal, ASTM B456, Type SC 2 . F. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class I, Quality q2, 1/4 inch thick, with silver coating, copper protective coating, and non-metallic paint coating complying with Federal Specification DD-M-411. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-2 2980 SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on drawings and schedules and includes the following: 1 . Toilet and bath accessories listed herein. 2 . Attachment hardware. 3 . Rough-in frames supplied to other sections . B. Refer to the Accessory Schedule at end of this section. 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Concrete block partitions . B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for attachment of accessories in metal stud partitions . C. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Lavatory counters . D. Section 08800 - Glazing: Unframed glass mirrors. E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Metal stud partitions . F. Division 15 - Plumbing: Plumbing fixtures . 1 .03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each toilet and bath accessory. B. Submit full-size samples of units if requested by Architect for review of design and operation. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work. C. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices in other work. 93 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-1 -Mill III 2980 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer' s printed instructions for installation. B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities . 1 . Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer' s instructions . END OF SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522-5 2980 B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying temporary strippable protective covering prior to shipping. C. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating, acid chromate-fluoride- phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below) . Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. 1 . Color: As selected by Architect . 2 . 05 STEEL CABINET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPS-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5 (white metal blast cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (pickling) . B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply manufacturer' s standard two-coat baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat . Comply with paint manufacturer' s instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 . 0 mils . 1 . Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect . Paint the following: a. Exterior of cabinet . b. Interior of cabinet . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine rough-in for hose vales, hose racks, and cabinets to verify locations of piping connections prior to cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify cabinet depth and mounting prior to cabinet installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES ` 10522-4 2980 D. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions : 1 . Semirecessed: Cabinet box (tub) partially recessed in walls of shallow depth. E. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1 . Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend) . a. Rolled-edge trim with 1-1/4-inch backbend depth. b. Trim Metal : Enameled steel . F. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer' s standard door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1 . Enameled Steel : Manufacturer's standard finish, hollow steel door construction with tubular stiles and rails. 2 . Door Glazing: Fully tempered float glass complying with ASTM C1048, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Kind FT, Class as follows : a. Class 1 (clear) . G. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with FIRE EXTINGUISHER lettering applied to door. Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. 1 . Application Process : Silk screen. H. Door Style: Manufacturer' s standard design. 1 . Full-Glass Panel: Float glass, 1/8 inch thick. I. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer' s standard door- operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg. 2 .04 FINISHES FOR CABINETS, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes . FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522-3 2980 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer. B. Coordination: Verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers indicated and provided by Owner under separate Contract . C. UL-Listed Products : Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . J.L. Industries . 2 . Larsen 's Manufacturing Co. 3 . Modern Metal Products by Muckle. 4 . Potter-Roemer, Inc. 5 . Samson Metal Products, Inc . 2 . 02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard, that comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4A-60B:C, 10-1b nominal capacity, in enameled steel container. 2 . 03 CABINETS A. Construction: Manufacturer' s standard box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. B. Fire-Rated Cabinets: UL listed with UL listing mark with fire-resistance rating of wall where it is installed. C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing the following: 1. Fire extinguisher. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES -- 10522-2 2980 SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Fire extinguishers . 2 . Fire extinguisher cabinets . 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Concrete block partitions to receive semi-recessed fire extinguisher cabinets . B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Dry wall partitions to receive semi-recessed fire extinguisher cabinets . D. Section 09900 - Painting. E. Division 15 - Fire Protection: Fire hose cabinets and valve cabinets; fire protection standpipe and hose systems . 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data for cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style, and materials. B. Submit samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of cabinet finish indicated or exposed to view. C. Submit samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type of cabinet finish indicated, and in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations . FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522-1 2980 D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace locker units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. _i Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION METAL LOCKERS 10505-7 2980 enamel finish consisting of a thermosetting topcoat . Comply with paint manufacturer' s instructions for application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1 .1 mils (0 . 028-mm) on doors, frames, and legs, and 0 .7 mil (0 . 018-mm) elsewhere. 1 . Color and Gloss : As selected by Architect . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Install metal lockers complete with accessories according to manufacturer's recommendations . Install plumb, level, rigid, and flush. B. Assemble knock-down lockers with standard fasteners according to manufacturer' s recommendations with no exposed fasteners on door faces and face frames . C. Anchor lockers to floors and walls at intervals recommended by manufacturer but no greater than 36inches (910-mm) . Install anchors through back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion, using concealed fasteners . D. Install recess trim to recessed lockers using concealed fasteners. Provide hairline joints and concealed splice plates . E. Install boxed end panels to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers . F. Install locker benches complying with manufacturer' s instructions . 1 . Uniformly space pedestals not more than 72inches (1830-mm) apart . Securely fasten to bench top and anchor to floor. 3 .02 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices are operating properly. B. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces. C. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint . Do not permit locker use during construction. METAL LOCKERS 10505-6 2980 Apply manufacturer' s standard baked-enamel finish to pedestals . 1 . Type: Manufacturer's standard tubular pedestal with top flange and base, floor anchored. 2 . Color: To match locker units . 2 .06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. Weld frame members together to form a rigid, 1-piece structure. 1 . Form locker body panels, doors, shelves and accessories from 1-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 2 .07 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes . B. Finish all steel surfaces and accessories, except prefinished stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces . C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment . D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples . Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast . 2 .08 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel complying with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling) , and phosphatize surfaces . B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard baked- METAL LOCKERS 10505-5 2980 2 . Double-Tier Lockers : Not less than 2 point latching. 3 . Multiple-Tier Lockers : Not less than 1 point gravity or spring latch with padlock lugs . 4 . Padlocks will be provided by the Owner. 2 . 04 LOCKER ACCESSORIES A. Equipment : Furnish each locker with the following items, unless otherwise shown: 1 . Single-, and Double-Tier Units : Not less than 2 single-prong wall hooks . 2 . Lockers 18 inches (457 mm) Deep or Greater: Provide coat rod and one wall hook. B. Number Plates : Manufacturer' s standard etched, embossed, or stamped, nonferrous-metal number plates with numerals not less than 3/8-inch (9-mm) high. Number lockers in sequence indicated. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least 2 fasteners of same finish as number plate. C. Legs : Provide nominal 6 inch (152 mm) legs by extending vertical frame members or by attaching gusset-type legs made of not less than 0 . 0598 inch (1 .5 mm, 16 ga. ) steel sheet, with provision for fastening to floor. 1 . Closed Base: 0 .0359 inch (0 . 9 mm, 20 ga. ) minimum steel. D. Recess Trim: Manufacturer' s standard 0 .0478-inch (1 .2-mm, 18 ga. ) minimum steel sheet trim with concealed fastening clips . E. Filler Panels : 0 . 0478-inch (1.2-mm, 18 ga. ) minimum steel sheet, factory fabricated. F. Boxed End Panels : Manufacturer's standard 0 . 0598-inch (1 .5-mm, 16 ga. ) minimum steel sheet end-finishing panels to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers . 2 .05 LOCKER BENCHES A. Bench Tops : Manufacturer's standard 1-piece units with laminated maple top approximately 9-1/2inches (240-mm) wide by 1-1/4inches (32-mm) thick. Round all corners, sand smooth, and apply manufacturer's standard transparent sealer coating. B. Pedestals : Manufacturer's standard steel pedestal supports . Furnish all fastenings and anchorages. METAL LOCKERS 10505-4 2980 2 . 03 WARDROBE LOCKERS A. Body: Form backs, tops, bottoms, sides, and intermediate partitions of flanged 0 . 0239-inch (0 . 61- mm, 24 ga. ) minimum steel sheet . 1 . Form exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers of 0 . 0598-inch (1 .5-mm, 16 ga. ) minimum steel sheet . B. Frames : Form channel frames of 0 . 0598-inch (1 .5-mm, 16 ga. ) minimum steel sheet . Form continuous integral strike on vertical frame members or weld 0 . 0897-inch (2 .3-mm, 13 ga. ) minimum latch hooks to latch strike frame. C. Shelf: Form 0 . 0239-inch (0 . 61-mm, 24 ga. ) minimum steel sheet hat shelf in single-tier units . D. Door: One-piece steel sheet, flanged at all edges, constructed to prevent springing when opening or closing. Fabricate to swing 180 degrees . 1 . Thickness : 0 .0598-inch (1 .5-mm, 16 ga. ) minimum. E. Reinforcing: Brace or reinforce inner face of doors over 15 inches (381-mm) wide. H. Louvered Vents: Stamped, louvered vents in door face, as follows : 1 . Single-Tier Lockers: No fewer than 6 louver openings top and bottom. 2 . Double-Tier Lockers : No fewer than 3 louver openings top and bottom. 3 . Multiple-Tier Lockers : No fewer than 2 louver openings top and bottom, or 3 louver openings top or bottom. L. Hinges : Steel, full-loop, 5 or 7 knuckle tight pin, 2 inches (51 mm) high minimum. Weld to inside of frame and secure to door with not fewer than 2 factory- installed fasteners that are completely concealed and tamperproof when door is closed. 1. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door over 42 inches (1067-mm) high; at least 2 hinges for each door 42 inches (1067-mm) high or less. O. Recessed Handle and Latch: Manufacturers ' standard' housing to form recess for latch lifter and locking devices; nonprotruding latch lifter containing strike and eye for padlock; and automatic, prelocking, pry- resistant latch mechanism with latching action as follows: 1. Single-Tier Lockers: Not less than 3 point a latching. ' � METAL LOCKERS 10505-3 2980 E. Maintenance Instructions : Submit instructions for cleaning lockers and for adjusting, repairing, and , replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms . 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain locker units and accessories from one manufacturer. 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for locker installation. B. Protect lockers from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. C. Deliver master keys, control keys, and combination control charts to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Art Metal Products, Div. of Fort Knox Storage Co. 2 . Hadrian Inc. 3 . Interior/Medart . 4 . Lyon Metal Products Inc. 5 . Penco Products . 6 . Republic Storage Systems Co. B. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified above. 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet : ASTM A366 (A366M) , commercial-quality, stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled carbon steel sheet, stretcher leveled, free of buckling, scale, and surface imperfections . B. Fasteners : Zinc- or nickel-plated steel; slotless- type exposed bolt heads; self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. C. Equipment: Manufacturer's standard plated steel hooks or coat rods . METAL LOCKERS 10505-2 2980 SECTION 10505 METAL LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Wardrobe lockers, including the following: a. Single-tier. b. Double-tier. c. Multiple-tier box (Purse lockers) . 2 . Locker room benches . 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete base. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Concrete block base. C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood furring and grounds . D. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 1. 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's printed data including materials, accessories, construction, finishes, assembly, and installation instructions for lockers and benches . B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout and dimensions of metal lockers and benches . Indicate relationship to adjoining surfaces . Show locker elevations and details, fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories . Include locker numbering sequence. Indicate installation and anchorage requirements. C. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts showing a full range of available colors. D. Samples for Color Verification: Submit samples showing actual colors prepared on same material to be used for the Work. METAL LOCKERS 10505-1 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine areas and conditions in which wall surface protection components and wall protection systems will be installed. 1 . Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of wall surface protection system materials . B. Do not proceed with installations until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles . 3 . 03 INSTALLATION A. Install wall surface protection units plumb, level, and true to line without distortions . 1 . Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished work. B. Install aluminum retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions . 1. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of over 20 feet, splice aluminum retainer and plastic cover at different locations along the run. 3 . 04 CLEANING A. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia based household cleaning agent . Clean metal components in accordance with the manufacturer' s recommendations . B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation upon completion of work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265-6 2980 splices, cushions, mounting hardware, and other accessories as required. a. Top caps shall match color of plastic covers and shall be field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on plastic covers . 2 . 04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wall protection systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thicknesses of components . B. Preassemble components in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling. C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of evidence of wrinkling, chipping, uneven coloration, dents, and other imperfections . Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. D. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors : Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnection of members to other construction. E. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting components to concrete or masonry. Fabricate anchoring devices to be capable of withstanding imposed loads . Coordinate anchoring devices with the supporting structure. 2 . 05 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes . B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Aluminum Mill Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified) . WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265-5 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal : 1 . Balco, Inc . 2 . Construction Specialties, Inc. 3 . IPC (Institutional Products Corporation) . 4 . Pawling Corporation. 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Rigid Plastic Material : Extruded, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or acrylic modified vinyl plastic, thickness as indicated. Comply with specified requirements of ASTM D256 for impact resistance and ASTM E84 for flame spread and smoke developed characteristics . 1 . Colors and Textures of Plastic Material : Provide extruded plastic material that matches selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer' s full range of standard colors and textures. B. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, but with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B221 for 6063-T5 . C. Fasteners : Provide aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other non-corrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. Use theft-proof fasteners where exposed to view. 2 .03 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface-Mounted, Resilient Plastic Corner Guards : Provide surface- mounted, resilient plastic corner guard assembly consisting of a snap-on-type plastic cover installed over a continuous aluminum retainer, height as indicated. 1. Cover shall be rigid, impact-resistant plastic, minimum 0.078 inch thick, in dimensions and profiles indicated. a. Corner Radius: 1/4 inch. 2 . Retainer: Manufacturer's standard continuous, one-piece, extruded aluminum retainer, minimum 0 . 062 inch thick. 3 . Accessories: Provide prefabricated, injection- molded top cap and aluminum base with concealed WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS -� 10265-4 2980 protection system components by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect . The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1 .05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification. B. Store wall surface protection materials in original undamaged packages and containers inside a well- ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1 . Maintain room temperature within the storage area at not less than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) during the period plastic materials are stored. Keep sheet material out of direct sunlight to avoid surface distortion. 2 . Store rigid plastic corner guard covers in a vertical position, and rigid plastic wall guard and handrail covers in a horizontal position for a minimum of 72 hours, or until the plastic material attains the minimum room temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) . 1 . 06 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Instructions : Provide the manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of installed work. Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. B. Replacement Materials : After completion of work, deliver not less than 2 percent of each type, color, and pattern of wall surface protection materials and components . Include accessory components as required. Replacement materials shall be from the same production run as materials installed. Package replacement materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels. q WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265-3 2980 1 . Submit two 12 inch long samples of each type of corner guard required. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field splices . E. Submit product test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing compliance of wall surface protection system components with requirements indicated based on tests performed by the laboratory within the past five years . F. Submit maintenance data for wall surface protection system components for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1. 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced Installer who has previously installed wall surface protection systems similar in material, design, and extent to the systems indicated for this Project . B. Manufacturer Qualifications : Firm experienced in manufacturing wall surface protection system components that are similar to those required for this Project and that have a record of successful in- service performance. C. Fire Performance Characteristics : Provide wall surface protection system components that are identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for the fire performance characteristics indicated below. Identify wall surface protection system components with appropriate markings from the testing and inspection organization. 1 . Flame Spread: 25 or less . 2 . Smoke Developed: 450 or less. D. Impact Strength: Provide wall surface protection system components with a minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft . lbs per sq. ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM D256 (Izod impact, ft . lbs per inch notch) . E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, grade, finish, and type of wall surface protection system component from a single source with resources to provided products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. F. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile and dimensional requirements of wall surface protection system components required and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Wall surface WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265-2 2980 SECTION 10265 WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following types of wall surface protection systems : 1 . Wall protection systems, including: a. Corner guards. 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for surface-mounted corner guards . B. Section 09950 - Wall Coverings : Sheet vinyl wall covering. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data for each wall surface protection system component and installation accessory required, including installation methods for each type of substrate. Provide written data on each required component including physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance. B. Submit shop drawings showing locations, extent, and installation details of wall and corner guards, and other protection systems . Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction. C. Submit Samples for Initial Selection: For initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture, provide the manufacturer's standard color chips consisting of actual sections of each vinyl plastic material required showing the full range of materials, colors, and textures available. D. Submit Samples for Verification Purposes : Submit the following samples, prepared from the same material to be used in the Work, for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and for compliance with requirements indicated: WALL SURFACE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265-1 2980 Comply with Section 07900 for sealants applied during installation of louver. 3 . 03 PROTECTION A. Protect louvers from damage of any kind during construction period including use of temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. 1 . Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction period, so that no evidence remains of correction work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units . B. Clean and touch-up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factor-applied finish coating. 3 .04 CLEANING A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents, which are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period; do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and with a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes . Rinse thoroughly and dry surface. END OF SECTION LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-9 2980 specified below) . Apply baked enamel in compliance with paint manufacturer ' s specifications for cleaning, conversion coating and painting. ""�" 1 . Organic Coating: Thermosetting modified acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603 .8 except with minimum dry film thickness of 1 .5 mils, medium gloss . 2 . Color: As selected by Architect . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorages which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level, and in proper alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding operations require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in field to shop, make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units . F. Protect nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses where required to make louver joints weathertight. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-8 2980 D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers : Fit aluminum louver screen frames with screening covering louver openings and complying with the following requirements: 1 . Insect Screening: 18 x 16 mesh formed with 0 . 012 inch diameter aluminum wire. 2 . 06 BLANK-OFF PANELS A. Fabricate blank-off panels from materials and to sizes indicated and to comply with the following requirements : 1 . Finish: Match finish applied to louvers with respect to coating type, color and gloss . 2 . Attach blank-off panels to back of louver frames with stainless steel sheet metal screws . B. Insulated Blank-Off Panels : Laminated metal-faced panels consisting of insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets; complying with the following requirements: 1. Thickness: 1 inch, unless indicated otherwise. 2 . Metal Facing Sheets : Aluminum sheet, 0 .032 inch thick. 3 . Insulating Core: Extruded polystyrene insulation board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII (2 .2 lb/cu. ft. density) . 4 . Edge Treatment : Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer' s standard extruded aluminum channel frames 0 . 081 inch thick, with corners mitered and with same finish as panels . 5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with polyvinyl chloride compression gaskets, 1/8 inch by 1 inch. 2 .07 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes . Finish louvers after assembly. B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Baked Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating, acid chromate- fluoridephosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as 43 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-7 2980 2 . Frame Thickness : 0 . 081 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3 . Louver Blade Thickness : 0 . 081 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 4 . Louver Blade Angle: 35 degrees, unless otherwise indicated. 5 . Performance Requirements : As follows, determined by testing units 48 inches wide by 48 inches high per AMCA Standard 500 (tested with mill finish and birdscreen) : a. Louver Free Area: 8 .82 square feet (55 percent free area. ) b. Free area velocity at point of beginning water penetration (at 0 .01 ounces per square foot) : 946 fpm. c. Maximum recommended air intake velocity: 746 fpm; air volume at 746 fpm free area velocity: 6580 cfm; pressure drop at 746 fpm free area velocity: 0 .11 inch H2O. d. Maximum recommended air exhaust velocity: 1684 fpm; air volume at 1684 fpm free area velocity: 14853 cfm; pressure drop at 1684 fpm free area velocity: 0 .50 inch H2O. 6. AMCA Seal : Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal . 7 . Model Number and Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equal : a. Model 6097 by Construction Specialties, Inc. 2 . 05 LOWER SCREENS A. Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying with the following requirements: 1 . Screen Location for Fixed Louvers : Interior face, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Screening Type: Insect screening where indicated. B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless steel machine screws, spaced at each corner and at 12 inch o.c. between. C. Louver Screen Frames : Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated and to comply with the following requirements : 1 . Metal : Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver frames to which screens are attached. a. Reinforce extruded aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. 2 . Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 3 . Type: Rewireable frames with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-6 2980 2 . 03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate louvers to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, materials, joinery, and performance. B. Preassemble louvers in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of size indicated with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances of louvers, adjoining construction, and perimeter sealant joints . E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated but not further apart than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c. , whichever is less . At horizontal joints between louver units provide horizontal mullions except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. G. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers, where indicated, or required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior. H. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades as follows, unless otherwise indicated, or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary: 1 . With fillet welds, concealed from view; or mechanical fasteners; or a combination of these methods; as standard with louver manufacturer. 2 .04 FIXED EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALL LOWERS A. Horizontal Drainable Fixed Blade Louvers : Extruded aluminum frames and louver blades; designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill - OY means of gutters in front edges of blades and of channels in jambs and mullions; complying with the following requirements. 1. Louver Depth: 6 inches, unless otherwise indicated. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-5 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Louvers : a. Airline Products Co. Div. , Danzer Metal Works Co. b. Airolite Co. c. Airstream Products Div. , Penn Ventilator Co. , Inc. d. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc. e. Arrow United Industries . f. Construction Specialties, Inc. g. Industrial Louvers, Inc. h. Reliable Metal Products . i. Ruskin Manufacturing. j . Vent Products . 2 .02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet : ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer to produce required finish. B. Aluminum Extrusions : ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T- 52 . C. Fasteners : Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals which are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1 . Use types, gages, and lengths to suit unit installation conditions. 2 . Use Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchors and Inserts : Of type, size, and material required for type of loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled- in-place anchors . E. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic) . LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-4 2980 AMCA Seal based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 and complying with AMCA Certified Ratings Program. G. Submit qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. 1 .06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain louvers from a single source where alike in one or more respects with regard to type, design, and factory-applied color finish. B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum" and D1 .3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel . " 1 . Certify that each welder employed in unit of Work of this section has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 2 . Testing for recertification is Contractor' s responsibility. C. Engineer Qualifications : Professional engineer licensed to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated which has resulted in the successful installation of louvers similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project . D. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures . 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements : Check actual louver openings by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication of louvers without field measurements . Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-3 2980 2 . Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and night time sky heat loss . a. Temperature Change (Range) : 120 degrees F (67 degrees C) . B. Air Performance, Water Penetration, and Air Leakage Ratings : Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated as demonstrated by testing manufacturers stock units, of height and width indicated, according to Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500 . 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer' s product data for each product indicated. B. Submit shop drawings of louver units and accessories . Include plans, elevations, sections, and details showing profiles, angles, spacing of louver blades; unit dimensions related to wall openings and construction; free areas for each size indicated; and profiles of frames at jambs, heads and sills . 1 . Where installed products are indicated to comply with certain structural design loadings, include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis which has been prepared by, or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer. C. Submit samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available for those units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Submit samples for verification purposes of each type of metal finish required, prepared on 6 inch square metal samples of same thickness and alloy indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. E. Submit product test reports evidencing compliance of units with performance requirements indicated. F. Submit product certificates signed by louver manufacturers certifying that their products which comply with Project requirements are licensed to bear LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-2 2980 SECTION 10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Fixed metal wall louvers . 2 . Blank-off panels for wall louvers . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications . C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers . D. Section 08110 - Steel Doors And Frames : Louvers in steel doors and frames . E. Section 09900 - Painting. F. Division 15 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: Ductwork connected to metal wall louvers . 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Refer to AMCA Publication 501-85 for definitions of terms for metal louvers not otherwise defined in this section or referenced standards . 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install exterior metal wall louvers to withstand the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement, without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; and permanent damage to fasteners and anchors: 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf per square foot acting inwards or outwards. �o LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-1 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine ceilings for suitable conditions where cubicle track is to be installed. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Install cubicle curtain track level and plumb, according to manufacturer' s written instructions and original design. B. Install ceiling-mounted tracks at intervals of not less than 24 inches (610 mm) . C. Center fastener in track to insure unencumbered carrier operation. 3 . 03 DEMONSTRATION A. Startup Services : Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate and train Owner' s maintenance personnel as specified below. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to changing curtains and preventive maintenance. 2 . Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals . Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data. " 3 . Schedule training with Owner, with at least 7 days ' advance notice. 3 . 04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed track opening with a nonresidue adhesive tape to prevent debris from the ceiling finishing operation from impeding carrier operation. END OF SECTION IV/CURTAIN TRACKS 10190-4 2980 1 . 06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents . 1 . Curtain Carriers and Track End Caps : Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cubicles by one of the following: 1. General Cubicle Co. 2 . Kirsch Co. 3 . Salisbury Industries . 2 . 02 CURTAIN TRACK A. Track: Anodized, extruded aluminum. . 062 inches thick. B. Track Mounting: Ceiling mounted; mechanically fastened with screw and tube spacer to furring through suspended ceiling. C. Track Accessories : Provide end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling sleeves, wall brackets, and other accessories as required for secure and operational installation. Provide a quantity of carriers for 6-inch (150 mm) spacing the full length of the curtain plus 1 additional carrier. 1. Carriers : Nylon rollers and axle with chrome- plated steel hook. 2 .03 INTRAVENOUS ASSEMBLY A. Track: Surface mounted, anodized, extruded aluminum. B. Bottle-Holding Pendant : Adjustable shaft with vertical height adjustment, equipped with not less than 4 stainless-steel arms. C. Carriers : Ball bearing with chrome-plated steel hook. IV/CURTAIN TRACKS 10190-3 2980 E. Schedule of tracks using same room designations indicated on Drawings . F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of cubicle tracks and curtains certifying that their products comply with specified requirements . G. Maintenance data for cubicle tracks to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 . 1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockup: Prior to installing cubicle tracks, and IV tracks, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects . Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1 . Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect . 2 . Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3 . Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4 . Obtain Architect 's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 5 . Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 1 .05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements : Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify that tracks and curtains may be installed to comply with the original design and referenced standard. B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations : Do not install tracks and curtains until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and work above ceilings is complete. IV/CURTAIN TRACKS 10190-2 2980 SECTION 10190 OW IV/CURTAIN TRACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Cubicle curtain tracks and carriers . 2 . Intravenous (IV) bottle-holding pendant and track. 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Requirements for blocking for mounting tracks, curtain tiebacks, wall brackets, and other items requiring anchorage. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data including durability, fade resistance, and fire-test- response characteristics for each type of curtain fabric specified. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout and types of cubicles, number of carriers, anchorage details, and conditions requiring accessories . Indicate dimensions taken from field measurements . C. Coordination Drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items . Show the following: 1 . Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2 . Method of attaching cubicle curtain track hangers to building structure. 3 . Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and access panels. D. Submit samples for verification of the following products, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. 1 . Cubicle Curtain Track: Manufacturer's standard- size unit, not less than 4 inches (100 mm) long. 2 . IV Bottle Track: Manufacturer' s standard-size unit, not less than 4 inches (100 mm) long. 3 . Curtain Carrier: Manufacturer's full-size unit . 4 . IV Bottle Holder: Manufacturer's full-size unit. (r,63 IV/CURTAIN TRACKS 10190-1 2980 3 . 04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces . B. Use cleaning methods recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. END OF SECTION WALL COVERINGS 09950-5 2980 B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering' s bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, .•+, incompatible primers, and dirt . C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects . 1 . Painted Surfaces : Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 2 . Metals : If not factory primed, clean and apply rust-inhibitive zinc primer. 3 . Moisture Content : Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 4 . Prime new gypsum board with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer. 5 . Allow new plaster to cure. Treat areas of high alkalinity. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3 . 03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with wall coverings manufacturers ' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall covering panels in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition breaks and corners only. C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps . D. Match pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above finish floor. E. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75 mm) from inside corners. No horizontal seams . F. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects . G. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams . WALL COVERINGS 09950-4 2980 lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall Oft covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. 1 .06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents . 1 . Rolls of Wall Covering Material : Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products : Refer to the Room Finish Schedule for the types, manufacturers and locations for wallcovering types VWC-1, VWC-2, VWC-3, VWC-7; and wallcovering borders types WB-1 and WB-2 (no substitution) . 2 .02 ADHESIVES A. Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wood-veneer wall covering and substrate application, as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. WALL COVERINGS 09950-3 2980 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,, A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics : Provide wall coverings with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Flame Spread: 25 or less . 2 . Smoke Developed: 450 or less . C. Mockups : Prior to installing wall covering, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1 . Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect . 2 . Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3 . Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4 . Obtain Architect ' s approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 5 . Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 1 . 05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall covering until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 foot-candles (160 s: WALL COVERINGS 09950-2 2980 SECTION 09950 rk WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Vinyl wall covering. 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01020 - Allowances : Refer to Section 01020, Allowances, for vinyl wallcovering types VWC-4, VWC-5 and VWC-6. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics . B. Shop Drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering type. Indicate seams and termination points . C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. D. Samples for verification in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics . 1 . Wall Covering Material : Full-width sample, not less than 36 inches (914 mm) long, from dye lot used for the Work. a. Show complete pattern repeat . E. Schedule of wall coverings using same room designations indicated on Drawings. F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of wall coverings certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. G. Maintenance data for wall covering to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 . WALL COVERINGS 09950-1 2980 G. Should any coat of the multi-color spray-on finish system be deemed unsatisfactory in that the finished coating does not match the control samples, it shall be sandpapered or removed and additional coats applied as necessary until satisfactory finish is achieved. 1 . Apply the number of coats necessary to match the approved "Field Samples . " 3 . 04 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded coating materials from the site. B. Remove multicolored coatings from adjacent surfaces not intended to be coated. 3 . 05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not, against damage caused by multicolored coatings. B. Provide temporary closure to confine spraying operation and to prevent polluting surrounding environment. C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated surfaces. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations . END OF SECTION MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921-7 2980 the items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to the manufacturer' s instructions for each particular substrate condition, and as specified. 1 . Cleaning: Clean surfaces to receive multicolored coatings . Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning operations do not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces . 2 . Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove the primer and reprime. Notify the Architect in writing about anticipated problems if the multicolored coating system is applied over substrates primed by others . 3 . Previously Painted Surfaces : Prepare previously painted or coated surfaces before beginning multicolored coating application. Remove flaking paint and other contaminants. Clean chalking and dusting surfaces that interfere with coating adhesion. Repair holes or cracks with an appropriate patching compound and spot prime. Sand surfaces smooth. 3 . 03 APPLICATION A. Apply multicolored coatings according to the manufacturer's directions . Use applicators and techniques best suited for the substrates and material being applied. B. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or other conditions detrimental to the formation of a coating. C. Prime Coats: Before applying multicolored coatings, apply a prime coat as recommended by the manufacturer to substrates required to be coated that have not received a prime coat by others. Reprime surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas appear. D. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions . E. All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread and smoothly applied, free of runs, sags, holidays, lap marks, air bubbles and pin holes to assure a smooth finish. F. Suction or hot spots shall be touched up. MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921-6 2980 4 . Alkali Resistance: Aged film withstands 10 percent sodium hydroxide for 3 hours (drying and aging FED-STD 141C, Method 6141; resistance test, ASTM D1308) 5. Mildew and Fungus Resistance: FED-STD 141C, Method 6271, evaluation of growth, visually no growth (organism aspergillus oryzae) 6. Accelerated Weathering: Excellent film integrity after 1750 hours exposure over primed substrate (ASTM G23 and ASTM D822) 7 . Fire Safety: U. L. tested and listed (ASTM E84, Class A) , UL723, Flame Spread 10; Fuel Contributed 5; Smoke developed 0 . National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Number 255; Uniform Building Code UBC 42-1. 8. Stain Resistance: No staining from mild acids, chemicals, oils, food (ASTM D1308) 9 . Washability: No more than 5 percent change in specular gloss and not more than 15 percent change in daylight reflectance (FED-STD 141C, Method 6141) 10 . Scrubability: Only slight signs of wear after 7500 cycles (FED-STD 141C, Method 6142 ) 11 . Bacterial Inhibition: Federal Specification UU-P-510B, Paragraph 4 .4 .2 .1, showing a clear zone 5 mm from edge of test specimen using Staphylococcus Aureus FDA No. 209 verifying bacteriostatic properties. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive multicolored coatings and conditions under which the coatings will be applied to conform to the manufacturer's application requirements. Do not begin coating application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Start of coating application will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. General Procedures : Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If such items cannot be removed, provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and coating. After coating operations have been completed in each space or area, reinstall g� MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921-5 2980 1 . 07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Extra Materials : Furnished from same production run as materials applied. Package materials with a protective covering and identify with labels describing contents . Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1 . Multi-Color Interior Coating: Furnish quantity equal to 5 percent of amount applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water-based multi-color spray-on finish system as manufactured by one of the following or equal : 1 . Polomyx Aegeis 6000 Series; Polomyx Industries, Inc. , Wilmington, MA. 2 . Zolatone Water-Based, Textures Group; Zolatone Process, Inc. , Los Angeles, CA. 2 .02 MATERIALS A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide the best-quality grade of multicolored coatings . Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a best-grade product will not be acceptable. C. Colors : Architect shall not be limited to any particular color group or blend for color selections. Provide custom blended colors as selected by Architect. D. The multi-color spray-on finish system shall conform to the following: 1. 60 Specular Gloss: Maximum of 10 (ASTM D523) 2 . Flexibility: No checking when bent around 1/8 inch mandrel (FED-STD 141C, Method 6221) 3 . Self-Lifting: No evidence of lifting or blistering when recoated after 8 hours (FED-STD 141C, Method 6252) MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921-4 2980 1 . After finishes are accepted, these surfaces will be used to evaluate the coating system. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples . 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver multicolored coating materials to the Project site in the manufacturer' s new, original, unopened packages or containers bearing the manufacturer' s name and label, and the following information: 1 . Name or title of material. 2 . Manufacturer' s name, stock number, and date of manufacture. 3 . Contents by volume. 4 . Thinning instructions, if permitted. 5. Application instructions . 6 . Color name and number. 7 . Handling instructions and precautions . B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly closed, covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) in a well-ventilated area. Keep containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1 . Protect coating materials from freezing. Keep the storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1 . 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions in spaces to receive multicolored coatings that comply with the manufacturer's recommendations . Provide adequate natural or induced ventilation, as necessary, for curing and as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide adequate illumination B. Temperature Conditions : Apply multicolored coatings only when the temperature of the surface to be coated, the ambient temperature, and the temperature of the materials to be used are above 50 degreesF (10 degreesC) . C. Weather Conditions: Do not apply coatings when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921-3 2980 C. Maintenance data for multicolored interior coating to include in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1 . 1 . Methods for maintaining coating. 2 . Precautions for using cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to the finish and performance. D. Submit product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of multicolored coatings with the requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing within the last 3 years of the current product formulations . E. Submit material certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by the Architect, signed by the manufacturer certifying that multicolored coatings comply with the requirements specified. 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications : Engage an experienced applicator who has completed multicolored coating system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat material produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats . 1 . Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using coating systems specified. C. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide coatings with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84 by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify coatings with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1 . Flame Spread: 25 or less . 2 . Smoke Developed: 450 or less . D. Field Samples : The Architect will select one room or wall surface for each substrate to represent surfaces and conditions. Apply multicolored coatings to each surface according to the schedule, or as specified. Provide full-coat samples on at least 100 square feet of wall surface until the required color and texture are obtained. Simulate finished lighting conditions to review the field samples. MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921-2 2980 SECTION 09921 MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 . Preparing surfaces to receive multi-color spray-on finish. 2 . Protect adjacent surfaces from overspray. 3 . Prime all surfaces to receive multi-color spray-on finish. 4. Spray apply finish to surfaces indicated or scheduled. 5 . Perform one touch-up at end of project . 6 . Clean up. 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. B. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's technical information including basic materials analysis and application instructions for each coating material specified. 1 . List each material and cross-reference to the specific coating and finish system and application. 2 . Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. B. Samples: Architect will furnish color chips for each color required. For verification, submit samples for review of color and texture only. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Provide a listing of materials and application for each coat of each finish sample. 1. Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual substrate. Resubmit samples as requested until the required sheen, color and texture is achieved. a. Gypsum Board: Provide two 12 inch by 12 inch samples on gypsum board for each type of finish and color. `6 MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921-1 2980 J. Grilles, Uncovered Runout, Housings and Accessories of Mechanical Equipment and Apparatus 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB DTM Primer No. 85XX. b. P&L Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer, Z190 . c. Moore Acrylic Metal Primer M04 . d. PPG Pitt-Tech DTM 90-712 or 90-709 . 2 . Second and Third Coats: a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB Gloss No. 84XX. b. P&L Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel, Z2900 . c. Moore DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss M29 . d. PPG Pitt-Tech DTM 90-374 Series . K. Wood Painted (opaque finish) 1 . First Coat : a. Moore Latex Enamel Underbody 345 (no substitution) . 2 . Second And Third Coats: a. Moore Regal AquaGlo 333 (no substitution) . L. Piping, Electric Conduits, Fittings, Hangers, Brackets, Sleeves, Plates 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB DTM Primer No. 85XX. b. P&L Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer, Z190 . c. Moore Acrylic Metal Primer M04 . d. PPG Pitt-Tech DTM 90-712 or 90-709 . 2 . Second and Third Coats : a. Devoe Wondertones Eggshell No. 34XX. b. P&L Prohide Latex Eggshell, 28200 . c. Moore Regal AquaVelvet 319 d. PPG Satinhide Latex Lo-Lustre 88 Series . M. Existing Painted Metal Surfaces (i .e. doors, frames, trim) 1 . First and Second Coats: a. Moore Regal AquaGlo 333 (no substitution) . END OF SECTION PAINTING 09900-17 2980 E. Concrete Masonry Units (epoxy finish) 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Bloxfil Block Filler No. 52901 . b. P&L Prohide Latex Block Filler, Z98 . c. Moore Waterborne Epoxy Block Filler M31/M32 . d. PPG Block Filler 16-90 . 2 . Second Coat (2 . 0 to 2 . 5 mils DFT) : a. Devoe 129AA/12902 Tru-Glaze WB Water Based Epoxy. b. P&L Tech-Gard Water-Borne Epoxy, Z5300 . c. Moore Acrylic Epoxy Gloss Coating M43/M44 d. PPG Aquapon Water Borne Polyamide Epoxy 98 Series . F. Plaster and Gypsum Board (Epoxy Finish) 1 . First Coat : a. Moore Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy 278/279 (no substitution) . 2 . Second Coat (2 . 0 to 2 . 5 mils DFT) : a. Moore Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy 278/279 (no substitution) . G. Ferrous Metal (not shop-primed) 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB DTM Primer No. 85XX. b. P&L Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer, Z190 . c. Moore Acrylic Metal Primer M04 . d. PPG Pitt-Tech DTM 90-712 or 90-709 . 2 . Second and Third Coats : a. Devoe Wondertones Acrylic Semi-Gloss No. 39XX. b. P&L Prohide Latex Semi-Gloss, 28300 . c. Moore DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss M29 . d. PPG Satinhide Latex Lo-Lustre 88 Series. H. Metal (shop-primed) 1. First and Second Coats : a. Devoe Wondertones Acrylic Semi-Gloss No. 39XX. b. P&L Prohide Latex Semi-Gloss, Z8300 . c. Moore DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss M29 . d. PPG Satinhide Latex Lo-Lustre 88 Series . I. Galvanized Metal 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB DTM Primer No. 85XX. b. P&L Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer, Z190 . c. Moore Acrylic Metal Primer M04 . d. PPG Pitt-Tech DTM 90-712 or 90-709 . 2 . Second and Third Coats: a. Devoe Wondertones Acrylic Semi-Gloss No. 39XX. b. P&L Prohide Latex Semi-Gloss, 28300 . c. Moore DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss M29 . d. PPG Satinhide Latex Lo-Lustre 88 Series . PAINTING 09900-16 2980 2 . Second and Third Coats : a. Devoe Wondershield Exterior Acrylic Latex No. 15XX. b. P&L Prohide Latex Flat House Paint, 29700 . c. Moore MoorLife Latex House Paint 105 . d. PPG Sun-Proof Latex House Paint 72 Series . 3 . 07 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Cast-In-Place Concrete 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Wonder-Tones Latex Primer-Sealer No. 51701 . b. P&L Suprime 1 Primer, Z1001 . c. Moore Latex Quick Dry Prime Seal 201 . d. PPG Speedhide Alkali Resistant Primer 6-603 . 2 . Second and Third Coats: a. Devoe Wonder-Tones Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 34XX. b. P&L Prohide Latex Eggshell, Z8200 . c. Moore Regal Aquavelvet Latex Eggshell No. 319 . d. PPG Satinhide Latex Lo-Lustre 88 Series . B. Concrete Masonry Units 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Bloxfil Latex Block Filler No. 52901 . b. P&L Prohide Plus Block Filler, Z98. c. Moore Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler No. 173 . d. PPG Block Filler 16-90. 2 . Second and Third Coats: a. Devoe Wonder-Tones Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 34XX. b. P&L Prohide Latex Eggshell, Z8200 . c. Moore Regal Aquavelvet Latex Eggshell No. 319 . d. PPG Satinhide Latex Lo-Lustre 88 Series. C. Plaster and Gypsum Board 1. First Coat : a. Moore Latex Quick Dry Prime Seal 201 (no substitution) . 2 . Second and Third Coats : a. Moore Regal Aquavelvet Latex Eggshell No. 319 or as otherwise indicated on the Finish Schedule (no substitution) . D. Plaster and Gypsum Board Ceilings 1. First Coat : a. Moore Latex Quick Dry Prime Seal 201 (no substitution) . 2 . Second Coat and Third Coats : a. Moore Regal Wall Satin 215 (no substitution) . ggS> PAINTING 09900-15 2980 C. Galvanized Metals (not shop-primed) 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB DTM Primer No. 85XX. b. P&L Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer, 2190 . c. Moore Acrylic Metal Primer M04 . d. PPG Pitt Tech DTM 90-712 or 90-709 . 2 . Second and Third Coats : a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB Gloss, No. 84XX. b. P&L Accolade Exterior Gloss Enamel, Z4300 . c. Moore Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28 . d. PPG Pitt Tech DTM 90-374 . D. Ferrous and Non-ferrous Metals (shop-primed) 1 . First and Second Coats : a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB Gloss, No. 84XX. b. P&L Accolade Exterior Gloss Enamel, Z4300 . c. Moore Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28 . d. PPG Pitt Tech DTM 90-374 . E. Industrial Coating (over shop primed ferrous metals subject to abrasion; i .e. railings, handrails and ladders) 1 . One Coat (at 2 .5 to 3 . 0 mils DFT) : a. Carboline 193 Hi-Build Urethane. b. Porter 4600 Hythane. c. Tnemec 73 Endura-Shield III . F. Cast-In-Place Concrete (smooth surfaced) 1 . First and Second Coats : a. Devoe Wondershield Exterior Acrylic Latex, No. 15XX. b. P&L Vapex Flat House Paint, Z1900 . c. Moore MoorLife Latex House Paint 105 . d. PPG Sun-Proof Latex House Paint 72 Series . G. Concrete Masonry Units 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Bloxfil Latex Block Filler No. 52901 . b. P&L Prohide Block Filler, Z98. c. Moore Interior & Exterior Block Filler 173 . d. PPG Block Filler 16-90 . 2 . Second and Third Coats: a. Devoe Wondershield Exterior Acrylic Latex, No. 15XX. b. P&L Vapex Flat House Paint, Z1900 . c. Moore MoorLife Latex House Paint 105 . d. PPG Sun-Proof Latex House Paint 72 Series. H. Gypsum Board Soffits 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Wondershield Exterior Primer No.1502 . b. P&L Suprime 1 Primer, Z1001. c. Moore Moore's Latex Exterior Primer 102 . d. PPG Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Latex Primer 72-1 . PAINTING 09900-14 2980 rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are noncompatible. 3 . 05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect . C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes . Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces . 3 . 06 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metals (not shop-primed) 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB DTM Primer No. 85XX. b. P&L Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer, 2190 . c. Moore Acrylic Metal Primer M04 . d. PPG Pitt-Tech DTM 90-712 or 90-709 . 2 . Second and Third Coats : a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB Gloss, No. 84XX. b. P&L Accolade Exterior Gloss Enamel, Z4300 . C. Moore Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28 . d. PPG Pitt-Tech DTM 90-374 Series. B. Non-Ferrous Metals (not shop-primed) 1 . First Coat : a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB DTM Primer No. 85XX. b. P&L Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer, 2190. c. Moore Acrylic Metal Primer M04 . d. PPG Pitt Tech DTM 90-712 or 90-709 . 2 . Second and Third Coats: a. Devoe Mirrolac-WB Gloss, No. 84XX. b. P&L Accolade Exterior Gloss Enamel, 24300. C. Moore Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28 . d. PPG Pitt Tech DTM 90-374. V3 PAINTING 09900-13 2980 coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. S. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes : Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. T. Transparent (Clear) Finishes : Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections . 1 . Provide satin finish for final coats . U. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements . 3 . 04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1 . The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the project will be taken, identified, sealed and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2 . The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative materials analysis . b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j . Recoating. k. Skinning. 1. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3 . If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove ,. ,. PAINTING 09900-12 2980 L. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat . M. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop- primed and touch up painted. N. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1 . Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat . O. Minimum Coating Thickness : Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer' s recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. P. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces . 1 . Mechanical items to be painted include but are not limited to: a. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports . b. Heat exchanges . C. Tanks d. Ductwork. e. Insulation. f. Supports . g. Motors and mechanical equipment. h. Accessory items. 2 . Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to: a. Conduit and fittings. b. Switchgear. Q. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. R. Prime Coats : Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to materials that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first PAINTING 09900-11 2980 3 . 03 APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer' s directions . Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. C. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules . " D. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. E. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer' s directions . F. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces . G. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. H. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces . Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment . I. Paint interior surfaces or cuts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint. J. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces . K. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. PAINTING 09900-10 2980 imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases and paneling. c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4 . Ferrous Metals : Clean non-galvanized ferrous- metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances . Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and in accordance with requirements of SSPC specification SSPS-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. 5 . Galvanized Surfaces : Clean galvanized surfaces with non-petroleum-based solvents so that the surfaces is free of oil and surface contaminants . Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. C. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1 . Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2 . Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material . Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3 . Use thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and within recommended limits . PAINTING 09900-9 2980 prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces . Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1 . Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments . Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted sur- faces . B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1 . Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish coat material with Lubstrates primed by others . 2 . Cementitious Materials : Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils and release agents . Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests . If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed direc- tions . c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, and rinse; allow to dry and vacuum before painting. 3 . Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and PAINTING 09900-8 2980 B. Sealers and primers : As recommended by the finish paint manufacturer. C. Spackle: An approved plaster filler. D. Gypsum board joint compound finish system shall be as approved by gypsum board manufacturer. E. Wood filler: Paste type. F. Tinting material shall be of the best quality, universal colorants ground in propylene glycol, alkali proof, non-fading, lead-free colorants . 1 . Tint all primers and undercoats to the approximate shade (lighter or darker, depending on color selected) of the finish coat . Where the color schedule calls for the use of "deeptones" (interior or exterior) , it is the responsibility of the painting subcontractor to utilize the appropriate deep base primers for use on the surfaces for which they are intended. G. Linseed oil shall be pure, settled, clear and raw or boiled as required to produce best results . H. Thinner shall be the best grade, pure grain spirits of turpentine distilled from the sap of live trees. 2 . 03 COLORS A. Refer to Room Finish Schedule for colors to be used on the Project . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 . Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator' s acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3 .02 PREPARATION A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection PAINTING 09900-7 2980 E. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures not less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces . 1 . Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods . F. Provide minimum 40 foot candles of lighting on surfaces to be painted. Simulate finished lighting conditions for the installation of wall tile. 1 . 08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Leave on premises, where directed by Owner, one gallon (unopened) of each color used. Containers shall be tightly sealed and clearly labelled for identification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Architectural Coating Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide architectural coating products as scheduled and where indicated, as manufactured by one of the following (no substitutions) : 1 . Devoe and Raynolds Company (Devoe) 2 . Pratt & Lambert, Inc . (P&L) 3 . Benjamin Moore & Company (Moore) 4 . Pittsburgh Paints, PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. (PPG) B. Industrial Coating Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide industrial coating products as scheduled and where indicated, as manufactured by one of the following (no substitutions) : 1. Carboline Company (Carboline) 2 . Porter International (Porter) 3 . Tnemec Company Inc. (Tnemec) 2 .02 MATERIALS A. Provide paint products listed in schedules at end of this section for the various paint systems and substrates indicated. i PAINTING 09900-6 2980 1 . 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer' s original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer' s name and label and the following information: 1 . Product name or title of material . 2 . Product description (generic classification or binder type) . 3 . Manufacturer ' s stock number and date of manufacture. 4 . Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents . 5 . Thinning instructions . 6 . Application instructions . 7 . Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) . Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application. 1 . 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture contents of surfaces are below following maximums: 1 . Plaster: 12 percent. 2 . Wood (interior) : 7 percent . 3 . Concrete block: 12 percent . B. Apply water based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) . C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35 degrees C) . D. Apply urethane paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 60 degrees F and 95 degrees F. PAINTING 09900-5 2980 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications : Engage an experienced ' applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats . Use thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use within recommended limits . C. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers . 1 . Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. D. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer' s best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer' s product identification will not be acceptable. E. Provide products which comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) . 1 .05 MOCK-UPS A. Before proceeding with the work, a representative room with permanent lighting shall be designated for the mockup and the walls finish painted in a white color. Samples of the various wall color schemes shall be prepared on 4 foot by 8 foot sheets of gypsum board (one color to each sheet) and exhibited in the mock-up room for Architect 's approval. 1 . If requested by Architect, prepare a new mock-up for each color as many as two more times, with minor tint adjustments, for final color approval . 2 . If requested by Architect, move individual mock-up panels to specific rooms where a color is to be used, for examination under actual room lighting conditions . Aftft PAINTING 09900-4 2980 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 . B. Product data: Submit product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers . 1. Provide manufacturer' s technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. 2 . List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer' s catalog number and general classification. 3 . Submit certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) . C. Submit samples of manufacturers ' latest color chips for selection by the Architect . Colors shall be selected by Architect prior to commencement of the painting work. D. Samples for Verification Purposes : Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers . Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 1. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. 2 . Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect ' s review of color and texture only. a. Gypsum Board: Provide two 18 by 18 inch samples of each color on gypsum board. b. Wood, Opaque Finish: Provide two 12 by 12 inch samples of each color on hardboard. c. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4 inch square samples of flat metal and two 8 inch long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. d. Concrete: Provide two 4 inch square samples for each color and finish. e. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 8 by 16 inch samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. PAINTING 09900-3 2980 e. Duct shafts . f. Elevator shafts . 3 . Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel . c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze. f. Brass . 4 . Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following: a. Valve and damper operators . b. Linkages . c. Sensing devices . d. Motor and fan shafts . 5 . Labels : Do not paint over Underwriter ' s Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating or nomenclature plates . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications : 1 . Shop primed metal fabrications . 2 . Exterior ferrous metal items, galvanized and shop primed for field applied industrial coating top coat . B. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Shop finished architectural woodwork. C. Section 08110 - Steel Doors And Frames : Shop primed metal doors and frames. D. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors: Shop primed wood doors . E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Preparation of joints, fasteners, trim, and accessories for painting. F. Section 09540 - Glassfiber Reinforced Gypsum Units : Preparation of joints for painting. G. Section 09816 - Epoxy Wall Coating System. H. Section 09921 - Multicolored Interior Coatings . i PAINTING 09900-2 2980 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces . 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections . B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules, " except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural . Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces . If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from colors or finishes available. 1 . Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding) , hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts and labels. 1 . Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components . a. Expansion joint cover assemblies . b. Architectural woodwork and casework. c. Acoustical materials, except where indicated otherwise. d. Toilet and bath accessories . e. Elevator entrance doors and frames . f. Elevator equipment . g. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment . h. Light fixtures . i. Switchgear. j . Distribution cabinets. 2 . Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. '71 PAINTING 09900-1 2980 B. Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not, against damage from coating operations . Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and recoating as acceptable to the Architect . Leave the work in an undamaged condition. C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly coated finishes . Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of coating operations. D. At completion of the work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces . END OF SECTION EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM 09816-6 2980 1 . The number of coats and coating film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the coating manufacturer. Sand between coating applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the coating manufacturer' s directions . 2 . Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces . B. Minimum Coating Thickness : Apply each material at not thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire coating system as recommended by the manufacturer but not less than 35 mils . C. Before the application of finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by the coating manufacturer, to material that is required to be finished. D. Brush Application: Brush-out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections . Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks. 1 . Apply primers and first coats by brush unless the manufacturer' s instructions permit use of mechanical applicators . E. Mechanical Applications : Use mechanical methods for coating application when permitted by the coating manufacturer' s recommendations, governing ordinances, and trade union regulations . 1 . Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush- applied coats . Do not double-back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of 2 coats in one pass, unless recommended by the coating manufacturer. F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or recoat work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3 .04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At the end of each work day during progress of work, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags and other discarded materials from the site. EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM `6 09816-5 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Starting of special coating systems work will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within any particular area. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items which are not to be coated, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and coating operations . Remove these items if it is necessary for the complete coating of the items and adjacent surfaces . Following completion of coating operations in each space or area, reinstall the items removed, using workmen skilled in the trades involved. B. Clean surfaces to be coated before applying coatings or surface treatments . Schedule cleaning and coating application so that dust and other contaminates will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Perform surface preparation and cleaning in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions for the particular substrate conditions and as herein specified. D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials in compliance with the coating manufacturer's directions. 1 . Do not mix coating materials produced by different manufacturers, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's instructions. 2 . Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and as required during application. Do not stir film, which may form on surfaces, into the material . Remove film and, if necessary, strain the coating material before using. 3 . 03 APPLICATION A. Apply special coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for the type of material being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM 09816-4 2980 B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. in a well ventilated area. Maintain containers used in storage of coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1 . Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all necessary precautionary measures to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of special coating materials . 1 . 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide fans or blowers to maintain proper ventilation in work area to alleviate volatile solvents evaporating from coating materials . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following coating systems or equal: 1 . Descoglas; Master Builders, Inc. 2 . Selbaglas; Selby Division of Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. 3 . Series 271 Stranlock with Series 69 Top Coat; Tnemec Company. 2 .02 EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM A. Provide a complete high performance epoxy wall coating system including, without limitation, primers, fiberglass reinforcing fabric, epoxy saturant coat, epoxy fill coat, and epoxy top coats . Provide sufficient top coats to completely cover fiberglass reinforcing and to comply with the following: 1. Colors: Provide colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete range of at least 102 colors . 2 . Surface Texture: Fine orange-peel texture. 3 . Degree of Sheen: Satin, 15 to 35 gloss range, using 60 degree gloss meter (ASTM D523) . EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM 09816-3 2980 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat material produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats . Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer, and only within recommended limits . B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which other coatings are to be provided to ensure compatibility of the total coating systems for various substrates . Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of specified finish materials, to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. 1 . Notify the Architect of any anticipated problems involved in using the coatings systems as specified. C. Field Samples : On actual wall surfaces and other interior and exterior building components, duplicate coating finishes of prepared samples . Provide full- coat finish samples on at least 100 square feet of surface as directed, until required sheet, color, and texture is obtained; simulate finished lighting con- ditions for review of in-place work. 1 . Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job. 2 . The Architect will select one room, area or surface to represent typical job surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be coated. Apply special coatings in this room, area or surface in accordance with the schedule, or as specified. After finishes are accepted, this room, area or surface will be used for evaluation of other coating systems of a similar nature. 1 . 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer' s name and label and the following information: 1 . Name or title of material. 2 . Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3 . Manufacturer' s name. 4 . Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7 . Color name and number. 8. Handling instructions and precautions. EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM 09816-2 2980 SECTION 09816 EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this section includes a fiberglass reinforced epoxy wall coating system, and includes surface preparation, prime coats and topcoats . 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. B. Section 09900 - Painting. 1. 03 DEFINITIONS A. Special coating systems are defined as those types of materials and methods of application requiring more than normal skills and techniques for mixing, handling and application, as specified in the Painting section. 1 . The term "special coating systems" as used in this section includes applied materials used in prime, intermediate and finish coats. 2 . The term "exposed surfaces" is defined to include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place in areas to be coated. Extend special coatings in these areas as required to maintain the coating system integrity and provide desired protection. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data and technical information including basic materials analysis and application instructions for each coating material specified. B. Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Resubmit samples as requested until the required sheen, color and texture is achieved. EPDXY WALL COATING SYSTEM 09816-1 2980 B. Extra Materials and Usable Scraps: Deliver specified "extra materials" and usable scraps of carpet to Owner' s designated storage space, properly packaged (paper wrapped) and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less than 9 foot lengths, and pieces of more than 3 square feet area and more than 8 inches wide. Dispose of smaller pieces as "construction waste" . 3 .07 PROTECTION A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation. " B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. 3 .07 CARPET SCHEDULE A. Provide carpet as scheduled on the following "Product Data Sheets . " Each Data Sheet begins with a new page. END OF SECTION CARPET 09680-9 2980 E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings . Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1 . Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings . 2 . Install pattern parallel to walls and borders . F. Carpet installation shall be laid tight and flat, well fastened at edges, and shall present a uniform appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area. Roll carpet areas with a 30 lb. carpet roller to insure proper contact of carpet to substrate and to remove bubbles and buckles . G. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. Use full length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces . Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush. 3 . 04 INSTALLATION PROTECTION PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Carpet protection preservative treatment, if not factory applied, shall be field applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3 . 05 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS A. Stairway Carpeting: Install by secure method, recognized to be durable and safe for traffic. Conceal edges and avoid making seams in areas of high wear. 3 .06 CLEANING A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation. 1 . Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2 . Remove protruding yarns from carpet surface using sharp scissors. 3 . Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face- beater element. 4 . Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. CARPET 09680-8 2980 adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone. D. Broom or vacuum clean subfloors to be covered with carpet . Following cleaning, examine subfloors for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust . E. Concrete-Subfloor Preparation: Apply concrete-slab primer, according to manufacturer' s directions, where recommended by the carpet manufacturer. 3 .03 INSTALLATION A. Direct Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8 : "Direct Glue-Down. " B. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12 : "Carpet on Stairs . " C. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet . 1. For each carpet type, install only carpet from the same dye lot within each space. 2 . Join seams in recommended manner and so as not to detract from the appearance of the carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of gaps. a. All salvage edges must be removed. All cuts must be made of a 15 degree angle with surface yarns extending outward over backing material . b. A bead of non-flammable latex carpet seam adhesive shall be applied to all cut edges before seams are made. c. Sewn seams shall be made using No. 18 waxed linen double thread and proper carpet stitches. Tape seams shall be made using pin tape and non-flammable latex carpet seam adhesive. Tape must secure seams mechanically with pins as well as chemically with adhesive. Taped seams shall be pressed to produce best possible even top pile and protected until adhesive has set a minimum of eight hours . D. Where items are indicated for installation on top of finished carpet floor, install carpet before installation of these items . �I 8 CARPET 09680-7 2980 D. Seaming Cement : Hot-melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams . E. Carpet Edge Guard, Nonmetallic: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard of size and profile indicated and with minimum 2 inch wide anchorage flange; colors selected by Architect from among standard colors available within the industry. 2 . 03 PROTECTIVE PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Except where carpet already has an applied protective treatment, provide protective treatment as recommended by carpet manufacturer and approved by Architect . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine subfloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of carpet . Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified in this Section and those of the carpet manufacturer. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) , noncumulative, in all directions . Sand or grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas . Fill depressions. 1 . Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subfloor as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. C. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with AftA CARPET J 09680-6 2980 1 . 09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents . 1 . Carpet : Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full width for each type of carpet as indicated below: a. For installed quantities of less than 60 square yards, furnish extra materials equal to 10 percent of amount installed. b. For installed quantities of more than 60 square yards, furnish extra materials equal to 5 percent of amount installed. B. Quantities of extra materials specified above shall not include "usable scraps" as specified in the Article "Cleaning. " PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 CARPET A. Products : Provide the following carpets where scheduled (no substitutions) : 1. CPT-1 : Carpet Tile, Interface, Caribbean, 1660760000, 3071, St . Thomas . 2 . CPT-2 : Broadloom, Interface, Pallisander, 1660367600, 3621, Bergamo. 3 . CPT-3 : Broadloom, Lees, Pebbleweave II, DF506, 225, Amberglow. 4 . CPT-4 : Broadloom, Lees, Best Transitions, 301, Ash Green. 5. CPT-5 : Broadloom, Lees, Best Transitions, 535, Lilac Shadows . 6 . CPT-6 : Broadloom, Lees, Best Transitions, 214, Honey Bear. 2 . 02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete-Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: As recommended by the carpet manufacturer. C. Adhesives : Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. CARPET 09680-5 2980 (20 degrees C) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. D. Remove wrapping from carpet 24 hours prior to installation to allow "off-gasing" of carpet . 1 .07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions . " B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations : Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. C. Subfloor Moisture Conditions : Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft . /24 hours (14 . 6 kg/1000 sq. m/24 hours) when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2 .1, with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F (12 .7 deg C) . D. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions : A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is applied. 1 .08 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by carpet manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace carpet that does not meet requirements or that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1 . Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. CARPET 09680-4 2980 compliance with FCIB certification program requirements . B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of carpet from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1 . Dye Lot : Provide each carpet type beginning from the start of a full dye lot. C. Carpet Fire-Test-Response Characteristics : Provide carpet with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630 . 2 . Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E84 . 3 . Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E84 . D. Fade Resistance: Where a fade resistance factor is indicated for carpet or carpet materials, provide materials which have been tested by AATCC Test Method 16E, for a maximum grey scale factor of 4 when tested for a period of 40 hours except as otherwise indicated. E. Static Resistance: Provide yarn or yarn blend as indicated in carpet construction, and include provisions to comply with static resistance ratings as indicated, either by selection of yarns known to be effective or by inclusion of small percentages of special anti-static yarn or backing material known to be effective in achieving indicated static resistance. Where rating is not otherwise indicated provide 3 .5 KV resistance for 20 percent relative humidity at 70 degrees F. (AATCC 134) . 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute ' s CRI 104, Section 5 : "Storage and Handling. " B. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. C. Store materials on-site in original undamaged packages, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, with continuous blocking off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 degrees F S CARPET 09680-3 2980 showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of carpet indicated. D. Submit samples for verification of the following U products, in manufacturer' s standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. Label each sample with manufacturer's name, material type, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and carpet schedule. Submit the following: 1 . Submit 18 inch by 27 inch (450 mm by 700 mm) samples of each type of carpet material required. 2 . Submit two 36 inch long seam-samples of each carpet type specified. Provide one sample joining side edges and one sample joining cut sections of carpet . 3 . Submit 12 inch (300 mm) samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item. E. Schedule: Submit schedule of carpet using same room designations indicated on Drawings . F. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that carpet materials furnished comply with specified requirements . 1. Include listing of mill register numbers for carpet furnished. 2 . Include supporting certified laboratory test data indicating that carpet meets or exceeds specified test requirements. 3 . Certification that flooring material falls within ATBCB guidelines for slip-resistance (static coefficient of friction greater than 0 . 6 for level surfaces, greater than 0 .8 for ramps . ) G. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for carpet to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1 . Methods for maintaining carpet including manufacturer's recommended frequency for maintaining carpet. 2 . Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. Include cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures. 1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced Installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board (FCIB) or who can demonstrate CARPET 09680-2 2980 SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes wall-to-wall carpet and carpet tile, installation, and accessories . 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Monolithic slab finishes specified for carpet substrates . B. Section 09660 - Resilient Tile Flooring: Vinyl base. C. Section 09666 - Resilient Sheet Floor Coverings . 1 .04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer' s product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit manufacturer' s printed data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response characteristics . Submit methods of installation for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Indicate the following: 1. Existing flooring materials to be removed. 2 . Existing flooring materials to remain. 3 . Broadloom carpet type, color, and dye lot. 4. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot . 5. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 6. Seam locations, types, and methods. 7 . Type of subfloor. 8. Type of installation. 9 . Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 10. Pile direction. 11. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 12 . Type, color, and location of edge strips . C. Submit samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts or Samples of materials CARPET 09680-1 2980 C. Clean resilient sheet flooring not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project . Clean resilient sheet floor coverings by method recommended by manufacturer. 1 . Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation, prior to cleaning. 2 . Reapply floor polish after cleaning. END OF SECTION RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-10 2980 support strip. For rubber flooring, weld to flooring pre-molded cove base units, including inside and outside corners . L. Hand roll resilient sheet floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in adhesive and eliminate trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by roller is impractical, press floor coverings firmly in place with flat-bladed instrument . 3 . 05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient sheet floor coverings : 1 . Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by floor covering manufacturers. 2 . Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3 . Do not wash floor until after period recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 4 . Damp-mop floor to remove black marks and soil . B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 1 . Apply protective floor polish to resilient sheet floor covering surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes . a. Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to floor covering manufacturer, that maintains slip-resistance characteristics within legal levels . b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owners maintenance service. 2 . Cover resilient sheet floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 3 . Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over resilient sheet floor coverings . Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. t�3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-9 2980 3 . Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams . 4 . Avoid cross seams. C. Where items are indicated for installing on top of finished floor covering, install floor covering before these items are installed. D. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient sheet floor coverings to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture, including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings . E. Extend resilient sheet floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings . F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non permanent marking device. G. Install resilient sheet floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, plumbing floor cleanouts and similar items occurring within finished floor areas . Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers . Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. H. Adhere resilient sheet floor coverings to flooring substrates by method approved by floor covering manufacturer. 1. Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. 2 . Comply with floor covering manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. I. Heat-weld seams in resilient sheet floor coverings where this seaming method is indicated. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce a surface flush with adjoining sheets. J. Chemically bond seams in resilient sheet floor coverings where this seaming method is indicated. Prepare seams and apply seam sealers to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps or overlaps . K. Integral Flash Cove Base: Where indicated, cove resilient sheet floor coverings up vertical surfaces to form integral base of height indicated over cove RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-8 2980 B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per floor covering manufacturer' s direction to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates . C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that seal moisture or are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using mechanical means only, such as a terrazzo or concrete grinder, or a "Blastrac" machine. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient sheet floor coverings immediately before installation. Following cleaning, examine and perform tests on substrates to determine if there is any evidence of moisture transmission, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Tests are to be performed no more than two weeks prior to installation of flooring. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions . 3 . 03 INSTALLATION OF MOISTURE VAPOR DISPERSANT SYSTEM A. Apply moisture vapor dispersant underlayment system to the subfloor under heat-welded seamless resilient sheet flooring. Install all materials, quantities and methods, in accordance with the manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations . B. Roll out the fibermat onto the concrete substrate. Apply laminate coat with a roller, to penetrate the fibermat a creat a laminating bond to the substrate. Allow to dry, 4 to 8 hours. Apply the finish sealer coat with a roller. Allow to dry, 2 to 4 hours . 3 . 04 INSTALLATION A. Comply with resilient sheet floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of floor covering installation included in Project . B. Lay out resilient sheet floor coverings to comply with the following requirements: 1 . Maintain uniformity of resilient sheet floor covering direction. 2 . Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but in no case less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-7 2980 F. Rod for Heat-Welding Seams : Product of floor covering manufacturer in color complying with the following requirement . 1 . Match field color of resilient sheet floor covering. G. Metal Edge Strips : Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of resilient sheet floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where installation of resilient sheet floor coverings will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with floor covering manufacturer' s requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following: 1 . Slab substrates are dry, moisture vapor emissions are within manufacturer's accepted limits, and slab substrates are free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and water vapor emission characteristics by performing the following tests: a. Bond test. b. Moisture Test Unit (calcium chloride test) developed by the Rubber Manufacturers Association, Inc. 2 . Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. 3 . Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive resilient sheet floor coverings. RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-6 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS A. Sheet Rubber Flooring: ASTM F1344 . Colors and patterns selected by Architect . 1 . Provide sheet rubber flooring with welded seams, Noraplan NP Mega with integral base, by Freudenberg Industries, Inc. Sheet flooring shall be 48 inches wide by 0 .080 inch thick. B. Filled Vinyl Sheet without Backing: Provide non- layered filled vinyl sheet with pattern and color extending through its full thickness and complying with Federal Standard L-F-475, Type II, Grade A requirements except for overall thickness, backing and dimensional stability requirements . Nominal thickness 0 .080 inches and 6 feet wide. 1 . Provide sheet vinyl with chemical seams, 72 inches wide, Possibilities of Armstrong. Provide epoxy seams in showers . 2 .02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Non staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds : Latex-modified, Portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Moisture Vapor Dispersant System: Provide a 3 part moisture vapor dispersant system consisting of a fibermat with a laminating coat and a finish coat, both of polymers and resins. Provide the moisture vapor dispersant system under all heat-welded seamless sheet vinyl flooring and heat-welded seamless rubber flooring. 1 . Product : Provide "Sealflex" by Sealflex Industries, Huntington Beach, CA. (no substitutions. ) D. Adhesives (Cements) : Water-resistant, stabilized type as recommended by flooring covering manufacturer to suit resilient sheet floor covering products and substrate conditions indicated. Provide polyurethane, epoxy or conductive epoxy as required by the application. Water-based products will not be accepted. E. Seam Sealer: Formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for products indicated. slirk, RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-5 2980 B. Do not install resilient sheet floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic while installing resilient sheet floor covering. 1 . 07 SCHEDULING A. Install resilient sheet floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Do not install resilient sheet floor coverings over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to pass calcium chloride moisture tests and bond tests in accordance with the specifications and as acceptable to the floor covering manufacturer. 1 . 08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents . 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form of each different composition, wearing surface, color, and pattern of resilient sheet floor covering installed. 1 .09 WARRANTY A. Provide a 3 year unqualified warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for the resilient sheet flooring, issued by the resilient sheet flooring manufacturer and the installer. B. Provide a 2 year warranty for the moisture vapor dispersant system, against defects in materials and workmanship and against delamination due to moisture vapor emissions . RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-4 2980 B. Single-Source Responsibility for Resilient Sheet Floor Coverings : Obtain each type, color, and pattern of resilient sheet floor covering from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. C. Product Compatibility: Provide primers, adhesives, sealants, underlayments, accessories and leveling compounds manufactured by or acceptable to the resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. D. Fire Performance Characteristics : Provide resilient sheet floor coverings with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0 .45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E648 . 2 . Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662 . 1 .05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver resilient sheet floor coverings and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) . C. Move resilient sheet floor coverings and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) in spaces to receive resilient sheet floor coverings for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) . RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-3 2980 2 . Resilient sheet flooring manufacturer' s and underlayment manufacturer ' s moisture and bond test procedures . 3 . Test results for all moisture and bond tests . 4 . Certification that all concrete substrate surfaces have been inspected and are free of coatings, curing agents, alkali, have the required texture and are in conformance with ASTM F710 and the sheet resilient flooring and underlayment manufacturers ' requirements D. Submit samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer' s color charts consisting of actual sections of resilient sheet floor coverings showing full range of colors and patterns available for each different product indicated. E. Submit samples for verification purposes in form of 6 inch by 9 inch sections of each different color and pattern of resilient sheet floor covering product specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. F. Submit Installer certificates signed by floor covering manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article. G. Certification for Fire Test Performance: Submit certification from independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that resilient flooring complies with fire test performance requirements . H. Submit maintenance data for resilient sheet floor coverings . I. Submit resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's 3 year unqualified warranty for both material and installation. J. Submit shop drawings showing cut locations . Indicate locations and type of edge strips. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer that is certified by the floor covering manufacturer as competent to install resilient sheet floor coverings and is competent in the technique for heat-welding seams . RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-2 2980 SECTION 09666 RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Sheet vinyl floor coverings . 2 . Rubber sheet flooring. 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Concrete: Finishing of concrete floor surfaces to receive resilient flooring. B. Section 09300 - Tile: Ceramic tile and ceramic base. C. Section 09660 - Resilient Tile Flooring - Rubber base, reducer strips and accessories D. Section 09680 - Carpet . E. Section 14240 - Hydraulic Elevators . 1. 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data for each type of product specified, including installation instructions . 1. Certification by floor covering manufacturer that products supplied for installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's) . 2 . Certification that flooring material falls within ATBCB guidelines for slip-resistance (static coefficient of friction greater than 0.6 for level surfaces, greater than 0.8 for ramps. ) B. Submit shop drawings showing location of seams and edge strips . Indicate location of columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in flooring. C. Submit the following for information only: 1. Plans showing the proposed moisture test and bond test locations, approved by the resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Identify each location by a unique designation. RESILIENT SHEET FLOOR COVERINGS 09666-1 2980 3 . Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer. 4 . Damp-mop tile to remove black marks and soil . B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer. 1 . Cover tiles with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 2 . Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels . C. Clean tiles not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project . Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-8 2980 C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures . Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles . 1 . Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. D. Where items are indicated for installing on top of finished tile floor, install tile before these items are installed. E. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings . F. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings . G. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. H. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finished floor areas . Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers . Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers . I. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed tile installation. J. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer' s directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times . K. Hand roll tiles where required by tile manufacturer. 3 .05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing tile installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturers . 2 . Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-7 2980 2 . Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. 3 . Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer' s installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive tile. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile manufacturer' s directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates . C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before tile installation. Following cleaning, examine and perform tests on substrates to determine if there is any evidence of moisture transmission, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust . Tests are to be performed no more than two weeks prior to installation of flooring. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3 .03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of tile installation included in Project. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-6 2980 b. Vinyl Cove Base; Johnsonite. c. Expressions Collection Base; Tarkett, Inc. B. Resilient Stringer Skirt : Cut to match riser and tread provided and to meet wall base height, of same material and color as base. C. Resilient Edge Strips : 1/8 inch thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors available; not less than 1 inch wide. 2 .04 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds : Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives (Cements) : Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient floor tile products and substrate conditions indicated. 1 . Use epoxy adhesive for solid vinyl tile. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with tile manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry, moisture vapor emissions are within manufacturer's accepted limits, and slab substrates are free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and water vapor emission characteristics by performing the following tests: a. Bond test. b. Moisture Test Unit (calcium chloride test) developed by the Rubber Manufacturers Association, Inc. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-5 2980 3 . For vinyl base: a. Armstrong Floor Division, Armstrong World Industries . b. Johnsonite. c. Mannington Commercial . d. Tarkett . 2 . 02 RESILIENT TILE A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F1066, Composition 1 (nonasbestos formulated) , 12 inch by 12 inch by 1/8 inch gage. Provide the following: 1 . Premium Excelon Stonetex; Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Slip-Resistant Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) : Federal Specification SS-T-312B(D) , Type IV, Composition 1; vinyl composition (non-asbestos) , 12 inch by 12 inch by 1/8 inch gage, with abrasive slip-resistant finish. Provide slip-resistant vinyl compostion tile on all ramps and sloped flooring surfaces where VCT is indicated. Provide one of the following: 1 . Premium Excelon Step Master Slip-Retardant Tile; Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2 . Azrock Slip-Resistant Tile; Azrock Floor Products Division, Azrock Industries, Inc. 3 . Safe-T-Tile; Tarkett, Inc. C. Rubber Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F1344, 24" x 24" square, 0 . 080" thick. 1 . RT-1 : Noraplan Plus. 2 . RT-2 : Norament 925B, Grano. 3 . RT-3 : Norament 825C, 1910, Hammered. 2 . 03 ACCESSORIES A. Vinyl Wall Base: Provide vinyl base complying with Federal Specification SS-W-40, Type II, with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units, and as follows : 1 . Height : 4 inches. 2 . Thickness: 1/8 inch gage. 3 . Style: Provide standard top-set cove base for use with resilient flooring or where sealed concrete is scheduled. Provide straight base without cove where carpet floor finish is scheduled. 4. Finish: Matte. 5. Colors : Selected by the Architect . 6. Provide one of the following: a. Standard Vinyl Wall Base or Colorite Wall Base; Armstrong World Industries, Inc. .� RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-4 2980 1 . 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) . B. Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by tile manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test . 1 .08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1 . Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each class, wearing surface, color, pattern and size of resilient floor tile installed. 2 . Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof of each different type and color of resilient wall base installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products of the following (no substitutions) : 1. For vinyl composition tile: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2 . For rubber tile, stair treads and risers: a. Freudenberg Industries, Inc. �3 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-3 2980 C. Submit samples for verification purposes in full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile and accessory specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics . D. Submit product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements . E. Submit shop drawings showing VCT grid with patterns and cut tile locations . Indicate locations and type of edge strips . F. Submit maintenance data for resilient flooring, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 . 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Products : Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Critical Radiant Flux: 0 .45 watts per square centimeter or more per ASTM E648 . 2 . Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662 . 1. 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) . C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-2 2980 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Vinyl composition floor tile. 2 . Rubber floor tile. 3 . Resilient wall base. 4 . Resilient stair accessories . 5 . Resilient flooring accessories. 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Concrete: Finishing of concrete floor surfaces to receive resilient flooring. B. Section 09300 - Tile: Ceramic tile and ceramic base. C. Section 09666 - Resilient Sheet Floor Coverings : Rubber sheet flooring. D. Section 09680 - Carpet . E. Section 14240 - Hydraulic Elevators : VCT in Service Elevator. 1 .03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data for each type of product specified. 1 . Submit certification by tile manufacturer that products supplied for tile installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's) . 2 . Certification that flooring material falls within ATBCB guidelines for slip-resistance (static coefficient of friction greater than 0 .6 for level surfaces, greater than 0 .8 for ramps. ) B. Submit samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles and accessories showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient floor tile indicated. p RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660-1 2980 rill 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be by trained personnel in accordance with the manufacturer' s printed instructions . Finished appearance shall be in exact conformance with the contract documents. Upon completion of each individual unit, bed and sand smooth all joints ready for painting. The entire assembly shall be rigid and shall present a smooth finished assembly ready to receive paint as specified under Section 09900 . END OF SECTION $3 GLASSFIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM UNITS 09540-3 2980 capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the work. B. Installer Qualifications : A firm with successful experience in the installation of GRG items similar to those required for this project . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (no substitutions) : 1 . DecoForm Corporation, Ontario, Canada. 2 . Formglass, Inc. , Ontario, Canada. 3 . Plastrglas, Inc. , Omaha, NE. 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Material Characteristics : 1 . Shell Thickness : 3/16 inch nominal (1/8 minimum) . 2 . Weight : Approximately 1 .5 lbs . per square foot (at 1/8 inch thickness) . 3 . Flexural Strength (ASTM C947) : 4, 000 psi, minimum. 4 . Tensile Strength: 1, 300 psi, minimum. 5 . Compressive Strength (ASTM C109) : 7, 000 psi, minimum. 6 . Impact Resistance (ASTM D256) : 12 . 9 ft .lbs . per square inch. 7 . Density: 90 lbs per cubic foot, minimum. 8 . Flammability; 0 flame spread; 0 smoke contribution; 0 fuel contributed (Class A per ASTM E84) . 9 . Glassfiber Content : Contiuous filament mat fiber or chopped strand fiber (5 to 6 percent by weight) . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Installation of finished materials shall begin only after glazing is complete and all exterior openings are closed. All wet work shall be completed and dry. No work shall be started until uniform temperatures of at least 60 degrees F is available. The Contractor shall be responsible for the examination of all materials and conditions, and shall not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. GLASSFIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM UNITS 09540-2 2980 SECTION 09540 GLASSFIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Glassfiber reinforced gypsum (GRG) column covers . 2 . Supporting members . 3 . Bedding and sanding at joints . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel . B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications . C. Section 09215 - Veneer Plaster. D. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Assemblies . E. Section 09900 - Painting. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for glassfiber reinforced gypsum units . B. Test Data: Submit tests establishing compliance with all performance characteristics of the specification. Where the specification requires specific thicknesses rather than actual performance requirements submit certification from the specified manufacturer that the specification will be met. C. Submit shop drawings in detail of all work in scale to indicate size, location and attachment methods required for the installation of the required work. D. Samples: Submit samples showing finished surface, thickness and joint detail. 1. 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications : Firm experienced in successfully producing GRG items similar to that _. indicated for this project, with sufficient production S3 GLASSFIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM UNITS 09540-1 2980 to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf (1957 N) of tension. 3 . When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 consecutively pass, and then will resume initial testing frequency. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect . D. Remove and replace those fasteners and anchors that test results indicate do not comply with requirements . 3 .05 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members . Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace acoustical ceiling units that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-12 2980 E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings . Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit . 1 . Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows : a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space. 2 . For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings . 3 . For reveal-edged panels, rabbet all field-cut edges of panels to form reveal-edge of same depth and width as factory formed edges. Use only special cutting tool such as the "Reveal Border Saw" by Interior Systems for field cutting reveal- edge panels. a. Paint the cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 4 . Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and in areas required by governing regulations, or for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required. 5 . Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance- rated assembly. 3 . 04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform field quality-control services . B. Extent and Testing Frequency: Testing will take place in successive stages in areas of extent described below. Do not proceed with installation of acoustical panel ceilings until test results for previously installed hangers show compliance with requirements. 1. Extent of Each Test Area: When the installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed. 2 . Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 powder-actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf (890 N) of tension; it will also select 1 of every 2 postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires $-3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-11 2980 2 . Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means . 3 . Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices . Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications . 4 . Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures . 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in anchors that extend through forms into concrete. 6 . Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs . 7 . Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8 . Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units . 1 . Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2 . Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 .18 mm in 3 . 66 m) . Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3 . Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS - 09510-10 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections . 1 . Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of acoustical tile to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half- width units at borders, and conform to the layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. C. Testing Substrates : Before installing adhesively applied tile on wet-placed substrates such as cast-in- place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer' s recommended limits. 3 .03 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard referenced below, per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook. " 1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C636. 2 . CISCA Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings : Comply with CISCA "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings. " B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system. gar ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-9 2980 less than 1 lb. per square foot, provide hold-down clips spaced 2 feet on centers on all cross tees . H. Impact Clips : Where indicated provide manufacturer' s standard impact clip system design to absorb impact forces against lay-in panels . I. Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Double Web Steel Suspension System: Manufacturer' s standard system roll-formed from prefinished cold-rolled steel sheet with 15/16 inch wide exposed faces on structural members; other characteristics as follows : 1 . Structural Classification: Intermediate-Duty System. 2 . Finish: Painted, white. J. Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Narrow Face Double Web Steel Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard system roll formed from prefinished cold-rolled steel sheet to produce structural members with 9/16 inch wide exposed faces; other characteristics as follows : 1 . Face Design: Flush faces without slot or reveal, with device built into runners to center panels in openings . 2 . Structural Classification: Intermediate-Duty System. 3 . Finish: Painted, white. K. Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Extruded Aluminum Suspension System: Manufacturer' s standard system fabricated from aluminum extrusions of profile indicated; other characteristics as follows : 1 . Face Design: Flush exposed faces without slot or reveal . 2 . Structural Classification: Intermediate-Duty System. 3 . Finish: Painted, white. 2 . 04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Acoustical Sealant: Resilient, non-staining, nonshrinking, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, nonsag sealant intended for interior sealing of concealed construction joints. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. BA-98; Pecora Corp. 2 . Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Tremco. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-8 2980 2 . Manufacturers of Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Extruded Aluminum Suspension Systems: a. Alumax, Magnolia Div. , Alumax Aluminum Corp. b. Donn Ceiling Suspension Systems of USG Interiors, Inc. c. Technical Ceiling Systems, Inc . B. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems : Provide metal suspension systems of type, structural classification and finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C635 requirements . C. Finishes and Colors : Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. For exposed suspension members and accessories with painted finish, provide color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors . 1 . High Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high humidity finishes are indicated. D. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung. 1 . Concrete Inserts : Inserts formed from hot-dipped galvanized sheet steel and designed for attachment to concrete forms and for embedment in concrete, with holes or loops for attachment at hanger wires . E. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A641, soft temper, prestretched, Class 1 coating, sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung) , will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 gage. 1 . Provide stainless steel hanger wire when aluminum suspension systems are indicated. F. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded plastic of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, provide manufacturer's standard molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling which fits with type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. 1. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 2 . For narrow faced suspension systems, provide suspension system manufacturer's standard edge moldings which match width and configuration of exposed runners . G. Hold-Down Clips for Non-Fire-Rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings composed of lay-in panels weighing ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-7 2980 3 . Type ACT-3 : Armstrong VL Fire Guard, Pattern No. 868 or equal . a. Size: 24 by 24 by 5/8 inch. b. Edge Detail : Square. c. CAC: Minimum 35 . d. NRC: 0 . 60 . e. Light Reflectance: LR-1 (75 percent or over) . f. Color: White. 4 . Type ACT-4 : Armstrong Cortega, Pattern No. 704 or equal . a. Size: 24 by 24 by 5/8 inch. b. Edge Detail: Angled tegular. c. CAC: Minimum 35 . d. NRC: 0 .55 . e. Light Reflectance: LR-1 (75 percent or over) . f. Color: White. 5 . Type ACT-5: Armstrong Tegular Painted Nubby, Pattern No. 79013 or equal . a. Size: 24 by 24 by 1-1/2 inch. b. Edge Detail : Tegular edge. c. CSTC: Minimum 25. d. NRC: 1 . 00 . e. Light Reflectance: Minimum LR 0 .75 . f. Color: White. 6 . Type ACT-6 : Armstrong Cortega, Pattern No. 703 or equal . a. Size: 24 by 48 by 5/8 inch. b. Edge Detail: Square. C. CAC: Minimum 35. d. NRC: 0 .55. e. Light Reflectance: LR-1 (75 percent or over) . f. Color: White. 3 . Type ACT-3 : Armstrong VL Fire Guard, Pattern No. 870 or equal . a. Size: 24 by 48 by 5/8 inch. b. Edge Detail: Square. c. CAC: Minimum 35. d. NRC: 0 .60 . e. Light Reflectance: LR-1 (75 percent or over) . f. Color: White. 2 . 03 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Manufacturers of Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Double Web Steel Suspension Systems: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. Donn Ceiling Suspension Systems of USG Interiors, Inc. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1 ! 09510-6 2980 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer' s standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) : Type E-400 (plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches [400 mm] away from the test surface) per ASTM E795 . 2 . Test Method for Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) : Where acoustical panel ceilings are specified to have a CAC, provide units identical to those tested per ASTM E1414 by a qualified testing agency. B. Colors and Patterns : Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 2 .02 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide acoustical ceiling panels by one of the following: 1 . Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2 . The Celotex Corporation. 3 . USG Acoustical Products Company. B. Refer to the Room Finish Schedule for locations of "Types" of acoustical ceiling panels listed. Provide products listed or equivalent products by approved manufacturers . 1 . Type ACT-1: Armstrong Cortega, Pattern No. 2195 or equal. a. Size: 24 by 24 by 5/8 inch. b. Edge Detail: Beveled tegular. c. CAC: Minimum 35 . d. NRC: 0 .55. e. Light Reflectance: LR-1 (75 percent or over) . f. Color: White. 2 . Type ACT-2 : Armstrong Cortega, Pattern No. 704 or equal. a. Size: 24 by 24 by 5/8 inch. b. Edge Detail: Angled tegular. c. CAC: Minimum 35. d. NRC: 0 .55. e. Light Reflectance: LR-1 (75 percent or over) . f. Color: White. � ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-5 2980 fire-suppression system components (if any) , and partition assemblies (if any) . G. Seismic Restraint : Provide acoustical ceiling components which comply with the requirements of ASTM E580 "Standard Practice for Applcation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint . " 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes . B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content . C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1 .06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations : Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1 . Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2 percent of amount installed. 2 . Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of amount installed. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-4 2980 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced Installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics : Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements : 1 . Fire-response tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Qualified testing and inspecting agencies include Underwriters Laboratories (UL) , Warnock Hersey, or another agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow- up services . 2 . Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84 . 3 . Acoustical panel ceilings indicated are identical in materials and construction to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 . 4 . Fire-resistance-rated, acoustical panel ceilings are indicated by design designations listed in the UL "Fire Resistance Directory, " in the Warnock Hersey "Certification Listings, " or in the listing of another qualified testing and inspecting agency. 5. Products are identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings. " F. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, �a3 ACOUSTICAL TI US EILINGS C C 09510-3 2980 C. Coordination Drawings : Comply with requirements of Section 01040 and participate in production of coordination drawings specified therein. Provide acoustical ceiling layout on coordination drawings, drawn accurately to scale and coordinated with other work. 1 . Approved coordination drawings may be submitted for shop drawing submittal if supplemented with details showing method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure. D. Submit samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual acoustical panels or sections of panels and sections of suspension system members showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each ceiling assembly indicated. E. Submit samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1 . 6 inch (150 mm) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 2 . Set of 12 inch (300 mm) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. 3 . Set of 12 inch (300 mm) long samples of exposed moldings for each color and system type required. F. Submit qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. G. Submit product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency that are based on its testing of current products for compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with requirements . H. Submit research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that show compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with the building code in effect for the Project. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-2 2980 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Acoustical lay-in panel ceilings with exposed suspension systems . 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01040 - Coordination: Coordination drawings . B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum board ceilings . C. Section 09540 - Reinforced Gypsum Units . D. Division 15 - Fire Protection: Sprinkler heads in acoustical ceilings . E. Division 15 - Heating, ventilating, And Air Conditioning: Grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings . F. Division 16 - Electrical: Lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings . 1 .03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data for each type of product specified B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and showing penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension system members . 2 . Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure. 3 . Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers; and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction. 4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-1 2980 C. At completion of installation work, remove all tools, equipment, containers and debris from job and leave work areas broom clean. ; D. Replace or restore work of other trades damaged or soiled by the tile work. END OF SECTION i TILE 09300-12 2980 3 . 04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Close spaces in which tile is being set to traffic and other work. Keep closed until the is firmly set . B. Newly tiled floors shall not be walked on or worked on without using kneeling boards or equivalent protection of the tiled surface. C. Tile setting materials shall not be applied to surfaces that contain frost. Tile shall not be installed in areas where the temperature is not maintained above 50 degrees F. or where the temperature of the backing is above 100 degrees F. D. Completed installation shall be free of broken, damaged or faulty tile. 3 . 05 ADJUSTING A. Correction of Defective Work: For a period of one year following Substantial Completion, return to the job and correct all defective work. Defective work includes, without limitation, tiles broken in normal use due to deficiencies in the setting bed, loose tile or loose grout and all other defects which may develop as a consequence of poor workmanship or defective materials. B. Nothing in the above paragraph shall alter or reduce the Contractor' s obligation to perform the Work of this Contract fully, or reduce the Owner's rights under law to recover damages during the full statutory period allowed for the Contractor's failure to perform. 3 .06 CLEAN-UP A. Keep work areas clean during progress of tile installation. Remove empty cartons and sweep out excess mortar and other debris daily. B. Upon completion of setting and grouting, thoroughly sponge, and wash tile. Finally polish glazed tile with clean, dry cloths. TILE 09300-11 2980 B. Waterproofing for Ceramic Tile Applications : 1 . Install waterproofing in compliance with waterproofing manufacturer' s instructions to produce a waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. 2 . Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight . C. Metal Edge Strips : Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood or other flooring which finishes flush with top of tile. D. Center and balance areas of tile, if possible. 1 . An excessive amount of cuts shall not be made . Usually, no cuts smaller than half size should be made. Make all cuts on the outer edges of the field. 2 . Smooth cut edges . Install tile without jagged or flaked edges . 3 . Fit tile closely where edges will be covered by trim, escutcheons or other similar devices . 4 . The splitting of tile is expressly prohibited except where no alternative is possible. E. Maintain the heights of tile work in full courses to the nearest obtainable dimension where the heights are given in feet and inches and are not required to fill vertical spaces exactly. F. Make corners of all tile flush and level with corners of adjacent tile, with due allowance to tolerances for tile. Form internal wall corners square and external corners bullnosed. Keep all joint lines straight and of even width, including miters . G. Thoroughly back-up with thin-set bonding material all thin-set trim units, molded or shaped pieces and secure firmly in place. H. Finish floor and wall areas level and plumb with no variations exceeding 1/8 inch in 8 feet from the required plane. 1. Sound tile after setting. Remove and replace hollow sounding units. I. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. 1. Grout ceramic tiles and ceramic mosaic tiles with Latex-Portland grout in accordance with grout manufacturer's instructions and ANSI A108.10 . 2 . Grout quarry tiles with epoxy grout in accordance with ANSI 108.6. TILE 09300-10 2980 1 . Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds . 2 . Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3 . Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Maximum variation in surfaces to receive tile shall be as follows : 1 . Prior to installing floor tile, ensure surfaces are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2 . Prior to installing wall tile, ensure surfaces are plumb and straight, with maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch in 8 feet . 3 .02 PREPARATION A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples . If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3 .03 INSTALLATION A. Thinset Methods : 1. Install ceramic floor tile over the following floor substrates in accordance with ANSI A108 .5 using Latex Portland cement mortar. a. Concrete: TCA Method F113 . b. Concrete (Waterproof Membrane) : TCA Method F122 . 2 . Install ceramic wall tile over the following wall substrates in accordance with ANSI A108.5 using Latex Portland cement mortar. a. Concrete Block: TCA Method W202 . b. Cementitious Backer Board: TCA Method W244. 1) Treat joints of cementitious backer board units to comply with manufacturer' s instructions. 3 . Mix and proportion bond coat and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations . TILE 09300-9 2980 3 . "Laticrete 4237 with 211 Crete Filler Powder" by Laticrete International . C. Bond Coat over gypsum board: Organic adhesive con- forming to ANSI A136. 1, Type I . Provide one of the following or equal : 1 . "Ultra/Mastic 1" by Mapei Corporation. 2 . "Hydroment 7001" Type 1 mastic by Bostik Construction Products Division. 3 . "Laticrete 15 Mastic" by Laticrete International . D. Grout for Ceramic Tile: Latex-Portland cement grout conforming to ANSI A118 . 6. Color of grout shall be selected by Architect. Provide one of the following or equal : 1 . Plastijoints with Keracolor; by Mapei Corporation. 2 . Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout with Hydroment 428 Flexible Grout Admixture; by Bostik Construction Products Division. 3 . Laticrete Sanded (500 Series) or Unsanded (600 Series) Grout and Joint Filler with Laticrete 1776 Grout Admix Plus; by Laticrete International . E. Metal Edge Strips: Zinc alloy or stainless steel terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch wide at top edge with integral provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate. F. Water shall be clean, fresh and free of deleterious substances . 2 .05 MIXES A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers for accurately proportioning of materials, water or additive content, mixing equipment and mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for applications indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. TILE 09300-8 2980 2 . Nominal Facial Dimensions : 6 inches by 6 inches and 12 inches by 12 inches . Refer to drawings and Finish Schedule for locations . 3 . Nominal Thickness : 1/2 inch. 4 . Face: Plain. 5 . All trim shall match field tile. D. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements : 1 . Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. 2 . Shapes : As follows, selected from manufacturer' s standard shapes: a. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations : Straight. b. Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations : Surface bullnose. c. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions : Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above. d. External Corners for Thinset Installations : Surface bullnose. e. Internal Corners : Field-butted square corners, except use coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes. f. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness, tapered to provide a reduction in thickness from 1/2 inch to 1/4 inch across nominal 4 inch dimension. 2 .04 SETTING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Waterproof Membrane: Provide one of the following or equal: 1. "Hydroment Ultra-Set" integral waterproofing membrane by Bostik Construction Products Division. 2 . "Planicrete W" by Mapei Corporation. a. Accessories: Flexible PVC (0 .030 inches thick) reinforcing material. 3 . "Laticrete 9235" Waterproof Membrane by Laticrete International. B. Bond coat for tile over cast-in-place concrete, over masonry walls and over cementitious backer board: Latex-Portland cement mortar conforming to ANSI A118.4. Provide one of the following or equal: 1. "Keralastic/Kerabond" by Mapei Corporation. 2 . "Hydroment Flex-A-Lastic #447/Tile Mate" by Bostik Construction Products Division. T �( ILE 09300-7 2980 2 . Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples . E. Mounting: Where factory--mounted tile is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated. F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot . Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces . 2 . 03 TILE MATERIALS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Standard Grade ceramic mosaic tile conforming to ANSI A137 . 1. Provide colors and patterns as indicated on the Drawings. Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying with the following requirements: 1 . Composition: Porcelain. 2 . Nominal Facial Dimensions : 2 inches by 2 inches . 3 . Nominal Thickness : 1/4 inch. 4 . Face: Plain with cushion edges at corner. 5 . Provide matching coved base. B. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile: Standard Grade, conforming to ANSI A137 .1 . Provide bright glazed or matte glazed wall tile in colors and patterns indicated on the Drawings . Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements: 1 . Nominal Facial Dimensions : 4-1/4 inches by 4-1/4 inches . 2 . Nominal Thickness: 5/16 inch. 3 . Face: Plain with modified square edge. 4 . Mounting: Factory back-mounted. C. Unglazed Large Porcelain Bodied Tile: Standard Grade conforming to ANSI A137 .1; Cerim Floor-Gres Tile Company or equal . Provide square-edged flat tile complying with the following requirements : 1. Wearing Surface: Abrasive aggregate embedded in surface. TILE 09300-6 2980 D. Provide a minimum of 40 foot candles of lighting on surfaces to be tiled. Simulate finished lighting conditions for the installation of wall tile. 1 .09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents . 1. Tile and Trim Units : Furnish quantity of full- size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal : 1 . Tile: a. Refer to Room Finish Schedule for required manufacturer (no substitutions) . 2 . Mortars and Grouts : a. Bostik Construction Products Division. b. Laticrete International Inc. c. Mapei Corporation. 2 . 02 TILE A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137 .1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. 1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials : Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. Match Architect ' s sample. TILE 09300-5 1 IN 2980 mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1 . Locate mock-ups on site in location and size indicated or, if not indicated, directed by Architect . 2 . Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 3 . Obtain Architect ' s acceptance of mock-ups before start of final unit of Work. 4 . Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed unit of Work. a. Accepted mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may become part of completed unit of Work. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" . 1 . 07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137 .1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes . C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units . If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations . B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. C. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 degrees F in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. TILE 09300-4 2980 D. Samples for Verification Purposes : Submit the following: 1 . Samples for each type of tile and for each color and texture required, not less than 24 inches square on cementitious backer board and grouted. 2 . Full size samples for each type of trim, accessory and for each color. 3 . Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 4 . Samples of metal edge strip in 6-inch lengths . E. Certification: Furnish Master Grade Certificates for each shipment and type of tile, signed by manufacturer and Installer. F. Certified Test Reports : Submit certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of tile and tile setting products with requirements specified based on comprehensive testing of current products . Include in reports testing laboratory' s interpretation of test results relative to specified requirements . G. Submit qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. 1 .06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Waterproofing, Setting and Grouting Materials : Obtain preblended aggregate and cement materials and admixtures of a uniform quality frcm one manufacturer. C. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. D. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Before installing tile, erect mock-ups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build (� TILE 09300-3 2980 F. ANSI A118 . 10 Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone ^? Installations . G. ANSI A136 .1 Specifications for Organic Adhesives For Installation of Ceramic Tile. H. ANSI A137 .1 Specifications for Ceramic Tile. I. ASTM C503 Specification for Marble Building Stone (Exterior) . 1 . 04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ceramic wall tile, installed over gypsum backer board using organic adhesive and over concrete block or concrete backer board using Latex-Portland cement mortar, with Latex-Portland cement grouted joints . B. Ceramic mosaic floor tile, installed over concrete floor slabs using Latex-Portland cement mortar, with Latex-Portland cement grouted joints . C. Large porcelain bodied tile using Latex-Portland cement mortar with Latex-Portland cement grouted joints . 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's technical information for materials required, except bulk materials. B. Submit shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in the substrates and finished tile surfaces. 1 . Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring, record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations, in consultation with Architect. C. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of tile indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color section. TILE 09300-2 2980 SECTION 09300 TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 2 . Glazed wall tile. 3 . Large porcelain bodied tile. Refer to Section 01020, Allowances, for the allowance for this material . 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates . B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers : Mildew-resistant silicone sealant . C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Cementitious and gypsum backer units specified for tile substrates . D. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories . E. Division 15 - Plumbing: Plumbing fixtures . 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.4 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. B. ANSI A108 .5 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. C. ANSI A108.10 Installation of Grout in Tilework. D. ANSI A118 .4 Specifications for Latex Portland Cement Mortar. E. ANSI A118.6 Specifications for Ceramic Tile Grouts. p� TILE 09300-1 2980 openings in base) , and sand between coats and after last coat : 1 . Embedding and First Coat : Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or taping compound. 2 . Fill (Second) Coat : Ready-mix drying-type all- purpose or topping compound. 3 . Finish (Third) Coat : Ready-mix drying-type all- purpose or topping compound. E. Finish exterior gypsum soffit board by using setting- type joint compounds to prefill joints, embed tape, and to apply first, fill (second) and finish (third) coats; smooth each coat before joint compound hardens to minimize need for sanding; sand between coats and after finish coat . F. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer' s recommendations for treatment of joints behind tile. G. Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall construction which is indicated for drywall finishing or which requires finishing to achieve fire-resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier. 3 .12 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Defects or damage in the gypsum board surfaces shall be repaired or replaced before final painting operations are started. The resulting repaired area shall be flat, true and plumb with adjacent surfaces and shall have a smooth surface ready for decoration. B. Remove all waste and debris caused by the work of this section. Clean all floors and other surfaces soiled by joint compound material. END OF SECTION $0� GYPSUM BOARD 09250-25 2980 exceed a distance of 50 feet in either direction, between ceiling control (expansion) joints and install , a control (expansion) joint where ceiling framing or furring changes direction. Do not exceed a distance of 30 feet between control (expansion) joints in walls or furring, and install a control (expansion) joint where a control (expansion) joint occurs in the base exterior wall . Wall or partition height door frames may be considered a control joint . 1. Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated at spacings and locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by the Architect for visual effect . 3 .10 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL SEALANTS A. Install acoustical sealants where indicated, in accordance with the sealant manufacturer' s printed instructions . 1 . Seal all joints between "acoustical partition" work and adjoining gypsum panels at corners and intersections . 2 . Seal perimeters of all projections through "acoustical" gypsum board installations, such as pipes and conduits . 3 . Seal perimeters of all frames, and other items set into "acoustical" gypsum board installations . 4 . Seal in back of all control joints in "acoustical" gypsum board installations . B. Perform all acoustical sealing indicated or required to produce maximum noise transmission reduction through "acoustical" partitions . 3 .11 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD A. Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions) ; flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. B. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting-type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. D. Finish interior gypsum board by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not including prefill of GYPSUM BOARD 09250-24 2980 face of structural beams, floor edges and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thick gypsum board cants covering tops of projections as follows : 1 . Slope cant panels not more than 15 degrees from vertical . Set base-edge of panels in gypsum board adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches on center with screws fastened to shaft wall framing. 2 . Where cant exceed 2 inches, support gypsum board with steel studs spaced 24 inches on centers; extend studs from top of projection to shaft wall framing behind cant . 3 .09 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports . Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer' s recommendations . B. Place corner beads at external corners . Use longest practical lengths . Place edge trim where gypsum board abutts dissimilar materials . Use screws to attach all accessories . C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where "U-bead" (semi-finishing type) is indicated. 1 . Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2 . Install "LK" bead where substrate is kerfed to receive long flange of trim. 3 . Install "L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed. 4. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled (including expansion joints) . D. Install U-bead where indicated, and where exterior gypsum board edges are not covered by applied moldings or indicated to receive edge trim with face flanges covered with joint compound. E. Install plastic edge trim where indicated on wall panels at juncture with ceilings. F. Install control (expansion) joints in ceilings exceeding 2500 square feet in area and in partition, wall and wall furring runs exceeding 30 feet. Do not P4 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-23 2980 directly by regular framing of gypsum board shaft wall system. 1 . Support elevator hoistway door frames independently of shaft wall framing system, or reinforce system in accordance with system manufacturer' s instructions . 2 . Where handrails are indicated for direct attachment to gypsum board shaft wall system, provide not less than a 0 .0341 inch thick by 4 inch wide galvanized steel reinforcement strip, accurately positioned and secured behind not less than one gypsum board face layer of 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thickness . D. When top track (J-runner) is indicated to be fastened to the under side of a structural steel member, secure at 24 inches on center maximum, to bottom flange of beam. If the partition is offset from the beam, provide a continuous 14 gage steel plate secured at 24 inches on center maximum, to the bottom flange of the beam. Tracks and plates shall be installed prior to the application of sprayed-on fireproofing. E. Coordinate gypsum board shaft wall construction with sprayed-on fireproofing of the structure, so that both remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed-on fireproofing removed or damaged during the installation of the shaft wall system. F. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft wall system where indicated (and where possible) ; by locating cavity of system as required to enclose rods . G. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire resistance rating of entire shaft wall assembly by installing supplementary fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items . H. Isolate shaft wall system from transfer of structural loading to system, both horizontally and vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. Comply with details shown and with manufacturer's instructions. I. Seal gypsum board shaft walls at perimeter of each section which abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each section. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; comply with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C919 . J. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft wall system cannot be positioned within 2 inches of shaft GYPSUM BOARD 09250-22 2980 1 . On ceilings apply base layer prior to application of base layer on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Offset joints between layers at least 10 inches . Apply base layers at right angles to supports unless otherwise indicated. 2 . On partitions/walls apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 10 inches with base layer joints . 3 . On Z-furring members apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members . E. Single-Layer Fastening Method: Fasten with screws . F. Double-Layer Fastening Methods : Apply base layer and face layer to base layer as follows: 1. _ Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. G. Direct-Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum board is indicated to be directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joints, furring members or base layer of gypsum board) , comply with gypsum board manufacturer' s recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening adhesive has set . H. Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit ,board perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered over supports. Install with 1/4 inch open space where boards abut other construction. 1. Fasten with cadmium-plated screws . 3 . 08 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS A. Install gypsum board shaft wall systems to comply with performance and other requirements indicated as well as with manufacturer's installation instructions and ASTM C754 for installation of steel framing. B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall system, frame both sides of joints with furring and other support as indicated. C. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing to support gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be adequately supported GYPSUM BOARD 09250-21 2980 to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant . N. Where sound-rated drywall construction is indicated, seal construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions . Comply with ASTM C919 and manufacturer' s recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound-flanking paths around or through construction, including sealing of partitions above acoustic ceilings . 0. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3 . 07 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum board as follows : 1 . On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible. 2 . On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing) , unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints . B. Tile Backer Board: At showers, tubs and similar "wet areas" where ceramic tile is indicated, provide tile backer board units . Joint treatment is work of Section 09300 . 1 . Change to moisture resistant board beyond the "wet area" at an inside or an outside corner only, except where indicated otherwise. 2 . Provide metal stud back-up at all horizontal and vertical joints in cementitious backer board units . C. Moisture Resistant Board: Install moisture-resistant gypsum board with tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface at the following locations : 1 . Where gypsum board is indicated as backer board for thin-set ceramic tile. 2 . Where epoxy paint, and similar rigid applied wall finishes are indicated. 3 . For walls or partition adjacent to or behind plumbing fixtures, D. Double-Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layer and gypsum wallboard for face layer. GYPSUM BOARD 09250-20 2980 which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches . E. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs . F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out . Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards . Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards . Do not force into place. G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints . Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends . Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends . Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first . I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts . J. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into frame. K. Form control joints in accordance with referenced standards at location as directed by Architect . L. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc. ) , except in chase walls which are braced internally. 1. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 2 . Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, cut gypsum board to fit profile of coffers and allow 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joint for sealant. M. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments . Provide 1/4 inch gor GYPSUM BOARD 09250-19 2980 inch type S-12 pan head screws, two at top and two at bottom, with one screw in each flange. 1 . Provide a slip track system to allow for live load deflection under all beams and structures . Allow 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch clearance between top of studs and runner. Do not fasten studs to top runner. Install 1-1/2 inch cold-rolled channel lateral bracing within 10 inch to 12 inch of tops of studs . Connect bracing to each stud using welded or screw attached clip angle. Brace lateral bracing back to top of floor joist or beam with 1-1/2 inch cold-rolled channels at 4 feet on centers . Provide additional bracing as required by the structural design. 2 . Provide multiple jamb, head and sill studs or additional steel reinforcing at openings in exterior wall framing as required by structural design. C. Apply gypsum sheathing horizontally and screw attach to exterior face of each stud with 1 inch long type S-12 screws, spaced 3/8 inches from ends and edges and approximately 8 inches on center along each stud. All sheathing at each floor shall be started with a factory edge; no cut edges will be accepted. 1 . Prime and tape all joints and fasteners with primer and seam seal tape specified, in accordance with manufacturer's printed application instructions . 2 . Air Infiltration Barrier Application: Cover gypsum sheathing with air infiltration barrier to comply with manufacturer' s printed application instructions . 3 . 06 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and GA-216 . All fire rated partitions shall conform to the requirements of the U.L. Designs indicated. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board. D. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints, and GYPSUM BOARD 09250-18 2980 members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and minimum loading requirements specified: 1 . Spacing: 16 inches on centers . E. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and so that leading edges or ends of each gypsum board can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first . F. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs . 1 . Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 2 . Provide two 20 gage steel studs at each jamb. G. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated, or if none indicated, in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads . 3 .05 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR EXTERIOR WALLS A. Align runner track accurately according to exterior wall layout and secure to base and head with power driven fastener spaced a minimum of one fastener every 16 inches on center unless a closer spacing is required by structural design. 1. Where top runner (track) is indicated to be fastened to the underside of metal decking, provide a continuous 14 gage steel plate to underside of metal deck. Fill flutes between deck and steel plate with safing insulation. B. Position metal studs vertically in runners and space no greater than 16 inches on centers and 12 inches on center within 10 feet of inside and outside corners . Securely anchor each stud to runners with four 3/8 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-17 2980 F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces . Mechanically join main beam and cross- furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. G. For exterior soffits, use only angle-type hangers and install cross-bracing and additional framing to resist wind uplift according to details on Drawings . 3 . 04 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR INTERIOR PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction. 1 . Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall . 2 . When top runner (track) is indicated to be fastened to the under side of metal decking, provide continuous 20 gage steel plate to underside of metal deck. Fill flute voids between metal deck and plate with safing insulation. 3 . When top runner (track) is indicated to be fastened to the under side of a structural steel member, secure 20 gage steel Z-clips at 24 inches on center maximum, to bottom flange of beam. If the partition is offset from the beam, provide a continuous 14 gage steel plate secured at 24 inches on center maximum, to the bottom flange of the beam. Clips and plates shall be installed prior to the application of sprayed-on fireproofing. B. Installation Tolerances : Install each steel framing and furring members so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at a particular height above suspended ceilings. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1 . For STC-rated and fire-resistive-rated partitions requiring partitions to extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other GYPSUM BOARD 09250-16 2980 interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices . Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards . 3 . Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures . 4 . Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorace or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures . 5 . Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms . Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms . 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs . 7 . Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard. 1 . Wire Hangers : 0 .1620 inch (8 gage) diameter, 4 feet o.c. 2 . Carrying Channels (Main Runners) : 1-1/2 inch, 4 feet o.c. 3 . Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members) : 16 inches o.c . D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. E. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports. GYPSUM BOARD 09250-15 2980 surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. Where offset anchor plates are required provide continuous units fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches on center and to ceiling runners . D. After sprayed-on fireproofing has been applied, remove only as much fireproofing as needed to complete installation of drywall construction. Protect fireproofing that remains from damage. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with ASTM C840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Company. C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure, at locations indicated, to comply with details shown on Drawings . 1 . Provide 1/2 inch slip or cushioned type joints at the top of all full height partitions to avoid axial loading. D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members . 3 . 03 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 1 . Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2 . Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that GYPSUM BOARD 09250-14 2980 D. Asphalt Felt: ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15) . F. Sound Attenuation Blankets (Acoustical Insulation) : Unfaced mineral fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing) . 1 . Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. I. Fasteners : 1 . Screws for attachment of gypsum board to light- gage steel studs and metal furring shall be Type S, self drilling Phillips head drywall screws conforming to ASTM C1002 . 2 . Screws for attachment of gypsum board to heavier gage steel studs and for attaching metal studs to pressed metal frames shall be Type 5-12, self- tapping, Phillips head drywall screws conforming to ASTM C954 . Screws for attaching gypsum sheath- ing and veneer anchors shall be cadmium plated. 3 . Corrosion-resistant-coated steel drill screws of size and type recommended by board manufacturer for fastening cementitious backer units . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Examine substrates which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, including preset hollow metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Ceiling Anchorages : Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated, to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination with other construction. C. Before sprayed-on fireproofing is applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to 7 GYPSUM BOARD 09250-13 mom 11 1 2980 3 . Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats . 4 . All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds . E. Joint Compound for Cementitious Backer Unit : Material recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer. F. Joint Tape for Glass-Fiber-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing Board: Polyken 610 seam seal tape with Polyken P-500 Primer by Polyken Technologies, Westwood, MA. 2 . 07 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Latex Acoustical Sealant : Manufacturer' s standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834 and the following requirements: 1 . Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E90 . B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints : Manufacturer' s standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. C. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or equal : 1 . Acoustical Sealant : a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant, Pecora Corp. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant, United States Gypsum Co. 2 . Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. BA-98, Pecora Corp. b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Tremco, Inc. 2 .08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board. B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum boards . C. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting-type joint compound of type recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames. GYPSUM BOARD 09250-12 2980 2 . Edge trim complying with ASTM C1047, formed from rolled zinc, shape LC-Bead per Fig. 1, unless otherwise indicated. C. Aluminum Accessories : Where indicated, provide manufacturer' s standard extruded aluminum accessories of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer' s product designations, complying with the following requirements: 1 . Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B221 for alloy and temper 6063-T5 . 2 . Baked Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating of acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate; Organic Coating: as specified below) . Apply baked enamel according to paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying organic . coating. 3 . Color: As selected by Architect . 4 . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide aluminum accessories of one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. MM Systems, Inc. d. Pittcon Industries. 2 . 06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. C. Joint Tape for Cementitious Backer Units : Polymer- coated, open glass-fiber mesh. D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-prepackaged vinyl based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. 2 . Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories . GYPSUM BOARD 09250-11 2980 c. Product : Dens-Shield Tile Backer units by Georgia Pacific Corp. 2 . Cementitious Backer Units : ANSI A118 . 9, of thickness and width indicated below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints . a. Thickness : Manufacturer's standard thickness but not less than 7/16 inch. b. Width: Manufacturer' s standard width but not less than 32 inches . c. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products or equal : 1) DomCrete Cementitious Tile-Backer Board, Domtar Gypsum. 2) DUROCK Interior Cement Board; Durabond Div. , USG Industries, Inc. 3) Wonder-Board; Glascrete, Inc . 2 . 05 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim and control joints complying with ASTM C1047 and requirements indicated below: 1 . Material : Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirement : a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process . 2 . Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C1047 : a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. c. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L-bead where indicated. d. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated. e. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. B. Zinc Accessories for Exterior Ceilings: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints formed from rolled zinc complying with ASTM C1047, in shapes indicated below by reference to ASTM C1047 : 1. Corner bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM BOARD 09250-10 2980 end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1 . Widths : Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches ('1219 r:-Lii . B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36 and as follows : 1 . Type: a. Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Type X where required for fire- resistance-rated assemblies . c. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces . 2 . Edges : Tapered. 3 . Thickness: As indicated. C. Gypsum Shaft Wall Board: ASTM C442, Type X liner panel or coreboard designed for shaft wall construction, with moisture-resistant paper facings . D. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630; thickness as indicated, gypsum core and facing paper treated to withstand moisture and high humidity. Use fire rated moisture resistant gypsum board in fire rated partitions . E. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C931, with manufacturer's standard edges, of type and thickness indicated below: 1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance- rated assemblies and where indicated. 3 . Thickness: 1/2 inch 1.12 .7 rtm) , unless otherwise indicated. F. Glass-Fiber-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C1177, gypsum sheathing board consisting of noncombustible gypsum core incorporating a water- resistant material, surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass fiber mats, and with unsurfaced square edges. 1. Type: Regular (not Type X) . 2 . Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3 . Size: 4 feet by 8 feet. 4. Product: "Dens-Glass Gold" by Georgia-Pacific Corporation. G. Tile Backer Board: At Contractor' s option, provide one of the following: 1. Glass-Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C1178, of type and thickness indicated below: a. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick, for fire-resistive-rated assemblies. GYPSUM BOARD 09250-9 2980 D. Exterior Wall Studs and Runners : ASTM C645, with stiffened flanges for more load capacity (USG SJ style or equal) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1 . Stud and Sill Track Thickness : 0 . 0568 inch (16 gage) minimum. 2 . Depth: 6 inches . 3 . Finish: Zinc coated (ASTM A525 with minimum G60 coating) . 4 . Deep Leg (Slip) Track: 0 . 0747 inch (14 gage) minimum. E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels : ASTM C645, hat-shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows : 1 . Thickness : 0 . 0179 (25 gage) . 2 . Depth: 7/8 inch. F. Furring Brackets : Serrated-arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion-resistant steel sheet complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0 . 0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. G. Steel Resilient Furring Channels : Manufacturer ' s standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, complying with ASTM C645 for base metal, finish and widths of face and fastening flange, fabricated to form 1/2 inch deep channel of the following configuration: 1 . Single-Leg Configuration; Assymetric-shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web) . 2 . Double-Leg Configuration: Hat-shaped channel, with 1-1/2 inch wide face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs (webs) . 3 . Configuration: Either one indicated above. H. Fasteners : Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated. 2 . 04 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. General : Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end-to- GYPSUM BOARD 09250-8 2980 flanges, protected with rust-inhibitive paint, and as follows : 1 . Carrying Channels : 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs . per 1000 ft . G. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C645, with flange edges bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16 inch minimum lip (return) , minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth as follows : 1 . Thickness : 0 . 0329 inch, (20 gage) . 2 . Depth: 3-5/8 inches . H. Steel Rigid Furring Channels : ASTM C645, hat-shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0 . 0179 inch (25 gage) . I. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings : ASTM C645, manufacturer's standard direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network. 2 .03 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements : 1. Component Sizes and Spacings : As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions for interior partitions : a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per sq. ft . 2 . Protective Coating: G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A525 . B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16 inch minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0 . 0329 inch (20 gage) . 2 . Depth: 3-5/8 inches, except where indicated otherwise. 3 . Finish: Zinc coated (ASTM A525) . C. Shaft Wall Studs and Runners : ASTM C645, C-H style studs complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0 .0329 (20 gage) . 2 . Depth: 4 inches, except where indicated otherwise. 3 . Finish: Zinc coated (ASTM A525) . GYPSUM BOARD 09250-7 2980 a. Dietrich Industries, Inc. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Co. c. Marino Industries Corp. d. Unimast Inc. 2 . Grid Suspension Assemblies : a. Chicago Metallic Corp. b. National Rolling Mills Co. c. USG Interiors, Inc. 3 . Gypsum Board and Related Products : a. Domtar Gypsum Co. b. Georgia-Pacific Corp. c. Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Co. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2 .02 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR CEILINGS A. Provide components which comply with ASTM C754 for materials and sizes, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cast-In-Place and Post-Installed Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined from testing per ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1 . Cast-in-place type designed for attachment to concrete forms. 2 . Chemical anchor. 3 . Expansion anchor. C. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. E. Angle-Type Hangers for Exterior Soffits : Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed from 0 .0635 inch thick stainless steel sheet, with bolted connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts. F. Channels : Cold-rolled steel, 0 .0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch wide AAW, GYPSUM BOARD 09250-6 2980 Deflection Criteria Exterior Finish L/360 Aluminum Entrance and Storefront Framing L/720 Masonry Veneer 1 . 09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes . Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1 .10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions : Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations . B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) . For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 degrees F (35 degrees C) when using temporary heat sources . C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying of joint treatment materials . Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (no substitutions) : 1. Steel Framing and Furring: GYPSUM BOARD 09250-5 2980 B. Fire-Resistance Ratings : Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File No. ' s in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire rated walls and partitions are based on the tests listed below unless indicated otherwise. Construction of these walls and partitions shall conform to these tests, and in addition, shall be in accordance with the details on the contract drawings and as specified herein. 1 . Two Hour Walls : UL Design No. U412 . 2 . One Hour Walls: UL Design No. U468 or No. U465 as applicable. 3 . Shaft Walls (2-hours) : UL Design No. U438 or No. U461 as applicable. D. All materials shall be the product of one manufacturer. Products of different manufacturers may be used only upon approval of the Architect . 1 . Accessories, joint treatment materials and fasteners shall be manufactured by or approved by the gypsum board manufacturer. E. Exterior Wall Stud System: The information shown on the Drawings is intended to establish the size of framing members, their points of attachment, the materials to which they are to be attached, and materials which are to be attached to them. Within these limitations it is the responsibility of the Contractor to design the framing to withstand the applied loading required by the Building Code except where more strict requirements are specified herein. 1 . Maximum Deflection of Exterior Wall Studs: Wall deflections shall be computed on the basis that studs withstand all lateral forces independent of any composite action from sheathing materials . Studs abutting windows or louvers shall also be designed not to exceed 1/4 inch maximum deflection. Awk GYPSUM BOARD 09250-4 2980 E90 and classified per ASTM E413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1 . 07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data for all gypsum board and accessory products specified in this section. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer 's product data for all components to be used in the construction and anchoring of the light gauge steel framing. Include specifications, installation instructions and data substantiating that the materials comply with specified requirements . 1 . Submit manufacturer' s limiting heights tables for non-load bearing studs indicating height limitations for all interior studs . C. Submit shop drawings and certification for exterior wall stud system: 1. Engage the services of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State where the project is located, to prepare shop drawings and structural design for the exterior wall stud systems . Shop drawings and certification shall bear the Engineer' s professional seal . Manufacturer's shop drawings stamped by the Engineer are acceptable instead of those actually prepared by the Engineer. 2 . Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gauge designations, locations and spacing. Indicate supplemental strapping, splices, bridging, bracing, accessories, fastener types and spacing, and details required for proper installation. 3 . The Engineer shall certify that the exterior wall stud system conforms to the governing laws and building code and Contract Documents. D. Do not order materials or begin fabrication or installation until Architect approves submittals. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with recommendations of ASTM C754 and GA-216 unless otherwise specified in this section. 1. Keep copy of GA-216 in field office for duration of project . 1� GYPSUM BOARD 09250-3 2980 G. Section 09900 - Painting: Prime and finish painting of gypsum board. ' H. Section 10265 - Wall Surface Protection Systems : Flush mounted corner guards . I. Section 13091 - X-Ray Protection: Lead lined gypsum board. 1 . 04 REFERENCES A. Gypsum Association: 1 . GA-216 : Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 2 . GA-600 : Fire Resistance Design Manual . B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) : C36 Gypsum Wallboard. C442 Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard. C630 Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. C645 Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track) , and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. C1002 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. C754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Board. C834 Latex Sealing Compounds. 1 .05 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM Cll and GA-505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.06 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sound Transmission Characteristics : For gypsum board assemblies indicated to have STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined per ASTM , GYPSUM BOARD 09250-2 2980 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following types of gypsum board assemblies : 1 . Regular and fire rated gypsum board for interior partitions and ceilings . 2 . Non-load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board and veneer plaster partitions. 3 . Gypsum sheathing and steel studs for exterior non- load (vertical) bearing walls . 4 . Gypsum board shaft wall systems for the following: a. Elevator shaft enclosures. b. Service shaft enclosures (for piping, ductwork, air plenums, electrical, and similar services) . c. Stairwell enclosures . . d. Structural column enclosures (fireproofing) . e. Chute enclosures . 5 . Backer board for application of tile. 6 . Acoustical insulation and acoustical sealant in conjunction with drywall systems . 7. Taped and sanded joint treatment . 1 .02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Access doors are furnished under Section 08305. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Fabric flashings in masonry veneer over gypsum sheathing and metal studs. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers, blocking, and miscellaneous wood framing. C. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal insulation in exterior walls and soffits; exposed acoustical insulation. D. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Safing insulation. E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Building sealants except as specified in this section. e"k F. Section 09215 - Veneer Plaster. l$�,_ GYPSUM BOARD 09250-1 2980 3 . 09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary coverings used to p ry g protect other work. B. Remove plaster spillage promptly from door frames, windows, and other adjoining work. Repair surfaces damaged by plastering work. C. After completing veneer plastering provide protection and maintain conditions in a manner suitable to Installer that ensures veneer plaster is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION VENEER PLASTER 09215-14 2980 3 .06 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. For accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum base. Otherwise, fasten accessories according to accessory manufacturer' s directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners . B. Install metal edge trim where edges of gypsum base would otherwise be exposed or semiexposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive veneer plaster except where other types are indicated. 1 . Install LC-bead where gypsum base panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2 . Install L-bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum base panels are installed. 3 . Install aluminum edge trim and other accessories where indicated. C. Install control joints at locations indicated, and where not indicated according to ASTM C844, and in locations approved by Architect for visual effect . 3 . 07 INSTALLING JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforce interior angles and flat joints in gypsum base panels with joint tape and embedding material, with or without using staples, to comply with ASTM C843 and with veneer plaster manufacturer's recommendations . Do not use staples alone. 3 .08 VENEER PLASTERING A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application Standard: Apply gypsum veneer plaster to comply with ASTM C843 and veneer plaster manufacturer's directions. B. Provide smooth-trowelled finish, unless otherwise indicated. C. Abutment: Where veneer plaster abuts other units in the veneer plaster, groove finish coat to eliminate spalling. 7 g VENEER PLASTER 09215-13 2980 Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible. H. Attach gypsum base to framing and blocking provided at openings and cutouts . I. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum base and at supporting framing behind gypsum on both sides of joints . J. Space fasteners in gypsum base according to referenced gypsum base application standard, manufacturer' s recommendations, and fire-resistance rating requirements . 3 . 05 GYPSUM BASE APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum base as follows : 1 . On ceilings apply gypsum base prior to applying gypsum base to wall/partition to the greatest extent possible and perpendicular to framing. B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods : Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: 1 . Fasten with screws. C. For curved surfaces, install gypsum base panels as follows : 1 . Select gypsum base panel lengths and cut them as required to produce one unbroken panel covering each curved surface plus 12 inch long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2 . Wet gypsum base panels on surfaces that will become compressed when panels are installed over a curve and where the radius of the curve prevents using dry panels. Comply with gypsum base manufacturer' s recommendations relative to curve radiuses, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels . 3 . Apply gypsum base panels horizontally with wrapped edges perpendicular to studs. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten gypsum base panels to studs as they are wrapped around the curve. On concave side, start fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outwards to panel ends . Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 4. Allow wetted gypsum base panels to dry before applying joint treatment. VENEER PLASTER. 09215-12 2980 D. Installation Tolerances : Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross furring members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 ft . as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members . E. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces . Mechanically join main beam and cross- furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3 .04 APPLYING GYPSUM BASE, GENERAL A. Gypsum Base Application Standard: Comply with ASTM C844 . B. Erection Tolerance: No more than 1/16 inch offsets between planes of gypsum base faces, and 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb, level, warp and bow. C. Install gypsum base ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each . ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of base. E. Install gypsum base for ceilings across framing to minimize the number of end-butt joints, and avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints not less than one framing member. F. Install gypsum base with face side out . Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between panels. Do not force into place. G. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. VENEER PLASTER 09215-11 2980 1 . Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means . 2 . Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices . Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards . 3 . Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures . 4. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures . 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms . Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7 . Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support . C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 1. Wire Hangers : 0.1620 inch diameter (8 gage) , 4 feet o.c. 2 . Carrying Channels (Main Runners) : 1-1/2 inches, 4 feet o.c. 3 . Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members) : 16 inches o.c. VENEER PLASTER 09215-10 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Substrates : With Installer present, examine substrates to which veneer plaster assemblies attach or abut including installed hollow metal frames, cast- in anchors, and structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings . 1 . Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation well in advance of the time needed for coordination with other construction. B. Before sprayed-on fireproofing is applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous units fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. C. After sprayed-on fireproofing has been applied, remove only as much fireproofing as needed to complete installation of veneer plaster assemblies without reducing thickness of fireproofing below that required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fireproofing from damage. D. Protect adjoining surfaces and equipment from overspray, fallout, and dusting-off of sprayed plaster. Mask or cover surfaces that are not indicated to receive plaster. 3 .03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows : VENEER PLASTER 09215-9 2980 latex sealant complying with ASTM C834 and the following requirements : 1 . Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E90 . B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints : Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. C. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 . Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Company. 2 . 08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials for veneer plaster construction that comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of veneer plaster manufacturer. B. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C1002 for the following applications : 1 . Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0 . 03 inch thick. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0 . 033 to 0 .112 inch thick. D. Corrosion-resistant-coated steel drill screws of size and type recommended by board manufacturer for fastening cementitious backer units . 2 .09 VENEER PLASTER MIXES A. Mechanically mix veneer plaster materials to comply with referenced veneer plaster application standard and with recommendations of veneer plaster manufacturer. VENEER PLASTER 09215-8 2980 2 . 05 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Provide joint reinforcing materials complying with joint strength requirements of ASTM C587 and the recommendations of veneer plaster manufacturer for application indicated. B. Joint Tape: Paper. C. Embedding Material for Gypsum Base Joint Tape: As recommended by veneer plaster manufacturer for use with joint tape material indicated. D. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 . Paper Joint Tape: a. G-P Tape; Georgia-Pacific Corp. b. Gold Bond Paper Tape; Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Company. c. SHEETROCK Joint Tape; United States Gypsum Company. 2 . Embedding Material for Paper Joint Tape: a. Gyproc 90; Domtar Gypsum. b. G-P Speed Set Joint Compound; Georgia Pacific Corp. c. Kal-Kote Base Plaster; Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Company. 2 .06 VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS A. Two-Component High-Strength Veneer Plaster: Separate ready-mixed veneer plaster formulations complying with ASTM C587 : one for base coat and the other for finish coat, each containing mill-mixed fine silica sand and having a compressive strength of 3000 psi per ASTM C472 ; for application over the following: 1. Substrate: Gypsum base. B. Finish Coat Aggregate: For sand-float finish, provide white silica sand passing a 30-mesh screen. C. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Two-Component High-Strength Veneer Plaster: a. Base Coat: IMPERIAL Basecoat . a. Finish Coat: IMPERIAL Finish. 2 .07 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer' s standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining 77,' VENEER PLASTER 09215-7 2980 2 . 04 ACCESSORIES A. Standard Accessories : Edge trim and control joints complying with ASTM C1047 and requirements indicated below: 1 . Material : Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirement : a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process . 2 . Shapes indicated below by reference to Figure 1 designations in ASTM C1047 : a. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. b. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L-bead where indicated. c. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. B. Extruded Aluminum Accessories: Where indicated, provide manufacturer' s extruded aluminum accessories of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's product designations, complying with the following requirements : 1 . Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B221 for alloy and temper 6063-T5. 2 . Reveal shall be 3/8 inch wide x 3/8 inch deep. 3 . Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating of acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate; Organic Coating: as specified below) . Apply baked enamel according to paint manufacturer' s specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying organic coating. a. Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard thermosetting coating system with a minimum dry film thickness of 0 .8 to 1.2 mil . b. Color: As selected by Architect. 4 . Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide aluminum accessories by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. MM Systems, Inc. VENEER PLASTER 09215-6 2980 F. Steel Rigid Furring Channels : ASTM C645, hat-shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of (uncoated) base metal as follows : 1 . Thickness : 0 . 0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Protective Coating: G 40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A525. G. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings : ASTM C645, manufacturer' s standard direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network. 2 . 03 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. Provide gypsum board of type indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize butt joints . 1. Thickness : Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, in .either 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thickness to comply with ASTM C844 for application system and support spacing indicated. B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C588, of types and thicknesses indicated below, with square or tapered long edges as standard with manufacturer, and as follows : 1 . Type: Type X, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Thickness : 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. C. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. Regular Type Gypsum Base: a. Gyproc Veneer Plaster Base; Domtar Gypsum. b. Dens-Cote Plaster Base; Georgia-Pacific Corp. c. Kal-Kore Regular; Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Company. d. IMPERIAL Gypsum Base; United States Gypsum Company. 2 . Type X Gypsum Base: a. Gyproc Fireguard Veneer Plaster Base; Domtar Gypsum. b. Firestop Dens-Cote Plaster Base; Georgia- Pacific Corp. c. Kal-Kore Fire-Shield; Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Company. d. IMPERIAL FIRECODE Gypsum Base; United States Gypsum Company. X11 VENEER PLASTER 09215-5 2980 b. National Rolling Mills Company. c. USG Interiors, Inc. 2 . Veneer Plaster Products : a. Domtar Gypsum. b. Georgia-Pacific Corp. c. Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Company. 2 . 02 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Provide components of sizes indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated. B. Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed. by ceiling construction, as determined from testing per ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1 . Cast-in-place type designed for attachment to concrete forms. 2 . Chemical anchor. 3 . Expansion anchor. C. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. D. Wire for Hangers and Ties : ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. E. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0 . 05980 inch minimum (uncoated) base metal thickness and 7/16 inch wide flanges, and as follows: 1 . Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inches deep, 475 lb per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lb per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 3 . Finish: Rust-inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Finish: G 60 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A525 for framing for exterior soffits and where indicated. VENEER PLASTER 09215-4 2980 5 . Accepted field samples in an undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may become a part of the completed unit of Work. 1 .07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside, under cover, and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, or other causes . Neatly stack gypsum base flat to prevent .sagging. C. Handle gypsum base to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1 .08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application of veneer plaster to comply with ASTM C843 and with veneer plaster manufacturer's recommendations . B. Room Temperatures : For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) . For adhesive attachment of gypsum base and application of veneer plaster, maintain not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) nor more than 80 degrees F (27 degrees C) for one week prior to application and continuously after until veneer plaster has fully dried. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on veneer plaster near heat source. , C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for hydrating veneer plaster materials. Avoid conditions that result in veneer plaster drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Grid Suspension Assemblies: a. Chicago Metallic Corp. VENEER PLASTER 09215-3 2980 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's Product data for each type of product specified. B. Samples of joint tape and each type of accessory in 12 inch lengths . C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of veneer plaster components certifying that their products comply with specified requirements . 1 . 06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics : Where fire-rated veneer plaster assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Fire Resistance Ratings : As indicated by reference to GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual, " to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory, " or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for veneer plaster assemblies from a single manufacturer. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain veneer plaster products (gypsum base, joint reinforcing, and veneer plaster) from a single manufacturer for each veneer plaster assembly indicated. D. Field Samples: Prior to beginning installation, apply veneer plaster on actual wall surfaces in a designated location as indicated below: 1. Notify Architect 1 week in advance of the dates and times when field samples will be erected. 2 . Cover an entire area between breaks using materials and methods proposed for production work. 3 . Modify field sample or apply additional samples as required to obtain Architect 's acceptance. Simulate finished lighting conditions for reviewing field samples . 4 . Retain and maintain field samples during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed unit of Work. AWN VENEER PLASTER 09215-2 2980 SECTION 09215 VENEER PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Veneer plastering over gypsum base. B. This section also includes the following types of construction: 1 . Taped and sanded joint treatment . 1 .02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Access doors are furnished under Section 08305 . 1 .03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers, blocking and miscellaneous wood framing. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Building sealants except as specified in this section. C. Section 07250 - Sprayed-On Fireproofing: Fireproofing structural steel members concealed behind veneer plaster assemblies . D. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Firestopping systems and fire-resistant joint sealants. E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board System: Framing and other components forming drywall assemblies not specified by reference to this section. F. Section 09900 - Painting: Prime and finish painting of veneer plaster. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C11 and GA 505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this Section or other referenced standards . �I�0 VENEER PLASTER 09215-1 MW 2980 3 . 09 CERAMIC-COATED INSULATING SPANDREL GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET A. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass Designation: Insulating spandrel glass units at exterior curtain wall system. B. Classification of Units : Class CBA, per ASTM E774 . C. Air Space Width: Nominal 1/2 inch measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass lites at unit ' s edge. D. Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary sealants : polyisobutylene and silicone. E. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer' s standard metal . 1 . Dessicant : Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. 2 . Corner Construction: Manufacturer' s standard corner construction. F. Glass Specifications: Comply with the following requirements: 1 . Thickness of Each Light : 6.0 mm (0 .23 inch) . 2 . Ceramic-Coated Indoor Light : a. Kind of Heat Treatment : Kind HS (heat strengthened) . b. Location of Ceramic Coating: Fourth surface. c. Ceramic Coating Color: Provide Architect ' s selections from manufacturer' s full range of standard colors. 3 . Coated Outdoor Light : Kind HS (heat strengthened) , Condition C (other coated glass) , class as specified below: a. Class of Glass : Class 1 (clear) . b. Low-Emissivity Coating: Sputter coat on second surface. G. Product : Solarscreen VE1-55 with Viraspan V907 by Viracon, Inc. , Owatonna, MN or equal . END OF SECTION (o� GLAZING 08800-15 2980 3 . 07 LAMINATED GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET A. Laminated Glass Designation: Sloped and vertical glazing at exterior skylight canopy. B. Kind of Laminated Glass per ASTM C1172 : Kind LHS (two lites of heat-strengthened Type I glass . ) C. Clear Inner Light : Class 1 (clear) float glass, with a thickness of 6 . 0 mm (0 .23 inch. ) D. Clear Outer Light : Class 1 (clear) float glass with a thickness of 6. 0 mm (0 .23 inch. ) E. Plastic Interlayer: 0 . 060 inch Saflex Interlayer by Monsanto. F. Color of Plastic Interlayer: Clear. G. Product : SafetyNetT" Laminated Glass by Viracon, Inc . , Owatonna, MN or equal. 3 . 08 SECURITY/BULLET PROOF GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET A. Security Glass Designation: Provide security glass at Reception Triage G-54 . B. Kind of Laminated Glass per ASTM C1172 : Kind LHS (two lites of heat-strengthened Type I glass . ) 1 . Clear Inner Light : Class 1 (clear) float glass, with a thickness of 3 . 0 mm (0 .12 inch) . 2 . Clear Outer Light : Class 1 (clear) float glass with a thickness of 3 .0 mm (0 .12 inch) . 3 . Plastic Interlayer: 3/8 inch thick clear polycarbonate. 4 . Nominal Thickness: 17 .0 mm (11/16 inch) . C. Products : Guard-Vue 30OTm by Viracon, Inc . , Owatonna, MN or equal . Awk GLAZING 08800-14 2980 3 . 06 SLOPED INSULATING GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET A. Insulating Glass Unit Designation: All sloped insulating glass units at skylight . B. Classification of Units : Class CBA, per ASTM E774 . C. Air Space Width: Nominal 1/2 inch measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass lites at unit ' s edge. D. Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary sealants: polyisobutylene and silicone. E. Spacer Specifications : Manufacturer' s standard metal . 1. Dessicant : Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. 2 . Corner Construction: Manufacturer' s standard corner construction. F. Glass Specifications : Comply with the following requirements: 1 . Unit Thickness: 33 . 0 mm (1-1/16 inch) . 2 . Uncoated Indoor Light : Kind of Laminated Glass per ASTM C1172 : Kind LHS (two lites of heat- strengthened 'Type I glass . ) a. Clear or Transluscent Inner Light (refer to drawings for locations) : Class 1 (clear) float glass, with a thickness of 6 . 0 mm (0 .23 inch. ) b. Clear Outer Light: Class 1 (clear) float glass with a thickness of 6. 0 mm (0 .23 inch. ) c. Plastic Interlayer: 0 . 060 inch Saflex Interlayer by Monsanto. 3 . Coated Outdoor Light: Kind HS (heat- strengthened) , Condition C (other coated glass) float glass, class as specified below: a. Class of Glass: Class 1 (clear) . b. Low-Emissivity Coating: Sputter coat on second surface. 4. Nominal Performance Characteristics are as indicated below: a. Visible Light Transmittance: 48 percent. a. Solar Energy Transmittance: 30 percent. b. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0 .33 . c. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0 .30 . d. Shading Coefficient: 0 .44. e. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 21 percent . G. Product : Sclarscreen VE1-55 with SafetyNet"' Laminated Glass by Viracon, Inc. , Owatonna, MN or equal . GLAZING 08800-13 2980 3 . 05 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET A. Insulating Glass Unit Designation: All vertical insulating glass units at exterior windows and storefront framing system. B. Classification of Units : Class CBA. per ASTM E774 . C. Air Space Width: Nominal 1/2 inch measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass lites at unit ' s edge. D. Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary sealants : polyisobutylene and silicone. E. Spacer Specifications : Manufacturer's standard metal . 1 . Dessicant : Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both. 2 . Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction. F. Glass Specifications : Comply with the following requirements : 1 . Thickness of Each Light : 6.0 mm (0 .23 inch) . 2 . Uncoated Indoor Light : Class 1 (clear) float glass . 3 . Coated Outdoor Light : Condition C (other coated glass) float glass, class as specified below: a. Class of Glass : Class 1 (clear) . b. Low-Emissivity Coating: Sputter coat on second surface. 4 . Nominal Performance Characteristics are as indicated below: a. Visible Light Transmittance: 48 percent . a. Solar Energy Transmittance: 30 percent . b. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0 .33 . c. Winter Nighttime U-Value: 0 .30 . d. Shading Coefficient : 0 .44. e. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 21 percent. G. Product : Solarscreen VEl-55 by Viracon, Inc. , Owatonna, MN or equal . GLAZING 08800-12 2980 and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3 . 04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installa- tion by use of crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from glass . Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass . Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces . B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations . If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer. GLAZING 08800-11 2980 D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by pre- construction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet .located one quarter of glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6 inches from corner, unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use. F. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) , except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. H. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics . I. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated. J. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. K. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets . L. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. M. Miter cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent pull away at corners; seal corner joints GLAZING 08800-10 2980 installation tolerances, including those for size, _. squareness, offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 .02 PREPARATION A. Pre-Installation Meeting: At Contractor 's direction, Glazier, sealant and gasket manufacturers ' technical representatives, glass framing erector and other trades whose work affects glass and glazing shall meet at project site to review procedures and time schedule proposed for glazing and coordination with other work. B. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates . Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. 3 .03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards . B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances . Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners . Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance. GLAZING 08800-9 2980 3 . Mirror Hardware: Extruded aluminum mirror hardware, of size and profile indicated, in manufacturer ' s standard finish, complying with description below: a. Clear anodized finish. 4 . Fasteners : Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture. 5. Anchors and Inserts : Provide devices as required for installation of mirror hardware. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors . Provide galvanized or cadmium-coated anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2 . 05 MIRRORED GLASS PRODUCTION AND FABRICATION A. Glass Coating: Coat second surface of glass with successive layers of chemically deposited silver, electrically or chemically deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard protective organic coating to produce coating system that complies with Federal Specification DD-M-0041, except with salt-spray test period extended to 300 hours and undercutting, discolorations, blackening, and silver impairment at mirror edges not greater than 1/8 inch. 1 . Copper Substitute: In place of electrically or chemically deposited copper layer provide material equivalent in performance to copper. B. Mirror Sizes : After application of glass coating, cut mirrored glass to final sizes and in the following nominal glass thickness as expressed by metric designation/nominal decimal of an inch/ (traditional designation) : 1 . Thickness: 6.0 mm/0 .23 inch/ (1/4 inch) . C. Mirror Edge Treatment : Provide forms of edge treatment indicated below, with edges sealed after treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating: 1 . Beveled polished edge of width shown. 2 . Perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and GLAZING 08800-8 2980 release paper on one side; with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated. 2 . 03 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets : Molded or extruded gaskets of neoprene or EPDM, complying with ASTM C864, of profile and hardness required to maintain water-tight seal . B. Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gaskets : Extruded or molded closed cell, integral-skinned neoprene of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal; complying with ASTM C509, Type II; black. 2 . 04 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers : Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks : Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness . D. Spacers : Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side-walking) of glass. F. Mirror Accessory Materials: 1. Edge Sealer: A coating that has proven to be compatible with glass coating and approved by mirrored glass manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirror edges . 2 . Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors by spot application, certified as compatible with glass coating by organic protective coating manufacturer and approved by mirror manufacturer. a. Product: Mirror-Mastic by Palmer Products Corporation or equal. '7S_► GLAZING 08800-7 2980 2 . 02 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES A. Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements : 1 . Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2 . Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealants and tapes which have performance characteristics suitable for. applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. 3 . Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses . 4 . Colors : Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors . B. One-part Non-Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant : Type S; Grade NS, Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to uses indicated, 0; and complying with the following requirements for modulus and additional joint movement capability. 1 . Medium Modulus: Tensile strength of not less than 45 nor more than 75 psi at 100 percent elongation when tested per ASTM D412 after 14 days at 77 degree F. and 50 percent relative humidity. 2 . Additional capability, when tested per ASTM C719 for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement, to withstand 50 percent increase and decrease of joint width, as measured at time of application, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C920 . 3 . Provide one of the following, or equal; a. Silglaze N; General Electric Co. b. Dow Corning 795; Dow Corning Corp. c. 895; Pecora Corp. d. Spectrum 2; Tremco, Inc. C. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard solvent-free butyl- polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA A 804 .1; in extruded tape form; nonstaining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; packaged on rolls with a GLAZING 08800-6 2980 B. Glass: 1/4 inch thick float glass conforming to ASTM OW C1036, Type I, Class 1 (transparent) , quality q3 . C. Tempered Safety Glass : 1/4 inch thick glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered) , Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (transparent) , quality q3 . D. Wired Glass: 1/4 inch thick rolled flat glass conforming to ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 1, wired and polished both sides, Quality q8-glazing, mesh pattern m2-square. Mesh shall be stainless steel and the openings in the square mesh shall not exceed 5/8 inch between wire intersections measured along a side of a square. F. Sealed Insulating Glass Units : 1 . The manufacturer shall certify and permanently label all sealed insulating glass units to class CBA through the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) program, or all insulating glass units shall be certified by an approved independent testing laboratory as complying with ASTM E774, Class A. 2 . Units shall be fabricated using the dual-seal system, consisting of two lights of glass, primary seal of polyisobutylene and secondary seal of silicone, polysulfide or hot melt butyl. 3 . Unit thickness shall be 1 inch and composed of two lights of 1/4 inch thick glass and 1/2 inch air space. 4 . Spacer frame shall be fabricated of aluminum with ultrasonically soldered corners or galvanized steel with brazed corners . Desiccant used within spacer shall be of type and quantity to insure proper performance of unit . G. Tempered sealed insulating glass units shall be the same as specified above for sealed insulating glass, except both interior and exterior lights of glass shall be tempered safety glass . H. Glass for Mirrors: Float glass complying with ASTM C1036 requirements for Type I (transparent, flat) and for class and quality indicated below: 1. Clear Float Glass: Quality q2 (mirror) , Class 1 (clear) . GLAZING 08800-5 2980 2 . Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the Work. 3 . Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain sealant manufacturer' s written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers . 1 . 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered, stored, handled, and installed so as not to be damaged. B. Glass shall be stored in a clean, dry area to prevent staining. C. Glazing materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer' s label . 1. 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Glazing shall not be installed when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. , except that Contractor may erect suitable enclosures with adequate heating of enclosed space to raise surface temperatures of frames and glass above 40 degrees F. 1 . 08 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 10 year written warranty for sealed insulating glass units. Coverage shall include seal failure, interpane dusting or misting and replacement of glass units which fail. B. All glass installed under this section shall be guaranteed by the glazing subcontractor against leakage or water penetration, caused by caulking or sealant failure, for a period of two years subsequent to final acceptance by the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 GLASS MATERIALS A. Glass shall be as specified herein and shall be located by types where indicated on the Drawings . All glass shall be clear unless indicated as tinted. The color and shade of tinted glass shall be selected by the Architect. GLAZING 08800-4 2980 1 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass : Provide wire glass products that are identical to those tested per ASTM E163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Each individual wire glass glazing unit shall be permanently identified with a listing mark. The listing mark shall be visible after installation. D. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component pane of units with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) . E. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Provide glass and glazing for windows in field-constructed mock-up of exterior wall system specified under other sections. Construct mockups to match glazing systems required for project, including typical pane size, framing system, and glazing materials and methods . Obtain Architect ' s acceptance of visual qualities before proceeding with the work. F. Single Source Responsibility for Glass : To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required. G. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of all glass, gaskets, glazing accessories, and glass framing members proposed for use in contact with, or proximity of, glazing sealants, to sealant manufacturer for compatibility and adhesion testing in accordance with sealant manufacturer's standard testing methods and the following requirements: 1 . Submit not less than 9 pieces of each type and finish of glass framing member and of each type, class, kind, condition, and form (monolithic, laminated, insulating units) of glass for adhesion testing and one sample of substrates (gaskets, setting blocks and spacers) for compatibility testing. GLAZING 08800-3 2980 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabricated glass product required, including installation and maintenance instructions . B. Samples : Submit, for verification purposes, two 12 inch square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear single pane units, and two 12 inch long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view . Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative of adjoining framing system in color. C. Certificate: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements . 1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Compatibility And Adhesion Test Report: Submit statement from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. 1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards. B. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97 .1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. GLAZING 08800-2 2980 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Types of work in this section includes glass and field glazing for: 1 . Metal window units, not indicated as "preglazed" . 2 . Entrances and other doors, not indicated as "preglazed" . 3 . Storefront construction. 4. Sidelights, transoms and borrowed light frames . 5 . Unframed glass mirrors . 6. Interior frosted glass . 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01020 - Allowances : Refer to Section 01020, Allowances, for "Motif" glass allowance. B. Section 07820 - Metal-Frames Skylights : Field glazing of skylights by skylight subcontractor. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers . D. Section 08110 - Steel Doors And Frames . E. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors . F. Section 08212 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors. G. Section 10800 - Toilet And Bath Accessories : Framed glass mirrors . 1 .03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass . B. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated, Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT, Coated And Uncoated Glass. C. ASTM E774 - Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. D. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) : 1. Glazing Manual . 2 . Sealant Manual . �S3 GLAZING 08800-1 2980 Set 131 Entr.S.SCL.DlyEgr X. 03 1 Key lock cylinders* [to match Owners key system] * for locks provided with aluminum entrance door under Section 08410, ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STORE FRONTS. All other hardware provided under Section 08410 . END OF SECTION FINISH HARDWARE 08710-34 2980 Set 121 EXter.S .SCL. 07 .Eml 1 Continuous Hinge w/ electrical current transfer [Marker CEFM-1001 1 Electro-mechanical Mortise Lock [Schlage L9080EL] (lock cylinder faces building interior) 1 Door Closer 1 Weatherstrip Set 1 Threshold (All electrical connections and other control or signalling devices are described in Specifications Section 16100 and/or on ELECTRICAL Drawings . ) Set 122 Exter.S.MCL. 07 1 Continuous Hinge [Marker FM-1001 1 Service/Storeroom Lock [Schlage L90801 1 Door Closer 1 Weatherstrip Set 1 Threshold Sets 123 through 129 not used Set 130 Entr.S.Scl .x.02 All hardware provided under Section 08410 . �5) FINISH HARDWARE 08710-33 NNW 2980 * (Final connections of Automatic Operator (s) are specified in Section 08700 HARDWARE, Par.2 . 08 . Other electrical connections for this Hardware Set are provided under Section 16100 ELECTRICAL) Set 110 3 Hinges - Heavy Duty 1 Automatic Operator (Fire Door pkg) . *Adapted for exit device. Final connection at automatic operator is specified in section 08710 Hardware.Other electrical connections for this hardware set are provided under section 16100 Electrical . **Automatic operator fire door package shall be modified and adapted to electric-clogging exit devices . 1 Rim type electric dogging exit device* 1 EPT - 219 Power transfers 1 MPB - 842 Power booster 1 Door Stop 2 Silencers 1 Classroom deadbolt lock Sets 108 through 119 not used Set 120 Exter.S.SCL.Dly Egr-X 01 1 Continuous Hinge (Markar FM-100] 1 Rim-type lock exit device (No outside handle) 1 EPT - 1024 Power Transfers 1 MPB - 840 Power Booster and Lock 1 Door Closer 1 Weatherstrip Set 1 Threshold Aftk FINISH HARDWARE 08710-32 2980 * Final connections of Automatic Operator(s) are specified in Section 08710 HARDWARE, Par.2 . 08 .Other electrical connections for this Hardware Set are provided under Section 16100 ELECTRICAL. ** Automatic operator fire door package shall be modified and adapted to electric-dogging exit devices . Set 106 P.SM.AOF.Edog X: 08-lock/01 6 Hinges-Heavy Duty(4 butts, 2 electric* at centers) 1 Automatic Operator (Fire Door Pkg**) for pair*** 1 Mortise Lock Electric-dogging* Exit Devices (active leaf) [EL9875-F] 1 Surface Vertical-rod Electric-dogging* Exit Devices (inactive leaf) [EL9827EO-F] 1 Astragal*** (active leaf) 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers 2 EPT - 218 Power Transfers 1 MPB - 842 Power Booster * Final connections of Automatic Operator(s) are specified in Section 08700 HARDWARE, Par.2 .08 . Other electrical connections for this Hardware Set are provided under Section 16100 ELECTRICAL. ** Automatic operator fire door package shall be modified and adapted to electric-dogging exit devices . *** Automatic operator(S) must synchronize closing of inactive and active leaves with respect to astragal. Set 107 DE.AOF.SM:P/P 6 Hinges 1 Automatic Operator* (Fire Door Package) 2 Push Plates for double-egress pair 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers FINISH HARDWARE 08710-31 2980 Set 102 S .AO:PP/PP 3 Hinges-Heavy Duty 1 Automatic Operator* (Standard Package) single door 1 Push Plates 1 Door Pulls [8103-8, 32D] 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers * Final connections of Automatic Operator(s) are specified in Section 08710 HARDWARE, Par.2 . 08. Other electrical connections for this Hardware Set are provided under Section 16100 ELECTRICAL Set 103 P.AO:PP/PP 6 Hinges-Heavy Duty 1 Automatic Operator* (Standard Package) for pair 2 Push Plates 2 Door Pulls [8103-8, 32D] 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers * Final connections of Automatic Operator(s) are specified in Section 08710 HARDWARE, Par.2 . 08 . Other electrical connections for this Hardware Set are provided under Section 16100 ELECTRICAL Set 104 not used Set 105 P.AOF.Edog X:08-lock/08-lock 6 Hinges-Heavy Duty(4 butts, 2 electric* at centers) 1 Automatic Operator (Fire Door Pkg**) for pair 2 Surface Vertical-rod Electric-dogging Exit Devices*, both leaves [EL9827L-F] 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers 2 EPT - 218 Power Transfers 1 MPB - 842 Power Booster FINISH HARDWARE 08710-30 2980 Set 95 DE.SC.C-H.SM:P/P. 6 Hinges 2 Door Closer 2 Surface Vertical - rod exit device (both leaves) [9827EO-F] 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers * (All electrical connections and other control or signalling devices are described in Specifications Section 16100 and/or on ELECTRICAL Drawings . ) Set 96 DE.SCL.C-H.SM.X:01/01 2 sets Pocket Pivot Hinge 2 Surface Vertical-rod Exit Devices (both leaves) 2 Door Closer-Holders* [9827EO-F] 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers * (All electrical connections and other control or signalling devices are described in Specifications Section 16100 and/or on ELECTRICAL Drawings . ) Sts 97 throuah 101 not used �39 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-29 2980 Sets 78 through 91 not used Set 92 DE. SC:P/P 6 Hinges 2 Push Plates 2 Door Closers 2 Door Stops 2 Silencer Set 93 DE.SC.C-H.SM:P/P. 6 Hinges 2 Push Plates 2 Door Closer-Holders* 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers * (All electrical connections and other control or signalling devices are described in Specifications Section 16100 and/or on ELECTRICAL Drawings. ) Set 94 DE.SCL.C-H.SM.X: 01/01 6 Hinges 2 Surface Vertical-rod Exit Devices (both leaves) [9827E0-F] 2 Door Closer-Holders* 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers * (All electrical connections and other control or signalling devices are described in Specifications Section 16100 and/or on ELECTRICAL Drawings . ) FINISH HARDWARE 08710-28 2980 Set 72 & 73 not- Used Set 74 P:SCL.86/MCL.MFB 6 Hinges 1 Service/Storeroom Lock (active leaf) [Schlage D80 cyl] 1 Door Closer (active leaf) 1 set Manual Flushbolts 1 Dustproof Strike 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers Set 75 not used Set 76 P.SCL.X: 08-lock/08-lock 6 Hinges 1 Surface Vertical-rod Exit Devices (both leaves) [9827L-F] 2 Door Closers 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers Set 77 P.SCL.SM.X: 08-lock/01 6 Hinges 1 Mortise Lock Exit Device (active leaf) [9975-F] 1 Surface Vertical-rod Exit Devices (inactive leaf) 2 Door Closers [9827E0-F] 1 Astragal (active leaf) 1 Coordinator 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers X31 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-27 2980 Set 65 P.SC : PP/PP 6 Hinges 2 Push Plates 2 Door Pulls [8103-8, 32D] 2 Door Closers 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers Set 66 through 68 not used Set 69 P:MSCL.86/MCL.MFB 3 Hinges (active leaf) : Spring hinges at bottom and center, butt at top. 3 Hinges (inactive leaf) : butt hinges 1 Service/Storeroom Lock [Schlage D80 cyl] 1 set Manual Flushbolts 1 Dustproof Strike (inactive leaf) 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers Set 70 not used Set 71 P.SCL.C-H.X: 08-lock/08-10ck 2 sets Pocket Pivot hinge 2 Surface Vertical-rod Exit Devices (both leaves) [9827L-F] 2 Door Closer-Holders* 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers 2 Magnetic Switches (where scheduled) * * (All electrical connections and other control or signalling devices are described in Specifications Section 16100 and/or on ELECTRICAL Drawings. ) FINISH HARDWARE 08710-26 2980 Set 55 through 59 not used Set 60 UP.SCL:H/CFB 6 Hinges 1 Hospital Latch w/open back strike 1 Door Closer (active leaf) 1 Door Closer (inactive leaf less than 2011 ) [Ives 950] 1 set Combination Flushbolts (self-latching at top) (automatic at bottom) 1 Dustproof Strike (inactive leaf) 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers Set 61 not used Set 62 P.SCL: 09/SLFB 6 Hinges 1 Public Entrance Lock [Schlage L9060 mortise] (w/ open back strike) 2 Door Closers 1 Coordinator 1 set Self-latching Flushbolts 1 Dustproof Strike 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers Set 63 6 Hinges 1 Public Entrance Lock [ Schlage L9060 mortise] ( 2 Door Closer - Holder*(with open back strike) 1 Coordinator 1 set Self-latching Flushbolts 1 Dust proof strike 2 Door Stops 2 Silencers * (All electrical connections and other control or signalling devices are described in specifications section 16100 and/or on electrical drawings . ) �3 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-25 2980 Set 44-OMNI S .SCL.MKp. 3 Hinges 1 OMNILOCK [OM250TL-M mortise w/ keypad] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Secs 45 through 47 not used Sets 48 & 49 not used Set 50 UP.MCL:H.ODH(F) /CFB 6 Hinges 1 Hospital Latch (active leaf) 1 Overhead Door Holder-Stop (active leaf) [1540F series] 1 set Combination Flushbolts (self-latching at top) (automatic at bottom) 1 Dustproof Strike 1 Door Stops 2 Silencers Set 51 through 53 not used Set 54 P.MCL: 86/MFB 6 Hinges 1 Service/Storeroom Lock (active leaf) [D80 cyl] 1 set Manual Flushbolts 1 Dustproof Strike 1 Door Stops 2 Silencers FINISH HARDWARE 08710-24 2980 Set 41 S . SCL.X. 08 .Lock 3 Hinges 1 Rim-type Lock Exit Device [99L-F] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 42 S.SCL.X. 08 .Em1 3 Hinges (2 butts top & bottom, 1 electric*center) 1 Electro-mechanical Rim-type Lock Exit Device* [E98L-FS] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers * All electrical connections, and any control or signalling devices are specified in Section 16100, ELECTRICAL Set 42-OMNI S.SCL.X.08 .Eml (RDC)WKp 3 Hinges (2 butts top & bottom, 1 electric*center) 1 Electro-mechanical Rim-type Lock Exit Device* [E98L-FS] 1 OMNILOCK [OM250TL-WMS wall mounted keypad] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers * All electrical connections, and any control or signalling devices are specified in Section 16100, ELECTRICAL Set 43 & _44 not used FINISH HARDWARE 08710-23 2980 Set 35 S.SCL. 04 3 Hinges AMA 1 Entrance/Office Lock [Schlage L9050 mortise] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 36 S. SCL.86 3 Hinges 1 Service/Storeroom Lock [Schlage D80 cyl] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 37 S. SCL. 09 3 Hinges 1 Apartment Entrance Lock [Schlage L9060 mortise] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 38 not used Set 39 S.MSCL.86 1 set Hinges : (spring hinges at bottom and center of door, butt at top. ) 1 Service/Storeroom Lock [Schlage D80 cyl] 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 40 S.SCL.X.08 .Latch 3 Hinges 1 Rim-type Latch Exit Device [98L-F-BE] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers FINISH HARDWARE 08710-22 2980 Set 30 not used Set 31 S .SCL.H 3 Hinges 1 Hospital Latch 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers set 32 S .SC.PP 3 Hinges 1 Push Plate 1 Door Pull [Ives 8103-8, 32D] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers 1 Automatic Operator* (where scheduled) * Final connections of Automatic Operator(s) are Par.2 .08 . specified in Section 08700 HARDWARE, Other electrical connections for this Hardware Set are provided under Section 16100 ELECTRICAL Set 33 S.SCL.22 3 Hinges 1 Privacy Lockset [Schlage L9040 mortise] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers fi 34 S.SCL.01 3 Hinges 1 Passage Latch [Schlage L9010 mortise] 1 Door Closer 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers �31 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-21 2980 Set 17-OMNI S.MCL.MKp 3 Hinges 1 OMNILOCK [OM250TL-M mortise w/ keypad) 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 18 not used Set 19 (LL*)_ S.LL.MCL.H.ODH(H) 1 Pivot set (for lead-lined doors) 1 Intermediate Pivot 1 Hospital Latch 1 Overhead Holder-Stop [1540H series] 2 Silencers (in frame head) 1 Deadlock (where scheduled) (LL*) Lead protection and installation of these hardware items in lead-lined door(s) and frame(s) is specified in Section 13091 X-RAY PROTECTION. Sets 20 throuah 28 not used Set 29 (LL*) S.LL.SCL.H 1 Pivot set (for lead lined doors) 1 Intermediate Pivot 1 Hospital latch 1 Door Closer 2 Silencers (in frame head) 1 Deadlock (where scheduled) (LL*) Lead protection and installation of these hardware items in lead-lined door(s) and frame(s) is Specified in Section 13091 X-RAY PROTECTION. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-20 2980 Set 13 S.MCL.76 .ERS 1 Pivot Set [Stanley DAP-31 1 Privacy Lockset [Schlage D40 w/special strike] 1 Double Lip Strike [Stanley DS-1 or DS-2 as reqd] 1 Emergency Rescue Stop [Stanley ES-11 1 set Sight Baffles (mortised each vertical edge) 1 Door Stop Set 14 S .MC.PP 3 Hinges 1 Door Pull [8102-6, 32D] 1 Roller Latch Set 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 15 S.MCL. 01 3 Hinges 1 Passage Latch [Schlage L9010 mortise] 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 16 S.MCL. 04 3 Hinges 1 Entrance/Office Lock [Schlage L9050 mortise] 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 17 S.MCL.21 3 Hinges 1 Dormitory-Bedroom Lock [Schlage L9473 mortise] 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers FINISH HARDWARE 08710-19 2980 PART 4 - HARDWARE SETS Set Numbers Door Operation Ouantities and Items Code (for Architect ' s reference) Sets 1 throucth 6 not used Set 7 S.MCL.80 3 Hinges 1 Communicating Lock [Schlage D72 cyl] 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 8 S.MCL. 05 3 Hinges 1 Classroom Lock [Schlage L9070 mortise] 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers Set 9 not used Set 10 S.MCL.H.ODH (F) 3 Hinges 1 Hospital Latch 1 Overhead Door Holder-Stop [1540F series] 3 Silencers Set 11 not used Set 12 S.MCL.76 3 Hinges 1 Bath - Bedroom Privacy Lock. [Schlage D40 cyl] 1 Door Stop 3 Silencers AWA FINISH HARDWARE 08710-18 2980 H. Except for Automatic Operators for swing doors, which are both furnished and installed under Section 08710, the hardware furnished under this Section is installed under the Section of the Specifications where the applicable doors themselves are specified. 3 . 02 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation of function of every unit . Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1 . Where door hardware is installed more than one month proir to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week proir to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct Owner' s personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes . D. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer, accompained by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the Project to perform the following work: 1 . Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements . 2 . Consult with and instruct Owner's personnal in recommended additions to the maintenance procedurers. 3 . Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. 4 . Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-17 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION STANDARDS A. Except for Automatic Operators for swing doors, which are both furnished and installed under Section 08710, the hardware furnished under this Section is installed under the Section of the Specifications where the applicable doors themselves are specified. B. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect . 1 . "Recommened Locations for Buliders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by Door and Hardware Institute. 2 . NWWDA Industry Standard I .S.1 .7 . , "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors . " C. Install each hardware item compliance with the manufacturers instructions and recommendations . Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Section. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. D. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards . F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl- rubber or polyisbutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers . G. Weatherstrippong and Seals: Comply with manufacturers instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-16 2980 a. Make final connections to power, fire alarm, and security protection systems . Refer to Section 16100 ELECTRICAL specifications for all relevant requirements . 2 . Set operating brackets level and true to location, with adequate anchorage for permanent support . 3 . After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three (3) days use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles) , readjust door operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety. Lubricate operating equipment and clean exposed surfaces . 2 .9 SIGHT BAFFLES A. Provide sight baffles for installation on both vertical stiles of wood doors where indicated by Hardware Sets and Door Schedule. 2 .10 SILENCERS A. Provide four (4) for each Dutch door, three (3) for each single door, two (2) for each pair of doors. Silencers shall be omitted from doors with weatherstrip or door seals. 2 .11 WALL AND FLOOR STOPS A. Wall stops shall be installed wherever an opening door or any item of hardware thereon strikes a wall, casework or other part of the building construction. Where wall stops cannot be effectively used, a floor stop shall be installed. 2 .12 HARDWARE FOR INTERIOR SLIDING DOORS A. Provide manufacturer's standard hardware for interior sliding doors when not furnished as part of complete door package. B. Operating Hardware for Bipassing Doors : Provide manufacturer's complete set consisting of extruded aluminum overhead track, adjustable hangers (carriages) , bumpers, and floor guides designed to accommodate the number, size, thickness, and weight of door leaves indicated. Provide flush pulls for each door leaf. 7a7 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-15 2980 C. Standards Compliance: Provide door operators complying with applicable requirements of the following standard: 1 . ANSI A156 .10 (BHMA 1601) , "American National Standard of Power Operated Pedestrian Doors . " D. Where indicated in Door Schedule and/or Hardware Sets operators shall be adjusted, or modified if necessary, for proper coordination with fire alarm system, security protection system, and latching action of specified exit devices . For pairs of doors with astragal, rabbeted or beveled meeting stiles the operators shall properly synchronize the closing of inactive and active leaves . E. Electro-Mechanical Operators for Swing Doors : Manufacturer' s standard electro-mechanical unit with doors power-opened and spring-closed with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor, with power off; with easy manual operation including spring closing with power off; operator action and mounting as indicated below: 1 . Operator Action: As indicated by door swing on drawings (swing-in, swing-out, double-swing, pairs, etc. ) 2 . Fire-Door Accessories: Provide manufacturer' s Fire Door Package, specially adapted to Exit Device where required for doors so indicated by Hardware Sets and Door Schedule. 3 . Where required, provide emergency release for reverse swing action of doors which are required to function as exits. 4. Adjustable Features : Provide operators with fully adjustable opening speeds, closing speeds and checking speeds. 5 . Provide overhead-mounted presence detectors meeting the safety requirements of Paragraph 2 .08C, above. F. Wall Push-Plate Switch: Manufacturer's standard semi- flush wall-mounted door control switch plate, intended for operation by touch of elbow, by occupants familiar with door operating system. G. Installation and Adjustment: 1. Install complete door operator system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including controls and control wiring. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-14 2980 D. All door closers shall be adjusted by the instcAller in accordance with the manufacturer' s templates and written instructions . Closers with parallel arms shall have back-check features adjusted prior to installation. E. Closers shall conform to all applicable code requirements relative to setting closing speed for closers and maximum pressure for operating interior and exterior doors . Where requested by the Architect, test doors for compliance with the above requirements using a Chatillion No. 719-20 gauge or a similar device capable of measuring such forces . 2 . 07 DOOR CLOSER-HOLDERS A. Size of Units : comply with manufacturer's recommendations for size of door closer-holders . B. Provide hold-open ranges allowing adjustment between 85 degrees and 110 degrees in 3 degree increments . For. doors with maximum possible swing greater than 110 degrees, provide additional hold-open point at maximum swing. C. Each unit shall operate on the activation of fire alarm system and shall be provided with voltage compatible with fire alarm system. Devices shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall meet requirements of NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. 2 .09 AUTOMATIC OPERATORS (for swing doors) A. Extent of operators, hereby defined to mean power operated systems for opening and closing one-way swing doors, is determined from the Door Schedule and Hardware Sets . B. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's technical product data, roughing-in diagrams, wiring diagrams, certified performance reports, installation instructions, parts lists, maintenance instructions and general published recommendations for each component of the door operating systems required. Include data that the system will perform as. specified. 1. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams and other data to fabricators and installers of related work as needed for coordination of operators with doors, frames, hardware, partitions, electrical work, etc. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-13 2980 change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks . E. Key Material : Provide keys of nickel silver only. F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 5 master keys for each master system and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. 1 . Deliver keys to Owner' s representative. 2 . 05 LOCK & LATCHSETS, EXIT DEVICES AND DEADLOCKS A. Strikes : Provide Manufacturer' s standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt . With curved lip extend to protect frame, finish to match hardware set and to match existing hardware. B. Lock Throw: Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings . C. Handicapped Regulations : Provide door operating hardware (levers, panic bars, pulls, push plates, etc . ) to comply with handicap regulations . These devices shall be made identifiable to the touch by a textured surface on this item obtained by knurling, roughening or by a material applied to the surface. Textured surfaces for tactile warnings shall be standard throughout the facility. D. Cylinders : All lock cylinders shall be complete with interchangeable cores matching Owner's standard. 2 .06 DOOR CLOSERS A. Size of Units : Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door closers, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. B. Provide drop brackets where required. C. Do not locate closers on the side of doors facing corridors, passageways or similar type areas. Where it is necessary, due to certain conditions, and with the approval of the Architect, to have closers in corridors, provide such closers with parallel arms . 1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one site larger than recommended for use with standard arms . FINISH HARDWARE 08710-12 2980 2 . 03 HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS A. Templates : Provide only template Y P - produced units . B. Screws : Furnish Phillips flat-head or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish Phillips flat-head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots . C. Hinge Pins : Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows : 1 . Steel Hinges: Steel Pins . 2 . Exterior Doors : Non-removable pins . 3 . Out-swing Corridor Doors : Non-removable pins . 4 . Interior Doors : Non-rising pins . 5 . Tips : Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves Provide four (4) hinges for each door leaf over 7 ' -0" high. 2 . 04 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. The hardware supplier shall meet with the Owner's representative to establish a keying schedule and key filing system corresponding to the Owner's system for room numbering. This schedule shall be prepared by the hardware supplier and shall be submitted to the Architect who will forward it to the Owner for review. Upon final approval the schedule will be returned to the hardware supplier according to the usual procedure for submittals. B. Provide the type of keying required by the Owner (master, grandmaster, great-grandmaster etc. ) , either new or integrated with Owner's existing system as required. 1. Locksets, exit devices and deadlocks shall be furnished with removable cores during the construction phase of project . At completion of project, a permanent core with keyway restricted according to Owner' s instructions, shall be furnished and installed to replace each removable core. C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts to match Owner's standard and existing lock cylinders as required. D. Comply with the Owner' s instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual FINISH HARDWARE 08710-11 2980 MANUFACTURER OTHER ITEM AND PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS Weatherstrip Sets, National Guard as Pemko Head & Jambs follows : Reese -FS181 for B-Label doors -PF181 for other doors Thresholds National Guard 896 with Pemko vinyl bumper. Reese Sight Baffles National Guard , 143AP Pemko Reese Door Seals Zero International as Pemko (for doors where follows: Reese symbol "DS" is -Series 3000 gasketing National Guard scheduled) for head and jamb. -361 surface mounted automatic door bottom Rain Drips National Guard #16AD Pemko Extended Rain Drip, full Reese width of frame at all exterior doors without overhang. Wall Stops Ives 407 1/2 as Glynn-Johnson (for all doors required, 26D. where possible) Floor Stops Ives 436 as required, Glynn-Johnson (only where wall 26D. mounted stops are not possible) Silencers Ives #20 Glynn-Johnson Delayed-Egress Locknetics 101 Series Von Duprin System 24 VDC Magnetic Switches Detex MS-2049F None Sliding Door Stanley No.2841 Heavy None hardware Duty. Bifold Door Stanley No.2916 Heavy None Hardware Duty. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-10 2980 MANUFACTURER OTHER IT AND PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS Push Plates Ives 8200, 26D Rockwood (4" x 16" ) Door Pulls Ives "8000" Series as Rockwood listed in Hardware Sets Door Closer-Holders Rixson Firemark LCN 4010SE/ 0600 Series, Aluminum 4110SE enamel finish, 24VDC Dorma TS83EMF Automatic Operators Stanley Visible Magic- Besam (Standard Package) Swing. Clear anodized Dor-O-Matic aluminum finish. Horton Automatic Operators Stanley Visible Magic- Besam (Fire Door Package) Swing adapted to Dor-O-Matic electric dogging exit Horton device, delayed-egress system and/or other magnetic locks . Clear anodized aluminum finish. Overhead Door Sargent 1540 Series, Glynn-Johnson Holders 26D. Manual Flush Bolts Ives #358, 26D Glynn-Johnson Self-Latching Flush Ives #357, 26D, Glynn-Johnson Bolts (H.M. Doors) Door Controls Ives #356, 26D, Int ' 1 (Wood Doors) Automatic Flush Ives #559, 26D, Glynn-Johnson Bolts (H.M. Doors) Door Controls Ives #356, 26D, Int ' 1 (Wood Doors) Dust-proof Strikes Ives #489 with #497 Glynn-Johnson Plate where required, 26D. Coordinators Ives 900 series, with Glynn-Johnson fillers and brackets as required. Carry Bars Ives, as appropriate for Glynn-Johnson coordinator. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-9 2980 MANUFACTURER TO HER ITEM AND PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS Pivot Sets w/ Stanley DAP-3 w/ None Emergency Rescue ES-1 Stop and DS-1 Stop & Double Lip or DS-2 Strike as Strike applicable. Pocket Pivot Hinges Dor-O-Matic 91105F None (for flush mounted pocket fire doors) Cylindrical Lock Schlage "D" Series as Best and Latch Sets designated in Hardware Yale Sets, "Rhodes" lever handles, 26D Mortise Lock Schlage "L" Series as Best and Latch Sets designated in Hardware Yale Sets, 1106" lever handles, 26D Electro-mechanical Schlage 1IL9080EL" Series Best Mortise Lock Sets as designated in Hard- Yale ware Sets, "06" lever Arrow handles, 26D, 24VDC OMNILOCK Security OSI Security Devices None Device "OM250TL" Series w/ Schlage "06" lever handles . Hospital Latch Sets Sargent 114-P, 26D 5" Glynn-Johnson backset, except 2-3/4" backset where required by glazing Exit Devices Von Duprin "98" Series Sargent (fire exit devices as designated in for label doors) Hardware Sets, w/ "06" Lever Handles 32D rail, 26D trim, 24VDC as applicable Roller Latch Sets Glynn-Johnson None GJ-30, 26D Electric Strikes Folger-Adam 700 Series, Adams-Rite to suit lockset, 32D, 24VDC FINISH HARDWARE 08710-8 2980 "Prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners . 2 . 02 MANUFACTURERS A. Requirements for design, grading, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are specified by the Product Description and itemized Hardware Sets which follow in this Section, supplemented by the Door Schedule and the, Floor Plan drawings . B. Product Selection/Manufacturer' s Product Designations : One manufacturer is listed for each hardware type required. Provide either the product designated, or, after approval in accordance with Section 01600 of these Specifications, the equivalent product of the other manufacturer(s) listed. Product specifically designated by manufacturer and catalog number in the Hardware Sets shall be furnished as designated, no sudstitutions . MANUFACTURER OTHER IT AND PRODUCT MANUFACTURERS Hinges-Standard Stanley FBB 179, 26D Hager Duty 4 1/2" x 4 1/2" McKinney Hinges-Heavy Duty, Stanley FBB 168, 26D Hager (for doors 3 ' -6" 5" x 4 1/211 , or McKinney and wider,and all appropriate size doors with Automatic Operators) Electric Hinges Stanley 'ICE" Type Hager McKinney 7�7 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-7 2980 1 . 07 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions : Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner' s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. 1 . 08 GUARANTEE A. All Hardware and specified finishes shall be guaranteed against manufacturing defects and faulty workmanship for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer' s Name Plate: Do not use Manufacturers products that have manufacturers name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire- rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect . 1 . Manufacturers identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals : Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturers standerd metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware items and with ANSI/BHMA A156 . 18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surface of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including FINISH HARDWARE 08710-6 2980 Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1 . Required supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire- rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire- rated door and door frame labels . . 1 . 06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag, each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package B Package of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with apporpriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more indentical sets may be packed in same container. C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site) . E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-5 2980 e. Explianation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. ,0%, f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials . h. Keying information. 2 . Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordination review of schedule. 3 . Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner' s final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. D. Submit samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule. 1 . Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated in the Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements . E. Submit templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements . 1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc. ) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project 's vicinity, that has a record of successful inservice performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to the Owner, Architect, and A I FINISH HARDWARE 08710-4 2980 for submittals and delivery of templates and door hardware. dates related to furnishing hardware by door hardware supplier. 3 . Coordination: Coordinate door hardware with other work. Furnish hardware supplier or manufacturer with shop drawings of other work where required or requested. Verify completeness and suitability of hardware with supplier. 4 . Product Handling: Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the site. Inventory hardware jointly with representative of hardware supplier and issue signed receipts for all delivered materials. 5 . Installation Information: The general types and approximate quantities of hardware required for this Project are indicated at the end of this section in order to establish Contractor's cost for installation and other not included in allowance. 6. No adjustments in Contract sum will be made for costs other than those covered by the allowances for subsequent increases or decreases in quantity of one or more hardware types that do not exceed five percent . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Submit product data including manufacturers ' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content : Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. �3 FINISH HARDWARE 08710-3 2980 L. Section 16100 - Electrical, including operational connection of all electrical hardware items specified in Section 08710 . M. Section 13091 - X-Ray Protection, including lead-lined metal frames, lead-lined wood doors, and lead shielding and installation of hardware furnished under Section 08710 for these doors . N Section 08305 - Access Doors, complete with hardware. O. Section 08700 - Door Schedule 1 . 03 HARDWARE RESPONSIBILITIES A. Door hardware supplier 's responsibilities shall be as follows : 1 . Submittals : Submit through Contractor required product data, final hardware schedule, separate keying schedule, and samples as specified in this Section, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Construction Schedule: Inform Contractor promptly of estimated times and dates that will be required to process submittals, to furnish templates, to deliver hardware, and to perform other work associated with furnishing door hardware for purposes of including this data in construction schedule. Comply with this schedule. 3 . Coordination and Templates : Assist Contractor as required to coordinate hardware with other work in respect to both fabrication and installation. Furnish Contractor with templates and deliver hardware to proper locations . 4 . Product Handling: Package identify, deliver, and inventory door hardware specified in this Section. 5 . Discrepancies: Based on requirements indicated in Contract Documents in effect at time of door hardware selection, furnish types, finishes, and quantities of door hardware, including fasteners, and Owner' s maintenance tools required to comply with specifiedrequirements and as needed to install and maintain hardware. Furnish or replace any items of door hardware resulting from shortages and incorrect items at no cost to the Owner or Contractor. Obtain signed receipts from Contractor for all delivered materials . B. Contractor's responsibilities shall be as follows : 1 . Submittals: Coordinate and process submittals for door hardware in same manner as submittals for other work. 2 . Construction Schedule: Cooperate with door hardware supplier in establishing schedule dates FINISH HARDWARE 08710-2 2980 SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. 1 . The work of this Section includes furnishing and installation of automatic operators where scheduled for swing interior doors . B. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include: 1 . Cylinders for locks on entrance doors . 2 . Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry and Millwork. B. Section 08110 - Metal Doors and Frames, Silencers integral with hollow metal frames. C. Section 08212 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors - Factory Perfitting. D. Section 08211 - Wood Doors, Factory prefitting and factory premachining of doors for door hardware. E. Section 08312 - ICU/CCU Sliding Doors, complete with hardware. G. Section 08330 & 08340 - Coiling Doors and Grilles complete with hardware. H. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts : Aluminum entrance door hardware, except cylinders. J. Section 08470 - Revolving Entrance Doors, Revolving entrance door hardware, except cylinders. K. Section 08520 - Aluminum Architectural Windows, complete with hardware. FINISH HARDWARE 08710-1 UUULC.I LII.AIIVDUIV uv. +•^- DOOR SCHEDULE OPENING OPNG. DOOR DOOR ACTIVE HDW FRAME SUPPLEMENTARY NO. ROOM ENTERED WIDTH TYPE ELEV. LEAF LBL. SET TYPE SYMBOLS&REMARKS REVISED G 402 Work Area Tech. 3'-0" WD 1 35 1 R 1paint grade G-402-A T-0" WD 1 16 1 R G-403 Reading Room T-0" WD 1 16 R 6-404 jToilet-Staff T-0" WD 1 33 R G-405 Echo cardiography Testing 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-405-A 4'-0" WD 1 35 R G-406 Waiting G-407 Waiting G-408 Lockers/Lounge-Staff 3'-0" WD 2 44-0 R 2 G-409 Housekeeping 3'-0" WD 1 139 R KP G-410 Conference- Physician G-411 Storage 3'-0" WD 1 11 6 R G-412 Office-Supervisor T-0" WD 1 116 R G-413 Storage-Files 3'-6" WD 2 135 R 2 G-414 Open Stair G-415 Radiology Waiting G-416 Radiology Reception G-417 Vestibule 131 G-417-A 130 G-418 Lobby-Elevator T-0" WD 2/2 B 96 DE T-10" high,1 G-419 Stair G-420 Eye Room T-0" WD 3 110 R 12 G-421 Storage-Wheelchair G-422 Vending G-423 Triage/Req. #1 T-6" WD 2 110 R G-423-A T-6" WD 2 102 R G-424 Work Area G-425 Triage/Reg. #2 G-426 Dictation G-427 Passageway T-0" WD 2 35 R 2 G-428 Unit Secretary SHEPLEY BULFINCH RICHARDSON and ABBOTT ARCHITECTS Printed:7/11/96 _ rage DOOR SCHEDULE OPENING OPNG. DOOR DOOR ACTIVE HDW FRAME SUPPLEMENTARY NO. ROOM ENTERED WIDTH TYPE ELEV. LEAF LBL. SET TYPE SYMBOLS&REMARKS REVISED G-358 lWorkroom G-359 ICashier { G-360 Workstations 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-361 Office-Registration G-362 Office-Fin.Counselor 3'-0" WD 1 1 116 R G-363 lWorkstations 3'-0" 1 WD 1 1 1 116 R G-364 Information 4'-0" WD SCDH, LOCK, 'See elevations G-365 not used G-366 not used G-367 Office- Registration 3'-0" WD 1 16 I R G-368 not used G-369 I Revolving Door 1140 G-370 Valet 131 G-370-A 130 G-371 Passageway 3'-0" WD 2 B 40 R 1 G-371-A 7'-8" WD 2/2 B 71 R 7'-10" high, 1 G-371-B 7'-0" WD 2/2 B 71 R 7'-10" high, 1 G-371-C 3'-4" WD 2 B 40 R 1 G-372 Lobby G-373 Waiting G-374 Gift Shop 8'-0" WD 6/6 63 1 WD 12 G-375 Storage-Gift Shop 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-375-A 3'-0" WD 1 15 1 R G-376 Coffee Shop 8'-0' WD 6/6 ISCDH,lockable G-376-A 131 G-377 Storage-Coffee Shop 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-378 Storage-Wheel Chair 131 G-378-A 130 G-379 ATM 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-380 Telephones G-381 Stair 3'-0" WD 2 C 40 R 1 G-382 Waiting G-383 Passageway G-384 Toilet-Public Female 3'-0" WD 1 33 R G-385 Toilet-Public Male 3'-0" WD 1 33 R G-386 Office-Consult 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-387 Storage-Gas 2'-6" WD 1 16 R G-388 Exercise 3'-6" WD 1 16 R G-388-A 3'-0" WD 1 35 R G-389 Security G-390 Lockers G-391 Storage 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-392 Toilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 33 R G-393 Waiting G-394 Reception 3'-6" WD 7 35 WD 2 G-395 Corridor G-396 Testing/Treatment 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-397 Pul. Function Room 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-398 Blood Gas 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-399 Exam-Stress Testing 3'-6" WD 1 16 R G-400 Hotter/EKG/EEG 3'-0" WD 1 16 R DS G-401 Exam-Multi-Purpose Testing 3'-0" WD 1 16 R Il SHEPLEY BULF'INCH RICHARDSON and ABBOTT ARCHITECTS Printed:7/11/96 DOOR SCHEDULE OPENING OPNG. DOOR DOOR ACTIVE HDW FRAME SUPPLEMENTARY NO. ROOM ENTERED WIDTH TYPE ELEV. LEAF LBL. SET TYPE SYMBOLS&REMARKS REVISED G-309 Lockers- Male 3'-0" WD 1 15 R G-310 Lounge- Staff 3'-0" WD 2 44-0 R 12 G-311 Office-Secretary 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-311-A 3' 0" WD 1 15 R G-312 Alcove-WC/Stretcher G-313 Work Cub. G-314 Work Cub. G-315 Alcove-Work G-316 Corridor 7'-4" WD 2/2 B 95 DE 1 G-317 Lockers- Female 3'-0" WD 1 15 R G-318 Toilet -Staff Female 3'-0" WD 1 12 R G-319 On-Call 3'-0" WD 1 17-0 R IDS G-320 ICorridor 7'-4" WD 2/2 76 R 12 G-321 ICorridor G-322 jCorridor 7'-4" WD 2/2 77 R G-323 lEmergency Elec. 3'-0" WD 1 B 36 R G-324 INormal Elec. 3'-0" HM 1 B 34 R G-325 Communications Rm 3'-0" WD 1 C 136 R G-326 Office-Nurse Manager 3'-0" WD 1 116 R G-327 Toilet-Staff 37 WD 1 133 1 R G-328 Housekeeping 3'4" WD 1 1 39 R KIP G-329 Soiled Linen 3'-6" WD 1 2 C 31 R 11, KP G-330 Lockers/Lounge-Staff 3'-0" WD 2 44-0 R 12 G-331 Exam-PPT 3'-0" WD 1 12 R G-332 IToilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 33 R G-333 I Exam-PPT T-0" WD 1 112 R G-334 Exam-SC 3'-0" WD 1 112 R G-335 Toilet- Patient 3'-0" WD 1 133 R G-336 Exam-SC 3'-0" WD 1 112 R G-337 Work Area-Tech. 3'-0" WD 1 35 R paint grade G-337-A 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-338 Reception 3'-0" WD 1 35 R paint grade G-338-A 3'-6" WD 7 35 WD 2 G-339 Alcove G-340 Toilet/Shower 3'-0" WD 1 112 R G-341 Storage 3'-0" WD 1 116. R G-342 Alcove- Sub-Waiting G-343 I Exam-SC 3'-0" WD 1 12 R G-344 IToilet-Patient 3'-0" ' WD 1 33 R G-345 Exam-SC 3'-0" WD 1 1 12 R G-346 Office-Consult 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-347 Office-Occ.Health 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-348 Exam-Occupational Health 3'-0" WD 1 112 R G-349 Exam 3'-0" WD 1 12 R G-350 Toilet-Drug 3'-0" WD 1 33 R G-351 Exam-Occupational Health 3'-0" WD 1 12 R G-352 Workroom-Occupational G-353 Nurse Procedure 3'-0" WD 1 16 R IDS G-354 Exam-Occupational Health 3'-0" WD 1 1 112 -PI G-355 Corridor 3'-0" WD 7 35 WD 2 G-355-A 3'-0" WD 2 34 R 2 G-356 Office- Manager 3'-0" WD 1 16 R G-357 Office- Asst.Manager 3'-0" WD 1 16 R SHEPLEY BULFINCH RICHARDSON and ABBOTT A.RCHrMCTS Printed:7/11/96 I-UULt'.Y UIUMiN�UN NU3YllHL - GyriU Page DOOR SCHEDULE OPENING OPNG. DOOR I)OORIACTIVEI FCW FRAME SUPPLEMENTARY NO. I ROOM ENTERED WIDTH TYPE IELEV.1 LEAF I LBL.I SET TYPE SYMBOLS&REMARKS REVISED G-078 Prep/Recovery 12 G-079 Prep/Recovery 10 G-080 Toilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 12 R G-081 Toilet-Patient T-0" WD 1 12 R G-081-A 3'-0" WD 1 12 R G-082 Prep/Recovery 11 G-083 Patient Belongings 3'-0" 1 WD 1 1 135 1 R G-084 Viewing lexisting door to remain G-085 Office-Physcian T-0" 1 WD 1 2 1 1 135 1 R 12 G-086 Storage 3'-0" 1 WD 1 1 1 135 1 R G-091 not used G-094 Office 3-0" WD 1 135 1 R G-095 Corridor T-8" WD 2/2 20 94 DE 11 G-095-A 7'-4" WD 2/2 20 94 DE 1 G-275 Fast Track 1 3'-6" WD 3 10 R 2 G-276 Fast Track 2 3'-6" WD 3 10 R 2 G-277 Toilet-Patient 3'4" WD 1 13 F G-278 Fast Track 3 T-6" WD 3 10 R 2 G-279 Fast Track 4 T-6" WD 3 10 R 2 G-280 Fast Track 5 3'-6" WD 3 10 R 2 G-281 Fast Track 6 3'-6" WD 3 10 R 2 G-282 Alcove G-283 Alcove-Dictation G-284 Corridor 7'-4" WD 2/2 62 1 R 12 G-285 Passageway 3'-6" WD 2 110 R 2 G-285-A 3'-6" WD 2 102 R 2 G-286 Staff Work 3'-0" WD 3 15 R 2 G-287 Alcove-Work G-288 Alcove T-0" WD 2/2 65 R 2 G-289 Soiled 3'-6" WD 2 C 31 R 1, KP G-289-A T-6" WD 2 C 31 R 1, KP G-290 Clean 3'-6" WD 2 C 31 R KP, 1 G-290-A 3'-6" WD 2 C 31 R KP, 1 G-291 Treatment#1 Ent. T-0" WD 3 10 R 2 G-292 ITreatment#2 8'-0" - - - ICU,2 G-293 Work Area G-294 Treatment#8 8'-0" - - ICU,2 G-295 Treatment#7 8'-0" - ICU,2 G-296 Treatment#6 GYN 4'-0" WD 3 10 R 2 G-297 Treatment#5 Behavioral 4'-0" WD 3 7 R 6 G-297-A T-0" WD 3 7 R Add door closer DC,6 G-298 Ante 3'-0" WD 3 31 R DC,2 G-299 Toilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 13 F G-300 Toilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 12 R G-301 Waiting G-302 Waiting-Child G-303 Consultation 3'-0" WD 1 35 R G-304 EMT 3'-0" WD 2 31 R 2 G-305 Shower-Decontamination 3'-6" WD 2 31 R 2 G-305-A T-6" HM 1 122 R G-306 Toilet-Staff Male 3'-0" WD 1 1 112 R G-307 jOffice- Nurse Mangr. 3'-0" WD 1 1 16 1 R G-308 lOffice-ED Director 3'-0" WD 1 1 116 1 6 SHEPLEY BULFINCH RICHARDSON and ABBOTT ARCHITECTS Printed:7/11/96 Inj DOOR SCHEDULE OPENING OPNG. DOOR DOOR ACTIVE HC7uV FRAME SUPPLEMENTARY NO. I ROOM ENTERED WIDTH TYPE ELEV. LEAF LBL. SET TYPE SYMBOLS&REMARKS REVISED G-027 Housekeeping T-0" WD 1 39 R KP G-028 Corridor 3'-0" WD 2 C 40 R 11 G-029 Lounge-Staff 3'-0" WD 2 44-0 R 12 G-030 Nourishment G-031 Work-Staff G-032 Holding- Endo G-033 Holding G-034 Storage 6'-0" WD 1/1 74 R C. Corridor T-4" WD 2/2 65 R G-036 Corridor G-037 Storage T-0" WD 1 35 R G-038 Endo 3'-6" WD-LL 1 29 R-LL DB G-038-A 3'-0" WD-LL 1 19 R-LL G-039 Work-Endo T-0" WD 3 10 R 2 G-040 Sub-Sterile 3'-0" WD 2 31 R 2 G-041 Endo 3'-6" WD-LL 1 129 R-LL DB G-041-A 3'-0" WD-LLJ 1 19 R-LL G-042 Toilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 13 F G-043 Minor Sure 3'-6" WD 1 31 R G-043-A T-6" WD 1 31 R Il G-044 Exam Treatment 3'-6" WD 1 131 R G-045 Exam Treatment 3'-6" WD-LL 1 129 R-LL G-046 Vestibule G-047 Corridor 7'-4" WD 1 2/2 96 R G-048 Waiting G-049 Storage 3'-0" WD 1 35 R G-050 Work Alcove G-051 Reception G-052 Corridor T-4" WD 2/2 C 76 R G-52-A T-4" WD 2/2 65 R G-053 lWaiting Discharge G-054 Reception/Triage G-055 Clean Supply 3'-6" WD 2 35 R KP,2 G-056 Toilet-Public Female 3'-0" WD 1 33 R G-057 Exam/Consult 3'-0" WD 1 35 R G-059 Toilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 13 F G-060 Storage 3'-6" WD 1 135 R G-061 Treatment#3 Cardiac 5'-0" WD 2/1 50 R 2, unequal 4'-0":1'-0" G-061-A 3'-6" WD 2 10 R 2 G-062 Corridor 7'-4" WD 2/2 95 DE 2 G-063 Toilet-Public Male 3'-0" WD 1 33 R G-064 Prep/Recovery 15 G-065 Soiled T-0" WD 2 C 131 R 11, KP G-066 Prep/Recovery 14 G-067 Corridor 7'-4" WD 2/2 62 R 2 IG-067-A 7'-4" WD 2/2 105 R 2,AO G-068 lVestibule VG-O75 Housekeeping existing door Corridor 7'-4" WD 2/2 92 DE 2 Corridor 7'-4" WD 2/2 B 95 DE 1 Nurse Station Prep/Recovery 13 Emer. Elec. T-0' 1 WD 1 1 B 36 R SHEPLEY BULFINCH RICHARDSON and ABBOTT ARCHITECTS Printed:7/11/96 .ems, ♦ ✓i-1Y.7Vly LIVJrl111L 470V Page DOOR SCHEDULE OPENING OPNG. DOOR DOOR ACTIVE HDW FRAME SUPPLEMENTARY NO. ROOM ENTERED WIDTH TYPE ELEV, LEAF LBL. SET TYPE SYMBOLS&REMARKS REVISED B-230 Corridor B-231 ISoiled 3'-6" WD 2 16 R 2, KP B-231-A 1 3'-6" WR_L 2 15 R 2, KP B-232 Secretary B-233 Storage 3'-6" WD 1 1 116 1 R JKP B-234 Clean 3'-6" WD 2 16 R 2, KP B-234-A 3'-6" WD 1 1 15 R 12, KP B-235 Corridor 3'-6" WD 2 1 J44-01 R 12, KP B-236 Equipment Repair 3'-6" WD 1 115 1 R JKP B-237 lOffic e 3'-0" 1 WD 1 1 115 1 R B-238 Work Room 3'-0" WD 2 115 1 R 12 B-239 INourishment 8-240 IToilet-Female 3'-0" WD 1 1 112 1 R B-241 IToilet-Male 3'-0" WD 1 1 112 1 R B-242 Corridor 3'-6" WD 2 44-01 R 2 B-243 Housekeeping 3'-0" WD 1 39 1 R KP B-251 Unassigned 3'-0" WD 2 16 R 2 B-251-A 3'-0" WD 2 16 R 2 B-252 Toilet-Public Female 3'-0" WD 1 33 R B-253 Toilet-Public Male 3'-0" WD 1 33 R B-254 Storage 3'-0" WD 1 36 R 8-255 Storage 3'-0" WD 1 36 R B-256 Corridor 3'-0" HM 1 120 R B-257 Soiled Linen 3'6" WD 1 B 36 R AP B-258 Stair 3'-0" WD 2 C 40 R B-258A 3'-0" HM 1 120 R B-259 Shell-Ambulato Care 3'-0" WD 1 36 R 3'-0" WD 1 36 R B-260 Communications 3'-0" WD 1 C 36 R B-261 Emer. Electrical Room 3'-0" HM 1 B 36 R B-261-A 6'-0" HM 1/1 B 77 R CP-1 Chiller Plant-Chiller Room 4'-0" HM 1 122 R CP-4 3'-0" HM 2 B 34 R 1 CP-2 Chiller Plant-Emer.Gen. 6'-0" HM 2/2 B 77 R 1 CP-3 Chiller plant-Elec.Room t{'-0" HM 2 B S R 1 CP-5 Chiller Plant-Boiler Room I relocated existing door G-005 Soiled existing door G-010 Holding G-011 Prep/Recovery 4 j G-012 Prep/Recovery 5 G-013 Prep/Recovery 6 G-014 ICarts G-015 Prep/Recovery 7 G-016 Toilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 13 F G-017 Elect. 3'-0" WD 1 C 36 R G-018 Prep/Recovery 8 G-019 Carts G-020 Prep/Recovery 9 G-021 Shower-Staff 3'-0" WD 1 1 33 R G-023 Corridor G-024 Lockers-Female 3'-0" WD 1 1 44-0 R G-025 Lockers-Male 3'-0" WD 1 1 44-0 R G-026 Toilet-Staff 3'-0" WD 1 33 R SHEPLEY BULFINCH RICHARDSON and ABBOTT ARCHITECTS Printed:7/11/96 DOOR SCHEDULE OPENING OPNG. DOOR DOOR ACTIVE HDW FRAME SUPPLEMENTARY NO. I ROOM ENTERED WIDTH TYPE ELEV. LEAF LBL. SET TYPE SYMBOLS&REMARKS REVISED 1-297 Toilet- Patient(LDR) 3'-0" WD 1 12 R 1-298 Charting/Workroom 3'-0" WD 3 31 R 2 1-298-A 3'-0" WD 3 31 R 2 1-299 Shower-Staff Female 3'-0" WD 1 12 R 1-300 Office 3'-0" WD 1 35 R 1-301 ILDR 1 4'-0" WD 1 10 R ISW 1-302 Toilet-Patient(LDR) 3'-0" WD 1 12 R 1-303 Early Test 4'-0" WD 3 31 R SW,DC, 2 1-304 Toilet-Patient(HC) 3'-0" WD 1 113 F 1-305 Alcove-Linen 1-306 Corridor 7'-4" WD 7/7 76 WD 2 1-307 Toilet-Public 3'4" WD 1 33 R 1-308 Toilet-Public 3'-0" WD 1 33 R 1-309 Alcove-Work 1-310 Alcove-Linen 1-311 Alcove- Linen 1-312 jAlcove-Work B-200 Corridor 7'-4" WD 2/2 71 R 2 B-200-A 3'-0" HM 1 139 R B-201 Environmental Services 6'-0" WD 2/2 154 R 2, AP B-202 Elevator Lobby B-203 Stair 3'-0" WD 2 B 140 R 1 B-204 IService Elevator Lobby 7'-4" WD 1 2/2 171 R 2 B-205 Equipment Storage 3'-6" HM 1 15 R AP 3'-6" WD 1 16 R AP B-206 Dispatch 4'-0" HM 1 110 R DB,AP B-207 Storage 3'-0" HM 1 39 R B-208 Office 3'-0" HM 1 15 R B-209 Breakout Room 4'-0" HM 1 110 R DB,AP B-209-A 4'-0" HM 1 15 R AP B-210 Lounge 3'-0" WD 2 44-0 R 2 B-211 Processed Stores B-212 Sterilizers Steam 3'-6" HM 1 15 R B-213 ISterilizers ETO 4'-0" HM 1 34 R AP B-214 lWork Room ETO 3'-6" HM 1 134 R B-215 ISorting&Packing B-216 Linen 3'-6" HM 1 15 R AP B-216-A 3'-6" WD 1 16 R AP B-217 Corridor 3'-0" WD 2 16 R 2 B-218 Shower 3'-0" WD 1 17-0 R B-219 Toilet-Male 3'-0" WD 1 12 R B-220 Toilet-Female 3'-0" WD 1 12 R B-221 Lockers-Male 3'-0" WD 1 44-0 R B-222 Lockers-Female 3'-0" WD 1 44-0 R B-223 not used B-224 Equip.Wash 3'-6" HM 1 15 R AP B-224-A 3'-6" HM 1 15 R AP B-225 Housekeeping 3'-0" HM 1 39 R B-226 Soiled Cart Staging Area 7'-4" WD 2/2 105 R 2,AO B-227 Decontamination Soiled B-228 Mechanical Room 6'-0" WD 111 69 R ' B-228-A 8'-0" HM 1/1 74 R Weatherstripping B-229 Electrical Room 3'-0" HM 1 C 36 R B-229-A 1 6'-0" 1 HM 1 1/1 C 77—F R SHEPLEY BULFINCH RICHARDSON and ABBOTT ARCHTI'ECTS Printed:7/11/96 vvLCr ui� nivaviv nwriiHL �yau PageZ DOOR SCHEDULE OPENING OPNG. DOOR JDOORJACTIVEJ JHDWJFRAME SUPPLEMENTARY NO. I ROOM ENTERED WIDTH TYPE ELEV.I LEAF I LBL.I SET I TYPE SYMBOLS&REMARKS REVISED 1-248 Equipment T-6" WD 2 C 31 R 1, KP 1-248-A 37-6" WD 2 C 31 R 1, KP 1-249 Soiled Utility T-6" WD 2 C 31 R 1, KP 1-250 Housekeeping 3'-0" WD 1 39 R JKP 1-251 Anesthesia Workroom/ T-6" WD 2 44-01 R KP, 2 1-251-A 3'-6" WD 1 2 1 1 144-01 R KP,2 1-252 Soiled Utility T-6" WD 2 1 C 131 1 R 1, KP 1-253 Post-Partum 2 4'4" WD 1 1 1 110 1 R ISW 1-254 Toilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 12 1 R 1-255 Housekeeping T-0" 1 WD 1 1 139 1 R JKP 1-256 Nourishment 3'-0" 1 WD 1 3 1 1 131 1 R 12 1-257 IMedication 3'-0" WD 2 44-0 R 2, KP 1-258 Nurse Station 1-259 Corridor 1-260 Post Partum 3 4'-0" WD 1 10 R SW 1-261 Toilet-Patient T-0" WD 1 12 R 1-262 Toilet/Shower-Staff Male 3'-0" WD 1 1 12 R 1-263 Newborn Holding/ Nurse T-6" WD 4 1 131 R 2 1-263-A 4'-0" WD 3 42-0 R 2, Key pad access in and out 1-264 Post-Partum 4 4'-0" WD 1 10 R ISW 1-265 Toilet-Patient T-0" WD 1 12 R 1-266 Post-Partum 5 4'-0" WD 1 10 R SW 1-267 Toilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 1 112 R 1-268 Post-Partum 6 4'-0" WD 1 10 R SW 1-269 Toilet-Patient T-0" WD 1 12 R 1-270 Lockers-Female T-0" WD 1 C 44-0 R 1-271 Clean Supply T-6" WD 2 C 31 R KP, 1 1-272 Lockers-Male 3'-0" WD 1 C 44-0 R 1-273 Corridor 1-274 Solarium T-0" WD 1 34 R 1-274-A 3'-0" WD 1 34 R 1-275 Corridor 1-276 Post-Partum 7 4'-0" WD 1 10 R SW 1-277 Toilet-Patient T-0" WD 1 12 R 1-278 Post-Partum 8 4'-0" WD 1 10 1 R ISW 1-279 Toilet-Patient 3'-0" WD 1 12 R 1-280 Post-Partum 9 4'-0" WD 1 10 R SW 1-281 Isol. Ante 4'-0" WD 1 31 R SW,DC,2 1-282 Toilet-Patient T-0" WD 1 12 R 1-283 Breakroom 3'-0" WD 2 44-0 R 1-284 Stair 3'-0" WD 2 C 40-0 R 1,KEYPAD ACCESS INTO UNIT 1-285 Alcove-Work 1-286 Post-Partum 10 4'-0" WD 3 31 R SW,DC,2 1-287 Toilet-Patient T-0" WD 1 12 R 1-288 LDR 5 4'-0" WD 1 10 R SW 1-289 Toilet-Patient(LDR) 3'-0" WD 1 12 R 1-290 LDR 4 4'-0" WD 1 10 R SW 1-291 Toilet-Patient(LDR) T-0" WD 1 12 R 1-292 Family Room 4'-0" WD 1 10 R SW 1-293 Toilet-Staff Female T-0" WD 1 12 R 1-294 LDR 3 4'-0" WD 1 10 1 R ISW 1-295 Toilet-Patient(LDR) 3'-0" WD 1 12 1 R 1-296 LDR 2 4'-0" WD 1 10 I R ISW SHEPLEY BULFINCH RICHARDSON and ABBOTT ARCHITECTS Printed:7/11/96 '7�3 DOOR SCHEDULE OPENING OPNG. DOOR DOOR ACTIVE HDW FRAME SUPPLEMENTARY NO. ROOM ENTERED WIDTH TYPE ELEV. LEAF LBL. SET TYPE SYMBOLS&REMARKS REVISED Elevator Machine Room 3' 6" HM 1 1122 R r 1-200 Corridor T-0" WD 2/2 B 71 R 1,C-H 1-201 Photocopy/Storage 3' 0" WD 1 35 R 1-202 Office- Patient Ed.Coor. T-0" WD 1 35 R 1-203 Office-Birth Registrar 3'4" WD 1 35 R 1-204 lOffice-Women's Health 3'4" WD 1 35 R 1-205 1 Passageway 1-206 lWaiting 1-207 IRamp 1-208 jCorfidor 1-209 INot Used 1-210 Corridor 1-211 Service Elevator Lobby 6'4" WD 2/2 192 R 1-212 Communications Rm T-0" WD 1 C 136 R 1-213 Normal Elec. 3'4- WD 1 C 136 R 1-214 Emergency Elec. T-0" HM 1 B 136 R 1-215 Toilet-Patient T-0" WD 1 112 R 1-216 Passageway T-0" WD 2 44-0 R 12 =_ = 1-217 Corridor T-4" WD 2/2 both B 96 DE' 11,C-H,7-10"high doors,#2 --- 1-218 On-Call 3'4" WD 1 17-0 R 1-219 On-Call T-0" WD 1 17-0 R 1-220 ISoiled Linen T-6" WD 2 C 31 R 1, KP 1-221 Toilet/Shower-Staff T-0" WD 1 112 R 1-222 Passageway 1-223 Reception T-0" WD 1 1 B 134 R paint grade 1-224 Child Play 1-225 Conference 3-0" WD 7 35 VVD 4 1-225-A 3'4- WD 1 16 R 1-226 Corridor T-4" WD 7/7 76 WD 2 1-227 Exam T-6" WD 1 33 R 1-228 Toilet-Staff 3'-0" WD 1 33 R 1-229 Corridor 1-230 Passageway 3'-0" WD 2 44-0 R 2 1-231 Not Used 3'-0" WD 1 R 1-232 Toilet/Shower-Staff 3'-0" WD 1 12 R 1-233 On-Call T-0" WD 1 17-0 R - _ 1-234 On-Call T-0" WD 1 17-0 R 1-235 On-Call 3'-0" WD 1 17-0 R 1-236 Toilet-Patient(HC) T-0" WD 1 12 R 1-237 Ante-Partum 4'4" WD 1 10 R ISW 1-238 On-Call T-0" WD 1 17-0 R 1-239 Isol. Ante 4'-0' WD 1 31 R SW,DC,2 1-240 jToilet -Patient 3'-0" WD 1 112 R 1-241 Clean Supply T-6" WD 2 C 31 R KP, 1 1-241-A 3'-6" WD 2 C 31 R KP, 1 1-242 Scrub/Gown 1-243 C-Section 5'-0" WD 2/1 60 R 2,4,AP, DC,unequal 4:1 1-244 Toilet- Patient T-0" WD 1 12 R 1-245 Post-Partum 1 4'-0" WD 1 10 R SW 1-246 Corridor 7'-4" WD 2/2 105 R 2, AO, Edo 1-246-A T-4" WD 2/2 105 R 2,AO(only on 1-246 side), Edog 1-247 Office T-0" WD 1 35 R SHEPLEY BULFINCH RICHARDSON and ABBOTT ARCHITECTS Printed:7111/96 4 COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL 2980 JULY 15, 1996 KEY TO DOOR SCHEDULE AND SYMBOLS %i • SUPPLEMENTARY REMARKS: # 1. Lock cylinder faces Room Entered (Except at all Egress Stair ways.) # 2. Smoke-barrier double-egress doors with parallel-beveled meeting stiles by mfr. • GLASS TYPES: 1 =WIRE GLASS 2 =TEMPERED GLASS 3 =FLOAT GLASS 4 =FROSTED GLASS 5 =LAMINATED GLASS 6 =SECURITY GLASS 7 =LEADED GLASS D DOOR SHEDULE 08700-3 COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL 2980 JULY 15, 1996 KEY TO DOOR SCHEDULE AND SYMBOLS Series 29 through 47 = Interior single doors, self-closing Series 50 through 59 = Interior pair doors, manual-closing Series 60 through 77 = Interior pair doors, self-closing Series 90 through 96 = Double-acting&Double-egress doors Series 102 through 107 = Interior doors with Automatic Operators Series 120 through 122 = Exterior hollow metal doors Series 130 through 161 = Exterior entrance package Suffix "O" = Omnilock • FRAME TYPES: See Drawing A-9.20 for hollow metal doorframe elevations and designations as follows: R = Rabbeted F = Flush DE = Double-Egress WD = Wood Suffix "LL" = Lead-lined per Specifications Section 13091 • SUPPLEMENTARY SYMBOLS for HARDWARE: KP =Add Kick Plate AP =Add Armor Plate DS =Add Door Seals DC =Add Delayed Action to Door Closer(s) SW =Hinges shall be Swing-Clear HD =Hinges shall be Heavy Duty (in addition to all doors T-6" or wider, all lead lined doors and Automatic Operators.) SCDH =Sliding Closet Door Hardware DB =Add Dead Bolt • SUPPLEMENTARY SYMBOLS FOR ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: AO =Automatic Operator(s)specified in Section 08710,HARDWARE, connections per Electrical Drawings and Specifications C-H =Closer-Holder(s)specified in Section 08710,HARDWARE, connections per Electrical Drawings and Specifications Edog =Electric-dogging Exit Devices specified in Section 08710,HARDWARE, connections per Electrical Drawings and Specifications EmL =Electro-mechanical Lock specified in Section 08710,HARDWARE, connections per Electrical Drawings and Specifications DOOR SHEDULE 08700-2 COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL 2980 JULY 15, 1996 KEY TO DOOR SCHEDULE AND SYMBOLS • OPENING NUMBERS CORRESPOND TO ROOM NUMBERS AS FOLLOWS: The door schedule Opening Number of the only entrance opening to a room is the same as the number of the room entered and is not separately shown on the floor plans. Multiple entrance openings to a room are identified by the number of the room entered and are differentiated in the door schedule, and on the floor plans, by the room numbers with the dashed suffix "-A" or "-B", etc. • DOOR ELEVATIONS: See Drawing No. A-9.20 for Wood and Hollow Metal door elevations and designations. See Comprehensive Exterior Elevation drawings for exterior Aluminum Entrance elevations and details. DOOR TYPE ABBREVIATIONS: HM = Hollow Metal Spec. 08110 WD = Wood Spec. 08211 ICU = ICU/CCU Sliding Spec. 08312 Coil = Coiling Spec. 08331 &08335 Entr = Aluminum Entrance (exterior,swing) Spec. 08410 Rvlv = Revolving (exterior) Spec. 08470 LL = Lead-Lined Spec. 13091 • ACTIVE LEAF of pair doors is designated by door swing abbreviations illustrated below. Direction of swing is relative to outside of door, (i.e. the side from which passage through door may be restricted by locking). LH = Left-Hand swing RH = Right-Hand swing LHR = Left-Hand Reverse swing RHR = Right-Hand Reverse swing ROOM ROOM OUTSIDE OUTSIDE ENTERED ENTERED rENTEREO RHRL.H. R.H. ROOM OUTSIDE OUTSIDE ENTERED • HARDWARE SET categories in this Door Schedule are as follows: Series 6 through 19 = Interior single doors,manual-closing DOOR SHEDULE 08700-1 2980 SECTION 08700 DOOR SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The following twelve (12) pages comprise the Door Schedule for this project . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) DOOR SCHEDULE 08700-0 2980 3 . 06 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer, that ensure window units are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-11 2980 at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified under "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in appendix to AAMA 101 . C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets, as shown on Shop Drawings, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units . Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of the Work. 1 . Sealants are specified in another Division 7 Section. 3 . 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct on-site tests for air and water infiltration with window manufacturer' s representative present . The Architect will select units to be tested. Tests not meeting specified requirements and units having similar deficiencies shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency selected by the Architect . 1 . Air-Infiltration Tests : Conduct tests according to requirements of ASTM E783 . Allowable infiltration shall not exceed 1 .5 times the amount indicated. 2 . Water-Resistance Tests: Conduct tests according to requirements of ASTM E1105. No water leakage is permitted. 3 . 04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weatherstripping for smooth operation and a weathertight closure. 3 .05 CLEANING A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installing windows . Exercise care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes . Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances . Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installing windows . Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing" for cleaning and maintenance. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-10 2980 2 . 08 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes . B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes . C. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below) . Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions . 1 . Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605 .2 . a. Color and Gloss : Two (2) custom colors will be selected by the Architect; one for the exterior, one for the interior. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correct and sill plate is level. 1 . Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris . 2 . Metal surfaces shall be dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust and corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints . 3 .02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installing window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the Work. B. Set window units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. 1 . Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action ALUMINUM WINDOWS ��3 08520-9 2980 2 . 07 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum window units to comply with " indicated standards . Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units . 1 . Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. 2 . Prepare window sash or ventilators for glazing, except where preglazing at the factory is indicated. B. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral, concealed, low-conductance, thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior, in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact . 1 . Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than 3 years, has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation, and has been tested to show adequate strength and security of glass retention. 2 . Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash. 3 . Weep Holes : Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. 4 . Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water penetration. 5 . Subframes : Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions indicated but not less than 0 . 062-inch- (1 . 6-mm-) thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners . Finish to match window units . 6 . Mullions : Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units . Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. C. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical for applications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing" of these Specifications and AAMA 101 . ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-8 2980 2 . 04 ACCESSORIES A. Provide manufacturer' s standard accessories that comply with indicated standards . B. Insect Screens : Provide insect screens for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. Locate screens on inside or outside of window sash or ventilator, depending on window type. Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches . 1 . Wickets : Provide sliding or hinged-type wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and durability during handling. 2 . Screen Frames : Fabricate frames of tubular- shaped, extruded or formed-aluminum members of 0.040 inch (1 mm) minimum wall thickness, with mitered or coped joints and concealed mechanical fasteners . Finish frames to match window units . a. Provide removable PVC spline-anchor concealing edge of screen frame. C. Extruded sills and panning trim, standard of the window manufacturer. 2 . 05 CASEMENT WINDOWS A. Window Grade and Class : Comply with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance Class C-C20. Window units shall successfully pass vertical deflection and hardware load test performance requirements specified in AAMA 101. B. Hardware: Provide the following equipment and operating hardware: 1. Operating Device: Gear-type rotary operator located on jamb at sill . 2 . Hinges : Concealed 4-bar friction hinges with adjustable slide shoe (2 per ventilator) . a. Provide ventilator operation that provides access for cleaning. 3 . Lock: Lift-type, cam-action lock. 4. Limit Device: Stay bar with adjustable hold-open device. 2 .06 FIXED WINDOWS A. Window Grade and Class : Comply with requirements of AAMA Grade and Performance Class F-C20 . I'pp p`( ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-7 2980 ASTM B633 ; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Compression-Type Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: Unless otherwise indicated, and at manufacturer ' s option, provide compressible stripping for glazing and weatherstripping such as molded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D2000 Designation 2BC415 to 3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D2287, or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C509, Grade 4 . E. Sealant : For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by manufacturer for joint size and movement . Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" of these Specifications for selection and installation of sealants . F. Glass-Fiber-Mesh Insect Screen: 18 by 16 (1 .4 by 1 . 6 mm) or 18 by 14 (1.4 by 1 .8 mm) mesh of plastic-coated glass-fiber threads, woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with requirements of ASTM D3656 . 2 .03 HARDWARE A. Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion- resistant material compatible with aluminum and of sufficient strength to perform the function for which it is intended. B. Four-Bar Friction Hinges : Comply with AAMA 904 .1 . 1 . Friction Shoes : Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable material . C. Gear-Type Rotary Operators : Comply with AAMA 901 .1 for rotary operators . Comply with ASTM E405, Method A, when subjected to operating moments and closing torques indicated in AAMA 101. D. Limit Device: Provide manufacturer's standard, concealed friction adjustor, adjustable stay bar, limit device designed to restrict ventilator opening. F ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-6 2980 3 . Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: 3 years after date of Substantial Completion. D. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes and Glass : 5 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Casement and Fixed Windows : a. Acorn Window Systems . b. EFCO Corporation. c. Graham Architectural Products Corporation. d. TRACO. e. Wausau Metals Corporation. 2 .02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22, 000 psi (150 MPa) ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0 .062 inch (1 .6 mm) thick at any location for main frame and sash members . B. Fasteners : Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0 .125 inch (3 .2 mm) thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts. 2 . Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners . For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories : Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel or iron complying with requirements of bbl ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-5 2980 window unit complies with performance requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing of current window units within the last 5 years . Test results based on use of down-sized test units will not be accepted. 1 .06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installation of aluminum windows similar in material, design, and extent to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum windows from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1 . 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements : Check window openings by field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings . Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1 . Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions . 1 . 08 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by aluminum window manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace window components that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. 2 . Faulty operation of sash and hardware. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-4 2980 opening of joints, and overstressing of components, connections, and other detrimental effects . Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss . a. Temperature Change (Range) : 120 deg F (67 deg C) , ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) , material surfaces . D. Acoustic Performance: Windows shall have an STC rating of 30 - 32 . 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data for each type of window required, including the following: 1 . Construction details and fabrication methods . 2 . Profiles and dimensions of individual components . . 3 . Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes . 4. Recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exterior surfaces . B. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of each type of window required including information not fully detailed in manufacturer' s standard Product Data and the following: 1 . Layout and installation details, including anchors . 2 . Elevations at 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1 :50) scale and typical window unit elevations at 3/4 inch = 1 foot (1 :20) scale. 3 . Full-size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 4 . Location of weep holes . 5. Panning details. 6. Hardware, including operators. 7 . Window cleaning provisions . 8 . Glazing details. 9 . Accessories . C. Samples for initial color selection on 12 inch (300 mm) long sections of window members . Where finishes involve normal color variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. D. Samples for Verification: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques, workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. E. Test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating that each type, grade, and size of ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-3 2980 B. Test Criteria: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency based on the following criteria: 1 . Design wind velocity at Project site is 70 mi . /h (113 km/h) . 2 . Test Procedures : Test window units according to ASTM E283 for air infiltration, ASTM E547 for water penetration, and ASTM E330 for structural performance. C. Performance Requirements : Testing shall demonstrate compliance with requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for air infiltration, water penetration, and structural performance for type, grade, and performance class of window units required. Where required design pressure exceeds the minimum for the specified window grade, comply with requirements of AAMA 101, Section 3 , "Optional Performance Classes, " for higher than minimum performance class . 1 . Air-Infiltration Rate for Operating Units : Not more than 0 .37 cfm/ft . (2 . 06 cu. m/h per m) of operable sash joint for an inward test pressure of 1 .57 lbf/sq. ft . (75 Pa) . 2 . Air-Infiltration Rate for Fixed Windows : Not more than 0 .15 cfm/ft . (2 .74 cu. m/h per m) of area for an inward test pressure of 1 .57 lbf/sq. ft . (75 Pa) . 3 . Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure of 15 percent of the design pressure. 4 . Structural Performance: No failure or permanent deflection in excess of 0 .4 percent of any member ' s span after removing the imposed load, for a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft . (1437 Pa) . 5 . Condensation Resistance: Where window units are indicated to be "thermally improved, " provide units tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503 .1 showing a condensation resistance factor (CRF) of 56 . 6 . Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units with a U-value maximum of 0 .69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3 .9 W/sq. m x K) at 15-mi. /h (24 km/h) exterior wind velocity, when tested according to AAMA 1503 .1. 7 . Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Level 10 requirements when tested according to ASTM F 588 . 8. Thermal Movements: Provide window units that allow thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature when engineering, fabricating, and installing aluminum windows to prevent buckling, Aftk .ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-2 2980 SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes Commercial Grade aluminum windows of the performance class indicated. Window types required include the following: 1 . Casement windows . 2 . Fixed windows . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry. B. Section 07820 - Metal-Framed Skylights . C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers . D. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts . E. Section 08800 - Glazing. 1 . 03 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class number, included as part of the window designation system, is the actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. 1 . Structural test pressure, wind load test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. 2 . Water-leakage-resistance test pressure is equivalent to 15 percent of the design pressure with 2 . 86 lbf/sq. ft . (137 Pa) as a minimum for Residential, Commercial, and Heavy-Commercial Grade windows. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIRIIMENTS A. Provide aluminum windows engineered, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, classes, and sizes required for Project according to test methods indicated. i ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-1 2980 3 . 05 PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that revolving door units will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION REVOLVING ENTRANCE DOORS 08470-9 2980 B. Cut and trim framing during installation only with approval of the manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations . `- 1 . Restore finish and remove and replace members as directed where cutting and trimming has impaired strength or appearance. 2 . Do not install members that are warped, bowed, deformed, or otherwise damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair strength or appearance. Remove and replace members as directed that have been damaged during installation. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line with uniform hairline joints . Support on metal shim and secure in place by bolting to clip angles and supports anchored to supporting structure. D. Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials, including metal in contact with masonry or concrete work, with a heavy coating of bituminous paint, or provide other separation as recommended by manufacturer. 3 . 03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors to provide a tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure and to operate smoothly with hardware and operators functioning properly. 1 . Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 3 . 04 CLEANING A. Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass surfaces after installation complying with requirements contained in the Section 08800 for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances . 1 . Follow the recommendations of the revolving door manufacturer in selection of cleaning agents . Do not use cleaning agents containing ammonia or other compounds that might damage finished metal surfaces . REVOLVING ENTRANCE DOORS 08470-8 2980 3 . Install weatherstripping in stiles, head and sill rails to be adjustable and replaceable without dismantling wings . B. Dissimilar Metals : Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator that will prevent corrosion. C. Fasteners : Conceal fasteners wherever possible. Countersink heads of exposed fasteners . 2 . 05 METAL FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes . B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes . C. High-Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below) . Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions . 1. Fluorocarbon Two-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermo-cured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluorocarbon color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; comply with AAMA 605 .2 . a. Color: Two (2) custom colors will be selected by the Architect . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 PREPARATION A. Templates and Diagrams : Furnish installation templates, diagrams, and other data to fabricators and installers of related work as necessary for coordination of the installation. 3 .02 INSTALLATION A. Install revolving doors in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. Io� REVOLVING ENTRANCE DOORS 08470-7 2980 permit automatic rotation of revolving door wings, slow-down when activation released, and return to quarter-point position. Furnish power operation equipment to suit current characteristics of the building electrical service. 1 . Adjust for maximum speed of 8 rpm. 2 . Locate control unit overhead unless otherwise indicated. B. Panic Collapsing Mechanism: Manufacturer' s standard device to permit all door wings to automatically release from their normal positions and move outward into the bookfold position when pressure is applied to the outer stiles. C. Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard push bars and surface-applied or mortised locks to receive cylinders, finished to match doors . 1 . Lock cylinders are included in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware. " D. Ceiling: Provide aluminum ceiling, finish same as aluminum portions of the door. E. Ceiling Lights : Provide manufacturer's standard ceiling lights consisting of 2 recessed light fixtures within the revolving door enclosure ceiling, complete with lamps and translucent lens . F. Movable Wings : Provide manufacturer' s standard overhead carriage, guide support track, pivot mechanism, and other components necessary to permit folded door wings to be easily moved to one side. 2 . 04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate revolving door units to sizes and configurations indicated. Carefully cut and fit all components. 1 . Joints shall be tightly bolted together to produce hairline joints . Finish material prior to fabrication. Take care in assembly to prevent welds or adhesives from blemishing finished surfaces. Glass stops shall be snap-in type where possible. a. Screws, and other fastenings, when required, shall be equally spaced, countersunk, and finished to match the adjacent work. 2 . Provide reinforcement for hardware and operating mechanism necessary to meet performance requirements and to withstand operating stresses without metal or glass failure. REVOLVING ENTRANCE DOORS 08470-6 2980 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions : Provide alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, but with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B221 for 6063-T5. 1 . Provide main extrusions of not less than 0 .125 inch wall thickness . 2 . Provide extruded aluminum glazing stops and other applied trim extrusions with a minimum wall thickness of 0 .062 inch. B. Aluminum Sheets : Provide alloy and temper recommended by the producer or finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005-H15 . C. Steel Supports : Provide manufacturer's standard, mild steel supports . D. Anchorages and Fastenings : Provide manufacturer' s standard, concealed anchors and fasteners . Finish heads of exposed fasteners to match adjacent metal surfaces . 1 . Furnish inserts and anchorage devices in ample time to avoid delays in other work. 2 . Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for assembly of units and for application of hardware. E. Glass and Glazing Materials : Glass and glazing materials shall comply with requirements of the "Glass and Glazing" Section of these specifications. 1. Tempered Glass: Provide tempered glass in thicknesses indicated in wings and ceilings . Comply with requirements of ASTM C1048, kind FT (fully tempered) , condition A (uncoated surfaces) , Type I (transparent) , class and thickness as indicated. a. Wings: Provide 1/4 inch thick Class 1 clear glass. 2 . Enclosure Walls: Provide 7/16 inch thick, clear, single-bent laminated glass . F. Weatherstripping: Provide heavy duty, single-piece rubber and rubber-felt combinations . 2 .03 EQUIPMENT A. Power-Assisted Speed Control Unit: Provide an electric or electro-hydraulic speed regulator to REVOLVING ENTRANCE DOORS 08470-5 2980 B. Storage: If temporary storage is necessary, store doors and related components inside the building in a dry protected area apart from construction traffic in their original shipping containers with protective wrapping or packaging securely in place. C. Protect finish surfaces from damage during handling and installation. 1 .08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements : Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings . Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the Work. 1 . Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit . 1. 09 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace components or units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1 . Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage, or air infiltration. 2 . Faulty operation of speed control operators and other hardware. 3 . Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period for Revolving Door Units : 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide revolving doors manufactured by one of the following (no substitutions) : 1 . The Tritour; Boon Edam, Inc. or equal of: 2 . Crane Fulview Door Co. 3 . Horton Automatics . REVOLVING ENTRANCE DOORS 08470-4 2980 1 . Maintenance Proximity: The Installer shall maintain offices and repair or service facilities not more than 2 hours normal travel time from the Project site. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications : Provide revolving entrance door assemblies produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide the type of products indicated that comply with ANSI 297 .1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials . 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with a certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Design Concept: The drawings indicate the size, profile and dimensional requirements of the revolving entrance door assemblies required and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Revolving entrance door assemblies by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect . The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. E. Emergency Exits : Revolving doors serving as a required means of egress shall comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide manufacturer's certification that doors comply with these requirements . 1 . 07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver revolving doors and related components to the Project in manufacturer's original, unopened protective packaging. Use padded blankets or other approved protective wrapping for glass, decorative metal work, and other exposed elements . 1. Do not deliver door units until Work is ready for their installation. 2 . Inspect components for damage upon delivery. Unless minor defects can be repaired to the Architect 's satisfaction, remove and replace damaged components at no additional cost. REVOLVING ENTRANCE DOORS 08470-3 2980 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer' s product data for each different revolving entrance door assembly required, including: 1 . Manufacturer ' s standard details and fabrication methods . 2 . Data on finishing, hardware, and accessories . 3 . Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces . B. Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of revolving doors and associated components . Indicate enclosures, speed control units, and other components not included in manufacturer' s product data. Include the following: 1 . Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. 2 . Elevations at 1/4 inch scale. 3 . Hardware, indicating mounting heights . 4 . Detail sections of typical composite members . 5 . Provisions for expansion and contraction. 6 . Anchors and reinforcements . 7 . Glazing details . C. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of samples of each specified color and finish on 12 inch long sections of extrusions or formed shapes . where normal color variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of color variations . D. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer' s maintenance and service instructions for adjustment, operation, and maintenance of revolving door units, including name, address, and telephone number of the nearest service representative. Include instructions for maintenance of metal finishes . E. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing that the revolving entrance door assembly has been tested in accordance with specified test procedures and complies with performance characteristics indicated. 1 .06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : For installation of the revolving entrance door assemblies, engage an experienced Installer who is an authorized representative of the manufacturer for the installation and maintenance of the type of units required for this Project . REVOLVING ENTRANCE DOORS 08470-2 2980 SECTION 08470 REVOLVING ENTRANCE DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following types of revolving doors : 1 . Three wing power-assisted revolving doors . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers . C. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts : Manual aluminum entrance doors . D. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Lock cylinders . E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass and glazing requirements for adjacent entrance doors and storefronts . F. Division 16 - Electrical : Electrical connections . 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Revolving doors consist of complete units fabricated, assembled, and tested for proper operation at the factory. Each unit includes door wings, enclosure, hardware (except lock cylinders) , weatherstripping, collapsing mechanism, speed control, and other components standard with manufacturer. 1 .04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide revolving entrance door assemblies that comply with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's assemblies according to test methods indicated. 1 . Air Infiltration: Revolving door assemblies shall limit air leakage to a rate not to exceed 1 .25 cfm per square foot of door area when tested in accordance with requirements of ASTM E283 . REVOLVING ENTRANCE DOORS 08470-1 2980 3 . 05 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure entrance and storefront systems are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS '' 08410-14 2980 E. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members . F. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers ' written instructions . 1 . Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer 's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. G. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Section 08800, unless otherwise indicated. H. Erection Tolerances : Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances : 1 . Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3 .7 m) ; 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. 2 . Alignment : Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1 .5 mm) . Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0 .8 mm) . 3 . Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm) . 3 . 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality- control testing indicated. B. Water Spray Test : After completing the installation of test areas, test storefront system for water penetration according to AAMA 501 .2 requirements . C. Repair or remove and replace Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing; replace to conform to specified requirements . 3 .04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weather stripping, smooth operation, and weathertight closure. B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces . b�3 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-13 2980 2 . 07 STEEL PRIMING A. Comply with NAAMM' s "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations `- relative to applying primer. B. Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer' s standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel . C. Priming: Apply manufacturer ' s standard corrosion- resistant primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of entrance and storefront systems . Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer' s written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing entrance and storefront systems. Do not install damaged components . Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints . Seal joints watertight . B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint . C. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Section 07900 . A ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-12 2980 for factory-installed hardware before finishing components . 1 . Exterior Doors : Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops . At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2 . Interior Doors : Provide ANSI/BHMA A156 .16 silencers at stops to prevent metal to metal contact . Provide 3 silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and 2 silencers on head of double-door frames . 2 . 06 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM' s "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes . B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples . Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast . C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes . D. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below) . Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions . 1 . Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer 's standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2 . 2 . Color and Gloss: Two (2) custom color as selected by the Architect; one on the exterior, one on the interior. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-11 2980 2 . 05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings . 1 . Fabricate components for screw-spline frame construction. B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing. C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices . D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. E. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. F. Glazing Channels : Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual . " G. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint . H. Storefront : Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops) . Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. I. Entrances : Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-10 2980 size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. 1 . Closing Cycle: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) , "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) , " whichever are more stringent . 2 . Opening Force: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements for locations indicated: a. Exterior Doors : 15 lbf (67 N) . b. Interior Doors : 5 lbf (22 .2 N) . D. Concealed Overhead Closers: ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 2, and as follows: 1. Type: Single acting, independently hung, with concealed arm and track. 2 . Hold Open: Automatic, at angle selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard options . 3 . Back Check: Adjustable. 4 . Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle, if any, or at angle selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard options . E. Door Stops : ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor- or wall-mounted door stop, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper. F. Cylinders : As specified in Section 08710. G. Vertical-Rod Exit Devices : Concealed, vertical-rod exit device complying with UL 305 requirements, with 2-point top and bottom latching that is released by a full-width crash bar or when locked down (dogged) by lock cylinder or retracting screws beneath housing. H. Pull Handles: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of pull handles and plates. I. Thresholds: At exterior doors, provide manufacturer' s standard threshold with cutouts coordinated for operating hardware, with anchors and jamb clips, and not more than 1/2 inch (12 .7 mm) high, with beveled edges providing a floor level change with a slope of not more than 1 :2, and in the following material: 1. Material: Aluminum, mill finish. J. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard weather sweep for application to exterior door bottoms and with concealed fasteners on mounting strips. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-9 2980 fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials . 1 . Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads . 2 . Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts : Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 requirements . E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer. F. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0 . 018 inch (0 .457 mm) thick stainless steel, complying with ASTM A666, of type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with system. G. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer' s standard replaceable weather stripping as follows : 1 . Compression Weather Stripping: Molded neoprene complying with ASTM D2000 requirements or molded PVC complying with ASTM D2287 requirements . 2 . Sliding Weather Stripping: Wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum- strip backing complying with AAMA 701 requirements. 2 . 04 HARDWARE A. Provide heavy-duty hardware units indicated in sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for entrances indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish, unless otherwise indicated. B. Ball-Bearing Butts : ANSI/BHMA A156. 1, Grade 1, 5- knuckle, 4-1/2-by-4 inch (101 . 6-by-114 .3 mm) ball- bearing butts. Provide nonremovable pins at hinges exposed to door outside and provide nonferrous hinges for applications exposed to weather. Provide 3 hinges at each leaf for doors up to 36 inches (914 mm) wide and 80 inches (2032 mm) tall; provide 4 hinges at each leaf for taller doors. C. Closers, General : Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for closer size, depending on door ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ' 08410-8 2980 4 . Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B211 (ASTM B211M) . 5 . Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes : AWS A5 . 10 . B. Steel Reinforcement : Complying with ASTM A36 (ASTM A36M) for structural shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A570 (ASTM A570M) for hot-rolled sheet and strip. C. Glazing as specified in Section 08800 . D. Glazing Gaskets : Manufacturer's standard pressure- glazing system of black, resilient glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastomer of type and in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type. F. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems as specified in Section 07900 . G. Bituminous Paint : Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0 .762 mm) thickness per coat. 2 .03 COMPONENTS A. Doors : Provide manufacturer's standard 1-3/4 inch (44 .5 mm) thick glazed doors with minimum 0 .125 inch (3 .2 mm) thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods. 1 . Glazing Stops and Gaskets : Provide manufacturer's standard snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets . 2 . Stile Design: Medium stile; 4 inch nominal width. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-7 2980 1 . 08 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents . B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of entrance and storefront systems that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2 . Failure of system to meet performance requirements . 3 . Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4 . Failure of operating components to function normally. C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Arch Amarlite. 2 . Butler Manufacturing Company; Vistawall Architectural Products . 3 . EFCO Corporation. 4 . Kawneer Company, Inc. 5 . Tubelite Architectural Systems . 6. Wausau Metals Corporation. 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below. 1 . Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) . 2 . Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes : ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M) . 3 . Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes : ASTM B429 . ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-6 2980 1 . 06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing entrance and storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1 . Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for entrance and storefront systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer' s standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project . B. Source Limitations : Obtain each type of entrance and storefront system through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options : Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of entrance and storefront systems and are based on the specific systems indicated. Other manufacturers ' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions . " 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effect, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect 's approval and only to the extent needed to comply with performance requirements. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Welding Standards : Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1 .2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum. " 1. 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements : Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions : Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-5 2980 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS *"* A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data for each product specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes . B. Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for entrance and storefront systems. Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, provisions for expansion and contraction, and attachments to other work. 1 . For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, quantities, and locations . C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer' s color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's standard sizes . Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. E. Cutaway Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal framing intersection of systems, made from minimum 6 inch (150 mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery. 2 . Anchorage. 3 . Expansion provisions. 4 . Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. F. Installer Certificates : Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements . G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with storefront systems ' performance requirements. H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of entrance and storefront systems with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current systems. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-4 2980 H. Air Infiltration: Provide entrance and storefront systems with permanent resistance to air leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0 . 06 cfm/sq. ft . (0.3 L/s/sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E283 at a static-air- pressure difference of 1 . 57 lbf/sq. ft . (75 .2 Pa) . I. Water Penetration: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, " but not less than 6 .24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa) . Water leakage is defined as follows: 1 . Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing on systems ' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage. J. Thermal Movements : Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to function properly, and other detrimental effects . 1. Temperature Change (Range) : 120 deg F (67 deg C) , ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) , material surfaces. K. Structural-Support Movement: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection. L. Condensation Resistance: Provide storefront systems with condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 56 when tested according to AAMA 1503 .1 . M. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide storefront systems with average U-values of not more than 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3 .57 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503 .1. N. Dimensional Tolerances : Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-3 2980 C. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate aluminum exposed to exterior from aluminum exposed to interior with a material of low thermal conductance. D. Wind Loads : Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers ' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, " 6 .4 .2, "Analytical Procedure, " whichever are more stringent . 1 . Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm) , whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0 .2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E330 . a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures . b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile (1 . 609 km) of wind for relevant exposure category. E. Seismic Loads : Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, " Section 9, "Earthquake Loads, " whichever are more stringent. F. Dead Loads : Provide entrance- and storefront-system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load. 1 . Provide a minimum 1/8 inch (3 .18 mm) clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below. 2 . Provide a minimum 1/16 inch (1 .59 mm) clearance between members and operable windows and doors. G. Live Loads : Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures ' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-2 2980 SECTION 08410 7 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Exterior entrance systems . 2 . Vestibule doors and frames matching entrance doors . 3 . Exterior storefront type framing system, including aluminum sills . 1 . 02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Door hardware is furnished under Section 08710 . 1. 03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers : Joint sealants installed as part of aluminum entrance and storefront systems . B. Section 08470 - Revolving Entrance Doors . C. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows . D. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware: Lock cylinders. E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glazing requirements . 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer' s standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project . Failure includes the following: 1. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits. 2 . Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing units. B. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-1 2980 B. After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust counter doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion. C. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to counter door operation, servicing, and preventive maintenance. END OF SECTION COILING COUNTER DOORS 08335-5 2980 thickness to support roll-up of curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0 .03 inch per foot of span under full load. C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs . Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel . Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft . D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel in size required to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. E. Brackets : Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer' s standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate with bell mouth guide groove for curtain. F. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag. 2 . 05 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A. Manual Push-Up Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 pounds. 1. Provide brass lifting handle and slide bolt lock on inside bottom bar. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Install counter door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to final shop drawings, manufacturer' s instructions, and as specified. COILING COUNTER DOORS 08335-4 2980 1 . Stainless Steel Door Curtain Slats : Provide 22 gage stainless steel sheets complying with ASTM A167, Type 302 or 304, with AISI No. 4 finish, bright, directional polish. a. Furnish manufacturer' s standard "flat-face" slats . B. Endldcks : Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets . Provide locks on alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement . C. Bottom Bar: Consisting of angles, not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick, stainless steel to match curtain slats . 1 . Provide a replaceable gasket of flexible UL labeled vinyl at bottom as a smoke seal and cushion bumper for manually operated doors . D. Curtain Jamb Guides : Fabricate curtain jamb guides of stainless steel angles, or channels and angles with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain loading. Build up units with minimum 12 gage stainless steel sections . Slot bolt holes for track adjustment . E. Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing with a minimum of 3/8-inch bolts at not more than 18 inches on center, unless closer spacing recommended by door manufacturer. Extend wall angles above door opening head to support coil brackets, unless otherwise indicated. Place anchor bolts on exterior wall guides so they are concealed when door is in closed position. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent over- travel of curtain and a continuous bar for holding windlocks . F. Smoke Seals: Provide UL Labeled smoke seals at counter door head and jambs. 2 .04 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and in a spring barrel, and connected to counter door curtain with required barrel rings . Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed structural-quality carbon steel, welded or seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall COILING COUNTER DOORS 08335-3 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Doors : Drawings and specifications are based on Living Doors, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal : 1 . Living Doors, Inc. 2 . The Cookson Co. B. Metal Door: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal : 1 . Atlas Roll-Lite Overhead Doors/Div. of MASCO. 2 . The Cookson Co. 3 . Cornell Iron Works Inc. 4 . Raynor Garage Door. 2 . 02 WOOD DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling counter door curtain of interlocking wood slats, in a continuous length for width of counter door without splices . Slats interlocked by means of spring tenshioned steel aircraft cables concealed within the slats . 1 . Slats : a. Material : Double rabbetted wood slats, Maple. b. Size: 1-3/4 inches high by 1/2 inch thick. c. Finish: Sanded, for finishing by others . 2 . Bottom Bar: Wood to match slats, approximately 5- 1/2 inches high by 1-5/8 inches thick. B. Curtain Jamb Guides : Guides shall be formed from extruded aluminum. Aluminum faces shall be covered with veneer to match curtain and bottom rail . C. Secure continuous guides to wall framing with a minimum of 1/4 inch diameter fasteners at not more than 12 inches on centers . Provide removable stops on guides to prevent over-travel of curtain. D. Hoods, Fascias and Soffits : Fabricate from 3/4 inch finished grade plywood veneer to match bottom rail . 2 .03 METAL DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling counter door curtain of interlocking slats, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material gage recommended by door manufacturer for size and type of door required, and as follows : Amok COILING COUNTER DOORS 08335-2 2980 SECTION 08335 ' COILING COUNTER DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes : 1 . Manually operated overhead coiling wood counter doors . 2 . Manually operated overhead coiling metal slat counter door. B. Provide complete operating counter door assemblies including door curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanism, hardware, operators, and installation accessories . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08100 - Metal Doors And Frames . B. Section 08305 - Access Panels. C. Section 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer' s product data, roughing-in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead coiling counter door. 1 . Provide operating instructions and maintenance information. B. Shop drawings : Submit shop drawings for special components and installations that are not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data sheets . 1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer' s Qualifications : Furnish overhead coiling counter door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components . GS� COILING COUNTER DOORS 08335-1 2980 B. After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion. , C. Train Owner' s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to door operation, servicing, preventive maintenance, and procedures for resetting closing devices after activation. END OF SECTION OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331-6 2980 E. Brackets : Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer ' s standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate with bell mouth guide groove for curtain. F. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head and act as weather seal . Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness . Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag. 1 . Fabricate steel hoods for doors of not less than 0 .0276 inch thick (24 gage) hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G 90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A525. 2 . Fabricate aluminum hoods for aluminum doors of Alloy 3003 or 5052 aluminum sheet not less than 0 . 032 inch thick, mill finish. 2 . 04 PRIME PAINTING A. Shop-clean and prime ferrous metal and galvanized surfaces, exposed and unexposed, except tightly joined and lubricated surfaces, with door manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer. Use primer that is compatible with finish painting. 2 . 05 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A. Provide manual operators . B. Chain Hoist Operator: Provide manual chain hoist operator consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, and geared reduction unit with a maximum 35-1b pull for door operation. Furnish alloy steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 INSTALLATION A. Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to final shop drawings, manufacturer' s instructions, and as specified. 1. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331-5 2980 F. Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing with a minimum of 3/8 inch bolts at not more than 30 inches o.c . , unless closer spacing recommended by door manufacturer. Extend wall angles above door opening head to support coil brackets, unless otherwise indicated. Place anchor bolts on exterior wall guides so they are concealed when door is in closed position. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent over- travel of curtain and a continuous bar for holding windlocks . G. Weather Seals : Provide vinyl or neoprene weatherstripping for exterior exposed doors, except where otherwise indicated. At door heads, use 1/8 inch thick continuous sheet secured to inside of curtain coil hood. At door jambs, use 1/8 inch thick continuous strip secured to exterior side of jamb guide. H. Slats for exterior doors shall be filled with foamed- in-place urethane insulation. 2 . 03 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and in a spring barrel, and connected to door curtain with required barrel rings . Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel : Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed structural-quality carbon steel, welded or seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support roll-up of curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0 .03 inch per foot of span under full load. C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel . Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel in size required to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331-4 2980 3 . Ceco/Windsor Door--Div. of the Ceco Corp. 4 . The Cookson Co. 5 . Cornell Iron Works Inc. - 6 . Dynamic Closures Corp. 7 . Mahon Door Corp. 8 . Overhead Door Corp. 9 . Pacific Rolling Door Co. 10 . Raynor Garage Door. 11 . Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co. 12 . Wayne-Dalton Corp. 13 . J.G. Wilson Corp. 2 . 02 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand required wind loading, in a continuous length for width of door without splices . Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material gage recommended by door manufacturer for size and type of door required, and as follows : 1 . Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural quality, cold-rolled galvanized steel sheets complying with ASTM A446, Grade A, with G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A525 . 2 . Aluminum Door Curtain Slats : Furnish with standard mill finish. a. Furnish manufacturer's standard "flat-face" slats. B. Endlocks: Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets . Provide locks on alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement . C. Windlocks : Malleable iron castings secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets . Unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer, provide windlocks on doors exceeding 16 feet wide. Space windlocks approximately 24 inches o.c. on both edges of curtain. D. Bottom Bar: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick, either galvanized or stainless steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats . E. Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles, or channels and angles with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain loading. Build up units with minimum 3/16 inch thick steel sections, galvanized after fabrication. Slot bolt holes for track adjustment. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331-3 2980 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer' s Qualifications : Furnish each overhead coiling door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components . 1 . Furnish overhead coiling door units by one manufacturer for entire Project . B. Insert and Anchorages : Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry to install units . Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions to install anchorage devices . Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1 . See concrete and masonry Sections of these specifications regarding installation of inserts and anchorage devices . C. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce overhead coiling doors to withstand a 20-psf (85-mph) wind-loading pressure. D. Fire Door Assemblies : Furnish fire door assemblies that comply with NFPA No. 80 and have been fire tested, rated, and labeled according to ASTM E 152 . Furnish each door with a metal UL label as evidence of rating, with label indicating rating in hours of duration of exposure to fire, and a letter designation of location for which the assembly is designed. E. Oversized Fire Doors : Where fire door assemblies exceed size for which testing and labeling service is offered, furnish UL "Certificate of Inspection" for oversized doors in lieu of label, certifying that design, materials, and construction are equal to doors tested and labeled by UL. F. Automatic Closing: Provide automatic closing device and governor, operating when activated by temperature rise and melting of 160 degrees F (71 degrees C) fusible link. Construct governor unit to be inoperative during normal door operations . Design release mechanism to reset easily. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal: 1 . Apton Rolling Doors, A Gichner Systems Group, Inc. 2 . Atlas Roll-Lite Overhead Doors/Div. of MASCO. r OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331-2 2980 SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes overhead coiling metal doors . 1. Types of overhead coiling doors include the following: a. Insulated overhead doors . b. Overhead fire doors . 2 . Operation of overhead coiling doors include the following: a. Manual operation. B. Provide complete operating door assemblies including door curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanism, hardware, operators, and installation accessories . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. B. Section 08335 - Coiling Counter Doors . C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors . 1. 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data, roughing-in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead coiling door. 1 . Provide operating instructions and maintenance information. 2 . Provide information describing fire-release system including electrical rough-in instructions . B. Shop drawings : Submit shop drawings for special components and installations that are not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data sheets. C. Label Certification: UL label certification for oversized fire-rated doors and frames that each assembly has been constructed with materials and methods equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331-1 2980 1. Refer to Section 07900 for compounds, joint fillers and gaskets (if any) to be installed after installation of frame assemblies . D. Set tracks, header assemblies, operating brackets, rails and guides level and true to location, with adequate anchorage for permanent support . 3 .02 ADJUSTING A. After repeated operation of completed installation, readjust door hardware optimum operating condition and safety. Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts. 3 .03 CLEANING A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances . Exercise care to avoid damage to coatings. 1. Comply with requirements contained in Section 08800 for cleaning and maintenance of glass . 3 .04 PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that sliding/swinging breakaway doors will be without damage or deterioration, at the time of acceptance. END OF SECTION SLIDING/SWINGING BREAKAWAY DOORS 08312-6 2980 E. Reinforce the work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to the structure. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with nonmetallic separators to prevent " freeze-up" of joints . F. Separate dissimilar metals with zinc chromate primer, bituminous paint, or other separator that will prevent corrosion. G. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of contracting members . H. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 2 . 05 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations and designations of finishes . B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes . C. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0 .7 mil) complying with AAMA 607 .1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations . B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or doors . Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. C. Set sill members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Section 07900 for sealants, fillers and gaskets to be installed during installation of doors and frames. 19 4100, SLIDING/SWINGING BREAKAWAY DOORS 08312-5 2980 3 . Pull Handles : Provide the manufacturer' s standard aluminum pull handles in finish matching door frames . 4 . Install hardware, except surface-mounted hardware, at the fabrication plant . Remove only as required for final finishing operation, and delivery and installation at the project site. 2 . 03 OPERATION A. The sliding/swinging breakaway door system shall have a swing-type door attached to the slide carrier by means of top and bottom pivots, and shall contain an Underwriters ' Laboratories, Inc. listed breakway release latch for holding the door in the closed position during normal operation. Breakaway pressure shall be field adjustable to local Building Code requirements, but will be factory set at 50 pounds maximum in accordance with ANSI 156 .10 . Swingout sidelites shall allow the active sliding doors to swing out 90 degrees from any position in the sliding mode. 2 . 04 FABRICATION A. Sizes of door and frame units, and profile requirements, are indicated on the Drawings . Variable dimensions are indicated with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. B. Provide sliding/swinging breakaway doors as prefabricated packaged units complete with doors, sidelights, frames, transoms, hard ware and acces- sories . Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications and other work before shipment to project site. 1. Preglaze door and frame units in the manufacturer' s shop. Conform to the requirements of Section 08800 . 2 . Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. C. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work in manner which prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces . For hardware, perform these operations prior to application of finishes. D. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish. SLIDING/SWINGING BREAKAWAY DOORS 08312-4 2980 1. Besam, Inc. 2 . Dor-O-Matic Division of Republic Industries, Inc. 3 . Stanley Magic-Door Division of the Stanley Works . 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions : Provide alloy and temper recommended by the producer or finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B221 for 6063-T5 . Provide main extrusions of not less than 0 .125 inch wall thickness . 1. Provide extruded glazing stops and other applied trim extrusions with minimum wall thickness of 0 . 062 inch. B. Aluminum Sheets : Provide alloy and temper recommended by the producer or finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B209 for 5005-H15 . C. Fasteners : Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other items being fastened. 1. Exposed Fasteners : Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners . For the application of hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of the member or hard ware being fastened. For exposed fasteners provide Phillips flathead screws with finish matching item fastened. D. Glazing Materials: Tempered safety glass, 1/4 inch thick glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered) , Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (transparent) , quality q3 . 1. Refer to section 08800 for glazing requirements. E. Provide the door manufacturer's standard heavy-duty hardware units as scheduled or required for operation of each door, including items, of sizes, number, and type recommended by the manufacturer for service indicated. 1. Thresholds : Provide recessed extruded aluminum thresholds of size and profile indicated, in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips . Coordinate with pivots . 2 . Push Bars: Provide the manufacturer's standard surface-mounted aluminum push bars in finish matching door frame. (,c.{ SLIDING/SWINGING BREAKAWAY DOORS 08312-3 2980 D. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer' s maintenance and service data, including the name, address and telephone number of the nearest authorized service representative. 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide sliding/swinging breakaway doors produced by a single manufacturer. B. Installer' s Qualifications : Engage an Installer who is an authorized representative of the sliding/swinging breakaway door manufacturer for both the installation and maintenance of the type of units required for the project . 1. Experience: The installer shall have not less than 3 years experience in the installation and service of the door assemblies manufactured for this project. 2 . Maintenance Proximity: The installer shall maintain offices and repair or service facilities not more than 2 hours normal travel time from the project site. C. Design Criteria: The Drawings indicate spacing of members, sizes, profiles and dimensions required. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer' s standard products when, in the Architect ' s sole judgment, such deviations do not materially detract from design concept or intended performance. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements : Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; show measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide sliding/swinging breakaway doors by one of the following: SLIDING/SWINGING BREAKAWAY DOORS 08312-2 2980 SECTION 08312 SLIDING/SWINGING BREAKAWAY DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sliding/swinging breakaway doors consist of the manufacturer' s assembled units including sliding/swinging breakaway aluminum and glass doors, fix glass panels and frames, hardware and accessories . B. Type of sliding/swinging breakaway doors include the following: 1. Two-leaf manual sliding/swinging breakaway doors . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08470 - Revolving Entrance Doors . B. Section 08800 - Glazing. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data, standard details, and installation recommendations for each type of sliding/swinging breakaway door required. Include the following: 1. Fabrication methods . 2 . Finishing. 3 . Hardware. 4. Roughing-in diagrams . 5. Parts lists . 6. Accessories and other components . B. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of sliding/swinging breakaway doors and associated components not included in manufacturer's product data. Include the following: 1. Elevations . 2 . Hardware. 3. Anchors and reinforcements . 4. Glazing details . C. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams and other data to fabricators and installers of related work, as necessary for coordination of the sliding/swinging breakaway door installation. �3 SLIDING/SWINGING BREAKAWAY DOORS 08312-1 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION " A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices . Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer' s instructions for installing access doors . B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finished surfaces . 3 . 03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. 3 .04 ACCESS DOOR UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE A. Contractor shall include in the base bid the cost of furnishing and installing eighty (80) 12 " x 12" access panel and twenty (20) 24" x 24" access panels . Panels to be installed where directed. END OF SECTION ACCESS DOORS 08305-4 2980 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet : ASTM A366/A366M commercial-quality, cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. 2 . 03 ACCESS DOORS A. Noninsulated, Fire-Rated Doors for Walls : Self- latching units consisting of frame, trim, door, and hardware, including automatic closer, interior latch release, and complying with the following requirements : 1 . Frame: 0 . 0598 inch (1 .52 mm) thick steel sheet . 2 . Door: 0 . 0598 inch (1 .52 mm) thick steel sheet . 4. Hinge: Continuous type. 5 . Latches : Bolt type, operated by either a ring turn or flush key device (keyed alike) . 6. Fire-Protection Rating for Walls : 1-1/2 hours . B. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Trim: Units consisting of frame with exposed trim, door, hardware, and complying with the following requirements : 1. Frame: 0 . 0598 inch (1 . 52 mm) thick steel sheet . 2 . Door: 0. 0747 inch (1 .90 mm) thick steel sheet . 3 . Trim: Flange integral with frame, 1 inch wide, overlapping surrounding finished surface. 4 . Hinge: Continuous type. 5. Locks : Flush, screwdriver-operated cam. 2 . 04 FABRICATION A. Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation. B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1 . Exposed Flange: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25.4 to 38.1 mm) wide around perimeter of frame. 2 . For gypsum board assemblies or gypsum veneer plaster, furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board or gypsum base. 3 . For installation in masonry construction, furnish frames with adjustable metal masonry anchors. ACCESS DOORS 08305-3 2980 provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire Project from one source and by a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies : Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per test method as indicated below, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Test Method for Vertical Installations : ASTM E152 . 2 . Test Method for Horizontal Installations : ASTM E119 . C. Size Variations : Obtain Architect ' s acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. 1 . 05 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified under "Submittals" Article. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Acudor Products Inc. 2 . Bar-Co, Inc. Div. , Alfab, Inc. 3 . Cesco Products. 4. Elmdor Manufacturing Co. 5. J.L. Industries . 6 . Karp Associates, Inc. 7 . Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 8 . Milcor, Inc. 9 . Nystrom, Inc. 10 . The Williams Bros. Corporation of America. ACCESS DOORS 08305-2 2980 SECTION 08305 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following types of access doors: 1 . Wall access doors . 2 . Fire-rated wall access doors . 3 . Ceiling access doors . 4 . Fire-rated ceiling access doors . B. Unit Prices : Provide unit prices for access doors indicated at the end of this section. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Building-in anchors and grouting frames set in masonry construction. B. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories : Roof hatches . C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Mortise or rim cylinder locks . D. Section 09215 - Veneer Plaster: Veneer plaster walls and ceilings . E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum board walls and ceilings F. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings : Access tile in suspended or furred acoustic tile ceilings . G. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for duct access doors . 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data for each type of access door assembly specified, including details of construction relative to materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and fire-protection ratings (if required) . 1. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, latching or locking ACCESS DOORS 08305-1 2980 D. Factory-Finished Doors : Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site. 3 .03 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors : Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors are without damage at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-5 2980 or scheduled, provide 3/8 inch (9 . 5 mm) clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. ** b. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges . B. Glazed Openings : Glaze doors at factory for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing. " 2 . 04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Comply with referenced quality standard' s requirements for factory finishing. B. Finish wood doors at factory. C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect, and sheen. 1 . Grade: Premium. 2 . Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3 . Staining: None required. 4 . Effect : Open-grain finish. 5 . Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging doors : 1 . Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads . 2 . Reject doors with defects . B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 .02 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation see Section 08710 . B. Manufacturer' s Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and referenced quality standard and as indicated. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-4 2980 B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers as designated on shop drawings, using temporary, removable, or concealed markings . 1 . 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to Project 's geographical location: 1 . AWI quality standard Section 100-5-11 "Relative Humidity and Moisture Content . " PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide panel wood doors of one of the following: 1 . Stile and Rail Doors of Stock Design and Construction: a. Eggers Industries . b. Louisiana Pacific Corp. c. Morgan Manufacturing. d. Simpson Door Company. 2 . 02 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF STOCK DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Interior Doors: Comply with the following requirements: 1 . Wood Species for Transparent Finish: Slip and balanced matched, plain slice Maple, HPMA/AWI Grade AA, not less than 1/50 inch thick. 2 . Panel Configuration: Glazed, panels of configuration indicated. 2 .03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors to comply with the following requirements: 1. In sizes indicated for job-site fitting. a. Fitting Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) at jambs and heads, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/2 inch (12 .7 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-3 2980 matching and factory finishing; and other pertinent data. C. Submit samples for initial selection in the form of color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for the following: 1 . Faces of factory-finished doors with transparent finish. Show the full range of colors available for stained finishes . D. Submit samples for verification in the form of a corner section, 12 inches (300 mm) square, showing edges, faces, joinery, and material qualities of typical stile, rail, molding, and panel for each exposed material, door type, and finish required; and as follows : 1 . Factory-Finished Doors : Door faces with typical factory finish. E. Submit product certificates signed by door manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements . 1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: 1 . AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grade of door, construction, finish, and other requirements . B. Safety Glass : Provide products complying with ANSI 297 .1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials except where those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer. D. Product Certification: Require door manufacturer to certify that doors comply with specified requirements including those of referenced door standard. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions . STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-2 2980 SECTION 08212 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Interior stile and rail doors with glass panels . 2 . Factory finishing of stile and rail wood doors . 3 . Factory fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 1. 02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Door hardware is furnished under Section 08710. 1. 03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Wood door frames and other woodwork in juxtaposition to panel wood doors . B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames . C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors : Flush faced wood doors . D. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Door hardware. E. Section 08800 - Glazing. F. Section 09900 - Painting: Field applied finish. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data for each type of door, including details of construction, glazing, and factory-finishing specifications . B. Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in product data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking) ; location and extent of hardware cutouts; fire ratings; requirements for veneer STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-1 2980 C. Factory-Finished Doors : Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site. AWA D. Field-Finished Doors : Refer to Section 09900 for finishing requirements . E. Install door hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08710 . 3 . 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors : Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to assure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Awk FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-8 2980 B. Prefinish wood doors at door manufacturer' s factory or shop. C. Transparent Finishing: Comply with requirements indicated for finish system, grade, stain, sheen, and effect . 1 . AWI Factory Finish: TR-6, catalyzed polyurethane. 2 . AWI Quality Grade: Premium. 3 . Color: Natural, no stain required. 4 . Degree of Sheen: 40 Gloss Units, using 60 degree gloss meter (ASTM D523) . 5 . Effect : Open grain effect . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A. Make sure that all door frames are properly installed with square corners, plumb sides, level at head, securely attached to rough openings in walls and to floors and of proper size and handle as scheduled and shown on Drawings. Do not install doors in improperly installed frames . B. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer' s instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80 . B. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. Machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as required for fit and uniform clearance at each edge. 1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Rated Doors : Provide 1/8 inch at jambs and heads; 1/16 inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2 . Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors : Comply with NFPA 80 . 3 . Bevel non-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inch at lock and hinge edges. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-7 2980 1 . Openings for glass shall be provided with removable glazing beads of solid wood of same species as face veneer, predrilled and fastened with finish nails . Recess or set nail heads and fill nail holes with putty to match finish. Provide mitered corners on glazing beads . a. Provide glazing beads equal to Weyerhauser W-3, full-lip both sides of door. F. All cut-outs in fire-rated doors for glass lights shall be edged with 1/2 inch strips of solid wood. 1 . For 20 minute doors, provide solid wood beads of species to match face veneers, with metal clips and Latex caulking. 2 . For UL Labeled doors, provide manufacturer' s standard system of fire-rated wood veneered beads or wood veneered metal frame, with veneer of species to match face veneers. Glazing system shall be UL approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated. G. Louvers, where shown, shall be 5/16 inch thick tenoned into 5/8 inch thick by 1-3/4 inches wide frame mounted in door opening. Louver blades shall be set at a 60 degree angle with the horizontal, and each blade shall be set so that the outer edge of blade overlaps under inner edge of next blade above. All materials shall be solid stock wood, AWI Grade I, to match face veneer. H. Glazing: 1 . For factory-finished wood doors, factory install all glass after finishing. Provide glass size and type indicated on the Drawings and conforming to the quality requirements specified in Section 08800 . 2 . For field-finished wood doors, glass in wood doors shall be work of Section 08800, field installed. 2 .04 SHOP PRIMING A. Before delivery of doors to project site, shop-prime as follows: 1 . Paint Finish: For doors indicated to receive on opaque finish, prime wood doors with one coat of wood primer compatible with paint finish specified in Section 09900 . 2 .05 FACTORY FINISHING A. Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section 1500 "Factory Finishing. " FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-6 2980 manufacturer 's concealed system approved for fire rated doors . 2 . Top rails : Reinforce with 5 inch wide fire retardant treated plywood, suitable for attaching surface applied closer with No. 12 by 1-1/2 inch threaded-to-the head steel screws and producing 650 pounds minimum per screw withdrawal resistance. 3 . Lock blocks : 4-1/2 inches by 10 inches minimum, fire retardant treated plywood. Provide lock blocks at each stile for doors scheduled to have exit devices . Provide reinforcement blocking at bottom corner at strike edge for attachment of vertical rod guide for doors scheduled to have surface mounted vertical rod exit devices . 4 . Face veneers : Slip and balanced matched, plain sliced Maple, HPMA/AWI Grade AA, not less than 1/50 inch thick. 5 . Face veneers : MDO (medium density overlay) veneer, where indicated or required. 6 . Bond hardwood cross bands and face veneers to core with Type I exterior resin glue. 2 . 03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of AWI Quality Standards . B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with the requirements of Underwriters ' Laboratories, Inc. C. Bevel strike edge of single acting doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches. D. Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels: 1. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates . Refer to Section 08710 for hardware requirements . 2 . Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining. 3 . Pairs of Fire-Rated Doors : Provide fire rated pairs with manufacturers rated non-metal edges for applications using listed hardware in rated openings without using steel edges and astragals . E. All cut-outs in doors for glass or louvers shall be edged with 1/2 inch strips of solid wood. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-5 2980 D. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement or refinishing of doors where Contractor' s work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer' s warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flush faced wood doors as manufactured by one of the following (no substitutions) : 1 . Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2 . Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. 3 . Weyerhauser Company. 2 . 02 FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Provide 1-3/4 inches thick, solid particleboard core flush faced wood doors conforming to AWI Quality Standards, Premium Grade, PC-5 construction. 1. Stiles : 4 ply edge band stiles laminated to core on four sides with Type II water-resistant glue, using high frequency method. Provide outer stile species to match face veneer. Provide minimum 4-1/2 inch wide stiles (after trimming) for doors scheduled to have exit devices . 2 . Rails : 4 ply rails of mill-option hardwoods . Provide minimum 4-1/2 inch wide top rail after trimming. 3 . Cross bands : Oven-dried hardwoods, 1/16 inch minimum thickness extending full width of door and laid with grain at right angles to face veneers. 4 . Face veneers : Slip and balanced matched, plain sliced Maple, HPMA/AWI Grade AA, not less than 1/50 inch thick. 5 . Face veneers : MDO (medium density overlay) veneer, where indicated or required. 6 . Bond hardwood cross bands and face veneers to core with Type I exterior resin glue. B. Provide 1-3/4 inches thick, fire rated, solid mineral core flush faced wood doors conforming to AWI Quality Standards, Premium Grade, PC-5 construction. Provide fire rated doors bearing appropriate UL Label. 1 . Stiles : 9/16 inch thick untreated, multi-ply maple. Provide veneer banding on stiles to match face veneers . On pairs of doors with both leaves active, provide matching veneer covered metal edge guards on meeting edges (so overlapping astragals or coordinators are not required) or provide FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-4 2980 C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1 . 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced AWI standard and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors" , as well as with manufacturer' s instructions . 1 . Package doors at factory prior to shipping using manufacturer' s standard method. B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings . 1 . 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to Project ' s geographical location: 1 . AWI quality standard Section 100-S-11 "Relative Humidity and Moisture Content . " 1. 08 WARRANTY A. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of AWI. B. The warranty shall also include refinishing and reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. C. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of substantial completion. 1. Solid Core Flush-Faced Interior Doors: Life of installation. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-3 2980 trim for openings and louvers, and finishing specifications for doors to receive factory finish. B. Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware, blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. C. Submit samples for the following: 1 . Submit two samples of door faces representing typical range of veneer color and grain. Submit two strips of solid wood, 3 inches by 12 inches, of species to be used for exposed edges, trim and other solid wood components . 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide flush faced wood doors complying with the following standards : 1 . Provide wood flush doors complying with Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors" of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) . Designations for grade and door construction under types of doors refers to this standard. B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors : Provide wood doors that comply with NFPA 80; are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E152; and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Oversized, Fire-Rated Wood Doors : For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide manufacturer's certificate stating that doors conform to all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-door assemblies except for size. 2 . Temperature Rise Rating: At stairwell and exit enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature rise rating of 450 degrees F (232 degrees C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 3 . Solid core wood door (with no UL label) may be provided where a 20 minute "C" label door is indicated, as allowed by the Massachusetts State Building Code. Where glass lights occur in 20 minute doors, provide certification from door manufacturer that construction of glass light, including frame, stops and metal retainer clips, is identical to UL Label construction. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-2 2980 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Types of wood doors required include the following: 1 . Solid core flush wood doors with veneer faces; fire rated and non-fire rated. 2 . Solid core flush wood doors with MDO faces; fire rated and non-fire rated. B. Shop-priming of wood doors to be painted is included in this section. C. Factory-finishing of transparent finished wood doors is included in this section. D. Factory-prefitting to frames and factory-premachining for hardware of wood doors is included in this section. 1 . 02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Door hardware is furnished under Section 08710 . 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Wood door frames and other woodwork in juxtaposition to wood doors . B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames . C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. D. Section 08800 - Glazing: Field glazing of wood doors . E. Section 09900 - Painting: Field applied finish of wood doors to be painted. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data for each type of wood door, including details of core and edge construction, FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-1 2980 1 . Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls , and ceilings . 2 . In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors . 3 . At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices . 4 . In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels . In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws . 5 . In in-place gypsum board partitions, install knock-down, slip-on, drywall frames . 6 . Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80 . C. Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI 100 . 1 . Fire-Rated Doors : Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80 . 2 . Smoke-Control Doors : Comply with NFPA 105 . 3 .02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal : Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-8 2980 applied over it . Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint '* specified below to comply with ASTM A780 . 1 . Galvanizing Repair Paint : High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P- 21035 or SSPC-Paint 20. B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply air- dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment . 1 . Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of FS TT- P-641, Type II. 2 . 08 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling) . B. Pretreatment : Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it . C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats . Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-7 2980 doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C236 or ASTM C976 on fully operable door assemblies . AMk 1 . Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value rating of 0 .41 Btu/sq. ft . x h x deg F (2 .33 W/sq. m x K) or better. H. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. I. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. J. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute ' s (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames . " K. Glazing Stops : Minimum 0 .0359 inch (0 . 9 mm) thick steel or 0 .040 inch (1 mm) thick aluminum. 1 . Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2 . Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2 . 06 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1, " for steel sheet finishes . C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. 2 .07 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating AN**. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-6 2980 2 .05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant . Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements . 1 . Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to SDI standards : a. Resin-impregnated paper honeycomb. b. Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C591 . c. Rigid polystyrene conforming to ASTM C578 . d. Unitized steel grid. e. vertical steel stiffeners . f. Rigid mineral fiber with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets . 2 . Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6 .4 mm) between non-fire-rated pairs of doors . Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. a. Fire Doors : Provide clearances according to NFPA 80 . B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold- rolled steel sheet . C. Tolerances : Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames . " D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112 . Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0 .0635 inch (1.6 mm) thick galvanized steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 1 . At exterior locations. F. Exposed Fasteners : Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. G. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide bZ) STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-5 2980 2 . 03 DOORS A. Steel Doors : Provide 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules : 1 . Interior Doors : Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0 . 0478 inch (1 .2 mm) thick cold-rolled steel sheet faces . 2 . Exterior Doors : Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0 . 0635 inch (1 . 6 mm) thick galvanized steel sheet faces . B. Door Louvers : Provide louvers according to SDI 111C for interior doors where indicated, with blades or baffles formed of 0 .0239 inch (0 . 6 mm) thick cold- rolled steel sheet set into minimum 0 . 0359 inch (0 . 9 mm) thick steel frame. 1 . Sight-Proof Louvers : Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades . 2 .04 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules . Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners knocked down, for field assembly. 2 . Fabricate interior frames from minimum 0 .0598 inch (1 .5 mm) thick cold-rolled steel sheet . 3 . Form exterior frames from 0.0785 inch (2 .0 mm) thick galvanized steel sheet. B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double- door frames. C. Plaster Guards : Provide minimum 0 .0179 inch (0 .45 mm) thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. D. Grout : When required in masonry construction, as specified in Section 04200 . STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 2980 items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 inch (100 mm) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal : 1 . Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2 . Ceco Door Products . 3 . Curries Co. 4 . Fenestra Corp. 5 . Pioneer Industries. 6 . Steelcraft . 2 .02 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A569 (ASTM A569M) . B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets : Carbon steel complying with ASTM A366 (ASTM A366M) , commercial quality, or ASTM A620 (ASTM A620M) , drawing quality, special killed. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets : Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A526 (ASTM A526M) , commercial quality, or ASTM A642 (ASTM A642M) , drawing quality, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A525, with A 60 or G 60 (ASTM A525M, with Z 180 or ZF 180) coating designation, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0 .0478 inch (1.2 mm) thick steel sheet; 0 .0516 inch (1.3 mm) thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames . E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners : Manufacturer's standard units . Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3 2980 of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections . Show anchorage and accessory items . C. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings . 1 . Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements . D. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit certification of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies : Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTM E152, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies : For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors conform to all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 2 . Temperature Rise Rating: At stairwell and exit enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature rise rating of 450 degrees F (232 degrees C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 2980 SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes steel doors and frames . 1 .02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Hardware is furnished under Section 08710 . 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Building anchors into and grouting frames in masonry construction. B. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors : Solid-core wood doors installed in steel frames . C. Section 08212 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors. D. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Door hardware and weatherstripping. E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass in steel doors wood doors and sidelights. F. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Spot grouting frames in gypsum board partitions . G. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting primed doors and frames. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes . B. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames . Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-1 2980 3 .06 JOINT SEALER SCHEDULE A. Install joint sealer indicated in joints fitting descriptions and locations listed as well as in locations identified on Drawings . Description of joint Joint Sealer construction and location where joint sealer is typically applied. Multi-Part Pourable Exterior and interior joints Urethane Sealant for in horizontal surfaces of Use T concrete; between metal and concrete, mortar and masonry. One-Part Non-Acid- Exterior and interior joints Curing Silicone in vertical surfaces of Sealant concrete and masonry; between metal and concrete or mortar; interior and exterior perimeter joints of metal frames in exterior walls; and exterior overhead joints . One-Part Mildew- Interior joints in vertical Resistant Silicone surfaces in toilet rooms, Sealant showers and kitchens . Acrylic-Emulsion Interior exposed joints in Sealant field painted vertical and overhead surfaces at perimeter of elevator door frames and hollow metal door frames; in gypsum drywall, plaster and concrete or con- crete masonry; and all other interior joints not indicated otherwise. Acoustical Sealant Interior concealed joints in gypsum drywall, plaster and concrete masonry, where indicated. Foam Sealants & Where indicated. Preformed Foam Sealants END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS 07900-14 2980 configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint . Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint . Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1 . Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C1193, unless otherwise indicated. G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants : Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and complying with sealant manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials and tools which produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints . For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in conformance with sealant manufacturer' s recommendations . H. Installation of Foam Sealant : Using dispenser of appropriate size and type for the project, install foam sealant in voids around perimeter of door frames, window frames, curtain wall frames in exterior walls, and where indicated, to prevent the infiltration of outside air. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the recommendations of the foam sealant manufacturer. 3 .04 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3 .05 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. JOINT SEALERS 07900-13 2980 damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears . Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal . 3 . 03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS A. Comply with joint sealer manufacturers ' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements : 1 . Install joint-fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint- fillers . b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint-fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2 . Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints . E. Installation of Sealants : Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of AWk JOINT SEALERS 07900-12 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints : Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements : 1 . Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellants; water; surface dirt and frost . 2 . Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil free compressed air. 3 . Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile and other non-porous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations.Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces OW which other wise would be permanently stained or (0 JOINT SEALERS 07900-11 2980 substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint-Fillers : Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding strips of plastic foam of material indicated below, and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1 . Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state, compatible with sealant and subject to approval of sealant manufacturer. C. Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers : Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to -26 degrees F (-32 degrees C) . Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2 . 08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer-substrate and field tests . B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide non- staining, chemical cleaner of type acceptable to manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing materials which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials . C. Masking Tape: Provide non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints . oamlk JOINT SEALERS 07900-10 2980 a. Acoustical Sealant : 1) "SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant, " United States Gypsum Co. 2) "AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant, " Pecora Corp. b. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints : 1) "BA-98, " Pecora Corp. 2) "Tremco Acoustical Sealant, " Tremco, Inc. 2 . 05 PREFORMED FOAM SEALANT A. Preformed Foam Sealants : Manufacturer' s standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated open-cell foam sealant manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water repellent agent; factory-produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complying with the following requirements : 1 . Properties : Permanently elastic, mildew- resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants. 2 . Impregnating Agent : Manufacturer's standard. 3 . Density: Manufacturer' s standard. 4 . Backing: Pressure sensitive adhesive, factory applied to one side, with protective wrapping. B. Products : Provide one of the following products: 1 . Emseal Greyflex; Emseal Corp. 2 . Will-Seal Tape Type 250; Illbruck 2 . 06 FOAM SEALANT A. Foam Sealant: Two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant with the following characteristics : 1. Density: 1 .75 PCF. 2 . Flame Spread (ASTM E162) : 25. 3 . Initial R-Value (at 1 inch) : 8. 1. B. Product : Provide one of the following products or equal: 1 . Froth-Pak by Insta-Foam Products, Inc. 2 . Corbond by Corbond Corporation. 2 . 07 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Provide sealant backings of material and type which are non-staining; are compatible with joint �tl JOINT SEALERS 07900-9 2980 compliance with other requirements of ASTM C920 . Provide one of the following products : 1 . Dow Corning 790; Dow Corning Corp. A"k 2 . Silpruf; General Electric Co. 3 . Rhodorsil 5C; Rhone-Poulenc, Inc . E. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant : Type S; Grade NS; Glass 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to non-porous joint substrates indicated, 0; formu- lated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with non porous substrates and subject to in- service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes . Provide one of the following products : 1 . Dow Corning 786; Dow Corning Corp. 2 . SCS 1702 Sanitary; General Electric Co. 3 . Rhodorsil 6B White; Rhone-Poulenc Inc. 2 . 03 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant : Manufacturer ' s standard, one part, nonsag, acrylic, . mildew-resistant, acrylic- emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C834, formulated to be paintable and recommended for exposed applications on interior and on protected exterior exposures involving joint movement of not more than ± 7 . 5 percent . Provide one of the following products : 1 . AC-20; Pecora Corp. 2 . Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div. ; Rexnord Chem. Prod. , Inc. 3 . Tremco Acrylic Latex; Tremco, Inc. 4. PSI 701; Polymeric Systems, Inc . 2 .04 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834 and the following requirements : 1 . Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E90 . B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints : Manufacturer's standard, non-drying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. 1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: JOINT SEALERS 07900-8 2980 B. Colors : Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 1 . Provide custom colors as selected by the Architect . 2 . 02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer' s standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C920 and other requirements indicated, including those requirements referencing ASTM C920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses . 1 . Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C920 for Uses indicated. B. Multi-Part Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type M, Grade P, Class 25, and complying with requirements for uses T, M, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. Provide one of the following products : 1. NR-200 Urexpan; Pecora Corporation. 2 . Sikaflex 2c SL; Sika Corporation. 3 . Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant; Sonneborn Building Products . 4. THC 900; Tremco, Inc. 5 . Vulkem 255; Mameco International, Inc. C. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant : Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the following require- ments for uses T, M, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. Provide one of the following products: 1 . Isoflex 881; The Harry S. Peterson Company. 2 . Sikaflex 2c NS; Sika Corporation. 3 . Dymeric 511; Tremco, Inc. 4. PSI 501; Polymeric System, Inc. D. One-Part, Non-Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant (For Non Traffic Joints) : Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and complying with requirements for Uses NT, M, G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O, and additional capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C719, to withstand 50 percent increase and decrease of joint width as measured at time of application and remain in (9c9 OW JOINT SEALERS 07900-7 2980 1 . 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Aft A. Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials . B. Store and handle materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes . 1 . 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions : Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions : 1 . When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers. 2 . When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost condensation or other causes . B. Joint Width Conditions : Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions : Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates . 1 .08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MATERIALS FOR JOINT SEALERS A. Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. JOINT SEALERS 07900-6 2980 b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3 . Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected. 4 . Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer' s technical representative present . 5 . Test Method: Test joint sealers by hand pull method described below: a. Install joint sealants in 5 feet joint lengths using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing. b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to the other followed by 2 vertical cuts approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top of 2 inch cuts. Place a mark 1 inch from top of 2 inch piece. c. Use fingers to grasp 2 inch piece of sealant just above 1 inch mark; pull firmly down at a 90 degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant . Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds . 6. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. 7 . Evaluation of Field Test Results : Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. F. Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution: 1. Joints in field-constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section. G. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of the Division 1 section covering this activity. Vol l JOINT SEALERS 07900-5 2980 C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of all materials that will contact or affect joint sealers to joint sealer manufacturers for ""k. compatibility and adhesion testing, as indicated below: 1 . Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates . 2 . Submit not less than 9 pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials . 3 . Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the Work. 4 . Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain joint sealant manufacturer' s written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers . 5 . Testing will not be required when joint sealant manufacturer is able to submit joint preparation data required above that are acceptable to Architect and are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. D. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealer based on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a 24 month period preceding date of Contractor' s submittal of test results to Architect . 1 . Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920 . Include test results for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement (per ASTM C719) , low temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering. E. Preconstruction Field Tests : Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows : 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect . 2 . Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. JOINT SEALERS 07900-4 2980 strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification Purposes : Submit samples of each type and color of joint sealer required. Install joint sealer samples in 1/2 inch wide joints formed between two 6 inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants . D. Certificates : Submit certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. E. Submit qualification data complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" article. Include list of completed projects with project names addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. F. Test Reports : Submit the following test reports : 1 . Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturing indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants . Include sealant manufacturer' s interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. 2 . Produce test reports for each type of joint sealers indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. 3 . Preconstruction field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrated acceptable adhesion to joint substrates . 1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. w JOINT SEALERS 07900-3 2980 a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs . b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as indicated. 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Through-penetration firestopping systems . B. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing: Sealants used in conjunction with membrane roofing. C. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sealants used in conjunction with metal flashings . D. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows : Sealants within fabricated window units . E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing. F. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Acoustical sealants . 1 . 03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates . B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. 1. Submit certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) . B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of JOINT SEALERS 07900-2 2980 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes joint sealers for the following locations : 1 . Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non- traffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Joints between architectural precast concrete units . c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows . f. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces . g. Other joints as indicated. 2 . Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs for floors and paving. b. Joints between different materials . c. Other joints as indicated. 3 . Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls . b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Joints between tops of non-load-bearing unit masonry walls and underside of cast-in-place concrete slabs and beams . d. Tile control and expansion joints . e. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. f. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. g. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures including ' service fixtures and piping. h. Other joints as indicated. 4 . Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: X03 JOINT SEALERS 07900-1 2980 3 . 05 CLEANING A. Clean the completed skylight, both metal and glazing material, inside and outside, promptly after erection, allowing for nominal curing of liquid sealants. 1 . Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable coatings from prefinished metal surfaces . Remove labels and part-number markings from all components . 2 . Wash exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water applied with soft clean cloths . Wipe clean. Take care to clean member connections and inside corners . Avoid use of harsh cleaning materials and methods that would damage metal finishes or glazing. B. Remove remaining excess sealant by moderate use of solvent acceptable to the sealant manufacturer. C. Follow recommendations of the skylight manufacturer for proper and adequate protection and cleaning procedures during the remainder of the construction period, so that the system will be without damage at the time of acceptance. D. Demonstrate proper cleaning methods and materials to the Owner 's maintenance personnel. END OF SECTION ipo METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-13 2980 corners; edge or face clearances; and effective sealing. Comply with requirements of glazing material Akk and glazing sealant manufacturers as specified in Division 8 section "Glass and Glazing. " Avoid point loading glazing material . G. Perimeter Sealants and Joint Fillers : Install weathering sealant at connections of skylights to other materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants . " 3 .04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Laboratory: The Owner will employ and pay an independent testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing. B. Weathering Sealant Adhesion: After liquid-applied sealant is fully cured, perform sealant adhesion test in accordance with the sealant manufacturer' s prescribed procedures . C. Water Leakage: Check the completed assembly according to procedures in AAMA 501 .2 . There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage as defined in AAMA 501 .2 . ' D. Water Penetration: Check the completed assembly according to procedures in AAMA 501 .3 . There shall be no uncontrolled water penetration as defined in AAMA 501 .3 at an air pressure difference equal to 20 percent of the positive design wind pressure with a minimum or 6 .24 lbf and a maximum of 12 lbf in areas indicated. E. Air Infiltration: Test the completed assembly in accordance with procedures in ASTM E783, at an air pressure difference of 1.57 lbf in areas indicated. The maximum allowable rate of air infiltration shall be 0 . 06 cu. ft. per minute per sq. ft. of skylight area. F. Testing laboratory shall report test results promptly and in writing to the Architect and Contractor. G. Satisfactorily repair defects and areas damaged by testing or remove items that fail to comply with requirements and provide new acceptable Work. METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-12 2980 D. Separate aluminum components from contact with preservative pressure-treated wood by painting the wood with two coats of aluminum house paint and sealing the joints with sealant, or separate the materials by other methods recommended by skylight manufacturer. 3 . 03 INSTALLATION A. Instructions: Comply with skylight and glazing material manufacturer' s instructions for protecting, handling and installing skylight components . Pay particular attention to preservation of applied finishes and use of sealants . Discard members damaged before installation and remove installed members that become damaged; provide new acceptable components . B. Anchor components securely and permanently in place, shimming and using attachment methods that permit adjustment for construction tolerances, irregularities, and alignment . Allow for structural movement and changes due to varying thermal conditions . C. Erection Tolerances : Install skylight components in place, plumb, level, accurately aligned and correctly located in reference to building features and without warpage or racking. Adjust framing to conform to the following tolerances : 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet . 2 . Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet . 3 . Alignment : Limit the offset from true alignment between two members abutting end-to-end, in line edge-to-edge, or separated by less than 3 inches to less than 1/32 inch; otherwise limit offsets to 1/8 inch. 4 . Location: Install framing with maximum deviation from measured theoretical plane or location of any member at any location to 1/8 inch per 12 feet of length or 1/2 inch in total length. D. Welding: Where field welding is required or permissible in concealed locations use only Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (TIG) or Gas Metal Arc Welding (MIG) process . Take care to protect exposed finishes . E. Coordinate installation and connections of seals, insulation and flashings at perimeter of assemblies to maintain continuity of thermal and water barriers. F. Glazing: Inspect glazing material and framing for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including size, squareness, and offsets at METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-11 2980 B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system for designating aluminum finishes established by the Aluminum Association. C. High-Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below) . Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer' s instructions . 1. Fluorocarbon Two-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer' s standard two-coat thermocured system, complying with AAMA 605.2, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene resin by weight . a. Color and Gloss : Two (2) custom colors will be selected by the Architect; one for the exterior, one for the interior. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the supporting structure and substrate for dimensions and tolerances, material conditions, and support before beginning the skylight installation. Carefully check provisions for anchorage and adjustment, allowances for expansion and contraction, and conditions of preset flashings and flashing connections . B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions in affected areas have been corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Furnish anchor bolts and inserts for setting in concrete formwork or masonry indicated to support skylights . B. Separate aluminum and other corrodible and dissimilar metals from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. C. Paint concealed aluminum surfaces that will contact lime mortar, concrete or other masonry materials with an alkali-resistant coating or provide other separation recommended by the skylight manufacturer. METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-10 2980 1 . Before shipment, shop-assemble, mark and disassemble components that cannot be permanently shop assembled. 2 . Except were formed aluminum members are indicated, construct metal-framed skylights with extruded aluminum components similar to sections indicated on the drawings. B. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction, field adjustment, and minimum clearance and shimming at the perimeter. Fit and secure corners and joints rigidly with screw and spline, internal reinforcement or welding. Make exposed framing and trim joints and connections flush, hairline and weatherproof. Match exposed work to produce continuity of line. C. Design and assemble components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. D. Provide a continuous aluminum curb with expansion joints and locked and sealed or fully welded corners . Locate weep holes in the curb at each rafter connection to drain condensation. E. Prepare components to receive anchor and connection devices and fasteners. Provide concealed connectors, attachments, and fasteners. Where fasteners exposed to view from interior are permissible, provide bolts and screws with countersunk heads. Provide acceptable exposed fasteners with finish matching the framing members or trim. F. Where shop-welding is permissible or required use only the Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (TIG) or Gas Metal Arc Welding (MIG) process . Grind visible welds to a minimum of 100-grit finish. G. Install concealed steel items required within the skylight. Apply bituminous coating to concealed steel surfaces and other dissimilar metals to come in contact with aluminum or use another approved method for separation. 2 .05 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes . METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-9 2980 H. Touch-Up Primer: Provide zinc dust-zinc oxide primer for use over galvanized metal surfaces on the , exterior. I. Bituminous Paint : Provide cold applied asphalt mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 , formulated for 30 mil thickness per coat . 2 . 03 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass : Provide glass of types and thicknesses indicated. Fabricate glass to sizes required for openings indicated with wedge clearances and tolerances complying with manufacturer' s recommendations . Refer to Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing" for requirements . B. Glazing Gaskets : Provide the manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing or dry-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks and shims or spacers, hardness of each glazing accessory as selected by skylight manufacturer. 1 . Gasket Material : Extruded polyvinyl chloride gaskets complying with ASTM D2287 . C. Secondary structural silicone sealant stress shall be designed so that each light in an insulating glass unit carries 50 percent of total applied wind load when both lights are of equal thickness . D. Weathering Sealant : Provide one-part, low-modulus silicone sealant that is compatible with substrates and develops full adhesion and cohesive strength when subjected to design loads . Sealant shall have a dynamic movement capability of plus-or-minus 50 percent . Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants . " 1 . Color of Weathering Sealants Between Metal and Glass : Black. 2 . Color of Exposed Metal-To-Metal Sealant: Standard color to match metal finish. 2 .04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate metal-framed skylights to meet aesthetic and performance criteria indicated. Fit and assemble components in the manufacturer's shop to the fullest extent practicable and prior to application of finishes. A METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-8 2980 B. Steel Sections : Provide hot-rolled structural shapes to fit framing sections, complying with ASTM A36 . C. Gaskets and Joint Fillers : Provide the manufacturer' s standard permanent-type framing system gaskets and joint fillers for sliding joints, compression joint translation, or nonmoving joints depending on joint movement and sealing requirements. D. Brackets and Reinforcements : Provide the manufacturer' s standard high-strength aluminum beackets and reinforcements . 1 . Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims to install and align skylight work. E. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard noncorrosive fasteners and accessories that are compatible with materials used in the framing system and exposed portions of fasteners and accessories that match the finish of the skylights. Where movement is expected, provide slip-joint linings of sheets, pads, shims, or washers of fluorocarbon resin or a similar material recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Framework Connections : Unless otherwise recommended by the skylight manufacturer, use either 300 series stainless steel fasteners that comply with ASTM A193, aluminum alloy 2024-T5 fasteners complying with ASTM B211, or aluminum rivets complying with ASTM B316, as required by the type of connection, for bolting aluminum extrusions and connecting members . 2 . Connections to the Supporting Structure: Use zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A307 for anchoring the skylight to the supporting structure. 3 . Aluminum-Cap-Retainer Fasteners : Use stainless- steel screws, complying with ASTM A193, series 300, type as recommended by the manufacturer for securing exterior aluminum cap retainers . 4 . Where fasteners anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, provide noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts or other type reinforcement to receive fastener threads. F. Concealed Flashing: Provide dead-soft, minimum 0 .018 inch thick (26 gage) stainless steel flashing, complying with ASTM A167, of the type selected by the manufacturer for compatibility. G. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Provide dead-soft, minimum 0 .018 inch thick (26 gage) stainless steel flashing, complying with ASTM A167, of the type selected by the manufacturer for compatibility. METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-7 2980 1 . 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements : Take field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings . Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. 1 . 07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule skylight installation in sequence with related elements of the Work specified in other Sections to ensure that assemblies, including flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are protected against damage from weather, aging, corrosion, and other causes . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (no substitutions) : 1 . Architectural Skylight Company, Inc . , Waterboro, ME. 2 . Naturalite/EPI Skylight Systems, Inc. , Terrell, TX. 3 . Fisher Skylights, Inc. , West Nyack, NY. 4 . Super Sky Products, Inc. , Mequon, WI . 2 . 02 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members : Provide aluminum members of the alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer to satisfy requirements for strength, corrosion resistance and application of finish indicated. Comply with requirements of ASTM B221 for extrusions, ASTM B209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire. 1 . Principal Framing Members : Provide extruded aluminum members of 6063-T5 alloy and temper with a minimum thickness of 0 .125 inch. 2 . Trim Members : Provide extruded aluminum glazing caps and other miscellaneous nonsupporting trim members of 6063-T5 alloy and temper with minimum thickness of 0 . 062 inch. 3 . Formed metal members shall be sheet aluminum of 6061-T6 alloy and temper with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch for structural members and 0 . 060 inch for closures and trim. METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-6 2980 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE �\ A. Single-Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a Fabricator/Installer for the metal-framed skylights to assume undivided responsibility for all components, including structural design, installation, glazing and weatherproof integrity of the system in place. 1 . Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in metal- framed skylight construction and able to demonstrate successful performance on comparable projects. 2 . Responsibility shall also include design, furnishing and installing anchor assemblies, support framing, related connections, and fasteners as required for compliance with specified performance data. B. Glazing Standards : Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or referenced standards . C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or on one component pane of unit, with the appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing organization indicated below. 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) . D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of the metal- framed skylights, and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Metal-framed skylights by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect . The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. E. Preinstallation Conference: Before installing the skylights, conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project with the manufacturer, installer, and other interested parties to review procedures, schedules, and coordinate installation with other elements of the Work. 1. Comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings. " METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-5 2980 4 . Where the system proposed deviates from the contract drawings and specifications, provide material properties and other information needed for structural analysis . Include structural computations prepared, signed, and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. C. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Provide pairs of samples of each specified color and finish on 12-inch- long sections of extrusions or formed shapes . Where normal color variations are anticipated, include two or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of color variations . D. Samples for Verification Purposes : The Architect reserves the right to require fabrication samples showing the following: 1 . Prime members . 2 . Joinery. 3 . Anchorage. 4 . Expansion provisions . 5 . Glazing and similar details . 6 . Profiles . 7 . Intersections . E. Structural Calculations : Provide calculations for information only, prepared in accordance with the Aluminum Association' s Specifications for Aluminum Structures (SAS30) , bearing the seal of a structural engineer qualified in the design of self-supporting skylight assemblies and licensed in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. 1 . Indicate the section moduli of wind-load-bearing members . 2 . Include calculations of stresses and deflections for performance under design loading. F. Installer Certificates : Signed by the manufacturer certifying that the skylight Installers comply with requirements indicated. G. Test Reports: Provide test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing that the manufacturer's metal-framed skylight system complies with performance requirements indicated on the basis of the laboratory's comprehensive testing of the system within the last 3 years of the system's current production by the manufacturer. METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-4 2980 buckling, excessive stresses on structural elements or fasteners, stresses on glazing, failure of seals, reduction of performance or other detrimental effects . D. Air and Water Infiltration: Design and install the metal-framed skylight system to permanently resist air and water leakage through the system at a test pressure differential of 20 percent of the design loading in accordance with the following: 1 . Air Infiltration: Air leakage through the skylight system shall not exceed 0 . 06 cfm per sq. ft . of assembly surface when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a minimum static air pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft . 2 . Pater Penetration: There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage through the skylight when the assembly is tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at a minimum differential static pressure of 20 percent of the inward acting design wind load, but not less than 6.24 lbf per sq. ft . or more than 12 lbf per sq. ft . a. water penetration is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water other than the condensation occurring on the interior surface of any part of the skylight . 1 .04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations for maintenance. Include test reports that show compliance with Project requirements where test method is indicated. B. Shop Drawings : Fully dimensioned plans and elevations of typical and special units . Include sections at 1/2 inch scale and details at 3 inch scale or larger to show tolerances, member profiles, connections and fasteners, flashing and drainage. Indicate glazing method and pane opening sizes. 1 . Clearly indicate the anchorage system, methods of interface with the building construction, field welding, if required, and provisions for expansion and contraction. 2 . Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages installed under other sections. 3 . Show the adaptation of the manufacturer's standard metal-framed skylight system to the Project. Show clearly where and how the manufacturer's system deviates from the contract drawings and specifications. METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-3 2980 failure of fasteners, attachments, or other components . B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install metal-framed skylights to withstand the effects of the following loads and stresses under conditions indicated without material failure or permanent deformation of structural members . 1 . Uniform live load of 30 psf plus dead load. 2 . Snow load of 30 psf, where applicable, plus dead load. 3 . Wind load of 20 psf (at 30 feet above grade) plus dead load. 4 . Concentrated load of 250 lb applied to any framing member at a location that will produce the most severe stress or deflection. a. A one-third increase in the allowable stress for wind is acceptable where permitted by code but not in combination with any reduction applied to combined loads . Allowable values shall not exceed the yield stress . 5 . Assume that compression flanges of flexural members receive effective lateral bracing only from anchors to the building structure and horizontal glazing bars or interior trim in contact at least 50 percent of the member's total depth. 6 . Deflections : The metal-framed skylight shall be capable of withstanding building movements, including wind loading, and of performing within the following limitations : a. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to the glazing plane, when subjected to uniform load deflection test in accordance with ASTM E330 and specified design loads, shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear span or 3/4 inch, whichever is less . Assume the required outward pressure is the same as the inward pressure. b. Deflection of members in a direction parallel to the glazing plane, when carrying full dead load, shall not exceed an amount that will reduce the glazing bite below 75 percent of the design dimension and shall not reduce edge clearance to less than 25 percent of the design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, nor shall it damage or impair the function of joint seals. C. Thermal Movement : Provide for expansion and contraction of metal skylight components resulting from an ambient temperature differential of 120 degrees F (67 degrees C) , which may result in a metal surface temperature range of 180 degrees F (100 degrees C) within the skylight framing without causing METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-2 2980 SECTION 07820 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes : 1 . Site-assembled, self-supporting aluminum-framed skylights with exterior metal cap retainers over main rafters and cross rafters, ridges, and hips . 2 . Site-assembled, self-supporting aluminum-framed skylight system for canopy framing. B. Primary components of metal-framed skylight construction include the following: 1 . Skylight and canopy framing system. 2 . Sills, retainers, fillers, trim, gutters, and similar items . 3 . Glass in skylights . 4 . Sheet-metal flashings within the skylight assembly. 5 . Glazing gaskets and sealants, and joint sealants . 6 . Anchors, shims, fasteners, accessories and support brackets. 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing. B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. C. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories : Roof hatches . D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. E. Section 08800 - Glazing. 1. 03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide the manufacturer's metal-framed skylights that have been adapted to the application indicated and comply with performance requirements specified as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding system according to test methods indicated. 1. Unacceptable conditions include noise or vibration created by thermal movement, structural movement, or wind; thermal movement transferred to the building structure; and loosening, weakening or �C METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820-1 2980 E. Operational Units : Test operate units with operable components . Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 3 .02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces according to manufacturer' s instructions . Touch up damaged metal coatings . END OF SECTION ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-5 2980 2 . 04 ROOF HATCHES A. Fabricate units to withstand 40-lbf per sq. ft . "'k external loading and 20-lbf per sq. ft . internal loading pressure. Frame with 9-inch-high, integral- curb, double-wall construction with 1-1/2 inch insulation, cant strips and cap flashing (roofing counterflashing) , with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double-wall cover (lid) construction with 1 inch insulation core. Provide gasketing and equip corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware including pintle hinges, hold-open devices, interior padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles . B. Type: Single-leaf personnel access . C. Material : Zinc-coated steel sheets . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations . Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing and flashing, as required, to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses, as well as inward and outward loading pressures. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. " B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation. C. Flange Seals : Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal . D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of accessory, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing) . Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. AWN. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-4 2980 C. Insulation: Manufacturer' s standard rigid or semirigid glass-fiber bcard of thickness indicated. D. Wood Nailers : Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water-borne preservatives for above-ground use, complying with AWPA C2 ; not less than 1-1/2 inch thick. E. Fasteners : Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. 1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners affords access to building, provide nonremovable fastener heads. F. Gaskets : Manufacturer' s standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene or polyvinyl chloride, or block design of sponge neoprene. G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating. H. Mastic Sealant : Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant . I. Elastomeric Sealant : Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G, and, A. J. Roofing Cement : ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2 . 03 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations on applying and designating finishes . B. Organic Coating: Thermosetting-modified acrylic enamel primer and topcoat system complying with AAMA 603 .8, except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. 1. Color: As indicated by reference to manufacturer' s standard color designations. 5 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-3 2980 accessory indicated for each color, texture, shape, and sizes specified. D. Coordination Drawings : Submit coordination drawings for items interfacing with or supporting mechanical or electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, or conduit . Indicate dimensions and locations of items provided under this Section, together with relationships and methods of attachment to adjacent construction and to mechanical or electrical items . 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards : Comply with the following: 1 . SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap-flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 2 . NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installation of units . 3 . NFPA 204M for smoke-and-heat vent design constraints, operation, and location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Roof Hatches : a. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc. b. Bilco Co. c. Bristolite Skylights. d. Dur-Red Products. e. Hillsdale Industries . f. Milcor, Inc. g. Naturalite/EPI Skylight Systems . h. O'Keeffe's, Inc. i . Plasteco, Inc. j . Plasticrafts, Inc. k. ThyCurb Div. /ThyBar Corp. 1 . Wasco Products, Inc. 2 .02 MATERIALS A. Structural-Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet : ASTM A446 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A525, Grade C, or to suit manufacturer's standards . B. Commercial-Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A526 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A525. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-2 2980 SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1. Roof hatches . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05810 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies . B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications : Ladders and support framing. C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Nailers . D. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing. E. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. F. Section 07820 - Metal-Framed Skylights . G. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers . H. Section 09900 - Painting. 1. 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufac- turer's product data for each type of product specified. Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product data, installation instructions and recommendations, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. B. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of each roof accessory specified including fully dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. Also show layout, anchorage details, rough-in requirements, and conditions on the roof or for other accessories. C. Submit samples for verification purposes in full-size units or representative section of each type of roof ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-1 2980 K. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA' s Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation. L. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, arranged as hinged units to swing open for cleaning gutters . 3 . 03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes . B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-10 2980 E. Soldered Joints : Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) , except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1 . Pretinning is not required for the following metals : a. Lead. b. Lead-coated copper. 2 . Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint . Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces . F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards . Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 1 . Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. G. Seams : Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams . Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment : Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment . 2 . Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. I. Install reglets to receive counterflashing according to the following requirements: 1. Where reglets are shown in concrete, furnish reglets for installation under Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete. " 2 . Where reglets are shown in masonry, furnish reglets for installation under Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry. " J. Counterflashings : Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers . Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and bed with sealant. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-9 Ow- 2980 N. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material : 1 . Lead-Coated Copper: 16 oz. /sq. ft . (0 . 55 mm thick) . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA' s "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual . " Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Roof-Edge Flashings : Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for required wind zone. D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints) . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-8 2980 D. Downspouts : Fabricate from the following material : 1 . Lead-Coated Copper: 16 oz. /sq. ft . (0 .55 mm thick) . 2 . Galvanized Steel : 0 . 0217 inch ( =5 nit:) thick. 6. Galvanized Steel : 0 . 0217 inch (0 . 5-5 ma-L) thick. E. Conductor Heads : Fabricate from the following material : 1 . Lead-Coated Copper: 16 oz . /sq. ft . (0 .55 mm thick) . 2 . Galvanized Steel : 0 . 0276 inch (0 . 7 trsrL thick. 6 . Galvanized Steel : 0 . 0276 inch (0 .7 m:r? thick. F. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material : 1 . Lead: 4 . 0 lb/sq. ft . (1 . 6 mm thick) , hard tempered. G. Scuppers : Fabricate from the following material : 1 . Lead-Coated Copper: 16 oz. /sq. ft . (0 .55 mm thick) . H. Built-in Gutters : Fabricate from the following material: 1 . Copper: 16 oz. /sq. ft . (0 .55 mm thick) . 2 . Lead-Coated Copper: 16 oz. /sq. ft . (0 .55 mm thick) . 3 . Stainless Steel : 0 . 0156 inch (0 .4 mm) thick. 4 . Terne-Coated Stainless Steel : 0 . 015 inch (0 .4 mm) thick. I. Gravel Stops, and Fasciae: Fabricate from the following material : 1 . Aluminum: 0 . 050 inch (1 .2 ruyo thick. J. Copings: Fabricate from the following material: 1 . Lead-Coated Copper: 24 oz. /sq. ft . (0 .82 imm thick.? . K. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material : 1 . Lead-Coated Copper: 20 oz. /sq. ft . (0 .7 mm thick) . L. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead-Coated Copper: 16 oz. /sq. ft. (0 .55 mm thick) . M. Flashing Receivers : Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead-Coated Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft . (0 .55 mm thick) . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-7 2980 F. Expansion Provisions : Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where A"k lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints) . G. Sealed Joints : Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards . H. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. I. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. J. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1 . Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. 2 . 05 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. B. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches (380 mm) : Fabricate from the following material: 1 . Lead-Coated Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft . (0 .55 mm thick) . 2 . Galvanized Steel: 0 .0217 inch (0 . 55rmm) thick. (Steel gutters at canopy only. ) C. Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches (410 to 510 mm) : Fabricate from the following material : 1 . Lead-Coated Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft . (0 .55 mm thick) . 2 . Galvanized Steel: 0 . 0276 inch (0 .7 non) thick. (Steel gutters at canopy only. ) SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-6 2980 seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. H. Paper Slip Sheet : 5-lb/square (0 .244 kg/sq. m) red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790, Type I, Style 1b. I. Polyethylene Underlayment : ASTM D4397, minimum 6 mil (0 . 15 mm) thick black polyethylene film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E154. J. Metal Accessories : Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. K. Gutter Screen: 1/4 inch (6 mm) hardware cloth installed in sheet metal frames . Fabricate screen and frame of same basic material as gutters and downspouts. L. Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 2 . 04 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems . D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams . Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams . Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-5 2980 thick for applications where burning (welding) is involved. 2 . 02 REGLETS A. Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces and compatible with flashing indicated. B. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends . C. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint . D. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips : Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of the counterflashing lower edge. 1 . Material : Copper, 16 oz. /sq. ft . (0 . 55 mm thick) . 2 . 03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder: ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, used with rosin flux. B. Fasteners : Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15 mil (0 .4 mm) dry film thickness per coat . D. Mastic Sealant : Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Section 07900. F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. G. Adhesives : Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-resistant SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-4 2980 and execution. Build mockups to comply with the *► following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1 . Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect . 2 . Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3 . Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4 . Construct mockups for the following type of sheet metal flashing and trim: a. Conductor heads . b. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fascias. c . Copings . 5 . Obtain Architect ' s approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 6 . Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work. 1 .06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 METALS A. Copper: ASTM B370; temper H00, cold rolled except where temper 060 is required for forming; not less than 16 oz. /sq. ft. (0 .55 mm thick) , unless otherwise indicated. B. Lead-Coated Copper: ASTM B101, cold-rolled copper sheet, not less than 20 oz. /sq. ft . (0.7 mm thick) , both sides coated with lead weighing not less than 12 nor more than 15 lb/100 sq. ft. (5 .4 nor more than 6.8 kg/9 .3 sq. m) , unless otherwise indicated. C. Lead Sheet: ASTM B749, Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet, with a minimum thickness of 0.0625 inch (1. 6 mm) except not less than 0.0937 inch (2 .4 mm) 111 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3 2980 1 . 03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for local wind zone. 1. 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data including manufacturer ' s material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product . B. Submit shop drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details . C. Submit samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. 1 . 8 inch (200 mm) square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces . 2 . 12 inch (300 mm) long samples of factory- fabricated products exposed as finished Work. Provide complete with specified factory finish. D. Submit qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Mockups: Prior to installing sheet metal flashing and trim, construct mockups indicated to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2 2980 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories : 1 . Roof-drainage systems . 2 . Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fasciae. 3 . Copings . 4 . Metal flashing. 5 . Reglets . B. Products furnished but not installed under this section: 1 . Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: a. Metal counter flashings and wall flashings built into unit masonry. 2 . Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing: a. Metal gravel stops and fascia in conjunction with membrane roofing. 3 . Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: a. Metal counter flashings built into gypsum sheathing. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: 1. Through-wall fabric flashing and other integral masonry flashings specified as part of masonry work. B. Section 05810 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies: Metal expansion-joint covers. C. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing: Flashing and roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane as part of roofing-system work. D. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories: Set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants: Elastomeric sealants . SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-1 2980 E. Provide protection sheet between insulation and membrane when recommended by membrane manufacturer. 3 . 03 INSTALLING MEMBRANE A. Start installation only in presence of manufacturer' s technical representative. 1 . Cut out and repair membrane defects at the end of each day' s work. B. Loose-Laid and Ballasted: Install membrane by unrolling over prepared substrate, fastening at perimeter and at roofing penetrations . Lap adjoining sheets and bond, covering top edges of each sheet at seams with uniform fillet of sealant as recommended by manufacturer. Install flashings and counterflashings as shown and as recommended by manufacturer. 1 . Apply aggregate ballast in uniform thickness at rate of 10 to 12 psf, spreading with care to minimize possibility of damage to membrane. B. Walkway Protection: Install paver units at locations shown and where required for access to roof-mounted equipment . Place protection boards carefully to avoid damage to membrane, laying over an additional layer of roof membrane material, loosely applied, for additional protection. 3 . 04 PROTECTING ROOFING A. After completing roofing (including associated work) , institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At the end of the construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, make a final inspection of roofing and prepare a written report to Owner, describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage found. B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found at the time of final inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according to the requirements of the specified warranty. END OF SECTION CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-7 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARING SUBSTRATE " A. Comply with manufacturers ' instructions to prepare substrate to receive single-ply membrane system. 1. Verify that penetrations, expansion joints, and blocking are in place and secured and that roof drains are properly clamped into position. B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to single-ply system installation. Remove sharp projections . C. Install cant strips, flashings, and accessory items as shown and as recommended by manufacturer. D. Prime substrate where recommended by manufacturer of materials being installed. E. Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other work. 3 . 02 INSTALLING INSULATION A. Extend insulation full thickness in two layers, or in multiple layers over entire surface to be insulated, cutting and fitting tightly around obstructions . Form cant strips, crickets, saddles, and tapered areas with additional material as shown and as required for proper drainage of membrane. I . Stagger joints in one direction for each course. For multiple layers, stagger joints in both directions between courses with no gaps, to form a complete thermal envelope. 2 . Provide tapered units to suit drainage pattern indicated. B. Do not install more insulation in a day than can be covered with membrane before end of day or before start of inclement weather. C. Secure roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type and spacing indicated but in no case provide less than one anchor per 4 sq. ft . of surface area or less anchorage than required by FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28. D. Set insulation units on substrate with mechanical fasteners or spot adhesives and cover immediately with loose membrane for ballasted installation. CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-6 2980 aggregate that will withstand weather exposure without significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane degradation. G. Mechanical Fasteners : Metal or plastic plates, caps, battens, accessory components, and fastening devices to suit substrate and as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2 .04 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Provide insulating materials to comply with requirements indicated for materials and with referenced standards in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer' s standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths . 1 . Provide tapered boards where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate with taper of 1/4 inch per foot, unless otherwise indicated. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular, thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high-density skin, complying with ASTM C 578 for Type indicated; with 5-year aged r-values of 5.4 and 5. 0 at 40 deg and 75 deg F (4.4 deg and 23 . 9 deg C) , respectively, and as follows: 1. Type IV, 1 . 6-pcf minimum density, unless otherwise indicated. a. Surface Burning Characteristics : Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed values of 5 and 165, respectively. 2 .05 AUXILIARY INSULATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with fire- resistance requirements . B. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filling voids. C. Mechanical Anchors: Corrosion-resistant type as recommended by insulation manufacturer for deck type and complying with fire and insurance wind-uplift rating requirements. 1. Provide system tested and approved for I-60 wind- uplift rating. CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-5 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 GENERAL A. Performance: Provide roofing materials identified to be of generic type indicated and tested to show compliance with required performances . 2 . 02 CHLOROSULFONATED POLYETHYLENE (CSPE) MEMBRANE A. Hypalon synthetic rubber, as produced by E. I . du Pont de Nemours & Co. , formed into uniform flexible sheets, complying with the following: 1 . Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412) : 1000 psi . 2 . Ultimate Elongation (ASTM D 412) : 350 percent . 3 . Brittleness Temperature (ASTM D 746) : Minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C) . 4 . Resistance to Heat Aging (ASTM D 573) : Retains 100 percent of tensile strength after 14 days at 212 deg F (100 deg C) . 5. Thickness : 45 mils, nominal. 6 . Reinforcing Scrim: Polyester or nylon. 7 . Exposed Face Color: White. B. Loose-Laid and Ballasted CSPE Membrane: Manufacturer's standard installation. 1. Manufacturers : Provide products of the following: a. Hi-Tuff/Hypalon; J.P.S . Elastomerics Corp. 2 . 03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board Base: ASTM C 36, Type X, 5/8 inch thick. B. Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer 's standard heat- welded seaming system. C. Cant Strips, Tapered Edge Strips, and Flashing Accessories: Types recommended by membrane manufacturer, including adhesive tapes, flashing cements, and sealants . D. Flashing Material: Manufacturer's standard system compatible with single-ply membrane. E. Slip Sheet : Type recommended by membrane manufacturer for protecting membrane from incompatible substrates. F. Aggregate Surface Ballast: Washed, rounded, riverbed gravel or other acceptable smooth-faced stone ranging in size from 1 to 2 inches in diameter. Provide CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-4 2980 C. Pre-Roofing Conference : Before installing roofing and associated Work, meet at mutually agreed location with Installer, roofing manufacturer, installers of related work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance, including governing authorities, Architect, and Owner. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant . Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening pre-roofing conference. D. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials that have been tested and listed by UL in "Building Materials Directory" or by other nationally recognized testing laboratory for Class A rated materials/system. 1 . 05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather: Proceed with roofing work when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturers ' recommendations and warranty requirements . B. Substrate Conditions : Do not begin roofing installation until substrates have been inspected and are determined to be in satisfactory condition. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit two executed copies of 2-year "Roofing Warranty" on form included at the end of this Section, covering work of this Section including roofing membrane, composition flashing, roof insulation, and roof accessories, signed and countersigned by Installer (Roofer) and Contractor. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit executed copy of single-ply membrane manufacturer' s "Limited Service Warranty" agreement including flashing endorsement, signed by an authorized representative of manufacturer. Provide form that was published with product literature as of date of Contract Documents . C. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-3 2980 J. Division 15 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: Exhaust vents, ducts and pipes through the roof . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data, installation instructions, and general recommendations from manufacturer of single-ply membrane system for types of roofing required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements . B. Samples : Submit samples of finished roofing sheets, including T-shaped side/end-lap seam. Also include the following: 1 . Aggregate ballast to show type, shape, color. 2 . Insulation board. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing roof configuration, sheet layout, seam locations, colors (as applicable) , details at perimeter, and special conditions . 1 . Indicate layout of tapered insulation materials . D. Submit pre-roofing conference records . E. Submit test data for pullout resistance of fastening systems . F. Submit certification that materials comply with local VOC limitations . 1. 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain primary single-ply membrane roofing from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials . B. Installer: Engage an experienced Installer that has specialized in installing roofing systems similar to those required for this Project . Installer must be acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing material. 1 . Work associated with single-ply membrane roofing, including (but not limited to) insulation, flashing, and membrane sheet joint sealers, is to be performed by Installer of this Work. CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-2 2980 ADD/DEDUCT ALTERNATE NO. 1 SECTION 07530 CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes single-ply membrane roofing systems . B. Types of roofing systems specified in this section using single-ply roofing membranes include the following: 1 . Loosely laid and ballasted roofing system. C. Single-ply roofing membranes include the following: 1 . Chlorosulfonated polyethylene (CSPE) . D. Roof insulation related to single-ply membrane roofing is specified in this section. E. Provide mechanical hoisting equipment, operating personnel and required rigging to perform the work of this section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05300 - Metal Decking: Steel roof deck. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications . C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers . D. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing: EPDM roofing. E. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Copings and gravel stops. F. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories. G. Section 07820 - Metal-Framed Skylights . H. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers : Sealants not in conjunction with roofing. I. Division 15 - Plumbing: Roof drains and plumbing vents through the roof. CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530-1 2980 Completion and in accordance with requirements of specified warranty. 3 . 04 FINAL CLEANING A. Upon the completion of the work, remove and cart away from the premises all rubbish and accumulated materials and leave the work in a satisfactory condition. B. All stains and damage to the exterior finish of the building caused by faulty workmanship or improper handling of materials in regard to the installation of roofing shall be cleaned or removed and replaced. END OF SECTION MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-10 2980 1 . Install fiberboard in single layer over insulation. 2 . Stagger joints in one direction for each course. For multiple layers, stagger joints in both directions between courses with no gaps to form a complete thermal envelope. 3 . Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membrane before end of day and before start of inclement weather. F. Secure fiberboard and roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type and spacing indicated; but in no case provide less than one anchor per 4 square feet of surface area or less anchorage than required by FM "Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 . " G. Loose-Laid and Ballasted: Install membrane by unrolling over prepared substrate, fastening at perimeter and at roofing penetrations. Lap adjoining sheets and bond, covering top edges of each sheet at seams with uniform fillet of sealant as recommended by manufacturer. Install flashings and counterflashings where indicated and in accordance with recommendations by manufacturer. 1 . Apply aggregate ballast in uniform thickness at rate of 10 to 12 pounds per square foot, spreading with care to minimize possibility of damage to membrane. H. Concrete Pavers for Walkways : Install paver units at locations shown for access to roof-mounted equipment . Place an additional layer of roof membrane under the concrete pavers . Adhere the additional layer of roof membrane to the roof membrane using an adhesive recommended by the roofing membrane manufacturer. 1. Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of providing 250 lineal feet of pavers, 2 ' -0" wide. 3 .03 PROTECTION OF ROOFING A. Upon completion of roofing (including associated work) , institute appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At end of construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger roofing, make a final inspection of roofing and prepare a written report to Owner, describing nature and extent of deterioration or damage found. B. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time of final inspection to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-9 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Applicator shall examine surfaces scheduled to receive sheet membrane system for defects such as excessive surface roughness, contaminated surfaces, structurally unsound substrates, that will adversely affect execution. B. Comply with manufacturer' s instructions for preparation of substrate to receive roofing system. C. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing system work. Remove sharp projections . 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Start installation only in presence of manufacturer' s technical representative. B. Comply with UL requirements for fire rated roof constructions and comply with FM requirements for "Class I" metal deck construction and I-60 roof construction. 1 . For membrane roofing on steel roof decks, comply with UL Design No. P701 and additional requirements indicated. C. Install vapor retarder over all metal decks which are to be insulated, in accordance with the manufacturer' s recommended application method. Install vapor retarder over a clean and dry deck, parallel to the flutes, and secured to the deck with adhesive, applied at a rate of 0 .25 to 0 .4 gal . /square in a film over all of the deck surface in contact with the vapor retarder. Lap all edges 2 inches and seal with adhesive. Install no more vapor retarder in one day than can be properly covered and capped that day. D. Over steel decks, install 5/8 inch thick Type X gypsum board perpendicular to steel roof deck with end joints staggered a minimum of 1 foot and occurring over crests of steel roof deck. E. Extend insulation full thickness in two layers, or in multiple layers over entire surface to be insulated, cutting and fitting tightly around obstructions . Form crickets, saddles, and tapered areas with additional material as shown and as required for proper drainage of membrane. i MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-8 2980 significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane degradation. 1 . Aggregate Size: Provide processed aggregate that complies with ASTM D448, Size No. 3 . I. Concrete Paver Ballast : Prefabricated precast concrete units with subsurface drainage channels, weighing approximately 12 psf with minimum 2500 psi compressive strength. Provide one of the following: 1 . "Roofblok Ballast System" ; Roofblock Limited. 2 . "Ballast Paver; " Westile, Inc. J. Mechanical Fasteners : Metal plates, caps, battens, accessory components, fastening devices, and adhesives to suit substrate and as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2 . 03 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C578 for Type indicated; with 5 year aged "R" values of 5 .4 and 5 at 40 and 75 degrees F. respectively; and as follows: 1 . Type VI, 1 .8 lb. /cu. ft . min. density, 40 psi compressive resistance. 2 . Surface Burning Characteristics : Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 5 and 165, respectively. 3 . Provide tapered insulation boards where indicated for sloping roof membrane to drain; fabricate with taper of 1/8 inch per foot in the 24 inch dimension. B. Fiberboard: High density fiberboard insulation conforming to ASTM C208 and C209 for Construction Grade, Roof Insulating Board, 1/2 inch thick, natural or factory surface, with square edges. C. Mechanical Anchors : Corrosion-resistant type as recommended by insulation manufacturer for deck type, and complying with fire and insurance uplift rating requirements. 1. Provide system tested and approved for FM I-60 wind uplift rating. r� 7 MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-7 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide membrane roofing system from one of the following manufacturers (no substitutions) : 1 . Carlisle Syntec Systems . 2 . GenFlex Roofing Systems, GenCorp Polymer Products . 3 . Versico Inc . 2 .02 MATERIALS A. Roofing Membrane: Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) formed into uniform, flexible sheets, complying with ASTM D4637, Type 1 . 1. Class U, unreinforced. 2 . Thickness : 60 mils, nominal . 3 . Exposed Face Color: Manufacturer' s standard. B. Vapor Retarder: "Pyro-Kure 600" by Fortefiber Corporation or equal . Provide vapor retarder consisting of two layers of heavy duty kraft laminated with an adhesive and reinforced at the edges with glass fibers . Provide vapor retarder with a flame spread rating of 25 or less and maximum smoke developed of 30 and maximum fuel contributed of 0, in accordance with ASTM E84 . C. Gypsum Board Base: ASTM C36, 'Type X, 5/8 inch thick. D. Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's standard materials for sealing lapped joints, including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges as recommended by manufacturer of system. E. Cant Strips, Tapered Edge Strips and Flashing Accessories : Types recommended by membrane manufac- turer, including adhesive tapes, flashing cements, and sealants. F. Flashing Material : Manufacturer's standard system compatible with flexible sheet membrane. G. Slip Sheet: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer for protecting membrane from incompatible substrates . H. Processed Aggregate for Stone Ballast: Provide washed, rounded, riverbed gravel or other acceptable smooth-faced washed stone. Provide processed aggregate that will withstand weather exposure without MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-6 2980 1 . 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Proceed with roofing and associated work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit the work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations and warranty requirements, without additional reservations or restrictions . B. Substrate Conditions : Do not begin roofing installation until substrates have been inspected and are determined to be in satisfactory condition. 1 . 07 WARRP_NTY A. Roofing Subcontractor' s Warranty: The roofing subcontractor shall submit to the Owner a two-year workmanship warranty signed and countersigned by Installer (Roofer) and Contractor. In the event that any roofing work including roofing membrane, composition flashing, roof insulation, and roof accessories, is found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract Documents within two years of substantial completion, the roofing subcontractor shall remove and replace such defective work at no additional cost to the Owner. The roofing subcontractor's warranty obligation shall be directly - to the Owner, and a copy shall be sent to the roofing membrane manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit executed copy of membrane manufacturer' s "Total Roofing System Warranty" agreement covering materials and workmanship for the entire roofing system including all materials supplied or specifically approved by the membrane manufacturer. Provide warranty signed by an authorized representative of roofing membrane manufacturer. Provide form that was published with product literature as of date of Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period shall be 15 years subsequent to the date of Substantial Completion of the Project. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. D. Signed warranties as specified, must be submitted to the Architect before final payment for the membrane roofing work will be made. t, (7 MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-5 2980 7 . Establish protection methods for finished roof from other trades . D. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. 1 . FM Listing: Provide roofing systems and component materials that have been evaluated by Factory Mutual System for fire spread, wind uplift, and hail damage and that are listed in "Factory Mutual Approval Guide" for Class I construction. a. Roofing system shall comply with FM Class I-90 for wind-uplift resistance. E. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials which have been tested and listed by UL in "Building Materials Directory" for application indicated, with "Class A" rated materials/system for roof slopes indicated. F. Fire Performance Characteristics : Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1 . Surface Burning Characteristics : ASTM E84 . 2 . Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119 . 3 . Combustion Characteristics : ASTM E136 . 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original labeled containers, packages and rolls . B. Store roofing materials and insulation on raised platforms and protect from moisture. Provide fire preventive measures for storage areas . 1. Store adhesives at temperatures above 40 degrees F. 2 . Limit storage loading on roof decks during installation period to 30 pounds per square foot of uniformly distributed load. C. Provide other protection as required by the roofing materials manufacturer. 1 . Replace materials damaged during handling or storage. 2 . Remove damaged materials from the premises immediately. MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-4 2980 1 . Certificate shall state that a warranty shall be "* issued as specified, upon completion of the roofing installation. G. Submit a copy of the warranty to be issued, for review. H. Submit certification that materials comply with local VOC limitations . 1. 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain primary single ply roofing membrane from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials . B. Installer: A firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in installation of roofing systems similar to those required for this project and which is acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing materials. 1 . Work associated with single ply membrane roofing, including but not limited to vapor retarders, insulation, flashing and counterflashing, expansion joints,and joint sealers, is to be performed by Installer of single ply membrane roofing. C. Pre-Roofing Conference: Prior to installation of roofing and associated work, meet at project site, or other mutually agreed location, with the roofing subcontractor (Installer) , roofing membrane sheet manufacturer, installers of related work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance, including Owner's insurer, testing agencies, governing authorities, Architect and Owner. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening preroofing conference. The pre-roofing conference shall include the following: 1. Review drawings, specifications and approved materials. 2 . Correct conflicts, if any, between approvals and specification requirements. 3 . Examine job site conditions, including inspection of deck, material labels and methods of storing materials. 4. Confirm that all nailers, curbs and edges are installed. 5 . Review installation procedures . Owl 6. Review scheduling and temperature requirements. MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-3 2980 K. Division 15 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: Exhaust vents, ducts and pipes through the roof . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data, specifications and installation instructions for single ply membrane roofing system. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements specified. B. Submit shop drawings: 1 . Shop drawings shall indicate fabricated flashings, flashings for pipe vents, roof drains, fascia/gravel stops, and other work, thickness of metals, dimensions, fastening methods, expansion joints and other provisions necessary for thermal expansion and contraction. 2 . Shop drawings for sheet membrane roofing shall include the following: a. Outline of the roof and roof size. b. Location and type of penetrations. c. Perimeter and penetration details . d. Special details . e. Bill of Materials . 3 . Indicate layout of tapered insulation materials . C. Submit two samples each of the following: 1 . Processed aggregate for stone ballast : 2 quarts each sample. 2 . Precast concrete paver ballast to show size, color. 3 . Rigid insulation board: 12 inches by 12 inch by specified thickness for each type. 4 . Finished roofing sheets, including T-shaped side/end-lap seam; 8 inch by 11 inch minimum size. 5 . Submit samples of other materials as required by the Architect. D. Submit copies of pre-installation conference records . E. Submit test data for pullout resistance of fastening systems . F. Submit a certificate, signed by the roofing membrane manufacturer and by the roofing subcontractor, stating that the roofing, flashing and roof insulation proposed to be used comply with these specifications, and that the installation complies with the manufacturer' s printed instructions and are proper and adequate for the proposed installation and use. MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-2 2980 SECTION 07500 MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Types of roofing systems specified in this section utilizing single ply roofing membranes include the following: 1. Loosely laid and ballasted Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) membrane system. B. Products installed but not furnished under this section: 1 . Metal gravel stops and fascia and metal flashings to be installed integrally with membrane roofing is furnished under Section 07620 . C. Provide mechanical hoisting equipment, operating personnel and required rigging to perform the work of this section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05300 - Metal Decking: Steel roof deck. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications . C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers . D. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Building insulations not in conjunction with membrane roofing. E. Section 07250 - Fireproofing. F. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. G. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories. H. Section 07820 - Metal-Framed Skylights. I. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers : Sealants not in conjunction with roofing. J. Division 15 - Plumbing: Roof drains and plumbing vents through the roof. SS� MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-1 2980 filled to ensure compression fit and seal joint between insulation and edge of slab with calking approved by safing insulation manufacturer for this purpose. Leave no voids in completed installation. 3 . 06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting agency employed and paid by Owner will examine completed firestopping to determine, in general, if it is being installed in compliance with requirements . B. Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect . C. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations are issued. D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements . 3 . 07 CLEANING A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur. B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION FIRESTOPPING 07270-13 2980 1 . Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items . 2 . Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items . 3 . For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes . 3 . 04 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS A. Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM C1193, and with the sealant manufacturer' s installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire- resistance rating required. C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed. D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing begins . Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint . Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint . Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 3 .05 INSTALLATION OF SAFING INSULATION A. Install safing insulation to fill gap between edge of concrete floor slab and back of exterior spandrel panels on safing clips spaced as needed to support insulation, but not further apart than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. Cut safing insulation wider than gap to be ,..1* FIRESTOPPING 07270-12 2980 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements : 1 . Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2 . Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3 . Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces . C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials . Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates . 3 . 03 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS A. Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems . After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems . C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: FIRESTOPPING 07270-11 2980 3 . Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant : a. Isoflex 880 GB, Harry S . Peterson Co. , Inc . b. Isoflex 881, Harry S . Peterson Co. , Inc. c. Vulkem 921, Mameco International Inc. d. Sikaflex--15LM, Sika Corp. 2 . 05 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer' s directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required) , type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. 2 . 06 SAFING INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES A. Slag-Wool-Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semirigid boards designed for use as fire stop at openings between edge of slab and exterior wall panels, produced by combining slag-wool fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA and IB; nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft . (64 kg/cu. m) ; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft . /Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27 .7 K x m/W at 24 deg C) . B. Calking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for sealing joint between foil backing of safing insulation and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of smoke. C. Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for holding safing insulation in place. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FIRESTOPPING 07270-10 2980 and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) 0. 1 . Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following percentage changes in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C719, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C920 for uses indicated: a. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent movement . D. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant : Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) 0. 1 . Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C719, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C920 for uses indicated: a. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent movement . E. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant : Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) 0. F. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or equal : 1. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing, Silicone Sealant : a. Dow Corning 790, Dow Corning Corp. b. Dow Corning 795, Dow Corning Corp. c. Silpruf, General Electric Co. d. Ultraglaze, General Electric Co. e. 864, Pecora Corp. 2 . Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant : a. Vulkem 922, Mameco International Inc. b. Dynflex, Pecora Corp. c. Dynatred, Pecora Corp. d. Dynatrol II, Pecora Corp. e. Sikaflex 2cn NS, Sika Corp. f. Sonolastic NP 2, Sonneborn Building Products Div. , ChemRex Inc. g. Dymeric, Tremco Inc. FIRESTOPPING 07270-9 2980 with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of zero per ASTM E84 . AMR, H. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogenous mortar. I. Pillows/Bags : Re-usable, heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives . J. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. K. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealant of grade indicated below: 1 . Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self- leveling) grade for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces . 2 . Grade for Vertical Surfaces : Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces . L. Solvent-Release-Curing Intumescent Sealant : Solvent- release-curing, single-component, synthetic-polymer- based sealant of grade indicated below: 1 . Grade for Horizontal Surfaces : Pourable (self- leveling) grade for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces . 2 . Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces. 2 . 04 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer' s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants. B. Sealant Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 1 . Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. C. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant : Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure-related Use NT, FIRESTOPPING 07270-8 2980 B. Accessories : Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 . Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems . Accessories include but are not limited to the following items : 1 . Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the following: a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation. b. Ceramic fiber. c. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. d. Fire-rated formboard. e. Joint fillers for joint sealants . 2 . Temporary forming materials . 3 . Substrate primers . 4 . Collars. 5. Steel sleeves . C. Applications : Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this section that comply with system performance and other requirements. 2 .03 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Ceramic-Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating, and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating. B. Ceramic-Fiber Sealant : Single-component formulation of ceramic fibers and inorganic binders . C. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant : Single- component, endothermic, latex formulation. D. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation. E. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, water- resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds . F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component, elastomeric sheet with stainless steel or aluminum foil on one side. G. Job-Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl-based powder product for mixing with water at Project site to produce a paintable compound, passing ASTM E136, FIRESTOPPING 07270-7 2980 1 . 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions : Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes . B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers ' instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. 1 . 08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Notify Owner' s inspection agency at least 1 week in advance of firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations . B. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner' s inspection agency and authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have examined each installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturers or equal : 1 . Bio-Fireshield, Inc. 2 . Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc . 3 . International Protective Coatings Corp (IPC) . 4 . Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) 5 . Thermal Ceramics . 6 . 3M Fire Protection Products . 7 . Tremco Inc. 8 . The RectorSeal Corporation. 9 . United States Gypsum Co. 2 . 02 FIRESTOPPING A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. FIRESTOPPING 07270-6 2980 materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final installations . 1 . Locate mockups on site in locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect . 2 . Notify Architect 1 week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be erected. 3 . Obtain Architect ' s acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 4 . Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed unit of Work. a. Accepted mockups in an undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may become part of completed unit of Work. E. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy. " F. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements . G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings. " H. Owner will employ and pay a qualified inspection agency to check installed firestopping systems for compliance with requirements. 1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers ' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials . B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes . FIRESTOPPING 07270-5 2980 that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2 . Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0 . 01 inch of water is maintained at a distance of 0 .78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements : a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through- penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory, " by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency. 3 . Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response characteristics per ASTM E119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0 . 01 inch of water, as measured 0 .78 inch from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements : a. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants : As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency. B. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer' s products per specified requirements . A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain through- penetration firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer. D. Field-Constructed Mockup: Prior to installing firestopping, erect mockups for each different through-penetration firestop system indicated to verify selections made and to demonstrate qualities of FIRESTOPPING 07270-4 2980 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data for each type of product specified. 1 . Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants . B. Submit shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining construction for each through-penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1 . Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Submit product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. D. Submit product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products . E. Submit qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics : Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements and those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article: 1 . Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems FIRESTOPPING 07270-3 2980 requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases . ,, B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems : Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated. C. T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems : Provide through-penetration firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E814, where indicated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas . T-rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist : 1 . Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities . 2 . Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures . 3 . Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors required to have a temperature-rise rating. 4 . Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4 inch diameter nominal pipe or 16 square inch in overall cross-sectional area. D. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants : Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs . E. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. 1 . For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems . 2 . For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3 . For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. F. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread values of less than 25 and smoke- developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E84. FIRESTOPPING 07270-2 2980 SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes firestopping for the following: 1 . Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor and roof construction including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items . 2 . Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items . 3 . Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 4 . Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction. 5. Safing insulation. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Construction of openings in concrete slabs . B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Joint fillers for non- fire-resistive-rated masonry construction. C. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal insulation and accessories. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants : Non-fire-resistive- rated joint sealants . E. Section 14560 - Chutes. F. Division 15 Sections : Specifying ducts and piping penetrations . G. Division 16 Sections : Specifying cable and conduit penetrations . 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to FIRESTOPPING 07270-1 2980 other work and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Cure exposed cementitious fireproofing materials in compliance with fireproofing manufacturers recommendations to prevent premature drying. C. Protect fireproofing according to advice of fireproofing manufacturer and installer from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. D. Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other construction to minimize the need to cut or remove fireproofing. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and patch any areas where fireproofing was removed or damaged prior to concealment of fireproofing by other work. E. Repair or replace work that has not been successfully protected. 3 . 06 FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS SCHEDULE A. Columns, girders, trusses (other than roof trusses) , and framing supporting more than one floor: 1 . Rating: 4 hours . B. Columns, girders, trusses (other than roof trusses) , and framing supporting one floor only or a roof only: 1. Rating: 3 hours . C. Structural members supporting a wall: 1. Rating: 2 hours. D. Floor construction including beams: 1 . Rating: 1-1/2 hours . E. Roof construction including beams, trusses and framing, arches and roof deck: 1 . 15 feet or less in height to lowest member - Rating: 1-1/2 hours . 2 . More than 15 feet but less than 20 feet in height to lowest member - Rating: 1 hour. (UL P719) 3 . 20 feet or more in height to lowest member - Rating: 0 hour. F. Spray underside of slab at depressed shower locations . END OF SECTION FIREPROOFING 07250-12 2980 3 . 04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform field quality-control testing. B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing of completed fireproofing will take place in successive stages in areas of extent described below; do not proceed with fireproofing of next area until test results for previously completed fireproofing show compliance with requirements . 1. Extent of Each Test Area : Each bay, 10, 000 sq. ft. of floor area, or total floor area, whichever produces greatest number of test areas . 2 . Within each area, testing agency will randomly select one structural member of each type (primary beam, secondary beam, joist, truss, steel deck, and column) and test fireproofing as follows : a. For cohesion and adhesion per ASTM E736 . b. For thickness per ASTM E605 . C. Lower flanges and webs of beams, column webs, column flanges, and floor deck for density per ASTM E605 or Appendix A "Alternate Method for Density Determination" of AWCI Technical Manual 12-A. d. When testing discovers fireproofing not in compliance with requirements, testing agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace fireproofing where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements for cohesion and adhesion or for density or both. E. Apply additional fireproofing per manufacturer' s directions where test results indicate that the thickness does not comply with specified requirements. F. Additional Testing: Where fireproofing is removed and replaced or repaired, additional testing will be performed to determine compliance with specified requirements. 3 .05 CLEANING, REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Immediately upon completion of spraying operations in each containable area of project, remove over-spray and fall-out of materials from surfaces of FIREPROOFING 07250-11 2980 C. Do not proceed with installation of fireproofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ,.. , 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances which could impair bond of fireproofing, including oil, grease, rolling compounds, primers, and loose mill scale . B. Cover other work which might be damaged by fall-out or overspray of fireproofing materials during application. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations, protect the environment, and to ensure adequate ambient conditions for temperature and ventilation. 3 .03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to convey and spray on fireproofing materials; as applicable to the particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. B. Apply sprayed-on fireproofing that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 under "Test Reports" in "Submittals" article, with respect to rate of application, use of sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results . C. Coat substrates with adhesive prior to applying fireproofing where required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended by fireproofing manufacturer for material and application indicated. D. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, install body of fireproof covering in a single course. E. Apply fireproofing materials by sprayed-on method to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended by manufacturer. 1 . Apply topcoat to concealed fireproofing in elevator hoistways. Am*. FIREPROOFING 07250-10 2980 2 . 03 AUXILIARY FIREPROOFING MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary fireproofing materials that are compatible with sprayed-on fireproofing products and substrates, are approved for use indicated by manufacturer of sprayed-on fireproofing, and are approved by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance rated designs indicated. B. Adhesive for Bonding Fireproofing: Product approved by manufacturer of sprayed-on fireproofing. C. Topcoats : Type as recommended by manufacturer of each fireproofing material required for applications indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine if they are in satisfactory condition to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. 2 . Substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, primers, loose mill scale, dirt, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrate under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 3 . Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates . 4 . Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying the fireproofing. 5. For metal roof decking substrates, application of roofing has been completed and roof traffic is prohibited during application of fireproofing and until it has dried. B. Conduct tests according to sprayed-on fireproofing manufacturer's recommendations to verify that substrates are free of oil, rolling compounds, and other substances capable of interfering with bond where there is any doubt as to their presence. 53� , FIREPROOFING 07250-9 2980 E. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following concealed sprayed-on fireproofing products (no substitutions) : 1 . Monokote Type MK-6; Construction Products Division, W. R. Grace & Company. 2 . Mandolite CP2; Mandoval Vermiculite Products, Inc . 3 . Pyrok LD20; Pyrok, Inc. 4 . Pyrolite 1, Carboline Fireproofing Products Div. , Carboline Co. 2 .02 EXPOSED FIREPROOFING MATERIALS A. For exposed applications of sprayed-on fireproofing, provide manufacturer' s standard products complying with requirements indicated for material composition and for minimum physical properties of each product listed, measured by standard test methods referenced with each property. B. Cementitious Fireproofing: Factory-mixed, dry formulation mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application, complying with the following requirements : 1 . Material Composition: Cement-aggregate formulation, chloride free, composed of portland cement, additives, and inorganic aggregates . 2 . Bond Strength: 434 lbf per sq. ft . as determined per ASTM E736. 3 . Compressive Strength: 52 lbf per sq. inch as determined per ASTM E761 . 4 . Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 605 or Appendix A "Alternate Method for Density Determination" of AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, but with an average density of not less than 22 pcf . 5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion as determined per ASTM E937 . 6 . Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like as determined per ASTM E759 . 7 . Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0 .005 gram per sq. ft . as determined per ASTM E859 . 8. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E136 . 9 . Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame- spread value of 5 and smoke-developed value of 0. 10 . Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following (no substitutions) : a. Monokote Type Z106; Construction Products Division, W.R. Grace & Co. b. Mandolite P-20; Mandoval Vermiculite Products Inc. c. Pyrok MD30; Pyrok, Inc. FIREPROOFING 07250-8 2980 standard test methods referenced with each property listed below: 1 . Bond Strength: 200 lbf per sq. ft . as determined per ASTM E736 under the following conditions : a. Field test sprayed-on fireproofing that is applied to flanges of wide-flange structural steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fireproofing. b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving sprayed-on fireproofing are primed or otherwise painted, perform series of bond tests specified in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. c. Minimum sprayed-on fireproofing thickness tested in laboratory shall be 0 .75 inch. 2 . Compressive Strength: 5 .21 lbf per sq. inch as determined in the laboratory per ASTM E 761 . Minimum sprayed-on fireproofing thickness tested shall be 0 .75 inch and the minimum dry density shall be as specified, but not less than 15 pcf. 3 . Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E937 . 4 . Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like per ASTM E759. 5 . Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like per ASTM E760 . 6. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0 . 005 gram per sq. ft . in 24 hours as determined per ASTM E859 . For laboratory tests, the minimum sprayed- on fireproofing thickness is 0 .75 inch, the maximum dry density is 15 pcf, test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours. 7 . Dry Density: 15 pcf for average and individual densities regardless of density indicated in referenced fire-resistive design, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E605 or Appendix A "Alternate Method for Density Determination" of AWCI Technical Manual 12-A. 8. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame- spread value of 10 and smoke-developed value of 0 . D. Infection Control Inhibitor: Fireproofing material shall be manufactured with a factory-added fungi and mold inhibitor, shall be tested in accordance with ASTM G21, and shall show resistance to fungi and mold growth for a period of 21 days for general use and 60 days for materials to be installed in plenums . Each bag shall be labeled "Infection Control Inhibitor Added. " 3, S FIREPROOFING 07250-7 2980 1 . 09 WARRANTY A. The warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents . B. Submit a written warranty, executed by Contractor and cosigned by Installer, agreeing to repair or replace sprayed-on fireproofing that has failed within the specified warranty period. Failures include but are not limited to the following: 1 . Cracking, flaking, eroding in excess of specified requirements, peeling, and delaminating of sprayed-on fireproofing from substrates due to defective materials and workmanship within the specified warranty period. 2 . Not covered under the warranty are failures attributable to damage by occupants and Owner' s maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and to other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use. C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 CONCEALED SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING MATERIALS A. For concealed applications of sprayed-on fireproofing provide manufacturer's standard products complying with requirements indicated in this article for material composition and physical properties representative of installed products . B. Material Composition: Cementitious fireproofing consisting of factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated or higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per FIREPROOFING 07250-6 2980 B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard any materials whose shelf life has expired. C. Store sprayed-on fireproofing materials inside, under cover, above ground, so they are kept dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard any materials that have deteriorated. 1 .07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions : Do not install sprayed-on fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperatures are 40 degrees F (4 .4 degrees C) and falling, unless temporary protection and heat is provided to maintain temperatures at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after applying sprayed-on fireproofing. B. Ventilation: Ventilate sprayed-on fireproofing by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation during and after application until fireproofing dries thoroughly. 1 . 08 SEQUENCING A. Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed-on fireproofing with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements : 1. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent deterioration of sprayed-on fireproofing for interior applications due to exposure to unfavorable environmental conditions. 2 . Avoid unnecessary exposure of sprayed-on fireproofing to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 3 . Do not apply fireproofing to metal roof decking substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing. 4 . Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place. 5 . Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until fireproofing is installed. 6. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, tested, and corrections have been made to any defective fireproofing. FIREPROOFING 07250-5 2980 C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain sprayed-on fireproofing materials from a single manufacturer for Oak each different product required. D. Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing services specified in Part 3 of this Section. E. Engineer Qualifications : A professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing structural engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of structural systems similar to this Project in material, design, and extent with a record of successful in-service performance. F. Provide fireproofing products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy. G. Field-Constructed Mockups : Prior to installing sprayed-on fireproofing, apply each product specified for exposed applications to demonstrate both aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1 . Locate mockups on site in location or, if not indicated, directed by Architect . 2 . Extent of Mockups : Approximately 100 sq. ft . of surface for each product indicated. 3 . Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be erected. 4 . Obtain Architect 's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of Work. 5 . Retain and maintain mockups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed unit of Work. a. Accepted mockups in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion may become part of completed unit of Work. 1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers ' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; shelf life, if applicable; and fire- resistance ratings applicable to Project . Alwk FIREPROOFING 07250-4 2980 OW primers, and other surface coatings on substrates indicated to receive fireproofing. E. Results from tests and inspections performed by Owner- employed independent testing agency will be reported promptly to Architect and Contractor. F. Submit qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. G. Submit research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction showing that sprayed-on fireproofing products comply with building code in effect for Project. 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics : Provide sprayed- on fireproofing products identical to those used in assemblies tested for the following fire-test-response characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify packages (bags) containing fireproofing with appropriate classification markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1 . Fire-Resistance Ratings : As indicated by reference to fire-resistive designs listed in UL "Fire Resistance Directory, " or in the comparable publication of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-resistive assemblies where sprayed-on fireproofing serves as direct-applied protection, tested per ASTM E119 . 2 . Surface-Burning Characteristics : As indicated for each sprayed-on fireproofing product required, tested per ASTM E84. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the sprayed-on fireproofing manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer' s products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its sprayed-on fireproofing products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. FIREPROOFING 07250-3 2980 B. Submit shop drawings in form of structural framing plans indicating the following: 1 . Where and what kinds of surface preparations are required before applying fireproofing. 2 . Extent of sprayed-on fireproofing for each different construction and fire-resistance rating including the following: a. Applicable fire-resistive design designations of inspecting and testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of structural components and assemblies . c. Designation of restrained and unrestrained conditions based on definitions in ASTM E119, Appendix X3 as determined by a qualified professional engineer. 3 . Treatment of fireproofing after its application. C. Submit test reports for sprayed-on fireproofing from a qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Contractor or manufacturer. Provide reports indicating that physical properties of proposed sprayed-on fireproofing products comply with specified requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations according to the following requirements : 1 . Testing is performed on sprayed-on fireproofing materials randomly selected from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another inspecting and testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2 . Testing is performed on specimens of sprayed-on fireproofing materials that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical in every respect to installed fireproofing including application of sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application. 3 . Qualified independent testing agency does testing on laboratory specimens that it witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens . a. Test reports without the above information are not acceptable. D. Submit product certificates from fireproofing manufacturers that each sprayed-on fireproofing product indicated for Project complies with specified requirements including those for fire-test-response characteristics and compatibility with adhesives, FIREPROOFING 07250-2 2980 SECTION 07250 Owl FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Concealed sprayed-on fireproofing. 2 . Exposed sprayed-on fireproofing. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete fireproofing. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry fireproofing. C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Surface conditions specified for structural steel receiving sprayed-on fireproofing. D. Section 05310 - Steel Decking. E. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Through-penetration firestop systems F. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing. 1 . 03 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed sprayed-on fireproofing refers to applications where sprayed-on materials are applied to surfaces which will be concealed from view behind other construction when the work is completed. B. Exposed sprayed-on fireproofing refers to applications where sprayed-on materials are applied to surfaces which are exposed to view when the work is completed. 1. 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data for each sprayed-on fireproofing product indicated. 1. Certification by manufacturers that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) . FIREPROOFING 07250-1 2980 tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates . D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3 . 07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes . Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION BUILDING INSULATION 07210-7 2980 B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. 1 . Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1 . Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members . Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends . 2 . Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members . E. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2 . 5 lb/cu. ft . (40 kg/cu. m) . 3 . 06 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs . Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints . Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor retarder manufacturer' s instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor-retarder BUILDING INSULATION 07210-6 2980 of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment . 3 . 03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer' s written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement . D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness . 3 . 04 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions . Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board. Set in adhesive according to written instructions of insulation manufacturer. 3 .05 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 5a BUILDING INSULATION 07210-5 2980 below. Provide products fabricated with tongue-and- groove edges and with one side having a matrix of vertical and horizontal drainage channels and faced with insulation manufacturer' s standard nonwoven filtration fabric. 1 . Type IV, 1 . 60-lb/cu. ft . (26-kg/cu. m) minimum density (25 psi compressive strength. ) 2 . 03 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D4397, 6 mils (0 . 15 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0 .13 perm (7 . 5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) . B. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders : 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft . (12 kg/100 sq. m) , with maximum permeance rating of 0 .0403 perm (2 .3 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) . C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1 . Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders : a. DURA-SKRIM 6WB; Raven Industries, Inc. b. Griffolyn T-65; Reef Industries, Inc . , Griffolyn Div. 2 . 04 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Protection Board: Premolded, semirigid asphalt/fiber composition board, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, formed under heat and pressure, standard sizes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance AM*, BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products by one of the following: 1 . Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: a. Amoco Foam Products Company. b. DiversiFoam Products . c. Dow Chemical Co. d. UC Industries, Inc. ; Owens-Corning Co. 2 . Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels : a. Dow Chemical Co. b. UC Industries, Inc. ; Owens-Corning Co. 3 . Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation. d. Schuller International, Inc. 2 . 02 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards . 1 . Preformed Units : Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer 's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed from polystyrene base resin by an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent to comply with ASTM C578 for type and with other requirements indicated below: 1 . Type IV, 1 .60-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m) minimum density, unless otherwise indicated (25 psi compressive strength. ) (Under slabs-on-grade) 2 . Type VII, 2 .20-lb/cu. ft . (35-kg/cu. m) minimum density (60 psi compressive strength. ) (At decks) 3 . Type V, 3 .00-lb/cu. ft. (48-kg/cu. m) minimum density (100 psi compressive strength. ) (Under heavy vehicular traffic) 4 . Surface-Burning Characteristics : Maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively. 5 . Recycled Content: Not less than 50 percent blend of postconsumer and recovered polystyrene resins . C. Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels: Fabric-faced, rigid, cellular polystyrene thermal insulation formed by expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process using hydrochlorofluorocarbons as blowing agent to comply with ASTM C578 for type indicated BUILDING INSULATION 07210-3 2980 D. Submit research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of foam-plastic insulations with building code in effect for Project . 1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products : Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics : Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1 . Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84 . 2 . Fire-Resistance Ratings : ASTM E119 . 3 . Combustion Characteristics : ASTM E136 . 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources . Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows : 1 . Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2 . Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3 . Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2 2980 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2 . Foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill) . 3 . Concealed building insulation. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Insulation installed in cavity walls . B. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Safing insulation. C. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing: Insulation specified as part of roofing construction. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers : Foam sealant . E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Assemblies : Insulation specified as part of gypsum board assemblies and shaft-wall assemblies . F. Division 15 - Plumbing: Pipe insulation. G. Division 15 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: Ductwork insulation. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product Data for each type of insulation product specified. B. Submit samples for verification in full-size units of each type of exposed insulation indicated for each color specified. C. Submit product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water- vapor transmission, water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. BUILDING INSULATION 07210-1 2980 dust-free, and dry substrate for vapor barrier application. B. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through vapor barrier and at protrusions according to vapor barrier manufacturer' s written instructions . 3 . 03 SHEET RUBBERIZED ASPHALT BARRIER IN CAVITY WALLS A. Install sheet rubberized asphalt barrier (SRAB) in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations . At plane changes, provide a transition material (bead of sealant recommended by the barrier manufacturer) to eliminate the 90 degree corner and make a smooth transition from one plane to the other. If there is a gap at the plane change, provide a light gage metal flashing to span the gap and make a smooth transition from one plane to the other. At through-wall flashings, provide an additional strip wide enough, but not less than 6 inches wide, for proper adhesion to counterflash tops of wall flashings . Adhere it to both the flashing upturned leg and the base wall . Finish the exposed top edge of the counterflashing strip with a bead of manufacturer's mastic . 3 . 04 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect vapor barrier from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION (SRAB) VAPOR BARRIERS 07190-4 2980 2 . 02 SHEET RUBBERIZED ASPHALT BARRIER (SRAB) A. Sheet Rubberized Asphalt Barrier (SRAB) : Self- adhering membrane of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to high density, cross-laminated polyethylene film, formed into uniform flexible sheets of not less than 40 mils total thickness . All related accessories such as primer, seam tape, mastic, fluid, and sealant shall be as recommended by or of the same manufacturer as the barrier material used. 2 . 03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with vapor barrier membrane. 1 . Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended by manufacturer of vapor barrier material for substrate. C. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which vapor barrier systems will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements . Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Do not proceed with installation until after minimum concrete curing period recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer. 2 . Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263 . 3 . Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using vapor barrier over substrate. 3 . 02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, (SRAB) VAPOR BARRIERS 07190-3 2980 C. Submit samples, 3 by 6 inch (75 by 150 mm) minimum size, of each vapor barrier material required for Project . D. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements under the "Quality Assurance" Article. 1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an Installer who has completed vapor barrier installations similar to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to vapor barrier manufacturer. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain vapor barrier materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing vapor barrier. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer' s name, product, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by vapor barrier manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight . 1. 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Apply vapor barrier within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer. Do not apply vapor barrier to a damp or wet substrate. 1 . Do not apply vapor barrier in snow, rain, fog, or mist . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following sheet rubberized asphalt barrier (SRAB) products : 1 . Perm-A-Barrier; W. R. Grace & Company. 2 . Duramem 714 Dyna-Barrier; Pecora Corporation. (SRAB) VAPOR BARRIERS 07190-2 2980 SECTION 07190 (SRAB) VAPOR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Sheet rubberized asphalt barrier (SRAB) in cavity walls . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry veneer cavity walls. B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal flashings . C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers : Joint sealant materials and installation. D. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum sheathing over metal studs . 1 . 03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide vapor barrier that prevents the passage of liquid water and water vapor and complies with requirements as demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing agency of manufacturer's current sheet membrane. 1 .04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data for each type of vapor barrier specified, including manufacturer' s printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties . B. Submit shop drawings showing locations and extent of vapor barrier, including details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, tie-ins with adjoining construction, and other termination conditions. 511 (SRAB) VAPOR BARRIERS 07190-1 2980 3 . 03 COLD-APPLIED, ASPHALT EMULSION DAMPPROOFING A. Trowel Grade: Trowel apply a coat of mastic asphalt emulsion dampproofing onto substrate at a minimum rate of 7 gal . /100 sq. ft . (2 .8 L/sq. m) , to produce an average, dry-film thickness of 60 mils (1 . 5 mm) but not less than 30 mils (0 .8 mm) at any point . 3 . 04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior, below-grade dampproofing membrane from damage until backfill is completed. Remove overspray and spilled materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. 3 .05 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A. Where indicated, install protection course of type indicated over completed-and-cured dampproofing treatment . Comply with dampproofing materials manufacturer's recommendations for method of support or attaching of protection materials . Support with spot application of trowel-grade mastic where not otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 50 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-5 2980 E. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. F. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors . Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work by masking or otherwise protecting adjoining work. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated and where Project conditions require extra precautions to ensure satisfactory performance of work. B. Application: Apply dampproofing to the following surfaces . 1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of exterior concrete or masonry walls in contact with earth or other backfill and where space is enclosed on opposite side. 2 . Back side of concrete or masonry retaining walls and stone facing to prevent percolating of water through the wall or facing. 3 . Inside surface of single-wythe, exterior, furred- concrete, or masonry walls above grade, to prevent water-vapor penetration through the wall . 4. Exterior surface of inside wythe of double-wythe, exterior masonry walls above grade, to prevent water-vapor penetration through the wall . 5. Where indicated on the Drawings . C. Reinforcement : At changes in plane or where otherwise shown as "reinforced, " install lapped course of glass fabric in first coat of dampproofing compound before it thickens. D. Bituminous Cant Strips: Install 2-by-2-inch (50-by- 50-mm) cant strip of bituminous grout at base of vertical dampproofing where it meets horizontal surface. E. Apply vertical dampproofing down walls from finished- grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when the Project is completed. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-4 2980 dampproofing use when applied according to the manufacturer' s instructions. 1. Trowel Grade: Emulsified asphalt mastic, prepared with mineral-colloid emulsifying agents and containing fibers other than asbestos, complying with ASTM D1227, Type IV. 2 . 03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Asphalt primer complying with ASTM D41, for asphalt-based dampproofing. B. Glass Fabric: Woven glass fabric, treated with asphalt, complying with ASTM D1668, Type I . C. Protection Course, Board Type: Premolded, 1/8 inch (3-mm) thick, multi-ply, semirigid board, consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on one side with polyethylene film. 1. Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Protection Course II; ChemRex, Inc. ; Sonneborn Building Products Div. b. Bituthene Asphaltic Hardboard; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. c. PC-2 Protection Course; Meadows : W.R. Meadows, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. B. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials manufacturer even though not shown. C. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers, if any, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, with particular attention at construction joints . D. Install separate flashings and corner protection stripping, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, where indicated to precede application of dampproofing. Comply with details shown and with manufacturer' s recommendations . Pay particular attention to requirements at building expansion joints, if any. IJ�3 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-3 2980 B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from one source and Aw, by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials . 1. 05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. B. Weather Limitations : Proceed with dampproofing only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements . C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces . Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has thoroughly cured. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: a. Hydrocide 700 Mastic; ChemRex, Inc. , Sonneborn Building Products Div. b. Karnak No. 920; Karnak Chemical Corporation. c. Koppers No. 484; Koppers Industries, Inc. d. Meadows Type 3 Trowel-on Grade; W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2 . 02 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING A. General : Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application. 1. Odor Elimination: For interior and concealed-in- wall uses, provide type of bituminous dampproofing material warranted by manufacturer to be substantially odor free after drying for 24 hours under normal conditions. B. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: Asphalt- based emulsions recommended by the manufacturer for BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-2 2980 SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1. Cold-applied, asphalt emulsion dampproofing. 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete foundation walls and concrete back-up for cavity walls . B. Section 03450 - Architectural Precast Concrete. C. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry. D. Section 07110 - Composite Sheet Waterproofing. E. Section 07146 - Cementitious Crystalline Waterproofing. F. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Perimeter or foundation wall insulation. 1. 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data for each type of product specified, including data substantiating that materials comply with requirements for each dampproofing material specified. Include recommended method of application, recommended primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and recommended protection course. 1. Certification by dampproofing manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) . 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced Installer who has completed bituminous dampproofing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-1 2980 B. Repair cracks and spalled areas, and patch holes . 1 . All cracks not subject to movement shall be routed out to a minimum width of 1 inch and patched with waterproofing. 2 . All cracks subject to movement shall be treated as indicated in specifications and on Drawings . 3 . All cracks with active leaks shall be sealed with waterproof plug. 4 . All honey combed or spalled concrete areas and holes shall be patched with waterproofing. Cut back concrete form ties and fill holes with waterproofing. C. Surface Wetdown: All surfaces shall be thoroughly saturated (using potable water) , and all free standing and excess water shall be removed before applying waterproofing. No water gloss shall be visible at the time of application. 3 . 03 INSTALLATION A. Mix and apply waterproofing materials in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations . B. Thoroughly mix waterproofing, electric drill and paddle mixer, leaving no lumps or unmixed materials . Do not use a concrete mixer. Add only enough water to reach the desired consistency. Do not exceed manufacturer' s recommendations . C. Apply waterproofing by brush or spray, in number of coats recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. D. Moisture cure waterproofing (if required by manufacturer' s installation instructions) in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations . END OF SECTION CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07146-4 2980 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Cementitious Crystalline Waterproofing: Provide manufacturer' s standard cementitious crystalline waterproofing product in slurry consistency, dry powder form, or mortar, as required by field conditions, and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Products : 1 . HEY'DI K-11; Tamms Industries Company. 2 . Hydrocap Crystalline Waterproofing System; Anti Hydro Company. 3 . Vandex Super; Vandex (USA) Inc. 4 . Xypex Concrete Waterproofing by Crystallization; Xypex Chemical Corporation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Inspect surfaces to receive waterproofing and verify the following: 1. They are free of ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, form release agents, paints, impregnations, all loose material, and foreign matter likely to affect the bond or performance of the waterproofing. 2 . That provisions for cants, coves, fillets, penetrations and construction joint strips are coordinated with concrete formwork. 3 . That provisions for expansion and control joints are consistent with specifications and drawings . 4. Surfaces are sufficiently rough to comply with the preparation requirements of this specification. 5 . That surfaces/substrates to receive a positive side application have completed a minimum 28 day curing period in order that drying shrinkage cracks have reached their maximum width. 6. That concrete is structurally sound, and all cracks have been repaired. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: All surfaces to which the cementitious crystalline waterproofing will be applied must be clean. All grease, oil, dust, laitance, paint, coatings, curing compounds, unsound and weak concrete and all other foreign materials must be completely removed. y CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07146-3 2980 B. Sample Application: Awk 1 . A sample application consisting of not less than 10 square feet shall be installed by the applicator in accordance with this section. The sample application shall be examined by the Architect and by a representative of the manufac- turer. Work shall not proceed until acceptance by Architect of sample application has been obtained. 2 . The sample application shall remain as a standard for all cementitious crystalline waterproofing on this project . 1. 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All waterproofing materials shall be delivered to the job site in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled with the manufacturer' s identification and printed instructions. All material shall be stored and handled in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer and the American Concrete Institute. Do not store in temperatures below 45 degrees F. or above 90 degrees F. Protect from freezing. 1 .07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Refer to the manufacturer's literature for physical or environmental limitations or contact the manufacturer directly. 1 . 08 WARRANTY A. The Applicator shall submit a written copy of manufacturer' s warranty as part of Applicator's written warranty to cover workmanship and materials . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following (no substitutions) : 1. Tamms Industries Company. 2 . Anti Hydro Company. 3 . Vandex (USA) Inc. 4 . Xypex Chemical Corporation. B. Associated products shall be manufactured or approved by the prime waterproofing manufacturer. CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07146-2 2980 SECTION 07146 CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Types of work specified in this section include: 1 . Cementitious crystalline waterproofing system, applied to the negative side of walls and floor construction. 2 . Crack repair and sealing of active leaks . 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 07111 - Composite Sheet Waterproofing. C. Section 07160 - Bituminous Dampproofing. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. E. Section 14240 - Hydraulic Elevators . 1. 03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Cementitious crystalline waterproofing system shall be a surface applied waterproofing compound, consisting of a combination of chemicals, cement and special treated aggregates which waterproof by non-soluble crystalline growth throughout the capillary voids in the concrete structure. 1. 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product specifications and application instructions for cementitious crystalline waterproofing. 1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation Qualifications: A firm specializing in the installation of cementitious crystalline waterproofing, with at least 5 years of successful experience in applications similar to the requirements AW for this project. CEMENTITIOUS CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07146-1 2980 H. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate rk with concealed panel-hanger clips and by blind nailing on backup strips, splined-connection strips, and similar associated trim and framing. Do not face nail unless otherwise indicated. I. Wood Storage Shelving: Complete the assembly of units and install in the areas indicated, including hardware and accessories as indicated. J. Complete the finishing work specified in this section to whatever extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. 3 . 03 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces . Touch-up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3 . 04 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, which will ensure that woodwork will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION �D ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-17 2980 tion only when everyone concerned agrees that required ambient conditions can be maintained. C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3 .02 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install architectural woodwork items plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions . Shim as required using concealed shims . Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 foot for plumb and level (including tops) ; and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces . C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts . D. Anchor casework to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates . Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinishing matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork, and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Cabinets : Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. F. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. G. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members . Cope at returns and miter at corners. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-16 2980 C. Provide interlocking wood cleats or metal clips for hanging flush panels . Provide accurate furring and shimming to ensure proper installation. 2 .14 FACTORY FINISHING A. Transparent Finish: Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section 1500 "Factory Finishing. " Prefinish architectural woodwork items indicated at factory or at woodworker' s shop. 1 . Items : a. Wood cabinets. b. Standing and running trim. c. Wood trim on plastic laminate clad cabinets and tops. d. Door frames. e. Wood veneer flush paneling. 2 . Transparent Finishing (refer to drawings for locations of natural and stained finishes) : Comply with requirements indicated for finish system, grade, stain, sheen, and effect . a. AWI Factory Finish: TR-6, catalyzed polyurethane. b. AWI Quality Grade: Premium. c. Color: Natural . d. Color: Stained; refer to Architect 's sample. Submit range from sample for Architect 's approval . d. Degree of Sheen: 40 Gloss Units, using 60 degree gloss meter (ASTM D523) . e. Fill (effect) : Semi-filled pores, no hand rubbing required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at project site prior to delivery of woodwork and review coordination and environmental controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in areas to receive work. Include in meeting the Contractor, Architect and other Owner Representatives (if any) ; Installers of woodwork, wet work such as plastering, other finishes, painting, mechanical work and electrical work; and firms or persons responsible for continued operation (whether temporary or permanent) of HVAC system as required to maintain temperature and humidity conditions. Proceed with woodwork installa- `�in3 ; ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-15 2980 high by length indicated, BHMA No. B84102, zinc- plated 12 gage steel . A** a. Knape & Vogt No. 87 or equal . Place standards at 24 inches on center maximum. 2 . Shelf Brackets : Size required to support shelving widths indicated, BHMA No . B84112, zinc-plated 12 gage steel . a. Knape & Vogt No. 187 or equal . D. Clothes Poles and Supports : Provide steel pipe or tubing cut to lengths required, with standard wrought steel flanges (one with open top) . 1 . Size: 1-5/16 inch O.D. and 0 .120 inch minimum wall thickness . a. Finish: Chrome plated, BHMA 652 . b. Knape & Vogt No. 770-5CHR or equal . 2 . Center Brackets : Combination shelf and closet pole support wrought steel with manufacturer' s standard enamel finish; complying with ANSI A156.16, Type B84051. a. Stanley No. 7046 or equal. b. Provide brackets at not more than 48 inches on centers or not more than 48 inches from wall shelf support . 2 . 12 DOOR FRAMES A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900B. B. Grade: Premium. C. Lumber Species: Maple, plain sawn. 2 .13 WOOD VENEER FLUSH PANELING A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500A. B. Flush paneling for transparent finish: 1 . AWI quality grade: Premium grade. 2 . Panel Product : 3/4 inch thick using fire- retardant particleboard core, UL Class A. 3 . Face Veneers : Plain sliced Select Maple, center balanced. 4 . Matching of adjacent pieces of veneer: Sequential book match. 5 . Panel face assembly: Center balanced match. 6 . Matching of adjacent panels : Sequence matched sets . 7 . Grain direction of panels and articulated joints: Refer to drawings. Alk ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-14 2980 G. Substrate: Medium density fiberboard, conforming to ANSI A208 .2 . 1 . Provide 5 mm "Systems" screws for attachment of hardware to case body and nylon inserts for attachment of hardware to doors . 2 .10 COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400C. B. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) complying with the following: 1 . AWI Quality Grade: Premium. 2 . Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface: High pressure decorative laminate. a. Provide colors and patterns selected by Architect . b. Grade: GP-50 (0 . 050 inch nominal thickness) . 3 . Core Material : Phenolic resin, medium-density fiberboard: a. Thickness : 1 inch, except where indicated otherwise. b. Density: 45 lbs . /cubic foot minimum. 4 . Edge Treatment: Lumber edge for transparent finish matching wood species and cut on cabinet surfaces . C. Type of Top: Granite, complying with the following: 1 . Granite Building Stone Standard: ASTM C 615. 2 . Association Standard: The National Building Granite Quarries Association's (NBGQA) "Specifications for Architectural Granite. " 3 . Finish: Polished. 4 . Thickness and Edge Detail : Refer to drawings . 2 .11 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING AND SHELVING HARDWARE A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 600 . 1 . Grade: Premium. B. Lumber Species : Plain sawn Maple, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building. C. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Related Supports : Provide standards and supports of type indicated which comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 1 . Vertical Slotted Type: Vertical slots spaced 2 000* inches on centers, 7/8 inch wide by 11/16 inch ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-13 2980 F. Provide dust panels of 1/4 inch (6 .4 mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers except where located directly under tops . G. Substrate for Panel Products : Medium density fiberboard, conforming to ANSI A208 . 2 . 1 . Provide 5 mm "Systems" screws for attachment of hardware to case body and nylon inserts for attachment of hardware to doors . 2 . 09 LAMINATE-CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400B Laminate Clad Cabinets . 1 . Grade: Premium. B. Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces : High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements : 1 . Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops : GP-50, 0 . 050-inch (1 .270-mm) nominal thickness . 2 . Vertical Surfaces: GP-50, 0 . 050-inch (1 .270-mm) nominal thickness. 3 . Edges : GP-50, 0 .050-inch (1 .270-mm) nominal thickness. 4 . Door and Draw Edges : 3 mm (0 .118 inches nominal thickness) rigid PVC hot-melt applied. a. Provide matching color to HPDL face. D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces : Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies : High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade GP-28 . 2 . Drawer Sides and Backs : Solid hardwood lumber, shop finished. 3 . Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood, shop finished. 4 . Loose (adjustable) Shelves: High pressure decorative laminate, Grade GP-50, on both faces and front and rear edges . E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. To be selected by the Architect. F. Provide dust panels of 1/4 inch (6 .4 mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers except where located directly under tops. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-12 2980 C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. D. Wood Species : White Maple, plain sawn. 2 . 07 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. 1 . Grade: Custom. B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. D. Wood Species : Any closed-grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard. 2 . 08 WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400A "Wood Cabinets" . 1 . Grade: Premium. B. Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: Maple, plain sawn. 1. Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. 2 . Matching of Veneer Leaves : Sequential book match. 3 . Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match. 4. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Center balanced match. D. Wood Species for Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Match species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. 1. Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies : Match species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. 2 . Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid hardwood lumber, same species indicated for exposed surfaces, shop finished. 3 . Drawer Bottoms : Hardwood plywood, same species indicated for exposed surfaces, shop finished. E. Provide AWI Grade AA lumber and panel products, with the additional requirement of compatibility of grain and color between veneer products and lumber products . ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-11 2980 C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove , raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick or less : 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) . 2 . Edges of rails and similar members more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm) . E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1 . Trial fit assemblies at the fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved shop drawings before disassembling for shipment . F. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items . Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings . Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water-resistant coating. G. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements of Section 08800 and of FGMA "Glazing Manual . " For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops . 2 . 06 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300 . 1 . Grade: Premium. B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-10 2980 2 . Satin Stainless Steel, Stainless-Steel Base: BHMA 630 . C. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer' s standard finish that complies with product class requirements of BHMA A156 . 9 . D. Clear, Tempered Float Glass for Doors : ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3 ; manufactured by horizontal (roller hearth) process, with exposed edges seamed before tempering, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . 04 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips : Fire- retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content . B. Screws : Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with ASME B18 . 6.1 for applicable requirements . 1 . For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. C. Nails : Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements . D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors . E. Hand Rail Brackets: Adjustable, two piece extruded aluminum type; "Rakks" hand rail brackets by Rangine Corporation, 114 Union Street, Millis, MA or equal 2 .05 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard and of the following grade: 1. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas . ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-9 2980 1 . Shelf Standards and Rests : Knape & Vogt No. 255/256 or equal . 2 . Vertical Slotted Shelf Standards and Brackets : Knape & Vogt No. 80/180 or equal . Place standards at 24 inches on center maximum. 3 . Extra Heavy Duty Shelf Standards and Brackets : Knape & Vogt No. 87/187 or equal . Place standards at 24 inches on center maximum. 4 . Drawer Slides (for pencil drawers and other shallow drawers at knee hole desks) : Accuride No. C2006 . 5 . Variable Height Keyboard Slides : Accuride No. 2009 . 6 . Drawer Slides (for desk and credenza box drawers, file drawers and heavy duty drawers) : Accuride No. C3037 . 7 . Drawer Slides (for heavy duty lateral file drawers, extra heavy load or wide drawers) : Accuride No. C4032 for drawers up to 40 inches wide and 150 pounds loading. 8 . Door Hinges (concealed type) : Blum Clip 170, self-closing; Julius Blum, Inc. , Stanley, NC. 9 . Door Hinges: 5 knuckle, hospital tipped non- removable knurled pin; Rockford Process Control, Inc. , Rockford, IL, or equal . 10 . Door and Drawer Pulls : EPCO MC-402-4, stainless steel . 11 . Drawer Rim Locks: Hafele No. 232 .04 . 6xx, nickel- plated, or equal . 12 . Door Rim Locks : Hafele No. 235 . 06 .6xx, nickel- plated, or equal . 13 . Elbow Catches : Ives No. 2 or equal . 14 . Wardrobe Hook: HEWI 520 .70 .1, or equal, color selected by Architect. 15 . Desk Grommets: Brushed chrome finish by Douglas Mockett Company or equal. 16. Extruded aluminum convector grilles shall be Tuttle and Bailey 4000 Series "AO" Architectural Style. Provide AA-M12C22A42/A44 anodic color coating as selected by Architect . 17 . Recessed sliding door hardware for cabinets. 18 . TV Mounting Turntable: Hafele No. 421 .98.729 . a. Provide for LDR, Post-Partum and Early Testing rooms of maternity. 19 . Medical Gas Cabinets : a. Door Slide - Accuride No. C-3832 . b. Gas Spring - Hines H9505-25, gas spring #25 . B. Exposed Hardware Finishes : For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated. 1 . Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-8 2980 5) Pyro-guard; Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. D. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve products identical to those tested for flame spread of 25 or less and for smoke developed of 25 or less per ASTM E84 by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less and 45-lb/cu. ft (720-kg/cu. m) density, comply with ANSI A208 .1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties : modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa) ; modulus of elasticity, 300, 000 psi (2000 MPa) ; internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa) ; and screw- holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf (1100 N) and 225 lbf (1000 N) respectively. 2 . For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches (20 to 32 mm) thick and 44-lb/cu. ft (705-kg/cu. m) density, comply with ANSI A208 .1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties : modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa) ; modulus of elasticity, 250, 000 psi (1700 MPa) ; linear expansion, 0 .50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf (1100 N) and 175 lbf (780 N) respectively. 3 . Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Duraflake FR by Willamette Industries, Inc. E. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve products identical to those tested for flame spread of 25 or less and for smoke developed of 200 or less per ASTM E84 by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Medite FR by Medite Corp. 2 .03 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. Provide the following hardware or equal: ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-7 2980 B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) : NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated. Plastic laminate colors and patterns shall be selected by the Architect from one or more of the following: 1 . Formica Corporation. 2 . Nevamar Corporation. 3 . Ralph Wilson Plastics Company. 4 . Pionite Decorative Laminates by Pioneer Plastics Corp. 5. Abet Laminati . C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement . 2 . 02 FIRE-RETARLANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire- retardant chemical formulations indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to produce products with fire-test-response characteristics specified. B. Fire-Retardant Chemicals : Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes . Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material . C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber: Comply with the following: 1 . Low-Hygroscopic Formulation: Interior Type A per AWPA C20 . 2 . Nonpressure-Treatment Formulation: Nontoxic, water-soluble product applied by dip, spray, roller, curtain coating, vacuum chamber, or soaking. 3 . Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. 4. Discard treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discolored, or otherwise damaged or defective material. 5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Low-Hygroscopic Formulation (Type A) : 1) D-Blaze; J. H. Baxter Co. 2) D-Blaze; Chemical Specialties, Inc. 3) Pyro-guard; Continental Wood Preservers, Inc. 4) Dricon; Hickson Corp. „W ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-6 2980 maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings . Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1 . Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings . 2 . Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements . Provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions . 1 .07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1 . Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2 . Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, formaldehyde-free, medium-density fiberboard. a. Product: Medite II by Medite Corporation. 3 . Particleboard: ANSI A208 .1, Type 2-M-2 made with phenol-formaldehyde resins. 4. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, exterior grade. 5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers : HPVA HP-1 made with phenol-formaldehyde resins . ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-5 2980 1 . Surface-Burning Characteristics : Not exceeding values indicated below, tested per ASTM E 84 for , standard time period (10 minutes) . a. Flame Spread: 25 . b. Smoke Developed: 25 . F. Mockup: Prior to fabricating or installing interior architectural woodwork, construct mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockup of the size indicated, using materials indicated for final unit of work, and complying with the following requirements . 1 . Locate mockup on site in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect . 2 . Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and time when fabrication of mockup will begin. 3 . Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and time when mockup will be installed. 4 . Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5 . Obtain Architect ' s acceptance of mockup before start of final unit of Work. 6 . Retain and maintain mockup during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. When directed, demolish and remove mockup from Project site. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings . " 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas . If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions. " 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations : Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is completed, and HVAC system is operating and will , ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-4 2980 F. Product certificates signed by woodwork fabricator certifying that products comply with specified requirements . G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. 1. Work in this section shall be performed by a firm licensed by the AWI Quality Certification Program. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for fabricating, finishing, and installing woodwork specified in this Section. C. Quality Standard: Comply with current edition of "Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standards" for specified grades of woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1 . Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or provide an AWI letter of licensing for the Project . Certification labels shall be applied to each item of work. D. Make wood paneling veneer lay-up available for examination by Architect for appearance characteristics before fabricating panels. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics : Provide materials with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify fire- retardant-treated material with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. III ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-3 2980 3 . Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. D. Submit samples for initial selection of the following in the form of manufacturer' s color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1 . Shop-applied transparent finishes . 2 . Shop-applied opaque finishes. 3 . Plastic laminates. E. Samples for verification of the following: 1 . Lumber with or for transparent finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) , for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2 . Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-finished woodwork. 3 . Wood-veneer-faced panel products, with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) , for each species and cut . Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish one-half of face as specified. a. Step finish materials on sample to show and clearly define each coat . b. Provide separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. 4 . Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels and 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber, for each finish system and color, with one-half of exposed surface finished. 5 . Laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) , for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. 6 . Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) , for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. 7 . Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 8 . Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit for each type and finish. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-2 2980 SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1 . Interior standing and running trim. 2 . Wood cabinets (casework) . 3 . Laminate-clad cabinets (plastic-covered casework) . 4. Countertops . 5 . Flush wood paneling. 6. Interior frames and jambs . 7 . Shop finishing of woodwork. 8 . Closet and utility shelving. 9 . Reception desks and Nurses ' stations. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork. B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field finishing of installed architectural woodwork 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data for each type of product and process specified and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. B. Submit fire-retardant-treatment data for material treated to reduce combustibility. Include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. C. Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1 . Show details full size. 2 . Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcing specified in other Sections. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400-1 2980 top story. Where firestopping is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2 inch nominal (38 mm actual) thickness lumber of same width as framing members. 3 . 05 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS A. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial, " for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1 . Comply with "Code Plus" provisions of above- referenced guide. B. Fastening Methods : Fasten panels as indicated below: 1 . Plywood Backing Panels : Nail or screw to supports . END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-9 2980 F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials . Make tight connections between members . Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. G. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity. H. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. 3 . 02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 3 . 03 WOOD FURRING A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings . Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. 3 . 04 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction, " unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer' s written instructions . C. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated. D. Do not splice structural members between supports. E. Firestop concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-8 2980 1 . Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A153 or of Type 304 stainless steel . 2 . Where rough carpentry is preservative treated lumber or plywood, provide fasteners with a hot- dip zinc coating per ASTM A153 or Type 304 stainless steel . B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples : FS FF-N-105. C. Power-Driven Fasteners : CABO NER-272 . D. Wood Screws: ASME B18 . 6 .1 . E. Lag Bolts : ASME B18 .2 .1 . (ASME B18 .2 .3 .8M) F. Bolts : Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM F568, Property Class 4 . 6) ; with ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement . B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit . Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners. 2 . Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3 . "Table 2305.2--Fastening Schedule" of the BOCA National Building Code. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-7 2980 1 . Species and Grade: As indicated above for light framing construction of same type. Al%k 2 . 06 BOARDS A. Exposed Boards : Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following: 1 . Moisture Content : 15 percent maximum. 2 . Species and Grade: Southern pine, C Finish per SPIB rules . B. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and of following species and grade: 1 . Species and Grade: Mixed southern pine, No. 2 per SPIB rules . 2 . 07 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members . B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture Content : 15 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment . D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC' s NGRs of any species . For board-size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2 grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species . 2 . 08 STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS FOR BACKING A. Plywood Backing Panels : For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch (11 . 9 mm) thick. 2 . 09 FASTENERS A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-6 2980 1 . Research or Evaluation Reports : Provide fire- retardant-treated wood acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which a current model code research or evaluation report exists that evidences compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood for application indicated. B. Interior Type A: For interior locations, use chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation: 1 . Bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacities are not reduced below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions when tested by a qualified independent testing agency. 2 . No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to treatment . 3 . Contact with treated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners . 4 . Dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent for plywood and 19 percent for lumber. Inspect each piece of lumber and plywood after drying; do not use twisted, warped, bowed or otherwise damaged or defective wood. 5 . Product : "Dricon" fire retardant treatment by Hickson Corporation (no substitutions) . C. Exterior Type: Use for exterior locations and where indicated; and at all roof blocking. D. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces . 2 . 05 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule (NGR) provisions of the inspection agency indicated. B. Light framing: Provide framing of the following grade and species : 1. Grade: Construction. 2 . Species : Douglas fir-larch north; NLGA. or Southern pine; SPIB. C. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected from lumber of species and grade indicated below for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics that would impair finish appearance. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5 2980 1 . Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2 inch nominal (38 mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . 03 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood) . Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC ' s Board of Review. 1 . Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. B. Pressure treat above ground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0 .25 lb/cu. ft . (4 .0 kg/cu. m) . After treatment, dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1 . Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2 . Wood sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. C. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0 .40 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m) . D. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces . Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2 .04 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood) . Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc. ; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 2980 ** PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials : a. Baxter: J. H. Baxter Co. b. Chemical Specialties, Inc. c. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc. d. Hickson Corporation. e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. f. Osmose Wood Preserving, Inc. 2 . Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, Interior Type A: a. Baxter: J. H. Baxter Co. b. Chemical Specialties, Inc. c. Continental Wood Preservers, Inc. d. Hickson Corporation. e. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. 3 . Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, Exterior Type: a. American Wood Treaters, Inc. b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc . 2 . 02 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards : Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard, " and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC 's Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2 . NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian) . 3 . RIS - Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. C. Grade Stamps : Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. D. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 2980 C. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer ' s instructions for handling, , storing, installing, and finishing treated materials : 1 . For each type of preservative-treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards . 2 . For waterborne-treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site. 3 . For fire-retardant-treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacities of treated materials . D. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-retardant- treated wood products with requirements indicated. E. Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment . F. Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence the following products ' compliance with building code in effect for Project . 1 . Power-driven fasteners . 2 . Fire-retardant-treated wood. 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Fire-Retardant- Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant- treated wood product from one source and by ,a single producer. 1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces . Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings . 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. A ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 2980 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Framing with dimension lumber. 2 . Wood furring, grounds, hailers, blocking, and sleepers . 3 . Subflooring. 4 . Underlayment . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls . B. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork. C. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing. D. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim. E. Section 09215 - Veneer Plaster. F. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 1 . 03 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1. 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product Data for the following products: 1. Underlayment. 2 . Construction adhesives. B. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1 2980 3 .04 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES SCHEDULE A. Provide the following expansion joint covers or equal : Location Manufacturer Product Joint Number Width Floor, Construction GFR 300 3 inches fire-rated Specialties Walls, Construction GFW 300 3 inches fire-rated Specialties Ceiling, Construction FCS 300 3 inches fire-rated Specialties Floor to wall, Construction GFRW 300 3 inches fire rated Specialties Corner/wall to Construction GFWC 300 3 inches ceiling, fire Specialties rated Exterior Construction SF 300 3 inches vertical Specialties Roof expansion Construction SRJW 400 4 inches joint cover Specialties END OF SECTION 00%, EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810-8 2980 C. Joinery and Continuity: Maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with end joints held to a minimum and metal members aligned mechanically using splice joints . Cut and fit ends to produce joints that will accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames . Adhere flexible filler materials (if any) to frames with adhesive or pressure sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer. D. Installation of Extruded Preformed Seals : Install seals to comply with manufacturer' s instructions and with minimum number of end joints. For straight sections provide preformed seals in continuous lengths . Vulcanize or heat-seal all field splice joints in preformed seal material to provide watertight joints using manufacturer' s recommended procedures . Apply manufacturer's approved adhesive, epoxy, or lubricant-adhesive to both frame interfaces prior to installing preformed seal . Seal transitions in accordance with manufacturer's instructions . E. Installation of Elastomeric Sealant Joint Assemblies : Seal all end joints without continuous runs and joints at transitions in accordance with manufacturer' s directions to provide a watertight installation. F. Installation of Seismic Seals : Install interior seals in continuous lengths; vulcanize or heat-seal all field splice joints in interior seal material to provide watertight joints using manufacturer' s recommended procedures . Install exterior flexible seal in standard lengths. Seal transitions and butt joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Installation of Fire Barriers : Install fire barriers in accordance with federal, state, and local building codes using manufacturer' s recommended procedures . Install transition and end joints to provide continuous fire resistance and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions . 3 .03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Do not remove strippable protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's instructions. EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810-7 2980 exposed surfaces with protective covering before shipment . B. Aluminum Finishes : 1 . Clear Anodized Finish: AA-C22A41; medium matte etched finish with 0 .7-mil minimum thick anodic coating. 2 . Factory Primed Concealed Surfaces: Protect concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete and masonry surfaces when installed by applying a shop coat of manufacturers ' standard primer to contact surfaces . Provide minimum dry film thickness of 2 . 0 mils . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of expansion joint cover assemblies to be embedded in concrete or have recesses formed into edges of concrete slab for later placement and grouting-in of frames . 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing expansion joint cover assemblies to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in expansion shields for masonry and concrete where anchoring members are not embedded in concrete. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and provide for secure attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies. B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement : Perform all cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of expansion joint covers . Install joint cover assemblies in true alignment and proper relationship to expansion joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. Allow adequate free movement for thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling. Set floor covers at elevations to be flush with adjacent finished floor materials. Locate wall, ceiling, roof and soffit covers in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. Securely attach in place with all required accessories . Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches from each end and not more than 24 inches on centers . EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810-6 2980 7 . Wall and Ceiling Joint Cover Assemblies : ** a. Fixed Metal Cover Plates : Provide on one side of the joint a concealed, continuously anchored frame fastened to wall, ceiling, or soffit only on one side of joint . Extend cover to lap each side of joint and to permit free movement on one side. Attach cover to frame with cover in close contact with adjacent finish surfaces . b. Floating Metal Cover Plates : Secure the cover plate in or on top of frames in such a manner as to have free movement on both sides . c. Flexible Filler: Secure the approved flexible filler between frames in such a manner that it will compress and expand. C. Provide manufacturer's continuous standard flexible vinyl moisture seals for joint covers in exterior and on interior of exterior walls and at other locations indicated. D. Joint Cover Assembly with Preformed Seal : Provide joint cover assemblies consisting of continuously anchored aluminum extrusions and continuous extruded preformed seals of profile indicated or required to suit types of installation conditions shown. Furnish extrusions designed for embedment in concrete and mechanical retention of lugs of field-installed extruded preformed seals . Vulcanize or heat-seal splices (if any) to ensure hermetic joint condition. 1. Include extruded aluminum cover plate with fluted surface; fasten plate to one side of joint and extend plate to lap each side of joint, with free movement and with cover in close contact with adjacent contact surfaces. E. Joint Cover Assembly with Elastomeric Sealant : Provide continuous cover joint assemblies consisting of elastomeric sealant factory-bonded to extruded aluminum frames of profile indicated or required to suit types of installation conditions shown. Provide frames for floor joints with means for embedment and anchorage to concrete without use of exposed fasteners and that will result in exposed surfaces of sealant and aluminum frames finishing flush with adjacent finished floor surface without exposing anchors . 2 .04 METAL FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products are fabricated. Protect finishes on EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810-5 2980 changes directions or abuts other materials . Include closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint cover assemblies . B. Metal Joint Cover Assemblies : Provide continuous extruded metal frames of profile indicated with seating surface and raised floor rim to accommodate flooring and concealed bolt and steel anchors for embedment in concrete. Provide assemblies formed to receive cover plates of design indicated and to receive filler materials (if any) between raised rim of frame and edge of plate. Furnish depth and configuration to suit type of construction and to produce a continuous flush wearing surface with adjoining finish floor surface. 1. Floor-to-Floor Joints : a. Partially Concealed Cover: Provide one frame on each side of joint, designed to cover floor plate and filler b. Exposed Cover: Provide one frame on each side of joint, designed to support floor plate and filler. 2 . Flat Cover Plates : Provide cover plates of profile and wearing surface indicated. Extent flat plates to lap each side of joint . If required, furnish abrasive-resistant flexible filler for space between edge of cover plate and raised rim of frame. a. Fixed Cover Plates : Attach one side of the cover plate to a frame or finished wearing surface with other side resting on other frame or finished surface in such a manner to allow free movement. b. Floating Cover Plates: Secure the cover plate in or on top of frames in such a manner as to have free movement on both sides. 3 . Floor Cover Plate Wearing Surfaces : Provide cover plates with the following type of wearing surface. a. Recessed to receive full thickness of flooring material. 4. Provide manufacturer's continuous standard flexible vinyl moisture seals under covers at locations indicated. 5. Floor-to-Wall Joints: Provide one frame on floor side of joint only. Provide wall side frame where required by manufacturer's design. 6. Angle Cover Plates : Attach angle cover plates for floor-to-wall joints to wall with countersunk, flathead exposed fasteners secured to drilled-in- place anchor shields, unless otherwise indicated, at spacing recommended by joint cover manufacturer. EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810-4 2980 B. Extruded Preformed Seals : Single or multi-layered rubber extrusions as classified under ASTM D2000, designed with or without continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles and formed to fit compatible frames, in color indicated, or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard colors . C. Elastomeric Sealant : Manufacturer' s standard elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C920, Use T, factory-formed and -bonded to metal frames or anchor members; in color indicated, or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard colors. 1 . Joints Up to 2 Inches Wide: Withstand plus or minus 35 percent movement of the joint width without failure. 2 . Joints 2 Inches to 4 Inches Wide: Withstand plus or minus 50 percent movement of the joint width without failure. D. Seismic Seals : Typically two single layered rubber extrusions, one interior and one exterior, as classified under ASTM D2000, retained in a set of compatible frames, in color indicated, or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors . E. Fire Barriers : Design for indicated or required dynamic structural movement without material degradation or fatigue. Tested in maximum joint width condition with a field splice as a component of an expansion joint cover in accordance with ANSI/UL 263, NFPA 251, U.B.C. 43-1, or ASTM E119 and E814 including hose stream test at full-rated period by a nationally recognized testing and inspecting organization or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible vapor seals and filler materials, drain tubes, adhesive, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations. 2 .03 FABRICATION A. Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Select units comparable to those indicated or required to accommodate joint size, variations in adjacent surfaces, and structural movement. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize number of end joints. Provide hairline mitered corners where joint EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810-3 2980 work and finishes . Include description of materials and finishes . D. Submit samples for each type of metal finish indicated on metal of same thickness and alloy to be used in work. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, include 2 or more units in each set of samples showing limits of such variations . 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Instructions : In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for all phases of work, including preparation of substrate, applying materials, and protection of installed units . B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain expansion joint cover assemblies from one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire Performance Characteristics : Where indicated, provide expansion joint cover assemblies identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ANSI/UL 263, NFPA 251, U.B.C. 43-1, or ASTM E119 and E814 including hose stream test at full- rated period by a nationally recognized testing and inspecting organization or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Fire Rating: Not less than the rating of adjacent construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or equal: 1. Balco/Metalines, Inc. 2 . Construction Specialties, Inc. 3 . MM Systems Corporation. 2 .02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B209, alloy 6061-T6, sheet and plate. 1 . Protect aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious materials with zinc chromate primer or chromate conversion coating. EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810-2 2980 SECTION 05810 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Floor expansion joint cover assemblies . 2 . Wall expansion joint cover assemblies . 3 . Ceiling expansion joint cover assemblies . 4 . Fire-rated expansion joint cover assemblies . 5 . Seismic expansion joint cover assemblies. 6 . Fire barriers. 7 . Exterior vertical expansion joint cover. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry. C. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers : Elastomeric sealants and compression seals without metal frames . E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 1. 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data in form of manufacturers product specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each type of expansion joint cover assembly indicated. B. Submit material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-rated expansion joint assemblies with requirements indicated. C. Submit shop drawings showing full extent of expansion joint cover assemblies; include large-scale details indicating profiles of each type of expansion joint cover assembly, splice joints between sections, joinery with other types, special end conditions, anchorages, fasteners, and relationship to adjoining EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810-1 2980 accommodate thermal movement . Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate joint within 6 inches of post . 3 . 04 INSTALLATION OF GLASS PANELS A. Glass-Supported Railing Systems : Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer' s instructions to listed tolerances, beginning with attachment of base channel to building structure, followed by insertion and connection of factory-fabricated and -assembled glass panels . 3 .05 ADJUSTING A. Clean the following metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, following by rinsing with clean water. 1 . Aluminum. 3 . 06 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during construction period by use of temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units . END OF SECTION 4101 ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-9 2980 Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class II Architectural, clear film thicker than 0 .4 mil) . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints . B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement : Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of handrails and railings . Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. 1 . Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2 . Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 12 feet. 3 . Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet . 3 .03 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: Use manufacturer's standard mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic filler cement colored to match finish of handrails and railing systems. B. Expansion Joints : Install expansion joints at locations not further apart than required to ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-8 2980 thicknesses. Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2 . 07 GLASS PANEL FABRICATION A. Glass Panels : Cut tempered glass to final size and shape prior to heat treatment; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on glass. Provide thickness indicated but not less than that required to support structural loads . 1. Factory-bond glass to aluminum base and top rail channels in railing manufacturer's plant using glazing cement to comply with manufacturer's specifications. 2 . 08 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for . recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment . C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are not acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast . 2 . 09 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Mechanical Finish: AA-M3x (Mechanical Finish: as specified) sand handrail, top rails, and intermediate rails in one direction only, parallel to length of handrail or railing, with #120 and #320 grit. After installation, polish top rail and handrails with No. 0 steel wool immersed in paste wax then rubbed to a luster with soft dry cloth. C. Class II Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-7 2980 throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components . E. Nonwelded Connections : Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connection of members by means of railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints . 1 . Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this represents manufacturer ' s standard splicing method. F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors : Provide manufacturer' s standard brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for connection of handrail and railing members to other construction. G. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges . H. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. I. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items . J. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. K. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members by use of manufacturer' s standard prefabricated end fittings . L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of the railing and wall is 1/4 inch or less. M. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at the edge of open-sided floors and platforms . Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated for connection to, and centered between, each railing post. N. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-6 2980 2 . 05 FASTENERS A. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railing to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings. 1 . For aluminum railings provide fasteners fabricated from type 304 stainless steel . B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components : Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1 . Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing components and for their attachment to other work, except where otherwise indicated. 2 . Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . 06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Preassemble railing systems in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations . Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows : 1. By insertion of prefabricated elbow fittings. 2 . By radius bends of radius indicated. 3 . By mitering at elbow bends. 4 . By bending. 5. By any method indicated above, applicable to change of direction involved. D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of member ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-5 2980 pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of the alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. 1 . Extruded Bar and Shapes: ASTM B221, 6063-T5/T52 . 2 . Extruded Pipe and Tube: ASTM B429, 6063-T5/T52 . 3 . Drawn Seamless Tube: ASTM B483, 6063-T832 . 4 . Plate and Sheet : ASTM B209, 6061-T6. 5 . Die and Hand Forgings : ASTM B247, 6061-T6 . 6. Castings: ASTM B26, 356-T6. 2 . 03 GLASS PRODUCTS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Safety Glass Standard: Provide safety glass complying with ANSI 297 .1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials . 1 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Tempered Glass : Provide fully tempered safety glass complying with ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered) , Condition A (uncoated) , Type 1 (transparent glass, flat) , Quality q3 (glazing select) , class, thickness, and manufacturing process as indicated below: 1 . Clear Glass : Class 1 (clear) . 2 . Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 .0 mm) . 3 . Manufacturing Process : Manufacture fully tempered glass as follows : 4 . By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion parallel with bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. C. Glazing Cement: Provide nonshrinking organic cement designed for curing by passing an electric current through metal subrail holding glass panel, as standard with manufacturer. 2 . 04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Wood Handrails and Caps: Hardwood handrail and cap, Maple; bonded to aluminum subrail; with manufacturer' s standard transparent finish, subject to approval of the Architect. ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-4 2980 C. Engineer Qualifications : Professional engineer * legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated for handrails and railings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. 1 . 06 STORAGE A. Store handrails and railing systems in clean, dry location, away from uncured concrete and masonry, protected against damage of any kind. Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting; allow for air circulation inside the covering. 1. 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS B. Field Measurements : Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings . Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements . Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide handrails and railing systems of one of the following: 1. Glass-Supported Railing Systems: a. Blum: Julius Blum & Co. , Inc. b. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh. C. Livers Bronze Company, Inc. d. Newman Brothers, Inc. 2 .02 METALS A. Provide metal forms and types that comply with requirements of referenced standards and that are free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit . Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting 4G3 ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-3 2980 B. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railings including AVk plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. 1 . Where installed products are indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer' s color charts showing full range of colors available for those units with factory-applied color finishes . D. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components indicated below that are of the same thickness and metal indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 1 . Submit 6 inch long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member including handrails, top rails, posts, balusters . 2 . Fittings and brackets . E. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of railing components and systems with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products . F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material from a single manufacturer. B. Engineering Responsibility: Engineer handrails and railing systems by qualified professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located. ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-2 2980 SECTION 05720 ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Glass-supported ornamental railing and guard rail systems . 1. 02 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASTM E985 for railing-related terms apply to this section. 1 .03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1 . For aluminum: AA "Specifications for Aluminum Structures . " 2 . For fully tempered glass in glass-supported railing systems use a safety factor of 4 . 0 applied to applicable modulus of rupture listed under "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12 "Structural Properties of Glass . " B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance based on the following: 1. Structural computations. C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer' s product data for each type of product specified. ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05720-1 2980 finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads . Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows : 1 . Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt . 2 . For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. 3 . For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads . 4 . For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed anchors using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads . 3 . 06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Section 09900 . B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780 . END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-22 2980 3 . 04 INSTALLATION OF METAL BAR GRATINGS `w A. Install gratings to comply with recommendations of NAAMM grating standard referenced under Part 2 that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details . B. Secure removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated, or if not indicated as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. C. Attach toe plates to gratings by welding, at locations indicated. 3 . 05 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints . Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings . Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows : 1 . Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts and fill annular space between post and concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer' s directions . a. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement . b. Cover anchorage joint with a round steel flange attached to post as follows : 1) Welded to post after placement of anchoring material . 2 . Anchor posts to steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to steel supporting members. 3 . Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts . 4. Anchor rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges welded to rail ends and bolted to structural steel members, unless otherwise indicated. B. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings . Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-21 2980 elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels . '"' C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints . Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations . Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections . E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals . 2 . Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3 . Remove welding flux immediately. 4 . At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent . 3 .03 SETTING LOOSE PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces . Clean bottom surface of bearing plates . B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices . After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use metallic nonshrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonmetallic nonshrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-20 2980 SSPC-PAL "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. a. Stripe paint all edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges . 2 . Shop Priming Galvanized Metals : Within 12 hours after galvanizing ferrous metals, apply epoxy primer at 2 . 5 to 3 . 0 mils DFT, shop applied by the galvanizer ( "Primergaly" by Duncan Galvanizing or equal) . 3 . Shop Finishing: a. For galvanized metal items indicated to be shop finished, apply epoxy primer specified above and apply top coat of aliphatic urethane at 2 .5 to 3 . 0 mils DFT, shop applied by the galvanizer ( "Colorgaly" by Duncan Galvanizing or equal) . b. For non-galvanized metal items indicated to be shop finished, shop primer specified above and apply top coat of paint finish specified in Section 09900 . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. B. Center nosings on tread widths with noses flush with riser faces and tread surfaces . C. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry. 3 .02 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-19 2980 2 . Railings may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated fittings . 3 . Connect railing posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2 .15 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes . B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2 .16 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize all ferrous metal items exposed to the weather or on the exterior of the building using an enhanced galvanizing process including state of the art Quality Assurance/Quality Control methods . The hot-dip galvanized coating shall consist of zinc and other metals ( "Deltagaly" by Duncan Galvanizing or equal) . Use the "dry kettle" process to prevent flux inclusions or entrapment . Use of a flux blanket on the surface of the galvanizing bath is not acceptable. Provide hot-dip galvanized coating for those items indicated or specified to be galvanized, as follows : 1 . ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2 . ASTM A123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0 . 0299 inch thick and heavier. 3 . ASTM A386 for galvanizing assembled steel products. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications : 1 . Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) : SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning. " 2 . Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A) : SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning. " C. Shop Priming and Shop Finishing: 1 . Shop Priming Non-Galvanized Metals: Apply shop primer to all surfaces of metal fabrication items except those which are indicated to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Comply with requirements of METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-18 2980 1 . NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM "Metal Stair Manual" for class of stair designated, except where more stringent requirements are indicated: a. Commercial class, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs to accommodate slopes to drain in finished traffic surfaces . B. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, or plates, or a combination thereof, as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers . Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated. Bolt or weld headers to strings, newels, and framing members to strings and headers; fabricate and join so that bolts, if used, do not appear on finish surfaces. 1. Where masonry walls support steel stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erection of steel stair components before installation of masonry. C. Metal Pan Risers, Subtreads, and Subplatforms : Shape metal pans for risers and subtreads to conform to configuration shown. Provide thicknesses of structural steel sheet for metal pans indicated, but not less than that required, to support total design loading. 1 . Form metal pans of uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. 2 . Directly weld risers and subtreads to stringers; locate welds on side of metal pans to be concealed by concrete fill . 3 . Attach risers and subtreads to stringers by means of brackets made of steel angles or bars . Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting or bolting. 4. Provide subplatforms of configuration and construction indicated; if not indicated, of same metal as risers and subtreads, in thicknesses required to support design loading. Attach subplatform to platform framing members with welds . a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with smooth soffits. D. Stair Railings and Handrails : Comply with applicable requirements specified elsewhere in this section for steel pipe railings and handrails, and as follows: 1. Fabricate newels of steel tubing and provide newel caps of gray-iron castings, as shown. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-17 2980 G. Toe Boards : Unless otherwise indicated, provide toe „% boards at railings around openings and at the edge of open-sided floors and platforms . Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated, or if not indicated, use 4 inches high by 1/8 inch steel plate welded to, and centered between, each railing post . H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors : Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. 1. For railing posts set in concrete, fabricate sleeves from steel pipe not less than 6 inches long and with an inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of post, with steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve. I. Fillers : Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. J. For exterior steel railings and handrails formed from steel pipe with galvanized finish, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components . K. For interior steel railings formed from steel pipe with black finish, provide non-galvanized ferrous metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and concrete construction. 2 .14 STEEL FRAMED STAIRS A. Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated. Join pieces together by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, columns, railings, newels, balusters, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary for the support of stairs and platforms, and as required to anchor and contain the stairs on the supporting structure. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-16 2980 1 . Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. I. Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide metal bar gratings by one of the following: 1 . Alabama Metal Industries Corp. 2 . Blaw-Knox Grating Div. , Blaw-Knox Corp. 3 . IKG Industries 4 . Klemp Corp. 5 . Ohio Gratings, Inc. 6 . Reliance Steel Products, Inc . 7 . Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc. 2 .13 STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt- welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld all around. C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows : 1. By insertion of prefabricated elbow fittings . 2 . By radius bends of radius indicated. 3 . By mitering at elbow bends . 4 . By bending. 5. By any method indicated above, applicable to change of direction involved. D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross- section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. F. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16 inch thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings, except where clearance of end of pipe and adjoining wall surface is 1/4 inch or less . METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-15 2980 2 . 12 METAL BAR GRATINGS A. Produce metal bar gratings of description indicated per NAAMM marking system that comply with the following: 1 . Metal Bar Grating Standard "Standard Specifications for Metal Bar Grating and Metal Bar Grating Treads" published in ANSI/NAAMM A202 . 1 "Metal Bar Grating Manual . " B. Fabricate welded steel gratings to comply with requirements indicated below: 1 . Mark/Size: W-15-4 (welded with bearing bars 15/16 inch o.c. and cross bars 4 inches o.c. ) /bearing bar sizes as indicated. C. Traffic Surface for Steel Bar Gratings : As follows : 1 . Applied abrasive finish consisting of aluminum oxide aggregate in an epoxy resin adhesive. D. Steel Finish: As follows : 1 . Shop prime paint applied in accordance with manufacturer' s standard practice. 2 . Hot-dip galvanize with a coating weight of not less than 1 . 8 oz . per square foot of coated surface and epoxy prime paint . E. Fabricate removable grating sections with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated, or if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer, for attachment to supports. 1 . Provide not less than 4 saddle clips for each grating section composed of rectangular bearing bars 3/16 inch or less in thickness and spaced not less than 15/16 inch o.c. , with each clip designed and fabricated to fit over 2 bearing bars . 2 . Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for each clip required. F. Attach toe plates to grating by welding, unless otherwise indicated. 1 . Toe plate height: 4 inches, unless a greater height indicated. G. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange layout of cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings. H. Edge band openings in grating that interrupt 4 or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-14 2980 1 . Hot-dip galvanize and prime paint steel trim units to be installed in exterior walls; prime paint all other units . 2 .10 SHELF AND RELIEVING ANGLES A. Provide structural steel shelf and relieving angles of sizes indicated for attachment to concrete framing. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4 inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and not more than 24 inches on center. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets with anchors, to support shelf/relieving angles from back-up masonry and concrete. Align expansion joints in angles with indicated expansion joints in cavity wall exterior wythe. C. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, for attachment of shelf angles to cast-in- place concrete. D. Hot-dip galvanize shelf and relieving angles . 2 .11 STRUCTURAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES A. Fabricate steel door frames from structural shapes and bars of size and to dimensions indicated, fully welded together, with 5/8 inch by 1-1/2 inch steel bar stops, unless otherwise indicated. Plug weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints . Secure removable stops to frame with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced at not more than 10 inches on centers . Reinforce frames and drill and tap as required to accept finish hardware. B. Provide steel strap anchors for securing door frames into adjoining concrete or masonry, using 1/8 inch by 2 inch straps of the length required for a minimum 8 inch embedment, unless otherwise indicated. weld anchors to frame jambs no more than 12 inches from both bottom and head of frame and space anchors not more than 30 inches apart . C. Extend bottom of frames to floor elevation indicated with steel angle clips welded to frames for anchoring frame to floor with expansion shields and bolts . D. Hot-dip galvanize steel door frames to be installed at exterior locations; prime paint all other units . METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-13 2980 D. Hot-dip galvanize loose steel lintels . 2 . 08 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. Miscellaneous framing and support items include but are not limited to the following: 1 . Steel angle sill support at elevator doorways . 2 . Channel door frames . 3 . Elevator hoist beams and framing. B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports . Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items . C. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. 1 . Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches on centers and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inches by 8 inches long. D. Engineereed Framing System: Provide "Unistrut P1001" channels with accessories as manufactured by Unistrut Corporation or "Power Strut PS200-2T3" as manufactured by Elcen or equal . Provide framing members at 24 inches on centers to support equipment indicated. E. Hot-dip galvanize and prime paint units to be installed in exterior walls; prime paint all other units. 2 . 09 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-12 2980 6 . Wooster Products Inc. C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with the manufacturer. D. Apply black asphaltic coating to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of cast-iron units set into concrete. E. Provide a fluted or cross-hatched surfaces . 2 . 06 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. 1 . Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication. 2 . 07 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated, except as follows: 1 . All lintels indicated to be a part of structural metal framing. 2 . Over metal door bucks in interior partitions with openings less than 3 feet 0 inches. 3 . Where concrete or reinforced masonry block lintels are indicated. B. Weld adjoining members together where two or more lintels are placed side by side. Drill and tap lintels to receive other work where required. Provide not less than 8 inch bearing at each side of opening. C. Provide lintels in accordance with the following schedule (one angle for each 4 inch thickness of masonry. ) 1. For openings up to 3 feet 0 inches: 3-1/2 by 3 by 1/4 inch angle with 3-1/2 inch leg vertical. 2 . For openings 3 feet 0 inches to 4 feet 6 inches: 4 by 3-1/2 by 5/16 inch angle with 4 inch leg vertical. 3 . For openings 4 feet 6 inches to 6 feet 0 inches: 5 by 3-1/2 by 5/16 inch angle with 5 inch leg vertical. 4. For openings 6 feet 0 inches to 8 feet 0 inches: 6 by 3-1/2 by 3/8 inch angle with 6 inch leg vertical. LJ . METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-11 2980 B. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces . C. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 5 feet on center by means of welded or bolted steel brackets. 1 . Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline of ladder rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7 inches . 2 . Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose-neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access . D. Provide non-slip surface on top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout . E. Alternating Tread Stairs : Provide alternating tread stairs where indicated. Fabricate of open type construction with structural steel channel or steel plate stringers, pipe handrails, and open steel treads . Provide all necessary brackets and fittings for installation. Stair shall be 68 degree angle, Fixed Alternating Tread Stair as manufactured by Lapeyre Stair or equal . F. Hot-dip galvanize and prime paint all exterior ladders, brackets and fasteners . 2 .05 CAST NOSINGS A. Fabricate units of material, sizes, and configurations indicated. If not indicated, provide cast-iron units with integral abrasive finish. Furnish in lengths as required to accurately fit each opening or conditions . 1. Cast units with an integral abrasive grit consisting of aluminum oxide, silicone carbide, or a combination of both. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or equal: 1. American Abrasive Metals Co. 2 . American Mason Safety Tread Co. 3 . American Safety Tread Co. , Inc. 4. Armstrong Products, Inc. 5. Safe-T-Metal Co. , Inc. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-10 2980 screlts and bolts . Locate joints where least conspicuous . F. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with `supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for inte ded use. G. Shop ' ssembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest exte it possible to minimize field splicing and ass e ly. Disassemble units only as necessary for ship 'ing and handling limitations . Use connections that intain structural value of joined pieces . Clea ly mark units for reassembly and coordinated inst lation. H. Cut, einforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as i icated to receive finish hardware and similar item !. I. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a mannEr to exclude water or provide weep holes where wate ', may accumulate. 2 . 03 ROUG '. HARDWARE A. Furn' h bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plat , anchors, hangers, dowels and other misc laneous steel and iron shapes as required for frami g and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or secu ng woodwork to concrete or other structures. Stra' " ht bolts and other stock rough hardware items are ecified in Division 6 sections . B. Fabr' ate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions requ' ' ed. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts hich bear on wood structural connections; else ere, furnish steel washers. 2 .04 STEE LADDERS A. Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dime ions, spacings, details and anchorages as c indi ted. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14 .3 . 1. S 'derails: Provide 1/2 inch by 2-1/2 inch c ntinuous structural steel flat bar side rails w th eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart . 2 . B r Rungs : Provide 3/4 inch diameter solid structural steel bar rungs, spaced 12 inches on c nter. q4l METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-9 2980 2 .02 FABRICATION A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support . Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. 1 . Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Form bent- metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 2 . Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs . 3 . Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces . C. Thermal Movement : Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) , in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies (including handrails and railings) to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners . Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss . 1 . Temperature Change (Range) : 120 degrees F (67 degrees C) , ambient; 180 degrees F (100 degrees C) , material surfaces. D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals . 2 . Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3 . Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent . E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated Phillips flathead (countersunk) A METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-8 2980 8 . fm apde xy Anchors : Epoxy complying with ASTM C881, **, e IV, Grade 3 epoxy; and machine bolts lying with Federal Specification FF-B-575, 5 . Product : "Epcon System" by ITW Ramset/Red Head or equal . 9 . wer Driven Fasteners: Federal Specification -P-395 or Federal Specification GGG-D-777 . Use en permitted by ANSI A10 .3 . Follow safety p 'ovisions of ANSI A10 .3 . 10 . ggle Bolts : Tumble-Wing type, Federal S ecification FF-B-588, type, class and style as r 'quired. E. Paint ' 1 . Stop Primer for Ferrous Metals : Provide nufacturer ' s or fabricator' s standard, fast- c 'ring, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer ellual to primer specified in Section 09900 . 2 . S 'op Primer for Galvanized Ferrous Metals : Epoxy pimer applied at 2 .5 to 3 . 0 mils DFT. Provide o e of the following products or equal : a ! Carboline 190 High Build Epoxy Primer. b DuPont 823 HB. c ' Tnemec 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline Primer. 3 . S 'op Primer and Finish for Galvanized Ferrous Metals : Provide epoxy primer and aliphatic top c 'at, shop applied by the galvanizer. 4 . Galvanizing Repair Paint : High zinc dust content p int for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, w 'th dry film containing not less than 94 percent z1nc dust by weight, and complying with DID-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20; one of the following o equal : al Tnemec-Zinc 90-93 . b ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound. c ZiRP; Duncan Galvanizing. 5. B luminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic c plying with SSPC-Paint 12 except containing no a estos fibers . F. Concr 'te Fill and Reinforcing Materials: 1. C crete Materials and Properties : Comply with requirements of Section 03300 for normal weight, r dy-mix concrete with minimum 28 day compressive s ' ength of 2, 500 psi . 2 . N ' slip Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, p ; kaged material containing fused aluminum oxide gi its or crushed emery as abrasive aggregate; t-proof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, m 'sture, or cleaning materials. 3 . R ''nforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, unless o erwise indicated. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-7 2980 7 . Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet : ASTM A446, of grade required for design loading. Coating AO% designation as indicated, or if not indicated, G90 . 8 . Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 ; Type and grade (if applicable) as selected by fabricator and as required for design loading; black finish unless galvanizing is indicated; standard weight (schedule 40) , unless otherwise indicated. 9 . Grey Iron Castings : ASTM A48, Class 30 . 10 . Malleable Iron Castings : ASTM A47, grade 32510 . 11 . Brackets, Flanges and Anchors : Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 12 . Concrete Inserts : Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A47, or cast steel, ASTM A27 . Provide bolts washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A153 . 13 . Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes : Select in accordance with AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded. C. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout : Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107, Grade B or C at a fluid consistency (flow cone) of 20 to 30 seconds. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications . 1 . "Burke Non-Ferrous, Non-Shrink Grout" by The Burke Company, San Mateo, CA or equal. D. Fasteners : Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. 1. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307, Grade A. 2 . Lag Bolts : Square head type, Federal Specification FF-B-561. 3 . Machine Screws : Corrosion resistant steel, Federal Specification FF-S-92 . 4. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, Federal Specification FF-S-111 . 5. Plain Washers : Round, carbon steel, Federal Specification FF-W-92 . 6. Lock Washers : Helical spring type carbon steel, Federal Specification FF-W-84. 7 . Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with Federal Specification FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, [nondrilling) ) , Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor) ; and machine bolts complying with Federal Specification FF-B-575, Grade 5. AWk METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-6 2980 1 . 06 PROJ T CONDITIONS A. Fiel Idlaying Measurements : Check by accurate field measements before fabrication, actual locations of walland other construction to which metal fabrations must fit; show recorded measurements on finashop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with onstruction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1. ere field measurements cannot be made without the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements . Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to g aranteed dimensions . Allow for trimming and f fitting. 1 . 07 SEQUE LING AND SCHEDULING A. Seque !ce and coordinate installation of wall handrails as f 'llows : 1. M ' nt handrails only on completed walls . Do not s port handrails temporarily by any means not S isfying structural performance requirements . 2 . M ' nt handrails only on gypsum board assemblies r 'nforced to receive anchors, and where the 1 ' ation of concealed anchor plates has been c ' arly marked for benefit of Installer. PART 2 - PRO CTS 2 .01 MATER S A. Metal urfaces: For metal fabrications exposed to view on completion of the Work, provide materials selec d for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freed from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose ' xposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, rolle ' marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel ' heet, variations in flatness exceeding those permi ed by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. B. Ferro metals: 1. S el Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36. 2 . R led Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A786. 3 . S el Bars for Grating: ASTM A569 or ASTM A36 . 4 . W* ' e Rod for Grating Cross Bars: ASTM A510 . 5. S el Tubing: Cold-formed, ASTM A500; or hot- r led, ASTM A501. 6. S uctural Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A570; or C d-rolled ASTM A611, Class 1; of grade required f design loading. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-5 2980 D. Submit 2 sets of representative samples of materials and finished products as may be requested by the Architect . E. Submit welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article. F. Submit a notarized certificate of compliance from the galvanizer, with an itemized listing and description of all items that have been hot-dip galvanized, hot- dip galvanized/shop prime painted, and hot-dip galvanized/shop finished. 1 . Submit a laboratory analysis of the zinc bath with the names and percentages of metals . G. Submit qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications : Firms experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work. B. Installer Qualifications : Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this section by same firm that fabricated them. C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1 .1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel, " D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel" , and D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. " 1 . Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. D. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful installation of metal fabrications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-4 2980 4 . reads of Steel Stairs : Capable of withstanding a iform load of 100 pounds per square foot or a ncentrated load of 300 pounds on an area of 4 are inches located in the center of the tread, ichever produces the greater stress . 5 . atforms of Steel Stairs : Capable of thstanding a uniform load of 100 pounds per are foot . 6 . avy Duty Metal Bar Gratings : Capable of thstanding a uniform load of 250 pounds per are foot or a concentrated load of 8000 pounds, ichever produces the greater stress. B. Cont 1 of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and othe forms of corrosion by insulating metals and othe materials from direct contact with incompatible mate als. 1 . 04 SUBM ALS A. Subm' in accordance with Section 01300, manu cturer's specifications, anchor details and inst lation instructions for products used in misc laneous metal fabrications, including paint prod is and grout . B. Subm' shop drawings for fabrication and erection of misc laneous metal fabrications . Include plans, elev ions and details of sections and connections . Show nchorage and accessory items . Provide templates for chor and bolt installation by others . 1 . ere materials or fabrications are indicated to c ly with certain requirements for design 1 adings, include structural engineer' s c rtification, material properties and other i formation needed for structural analysis. C. Enga the services of a Professional Structural Engin er registered to practice in the State in which the P oject is located, to prepare complete shop drawi gs for metal railings and stairs, including their attachments. Structural Engineer shall do a compl to analysis of all typical and special condi ions and certify conformance to governing laws, the B ilding Code and Contract Documents. Shop drawi s and certification shall bear the Engineer's profe sional seal. 1. F ricator's shop drawings stamped with the E ineer's professional stamp will be acceptable i tead of shop drawings actually prepared by the E ineer. METAL FABRICATI©NS 05500-3 2980 C. Section 05100 - Structural Metal Framing. D. Section 05720 - Ornamental Handrails and Railings . E. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Rough hardware. F. Section 08330 - Coiling Doors . G. Section 09900 - Painting. H. Section 14240 - Hydraulic Elevators . 1 .03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install the following metal fabrications to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections . Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each respective component of each metal fabrication. 1 . Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails : Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 300 pounds applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 100 pounds per foot applied in any direction. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2 . Top Rail of Guardrail Systems : Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 300 pounds applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 100 pounds per foot applied horizontally at the required guardrail height and a simultaneous uniform load of 100 pounds per foot applied vertically downward at the top of the guardrail. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3 . Infill Area of Guardrail Systems : Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 pounds applied to a one square foot area at any point in the system including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with uniform horizontal loads on top rails of railing systems in determining stress on guard. Amok METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2 2980 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GE RAL 1. 01 SECTI N INCLUDES A. Types of work in this section include but are not limit d to metal fabrications for the following: 1 . R gh hardware. 2 . L ders . 3 . C t nosings . 4 . L se bearing and leveling plates . 5 . L se steel lintels . 6 . M cellaneous framing and supports for the f lowing: a Coiling doors . b Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections . 7 . M cellaneous steel trim. 8 . S if and relieving angles. 9 . S uctural steel door frames. 10 . M al bar gratings . 11 . S el pipe railings . 12 . M al stairs. 13 . A ernating tread stair. B. Produ s Furnished but not Installed under this Secti Furnish the following items for installation under he designated Sections: 1 . S tion 03300 : Nosings; items to be cast into c crete. 2 . S tion 04200 : Loose steel lintels; loose bearing a leveling plates; items to be built into unit onry.. 3 . S tion 06100 : Rough hardware. C. Defin' ions : 1. M al fabrications include items made from iron a steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, p' es and castings which are not part of s uctural steel or other metal systems specified e ewhere. 2 . D initions in ASTM E985 for railing-related terms a ly to this section. 1.02 RELA SECTIONS A. Secti 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Secti 04200 - Unit Masonry. x.39 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1 2924 3 . 02 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. After erection, all scarred areas on top side of the roof decking, including cuts, drill holes, rust spots, welds and weld scars, shall be touched up with a zinc- rich paint . END OF SECTION METAL DECKING 05300-8 2924 4 . S e laps of adjacent units : Welded or mechanically f tened between supports at intervals not e eeding 2 ' -611 . F. Faste accessories to deck by welding. G. Holes nd openings which are indicated on the Structural Drawi s shall be cut by the deck erector. Coordinate locat ns with respective trades . Holes not so indic ed, but which are required for work by other trade shall be located and cut by the respective trade H. For h es and openings greater than six (6) inches but less han 2 ' -0" in width or length in composite slab/ ck, provide channel or angle reinforcement welded to the deck as shown on the Drawings. This also applies to sl eves or cores placed closer than three (3) diamet rs (or smaller (est) hole) apart in which case an equiv ent opening based on the outermost dimensions of the s eve or core set shall be used in determining reinfo cement. Locations of all such openings, whether shown n the Drawings or not, shall be coordinated with other rades prior to concrete placement . I . Field welding shall be executed only by welding operat rs who have been previously qualified to perform the t e of work involved. J. Provi sheet steel closures of same gauge as deck to close penings between panels and structural steel column . K. Provid temporary support at slab projections as requir d. METAL DECKING 05300-7 L1,57 2924 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 METAL DECK INSTALLATION A. Deck shall be erected and welded in accordance with manufacturer' s specifications, approved shop drawings and as hereinafter specified. B. Place steel deck units on supporting framework and adjust to final position with proper bearings, end and side laps before permanently securing work. C. Welded connections to steel supports shall be fusion type. Puddle welds shall be at least 3/4 inch in diameter or an elongated weld having an equal perimeter. D. Metal roof deck units shall be fastened to the supporting structure (minimum requirements) as follows : 1 . Panel ends and end laps : Welded Maximum spacing of six (6) inches at 1 %" deck, eight (8) inches at 3" deck. 2 . Intermediate supports: Welded Maximum spacing of twelve (12) inches at 1 " deck, eight (8) inches at 3" deck. 3 . Longitudinal edges at marginal supports : Welded Maximum spacing of twelve (12) inches. 4 . Side laps of adjacent units: Welded or mechanically fastened between supports at intervals not exceeding 2 ' -011 . E. Metal floor deck and composite roof deck units shall be welded to the supporting structure (minimum requirements) as follows: 1 . Panel ends and end laps: Maximum spacing of twelve (12) inches. 2 . Intermediate supports: Maximum spacing of twelve (12) inches. 3 . Longitudinal edges at marginal supports: Maximum spacing of twelve (12) inches. METAL DECKING 05300-6 2924 G. Reinfo ement channels or angles shall conform to ASTM A36 . 2 . 02 COMPOSI E METAL FLOOR AND ROOF DECK A. Composi e metal deck shall be formed of steel sheets conform g to ASTM Specification A-446 Grade A and shall be of e types, depths and gauges indicated on the Drawing Galvanized coating shall conform to ASTM Specifi ation A525-G60 . B. Composi floor and roof deck shall be of the gage and depth s wn on the Drawings with the following minimum propert s: 2" deep - 20 gage I = .420 in' Sp = . 367 in' C. Metal d ck units shall be cut to required lengths so that e joints will occur on supporting members. Typical lengths shall extend over three (3) or more spans. D. Accesso metal sections shall be not lighter than 16 gauge a of the same material and finish as the metal deck un s . Use heavier gauge where indicated on the Drawing E. Preform metal flute closures are to be of the same gage as the deck and are to be supplied by the deck manufac rer. METAL DECKING / 05300-5 2924 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 METAL ROOF DECK A. Typical metal roof deck without concrete topping shall be formed of steel sheets conforming ASTM Standard A-446 Grade A and shall be 3" deep Type "N" or 1 %" deep Type "B" deck as indicated on the drawings. All deck units shall be galvanized. Galvanized coating shall conform to ASTM Specification A525-G90 . Gauge as indicated on the Drawings . B. Metal deck units shall be cut to required lengths so that end joins will occur on supporting members and be lapped a minimum of two (2) inches . Typical lengths shall extend over three (3) or more spans where possible, with end joints staggered. C. Metal roof deck shall have the following minimum properties: 18 Gage; 1 11 deck (Type B) I = 0 .310 in Sn = 0 .355 in Sp = 0 .344 in D. Accessory metal sections shall be not lighter than 18 gauge and of the same material and finish as the metal deck units. E. Sump pans shall be recessed and be not lighter than 14 gauge galvanized sheets. Size of the hole to be field cut to match the roof drain. F. Preformed metal flute closures are to be of the same gage as the deck and are to be supplied by the deck manufacturer. METAL DECKING 05300-4 2924 1 . 06 TESTI G AND INSPECTION A. All m terials and workmanship under this Section shall be su ject to inspection in the mill, shop or field by the chitect, or by qualified inspectors selected by the A hitect and paid directly by the Owner. B. Howev such inspection, wherever conducted, shall not relie the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish mater is and workmanship in accordance with Contract requi ments, nor shall inspector' s acceptance of mater is or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by th Owner or Architect if defects are discovered. C. The C tractor shall give proper notice to inspection agenc s designated by the Architect and shall allow acces and full facilities as required for this inspe ion. 1 . 07 STORA A. Care d protection shall be given to all steel decking panel during handling and storage. During unloading and h isting, extra care shall be given to prevent damag to the ends, sides and distortion of the indiv' ual panels. If the panels are to be stored prior to in allation, they shall not be placed in contact with e ground and they shall be protected from the eleme s and kept dry. METAL DECKING 05300-3 y'� 2924 2 . Section 05150 - Shear Connectors 1 . 04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A. "Basic Design Specifications for Steel Deck Construction" by the Steel Deck Institute, except as may be hereinafter modified. B. "Specifications for the Design of Light Gauge Cold Formed Structural Members" by the American Iron and Steel Institute. C. "Specifications for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot- Dipped Process, Structural Quality" , ASTM Specification A-446 . D. "Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" , by the American Welding Society. 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS. 1 . Shop drawings shall indicate size and location of framing supports and the location, lengths, types, gauges and markings of deck units. Shop drawings shall indicate fastening methods for deck units and the type and sequence of connections, welds or screws and other items as hereinafter called for. 2 . Approval of shop drawings will be for size and arrangement of units. Errors in dimensions shown on the shop drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3 . Fabrication of any material or performing of any work prior to the final approval of the shop drawings will be entirely at the risk of the Contractor. 4 . Shop drawings shall show the complete layout of shear connectors. METAL DECKING 05300-2 2924 SECTION 05300 METAL DECKING PART 1 - GE RAL 1 . 01 GENE PROVISIONS A. DIVIS N 1 is hereby made a part of this SECTION as fully s if repeated herein. B. Exami all Drawings and all other Sections of the Speci cations for requirements therein affecting the work this trade. 1 . 02 WORK BE PERFORMED A. Work cluded: The work of this Section consists of furni ing and erecting all metal deck work as shown on the D wings and as specified herein and includes, but is no limited to, the following: 1 . M al roof deck. 2 . C osite metal floor or roof deck. 3 . C sure plates, pour stops, bent angle plates, sump p s and accessories for fastening the deck to the s el frame. 4 . R nforcement channels or angles at floor and roof o nings in composite deck. 5 . F' ld touch-up paint after erection. 1. 03 RELAT REQUIREMENTS A. The f lowing items of related work are specified and inclu d in other Sections of the Specifications. 1. S tion 05120 - Structural Steel METAL DECKING 05300-1 y3 � 2924 3 . Reduction of area, o minimum 50 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Shear connectors shall be installed in the number and spacing shown on approved shop drawings and as herein specified. B. Welding procedure shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Structural Welding Code AWS D1. 1-88, Section 7. END OF SECTION SHEAR CONNECTORS 05150-4 A 2924 B. Howeve such inspection, wherever conducted, shall not reliev Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materi s and workmanship in accordance with Contract requir ents, nor shall inspector' s acceptance of materi s or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by the wner or Architect if defects are discovered. C. Qualit control and inspection of shear connectors shall be don in accordance with Section 7 of the Structural Weldin Code AWS D1 . 1-88 . D. The Co ractor shall give proper notice to inspection agenci designated by the Architect and shall allow access and full facilities as required for this inspec on. 1 . 07 STORAG A. Care d protection shall be given to all shear connec rs during handling and storage. If connectors are to e stored prior to installation, they shall not be pla ed in contact with the ground and shall be protec d from the elements and kept dry. PART 2 - PRO CTS 2 . 01 MATERI S A. All sh r connectors shall be made from cold drawn bar stock conforming to the requirements of ASTM Specif ' ation A108, Grades 1010 through 1020, either semi- fully-killed de-oxidation. B. Tensil requirements of shear connector studs, as determ' ed by tests (ASTM A370) of bar stock after drawin or of full diameter finished studs, at the manufa urer' s option, shall conform to the following: 1. Te ile strength, psi minimum 60, 000 psi 2 . E1 gation in 2 inches, % minimum 20 SHEAR CONNECTORS 05150-3 F yZ� 2924 1 . 04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A. Latest edition of "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" by the American Institute of Steel Construction. B. Latest edition of "Structural Welding Code - AWS D1. 1" by the American Welding Society. C. ASTM listed standards by the American Society for Testing and Materials . 1 . 05 SUBMITTAL A. Submit complete Shop Drawings for Architect' s approval, in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300 - SUBMITTAL. B. Shop Drawings shall indicate size and position of all shear connectors. Shop Drawings shall indicate fastening methods for connectors. C. Approval of Shop Drawings will be for size and arrangement of shear connectors. Errors in dimensions shown on the Shop Drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. D. Purchasing of any material or performing any work prior to the final approval of Shop Drawings will be entirely at the risk of the Contractor. 1. 06 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in the mill, shop or field by the Architect, or by qualified inspectors selected by the Architect and paid directly by the Owner. SHEAR CONNECTORS 05150-2 Awk 2924 SECTION 05150 SHEAR CONNECTORS PART 1 - GEN``"RAL 1 . 01 GENERAJ PROVISIONS A. DIVISIJnN 1 is hereby made a part of this SECTION as fully r, s if repeated herein. B. Examine; all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specif: cations for requirements therein affecting the work o this trade. 1 . 02 WORK T(,1, BE PERFORMED A. The wo= k of this Section consists of furnishing and install'A ng all shear connectors as shown on the Drawings and as i5pecified herein and includes, but is not limited to, thf' following: 1 . HezA ed shear connectors of the lengths and dineters shown on the Drawings . 2 . Wel=ding shear connectors to the structural shapes, pla;'r es, etc. 1. 03 RELATEI1",, REQUIREMENTS A. The fo: owing items of related work are specified and are im uded in other Sections of this Specification: 1 . Sec, ion 05120 - Structural Steel 2 . Sec: ion 05300 - Metal Decking SHEAR CONNECTORS 05150-1 U'Z� 2924 I . All column leveling plates shall be set level to correct elevat' ons and the entire bearing area under plates ' shall h: e grouted solid with an approved non-shrinking grout .; As an,' to the use of leveling plates, leveli;'yg nuts or shims may be used to set column bases. After , roper setting of the column is complete, the entire,"" bearing area under the base plate shall be grouter solid with an approved non-shrinking grout. Maintain column base plate elevations as indicated on the dr wings. J. Provid,F temporary shoring for composite beams and girder;` , as indicated on the Drawings. K. Galvanized lintel angles shall be touched up with a zinc-rch paint at areas scarred by bolting or welding. L. Provid steel angles as necessary for deck support at columnt where beams do not frame from four sizes . M. Camber„ girders, trusses and beams as specified on the Drawinjrs. N. Instal!° ation of adhesive capsule anchors shall be in accordance with manufacturer' s requirements. Embedment of anc ors into concrete shall be as specified on the Drawings but shall not be less than required by the manufa turer. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-11 2924 D. Except as otherwise indicated, all field connections shall be bolted in accordance with the AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 Bolts" . Except as otherwise indicated, bolts shall be bearing type and need only be tightened to the snug tight condition as defined in Section 8 .c of the bolt specification. E. Do not cut or alter any member in the field without Architect' s written approval for each specific condition. F. All welding shall be in accordance with Referenced Specifications and shall be done only by experienced welders who have, within one (1.) year previously, been qualified by tests as prescribed in AWS "Standard Qualifications Procedure" for the type of work required. G. Continuously weld joints in architecturally exposed structural steel members. The welds shall be ground or otherwise treated as required to blend with adjacent parent metal . In addition, fabricate as follows : 1 . Remove spatter and grind where necessary for blending. Contour surfaces to match those surfaces that are adjacent. Form fillets to the smallest radii possible and still comply with the structural elements . Provide additional metallic filler to form smooth continuous surfaces that will appear as one piece construction when primed. Grind and polish as required. H. All anchor bolts shall be set to correct locations by template. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-10 2924 H. All ca¢ opy elements shall be painted as follows : 1 . Steel Preconstruction Primer: Phenoxy zinc rich P 11 mer 1190-93 Tnemec-Zinc as manufactured by Tnemec Cc, , or approved equal . 2 . Steel shop coat : Series 69 HI-BUILD Epoxoline II Pc= yamidoamine Epoxy Coating by TNEMEC Company, Ind or equal approved by the Architect . Finish cct color shall be selected by the Architect. Pzmer shall have a minimum dry film thickness (L± T) of 4 . 0 mils . Two finished coats shall have mi imum DFT of 8 . 0 mils each. PART 3 - EXE'' UTION 3 . 01 ERECTI; N A. All st ructural steel shall be anchored and erected in accordance with Reference Specifications, approved Shop Drawir.' s, and as hereinafter specified. B. All wc, k shall be accurately set to established lines and elevations and rigidly fastened in place with suitakte attachments to the construction of the buildig. Errors in shop fabrication or deformation result' ng from handling and transportation shall be z report',; d immediately to the Architect, and approval of the m" thod of erection shall be obtained. Approved correc ions shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner C. Tempos ry bracing, guying, and support shall be provided to ke( p the structure safe and aligned at all times durinc construction, and to prevent danger to persons and pi perty. Check all temporary loads and stay within safe apacity of all building components. All work shall ' e in conformance with A. I.S.C. , "Code of Standard Pract:? e" September 1, 1986 . STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-9 2924 2 . 03 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. All structural steel surfaces shall receive a power tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP3, "Power Tool Cleaning" except the following: 1 . All interior and exterior exposed steel members and their connections shall receive a general blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning" . 2 . All galvanized steel members and connections shall receive a general blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning" . B. All structural steel which will not receive fireproofing or galvanizing shall be shop primed. Except as noted primer shall conform to SSPC paint specification No. 25. Contractor shall verify that primers or any protective coatings used are chemically compatible with fireproofing material. C. All applications shall be in accordance with SSPC-PA1 "Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting" . • All film measurements shall be as per SSPC-PA2 . D. Top flanges of beams to receive shear connectors and all faying surfaces comprising slip resistance joints shall be left free of oil or primer. E. Unless otherwise noted, or shown on sections, all steel columns, beams, girders and trusses shall receive a cementitious spray on fireproofing as per Section 07250 of the Specifications. F. After erection, all scarred areas shall be touched up with the same paint as the shop coat . G. Shop and field touch-up paint shall be compatible with paint to be used for finish painting in the field as required under PAINTING Section. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-8 Aft 2924 C. The design of members and connections for any portions of the ;'Ntructure not indicated on the Drawings shall be completd by the fabricator. Connections shall be capablel) of supporting the maximum uniform load of the member for the span shown and the material specified. Cons idevation must be given to the additional load carryin�I' capacity of composite steel members. See table on gen!, ral notes sheet of structural drawings for magnifi, ation factors to be used in connection design. All coltnection designs shall be subject to final approva of the Engineer. D. All shc-b connections shall be welded or bolted. E. All fiejd connections shall be bolted unless otherwise indicat, d on the Drawings . F. Unless :otherwise noted, diameter of holes in bolted parts :'' all be 1/16" greater than the nominal diameter of the ,bolt . No unfair holes will be accepted, and enlargE,"nent of holes shall not be accomplished by burningl Burrs resulting from drilling or punching shall : e ground to the surface of the material. Shearin!t,F and punching shall be done cleanly so as not to deform a r mar adjacent surfaces. G. ProvidEi holes and connections as required for site assembl"r of steel work. Holes shall be drilled or punched and reamed in the shop. Show sizes and locatic s of all such holes on the Shop Drawings. H. Hung 'J ntels and other steel requiring accurate alignmet and provisions for expansion/contraction shall be prop.,:'ded with slotted holes. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-7 ,,f2 2924 D. Weld and joint details shall comply with the requirements of the "Code for Welding in Building Construction" by the American Welding Society. E. Anchor bolts shall be ASTM A307, except as noted on the Drawings . F. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be Parabond capsule anchors (Molly) by Emhart or equal approved by the Architect . The Contractor may submit alternative connector devices for review of the Architect. Alternative devices shall satisfy all applicable spacing and edge conditions and shall provide a connection of at least the strength of the connection required on the Contract documents . Submission for alternative designs should be accompanied by complete engineering calculations certified by a Professional Engineer registered in Massachusetts . 2 . 02 FABRICATION A. All structural steel shall be fabricated in accordance with Reference Specifications, approved Shop Drawings, and as hereinafter specified. B. All Architecturally exposed structural steel (canopies) shall be fabricated in strict accordance with Section 10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-6 2924 I . When tle Contractor is satisfied that the work is satisfa' torily completed, notify the Architect, who will make a'' rangements with the Testing Engineer to be retaine. by the Owner to verify that the work complies with th'' se Specifications . 1 . 07 STORAGEFAND HANDLING A. Care ar,b protection shall be given to all structural steel d:'iring handling and storage. If items are to be •storedrior to installation, they shall not be placed in cont§ ct with the ground and they shall be protected from the elements and kept dry. PART 2 - PROD! CTS 2 . 01 MATERIAi S A. Structural Steel beams, girders, columns, plates and other s, ctions are designed to be in accordance with the require'ients of ASTM A36, except where noted to be ASTM A572, G'; ade 50 . B. Structural Tubular columns shall comply with the require, ents of ASTM A500 Grade B. * * Forei::" n structural steel will be permitted provided all req irements of ASTM A6, A36, A572 (Grade 50) & A500 are maintained. Equivalency tables for foreign structural steel/ASTM steel shall be supplied by the fabrica,, :or as part of the shop drawing submittal . C. Bolts, '';„ nuts and washers shall comply with the require;'nents of ASTM, Standard A325 for Structural Joints sing ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. Bolts shall be =' A325N vth washer. Connections shall be bearing type with sl-1 ar planes through threads. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5 2924 1. 06 TESTING AND INSPECTION , A. All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in the mill, shop or field by the Architect, or by qualified inspectors selected by the Architect and paid directly by the Owner-. B. However, such inspection, wherever conducted, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements, nor shall inspector' s acceptance of materials or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by the Owner or Architect if defects are discovered. C. Inspection of welding work shall consist of non- destructive spot testing done by radiographic, magnetic, magnetic particle or ultrasonic method, whichever is most effective for joint to be tested. D. Inspection of bolting work shall be in accordance with "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" by the American Institute of Steel Construction, 1985 . E. The Contractor shall give proper notice to inspection agencies designated by the Architect and shall allow access and full facilities as required for this inspection. F. Regardless of any testing done by the Owner, the Contractor is responsible for completing the structural steel work in complete compliance with these Specifications. G. The Contractor must set up a quality control program in the shop and in the field to ensure compliance with the Specifications. H. Report in writing to the Architect the results of the Contractor' s inspection. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4 2924 i E. When ccpliance with any Specification is specified herein 'For materials (or a product, manufactured or fabricat, d, ) the Contractor, if requested shall furnish an affilliavit from the manufacturer (or fabricator) certify"I g that the materials (or product) delivered to the job ; eets the requirements specified. However, such certifier tion shall not relieve the Contractor from the respons:p ility of complying with any added requirements specifi(:!d herein. 1 . 05 SUBMI=T A. Submit == omplete Shop Drawings in accordance with the provisic s of Section 01300 - SUBMITTAL. 1 . No ' ariance from design sizes and details will be per ;'fitted on submitted Shop Drawings, but requests for'' modification of connections of details to betger suit their shop practice, or for any other rea-tons, will be considered by the Architect . 2 . Fabrication of any material or performing of any woe? prior to the final approval of the Shop DraOjings will be entirely at the risk of the Con',ractor. 3 . Shoe Drawings shall include all information necessary for fabrication of the component parts of the' structure. They shall indicate size and weight of ' embers - type and location of shop and field con'>sections, the type, size and extent of all wel,, s, and the welding sequence when required. The welling symbols used on the Shop Drawings shall be as ',=' dopted by the American Welding Society. 4 4 . Revew of Shop Drawings shall be for size and arrngement of principle and auxiliary members and str''= ngth of representative connections based on sam,,�' le checks. Any errors in dimensions shown on Shol Drawings shall be the responsibility of the Conit.ractor. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-3 2924 B. Items To Be Furnished Only: Furnish the following items °A for installation by the designated Sections : 1 . SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE: Anchor bolts; embedded angles and plates with bolts or anchors, as shown on the Drawings. 1 . 03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications : 1 . Section 05150 - Shear Connectors 2 . Section 05300 - Metal Decking 3 . Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 4 . Section 07250 - Fireproofing 1 . 04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A. "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" , 1986 and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" , 1989 by the American Institute of Steel Construction. B. "Code for Welding in Building Construction" by the American Welding Society. C. ASTM listed standards by the American Society for Testing and Materials. D. In case of conflict between the Reference Specification and the Project Specification, the Project Specification shall govern. In case of conflict between Reference Specifications, the more stringent shall. govern. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2 A .....E 2924 a SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENE RAL 1 . 01 GENERAep PROVISIONS A. DIVISI'5N 1 is hereby made a part of this SECTION as fully ,, s if repeated herein. B. Examin'rt` all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specif'zcations for requirements therein affecting the work o,!Po this trade. 1 . 02 WORK T,„ BE PERFORMED A. The w(Irk of this Section consists of furnishing and erecti' g all structural steel work as shown on the Drawin, s and as specified herein and includes, but is not li''; ited to, the following: 1 . Le.:, eling plates and anchor bolts. Anchor bolts are t65 be furnished (with templates) only for in" tallation by the concrete contractor. (Refer to Sel= tion 05120 .3 . 0l.H for acceptable alternate to le'; eling plates. ) 2 . Columns with base plates and beam connections. 3 . Be'' ms and girders with connections. 4 . Tr sses with connections. 5 . Ch', nnels, angles, plates, frames, rods, pipes, toes, tees, anchors, etc. 6 . La' eral braced and moment frames. 7. Shp paint and field touch-up paint after erection. 8 . Ga, vanizing of exposed elements. 9 . AdAesive capsule anchors. 10 . Bolted and welded connections. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1 2924 C. Provic temporary formwork and shores as required for suppoil of reinforced masonry elements. D. Use gr:' uting technique and type of grout appropriate for masonz, construction indicated and as recommended in Referetced Standards. Grouting shall be executed in lifts �I of exceeding 41 -011 . E. Anchozreinforced masonry work to supporting structure as ind,t cated. F. Reinfccing steel to be field bent shall be pre-heated just p''+ior to bending to prevent brittle fracture and/or loss c,,,: strength of the reinforcing steel . END OF SECTION REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04300-3 2924 C. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) . 1. 05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit reinforcing steel producers mill certification. B. Submit shop drawings for fabrication bending and placement of reinforcement complying with ACI 315 . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 REINFORCEMENT A. Provide deformed bars, Grade 60, complying with ASTM A165 . B. Shop fabricate reinforcement which is bent or hooked. 2 . 02 GROUT A. Provide grout complying with ASTM C476 fine type with minimum 28 compressive strength of 2500 psi . 2 . 03 MORTAR A. Provide mortar complying with ASTM C270, type "M" or %I S" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with applicable requirements of Section "Unit Masonry. " B. Place reinforcement accurately at spacing shown, secure against displacement, and splice by lapping unless otherwise indicated. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04300-2 2924 SECTION 04300 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GEN", RAL 1. 01 GENERA'''n PROVISIONS A. PART A'i and DIVISION 1 of PART B are hereby a part of this S''= CTION as fully as if repeated herein. B. Examin:, all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specif; cations for requirements therein affecting the work o;' this Section. 1 . 02 DESCRT:'a TION OF WORK A. The w(i,,rk of this Section consists of providing all produc' s and labor necessary for the completion of the reinfo:: ced masonry work shown on the Drawings. 1 . 03 RELATE' REQUIREMENTS A. Carefu` ly examine all the Contract Documents for requir,„„ ments which affect the work of this Section. 1 . Se, tion 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 2 . Section 05120 - Structural Steel 3 . SeA.. tion 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout 4 . Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 5 . Section 04300 - Reinforced Unit Masonry 1.04 REFERE', CE SPECIFICATIONS A. Americ, n Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) : Listed'; Standards. y B. Americ£ n Concrete Institute (ACI) : Listed Standards. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 04300-1 { 2980 E. Prot,' ction: Provide final protection and maintain conditions which ensure unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 3 x 4 UNIT MASONRY 04200-27 2980 in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement . AMA B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weepholes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of sealant compounds. 3 .16 CLEANING A. Promptly as work proceeds and upon completion, remove excess mortar, smears, droppings. B. Clean adjacent and adjoining surface of marks arising out of execution of work of this Section. C. Sweep up and remove daily sand, cleaning compounds and mixtures, dirt, debris and rubbish. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows : 1 . Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels . 2 . Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes . Obtain Architect 's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3 . Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape. 4. Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5 . Use bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised" to clean brick masonry made from clay or shale, except use masonry cleaner indicated below: a. "Yana Trol" ProSoCo. Inc. , Kansas City, Kansas. b. Application and use shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The use of muriatic acid is expressly prohibited. 6 . Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer's directions and applicable NCMA "Tek" bulletins. 7 . Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in "ILI Handbook" published by Indiana Limestone Institute of America. UNIT MASONRY 04200-26 2980 hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm) , pour height of 12 feet (3 . 6 m) . d = For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches (76 mm) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 4 inches (76 by 101 mm) , pour height of 24 feet (7 .3 m) . 3 . Pry vide cleanout holes at least 3 inches (76 mm) ii,' least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches (." 24 mm) in height . a,'_ Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. b.1 At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. r 3 .14 FIELDI` UALITY CONTROL A. Owner"Will employ and pay for a separate testing laboril,tory to perform field quality control testing. B. Unit "', st Method: 1 . Bill] Tests : For each type and grade of brick ir, icated, test units by methods of sampling and t( ting of ASTM C67 except select 5 bricks at rz;'e dom for each 100, 000 units or fraction thereof ii; stalled. 2 . C(Iicrete Masonry Unit Tests : For each type, class ail grade of concrete masonry unit indicated, test ur ' ts by method of sampling and testing of ASTM C 0 . 3 . Mc' tar Tests : For each type indicated, test mc!,' tar by methods of sampling and testing of ASTM C"` 0 . Conduct tests no less frequently than rE; ired to evaluate mortar used to install each ir.'n rement of masonry units indicated above from wllch samples are taken for testing. C. Repori, test results in writing and in form specified under'e ach test method, to Architect and Contractor, on sai` day tests are made. D. Evalu<�, ion of Quality Control Tests: Masonry work, in absent e of other indications of noncompliance with requi�,�ements, will be considered satisfactory if resultb from construction quality control tests comply with iJ inimum requirements indicated. 3 .15 REPAI:1,1 AND POINTING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipp'', d, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units"do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install UNIT MASONRY 04200-25 2980 F. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where shown to be built into masonry. 3 .13 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Temporary Formwork and Shores : Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1 . Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2 . Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1 . Do not exceed the following pour heights for fine grout: a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3/4 inch (19 mm) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches (38 by 51 mm) , pour height of 12 inches (305 mm) . b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches (51 mm) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2 by 3 inches (51 by 76 mm) , pour height of 60 inches (1524 mm) . c. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches (63 by 76 mm) , pour height of 12 feet (3 .6 m) . d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches (76 mm) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches (76 by 76 mm) , pour height of 24 feet (7 .3 m) . 2 . Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout: a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches (38 by 76 mm) , pour height of 12 inches (305 mm) . b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches (51 mm) or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches (63 by 76 mm) , pour height of 60 inches (1524 mm) . c. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or for minimum grout space of UNIT MASONRY 04200-24 2980 3 .12 FLASHI: G OF MASONRY WORK A. Provid" concealed fabric flashing in masonry work at, or above all shelf angles, lintels, ledges and other obstru'',, tions to the downward flow of water in the wall so as do divert such water to the exterior. Prepare masonri surfaces smooth and free from projections which '$ould puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortarl Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic beforecovering with mortar. 1 . Iniltall flashing to comply with manufacturer' s in, tructions . B. Extend'I flashings the full length of lintels and shelf anglesla minimum of 4 inches into masonry beyond each end. It heads and sills where the flashing is not contift ous, turn up ends not less than 2 inches to form a', pan. 1 . Fo':` cavity walls with concrete block back-up, ex,, end flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of asonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a mirimum of 4 inches, and through the inner wythe to' ithin 1/2 inch of the interior face of the wail in exposed work. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry fllshing completely through the inner wythe and tu-.1n up approximately 2 inches. 2 . Fo,,f cavity walls with sheet rubberized asphalt ba:, rier, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, tu' ed up a minimum of 4 inches . Set flashing in a :',dead of one-part urethane sealant. Seal along th''; top edge of flashing with a strip of the self- adj� ereing barrier seam tape, extending from 2 in above the top of the flashing, down to the be 'd in the flashing. Provide a bead of mastic along the top edge of the flashing. D. Instal, metal flashings furnished under Section 07620 . Build ' n metal cap flashings in conjunction with concealed fabric flashings where indicated. Interlock end i6 nts of deformed metal flashings by overlapping deformations not less than 1-1/2 inches and seal lap with elastic sealant. Extend metal flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. E. Providt weep holes in the head joints of the first course; of masonry immediately above concealed flashigs . Space 16 inches on center, unless otherwilLse indicated. UNIT MASONRY 04200-23 2980 within 1 foot of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 3 feet . 3 .10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build-in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses . B. Build-in non-metallic joint fillers where indicated. C. Build in horizontal pressure relieving expansion joints where indicated; construct joints by inserting non-metallic compressible joint filler of width required to permit installation of sealant and backer rod. 1 . Locate horizontal pressure relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry veneer and attach to structure behind masonry veneer. D. Expansion Joint And Control Joint Spacing: If location of expansion joints and control joints is not shown, place vertical joints where directed by Architect, spaced not to exceed 35 feet on centers for concrete masonry wythes if reinforced, or 30 feet on centers if not reinforced. 3 .11 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1 foot for brick units and 2 feet for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels . Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels . Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels. 1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel units with reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb. D. Install a plastic bearing strip under lintel at each jamb where a control joint occurs. Install plastic bearing strips with non-skid surface down, set in F mortar, and smooth surface up, under lintel . UNIT MASONRY 04200-22 2980 reinforcing as required by code but not more than 1A inches on centers vertically. 2 . Fir single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16 i:fiches on centers vertically, unless otherwise i, dicated. 3 . Fi. r parapets, space reinforcing at 8 inches on centers vertically. F. Reinfrce masonry openings greater than 1 foot wide, with `'horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horiz„ntal joints approximately 8 inches apart, both immed:eately above lintels and below sills . Extend reinf, rcing a minimum of 2 feet beyond jambs of the openLig, bridging control joints where provided. 1 . Ir'a addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional reinforcement at openings as required tivv comply with the above. 3 .09 ANCHO' ING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Provi'., e anchor devices of type indicated. B. Ancho.l masonry to structural members where masonry abuts4or faces such members to comply with the folloing: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in w';'edth between masonry and structural member, Mess otherwise shown. Keep open space free of m('rtar or other rigid materials. 2 . k1chor masonry to structural members with metal tl"es embedded in masonry joints and attached to s' ructure. Provide anchors with adjustable tie sl. ctions, unless otherwise indicated. 3 . S�'ace adjustable anchors as shown, but not more t:'^an 16 inches on center vertically and 16 inches o:= center horizontally. C. Ancho"' single wythe masonry veneer to metal studs with mason,,y veneer anchors to comply with the following requi; ements : 1 . F' sten each anchor section through sheathing to metal studs with 2 cadmium plated metal fasteners. 2 . E11 ilbed tie section in masonry joints. Provide not I ss than 2 inch air space between back of masonry veneer wythe and face of sheathing unless i!!` dicated otherwise. 3 . Licate anchor section relative to course in which t''ae section is embedded to allow maximum vertical differential movement of tie up and down. 4. S= ace anchors as indicated but not more than 16 itches on center vertically and 16 inches on center horizontally. Install additional anchors LP UNIT MASONRY 04200-21 2980 C. Tie exterior wythe to cast-in-place concrete back-up with individual metal dovetail ties space 16 inches on center vertically and 16 inches on center horizontally. D. Provide weep holes in the exterior wythe of masonry in cavity walls located immediately above ledges and flashings, spaced 16 inches on center. 1. Provide pea stone approximately 2 inches deep in cavity above concealed flashings. 3 . 07 CAVITY WALL INSULATION A. On units of rigid insulation, install small pads of adhesive spaced approximately 1 foot on center both ways on inside face. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways . Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. 1 . Fill all cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry. 3 .08 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING A. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inches on exterior side of walls and 1/2 inches at other locations . Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches . B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints . C. Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing. D. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. E. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows : 1 . For multi-wythe walls (solid or cavity) where continuous horizontal reinforcing acts as structural bond or tie between wythes, space UNIT MASONRY 04200-20 ,....'? 2980 3 . 05 STRUC"URAL BONDING OF MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY A. Use cc tinuous horizontal joint reinforcement insta:§led in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie betweE, wythes . Install at not more than 16 inches on cente:< vertically. B. Corner`s : Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each 01ourse at corners, unless otherwise shown. 1. F('4 horizontally reinforced masonry, provide ctb tinuity at corners with prefabricated "L" ui ' ts, in addition to masonry bonding. t C. Interecting and Abutting Walls : Unless vertical expan,'ion or control joints are shown at juncture, provii'lle same type of bonding specified for structural bondiii�g between wythes and space as follows : 1. P,'I Vide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement using prefabricated "T" units . D. Inter ecting Load-Bearing Walls : If carried up separ' tely, block or tooth vertical joints with 8 inch maxim;,; offsets and provide rigid steel anchors spaced not hire than 4 feet on center vertically, or omit block' ng and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than A feet on center vertically. Form anchors of galva;lized steel not less than 1-1/2 by 1/4 inch by 2 feet long with ends turned up not less than 2 inches or wih cross-pins . If used with hollow masonry units embed ends in mortar-filled cores . E. Non-Baring Interior Partitions: Build full height of story,' to underside of solid floor or roof structure above; unless otherwise indicated. 1 . F11 between top of partition and structure above W:kh horizontal control joint strips. F. Wedge non-bearing partitions against structure above withi mall pieces of tile, slate or metal. Fill joint with 'mortar after dead load deflection of structure above,', approaches final position. 3 .06 CAVIJV WALLS A. Keeps avity clean of mortar droppings and other mater; als during construction. Bevel mortar bed away fromhe cavity. Plaster any mortar squeezed out from the -, int on the cavity side, onto the masonry unit. B. Tie tlycterior wythe to metal stud back-up and concrete bloc],; back-up with individual metal ties spaced not more';hthan 16 inches on center vertically and 16 inches on cr ter horizontally. UNIT MASONRY 04200-19 2980 3 . 04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay brick and solid concrete masonry units with completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints . B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells . Bed webs in mortar in courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout . For starting courses on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells . C. Set stone units in full bed of mortar with all vertical joints slushed full . Fill dowel, anchor and similar holes solid. Wet stone joint surface thoroughly before setting; for stone surfaces which are soiled, clean bedding and exposed surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder followed by thorough rinsing with clear water. D. Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3/8 inch joints. E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, unless otherwise indicated. F. Unless indicated otherwise, tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness . Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. G. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. H. Collar Joints: After each course is laid, fill the vertical longitudinal joint between wythes solidly with mortar for the following masonry work: 1. Exterior walls, except cavity walls. 2 . Non-loadbearing interior walls or partitions where metal ties or horizontal reinforcing are indicated for structural bonding and nominal thickness of wall or partition is required to meet code requirements for height-to-thickness ratio. UNIT MASONRY 04200-18 2980 D. Variate ' on in Cross-Sectional Dimensions : For columns and tt.'ckness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceec, minus 1/8 inch nor plus 1/4 inch. E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness : Do not exceed bed jci nt thickness indicated by more than plus or minus /8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 irt' h. Do not exceed head joint thickness indice„ ed by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. 3 . 03 LAYING- MASONRY WALLS A. Layout:; walls in advance for accurate spacing of surfaC bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to prc,aerly locate openings, movement-type joints, return;;a and offsets . Avoid the use of less-than-half size 'u,'hits at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other ocations . B. Lay-up. walls plumb and with courses level, accurately space&,and coordinated with other work. C. Patter I A Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown ' r, if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in course;'; above and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lappini not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each curse of each wythe at corners . Do not use units ' ith less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs . D. Stoppig and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2 masonry unit 1'' ngth in each course; do not tooth. Clean expose: surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if requir', d) and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior ': o laying fresh masonry. E. Built-' n Work: As the work progresses, build in items specified under this and other sections of these specifcations. Fill-in solidly with masonry around built- n items. 1. FLU space between hollow metal frames and masonry so.,'idly with mortar. 2 . Wh6re built-in items are to be embedded in cores of ;hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lai in the joint below and rod mortar or grout inilb core. 3 . Fi."U cores of concrete block with grout 3 courses (2 inches) deep under bearing plates, beams, lirFtels, posts and similar items. UNIT MASONRY 04200-17 2980 units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. H. Matching Existing Masonry Work: Match coursing, bonding, color and texture of new masonry work with existing work. I. Temporary Formwork: 1 . Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements . Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork. 2 . Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions, shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any) . Brace tie and support as required to maintain portion and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 3 . Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. 3 .02 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variations from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, or 1/4 inch in a story height not to exceed 20 feet, nor 3/8 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum, nor 3/8 inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. B. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum, nor 1/4 inch in 40 feet or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8 inch between adjacent floor elements in 10 feet or 1/16 inch within width of a single unit. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum, nor 3/8 inch in 40 feet or more. Awk UNIT MASONRY 04200-16 2980 2 . Usf "Coarse Grout" where specified. Proportion by vo. e; one part Portland cement, zero to 1/10 paijar lime, and fine aggregate (sand) equal to 2- 114:' to 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement an(,"; lime materials, and coarse aggregate equal to on(: to 2 times the sum of the volumes of cement anciiii4 lime materials . B. Mixing.,, Combine and mix cement, lime, water and aggregzA es for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch rl"xer. Add as much water as is required for workabi- ity. Do not use grout which has begun to set . 1 . Mi>:; grout to have a slump of 10 inches plus/minus 1 i;=' ch, at time of placement . C. Do not .: dd air-entraining agents or other admixtures to grotu materials. PART 3 - EXECL` ION 3 . 01 INSTALI',' TION A. Wettinc, Clay Brick: Wet brick made from clay or shale which 1 ve ASTM C67 initial rates of absorption (suctic ) of more than 30 grams per 30 square inches per mirlte. Use wetting methods which ensure each clay me; onry unit being nearly saturated but surface dry whe i laid. B. Do not 'f et concrete masonry units. C. Cleanir.1-.1 Reinforcing: Before placing unit masonry, remove ' oose rust, ice and other coatings from reinfor` ing. D. ThicknEi)S : Build cavity and composite walls, floors and otrr masonry construction to the full thickness shown. 'iBuild single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual ' hickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal', thickness indicated. E. Build cP' ases and recesses as shown and as required for the woTk of other trades. Provide not less than 8 inches f masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openinc , and between adjacent chases and recesses . F. Leave cj ' enings for equipment to be installed before complet',!=Lon of masonry work. After installation of equipmes t, complete masonry work to match work immedie ely adjacent to the opening. G. Cut ma:,R my units with motor-driven saw designed to cut ma:= my with clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut d UNIT MASONRY 04200-15 2980 those specified herein, and limit cement/lime ratio (by volume) as follows : 1 . Type N: For masonry veneer, non-load bearing walls and partitions, provide Type N mortar, minimum 750 psi at 28 days . Mortar proportions by volume shall be 1 part Portland cement; 1 part hydrated lime; and 5 parts aggregate. 2 . Type S : For load bearing walls and partitions, provide Type S mortar, minimum 1800 psi at 28 days . Mortar proportions by volume shall be one part Portland Cement; over 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime; and not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime shall be aggregate. 3 . Type M: For below grade masonry work, provide Type M mortar, minimum 2500 psi at 28 days . Mortar proportions by volume shall be one part Portland Cement; 1/4 part hydrated lime; and not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime shall be aggregate. C. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients, in quantities needed for immediate use. D. Add mortar color to mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations . Ensure uniformity of mix and coloration. E. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. F. Plasticizers, accelerators, retardants, water repellent agents and other admixtures shall not be added to the mortar mix unless approved by architect . G. Use mortar within two hours of mixing at temperatures over 74 degrees F. , and two and one half hours at temperatures over 50 degrees F. but under 74 degrees F. H. If necessary, retemper mortar within two hours of mixing to replace water lost by evaporation. Do not retemper mortar after two hours. 2 . 06 GROUT MIX A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C476 with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3, 000 psi, and the following: 1. Use "Fine Grout" where specified. Proportion by volume; one part Portland cement, zero to 1/10 part lime and sand equal to 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime materials. UNIT MASONRY 04200-14 2980 2 . 04 MORTAlil AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portl,<nd Cement : ASTM C150, Type I. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar',;: color. B. Hydra ,ed Lime: ASTM C207, Type S, special finishing hydraeed lime, non-air-entrained. C. Aggregate for Mortar: Sand, ASTM C144, or ASTM C404, Size 11 b. 2 except for joints 1/4 inch and less (if any) iIse aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. lr sieve. 1 . Pi ' vide "white" sand, if required to produce mc;; tar color selected. D. Fine 1 gregate for Grout : Sand, ASTM C33 or ASTM C404, ' ize No. 1 . E. Coars( Aggregate for Grout : ASTM C404, Size No. 8 or size P� 89 . E. F. Color(;;'d Mortar Pigments : Natural and synthetic iron oxide,J and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar,; mixes. Use only pigments with record of satisi` ctory performance in masonry mortars. Archie, ct will not be limited to "standard" colors . Provi( custom colors when color selected is not availz' le as one of manufacturer's standard colors . Provi(' one of the following products : 1. 5r;'„ ctrum Custom Colors; S. B. Green & Co. , Inc. , Wcp ertown, MA. 2 . SC Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind-Chem Services, 3 . Tr;" e Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors, A S'c'midiary of Rockwood Industries, Inc . G. Water:'' Clean and potable, free of deleterious materi;> is which would impair strength or bond, or which ;' y cause efflorescence. 2 .05 MORTAR MIX A. Measux ent : Use methods which will ensure that specili .ed proportions are controlled and accurately mainte'' ned. Measure aggregate materials in a damp, loose: ondition, use of a tile box or similar device is re(,". iired. B. Mortar= for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Propol ion Specifications, except limit materials to UNIT MASONRY 04200-13 2980 2 . 03 ACCESSORIES A. Concealed fabric flashings : Provide one of the following: 1 . Copper Fabric Flashing (5 ounce) ; Advanced Building Products, Inc. , Springvale, ME. 2 . Afco Copper Fabric (5 ounce) ; Afco Products, Inc. , Somerville, MA. 3 . York Copper Fabric (5 ounce) ; York Manufacturing Inc. , Sanford, ME. B. Cavity Wall Insulation, Extruded Polystyrene Board: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C578 for Type indicated; with 5 year aged "R" values of 5.4 and 5 . 0 at 40 and 75 degrees F respectively; and as follows : 1 . Type IV, 1. 6 lb. /cu. ft . min. density, 25 psi compressive strength. 2 . Surface Burning Characteristics : Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 5 and 165 respectively. C. Vertical Expansion Joint Strips : Provide one of the following: 1 . AA3410 Joint Tite; AA Wire Products Company. 2 . Rapid Expansion Joint; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 3 . No. 26020; National Wire Products Industries, Inc. D. Horizontal Expansion Joint Strips: Provide one of the following: 1 . Emseal Greyflex; Emseal Corporation. 2 . Will-Seal Tape Type 250; Illbruck/USA, Will-Seal Division. E. Premolded Control Joint Strips : Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall. Provide one of the following: 1 . AA1100; AA Wire Products Company. 2 . D/A 2001; Dur-O-Wall, Inc. 3 . No. 26021; National Wire Products Industries, Inc. F. Plastic Rectangular Weeps: 3/8 inch by 1-1/2 inch by 3-1/2 inches long; clear butyrate; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. #342 . G. Plastic Bearing Strips : Korolath-NS plastic bearing strips by Korolath Corporation, Hudson, MA or equal . 1 . Provide 3 by 8 by 1/8 inch thick plastic bearing strips with one non-skid surface and one smooth surface. UNIT MASONRY 04200-12 2980 ak, Anchors : Hohmann & Barnard DW-10-X by 3 inches, 12 gauge stainless steel (no substitutions) . b' Ties: Hohmann & Barnard Box Tie with moisture drips, 1/4 inch diameter stainless steel (no substitutions) . Length as required. c'':` Sealer Tape: Hohmann & Barnard Textroseal . d " Fabco H-3 (300 Series) Stainless Steel Topseal Screw, 14 x 4 inches, assembled with 20 gauge stainless steel bonded EPDM washer or equal . 2 . F6V brick veneer over concrete and concrete ne onry unit back-up, provide the following: a., Anchors: Hohmann & Barnard DW-10-X by 2-1/2 inches, 12 gauge stainless steel (no substitutions) . b - Ties: Hohmann & Barnard Box Tie with moisture drips, 1/4 inch diameter stainless steel (no substitutions) . Length as required. C., Sealer Tape: Hohmann & Barnard Textroseal . d,;` Screws : Type 304 stainless steel, 1/4 inch diameter, 4 inches long; Rawl Tapper by The Rawlplug Company, Inc. , or equal. 3 . A:� an option to the above systems, the Contractor mZ V use the following system, components as mzi ufactured by Fero Corporation, Edmonton, A7 erta, Canada (no substitutions) : a. Anchors : Fero Slotted L-Plate, formed from 16 gauge stainless steel . b Ties: Fero V-Tie, formed from 4 .76 mm diameter wire, stainless steel . c.'� Insulation Support : Fero Insulation Support, manufactured from polyethylene. d. Screws for Metal Stud application: Fabco H-3 (300 Series) Stainless Steel Topseal Screw, 14 x 4 inches, assembled with 20 gauge stainless steel bonded EPDM washer or equal. Provide two (2) screws per anchor. e.; Screws for CMU or Concrete application: Fabco H-3 (300 Series) Stainless Steel Topseal Screw, 14 x 4 inches, assembled with 20 gauge stainless steel bonded EPDM washer or equal . Provide two (2) screws per anchor. E. Struct; ral Framing Anchors: Provide weld-on type, adjust 5Lble steel anchors and 1/4 inch diameter box ties v 'th moisture drips, hot-dip galvanized after fabric;; tion: 1. AP 01G; AA Wire Products Company. 2 . Nc• 359; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 3 . D/1709-711; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 3a3 UNIT MASONRY 04200-11 2980 4 . Where fire-rated walls are required, provide units which conform to Underwriters Laboratories (UL) "look for hourly requirements indicated. 5 . Where vertical reinforcing is indicated in unit masonry walls, provide 2 core concrete block. C. Concrete Building Brick: Provide units complying with ASTM C55 and characteristics indicated below for grade, type, size and weight classification. 1 . Grade: Same as indicated for concrete block. 2 . Type: Same as indicated for concrete block. 3 . Size: Standard. 4 . Weight Classification: Normal weight. 2 . 02 REINFORCING AND ANCHORS A. Reinforcing steel for bond beams, lintel blocks and vertical and horizontal wall reinforcing shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60 for No. 4 bars and larger and Grade 40 for No. 3 bars . B. Rigid steel anchors for concrete block intersecting walls shall be Z type; hot-dip galvanized; 1/4 inch by 1-1/2 inch wide by 24 inches long with 2 inch bent ends . Provide one of the following: 1 . AA211Z; AA Wire Products Company. 2 . D/A 301Z; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 3 . No. 140; Heckmann Building Products, Inc. C. Horizontal joint reinforcing shall be ladder type, steel construction with 3/16 inch diameter side rods and 9 gage cross rods, and of a width of approximately 2 inches less than thickness of wall. Cross rods shall be spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. Joint reinforcing shall be fabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10 feet with matching pre-fabricated corner and intersection units. Joint reinforcing shall be fabricated from cold-drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A82 and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 ounces zinc coating per square foot of wire surface in accordance with ASTM A153, Class B-2 . 1. For single wythe walls: Blok-Lok AA500 by AA Wire Products Co. or equal . 2 . For brick veneer cavity walls with block back-up and insulation: Adjustable Econo-Cavity Lok II AA580 by AA Wire Products Co. or equal . 3 . For brick veneer cavity walls with block back-up (no insulation) : Adjustable Econo-Eye-Lok AA525 by AA Wire Products Co. or equal. D. Veneer Anchors 1. For brick veneer over metal studs and sheathing, provide the following: UNIT MASONRY 04200-10 2980 b. Provide special shapes for applications where , shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed J surfaces being exposed to view. 3 . Fac; Brick: ASTM C216 and as follows: a. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide : units with grade and minimum average net-area 'ecompressive strength indicated below: 1) Grade: SW. 2) Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce clay masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. b. '� Initial Rate of Absorption: Between 5 and 20 g/30 sq. in. (g/194 sq. cm) per minute when 4tested per ASTM C67 . C. Type: FBS. d. =;" Size: Bricks manufactured to the following (: actual dimensions within tolerances specified in ASTM C216: 1) Modular: 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm) thick by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 7-1/2 to 7-5/8 inches (190 to 194 mm) long. e. Brick shall be rated "no efflorescence" when , tested in accordance with ASTM C67, Section 10 . f. ,,Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. g. 'Where shown to "match existing, " provide face ,brick matching color, texture, and size of = existing adjacent brickwork. h. '!Color and Texture: Match Architect 's samples . i. Products : Subject to compliance with ,requirements, provide the following: ."1) Boston Colonial as manufactured by K F Brick. B. Concret!: Block: ASTM C90, hollow load-bearing concret masonry units, Grade N, Type I (moisture- controlOd units) , modular size complete with corners, and fil'>''ers to match and complement block units; standar;' weight. 1. Wei ht Classification: Normal weight, except whe' e medium weight or light weight concrete block is required for fire rating. 2 . Agg" egates: ASTM C33 . a. Do not use aggregates made from pumice, scoria, or tuff . 3 . Siz'A: : Manufactured to the actual dimensions lis! ed below (within tolerances specified in the app, icable referenced ASTM specification) for the cor' esponding nominal sizes indicated on Drawings: 3 . Exp4'sed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. OOW 3q ( UNIT MASONRY F 04200-9 2980 drop below 35 degrees F. during the next 24 hour period, provide a complete enclosure of the masonry work and auxiliary heat to maintain an air ' temperature of at least 40 degrees F. for 48 hours - after laying masonry. a. For masonry materials not stored within the heated enclosure and for mortar not mixed or stored within the heated enclosure, perform construction procedures stipulated in IMIAWC "Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry. " b. Maintain at the Project Site, a copy of the document "Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry" as published by the International Masonry Institute All Weather Council. 2 . For clay masonry units with initial rates of absorption (suction) which require them to be wetted before laying, comply with the following requirements. a. For units with surface temperatures above 32 degrees, wet with water heated to above 70 degrees . b. For units with surface temperatures below 32 degrees, wet with water heated to above 130 degrees F. F. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout . Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do-not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and above. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MASONRY UNITS A. Face Brick: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required. 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces . 2 . Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. a. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels . UNIT MASONRY 04200-8 2980 C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1 .09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls, projections, and sills with heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each day' s work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress . 1 . Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2 . Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns . C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately all grout, mortar, and soil that comes in contact with such masonry. 1 . Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2 . Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings . 3 . Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings . 4 . Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. D. Use plywood or some other rigid sheet material to protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar and falling brick, block and other objects during construction. E. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost . Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions . Comply with the following requirements: 1. When air temperatures are below 40 degrees F. or when anticipated air temperatures are forecast to 3g� w UNIT MASONRY 04200-7 2980 3 . Build mockup of typical wall area as indicated on Drawings or as directed by the Architect . a. Include exterior face brick wall with window opening framed with precast trim. b. Include window complying with requirements of Section 08520 . c. Seal perimeter of window complying with requirements of Section 07900 . d. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements of Section 07900 . e. Typical exterior brick-veneer wall complete with metal studs, sheathing, veneer ties, flashing, and weep holes . 4 . Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner indicated. 5. Reconstruct mock-ups as many as two more times, if required by Architect, for approval. 6. Protect mock-ups from the elements with weather resistant membrane. 7 . Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Acceptance of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Acceptance of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. c. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings . " 1 .08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes . If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried condition. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 'AN. UNIT MASONRY 04200-6 2980 1 . Clay Masonry Unit Test : For each different clay masonry unit indicated, test units per ASTM C67 . 2 . Concrete Masonry Unit Test : For each different concrete masonry unit indicated, test units for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C140 . 3 . Mortar Tests : a. Evaluate mortar composition and properties per ASTM C780 . b. Test each mortar type which will be exposed to weather for efflorescence in accordance with the "wick test" procedure in BIA Research Report No. 15, "The Causes and Control of Efflorescence in Brickwork, " Section 4.4, page 14 . Mortar mixes which show efflorescence shall not be used in the work. 4 . Test grout compressive strength per ASTM C1019 . D. Fire-Resistance Ratings : Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required. F. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. G. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry, construct sample wall panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as other qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mock-ups on site in locations indicated or, if not indicated, where directed by the Architect. a. Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels adjacent and parallel to existing surface. 2 . Consult and verify specific requirements with Architect before proceeding with construction of mock-ups. UNIT MASONRY 04200-5 2980 1 . Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor acceptance of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of the Architect and approved in writing. F. Submit material test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory employed and paid by Contractor indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated: 1 . Mortar. 2 . Grout mixes, including description of type and proportions of grout ingredients . 3 . Masonry units . G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. H. Submit cold-weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard. I. Submit hot-weather construction procedures evidencing compliance with requirements specified in referenced unit masonry standard. 1 . 07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified professional engineer to provide a survey and inspection of foundations for compliance with dimensional tolerances. B. Testing Agency Qualifications : To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect 's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM C1093, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. C. Preconstruction Testing: Employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following preconstruction testing to establish compliance of proposed materials and construction with specified requirements: UNIT MASONRY 04200-4 2980 B. Mill Certificates : Submit 2 copies of steel �, producer' s certificates of mill tests for all reinforcing stock. C. Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars . Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" . Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements an assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcing for unit masonry work. D. Samples : 1. For initial selection of color and texture, submit the following: a. Facing brick samples showing full range of colors and textures available in products complying with specified requirements . Furnish samples made up of actual bricks or sections of brick. Following preliminary selection of colors and textures submit samples consisting of 5 individual bricks for each color and texture under consideration. Include in each set the maximum variation to be expected in finished work. b. Colored masonry mortar samples showing full range of colors available. 2 . For verification purposes submit the following: a. Facing brick samples for each type of exposed brick required. Included in each set the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in the completed work. b. Special shape masonry units . c. Concrete block units for each type of exposed unit required. d. Colored mortar samples for each color required showing the full range of color which can be expected in the finished work. Label samples to indicate type and amount of colorant used. e. Masonry accessories including rigid insulation, anchors, ties, reinforcing, fabric flashing, plastic weeps, control and expansion joint strips, and all other accessory items required. E. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: Submit a list generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers ' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to specifically identify exact materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. UNIT MASONRY 04200-3 Ir 2980 F. Other products indicated on the Drawings as being built into masonry. 1 . 04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section 03450 - Architectural Precast Concrete. C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications . D. Section 05810 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies. E. Section 07190 - (SRAB) Vapor Barriers : Sheet rubberized asphalt barrier. F. Section 07210 - Building Insulation. G. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim. H. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers . I. Section 08110 - Steel Doors And Frames . J. Section 08305 - Access Doors . K. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows. L. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. M. Section 09900 - Painting. 1 .05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f 'm) : 1 . For clay unit masonry: f 'm = 1500 psi . 2 . For concrete unit masonry: f 'm = 1500 psi. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's specifications and product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements . Include instructions for handling, storage, installation and protection. UNIT MASONRY 04200-2 2980 SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The work of this section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 . Concrete unit masonry, bearing and non-bearing walls and interior partitions, complete with reinforcement and anchorages . 2 . Face brick. 3 . Build in precast concrete lintels and sills . 4 . Freestanding masonry walls and retaining walls . 5 . Repair and remodeling at existing construction. 6 . Reuse existing face brick where indicated. 7 . Through wall fabric flashing for cavity walls . 8 . Rigid insulation in cavity walls . 9 . Mortar and grout for masonry. 10 . Grout fill for bond beams, door frames and lintels . 11 . Form control joints in masonry. 12 . Build-in items furnished by other trades . 13 . Cut and fit for other sections of work. 1 .02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Dovetail anchor slots to be cast in concrete are installed under Section 03300 . 1.03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Precast concrete trim units to be built into masonry are furnished under Section 03450 . B. Loose steel lintels and other fabricated metal items to be built into masonry are furnished under Section 05500. C. Sheet metal flashings to be built into masonry are furnished under Section 07620 . D. Access doors to be built into masonry are furnished under Section 08305 . E. Inserts for anchoring elevator rails are furnished under Section 14240 . 383 UNIT MASONRY 04200-1 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PREPARATION A. Mix and apply primer and floor underlayment in strict accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations and installation instructions . Use mixing equipment and tools approved by the floor underlayment manufacturer. 1. Add aggregate to mixes only where allowed by manufacturer (for thicker applications) . B. Pour or pump self-leveling concrete underlayment and spread in place. Smooth underlayment where featheredge or touch-up is required to produce a uniform, level surface. 3 . 02 PROTECTION A. Prohibit foot traffic from crossing self-leveling underlayment for at least 4 hours after installation. Prohibit wheel traffic from crossing self-leveling underlayment for at least 7 days after installation. END OF SECTION CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT 03551-4 r 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Self-Leveling Underlayment : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or equal : 1 . ARDEX K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment; ARDEX, Inc. , Coraopolis, PA. 2 . Thoro Underlayment, Self Leveling; Thoro System Products, Miami, FL. 3 . Sonoflow; Sonneborn ChemRex, Inc . , Shakopee, MN. B. Trowelable Underlayment : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or equal: 1. ARDEX SD-F Feather Finish Underlayment; ARDEX, Inc. , Coraopolis, PA. 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Self-Leveling Underlayment : Manufacturer' s specially formulated Portland cement-based self-leveling underlayment and shall conform to the following minimum properties : 1 Compressive Strength, ASTM C349/157; minimum 3500 psi after 28 days . 2 Flexural Strength, ASTM C348, 1000 psi after 28 days . 3 Tensile Strength, ASTM C348, 950 psi after 28 days . 4 Tensile Bond, ASTM C501; 200 psi after 28 days . 5 Flammability, ASTM E84 : a. Flame Spread 0 b. Fuel Contribution 0 c. Smoke Development 0 B. Trowelable Underlayment : Manufacturer' s specially formulated Portland cement-based, self-drying, trowelable underlayment, capable of being troweled to a feather edge. C. Primers for porous and non-porous surfaces shall be as furnished by underlayment manufacturer. D. Additives, if required, shall be as furnished by underlayment manufacturer. E. Water shall be clean, potable, and sufficiently cool. $� CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT 03551-3 2980 4 . Floor underlayment shall be walkable after 2 hours at 70 degrees F and be able to be covered by flooring material within 12 to 16 hours . 1 .04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, manufacturer's product data describing products and methods of mixing and application instructions . B. Certificates : Submit test reports certified by an independent testing laboratory stating that materials and mix intended to be used meet specified requirements . 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications : Engage an experienced Installer who has completed systems similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications : Firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in- service performance. 1 . 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer' s original undamaged packages or acceptable bulk containers. B. Store packaged materials to protect them from elements or physical damage. C. Do not use cement underlayment which shows indications of moisture damage, caking, or other signs of deterioration. 1 .07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not place concrete underlayment if the temperature of the subfloor, the air and the underlayment materials are below 45 degrees F. during application and for 24 hours after application. Protect from freezing, wind, and direct exposure to sun for 24 hours after application. A"" CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT 03551-2 2980 SECTION 03551 CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes : 1. Self-leveling cementitious floor underlayment . 2 . Trowelable (feather edge finish) cementitious floor underlayment . 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching. B. Section 02070 - Selective Demolition. C. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. D. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. E. Section 09660 - Resilient Tile Flooring. F. Section 09680 - Carpet . 1 . 03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Self-leveling cementitious floor underlayment system consists of a primer and a mix of special cements and binders which, when mixed with water, becomes a highly liquid cement compound that seeks its own level and produces a smooth and level surface. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Floor underlayment shall be applied to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch over the highest points of the subfloor, but may be featheredged to match the existing elevations. Where metal lath is used, the minimum thickness of the underlayment shall be 3/8 inch or 1/8 inch coverage over top of lath. 2 . Floor underlayment shall have a compressive strength of approximately 3500 psi after 28 days, as per ASTM C349/157 . 3 . Surface of floor underlayment shall be uniform in texture and appearance, and comply to tolerances of F(F) 25 (floor flatness) and F(L) 20 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E1155. 319 CEMENTITIOUS FLOOR UNDERLAYMENT 03551-1 2980 B. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not meet requirements . 3 . 05 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units after erection to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. 1 . Wash and rinse according to architectural precast concrete fabricator ' s recommendations . Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations . 2 . Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed architectural precast concrete finishes . END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-16 2980 grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, plumb, and level with adjacent concrete surfaces . Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set . Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it hardens . 3 . 03 ERECTION AND LOCATION TOLERANCES A. Install architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and true, without exceeding the recommended erection and location tolerances of MNL- 117 . B. Erection Tolerances : Install architectural precast concrete units so that each unit after erection complies with following dimensional requirements : 1 . Concave or convex bowing of any part of a flat surface not to exceed length of bow/360, with a maximum of 1 inch (25 mm) and up to 30 feet (9 m) . 2 . Maximum warpage of 1 corner out of plane of other 3, the greater of 1/16 inch (1 . 6 mm) per 12 inch (300 mm) distance from nearest adjacent corner. C. Tolerances for Location of Architectural Precast Units : Fabricate and erect architectural precast concrete units so that joints between units do not exceed the following. Alignment for exterior units is outside face. 1. Face Width of Joints: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) . 2 . Joint Taper: 1/40 inch per 12 inch length (1:480) , with maximum length of taper over 10 feet (3 m) of 1/4 inch (6 mm) . 3 . Step in Face: 1/4 inch (6 mm) . 4 . Jog in Alignment of Edges : 1/4 inch (6 mm) . 5. Jog in Alignment of Reveals: 1/4 inch (6 mm) . 6. Plumb in Any 10 Feet (3 m) of Element Height : 1/4 inch (6 mm) . 7 . Variation from Level: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any 40 foot (12 m) run. 8 . Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) for exposed individual panel; 1/4 inch (6 mm) exposed relative to adjacent panel. 3 .04 REPAIRS A. Repair exposed exterior surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding concrete when permitted by Architect . 3 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-15 2980 including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and finishes . Replace with architectural precast concrete units that meet requirements . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of architectural precast concrete units . Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION A. Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and back-up materials . B. Install architectural precast concrete units plumb, level, and in alignment . Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being permanently connected. 1 . Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses . 2 . Remove projecting hoisting devices and cement- grout fill recessed hoisting devices. C. Anchor architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring and grouting are completed. D. Welding: Perform welding in compliance with AWS D1 .1 and AWS D1.4, with qualified welders . 1 . Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or cutting operations and provide non-combustible shields as required. 2 . Repair damaged steel surfaces by cleaning and repriming damaged painted surfaces. E. At bolted connections use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nuts. F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-14 2980 1 . Allow Owner' s testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production equipment, concrete placement, and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner' s testing agency and provide samples of materials and concrete mixes as may be requested for additional testing and evaluation. B. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect architectural precast concrete according to MNL-117 requirements. C. Strength of architectural precast concrete units will be considered deficient when they fail to comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements . D. Testing: When there is evidence that the strength of architectural precast concrete units may be deficient or may not meet ACI 318 (ACI 318M) requirements, the Owner will employ an independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength according to ASTM C42 . 1 . A minimum of 3 representative cores will be taken from architectural precast concrete units of suspect strength, from locations directed by Architect . 2 . Cores will be tested in an air-dry condition. 3 . Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory if the average compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength. 4. Test results will be made in writing on the same day that tests are made, with copies to Architect, Contractor, and precast fabricator. Test reports will include the Project identification name and number, date, name of precast concrete fabricator, name of concrete testing agency; identification letter, name, and type of architectural precast concrete unit or units represented by core tests; design compressive strength, compressive strength at break and type of break, corrected for length- diameter ratio, and direction of applied load to core with respect to horizontal plane of concrete as placed. E. Patching: Where core test results are satisfactory and architectural precast concrete units meet requirements, solidly fill core holes with patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces . F. Defective Work: Discard architectural precast concrete units that do not conform to requirements, 37 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-13 2980 E. Thickness : Minus 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) , plus 1/4 inch (6 mm) . A F. Locations of Reveals and Architectural Features : Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) . G. Other Dimensional Tolerances : Numerically the greater of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1 . 6 mm) per 10 feet (3 m) , or plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) . H. Position Tolerances : For cast-in items measured from datum line, locations as shown on Shop Drawings as follows : 1 . Inserts : Plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm) . 2 . Weld Plates : Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) . 3 . Handling Devices : Plus or minus 3 inches (76 mm) . 4 . Block Outs and Reinforcements : Within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of position shown on Shop Drawings, where such positions have structural implications or affect concrete cover; otherwise within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) . 2 .12 FINISHES A. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units as follows to match Architect ' s design reference sample. 1 . Smooth Surface Finish: a. PCI and APA "Architectural Precast Concrete - Color and Texture Selection Guide, " plate number 103SB-M, (sandblasted-medium) , composed of the following: 1) Cement : White. 2) Fine Aggregate: Crushed white marble. 3) Coarse Aggregate: 5/8 to 9/32 inch white quartz. 2 . Smooth-surface finish free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs, with uniform color and texture. B. Finish exposed-back surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by smooth, steel-trowel finish. C. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by float finish. 2 .13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner may employ an independent testing agency to j evaluate architectural precast concrete fabricator's quality control and testing methods . AWN ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-12 2980 on Shop Drawings . Imprint casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in the finished structure. K. Cure concrete according to the requirements of MNL-117 by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing, using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. L. Delay detensioning architectural precast concrete units until concrete has reached its indicated minimum design release compressive strength as established by test cylinders cured under the same conditions as the concrete. M. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true. 1. Edge and Corner Treatment : Uniformly chamfered. N. Discard architectural precast concrete units that are warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or otherwise defective unless repairs are permitted by Architect and meet requirements . 2 .11 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Comply with the following overall height and width dimensional tolerances of finished units measured at face adjacent to mold at time of casting: 1 . 10 Feet (3 m) or Less : Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) . 2 . 10 to 20 Feet (3 to 6 m) : Plus 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) , minus 3/16 inch (5 mm) . 3 . 20 to 40 Feet (6 to 12 m) : Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) . 4. Each Additional 10 Feet (3 m) : Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1 .6 mm) per 10 feet (3 m) . B. Angular Deviation of Plane of Side Mold: Plus or minus 1/32 inch (0 .8 mm) per 3 inch (76 mm) depth or plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) total, whichever is greater. C. Openings Within One Unit: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) , except plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) for windows and door frames. D. Out of Square: Difference in length of two diagonal measurements of 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) per 72 inches (1829 mm) or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total, whichever is greater. 31�2 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-11 2980 holes may be field cut by trades requiring them when permitted by Architect . E. Reinforcement : Comply with the recommendations of CRSI ' s "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement . 1 . Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. 2 . Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete placement and consolidation operations . Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces . Do not use plastic-coated or uncoated metal chair supports . 3 . Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum cover after finishing. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces . 4 . Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. F. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses . G. Mix concrete according to MNL-117 and requirements of this Section. Following concrete batching, no additional water may be added. H. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from developing in precast units. Comply with requirements of MNL-117 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. 1. Place back-up concrete to ensure bond with face concrete. I. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items. Use equipment and procedures complying with MNL-117 . 1. Comply with ACI 306R procedures for cold-weather concrete placement . 2 . Comply with ACI 305R procedures for hot-weather concrete placement. J. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-10 2980 used on the Project, to provide lightweight concrete with the following properties : 1 . Compressive Strength (28-Day) : 5000 psi (34 . 5 MPa) . 2 . Unit Weight : Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 115 lb/cu. ft . (1842 kg/cu. m) , plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft . (48 kg/cu. m) , according to ASTM C567 . H. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in lightweight concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with MNL-117 requirements . I. When included in design mixes, add other admixtures to concrete mixes according to manufacturer 's directions . 2 . 09 MOLDS A. Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete-placing operations, temperature changes, and for pretensioning and detensioning operations . B. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified. 2 .10 FABRICATION A. Accurately position cast-in anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other anchorage hardware for attachment of loose hardware and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect the position of the main reinforcement or the placing of concrete. B. Supply loose steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes not provided by other trades necessary for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent members. C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units to receive windows, cramps, dowels, reglets, waterstops, flashings, and other similar work as indicated. Coordinate with other trades for installation of cast- in items. D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension according to Shop Drawings. Other smaller ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 3� � 03450-9 2980 agents, complying with ASTM C1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30-minute working time. 2 . 07 STONE ACCESSORIES A. Anchors : Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 304, of temper and diameter required to support loads without exceeding allowable design stresses . B. Bond Breaker: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-staining, non-waxing, closed-cell polyethylene foam pad, non-absorbent to liquid and gas, 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) thick. 2 . 08 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each t_,-pe of concrete required. B. Design mixes may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified architectural precast manufacturing plant personnel at architectural precast fabricator's option. C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) . D. Normal-Weight Concrete Face and Back-Up Mixes: Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211 .1, using materials to be used on the Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties : 1 . Compressive Strength (28-Day) : 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) . 2 . Maximum Water-Cement Ratio at Point of Placement: 0 .40 . E. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with MNL-117 requirements. F. Water Absorption: 12 to 14 percent by volume tested according to MNL-117; except provide 8 to 10 percent by volume for sloped or horizontal surfaces. G. Lightweight Concrete Back-Up Mixes : Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211 .2, using materials to be ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-8 2980 H. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of non- ,_ ? galvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements of SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply primer according to SSPC- PA 1 . 1. Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, VOC-conforming, universal modified-alkyd primer with good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, complying with SSPC-Paint 25 or the performance requirements of FS TT-P-664 . I. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards . J. Accessories : Provide clips, hangers, plastic shims, and other accessories required to install architectural precast concrete units . 2 . 05 BEARING PADS A. Provide bearing pads for architectural precast concrete units as follows : 1 . Elastomeric Pads : AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100 percent polychloroprene (neoprene) elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, 50 to 70 shore A durometer, minimum tensile strength 2250 psi (15 .5 MPa) per ASTM D412 . 2 . Random, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads : Preformed, randomly oriented synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Surface hardness of 70 to 90 shore A durometer. 3 . Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads : Preformed, horizontally layered cotton-duck fabric, bonded in elastomer. Surface hardness of 80 to 100 shore A durometer. 4 . Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) , glass-fiber-reinforced, bonded to mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress . 5 . High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, non-leaching, plastic strip. 2 .06 GROUT MATERIALS A. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. B. Non-metallic, Non-shrink Grout: Premixed, non- metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage- compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-7 2980 B. Normal-Weight Aggregates : ASTM C33 , with coarse aggregates meeting Class 5S and MNL-117 requirements . 1 . Face-Mix Coarse Aggregates : Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining. a. Gradation: Uniformly graded. 2 . Face-Mix Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of the same material as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect . C. Lightweight Aggregates : ASTM C330 . D. Coloring Agent : ASTM C979, synthetic mineral oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, color stable, non-fading, resistant to lime and other alkalis . E. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete. F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures . G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. H. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type B. 2 .04 CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Malleable Iron Castings : ASTM A47 (ASTM A47M) . B. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars : ASTM A675, Grade 65 (ASTM A675M, Grade 450) . C. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts : ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M) , Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. D. Welded Headed Studs: AWS D1 .1, Type B headed studs, cold-finished carbon-steel bars . E. Deformed-Steel Wire Bar Anchors: ASTM A496. F. Stainless-Steel Plate: ASTM A666, Type 304, of grade suitable for application. G. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F593, alloy 304 or 316, hex-head bolts and studs; stainless-steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers . ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-6 2980 1 . 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING i A. Deliver precast concrete units to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking, distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are visible. B. Lift and support units only at designated lifting or supporting points shown on Shop Drawings. 1 .07 SEQUENCING A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MOLD MATERIALS A. Forms: Provide forms and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or another acceptable material that is non-reactive with concrete and will produce required finish surfaces . 2 . 02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 (ASTM A615M, Grade 400) , deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A706, Grade 60 (ASTM A706M, Grade 400) . C. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A767 (ASTM A767M) , Class II, 2 oz. /sq. ft . (610 g/sq. m) zinc, hot-dip galvanized. D. Steel-Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, plain, cold drawn. 2 .03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement : ASTM C150, Type I or Type III. j 1. Use only one brand, type, and color of cement from the same mill throughout Project. 2 . Standard gray Portland cement may be used for non- exposed back-up concrete. ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-5 J 2980 finish of stones installed, in both wet and dry condition. Results of these additional tests will be used to determine compliance with Project requirements . E. PCI Design Standard: Comply with recommendations of PCI ' s MNL-120 "PCI Design Handbook--Precast and Prestressed Concrete" applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated. F. PCI Quality-Control Standard: Comply with requirements of PCI 's MNL-117 "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products, " including manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required. G. ACI Publications : Comply with applicable provisions of the following ACI publications : 1 . ACI 318 (ACI 318M) "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. " H. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1 .1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel" and AWS D1 .4 "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel. " 1 . Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. I. Field samples, approximately 36 by 48 inches (900 by 1200 mm) , of architectural precast concrete; in sets of 3 for each finish, color, and texture required, demonstrating the range of variations expected in these characteristics . 1 . In presence of Architect, damage part of an exposed-face surface and demonstrate materials and methods proposed for repair of surface blemishes . J. Design modifications may be made as necessary to meet field conditions and to ensure proper fitting of the Work as acceptable to Architect. Maintain general design concept shown without increasing or decreasing sizes of architectural precast concrete units or altering profiles and alignments shown. Revise and submit complete design calculations and Drawings prepared by a qualified professional engineer when design modifications are required. K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings. " ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-4 2980 I. Submit material certificates in lieu of agency test reports, when permitted by Architect, signed by fabricator certifying that each material item complies with requirements . 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications : Engage a firm experienced in producing architectural precast concrete units similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. 1 . Fabricator must participate in the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute ' s (PCI) Plant Certification Program and be designated a PCI Certified Plant for Group Al - Architectural Concrete. 2 . Fabricator shall be registered and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing Agency Qualifications : To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect 's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. C. Professional Engineer Qualifications : A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of precast concrete units that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent . D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform the preconstruction testing indicated. 1. Test each variety of stone for compliance with physical property requirements specified in referenced ASTM standard specifications. Conduct tests using specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. 2 . Flexural Strength Tests: For stone facing thinner than that required for modulus of rupture test specimens per ASTM C99, additional flexural strength tests per ASTM C880 will be performed on specimens representative of minimum thickness and 3 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-3 2980 architectural precast concrete units . Indicate member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement . Include locations and details of hoisting points and lifting devices for handling and erection. 1 . Indicate separate face and back-up mix locations and thicknesses . 2 . Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols . Detail loose, cast-in, and field hardware, inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories . 3 . Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices that are to be embedded in other construction. 4 . For architectural precast concrete units indicated to comply with performance requirements, include engineering analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples: Submit design reference sample for initial selection, approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm) , to illustrate quality of finishes, colors, and textures of exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units . D. Samples : Submit samples for verification, approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm) , to illustrate quality of finishes, colors, and textures of exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units. E. Submit welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. F. Submit VOC compliance certificates signed by manufacturers certifying compliance of their products with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over volatile organic compounds (VOCs) . G. Submit design mixes for each concrete mix. H. Submit material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance with requirements of the following based on comprehensive testing of current materials : 1. Concrete materials. 2 . Reinforcing materials . 3 . Prestressing strands . 4 . Admixtures . 5. Bearing pads. 6. Water-absorption test reports. ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST Afts 03450-2 2980 SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes architectural precast concrete units, plant cast. B. Products Furnished but not Installed Under this Section: 1. Architectural precast concrete units (to be built into unit masonry) are installed under the work of Section 04200 . 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry facing, pointing mortar, and anchorages . B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim: Flashing receivers and reglets . C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Elastomeric joint sealants and sealant backings. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install architectural precast concrete units to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for architectural precast concrete units. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, product data and instructions for manufactured materials and products . B. Submit shop drawings prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication and installation of 3E'J ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE - PLANT CAST 03450-1 2924 C. Joints shall not be sealed or grouted until just prior to substantial completion of the entire project . All debris shall be thoroughly cleaned from all joints prior to installing sealants and grout. Refer to alternate method of creating control joints at unexposed slabs described on Section 03300 . 3 . 05 . 3 . 15 WATERSTOPS A. Waterstops shall be securely held in place to prevent displacement during concrete placements. All necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure homogeneous concrete surrounding the waterstop. B. All straight run, connecting and intersecting joints shall be securely spliced in accordance with the manufacturer' s recommendations. Spliced joints shall provide bond at least equal to the strength of the waterstop section. 3 . 16 PERIMETER INSULATION FOR FOUNDATION WALLS A. Refer to Architectural drawings for the location of all perimeter insulation for foundation walls. B. Material shall be installed according to the manufacturer' s instructions. END OF SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-19 361 2924 3 . 11 FLOOR SEALING AND HARDENING A. Except as noted in item "B" below, floor surfaces, after hardening sufficiently to prevent damage and normally within several hours after final troweling, shall be treated with floor sealer in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations . Refer to item 2 . 01 .K. B. All floor surfaces in mechanical/electrical rooms and elevator machine rooms shall be treated with a liquid chemical hardener in accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations . Refer to Section 03300-2 . 01 .Q. C. No chemical hardener or sealer shall be used at concrete floor slabs scheduled to receive an adhered floor finish. 3 . 12 EPDXY BONDING A. Where required, new concrete shall be bonded to hardened new concrete or existing concrete in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer' s instructions. 3 . 13 CLEANING A. The exposed faces of the cast-in-place concrete shall be cleaned of all stains, water marks, and leaked fines. 3 . 14 FILLING OF SAW-CUT JOINTS IN PAVING SLABS A. Saw-cut joints which are in slabs to be exposed in the completed structure shall be filled with the joint sealant specified in Section 03300-2 . 01.0 in accordance with the manufacturer' s recommendations. B. Saw-cut joints which are in slabs to be covered in the completed structure shall be filled flush to the slab surface with non-shrink grout. i I CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-18 �► 2924 2 . When the average daily temperature falls below 40 degrees F. , prepare concrete with heated materials such that the concrete delivered to the forms shall have a temperature of at least 60 degrees F. , and not over 90 degrees F. Prewarm the forms to at least 40 degrees F. , to prevent the rapid cooling of the concrete by their contact; keep forms free of all ice and snow. When heated materials are being used, combine the water with the aggregate in the mixer and keep the resulting temperature below 90 degrees F. before cement is added to the mix. Protect all concrete by the use of heated enclosures which must be sufficiently strong and windproof and within which adequate heaters are properly distributed to maintain all concrete at the required temperatures. Do not allow heaters to locally heat or dry the concrete and do maintain adequate fire precautions . 3 . 09 ACCEPTANCE A. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the required strength, the Architect shall have the right to require, at the Contractor' s expense, mix redesign, load tests and/or strengthening as directed, and/or removal and replacement of those parts of the structure in which such concrete was used. 3 . 10 CUTTING OF HOLES A. Cut holes required by other trades in any cast-in-place concrete which did not receive sleeves. Use a core drilling process or sawing process which produces clean sharp edges and the minimum hole size which accommodates the piping, conduit, or equipment requiring the opening. Locations of holes and payment for this work will be by other trades. B. Obtain approval of Architect before cutting any holes for any trades. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-17 3� 2924 C. Cure floor slabs by covering with sisal or other '" waterproof curing paper conforming to ASTM Specifications C 171, lapped 4 inches at edges and sealed with tape at least 3 inches wide . The paper shall be weighted to prevent displacement, and holes or tears shall be immediately repaired. The Contractor may submit for the approval of the Architect alternative methods of curing non-exposed concrete surfaces. Approval of alternatives shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the proper curing of all concrete. D. In hot weather, be adequately prepared to protect the concrete from the adverse influence of heat before the placement of any concrete. Take special precautions to avoid cracking of the concrete from rapid drying during placement of concrete when air temperature exceeds 70 degrees F. , particularly when the work is exposed to direct sunlight . 1 . Cool forms by fog sprayed with water or by protecting them from the direct rays of the sun. 2 . If requested by the Contractor, deemed advisable by the Testing Engineer, and approved by the Architect, a retardant may be used to delay the initial set of the mix. E. In cold weather, be adequately prepared to protect the concrete from the adverse influence of cold before placement of any concrete. 1. When the average daily temperature falls below 50 degrees F. , take special precautions to assure adequate strength gain of the concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-16 A 2924 J. Concrete surfaces exposed to view and as directed by the Architect in the finished building shall receive a smooth rubbed finish. Such elements include, but are not limited to concrete beams, concrete columns and encasements, exposed portions of foundation walls and other exposed walls. Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process . 3 . 07 SLABS AND SLAB FINISHES A. ACI-301, latest edition, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" , Chapter 11 - Slabs is hereby made a part of this Specification. B. Use a "troweled finish" except floor slabs scheduled to receive an adhered floor finish, where "float finish" shall be used. C. Finished surfaces shall conform to Class A tolerances and shall not vary more than 1/8 in. when measured by a 10 ft. - 0 in. straight edge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. 3 . 08 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Protect newly placed concrete against low and high temperature effects and against rapid loss of moisture. Moist cure all concrete for at least seven days at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F. by curing methods approved by the Architect. B. For vertical or near-vertical surfaces, moist cure by keeping the form in contact with the concrete, or by other effective means approved by the Architect. Intermittent wetting and drying does not provide acceptable curing. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-15 2924 G. Concrete shall be deposited continuously, in horizontal layers of such thickness (not deeper than 18 inches) that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. Placing shall be carried out at such a rate that the concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Concrete which has partially hardened or which has been contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited. H. Concrete shall be compacted thoroughly by vibrating to produce a dense, homogeneous mass without voids or pockets . Vibrators should be placed in concrete so as to penetrate approximately 3 inches to 4 inches into the preceding lift so as to blend the two layers. Vibrating techniques must assure that, when the coarse aggregate reaches the form, it stops and the matrix fills the voids. I . Patching: Areas to be patched shall not exceed 1. 5 square feet for each 1000 squares of surface area. Patches shall match in every respect the color and texture of the surrounding surfaces . Mix formulation shall be determined by trial to obtain a color match when both the patch and surrounding concrete are cured and dry. After initial set, surfaces of patches shall be textured manually to obtain a match with the surrounding surfaces. All patches are subject to Architect' s final acceptance as to appearance and quality. At holes formed by withdrawal of ends of steel snap-ties, wet and pack solid with patching mortar. Smooth out projections and fins with wet carborundum stones or power grinders. All voids, honeycombs and air pockets shall be patched. The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to avoid voids, honeycombs and air pockets. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-14 2924 D. In cold weather, all concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI 305, Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting" . 1 . When the average daily temperature falls below 40 degrees F. , all surfaces of concrete shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F. , and not over 90 degrees F. , for seven (7) days. 2 . Concrete delivered to the forms shall have a temperature of at least 60 degrees F. , and not over 90 degrees F. 3 . The temperature of the forms shall be at least 40 degrees F. 4 . The Contractor shall maintain a record of temperature of the concrete at the most exposed surfaces of each placement at the beginning and at the end of each day of the curing period, which record shall be available to the Architect. E. Conveying: Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent separation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is retained. F. Depositing: Delivery and placement of concrete shall be programmed so that the time lapse between batching and placement shall not exceed 1-1/2 hours. Concrete shall not be allowed a free fall of over 4 feet . Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-13 3S�" 2924 D. Saw-cutting of slabs-on-grade must occur within a maximum of 24 hours after the start of concrete placement . Fill all saw-cut joints in concrete slabs which are to remain exposed with a modified epoxy joint sealant (03300.2 . 01 . 0) . Joints shall not be permanently filled until just prior to the completion of the Project . Joints which are to be covered with tile or carpeting shall have joints filled with cement grout flush to the slab surface . As an alternative at slabs which do not remain exposed, control joints may be formed using Zip-Cap control joint (Model 832) by Greenstreak Plastic Products Company or approved equal . Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufact.!rer' s recommendations. Note that reinforcing steel will have to be depressed at the joints to permit placement of the Zip-Cap. 3 . 06 PLACING OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Notify the Architect at least 24 hours prior to each placement . B. Do not place concrete until reinforcing steel, inserts, sleeves and other work to be built into the concrete have been inspected and approved by the Architect or the Owner' s representative and by all other trades concerned. C. In hot weather, all concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting" . 1 . When temperature rises above 70 degrees F. , all surfaces of concrete shall be protected against rapid drying. 2 . Concrete delivered to the forms shall have a temperature of not over 90 degrees F. 3 . The temperature of the forms shall be at least 40 degrees F. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12 2924 _ 3 . 03 REINFORCING FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. ACI 301, latest edition, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings" , Chapter 5 - Reinforcement, is hereby made a part of this Section. B. Reinforcing steel in areas noted on the drawings shall be epoxy coated. 3 . 04 EMBEDDED ITEMS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Coordinate the installation of all inserts required by other trades. Such inserts normally are to be in place prior to the placing of reinforcing steel. B. Place all required anchor bolts, anchor plates and dowels. All anchor bolts shall be set to correct locations by template. C. ACI 301-89, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings" , Sections 6 .4 and 6.5, are hereby made a part of this Specification. 3 . 05 JOINTS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. ACI 301-89, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" , Sections 6 . 1, 6.2 and 6 .3 are hereby made a part of this Specification. B. Construction joints shall be formed with keyed bulkheads. The Contractor may submit for the approval of the Architect alternative forming methods for construction joints at walls and slabs. Beam joints shall be formed as specified. C. Control joints shall be as shown on the drawings. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11 353 2924 D. Premix admixtures in solution form and dispense as recommended by the manufacturer. Include the water in the solution in the design water content of the mixtures . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 FORMING FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. ACI 301, latest edition, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" , Chapter 4 - Formwork, is hereby made a part of this Specification. B. Forms shall be constructed to conform to shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, plumb and straight, and shall be maintained sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the leakage of grout. Securely brace and shore forms to prevent the leakage of grout . Securely brace and shore forms to prevent their displacement and to safely support the construction loads. C. Treat forms with a form release agent applied according to the manufacturer' s instructions, by roller, brush or spray to produce a uniform thin film without bubbles or streaks. Apply the release agent in two coats for the first use of the form and in one coat for each additional use. D. ACI-301-89, Section 13 .3 - Forms, is also hereby made a part of this Specification. 3 . 02 MIXING PROCESS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and transported in accordance with "Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" ASTM C94, Alt No. 3 and ACI STANDARD 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete" . CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10 2924 B. Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter. Any materials which have deteriorated, or which have been damaged, shall not be used for concrete. C. Store reinforcement steel on wood skids to protect it from weather, oil, earth and damage from trucking or other construction operations. Reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale, rust, form oil, concrete splatter and other extraneous coatings at the time it is embedded in the concrete. 2 . 03 CONCRETE MIXES FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Strength, cement and water _equirements Design Min. Lab. Str. Min. Maximum Comp. Testing Age Cem. Fac. Net Water* Str. f'c 7 Days 28 Days Sacks./cu-yd- Cal./sack cem. 4000 psi 3300 psi 4670 psi 6 . 5 5 . 5 3000 psi 2500 psi 3500 psi 5. 5 6 . 5 * This is total water in mix at time of placement, including free water of aggregates and liquid mixtures. B. Air-entraining and water-reducing agents shall be used in all concrete in strict accordance with the manufacturer' s printed instructions. Total air entrained in freshly-mixed concrete shall be 5 . 0% plus or minus 1 . 0% of volume of concrete, except slabs with metallic floor hardener shall contain 2 .01; maximum, with required strengths maintained. C. Slump of concrete: 1. Slabs-on-grade and footings: 3 inches. 2 . Reinforced columns, beams, joists, slabs, walls, and piers : 4 inches. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 3�'I 2924 N. Joint Filler: Where used with caulking or sealants shall be non-extruding, self-expanding filler strips conforming to ASTM D1752, Type III, and AASHO N153, Type II, as manufactured by Celotex Corporation, W.R. Meadows, Inc. , W.R. Grace and Company, or equal approved by the Architect . Where no sealant or caulking is required, strips may be non-extruding bituminous type in accordance with ASTM D1751 . O. Joint sealant shall be Formula T-250 two component modified epoxy sealant by Permagile Corporation or equal approved by the Architect . Also refer to Section 03300 . 3 . 05 . P. Waterstops shall be 6" wide polyvinylchloride multi-rib type by Greenstreak Plastic Products Co. or equal approved by the Architect. 1 . At expansion joints, use style No. 780 with expandable center bulb. 2 . At rigid joints, use style No. 782 . Alternative types of waterstops may be submitted for the approval of the Architect. Submittal shall include a complete description of the product including installation and jointing procedures. Q. Liquid chemical hardener for concrete shall be Hornolith by A.C. Horn Company; Surfhard by Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal zinc and/or magnesium silicofluoride with penetrating agent. The material shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer' s written recommendations and shall be compatible with curing techniques. 2 . 02 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. All materials shall be stored to prevent damage from the elements and other causes. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 2924 H. Patching Compound: Shall be "COLMA-DUR" by Sika Chemical Corporation, "DARAWELD-C" by W. R. Grace, or equal approved by the Architect . Patching compound and leveling mortar at floor slab shall be Portland Cement based with minimum 3000 psi compressive strengths, Sika Repair 222 by Sika Chemical Corporation or equal approved by the Architect . I . Vapor retarder shall be W.R. Meadows Premolded Membrane with Plastic Core or equal approved by the Architect . J. (This item not used. ) K. Chemical surface sealer/hardener for concrete shall be Horne Clear Seal by A.C. Horn Company, Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn Building Products, Division of Contech Inc. , or approved equal chlorinated rubber base material at 22% solids. The material shall be applied both in accordance with the Manufacturer' s recommendations for a curing compound on the wet concrete and as a hardener on fully cured concrete just prior to the occupancy. L. Concrete curing membranes shall be: 1 . White polyethylene sheeting 4 mils thick, ASTM C171; or 2 . Waterproof paper, Sisalkraft Type, ASTM C171-69; or 3 . Moisture curing shall be performed as specified in ACI 301 paragraph 12 .2 .1.1 - 12 .2 .1 .4 . Liquid membrane curing compounds may be used, but only with the approval of the Architect. M. Concrete inserts shall be as required on the Drawings. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7 3q 2924 3 . Bar supports, metal accessories and other devices necessary for proper assembly of concrete reinforcing shall be of standardized factory-made wire bar supports . All bar supports in exposed concrete shall have plastic tips to prevent rust spots on exposed surfaces . Wire for tieing shall be 18 gauge black annealed wire conforming to ASTM Specification A-82 . F. Formwork: 1. Forms : Except for exposed surfaces, formwork material shall be exterior "plyform" Class 1, B-B or as approved by the Architect, not less than 5/8 in. thick. For all exposed surfaces plywood forms shall be plastic coated. Exposed cylindrical columns and column encasements shall be formed with steel formwork providing a smooth finish to the finished concrete. Provide suitable form inserts for reglets, rustication joints and champhers as required on the Architectural Drawings . 2 . Form Oil : Oil shall be of a non-staining type, specifically manufactured for concrete forms. 3 . Form Ties : Except for exposed surfaces, factory- fabricated, removable or snap back, of approved design. Wire shall be at least 1-1/2 in. back from surfaces. For all exposed concrete work forms shall be tied in such a way that no evidence of ties is visible on the finished surfaces. G. Non-Shrink Grout : Shall be "Embeco 885" by Master Builders, "Sonogrout" by Sonneborn Building Products, "Five Star Grout" by U.S. Grout Corporation, or equal approved by the Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 2924 B. Natural Aggregates : 1 . Fine Aggregates for Concrete : Shall be natural low alkali sand consisting of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles, conforming to ASTM C33 . Organic content shall be determined according to ASTM C40, and supernatant liquid above test sample shall show color no darker than reference standard color solution prepared at same time. Allow no frozen or partially frozen aggregate in the mix. 2 . Coarse Aggregate for Concrete: For normal weight concrete use low alkali crushed stone or gravel from approved source conforming to ASTM C33 . For lightweight concrete (115 maximum density) use aggregates conforming to ASTM C330 . Coarse aggregate shall not contain greater amounts of deleterious material than specified in Table 3, ASTM C33 . C. Water from approved source, potable, clean, and free of oils, salt, alkali, organic matter and other deleterious material. D. Admixtures: 1 . Water Reducing Agent ASTM C494, Type A: "WRDA" by W.R. Grace Co. , or equal approved by the Architect. Water-reducing agent must be by same manufacturer as air-entraining agent. 2 . Air-entraining agent ASTM C260 : "Darex" by W.R. Grace Co. , or equal approved by the Architect. Air-entraining agent must be by same manufacturer as water-reducing agent. 3 . Other admixtures may be used, but only with the written approval of the Architect . E. Concrete Reinforcement: 1. Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM Specification A-615 Grade 60, deformed bars shall be Grade 40, except column and pier ties. 2 . Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM Specification A-185 . Supply in flat sheets. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5 0 34� 2924 G. All materials, measuring, mixing, transportation, AM* placing and curing shall be subject to inspection by the Architect or by the Testing Agency. However, such inspection, wherever conducted, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements, nor shall inspector' s acceptance of material or workmanship prevent later rejection of same by the Owner or Architect if defects are discovered. 1 . 07 NOTIFICATION OF RELATED TRADES A. Notify all other trades responsible for installing chases, inserts, sleeves, anchors, louvers, etc. , when ready for such installation, and for final checking immediately before concrete is placed. Cooperate with such trades to obtain proper installation. B. Leave openings in walls for pipes, ducts, etc. , for mechanical and electrical work as shown on Drawings or as required by layout of mechanical systems. Layout and reinforcing of openings not specifically shown on the Structural Drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to execution. r PART 2 - MATERIALS 2 . 01 CONCRETE A. Portland Cement : Low alkali ASTM C-150 Type I at all exposed concrete, Type I or II elsewhere. All cement of each type shall be from a single source- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 2924 1 . 06 TESTING, CONTROL AND INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall retain the services of a qualified testing agency, approved by the Architect, to test aggregate and to prepare a mix design for each strength of concrete specified; and shall submit such mix designs and test results to the Architect for approval . Mix designs may also be based on proven current designs accompanied by test results. The cost of all such preliminary services shall be borne by the Contractor. All other testing and inspection will be performed by the Owner' s testing agency. B. A qualified testing agency for such other testing and inspection will be selected by the Owner and shall be paid directly by the Owner. C. Cooperate fully with the testing agency's work in taking and storing samples. Provide storage facilities for concrete cylinders at the site. Facilities must protect cylinders from effects of low or high temperatures. D. Accept as final results of tests made by the qualified professional testing organization engaged by the Owner. E. Testing required because of changes requested by the Contractor in materials, sources of materials, or mix proportions; and extra testing of concrete or materials because of failure to meet the Specification requirements are to be paid for by the Contractor. F. Advise the Testing Agency of intent to place concrete by notification at least 24 hours prior to time of placement . CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 3`� 2924 7 . Hardening and sealing of exposed concrete floors . 8 . Finishing of exposed concrete surfaces as herein specified. 9 . Installation of anchor bolts, keys, dowels, inserts, etc. furnished by other trades. 1 . 03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications: 1 . Section 05120 - Structural Steel 2 . Section 05300 - Metal Decking 1 . 04 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) : Listed Standards. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) : Listed Standards. 1 . 05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop and erection drawings for reinforcing steel and manufacturer's data for other products for Architect' s approval . B. Provide shop drawings for fabricating and placing reinforcing steel. Show all required information for cutting, bending and placing reinforcing bars, and show all accessories and support bars on placing drawings. Indicate suitable marks for placing bars. C. Fabrication of any material or performing of any work prior to the final approval of the shop drawings will be entirely at the risk of the Contractor. D. The Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing materials called for in Contract Documents, even though these materials may have been omitted from approved shop drawings. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 2924 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. DIVISION 1 is hereby made a part of this SECTION as fully as if repeated herein. B. Examine all Drawings and -a11 other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this trade. 1 . 02 WORK TO BE PERFORMED A. The work of this Section consists of all cast-in-place concrete work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein, and includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Furnishing, placing, curing and finishing of all plain and reinforced concrete work for the building and outside the building. Also include all concrete work necessary to complete the work of other trades. 2 . Furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel and related accessories. 3 . Furnishing, erection and removal of formwork and shoring. 4 . Furnishing and installation of joint fillers. 5 . Concrete mix design. 6 . Coordination with all other trades for location of all pipe sleeves, duct openings, keys, chases, electrical boxes and conduits, anchors, dowels, inserts, fastenings and other devices required by other trades. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 3�3 2980 2 . Architect will certify in writing to Owner whether work is finally acceptable, and, if so, final payment of unpaid balance will be made to Contractor on submittal of payment request . 3 . Architect may at his discretion certify partial final acceptance under which value of any work which has not been completed or otherwise finally accepted shall be deducted from final payment . END OF SECTION TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-22 2980 direct Contractor to make additional inspections and recommendations if in his judgement they are needed. Continue maintenance inspections to end of warranty period. 3 . 12 PLANT WARRANTY PERIOD A. Do replacement planting as soon as possible after plant has been certified by Architect as unacceptable and weather and season permit . B. Replace planting in accordance with original specifications . Restore areas damaged or soiled by replacement operations to their original condition. C. Reshape saucer areas to conform to surrounding ground levels and remove and dispose of guys, wires, rubber hose sections, stakes, and tree wrap off-site at end of Warranty Period or before that at direction of Architect . 3 . 13 ACCEPTANCE/PAYMENT A. Provisional Acceptance: 1 . Upon completion of remedial or further work which may have been required by interim field reviews by Architect during construction period, and on written request by Contractor at least 2 weeks before anticipated date of review, Architect will make field review of planting for provisional acceptance. 2 . Architect will certify in writing to Owner whether work is provisionally acceptable, and, if so, 900 of price of total planting shall be paid to Contractor on submittal of payment request . 3 . Architect may at his discretion certify partial provisional acceptance under which value of any work which has not been completed or is not otherwise provisionally accepted shall be deducted from payment in addition to 10% replacement reserve . B. Final Acceptance: 1. At end of warranty period, following satisfactory completion of remedial work, and upon written request by Contractor 2 weeks before anticipated review, Architect will make field review of planting for final acceptance. TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-21 2980 3 . 11 MAINTENANCE AMW A. Prior to provisional acceptance, maintain planting as follows : 1 . Water once each week from June 15 to September 15 . Add sufficient water to thoroughly wet roots, but not less than 2 gallons per vine, groundcover plant, or perennial; 5 gals . per shrub; and 10 gals. per tree. Water as necessary throughout year during drought periods as above. 2 . Remove weeds within mulched area around each tree and in each shrub, groundcover, perennial or vine area every two weeks during growing season. Do not allow weeds to attain more than 6" of growth before removal. 3 . Control insects, fungus, and other diseases by spraying with approved pesticides and other means necessary. 4 . Prune plants, adjust and repair guying and staking, and replace mulch as required. 5 . Replant dead, dying, unhealthy or unsightly plants . B. During warranty period: 1 . Following provisional acceptance, Owner will maintain planting. 2 . Maintenance Schedule : Prior to provisional acceptance of planting, submit to Architect for approval typewritten schedule of care for planting to be executed by Owner during one year warranty period. Deliver approved maintenance schedule to Architect at field review for Provisional Acceptance. 3 . Maintenance Inspections: During warranty period, make plant maintenance inspections in first week of April, June, August, September and December to determine whether proper maintenance is being supplied by Owner. Immediately after each inspection, submit typewritten report, one copy each to Architect and to Owner, indicating findings and recommendations in sufficient time to permit undesirable conditions to be satisfactorily rectified, otherwise no consideration will be given to claims. Architect reserves right to TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-20 2980 2 . Shape each plant to preserve its natural character or in manner appropriate to its particular design requirements, as directed by Architect . 3 . Remove or cut back broken, damaged branches and unsymmetrical new growth. 4 . Prune deciduous trees and shrubs removing about 1/3 of top growth. 5 . Prune evergreens only to remove damaged branches or correct shape and balance . 6 . Prune deciduous trees by thinning and shortening side branches back to lateral buds and shoots . Maintain trees leaders with terminal buds intact . In general, follow "Princeton Nursery Method" of pruning. 7. Shear hedges as indicated on Drawings and otherwise lightly to establish lines of sides and tops . 3 . 09 PROTECTION A. Provide protection against trespassing and damage for planted areas and plants . If areas are damaged or plants injured, repair, treat or replace as required without additional cost to Owner. B. Protect slopes from damage due to erosion, settlement r of backfill, construction activity, or other causes. Use of batter boards, netting, straw, etc. shall be left to Contractor' s discretion, but shall be subject to approval for appearance by Architect . Repair damage promptly. 3 . 10 CLEANING A. Remove excavated subsoil, branches, rocks, paper, rubbish and other debris from site and dispose of legally as work proceeds. Keep areas clean, neat and orderly. B. Remove twine and other tying-up materials, ribbons and tags from plants. C. Have entire planting cleaned up for provisional acceptance field review. 339 TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-19 2980 c . Vines 1 packet per plant . 3 . Handle packets with care. Remove packets which are cut, ripped, or otherwise damaged along with any loose fertilizer from plant pit or hole and replace with new packets. C. Saucering: After topsoil mixture has been placed, form earth saucer for retention of water around each tree or shrub unless otherwise indicated on Drawings . Make saucer same diameter as that of hole dug and lip level all around and at least 4" high for trees . D. Watering: Thoroughly soak soil around each plant immediately after planting, even if it is raining or expected to rain. E. Mulching: After watering, spread mulch to uniform depth indicated on Drawings, raking and dressing for neat, even surface. F. Wrapping: 1 . After planting wrap trunks of deciduous trees 2" caliper and larger with tree wrap spiraling from bottom to top, overlapping each turn 1/2 width of tree wrap strip. Cover trunk from ground to height of second branch. 2 . Secure tree wrap in place with twine wound spirally downward in opposite direction, tied around tree in at least 3 places in addition to top and bottom. 3 . Maintain wrapping until first winter has passed after planting and remove following spring, unless otherwise directed by Architect . G. Staking and Guying: Stake and guy trees after planting as indicated on Drawings. Make guying adequate to hold tree in secure vertical position under severe weather conditions. H. Pruning: 1 . Before and during planting operation, prune trees and shrubs using clean, sharp tools to make clean cuts. Amok TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-18 2980 3 . Container Stock: Remove soil ball from containers and scarify roots all around prior to planting. 4 . Bare Root Stock: a. Submerge plants totally in water 18-24 hours just prior to planting. Do not allow them to dry out while planting. b. Cleanly cut and remove broken or frayed roots . Spread roots out in natural position and work soil mixture carefully into roots . Firm soil by foot and water in to eliminate air pockets. Set root crown at surface level where it would naturally occur. 5 . Groundcover and Perennial Plants : Space plants as indicated in Plant List. Adjust spacing as necessary to evenly fill planting beds with indicated quantity of plants. Assure that roots and soil balls are fully bedded in and surrounded by soil firmed by foot with crown below mulch, flush with soil surface. 6 . Bulbs: Position each species according to its needs at correct depth for each variety and size. B. Fertilizing Trees, Shrubs, and vines : 1 . Distribute unopened fertilizer packets evenly around plant ball or roots within plant pit or hole at a depth of 6" -811 . Do not place in direct contact with plant roots. Cover packets with remaining topsoil mixture . 2 . Distribute at following rate : Caliper No. of Packets a. Trees 1"-2" 2 2"-2 1/2" 3 2 1/2"-3" 4 311-411 5 4" and up one packet per inch of caliper plus one packet. Example: 7"-8" caliper would receive 8 + 1 = 9 packets b. Shrubs 1 packet for every 12" of height or spread, whichever is larger. 33 TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-17 2980 E. Make application within growth stage and season recommended by manufacturer and during optimum AW weather conditions . Do not apply when showers or rain threaten, on frozen ground, or during windy periods. F. Allow adequate time for herbicide to take complete effect and chemical toxicity to pass before proceeding with further work in area. 3 . 08 PLANT INSTALLATION A. Setting Plants : 1 . General : a. Ensure that chemical toxicity from herbicide applications has sufficiently dissipated to allow installation of plants without damage . b. Have pits, plant beds and topsoil mixtures prepared before distributing plants to planting locations so as to minimize exposure and drying. c. Place plants carefully so as not to break limbs, tear roots from ball, or damage integrity of ball . Reject and replace plants with damaged balls or root systems. d. Set plants upright, plumb and aligned as indicated on Drawings within plant pit or bed. Keep crown or ball of root system slightly above surface grade. Face plants to give best appearance or relationship to surrounding area or as otherwise directed by Architect . e. Backfill with topsoil mixture in lifts, firming by foot and settling around perimeter of plant ball with water to eliminate air pockets. Do not compact backfill. Do not fill around trunks, stems, or over top of root ball . Keep crown of ball or root system slightly above surface grade. 2 . Balled and Burlapped Stock: Cut away and remove biodegradable burlap and twine from top and half way down side of root ball. Remove water resistant, water-roof-and non-hiodecrra,able materials completely. s I TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-16 2980 C. Amend bed areas with following amendment treatments where indicated on Drawings, incorporating materials 4" deep: 1 . Amendment Treatment A (general treatment for groundcovers, vines, perennials and bulbs) : Commercial fertilizer 2-1/2 lbs/100 sf Natural organic fertilizer 2-1/2 lbs 1100 sf Peatmoss 2" loose layer 2 . Amendment Treatment B (for Euonymus fortunei coloratus groundcover) : Commercial fertilizer 2-1/2 lbs/100 sf Natural organic fertilizer 2-1/2 lbs 1100 sf Peatmoss 2" loose layer Ground limestone 2-1/2 lbs/100 sf D. On completion of fine grading and amendment treatments, prior to actual installation of plants, make Type B Herbicide Application (preplant herbicide) to beds . Remove weeds prior to application. Cultivate beds 2" deep 2-3 weeks after application. 3 . 07 HERBICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply following herbicide types for control of unwanted weeds, grass and other vegetation in areas indicated on Drawings : r Type A Herbicide Application (weed and grass herbicide) . Type B Herbicide Application (Preplant herbicide) . B. Contractor shall be liable for damage resulting from herbicide or its application. Do not allow herbicide spray to drift . Apply herbicide so that it does not fall outside areas of treatment . Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to adjacent existing vegetation or existing vegetation to remain within areas of treatment. C. Notify Architect, other trades, Owner and public that may be nearby of upcoming application just before commencement of work. D. Make application in strict accordance with manufacturer' s directions both in method of application and quantities used. 3 3 TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-15 2980 drainage notify Archi`ect for his direction prior to further work. c . Scarify subgrade surface to key with topsoil mix. Then backfill plan-- beds with proper mix type indicated on Drawings . Adequately overfill beds so that after full natural settlement finish grades will be at levels and profiles indicated on Drawings. Do not use mechanical compaction. d. Prior to planting, return and place additional fill if necessary to compensat� for settlement . 2 . Bed Condition B (beds in undisturbed existing topsoil areas) : a. Treat bed areas with Type A Herbicide Application (weed and grass herbicide) . Make treatment adequate to kill roots and foliage of existing herbaceous vegetation. b. After herbicide treatment has taken full effect scalp away 1" depth of soil and roots along with thatch and foliage above and dispose of off-site. Then turn over existing soil in beds 8" deep using rotary tiller and afterward spread following materials and till into beds 8" deep: 1 . Bed Preparation Type A (general planting) : 4" loose peat moss 1" sand 5 lbs. superphosphate/100 s. f. Additive required to bring pH to 5 . 5-6 . 5 2 . Bed Preparation Type B (eribaceous planting) : 6" loose peatmoss 1" sand 5 lbs. superphosphate/100 s. f. Additive required to bring pH to 4 . 5-5. 5 B. Fine grade beds to conform to finish grades and profiles indicated on Drawings, assuring uninterrupted drainage pattern, free of hollows and pockets. Remove rocks, roots and other debris on surface and dispose of off-site. TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-14 2980 3 parts topsoil with additive required to bring pH to 4 . 5-5 . 5 range . 3 part loose peatmoss 1 part sand with 5 lbs . of superphosphate/cubic yard of mixture 3 . 04 PLANTING STAKE-OUT: Stake-out locations of plants in field for approval by Architect prior to excavation of pits and planting holes. Make adjustments in stake-out as directed by Architect . 3 . 05 PLANT PIT PREPARATION A. Excavate plant pits to depth and width indicated on Drawings . B. Do not use material excavated from pits as backfill . Dispose of excavated material off-site . C. In areas where subgrade is contaminated, excavate pits additional 12" deep and wide all around and replace with clean, uncontaminated, soil material approved by Architect . D. In areas where subgrades are poorly draining provide corrective drainage indicated on Drawings. E. Scarify walls and bottoms of pits to key with topsoil mix backfill . 3 . 06 PLANT BED PREPARATION A. Make initial bed preparation according to following conditions indicated on Drawings: 1. Bed Condition A (beds in areas stripped and rough graded or otherwise without undisturbed existing topsoil) . a. In beds where subgrade is contaminated, excavate pits an additional 12" deep and replace with clean, uncontaminated soil material approved by Architect. b. In areas where subgrade is poorly draining provide corrective drainage indicated on Drawings, otherwise scarify subgrade 12" deep with vibratory plow or other methods approved by Architect. If these measures do not correct 333 TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-13 2980 1 . Poorly draining subgrades whether caused by compaction during construction or naturally occurring. 2 . Subgrades contaminated with oil, cement, or other chemicals, waste building materials, trash, or other debris that are environmentally objectionable, toxic or detrimental to plant life or growth. 3 . 02 TOPSOIL TESTS: Unless otherwise directed by Architect, obtain topsoil testing service ' s recommendations, provided under Topsoil Section, for correcting topsoil pH to required level, and make corrections accordingly during preparation of topsoil mixtures and plant beds by addition of ground limestone to raise level or aluminum sulfate or powered sulfur to lower level of pH. 3 . 03 TOPSOIL MIXTURES A. Do mixing on site by following method unless otherwise approved by Architect . 1 . Spread topsoil in 8" deep layer and remove rocks and debris. 2 . Calculate amount of each required additive or amendment for amount of topsoil spread. 3 . Spread each additive or amendment over top of topsoil uniformly. Spread large quantity amendments one at a time and mix. Mix small quantity amendments together before spreading to assure even distribution. 4 . Use rotary tiller tractor attachment to chop in amendments. Mix materials thoroughly to full 8" topsoil depth. B. Make up following types of planting mixtures using materials and proportions as follows : 1 . Type A Topsoil Mixture (general planting) : 3 parts topsoil with additive required to bring pH to 5 .5-6 .5 range. 1 part loose peatmoss 1 part sand with 5 lbs of superphosphate/cubic yard of mixture 2 . Type B Topsoil Mixture (ericaceous planting) : AW TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-12 2980 "Supac 4NP" geotextile by Phillips Fibers Corp. is approved product . Y. Porous Material : AASHTO M43, #6 (3/8" to 3/411) uniformly graded, clean crushed stone or gravel . Z. Plant Materials : 1 . Plants shall be in accordance with Plant List . In event that quantity discrepancies or material omissions occur in List, Drawings shall govern. No substitutions shall be permitted unless approved in writing by Architect. 2 . Plants shall have normal fibrous root systems and well-developed branching systems; be sound, healthy, vigorous, and acclimated; and free from breakage and abrasions, disfigurements, knots, sunscald injuries, diseases, insects, insect eggs, larvae and other infestations. 3 . Trees shall have no abrasions of bark and no fresh cuts of limbs over 1-1/2" which have not completely callused over. They shall have straight trunks with single leader intact unless otherwise indicated in Plant List . 4 . Balled and burlapped and bare root plants shall be nursery-grown under climatic conditions similar to those in locality of project for a minimum of 2 years prior to digging and shall be freshly dug. S . Container-grown stock shall have been nursery- grown in container long enough to have developed fibrous network of roots holding soil ball together without being root-bound. Excessively rootbound plants or those whose roots have escaped from containers shall be rejected. PART 3 . 00 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Examine proposed planting areas and conditions of installation. Do not start planting work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Examine areas where pits and beds are to be located and plants installed with Architect and identify following for corrective preparatory work: 3 31 TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-11 2980 U. Guy Warning Sleeve : White, polyethylene, 3/4" diameter tubing. AIW*� V. Anti-Desiccant : Emulsifiable concentrate for retardation of excessive water loss without harm to plant or its normal transpiration; "Exhalt 410" by PBI-Gordon Corp. , Kansas City, Mo. , or approved equivalent . W. Underdrain Pipe 1 . PVC Perforated Pipe: Perforated and solid wall, rigid polyvinyl chloride underdrain pipe, couplings and fitting conforming to and marked with AASHTO M278 of sizes indicated on Drawings. 2 . PE Perforated Tubing: Perforated and solid wall, corrugated polyethylene underdrain tubing, couplings and fittings conforming to and marked with AASHTO M252 of sizes indicated on Drawings. X. Drainage Fabric : Nonwoven, needle punched, consisting of long-chain polymeric fibers composed of polypropylene, polyethylene, or polyamide. Fibers oriented into multi-directional stable network retaining their positions relative with each other and allowing passage of water as specified. Fabric free of chemical treatment or coating which reduces permeability, inert to chemicals commonly found in soil and meeting physical property requirements as follows : Test Acceptable Min. Physical Property Method Test Resultsl Weight, oz ./sy ASTM D-3776 3 . 7 Tensile Strength, lbs . ASTM D-4632 100 Elongation, % ASTM D-4632 50 Coefficient or Water Permeability, cm/sec ASTM D-4491 0 . 10 Puncture Strength, lbs. ASTM D-37872 60 Apparent Opening Size, AOS U.S. Standard ASTM D-4751 60-100 i Minimum values in weaker principal direction in any sampled roll in lot. z Tension testing machine with ring clamp; steel ball replaced with 7 . 94mm (5/1611) diameter solid steel cylinder with flat tip and beveled edges, centered within ring clamp. TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-10 2980 from sphagnum sources . Brown in color, clean, low in content of mineral and woody material, mildly acid, shredded and free from stones, roots and twigs . I . Sand: Clean, course, ungraded, meeting ASTM C33 requirements for concrete sand. J. Bark Mulch: Shredded cedar bark with fibrous texture and uniform dark brown color. Partially decomposed, of a consistency so that not more than 25% will pass through a 1/2" sieve with a 1 1/2" maximum size, having an organic content of not less than 90%, with white wood content not exceeding 8% . "Cedar Scape" Decorative Shredded Cedar Bark by Atlantic Forest. Products, Edenton, N.C. 27932 or approved equivalent . K. Preplant Herbicide : "Treflan" (triflurilin) , emulsifiable concentrate by Elanco Products Co. , Indianapolis, Indiana, or approved equivalent . L. Weed and Grass Herbicide : Broad spectrum, non- selective, post-emergent, non-residual . "Roundup" (glyphosate) by Monsanto Agricultural Products Company. M. Twine : Biodegradable, 2-3 ply jute, sisal or approved equivalent. O. Tree Wrap: Duplex, waterproof kraft paper crinkled to 33 1/3% stretch, 4"-6" wide strips. rP Tree Stakes : One of following indicated on Drawings : 1. 2" sq. sound hardwood with no knots over 1/2" diameter. Painted black. 2 . White cedar with bark attached and a maximum allowable defection of ten (101i) percent, having diameter of no less than two (2) inches nor more than two and three quarters inches (2-3/4) at tip nor more than three (3) inches at butt . Q. Guying Wire: #12 gauge, pliable, annealed, galvanized. R. Guying Cable: 7 strand, galvanized. S. Guying Fittings: Hot-dipped galvanized at rate of 1.5 oz . of zinc per square foot of surface. T. Guying Hose : New, black, 3/4" OD, 1/2" ID, rubber. 302 TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-9 2980 B. Additives for pH Correction: 1 . Aluminum Sulfate or powdered sulfur commercial grade . 2 . Ground limestone : Dolomitic, not less than 850 total carbonates and magnesium, ground so that 500 passes 100 mesh sieve and 90% passes 20 mesh sieve. Coarser material shall be acceptable provided that specified rates of application are increased proportionately on basis of quantities passing 100 mesh sieve. D. Natural Organic Fertilizer: "Milorganite" , by Sewerage Commission, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, or approved equivalent having an analysis as follows : Total Nitrogen(N) -6 . 5% water insoluble nitrogen 6 . 01 Available Phosphoric Acid (P2O5) 3 . 0% Soluble Potash (K2O) 0 . 001 Iron (Fe) 3 . 0% E. Commercial Fertilizer: Having following minimum guaranteed composition by weight : nitrogen 5% (50% organic) , available Phosphoric Acid (P2O5) 10%, Soluble Potash (K2O) 5%, unless soil tests indicate need for different composition as determined by Architect . Elements becoming available according to methods adopted by Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. By Agway or approved equivalent . F. Fertilizer Packets : Fertilizer in polyethylene bags perforated with micropore holes for controlled feeding. "Nutri-Pak" by JRP International Inc. , Fond Du Lac, WI 54935, 414/922-0148, or approved equivalent, containing two ounces of water-soluble fertilizer effective for approximately five years with guaranteed analysis as follows: Total Nitrogen (N) 16 . 001 Available Phosphoric Acid (P2O5) 8 . 01 Soluble Potash (K2O) 8 . 0% G. Superphosphate: Composed of finely ground phosphate rock commonly used for agricultural purposes. Containing not less than 18% available phosphoric acid. By Agway or approved equivalent. H. Peat Moss: Domestic product consisting of partially decomposed vegetable matter of natural occurrence Ank TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-8 2980 w 4 . Perennials May 15-July 15 5 . Bulbs Sept . 15-Nov. 1 C. Schedule delivery of nursery stock to occur with time of installation. Have beds and pits prepared to receive plants in advance of delivery to minimize time plants are out of ground. D. Divide site into logical work parcels completing work in each area in continuous operation. Do installation in each parcel including setting of plants, backfilling, pruning, watering, mulching, wrapping, guying, staking and cleaning without delays between steps in process . E. When weather conditions are such that satisfactory results are not likely to be obtained because of drought, high winds, high or low temperatures, excessive moisture, or other similar factors, stop work. Do not resume work until desired results can be obtained or until approved alternative or corrective measures and procedures are adopted. 1 . Do not work with soggy, muddy or frozen topsoil, topsoil mixtures, amendments or mulches. 2 . Do not install topsoil mixtures or plants in beds, pits or planting holes which contain standing water and into which water is draining or collecting. F. Provide water supply and water distribution equipment for maintaining moisture for lawn and meadow grass areas except where and in event that irrigation system is operational and providing coverage. 1 . 07 SPECIAL WARRANTY: For period of one year after provisional acceptance of planting and at no additional cost to Owner, replace plants that are dead or, in opinion of Architect, are in unhealthy or unsightly condition, or have lost natural shape due to dead branches, excessive pruning, or inadequate or improper maintenance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS/MANUFACTURERS A. Topsoil : Material provided under Topsoil, Section 02920 . 3a 7 TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-7 2980 d. Keep bare root stock cool in-transit and prevent drying with wet straw, moss, or other suitable material . e . In loading, unloading and handling plants, exercise care to prevent injuries to branches or roots of plants. Lift and move plants by grasping ball or container, never branches or trunks . Do not drop plants . Reject and replace plants with tops or roots fully or partially torn away from soil balls or with loose or broken soil balls. 3 . Storage : a. On delivery to site, store plants which cannot be planted without delay in shaded area off pavement . Keep roots of bareroot stock covered with moist mulch. b. If bareroot plants must be held more than 2 days, unbundle, separate and heel them into mulch in shaded area off pavement . If container grown or balled and burlapped stock must be held more than 1 week, untie tops, space out plants for air circulation and heel them into mulch in shaded area off pavement. c. Through out storage period from first day, water plants as necessary to maintain moisture. 1 . 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this Section closely with work of other trades wherever such work affects or is affected by work specified herein. B. Schedule of Installation: Do plant installation during one of periods specified below, unless otherwise approved by Architect : Surina Fall 1. Evergreen Trees & When soil becomes Aug. 15-Oct . 1 Shrubs workable-May 15th 2 . Deciduous Trees When soil becomes Oct. 15-Dec. 1 & Shrubs workable-May lst 3 . Groundcovers April 15-June 15 & Vines TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-6 2980 3 . Deliver and store materials so that they remain uniform in composition, free-flowing and dry and do not deteriorate or lose effectiveness . Reject materials which become caked or damaged. B. Nursery Stock 1 . Preparation of plants : a. Use good horticultural methods in digging and preparing plants for shipment and planting. Workmanship that fails to meet generally recognized industry standards shall be rejected. Replace rejected stock with acceptable material at no additional cost . b. Balled and burlapped (BB) stock shall have unbroken soil balls of size adequate to encompass sufficient fibrous feeding roots to insure successful recovery and development of plants . Firmly wrap balls in burlap and tie securely with twine . Do not use non-rot or plastic burlap or twine . Plants with manufactured balls or with root balls wrapped with non-biodegradable -materials shall be rejected. c. Prior to digging plants which are in foliage spray with anti-desiccant to prevent dehydration. d. Dig bare root (BR) plants when fully dormant . Spray with anti-desiccant prior to digging, then dig out with root system substantially intact, carefully removing earth from roots . Cover roots with a thick coating of mud by puddling after plants are dug without delay. 2 . Transportation and handling: a. Ship plants with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities . b. Tie-up tops of plants using twine, padding and wrappers to prevent digging or handling injury. Do not break stems or branches, or abrade bark. c. Cover plants transported on open vehicles with protective covering to prevent wind burn. i 3 TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-5 2980 1 . List of references for 3 comparable projects of similar work that proposed Landscape Firm has AM completed within past five years, giving job "° locations, names of clients and project landscape architects, and their telephone numbers and dates on which work on each project was started and completed. 2 . List indicating proposed nursery source for each plant in Plant List with grower' s and supplier' s names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 3 . List of any plants from Plant List which proposed Landscape Firm believes cannot be provided in size, variety or as otherwise required with proposed changes, alternatives and substitutes. Submit documented evidence satisfactory to Architect that reasonable search of regional growers and other suppliers has been made in good faith to determine that indicated plants as specified cannot be provided. Later requests for changes and substitutions will not be considered. 4 . List of any plants which proposed Landscape Firm believes cannot be warranted if installed in scheduled season with proposed alternative schedule. Submit statement of compelling reasons for not installing plant during scheduled season satisfactory to Architect . Later requests for planting schedule changes for warranty causes will not be considered. G. Submit maintenance schedule for Owner' s use during warranty period. H. Submit maintenance inspection reports during warranty period. 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Chemicals and Other Bagged Materials : 1. Deliver materials to site in original, unopened bags or containers with tags and labels securely attached. 2 . Labels and tags shall be vendor' s, producer' s or manufacturer' s original with name, weight, and material ' s certified analysis. TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-4 2980 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS : Deliver submittals to Architect and obtain his approval prior to ordering materials or beginning work or as otherwise required. Time delivery to allow reasonable review period and prevent delays. A. Submit nursery and plant inspection certificates : B. Submit manufacturer' s or vendor' s certified analysis with substantiating data for: 1 . Aluminum sulfate or powdered sulfur 2 . Ground limestone 3 . Natural organic fertilizer 4 . Commercial fertilizer 5 . Superphosphate 6 . Peat moss 7 . Fertilizer packet 8 . Mulch C. Submit manufacturer' s full product data including description, specifications or analysis and recommendations and instructions for installation, use or application for information only as follows: 1 . Weed and grass herbicide (Type A) 2 . Preplant herbicide (Type B) 3 . Anti-desiccant D. Submit material samples for: r 1. Mulch - 5 lb. bag 2 . Tree stake - 3 ' length. 3 . Sand - 5 lb. bag. 4 . Underdrain pipe - 2' length 5 . Drainage fabric - 12" sq. with anchor pins. 6 . Porous material - 5 lb. bag. E. Submit outline of actual application methods, procedural and supervisory arrangements and safety precautions to be employed for each type of herbicide for information only. F. Submit following lists and documentation for Architect ' s use in considering proposed Landscape Firm for approval . 32� TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-3 2980 B. Qualifications 1 . Work of this Section shall be performed by approved Landscape Firm with good reputation, successful record over past 5 years on projects of similar size and complexity and which maintains regular force of experienced workmen skilled in work of this Section. 2 . Herbicide application shall be made by experienced workmen under supervision of licensed applicator approved by Architect . C. Tests : Architect reserves right to test and reject for cause at any time material appearing not to meet material specifications by tests in accordance with methods adopted by Association of Official Agricultural Chemists . Costs for tests shall be paid for by Contractor. D. Plant Materials 1 . Plant names shall conform to latest edition of "Standardized Plant Names" as adopted by American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature. Provide stock true to botanical name and legibly tagged. 2 . Size and grading standards shall conform to those of latest edition of ANSI Z60 . 1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock" unless otherwise noted in Plant List . Plant shall be dimensioned as it would stands in its natural in-ground position. Stock furnished shall be a fair average of maximum and minimum sizes specified. 3 . Plants shall be subject to approval and tagging by Architect at place of growth for quality, size and variety before being dug and/or prepared for shipment. Such tagging shall not affect right of rejection upon delivery at site or during progress of work for damage, latent defects and other specified requirements. Contractor or his authorized representative shall be present during taggings. Approval and tagging shall not relieve Contractor of sole responsibility for plants' health, vigor, disease or pest free condition. TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-2 2980 SECTION 02950 TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 . Preparation of beds and pits to receive planting. 2 . Preparation of, placing, and fine grading topsoil mixtures in beds and pits . 3 . Providing and incorporating fertilizers, peat moss, mulches, and herbicides. 4 . Providing and installing plant materials including planting, pruning, guying, mulching and watering. 5 . Cleaning up of work areas . 6 . Maintenance of planting until provisional acceptance. 7 . Setting up maintenance schedule for Owner. 8 . Inspection of maintenance performed by Owner during guarantee period. 9 . Replanting under special warranty. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Tree and Plant Protection: Section 02110 B. Topsoil : Section 02920 1. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations : Comply with applicable regulations, certification and inspection requirements of governing authorities for plants and other products and materials. op'` 3 Z� TOPSOIL MIXTURES AND PLANTING 02950-1 2980 A. Areas will be acceptable providing present conditions of lawns meet establishment requirements and have received required maintenance. E. Where acceptance review is being requested for a larger site area, no individual small plot within will be considered for acceptance, if it has spots which are bare or not meeting other requirements, totaling more than 20 of that plot . END OF SECTION SEEDED LAWNS 02935-9 2980 material and barriers and have entire area cleaned up for acceptance field review. Ank 3 . 09 LAWN ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE Establish fully germinated, well-distributed, healthy stand of specified grass showing uniform color, vigorous, mature blade growth without obvious bald spots, dead or thin, poorly filled areas, and free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease and insects . A. Water daily and as often as necessary to maintain adequate surface soil moisture for full seed germination. Thereafter apply water weekly and as necessary at intervals to maintain adequate moisture 4" deep to prevent moisture stress and at rates that soil can absorb excessive runoff. B. Repair, rework, and reseed areas that have washed out, are eroded, do not develop or are damaged. C. Maintain grass areas at a maximum height of 2-1/211 . Do not allow grass to grow higher than 4" before mowing. Remove clippings when mowing. D. Apply Type B Topdressing Fertilizer to seeded areas 60 days after seeding at a rate equal to 1 lb. act . N 11000sf. Apply with mechanical rotary or drop type distributor and thoroughly water into soil . Repeat at 60 day intervals until acceptance of entire prof eft. E. Control growth of weeds and undesirable grass species by hand weeding or applying herbicides as necessary. F. Control diseases and insects by applying fungicides and insecticides or by other means as necessary. G. Maintain established lawn in vigorous healthy, well mown and watered condition free of weeds and neat in appearance using establishment methods and materials until completion and acceptance of entire project at which time Owner will assume maintenance. 3 . 10 ACCEPTANCE: Architect will make field review to consider acceptance of seeded areas upon Contractor' s request . Alkk SEEDED LAWNS 02935-8 2980 D. Following rolling, water area with fine spray, moistening soil to depth of 111 . 3 . 06 MULCHING A. Spread hay mulch over seeded areas within 24 hours after seeding. B. Mulch at rate of 70 to 90 lbs . of hay per 1, 000 s . f. Distribute in a uniform blanket so that 750 - 90% of soil is covered. C. Immediately following spreading, anchor hay mulch by crimping into soil with a V-type-wheel land packer, a scalloped-disk land packer or other suitable equipment designed to force mulch into the soil surface, or by applying acceptable asphaltic emulsion binder or liquid tackifier. Protect buildings, pavings, plantings and non-seeded areas from binder and tackifier over-sprays . 3 . 07 PROTECTION A. Protect seeded areas from damage due to erosion and settlement, pedestrian or vehicular traffic, excavation and other construction operations . B. Provide and install traffic and erosion control measures such as traffic barriers, haybales, brush waddles, baffle boards, erosion control matting, netting, or mulching. Measures to be used will be 1,eft to the Contractor' s discretion, but will be subject to approval for appearance by Architect prior to erections. C. If any areas are damaged, repair, restore, treat or reseed without additional cost to the Owner. 3 . 08 CLEANING A. Remove discarded soil materials, rocks, branches, paper, rubbish, construction waste, and other debris from site and dispose of them legally as work proceeds. Keep areas clean, neat and orderly. B. Remove any mulch which may be shading out grass after grass has germinated. C. Remove any stones 1" or over and other debris that may have accumulated, temporary erosion control 317 SEEDED LAWNS 02935-7 2980 3 . Grade areas to smooth, free draining, even surface with loose, moderately coarse texture . Remove ridges, and fill depressions as required to drain by leveling, raking and rolling. B. Evenly distribute and thoroughly till additives for pH correction and fertilizers into the top 3" of topsoil . Apply and incorporate each material in separate operation with mechanical equipment . Apply and incorporate by hand only in inaccessible areas . 1 . Apply additive for pH correction at rate recommended by topsoil testing service to adjust pH of topsoil to not less than 6 . 0 nor more than 7 . 0 . a. If otherwise required by Architect, apply ground limestone at a rate of 25 pounds per 1, 000 square feet . 2 . Apply starter fertilizer at the rate of 3 . 6 lbs. per 1000 s . f. C. Following incorporation of additive and fertilizer, correct disturbed grades by raking and dragging. D. Make final root bed preparation by lightly tilling, rolling and leveling surface so that soil is smooth, friable and uniformly fine textured followed by light raking to make granular surface with furrows and crevices to receive seed. 3 . 05 SEEDING A. Sow seed at the following rates: 1 . Type A Seed Mixture: 4 lbs./1, 000 s. f. B. Use mechanical rotary or drop type spreader to sow seed. Install seed evenly by sowing 1/2 required amount in one direction and remainder at right angle to first seeding. For very small seed, mix with sand as a carrier to add bulk and assure uniformity of distribution for spreader. C. After seeding first part, rake or drag surface of soil lightly and evenly to incorporate seed into top 1/8" of soil. After seeding second part, roll with light lawn roller. SEEDED LAWNS 02935-6 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to be seeded and installation conditions and determine whether seeded areas can be protected and maintained undamaged and healthy until final acceptance. If not, do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. 3 . 02 RECONDITIONING EXISTING LAWNS A. Remove diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas . Scalp away and remove vegetation, leaves, thatch and root crowns. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor' s operations, including oil drippings, stone, gravel, and other construction materials. B. Where substantial but thin lawn remains, rake, aerate if compacted, and cultivate soil; fertilize and seed. C. Provide and apply fertilizer, seed and additives as specified for new lawns and as required to provide a satisfactorily reconditioned lawn. Topdress with topsoil as required to fill low areas and meet new finish grades. 3 . 03 TOPSOIL TESTS A. Unless otherwise required by Architect, obtain topsoil testing service ' s recommendations provided under Topsoil Section, for correcting topsoil pH to required level, and make corrections accordingly during preparation of beds by addition of ground limestone to raise level or aluminum sulfate or powdered sulfur to lower level of pH. 3 . 04 ROOT BED PREPARATION A. Till undisturbed topsoil areas and areas of newly fine graded topsoil which have become crusted or compacted 6" deep to improve drainage and root penetration. 1 . Remove stones over 1" in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other debris. 2 . Recess finish grade at edges of paving, walkways and tops of curbs 1" to accept sod and allow for growth and build up of grass. 3 SEEDED LAWNS 02935-5 2980 increased proportionately on basis of quantities passing 100 mesh sieve . B. Commercial Fertilizers : Granular, non-burning composition having guaranteed analysis, for professional use as follows : 1 . Type A, Starter Fertilizer: Shall have the following composition by weight : Nitrogen (18%) (5 .4% ammoniacal N. 8 .4% WSN, 4 .2% WIN) ; Ammoniated Phosphate (24%) ; Potassium (6%) as produced by O.M. Scott & Sons, Co. Proturf Division under brand name of "Proturf Fertilizer" or approved equivalent, unless soil tests indicate need for different composition as required by the Architect . 2 . Type B, Top Dressing Fertilizer: Containing nitrogen (50% slow release organic IBDU or ureaformaldehyde) , phosphoric acid, and potash in 4-1-2 ratio by weight . C. Hay Mulch: Weed-free, dry, well seasoned, unrotted, clean, bailed, small grain or salt hay. No chopped or ground hay acceptable. D. Grass Seed Mixture: Fresh, or latest crop year in unopened bags with producer' s label and analysis sewn on, uniformly blended in the following proportions by weight and meeting following standards of pure live seed (P.L.S. ) , content, purity, and germination: of Total By Weight Seed Type Germ, Pure Sd, Weed Sd. Tyne A Mixture 65 Kentucky Bluegrass 85 98 0 .50 var. Touchdown 15 Fine Fescue var. 85 98 0 .50 Jamestown or Pennlawn 20 Perennial Rye var. 90 98 0 . 50 Yorktown II or Palmer SEEDED LAWNS 02935-4 2980 2 . Sow seed on dry or moderately dry soil at times when wind does not exceed velocity of 8 kph (5mph) . D. Use appropriate, effective manually or power operated mechanical equipment for preparation and distribution to achieve uniform mixing, consistent treatment, and even distribution. 1 . Distribute dry materials with mechanical rotary or drop type spreader and liquid applications with spray equipment, all well-operating and accurately calibrated. 2 . Till soil with rotary tiller, plow, disk or harrow, whichever is most effective. E. Extent of Work: 1 . Seed areas topsoiled or disturbed by construction operations not otherwise planted and mulched, paved or sodded. 2 . Recondition existing lawn areas damaged by Contractor' s operations, including storage of materials or equipment and movement of construction vehicles, and existing lawn areas as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS r 2 . 01 GENERAL: Substitutions will not be permitted, unless otherwise specified. Species, varieties, materials and products specified and indicated on Drawings by botanical or common name, trade name, manufacturer' s name, producer' s name, or catalogue number shall be provided. 2 . 02 MATERIALS A. Additives for pH Correction: 1. Aluminum sulfate or powdered commercial grade sulfur. 2 . Ground Limestone: Dolomitic, not less than 85% total carbonates and magnesium, ground so that 50% passes 100 mesh sieve and 90% passes 20 mesh sieve. Coarser material shall be acceptable provided that specified rates of application are 313 SEEDED LAWNS 02935-3 2980 A. Certifications : 1 . Ground Limestone or Aluminum Sulfate : Analysis certified by manufacturer. 2 . Commercial Fertilizers : Analysis of each type certified by manufacturer. 3 . Grass Seed: For each required grass seed mixture by seed vendor indicating date of testing, percentage by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass species from sample taken and tested within last 6 months from projected date of seeding on job. 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials in bags and containers : 1 . Deliver seed, fertilizers, additives, amendments and other materials with original tags and label securely attached. 2 . Labels and tags will show vendor' s, producer' s or manufacturer' s name, weight, and material analysis . 3 . Deliver and store materials so that they remain uniform in composition, dry and free-flowing and do not deteriorate or lose effectiveness . 1 . 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Work Schedule : Sow grass seed in the Fall between August 15th and October 1st or in the Spring between April 1st and May 1st, or at such other times as required by the Architect. B. Provide water supply and water distribution equipment for maintaining moisture for seeded areas except where and in event that irrigation system is operational and providing coverage. C. Weather Conditions : 1 . Do bed preparation when soils are in workable condition, neither too wet nor too dry. 41" SEEDED LAWNS 02935-2 2980 SECTION 02935 SEEDED LAWNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 . Preparing root beds. 2 . Incorporating additive and fertilizer. 3 . Seeding 4 . Cleanup of work areas. 5 . Maintenance of seeded areas until final acceptance. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Tree and Plant Protection: Section 02110 . B. Topsoil : Section 02920 . C. Topsoil Mixtures and Planting: Section 02950 . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE r A. Work of this Section will be performed by approved Landscape Firm with good reputation, successful record over past 5 years on projects of similar size and complexity and which maintains regular force of experienced workmen skilled in work of this Section. B. Testing: The Architect reserves the right to test and reject any materials appearing not to meet material specifications by tests in accordance with the methods adopted by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Costs for these tests shall be paid for by the Contractor. 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS: Deliver submittals to Architect and obtain his approval prior to ordering materials or beginning work or as otherwise required. Time delivery to allow reasonable review period and prevent delays. OOW SEEDED LAWNS 02935-1 2980 B. Remove trash and debris from site and dispose of it legally. Do not dispose of rocks, stones, boulders, vegetative materials, trash or other debris in existing wooded or shrub areas . END OF SECTION 309 TOPSOIL 02920-7 2980 C. Fine grade topsoiled areas : 1 . Shape and rake surfaces to lines, finish grades and thickness required providing a smooth, uniform surface with an uninterrupted drainage pattern free of hollows and pockets. 2 . Fill, trim, blend and feather proposed grades to meet surrounding existing terrain, paving, curb, edge and building base conditions in smooth transition without abrupt level changes . 3 . Pitch surfaces for positive drainage, shedding runoff in direction of drainage courses or drain structures . Ensure that surfaces pitch away from buildings minimum 20 for 20 ' unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 4 . Recess finish grade at edges of paving, walkways and tops of curbs 1" to accept sod and allow for growth and build up of grass . D. Rake surfaces clean of debris and stones 1" or larger in any dimension. E. Compact topsoiled areas with approved roller weighing approximately 500 lbs . Regrade to eliminate bumps and depressions until satisfactory finish grade is obtained. F. Do work around existing trees and shrubs as required under, Section 02110 - Tree and Plant Protection. G. Stockpile and spread excess topsoil not required for work in locations and to depths and grades determined by Architect . 3 . 04 PROTECTION A. Protect fine graded areas from traffic and erosion and keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair, re-shape and re-establish finished grades where areas settle, erode, are disturbed and damaged. 3 . 05 CLEANING A. Clean topsoiled areas of debris, making them suitable for grass and planting work prior to acceptance by Architect . AW TOPSOIL 02920-6 2980 of consistent nature meeting required characteristics and qualities. 3 . Preparation: After topsoil source has been approved, grub out and remove any brush and cut and remove any weeds in area or stockpile. Where there are substantial number of objectionable weeds, strip and remove top 1" of soil before any topsoil is taken. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Examine proposed areas to be topsoiled and conditions of installation. Do not start topsoiling work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Examine areas to be topsoiled with Architect and identify poorly draining subgrades for corrective preparatory work. Include both naturally occurring areas and areas which may have been formerly compacted, underlain former paved areas, and compacted by construction operations and activities. 3 . 02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. In areas where subgrade is poorly draining scarify subgrade 12" deep with vibrator plow or other methods approved by the Architect . B. Harrow or otherwise loosen and roughen subgrade surfaces to depth of 3" or as otherwise approved by Architect to provide bonding key for topsoil . 3 . 03 INSTALLATION A. Distribute, uniformly spread topsoil and obtain minimum depths after settlement in areas to be seeded, sodded or sprigged with grass and not otherwise planted, surfaced or paved as indicated on Drawings. B. While spreading topsoil, remove excessive amounts of large clods, hard lumps, rocks, roots, sticks, vegetative matter and other debris. 7'°� � TOPSOIL 02920-5 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS AOW 2 . 01 MATERIALS A. New Topsoil : Imported, fertile, friable material of loamy character; of uniform grade without admixture of subsoil material; reasonably free from clods, stiff clay, hardpan, large stones, plants, roots, sticks, glass, waste building materials, rubbish, debris and other deleterious or objectionable materials . 1 . Quality: a. One hundred percent by weight will pass 1" mesh sieve. In material passing 1/4" mesh sieve there will not be less than 200 or more than 65% passing No. 200 mesh sieve as determined by wash tes: made in accordance with standard test ASTM D1140 . b. Topsoil will contain not less than 4% nor more than 20% organic matter in portion of sample which passes 1/4" mesh sieve when determined by wet combustion method on sample dried at 1050C. C . Topsoil will have true range of pH values from 7 . 0 - 5 . 5 . 2 . Spurce will be single origin with supply of sufficient size to meet complete project needs and one of the following: a. Areas from which no topsoil has been previously taken and which possesses such uniformity as to offer assurance to the Architect that product will be homogeneous and will meet specified requirements. b. Area which is or has been in cultivation within past ten years and is producing or has produced fair to good yield of farm crops within unusual fertilization, or area which would be readily cultivable for farm crop, and is supplied with good normal drainage. C . Approved topsoil supplier or producer of manufactured, soil-based growing medium with a stockpile of material uniformly treated and t TOPSOIL 02920-4 2980 A. Submit name and location of proposed supply source of new topsoil with certified analysis by recognized, independent testing service including tests for quality requirements in art . 2 . 01, para. A. , subpara. 1 . of proposed topsoil . B. Submit test reports for topsoil . 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Keep topsoil from being mixed with subsoil, subgrade materials, other stockpiled materials, waste materials, debris and other contaminants. 1 . 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work under this Section closely with work of other trades wherever such work affects or is affected by the work included herein. B. Divide site into logical work parcels scheduling and completing work in each area in continuous operation so that grass and planting work can follow expeditiously. C. Fine grading shall be accepted by Architect prior to seeding, sodding, sprigging and planting. D. Do not work with soggy, muddy or frozen topsoil or install topsoil during rain or on subgrades which are muddy, under water or frozen. E. Topsoil : 1 . Haul and spread existing topsoil from on-site stockpile. 2 . Provide new topsoil from off-site source if required to complete work. 3 . Provide screened existing or new topsoil for topsoil mixes under the work of Section 02950, Planting, as required to completed that work. 4 . Any excess existing topsoil will remain property of Owner. 30S TOPSOIL 02920-3 2980 C. Testing: 1 . Provide and pay for materials testing by A recognized, independent testing service approved by Architect . 2 . Take representative samples for testing from materials as they are delivered or where they are found on-site in presence of and in manner satisfactory to Architect as follows : a. Existing stockpiled and new topsoil : Each 100 cy. b. Existing undisturbed topsoil within limits of lawn, grass and plant installation work: Every 5000 sf . 3 . Provide testing of following materials for analysis data indicated: a. Topsoil : 1 . Topsoil chemical tests including acidity-alkalinity test and organic constituents analysis. 2 . Topsoil physical tests including sieve analysis for range outlined in art . 2 . 01, para. A, subpara. l.a. 3 . Each analysis shall be accompanied by service ' s recommendations for bringing topsoil to true range of pH values listed below for each of following uses: a. Lawns and Grasses - pH 6 . 0 - 6 . 8 b. General Ornamentals - pH 5 .5 - 6 . 5 C. Ericaceous Ornamentals - pH 4 . 5 - 5.5 1. 04 SUBMITTALS: Deliver submittals to Architect and obtain his approval prior to ordering materials or beginning work or as otherwise required. Time delivery to allow reasonable review period and prevent delays. TOPSOIL 02920-2 2980 SECTION 02920 TOPSOIL PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 . Preparation of subgrade in areas to receive topsoil. 2 . Providing new topsoil, if required. 3 . Testing topsoil . 4 . Hauling and spreading existing topsoil . 5 . Delivering and spreading new topsoil, if required. 6 . Fine grading. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Tree and Plant Protection: Section 02110 . B. Earthwork: Section 02210 . C. Seeded Lawns : Section 02935 . D. Topsoil Mixtures and Planting: Section 02950 . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work of this Section shall be performed by approved Landscape Firm with good reputation, successful record over past 5 years on projects of similar size and complexity and which maintains regular force of experienced workmen skilled in work of this Section. B. Architect will approve, and reserves right to inspect, source of new topsoil. Inspection of new topsoil source will not affect right of rejection on delivery or during progress of work of topsoil that does not meet quality and other material requirements, nor relieve Contractor of responsibility for requirements . 36 3 TOPSOIL 02920-1 2980 6 . Five (5) each, benches : Model PK3005-BS-72, two leg, embedded XD-E, steel rod seat insert, frost powder-coat finish. L. Rain Leader Modifications : 1 . Work included: a. Modify existing rain leaders at McCallum Building to accommodate proposed finish grades . 2 . Materials for leader piping, boots, and below grade piping to equal existing. 3 . As indicted on Drawings and complying with: a. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals, as applicable. M. Fieldstone Tree Wall : 1 . Work included: a. Construct dry laid fieldstone tree wall to protect existing tree as indicated on the Drawings. 2 . As indicted on Drawings and complying with: a. Section M9 . 04 .4 - MAHD, Fieldstone Masonry. 3 . Install fieldstone tree wall as indicated on the Drawings and in conformance with MAHD Section 685, as applicable. 4 . Submit stone sample for approval of color and texture. END OF SECTION SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800-10 2980 J. Tire Stops : 1 . Work included: a. Precast concrete tire stops, 4, 000 PSI @ 28 days, installed with 3/4" dia. 16" long, galvanized deformed rebar anchors . 2 . As indicted on Drawings and complying with: a. Section 03450 - Architectural Precast Concrete, as applicable. 3 . Submit manufacturer' s product literature and dimensional shop drawings for tire stops . K. Site Furnishings : 1 . Work included: a. Provide and install the following furnishings as indicated on the Drawings and scheduled below as manufactured by Landscape Forms Inc. , (800) 290-6236 . 2 . Four (4) each, tables : 42" dia. round fiberglass top with umbrella hole, storm cloud color, orange peel finish, Model No. AA4002-42 . Supports : Freestanding, four legs center mounted, XQ-FM, frost powder-coat finish. 3 . Sixteen (16) each, chairs : Model VN3001-BA-22, Verona, wire grid seat insert, frost powder-coat finish. 4 . Four (4) each, litter receptacles : Model LX5002- 16-32, freestanding, metal with frost powder-coat finish, fiberglass liner with stormcloud color, orange peel finish. 5 . Two (2) each, ash receptacles : Model 1,X6002-12-21 with finishes as per litter receptacles specified above. SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800-9 2980 Bunk' s Wholesale Supply, Inc. 3145 W. Columbus Avenue Chicago, IL 60652 Ph. (800) 922-0550 or approved equivalent . 4 . Decorative gravel : Washed stone "186 Delaware Blend" by George Schofield Co. , Bound Brook, NJ, or approved equivalent ranging in size from 3/16" - 1" in even graduation. 5 . Install as indicated on the Drawings and as per manufacturer' s recommendations with edging set truly vertical and top flush with finish grade. H. Flagpole : Salvage and relocate existing flagpole as indicated on Drawings and complying with the manufacturer' s specifications and recommendations for the type and height of pole required. I . Stone Benches : 1 . Work included: a. Salvage existing stone benches as indicated on the Drawings; existing bench ends to remain in place. b. Relocate benches and intermediate stone supporting legs; fill any exposed anchorages, holes, etc. with tinted mortar to match stone. 2 . As indicted on Drawings and complying with: a. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry, as applicable. SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800-8 2980 C. Section 09900 - Painting. 3 . Submit complete shop drawings for anchorages and concrete surround. F. Bituminous Dampproofing: 1 . Work included: a. Provide bituminous dampproofing on exterior of foundation wall and provide protection board at the existing McCallum Building as required to meet new finish grades as indicated on the Drawings. 2 . As indicted on Drawings and complying with: a. Section 07160 - Bituminous Dampproofing. G. Gravel Bed: 1 . Work included: a. Washed stone over soil separation fabric on prepared subgrade with metal edge. 2 . Metal Edge: Steel edging, factory primed with black paint in sizes indicated on the Drawings furnished with steel stakes and accessories necessary to join and support sections. "Ryerson Steel Landscape Edging" by Joseph T. Ryerson & Son, Inc. , Chicago, Illinois, or approved equivalent. 3 . Separation Fabric: Non-woven, needle punched polypropylene, with high resistance to abrasion, punctures and tearing; good light blockage, ultraviolet light resistance, water permeability, coefficient of friction and substrata conformity; "Duon Professional Landscape Fabric" , 3 oz. /sy minimum average weight, manufactured by Phillips Fibers Corp. and distributed by: SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800-7 2980 4 . Galvanized steel tubes and bars of the sizes shown. Bend, weld and fabricate in sections with sleeves and complete units so no field bending, cutting or welding will be required. 5 . Install wall mount handrails on galvanized, cast malleable iron wall brackets with approved expansion bolts and anchors . 6 . Install ground mount railings with expanding hydraulic cement in field-drilled anchor holes in concrete, stairs, ramps and landings . 7 . Caulk ground mount holes with sealant : 2 part, self-leveling, pourable, polyurethane, of selected concrete gray color, conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Type 1, Class A. E. Window Well Modifications : 1 . Work included: a. Salvage of existing frame, angle support and grate at wells indicated on Drawings . b. Sand blast to white metal, clean, prime and finish paint all metal work. C. Clean existing concrete wall at wells and reset frame in cast-in-place concrete surround as indicated on Drawings. Reset angle supports with approved expansion anchors . 2 . As indicted on Drawings and complying with: a. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. b. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. look SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800-6 2980 C. Granite Rubble Paving: 1 . Work included: a. Reinforced concrete base over porous fill subbase . b. Granite stone set on mortar setting bed with latex modified mortar and grouted joints. 2 . As indicted on Drawings and complying with: a. Section 02512 - Concrete Paving and Curbs . b. Section M2 . 03 . 0 - MAHD, Granite Rubble Block. 3 . Install granite rubble paving as indicated on the Drawings and in conformance with MAHD Section 485, as applicable except that mortar and grout mix shall be latex modified in strict accordance with the manufacturer' s specifications; acceptable manufacturer - Laticrete International, Inc. , or equivalent. D. Site Handrails and Guardrails : 1. Work included: a. Shop fabrication. b. Painted finish (shop cleaned and primed, field finished) . C. Field installation. d. Modification of existing to remain. 2 . As indicated on drawings and complying with a. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications b. Section 09900 - Painting. 3 . Submit complete shop drawings. SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800-5 2980 B. Masonry Sign Base and Freestanding Wall 1 . Work included: a. CMU backup or cast-in-place concrete as indicated on the drawings . b. Brick veneer to match new building addition. C. Architectural precast concrete copings. 2 . As indicted on Drawings and complying with: a. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete . b. Section 03450 - Architectural Precast Concrete. C. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry. d. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 3 . Submit complete shop drawings for copings. 4 . Coordinate final sign base dimensions as necessary to accommodate sign manufacturer' s requirements. 5 . Latex mortar joints and beds. 6 . Fiber reinforced latex mortar for parget coat . 7. Ladder type joint reinforcing and reinforcing bars. 8 . Stainless steel dowels and anchors in precast concrete copings. 9 . Concealed copper fabric flashing below copings. 10 . Sealant caulked joints in copings. SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800-4 2980 fabrication and shipping schedules with the Contractor so that the entire project can proceed without delays . B. Coordinate installation of site improvements with other work to be performed on site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION 2 . 01 SITE IMPROVEMENTS SCHEDULE A. Site Cast-in-place Concrete : 1 . Work included: a. Reinforced concrete steps, cheek walls, ramps and retaining walls. b. Footings and bases for: 1 . Masonry sign base and free-standing wall . 2 . Granite rubble paving. 3 . Window well modifications. 4 . Relocated flagpole. 5 . Site furnishings . 2 . As indicated on drawings and complying with Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete, ASTM and ACI standards. 3 . Ready mix concrete, air entrained, 4, 000 PSI at 28 days. Reinforcement as indicated on Drawings. 4 . Provide side forms adequate to maintain alignment, resist placement pressure and give full backup for work. No earth cuts acceptable for side forms of work except where otherwise indicated on Drawings. 5 . Provide rubbed, troweled, float and sandblasted finishes as required. SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800-3 2980 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Site Preparation: Section 02110 . B. Earthwork: Section 02220 . C. Cast-in-place Concrete : Section 03300 . D. Architectural Precast Concrete : Section 03450 . E. Unit Masonry: Section 04200 . F. Metal Fabrication: Section 05500 . G. Bituminous Dampproofing: Section 07160 . H. Joint Sealers : Section 07900 . I . Painting: Section 09900 . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: work of this Section shall be performed by qualified and experienced firms, of established reputation, which are regularly engaged in and which maintains regular force of workmen skilled in the type of work specified herein. B. Applicable operations (MAHD) copy 02510, 1 . 03 "B" . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer' s literature for all prefabricated site improvements including model numbers, options, accessories, material designations, dimensions, colors and finishes. B. Submit samples and shop drawings as indicated herein. C. Submit manufacturer' s warrantees for all products and materials, specifically addressed to the Owner. 1. 05 JOB CONDITIONS A. All materials shall be handled and stored in such a manner as to prevent any deterioration, damage or vandalism. Any material so damaged will not be acceptable for use in the work. Suppliers of fabricated elements shall coordinate their SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800-2 2980 SECTION 02800 SITE IMPROVEMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 . Cast-in-place reinforced concrete steps, ramps and retaining walls, as well as miscellaneous footings and bases . 2 . Masonry sign base and freestanding wall with precast concrete copings. 3 . Granite rubble paving. 4 . Metal handrails and guardrails. 5 . Window well frame and grate removal, modification, refinishing and resetting. 6 . Bituminous dampproofing. 7 . Gravel bed with steel edge. 8 . Relocation of existing flagpole. 9 . Relocation of existing stone benches . 10 . Tire stops . 11. Miscellaneous site furnishings. 12 . Fieldstone tree wall . �q3 SITE IMPROVEMENTS 02800-1 2980 B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect A"14 after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of the Project . 1 . Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2 . Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment : Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visual between structures . b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of a ball or cylinder of a size not less than 92 . 5 percent of piping diameter. C . Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e . Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3 . Replace defective piping using new materials and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4 . Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. C. Test new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired for leaks and defects . 1 . Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval . 2 . Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3 . Schedule tests, and their inspections by authorities having jurisdiction, with at least 24 hours ' advance notice. 4 . Submit separate reports for each test . 5 . Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969 (ASTM C 969M) . 6 . Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 7 . Replace leaking piping using new materials and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. END OF SECTION 02700 "N%+ SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 12 2980 B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch (150-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of 3000-psi (20 . 7- MPa) , 28-day, compressive-strength concrete . C. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections . Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. 3 . 14 CLOSING ABANDONED SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping that is indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either of the following procedures : 1 . Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch- (200-mm-) thick brick masonry bulkheads . B. Abandoned Structures : Excavate around structure as required and use either of the following procedures : 1 . Remove top of structure down to at least 36 inches (1000 mm) below final grade. Fill to within 12 , inches (300 mm) of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt . Fill to top with concrete. 2 . Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork. " 3 . 15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as the work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 2 . Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and whenever work stops. 3 . Flush piping between manholes and other structures, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, to remove collected debris. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 11 2980 C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface where manholes occur in pavements . D. Place precast concrete manhole sections as indicated, and install according to ASTM C 891 . 1 . Apply bituminous mastic coating at joints of sections . 3 . 8 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 3 . 9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and as indicated. 3 . 10 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer' s written instructions, ASME A112 .3 . 1, State and local requirements. 3 . 11 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install units in piping where indicated. 3 . 12 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 3 . 13 TAP CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished work conforms as nearly as practical to requirements specified for new work. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 10 2980 E. Install gravity-flow-systems piping at constant slope between points and elevations indicated. Install straight piping runs at constant slope, not less than that specified, where slope is not indicated. F. Extend sewerage piping and connect to building' s sanitary lines, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated. 1 . Install piping with 36-inch (1000-mm) minimum cover. G. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions, that cannot be disturbed, by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. 3 . 6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. General : Join and install pipe and fittings according to the following. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings : As follows : 1 . Join pipe and gasketed fittings with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 2321 . C. Concrete Pipe and Fittings : Install according to ACPA "Concrete Pipe Handbook. " Use the following seals : 1 . Round Pipe and Fittings : ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M) , rubber gaskets. D. System Piping Joints: Make joints using system manufacturer' s couplings, except where otherwise specified. E. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit both systems ' materials and dimensions . 3 . 7 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General : Install manholes, complete with accessories, as indicated. B. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet, where indicated. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 9 2980 3 .4 DRAINAGE PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General : Include watertight, silttight, or soiltight joints, except where watertight or silttight joints are indicated. B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications . C. Pipe Sizes 4 and 6 Inches (100 and 150 mm) : ASTM D 3034 , polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints . D. Pipe Sizes 15 to 36 Inches (450 to 900 mm) : Reinforced-concrete sewer pipe and fittings; rubber gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3 . 5 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General Locations and Arrangements : Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general location and arrangement of underground sewerage and drainage systems piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical . B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert . Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer' s recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. C. Use manholes for changes in direction, except where fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, except where direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 8 2980 with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, Ask tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications : 1 . Light Duty: In earth or grass, foot-traffic areas . 2 . Medium Duty: In paved, foot-traffic areas . 3 . Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas . 4 . Extra Heavy Duty: In roads . B. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout : ASTM A 74, service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section 02200 . 3 .2 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 2 Section 02200 . Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures. 1 . Use warning tapes or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2 . Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures . 3 .3 SEWERAGE PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General : Include watertight joints . B. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to the following applications. C. Pipe Sizes 8 and 10 Inches (200 and 250 mm) : ASTM D 3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sewer pipe and fittings; solvent-cemented joints; or with gaskets and gasketed joints. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 7 2980 2 . 5 CONCRETE A. General : Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following: 1 . Cement : ASTM C 150, Type II . 2 . Fine Aggregate : ASTM C 33 , sand. 3 . Coarse Aggregate : ASTM C 33 , crushed gravel . 4 . Water: Potable. B. Structures : Portland-cement design mix, 4000 psi (27 . 6 MPa) minimum, with 0 .45 maximum water-cement ratio. 1 . Reinforcement Fabric : ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2 . Reinforcement Bars : ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 400) , deformed steel . C. Structure Channels and Benches : Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland-cement design mix, 4000 psi (27 . 6 MPa) minimum, with 0 .45 maximum water- cement ratio. 1 . Include channels and benches in manholes. 2 . Include charnels and benches in sanitary sewerage manholes . a. Manhole Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of the vertical sides to 3/4 of the pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. D. Ballast and Pipe Supports : Portland-cement design mix, 3000 psi (20 . 7 MPa) minimum, with 0 . 58 maximum water-cement ratio. 1 . Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2 . Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 (ASTM A 615M, Grade 400) , deformed steel . 2 .6 CLEANOUTS A. Description: ASME A112 .36 .2M, round, cast-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, cast-iron cover. Include cast-iron ferrule SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 6 2980 8 . Pipe Connectors : ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M) , resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40- 18, heavy-duty ductile iron. Include 24-inch (610-mm) inside diameter by 7- to 9-inch (178- to 229-mm) riser with 4-inch (100-mm) minimum width flange, and 26- inch- (660-mm-) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering, equivalent to the following, cast into cover: 1 . Sanitary Sewerage Piping Systems : SANITARY SEWER. Verify requirements with local authority. 2 . Storm Drainage Piping Systems : STORM SEWER. 2 .4 CATCH BASINS A. Precast Concrete Catch Basins : ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M) , precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints . 1 . Base Section: 8-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 6-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having a separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 2 . Riser Sections: 6-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness; 48-inch (1220-mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 3 . Top Section: Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 4 . Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M) , rubber. 5 . Grade Rings : Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9--inch (152- to 229-mm) total thickness, that match a 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and grate. 6 . Steps: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M) individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. 7. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M) , resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy- duty ductile iron. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 5 2980 1 . Gaskets : ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M) , rubber. 2 . 2 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings : Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to match outside diameters of pipes to be joined, for nonpressure joints . 1 . Sleeves for Concrete Pipe : ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M) , rubber. 2 . Sleeves for Plastic Pipe : ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal . 3 . Sleeves for Dissimilar Pipes : Compatible with pipe materials being joined. 2 .3 MANHOLES A. Precast Concrete Manholes : ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M) , precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasket joints . 1 . Ballast : Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent floatation. 2 . Base Section: 12-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 6-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having a separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 3 . Riser Sections: 6-inch (100-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1220-mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 4 . Top Section: Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings . 5 . Gaskets : ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M) , rubber. 6 . Grade Rings : Include 2 or 3 reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (152- to 229-mm) total thickness, that match a 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and cover. 7. Steps: Fiber glass, individual steps or ladder. Include a width that allows a worker to place both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off the step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into base, riser, and top section sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit steps for manholes less than 60 inches (1500 mm) deep. *M,, SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 4 2980 C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer' s rigging instructions. 1 . 8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Verify existing utility locations. B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned. C. Existing Utilities : Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide acceptable temporary utility services . 1 . Notify Architect/Engineer not less than 48 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions . 2 . Do not proceed with utility interruptions without receiving Architect ' s written permission. 1 . 9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate sanitary sewerage system connections to existing on-site sanitary sewer. B. Coordinate storm drainage system connections to existing on-site storm sewer. C. Coordinate with interior building drainage systems. D. Coordinate with other utility work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints. 1. Primer: ASTM F 656 . 2 . Solvent Cement : ASTM D 2564 . 3 . Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. B. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M) , Class IV, Wall B, for gasketed joints. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 3 2980 1 . 5 SUBMITTALS Awk A. General : Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections . B. Product data for the following: 1 . Reinforced concrete pipe for drainage systems . 2 . Plastic pipe for drainage (as indicated on Plans only) and sewerage systems . C. Shop drawings for precast concrete manholes, catch basins and other structures . Include frames, covers, and grates . D. Coordination drawings showing manholes and other structures, pipe sizes, locations, and elevations . Include details of underground structures and connections . Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. E. Inspection and test reports specified in the "Field Quality Control" Article. F. Manufacturer' s recommended installation procedures. 1 . 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Environmental Agency Compliance : Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage and storm drainage systems. B. Utility Compliance: Comply with regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage and storm drainage systems . Include standards of water and other utilities where appropriate. 1 . 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic pipe or fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 2 2980 SECTION 02700 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sewerage and drainage systems outside the building. Systems include the following: 1 . Sanitary sewerage . 2 . Storm drainage. B. Related Sections : The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1 . Division 2 - Foundation Drainage Systems . 2 . Division 2 - Site Excavating, Filling and Grading. 3 . Division 2 - Site Erosion and Sedimentation Control . 4 . Division 15 - Plumbing Piping for Building Drains. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Drainage Piping: System of sewer pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of storm drainage. B. Sewerage Piping: System of sewer pipe, fittings, and appurtenances for gravity flow of sanitary sewage. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings : At least equal to system test pressure. SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 02700 - 1 2980 3 . 14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform air pressure test according to NFPA 31 on primary and containment tanks prior to installation. Do not exceed 5 psi (34 kPa) test pressure . Apply a soap solution to joints and check for leaks. B. Repair or replace defective tanks and repeat tests until results are satisfactory. C. Installation Checklists : Complete manufacturer' s installation checklist for each fuel oil storage tank. D. Test fuel oil distribution piping according to NFPA 31 . Remake leaking joints and connections using new materials . E. Test and adjust leak detection and monitoring systems controls and devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and devices. F. Submit reports of tests and procedures in writing to Architect . 3 . 15 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner' s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. B. Review data in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout . " C. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days advance notice. END OF SECTION 02690 A*W1 OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 16 2980 2 . Fuel Oil Containment Piping: Install leak-detecting sensor cable probes in interstitial space of containment piping. 3 . Install liquid-level gage systems according to manufacturer' s written instructions and as indicated. 3 . 11 CONNECTIONS A. Connect fuel oil piping to fuel oil storage tanks and building fuel oil piping systems. B. Connect to fuel oil piping systems inside building wall. Use pipe adapters or transition fittings compatible with both piping systems. Fuel oil piping is specified in Division 15 Section "Fuel Oil Piping Systems. " C. Connect vent, fill, sounding, gage, and other piping to fittings and devices. D. Make connections to liquid-level gage systems . E. Make connections to fuel oil storage tank leak detection system. F. Make electrical connections to control panels, liquid-level gages, leak detection, and monitoring devices . G. Electrical wiring, disconnect switches, and motor controls are specified in Division 16 . 3 . 12 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field-applied painting requirements. B. Paint steel containment conduits with SSPC Paint 16 . C. Damage and Touch-Up: Repair marred and damaged factory- painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3 . 13 IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape identification during backfilling of excavations for oil storage tanks and trenches for fuel oil piping. Locate tape 6 inches (150 mm) to 8 inches (200 mm) below finished grade, directly over piping and edges of each oil storage tank. OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 15 2980 3 . 8 PIPE INSTALLATIONS A. Install fuel oil supply, return, fill, and vent piping at uniform slope of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 feet (3 m) downward in direction of storage tank. B. Make changes in directions and branch connections using fittings. C. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings. Install with level side down. D. Install unions adjacent to each valve, at final connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated, in piping 2 inches (DN 50) and smaller. Unions are not required for flanged devices . E. Install dielectric fittings where piping of dissimilar metals are joined. F. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having connections 2-1/2 inches (DN 65) and larger. G. Install pipe connectors at connections to underground tanks and where indicated. 3 . 9 CONTAINMENT CONDUIT PIPING SYSTEMS INSTALLATION A. General : Install containment conduit piping systems according to manufacturer' s written instructions for assembly, joining, trench preparation, and installation. B. Install Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTRP) containment piping system with bonded joints for carrier pipe and containment conduit . C. Terminate containment conduit piping system at location indicated inside building. 3 .10 LIQUID LEVEL, LEAK DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEMS INSTALLATION A. Install leak detection and monitoring systems according to manufacturer' s written instructions and as indicated. Locate alarm panel inside building where indicated. 1 . Fuel Oil Storage Tanks: Install probes in interstitial space of double-wall tanks. OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS - 02690 - 14 2980 other design considerations . Install piping as indicated, Alm except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping at indicated slope . C. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure . D. Install piping free of sags and bends . E. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. G. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls. H. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor slabs, and where indicated. I . Above-Grade, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals . 1 . Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (DN 150) . 2 . Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer' s printed instructions. J. Below-Grade, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations : Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves . Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch (25- mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. K. Piping Connections : Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below. 1. Install unions in piping 2 inches (DN 50) and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having 2-inch (50-mm) or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2 . Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches (DN 65) and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3 . Install dielectric unions to connect piping of dissimilar metals. a7� OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 13 2980 3 . 3 CONCRETE BASES A. Place formwork, reinforcing, and concrete as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete. " Excavation floor and walls may serve as forms. B.. Construct concrete fuel oil storage tank ballast and surface pads of dimensions indicated, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit . Follow tank manufacturer' s setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations . Use 3000 psi (20 700 kPa) , 28-day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete. " 3 .4 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL A. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fittings products listed below. Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods according to following applications. Aboveground piping may be joined with flanges instead of joints indicated. 3 .5 ABOVEGROUND FUEL OIL AND VENT PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Sizes 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. B. Sizes 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) and Larger: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 3 . 6 CONTAINMENT CONDUIT PIPING SYSTEMS APPLICATIONS A. Option for Sizes 1-1/2 Inches (DN 40) and Smaller: 2-inch- size (DN 50) Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTRP) containment piping system with bonded joints . B. Sizes 2 Inches (DN 50) to 4 Inches (DN 100) : Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTRP) containment piping system with bonded joints. 3 . 7 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 12 2980 1 . Characteristics : Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications . 2 . Design Mix: 5000 psi (34 500 kPa) , 28-day compressive strength. 3 . Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 1 EXCAVATION A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork. " 3 . 2 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION A. Install fuel oil storage tanks according to manufacturer' s written instructions and standards specified. 1. Excavate to a sufficient depth for minimum of 3 feet (1 m) of earth cover from top of tank to grade. Allow for cast-in-place, concrete ballast pad, plus 6 inches (150 mm) of sand or pea gravel between ballast base and tank. Extend excavation 12 inches 300 mm around perimeter of tank. 2 . Set tiedown eyelets for hold down straps in concrete ballast pad and tie to reinforcing steel . 3 . Place 6 inches (150 mm) of clean sand or pea gravel on top of ballast pad. 4 . Set tank on fill materials. 5. Install holddown straps. 6 . Install piping connections. 7. Install tank leak detection and monitoring devices . 8. Install containment sumps. 9. Backfill excavation with clean sand or pea gravel . Tamp backfill to consolidate. 10 . Install filter mat between top of backfill sand or pea gravel and earth fill. B. Install fuel oil storage tanks according to tank manufacturer' s written instructions. Use fiberglass reinforced plastic holddown straps, fiberglass manhole (manway) extensions, and fiberglass manhole (manway) risers. OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 11 2980 H. Manhole Frames and Covers : Cast-iron or steel material, size as indicated. Furnish manhole units of adequate size for access to fittings where size is not indicated. I . Other fittings as indicated. 2 . 9 LIQUID LEVEL, LEAK DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEMS A. Description: UL-listed and EPA approved, calibrated, leak detection and monitoring system, and liquid-level gage system. B. System includes liquid level server, probes and other sensors and remote alarm panel for fuel oil storage tanks and piping systems . C. Liquid level, leak detection, and monitoring system shall be Preferred Utilities Model TG-EL-D3 or accepted equivalent . D. System shall differentiate between water and oil leaks and shall monitor tank interstitial space, piping interstitial space and tank valve sump. E. Provide overfill alarm bell mounted on building in direction of tank fill . F. Provide test mechanism package to test system. 2 . 10 IDENTIFICATION A. Metallic-Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes : Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0 .1 mm) thick. Include solid yellow background with continuously printed caption in black letters. 1 . Caption: "CAUTION - BURIED PIPING BELOW. " 2 .11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform factory tests according to UL 1316 and ASTM D 4021 after fabrication and prior to shipment . 2 .12 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout : ASTM C 1107, Grade B. OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 10 2980 1 . Tank Manhole : 22-inch (560-mm) to 24-inch (600-mm) diameter, bolted, flanged, and gasketed manhole, with extension collar, for access to inside of tank. 2 . Threaded Pipe Connection Fittings : On top of tanks, for fill, supply, return, vent, sounding, and gaging, in locations and of sizes indicated. Provide with cast-iron plugs for shipping. 3 . Striker Plates : Inside tank, on bottom below fill, sounding vent, gage, and other tube openings. 4 . Lifting Lugs : For handling and installation. S. Ladders : Carbon steel ladder inside tank, anchored to top and bottom, and located as indicated. Include reinforcement of tank at bottom of ladder. 6 . Supply Tube : Extension of transfer pump suction line fitting into tank, terminating 6 inches (150 mm) above tank bottom and cut at 45 degree angle (1 : 1 slope) . 7. Sounding and Gage Tubes : Extension of fitting into tank, terminating 6 inches (150 mm) above tank bottom and cut at 45 degree angle (1 :1 slope) . 2 . 8 FUEL OIL TANK SPECIALTY FITTINGS A. Fitting Materials : Cast iron, malleable iron, brass, or corrosion-resisting metal; suitable for fuel oil application. 1. Surface, Flush-Mounted Fittings: Waterproof and suitable for oil tank truck traffic. B. Spill Containment Fill Boxes: Flush mounting, with drainage feature to drain oil into tank, threaded fill-pipe connection, and wrench operation, locking cap. C. Drop Tubes (Supply Tube and Sounding Tubes) : Fuel oil suction piping or manufactured fitting, inside tank, terminating 6 inches (150 mm) above bottom of tank, and with end cut at 45 degrees (1 :1 slope) . D. Pipe Adapters and Extensions: As required to connect piping. E. Suction Strainers, Check Valves, and Overfill Check Valves: Bronze or corrosion-resisting metal components. F. Foot Valve: Poppet type, bronze or corrosion-resisting metal components. G. Vent Fittings: Increaser fitting with 40 mesh (0 .425 mm) maximum, corrosion-resisting-wire-screen, weatherproof vent cap with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe, and threaded pipe connection. OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 9 2980 2 . End Connections for Steel Pipe : Inside threads according to ASME B1 . 20 . 1 . D. Vertical Ball Check Valves 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62 , 2-piece bronze construction, and 400 psig (2750 kPa) WOG non-shock working pressure rating. Include integral bronze seats, replaceable stainless-steel ball, and end connections with inside threads according to ASME B1 . 20 . 1 . E. Gate Valves 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) and Larger: MSS SP-70; ASTM A 126, Class B, cast-iron body; Type 1, solid wedge disc; outside screw and yoke, flanged end construction; all bronze trim; and Class 250, 500 psig (3450 kPa) working pressure rating. F. Ball Valves Larger than 2 Inches (DN 50) : MSS SP-72; steel body; full-bore, chrome-plated steel ball; tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) seats; and flanged ends . G. Check Valves 2-1/2 Inches (DN 65) and Larger: MSS SP-71, ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron; Type 1, full waterway, metal-to-metal seat; bronze trim; Class 250, 500 psig (3450 kPa) working pressure rating. 2 . 6 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANKS A. Description: Double-wall, underground, horizontal polyester tanks, with interstitial space between walls . B. Fabricate from fiberglass-reinforced polyester resins, according to UL 1316 and ASTM D 4021. Tanks are suitable for operation at atmospheric pressure and for storing liquids with specific gravities up to 1 .1 and with maintained temperatures up to 150 deg F (65 . 5 deg C) . Sizes and capacities are as indicated. Fabricate tanks for following internal and external loads: 1 . External Hydrostatic Pressure: 3 feet (1 m) depth of bury from top of tank and hole fully flooded; to withstand general buckling with safety factor of 2 : 1. 2 . Surface Loads: AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, H-20 axle loads of 32, 000 lb (14 515 kg) when installed according to manufacturer' s written installation instructions. 2 . 7 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Fuel Oil Storage Tank Fittings and Accessories: Include following factory-installed fittings and accessories : l OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 8 2980 B. Dielectric Unions : Factory-fabricated, union assembly, designed for 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C) . Include insulating material isolating dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1 . 20 . 1 . C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals : Modular, watertight, mechanical type . Components include interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened. D. Sleeves : Following materials are for wall, floor, and slab penetrations : 1 . Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe : ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 . 2 . Steel Sheet Metal : 24 gage or heavier, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint . 3 . Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 , Type E, Grade A or B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 4 . Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, having plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified. 2 . 5 VALVES A. Gate Valves 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; ASTM B 61, cast bronze; Type 2, solid wedge, and inside screw, rising stem; Class 200, 400 psig (2750 kPa) working pressure. 1 . End Connections for Copper Tube: Inside threads according to ASME B1 .20 . 1 or solder joint . 2 . End Connections for Steel Pipe: Inside threads according to ASME B1.20 . 1. B. Ball Valves 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM B 62, 3- piece, cast-bronze body; 400 psig (2750 kPa) minimum WOG non-shock working pressure rating. Include full-port, cast-bronze, chrome-plated bronze ball; polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) seats; lever handle; and end connections with inside threads according to ASME B1.20 .1. C. Check Valves 2 Inches (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; ASTM B 61, cast bronze; Type 3 , brass swing check; and Class 200, 400 psig (2750 kPa) working pressure. 1 . End Connections for Copper Tube: Inside threads according to ASME B1.20 .1 or solder joint. OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 7 2980 2 . 2 PIPES AND TUBES A. Refer to Part 3 Article "Piping Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and tube materials specified below are used. 2 . 3 CONTAINMENT CONDU--T PIPING SYSTEMS A. General : Containment conduit piping systems include carrier piping and fittings, secondary-containment conduit and fittings, centering spacers in annular space between carrier pipe and inside of conduit, and liquid-tight joints. Conduits and spacers are arranged so that system can be venteu and drained and space is available for installing leak detection cable. Containment conduit material is made of corrosion resisting material or has corrosion-resisting coatings. B. Containment conduit piping system sizes refer to carrier pipe sizes. C. Include system manufacturer' s standard fittings, terminal pieces, and accessories. D. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTRP) Containment Piping System: UL-listed, ASTM D 2996 or ASTM D 2997, RTRP carrier pipe, RTRP outer conduit, and RTRP double-wall fittings . 2 .4 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Escutcheons : Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates, deep-pattern type, where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping. 2 . Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 3 . Cast Brass : One-piece or split casting with concealed hinge, with set-screw. a. Finish: Rough brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 4 . Stamped Steel : One-piece, with set-screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish. 5 . Stamped Steel : Split plate, with concealed hinge, set- screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish. 6 . Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting. OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 6 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 . Double Wall Fiberglass Fuel Oil Storage Tanks : a. O/C Tanks Corp. b. Palmer Mfg. & Tank. Inc . C . Xerxes Corp. 2 . Fuel Oil Tank Piping Specialty Fittings : a. Emco Wheaton, Inc . b. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. C. OPW Fueling Components Group, Dover Corp. d. Preferred Utilities Manufacturing Corp. e. Universal Valve Co. , Inc. 3 . Liquid-Level Gage Systems : a. Amprodux, Inc. b. Buffalo Environmental Products, Inc. C. Clawson Tank Co. d. Emco Wheaton, Inc. e. Hersey Measurement Co. f. King Engineering Corp. g. Preferred Utilities Manufacturing Corp. h. Rochester Gauges, Inc. i . Uehling Instrument Co. 4 . Leak Detection and Monitoring Systems: a. Amprodux, Inc. b. Buffalo Environmental Products, Inc. C. D-TECH Corp. d. EECO System by Emco Wheaton, Inc. e. In-Situ, Inc. f . Leak Sensor by Emco Wheaton, Inc. g. Leak-X Corp. h. PermAlert ESP Subsid. , Midwesco, Inc. i. Pollulert Systems, Emhart Industries, Inc. j . Soil Sentry by Arizona Instrument Corp. k. TraceTek Products Group, Raychem Corp. 1 . Veeder-Root Co. m. Warrick Controls, Inc. OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 5 2980 B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps . Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture . C. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt . Elevate above grade. When storing inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. D. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt . E. Store plastic pipes away from direct sunlight . Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1 . 7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with pipe material, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of fuel oil piping systems inside building. B. Coordinate installation and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete ballast pads and surface pads for underground oil storage tanks. Include fill and sounding boxes and vent piping terminals . D. Coordinate delivery of fuel oil storage tanks with Owner. E. Coordinate delivery of fuel oil with Owner and installation of storage tanks. F. Coordinate electrical requirements of actual equipment furnished with the requirements specified in Division 16 . 1. 8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit written warranty executed by manufacturer of underground fuel oil storage tanks. Warranty shall include repair or replacement of failed tanks, provided tanks are installed according to manufacturer' s instructions. Warranty shall protect Owner against structural failures of tanks, including cracking, breakup, and collapse; and failure due to external and internal corrosion when used for storage of fuel oils at temperatures not exceeding 150 deg F (66 deg C) , for 80 years from date of original purchase. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have against Contractor under Contract Documents. OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 4 2980 1. 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 31 "Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment" for design and construction, installation, inspection, and testing of fuel oil distribution system tanks, piping, and other components related to installation of oil-burning equipment . B. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated devices. C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards. D. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories that are listed and labeled. 1 . The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled" : As defined in "National Electrical Code, " Article 100 . 2 . Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications : A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910 .7 . E. Comply with requirements of EPA and state and local authorities having jurisdiction. Include recording of fuel oil storage tanks and monitoring of tanks and piping. F. Product Options: Oil distribution systems equipment, specialties, piping, and accessories are based on specific types, manufacturers, and models indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions . " G. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, " Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications. " 1 . Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping. " 2 . Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that certification is current . 1. 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lift and support fuel oil storage tanks only at designated lifting or supporting points, as shown on final shop drawings. Do not move or lift tanks except when tanks are empty. OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 3 2980 a. Exception: 125 psig at 150 deg F (860 kPa at 66 deg C) , for 4-inch (100-mm) size glass-fiber- reinforced thermosetting resin (RTRP) pipe and fittings. 7 . Containment Conduit Piping System, Containment Conduit : 5 psig (34 kPa) . 1 .4 SUBMITTALS A. General : Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data, including size, dimensions, capacity, pressure rating, accessories and special features, and operating characteristics for the following: 1 . Each type and size of fuel oil storage tank. 2 . Fuel oil storage tank accessories and specialty fittings . 3 . General-duty and special-duty valves. 4 . Containment conduit piping systems. 5 . Liquid-level gage systems. 6 . Leak detection and monitoring systems . 7. Mechanical sleeve seals . 8 . Identification materials and devices . C. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" Article of this Section. D. Coordination drawings for fuel oil distribution systems, including required clearances and relationship to other services that serve same work areas. E. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 . F. Wiring diagrams for each item of equipment with electric power supply. Include ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions that are field installed. G. Maintenance data for fuel oil specialties and special duty valves for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout. " OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 2 2980 SECTION 02690 OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 .2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fuel oil storage tanks, specialties, accessories, and oil distribution piping outside the building. B. Related Sections : The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 . Division 15 Section "Fuel Oil Piping Systems" for fuel oil system piping, pumps, and accessories inside the building. 1 .3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure Ratings : Except where otherwise indicated, the following are minimum pressure requirements. 1. Aboveground Fuel Oil Distribution Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa) . 2 . Underground Fuel Oil Distribution Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa) . a. Exception: 125 psig at 150 deg F (860 kPa at 66 deg C) for 4-inch (100-mm) size glass-fiber- reinforced thermosetting resin (RTRP) pipe and fittings. 3 . Vent, Gage, and Fill Piping: 100 psig (690 kPa) . 4 . Fuel Oil Storage Tanks : 5 psig (34 kPa) . 5. Fuel Oil Storage Tank, Outer (Containment) Shell Walls: 5 psig (34 kPa) . 6. Containment Conduit Piping System, Carrier Pipe: 150 psig (690 kPa) . 6 OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02690 - 1 2980 C. Before being placed in service, the pipeline, valves, hydrants, hydrant connections and other appurtenances built under this Contract shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA 651, "Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains" . Repeat procedure if contamination is present in bacteriological examination. 3 . 11 BACKFILLING A. General : 1 . Backfill in accordance with the provisions of Section 02200 . Take all necessary care to assure thorough compaction of fill under haunches of the pipe, without damage or misalignment of the pipe. 2 . Where accepted by the Architect, sheeting and portions of bracing used may be left in place. Do not leave untreated sheeting in place beneath structures or pavements. B. After the backfill has reached at least 12 inches above the top of the pipe, place backfill by compacting in layers, not exceeding 12 inches in compacted depth. C. Compact to the minimum densities specified in Section 02200 . END OF SECTION WATER SERVICE 02660-10 2980 ,► D. Trench to be dewatered and constructed in accordance with OSHA regulations . E. Coordinate with utility company requirements to make tap. 3 . 08 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING A. Install restrained joints for buried piping within 5 feet of building. Use restrained joint pipe and fittings, thrust blocks, anchors, tie rods and clamps and other supports at vertical and horizontal offsets. 3 . 09 CONCRETE CRADLES, CONCRETE ENCASEMENTS, CONCRET THRUST BLOCKS AND BAR REINFORCEMENT A. Construct concrete cradles and concrete encasements for additional support or protection of pipe at locations indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. B. Construct concrete thrust blocks at locations indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Install thrust blocks to counteract longitudinal thrust along pipelines at bends, tees, reducers and plugs. Also, construct thrust blocks to counteract thrust in a vertical plane. Construct concrete thrust blocks so that concrete does not cover nuts and bolts of joints. C. Place bar reinforcement cradles, encasements, and thrust blocks as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 3 . 10 PRESSURE TESTING AND DISINFECTING A. After installation, pipelines shall be tested for watertightness in an approved manner. For these tests, the Contractor shall furnish suitable testing plugs or caps, all necessary pressure pumps, pipe connections, gages, or other equipment, all labor and all water required. B. Conduct leakage test at a pressure of 200 psi unless otherwise specified and maintain this pressure for 2 hours. The amount of leakage which will be permitted shall be in accordance with AWWA C600 . WATER SERVICE a b3 02660-9 2980 3 . At all bends use mechanical joints with retainers and thrust blocking. 4 . Use push-on joints or mechanical joints at all other locations. B . Making Mechanical Joints : 1 . Clean socket and plain end. Slip gland and gasket over plain end. Small side of gasket and lip side of gland shall face the socket . Apply lubricant to gasket and mating surfaces of pipe. Align sections of pipe being jointed; insert plain end into socket . Push gasket into position so that it is evenly seated. Slide gland into position, insert bolts and tighten nuts by hand. Then, tighten bolts alternately: bottom, then top; 90 degrees then 270 degrees; and so on all around. Finally using a properly calibrated torque wrench, torque all bolts and nuts to a torque as recommended by pipe manufacturer. C. Making Push-On Joints : 1 . Clean gaskets and mating surfaces of the pipe. Apply lubricant to gaskets and surfaces of the pipe. Align pipe to be installed with previously installed pipe and with gasket in place, put joint together. After pipe is put together, inspect joint to verify that gasket is properly positioned and that joint has been properly made and is tight . If, while making the joint, the gasket becomes loose or misplaced, the pipe shall be removed and the joint remade. D. Make all joints watertight. 3 . 07 TAPPING SLEEVE AND GATE VALVE A. Excavation to existing water main to allow 12" clearance from bottom of tapping sleeve, 12" minimum and 18" maximum around valve flanges and 18" beyond side of existing pipe and 7-0" minimum from outside flange of tapping gate valve. B. Tapping sleeve to be placed on existing water main with test plug up. C. Tapping gate valve to be set on wood blocking. WATER SERVICE , 02660-8 2980 C. Bedding: 1 . Protect bottom of excavation from frost . Do not place bedding, pipe, hydrants, valves or fill materials on frozen ground. 2 . Provide a bedding surface for pipe with a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire length of pipe. Tamp bedding when necessary. Bed pipes carefully in bedding accurately shaped and rounded to conform to the lower % of the outside perimeter of the pipe. Provide bell holes and depressions for pipe joints of only the length, depth and width required for properly making the particular joint . 3 . 05 PLACING PIPE A. General : 1 . Carefully examine each length of pipe prior to placing. Promptly set aside all defective pipe and all damaged pipe. Clearly identify all defects . Do not install defective pipe or damaged pipe. 2 . Place all pipe to the grades and alignment shown. 3 . Provide all required equipment for lowering pipe safely into the trenches. 4 . Lay pipe with the spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow. 3 . 06 PIPE JOINTS A. Types of Joints; 1. Use mechanical joints with retainers and thrust blocking, or mechanical joints and lacing at all hydrant and gate valve installations. 2 . Use mechanical joints in close proximity to sewers as specified above under Article titled Water Main Construction in Close Proximity to sewers. WATER SERVICE aL/ 02660-7 2980 mains located at one side on a bench of undisturbed earth and if in either case the elevation of the crown of the sewer is at least 18 inches below the invert of the water main. B . Vertical separation: Whenever water mains must cross over sewers, the water main shall be laid at such an elevation that the top of the sewer is at least 18 inches below the bottom of the water main. When the elevation of the sewer cannot be varied to meet the above requirement, the water main shall be relocated to provide this separation or reconstruct it with mechanical joint pipe for a distance of 10 feet on each side of the sewer. One full length of water main should be centered over the sewer so that both joints will be as far from the sewer as possible. C. When it is impossible to obtain proper horizontal and vertical separation as stipulated above, both the water main and sewer shall be constructed of mechanical joint ductile iron pipe and shall be pressure tested to assure water tightness; and the sewer shall be concrete encased for a distance of 10 feet on either side of the water main. D. Where the proposed water main is to cross conflicting existing storm, water and sanitary sewers at side streets and at catch basins, test pits shall be dug to determine the location of the existing utilities. Test pits shall be dug far enough ahead of the work to allow for deflection above or below the conflicting utility. Test pits shall be dug only as directed and approved by the Architect. 3 . 04 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BEDDING A. General : Trenching, tunneling and backfilling procedures shall conform to 248 CMR 2 . 05 (5) (a) through (d) and 2 . 06 (2) (f) lle and as specified below. B. General : Provide excavating, trenching and bedding in accordance with the provisions of Section 02200 and as follows: WATER SERVICE 02660-6 2980 or cast-aluminum casing guard, tapped drain port in valve housing, and key operation. Hydrant is o length required for installation of inlet valve below frost line . Furnish 2 keys for each hydrant . 2 . 05 CONCRETE AND CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT A. Provide, as required for thrust blocks, cradles, encasements and any other uses of this Section. B. Concrete shall be Class A as specified under Division 3 of Specifications . 2 . 06 BEDDING, COVER AND BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Crushed stone for bedding shall be sound, tough and durable; it shall be free from soft, thin, elongated or laminated pieces and vegetable or other deleterious substances . B . Suitable Backfill Material : Section 02200 . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 WATER DEPARTMENT A. Coordinate activities with the utility company. Pay all fees required by the utility company. 3 . 03 WATER MAIN CONSTRUCTION IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO SEWERS A. Horizontal separation: If possible, water mains shall be laid at least 10 feet horizontally from any existing or proposed sewers. If local conditions prevent a lateral separation of 10 feet, a water main may be laid closer than 10 feet to a sewer if (1) it is laid in a separate trench, or if (2) it is laid in the same trench with the water WATER SERVICE aS 02660-5 2980 D. Joining Materials : 1 . Push-On Joints : AWWA C111 rubber gaskets and lubricant 2 . Mechanical Joints :AWWA C111 ductile iron glands, high strength steel bolts and nuts and rubber gaskets . 3 . Flanged Joints : AWWA C115 ductile iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and high strength bolts and nuts. 4 . Brazing Filler Metals : AWS A5 . 8 copper- phosphorus or silver phosphorus series. E . Lacing Rods and Eye Bolts 1 . Fabricated From A-36 steel . 2 . Rods to have Yield Stress 36, 000 psi minimum. 3 . Eye bolts to have tensile strength 7000 lbs minimum each. 4 . Provide 4 - 3/4" diameter lacing rods at 10" and 12" its before and after a bend. 5 . Provide 2 - 3/4" diameter lacing rods at 411 , 6" and 8" its before and after a bend. 2 . 03 TAPPING SLEEVE AND TAPPING GATE VALVE A. Tapping Sleeve and Gate Valve : 1 . Size : As indicated on the Drawings 2 . Shall be manufactured by: a. Clow Valve Co. b. Kennedy Valve Division c. Mueller Company d. M&H Valve Company 2 . 04 YARD HYDRANT A. Yard Hydrants, Post type: Non-freeze, post-type, %-inch (20 mm) inlet, integral vacuum breaker with outlet conforming to ASME B1.20 . 7, %-11 .5NH threads for garden hose. Include bronze casing, cast-iron WATER SERVICE 02660-4 2980 1 . Manufacturer' s standard permanent, bright- colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide blue tape with black printing reading "Caution Water Line Buried Below" . B. Manufacturers : 1 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide plastic line markers of one of the following: Allen Systems, Inc . Seton Name Plate Corporation Emed Co. , Inc. 2 . 02 PIPE MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Pipe 1 . Cement Lined Meeting ANSI A21 . 51 2 . Sizes : As indicated on the Drawings 3 . Thickness : Class 54 4 . Manufacturer: Atlantic States, U.S. Pipe and Foundry, Griffin Pipe, Clow Corp. , McWane. B. Copper Tube: 1 . ASTM B 88, Type K, seamless water tube, annealed temper. 2 . Use for water supply to lawn hydrants. C. Fittings: 1 . Ductile Iron, Meeting AWWA C110 . 2 . Copper Tube Fittings, ASME B16 .22, wrought copper brazed joints, pressure type. 3 . Sizes: As indicated on the Drawings. 4 . Manufacturer: Long or Short Pattern from U.S. Pipe & Foundry, Tyler Pipe and Foundry, Griffin Pipe, Clow Corp. , Signa, Union Foundry (UFCO) . WATER SERVICE a 5 02660-3 2980 3 . Local Fire Department Regulations : Comply with governing regulations . , C. Coordinate system installation activities with the Owner. 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit data on the following: 1 . Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. 2 . Manufacturer' s specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements . 3 . Manufacturer' s recommended installation procedures which, when accepted by the Engineer, shall become the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1 . 05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation to protect the work and materials of all other trades. B. Protection of utilities : Protect existing utilities as specified in Division 2 . C. Delivery and storage : Deliver all materials to the job site in their original containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Store in strict accordance with the manufacturer' s recommendations as accepted by the Architect . D. Replacements : In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the acceptance of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 IDENTIFICATION A. Underground-Type Plastic Line Markers : WATER SERVICE 02660-2 2980 SECTION 02660 WATER SERVICE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1 . 02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water system piping for potable water service and pipe protection services, connection to existing water system, water piping to lawn hydrants . B. Related Sections : Excavation and Backfill Concrete Work 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer' s Qualifications: 1 . Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of water system materials and products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Code and Standards : 1 . Plumbing Code Compliance : Comply with applicable portions of Commonwealth of Massachusetts Plumbing Codes, applicable State Department of Health Regulations, and local Department of Public Utilities Standards pertaining to selection and installation of water system materials and products. 2 . Water Purveyor Compliance: Comply with requirements of Purveyor supplying water to project, obtain required permits and inspections. WATER SERVICE o��s 02660-1 2980 3 . 04 CLEANING A. After pointing, the granite curb shall be satisfactorily cleaned of all excess mortar that may have been forced out of the joints . B. Wash granite curb free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material immediately prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION GRANITE CURBS 02525-4 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Examine subgrades and installation conditions . Do not start granite curb work until satisfactory conditions are corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Subgrade: Proof-roll subgrade of granite curb and do necessary rolling and compacting to obtain firm, even subgrade surface. Fill and consolidate depressed areas. Remove incompatible materials, replace with clean fill and compact to 950 of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Protection Method. B. Base: Spread porous base material and compact in maximum 6" lifts to 95% of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Protector Method. 3 . 03 INSTALLATION A. Setting Curb: Place concrete at the joints as indicated on the Drawings . All remaining spaces under the curb shall be filled with additional porous material thoroughly compacted so that the curb will be completely supported throughout its length. B. Line and Grade : The curb shall be set at the line and grade required as shown on the plans. Curb shall be fitted together as closely as possible. C. Pointing: The joints (both front and back) between curb stones shall be carefully filled with cement mortar and neatly pointed on the top and front exposed portions. GRANITE CURBS 02525-3 2980 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stone Curb: Deliver, store and handle stone to prevent soiling and damage . Stack stone off the ground. B. Mortar Materials : Deliver mortar materials in manufacturer' s unopened and undamaged containers with labels intact and legible. Store material off the ground, under cover and protect from weather damage and deterioration. Stockpile and handle aggregates to prevent mixing with foreign materials. 1 . 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Establish and maintain required lines and grade elevations. B. Do not install granite curb work over wet, soggy, muddy or frozen subgrade. C. Do not install concrete or mortar when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. Use of calcium chloride, salt, or any other admixture to prevent concrete or mortar from freezing is prohibited. D. Protect adjacent work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS A. Granite Curb: MAHD M9 . 04 . 1 . B. Mortar: MAHD M4 . 02 .15 . C. Porous Fill : AASHTO M43, 46 (318" to 3/4") uniformly graded, clean crushed stone or gravel . D. Concrete: Section 02515 - Concrete Paving. GRANITE CURBS 02525-2 2980 SECTION 02525 GRANITE CURBS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 . Final subgrade preparation and porous base . 2 . Granite curbs (sloped face) . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Earthwork: Section 02210 B. Asphaltic Concrete Paving and Curbs : Section 02510 C. Concrete Paving and Curbs : Section 02512 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable operations, materials and methods shall be in accordance with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Highway Department, Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1988, and Addenda, (MAHD) , except where otherwise specified herein. B. Provide stone from only one quarry to ensure cross- sectional uniformity and consistent color range and texture. 1. 04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s product data for each type of curb required. B. Samples : Submit samples of portions of full size units to include the full range of exposed color, texture and finish proposed for the work. a � \ GRANITE CURBS 02525-1 2980 3 . 06 CLEANING A. Perform cleaning during installation of work and upon completion of the work. Remove excess materials, forms, debris, and equipment from site. Repair damage resulting from concrete operations . B. Sweep concrete walks and pavement and wash concrete surfaces and faces free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material immediately prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-11 2980 C. Testing: 1 . Provide slump test on first load of concrete delivered each day and whenever requested due to changes in consistency or appearance of concrete. 2 . Provide air indicator tests and air meter tests for all air-entrained concrete . a. Perform air indicator test with "Chase" AE 35 or equal air indicator, and air meter test in accordance with ASTM C231 or C173 . Test first load of concrete delivered each day. b. Furnish copies of field records and tests reports as listed for strength tests . 3 . Strength Testing: a. Provide 1 set of 3 test specimens for each 50 cu. yd. placed in any one day. Secure samples in accordance with ASTM C172 and mold specimens in accordance with ASTM C31 . b. Test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C39 . C. Furnish copies of field records and test reports as follows : 2 copies to Architect 1 copy to Contractor 1 copy to Ready Mix Supplier 4 . Record exact location of concrete in work represented by each set of cylinders and show on test reports. 5 . Provide insulated moist box for protection of test cylinders until shipped to laboratory. 3 . 05 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete work from damage due to construction and vehicular traffic until final acceptance. Exclude construction and vehicular traffic from concrete pavement for at least 14 days. CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-10 2980 b. Textured finish for slabs-on-grade : 1 . Where indicated on Drawings provide uniform, fine line, medium broom finish by drawing soft broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic or otherwise in direction indicated on Drawings . Repeat brooming as necessary. Use approved push broom with clean, straight unworn bristles . Keep bristles clean of concrete buildup during use. 2 . Where indicated on Drawings provide uniform, medium grained, non-directional finish, using wood float . 3 . Provide rubbed finish for side faces that will be visible. 4 . Where indicated on Drawings provide smooth, steel-tooled edge borders and bands in patterns and widths required, or otherwise remove visible tool marks as required. C. Ramps : Lightly broadcast non-slip aggregate, trowel in and provide indicated textured finish. D. Do not remove forms until concrete has set up sufficiently to support its own weight without slumping. E. Curing: Cure concrete with a non-staining liquid membrane-forming compound. Apply spray in accordance with manufacturer' s recommended coverage rates and instructions immediately after completing surface finish. F. Joint Caulking: Install. bond breaker and caulk with sealer as specified by the manufacturer. 3 . 04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide field quality control testing and inspection during concrete operations. B. Contractor will provide adequate notice, cooperate with, provide access to the work, obtain samples, and assist test agency and their representatives in execution of their function. O 2,`E1 CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-9 2980 3 . Provide standard keyed-section construction Awk joints where indicated on Drawings or otherwise approved. 4 . Provide expansion joints using premolded joint filler as follows : a. Locate expansion joints as indicated on Drawings or approved Shop Drawings . When not given on Drawings, provide joints at maximum 20 ' on center for curbs and walks at concrete work abutting curbs, walls, structures, walks, and other fixed objects . Align expansion joints in abutting curbs and walks . b. Install joint fillers full-width and depth of joint . Recess top edge below adjacent finished surface 1/2" or as otherwise indicated on Drawings . For forming, attach approved plastic cap strip to top edges of fillers. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement . C. Provide joint fillers in single lengths for the full slab width, whenever possible. Fasten joint filler sections together when multiple lengths are required. Hold fillers in place by means of steel pins or approved installing devices to prevent warping during placing and finishing. C. Concrete Finishing: 1 . Perform concrete finishing using mechanical or hand methods as required. 2 . On completion of floating, and after bleed water has disappeared and concrete can sustain foot pressure with only slight indentation, cut concrete away from forms. Work edges with an edging tool. Round edges to 1/8" radius unless otherwise indicated on Drawings . 3 . Install control joints at indicated locations during edging operations. 4 . Complete surface finish as follows: a. Tool outside edges and joints with approved radius edging tool. Aftk CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-8 2980 2 . Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during mixing, placing, and curing. In cold weather comply with ACI 306„ "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting" . In hot weather comply with ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting" . 3 . Remove loose material and debris from base surface before placing concrete. 4 . Moisten subgrade or base to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. 5 . Place and spread concrete to the full depth of the forms. Use only square-end shovels or concrete rakes for hand-spreading and consolidating concrete. Exercise care during spreading and consolidating operations to prevent segregation of aggregate and dislocation of reinforcement . 6 . Place concrete in continuous operation between expansion joints. Provide construction joints, arranged in approved manner when sections cannot be placed continuously. 7 . Place concrete in one monolithic course for full width and depth of concrete work. 8 . Strike-off and bull-float concrete after consolidating. Level ridges and fill voids. Check surface with a 10 ' -0" straightedge. Fill depressions and refloat repaired areas. Darby concrete surface to provide a smooth level surface ready for finishing. B. Joints : 1 . Install control, expansion, and construction joints properly aligned and perpendicular with faces and surfaces. 2 . Tool joints to depth equal to not less than one- fifth (1/5) of the concrete thickness or as otherwise indicated on Drawings. Hand tool control joints in pattern and at spacing indicated on Drawings or approved Shop Drawings. When not otherwise indicated on Drawings or approved Shop Drawings, provide spacing equal to slab width but not greater than 10 ' -0" on center. Use straight edges and chalk lines to accurately *, guide hand tools. 2�s CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-7 2980 3 . 03 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE PAVINGS A. Subgrade : Proof roll subgrade of concrete pavings and do necessary rolling and compacting to obtain firm, even the subgrade surface. Fill and consolidate depressed areas . Remove uncompactable materials, replace with clean fill and compact to 950 of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Proctor Method. B. Base: Spread porous base material and compact in maximum 8" lifts to 95% of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Proctor Method. C. Install, align, and level forms . Stake and brace forms in place. Maintain following grade and alignment tolerances : 1 . Top of form: Maximum 1/8" in 10 ' -011 . 2 . Vertical face : Maximum 1/4" in 10 ' -011 . D. Coat form surfaces in contact with concrete with form release agent . Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as necessary to assure separation from concrete without damage. E. Locate, place, and support reinforcement as indicated on Drawings. 1 . Provide a single layer of welded wire fabric in all concrete slabs-on-grade. 2 . Provide reinforcing bars for concrete item if so indicated on Drawings. Adequately support and secure reinforcement . 3 . Prevent displacement . F. Install, set, and build-in work furnished under other specification sections . Provide adequate notification for installation of necessary items. G. Install conduits and pipe sleeves furnished under other sections. Stake location of conduits and sleeves. 3 . 03 INSTALLATION A. Concrete Placement : 1 . Comply with ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete" , and as specified. CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-6 2980 E. Welded Wire Fabric : ASTM A185, welded, plain cold- drawn steel wire fabric . F. Reinforcing and WWF Supports on Grade : Concrete briquettes . G. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751, premolded non-extruding asphalt-impregnated fiberboard. H. Expansion Joint Cap Strip: Extruded, plastic, removable strip made specifically for forming recessed joints . By Vinylex, Knoxville, TN 37921 (615) 690-2211 or approved equivalent . I . Non-slip Aggregate: Fused aluminum oxide grits, factory graded, packaged, rust-proof, nonglazing and white colored. "Alundum Abrasive Grain, " size 20, by Norton Co. , Worcester, MA, 01606, or approved equal. J. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, non-yellowing, non- staining liquid membrane-forming type containing a fugitive dye. Chlorinated rubber compounds are not acceptable. K. Sealant : 2 part, self-leveling, pourable, polyurethane, of selected concrete gray color, conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Type 1, Class A. 2 . 04 PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS A. MAHD, Precast Units, Section M4 . 02 . 14 . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Examine subgrades and installation conditions . Do not start concrete work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that frames for manholes, basins, drains, valves, boxes, and other flush structures within and adjacent to areas to be paved and in curb lines are at their proper elevation and alignment. 3 . 02 PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS A. MAHD, Curb and Edging, Section 500 as applicable. CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-5 2980 gravel coarse aggregate free of materials which cause staining or rust spots; C. Fine Aggregate : ASTM C33, clean natural sand. D. Water: Clean, potable. E. Air-entraining Admixture : ASTM C260 . F. Water-reducing Admixture: ASTM C494 . 2 . 02 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Provide only transit mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C-94 . 1 . Strength: 4, 000 psi minimum at 28 days. 2 . Slump range : 2" to 4" maximum as determined in accordance with ASTM C-143 B. Provide a water-reducing admixture in concrete . C. Provide an air-entraining admixture in concrete for an air content of So to 7% as determined in accordance with ASTM C-173 . D. Indicate water added to mix at job site on each delivery ticket . Show quantity of water added. Site water tempered mixes exceeding specified slump range will be rejected as not complying with specification requirements. 2 . 03 ACCESSORIES A. Porous Material : AASHTO M43, #6 (3/8" to 3/411 ) uniformly graded, clean crushed stone or gravel . B. Forms : Clean, straight, free of defects and distortion. Of height equal to full depth of concrete works. Conforming to profiles, lines and dimensions indicated on Drawings. Of metal construction, except on sharp radius bends where plywood forms may be used. Of sufficient strength to resist concrete placement pressure and to maintain horizontal and vertical alignment during concrete placement . C. Form Release Agent : Non-staining chemical form release agent free of oils, waxes, and other materials harmful to concrete. D. Reinforcing Steel : ASTM A615, A616, or A617, Grade 40, new domestic deformed steel bars. CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-4 2980 3 . Admixtures . 4 . Air content . 5 . Slump. 6 . Time of loading. D. Concrete test reports . E. Shop Drawings : Precast concrete curb sections and elevations indicating profiles, reinforcing and finish for the types of curbing required. 1. 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver curing materials, admixtures, and retarders in manufacturer' s original unopened containers with labels legible and intact. Store and protect from freezing and damage. 1 . 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Work notifications : Notify Architect at least 24 hours prior to beginning installation of concrete for each type and section of work. B. Establish and maintain required lines and grade elevations. C. Do not install concrete work over wet, soggy, muddy, or frozen subgrade. D. Do not install concrete when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. Use of calcium chloride, salt, or any other admixture to prevent concrete from freezing is prohibited. E. Protect adjacent work. F. Provide temporary barricades and warning lights as required for protection of project work and public safety. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement : ASTM C-150, Type I cement, natural color. B. Course Aggregate: ASTM C33 normal weight aggregates, 1" maximum size, clean, uncoated crushed stone or CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-3 2980 D. Maintain field records of time, date of placing, curing, and removal of forms of concrete in each portion of work. E. Owner will provide and pay for testing and inspection by an independent testing laboratory during concrete operations . F. Field Samples : 1 . Architect may select sections of existing on site concrete as samples to be matched by new installation work; otherwise produce field samples of concrete work at location selected by Architect . Produce additional samples, if required and obtain Architect' s approval prior to beginning actual installation. Retain approved samples during construction as standards for workmanship and appearance of installation. 2 . Demonstrate color, finish, pattern, expansion joints, control joints, tooling and caulking for work as follows : a. Walks : 6' x 18' panel . b. Ramps, landings and pads : 6' x 6' panel . 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS: Deliver following submittals to Architect and obtain his approval prior to ordering materials or beginning work or as otherwise required. Time delivery to allow reasonable review period and prevent delays. A. Concrete mix designs. B. Product data: 1 . Complete materials list of items proposed for work identifying materials source. 2 . Admixture, curing compound, retarder, and accessory items. 3 . Material certificates for aggregates, reinforcing, and joint fillers. C. Concrete delivery tickets showing following: 1 . Batch number. 2 . Mix by class or sack content with maximum size aggregate. AWA CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-2 2980 SECTION 02512 CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS PART 1 . 00 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 . Final subgrade preparation, and porous base . 2 . Concrete slabs-on-grade (walks, pads, landings, ramps and paving) . 3 . Precast concrete curbs . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Earthwork: Section 02220 B. Granite Curbs : Section 02525 1. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications : The work of this Section will be performed by qualified and experienced installers. The installers shall be organizations of established reputation which are regularly engaged in and which maintain a regular force of workmen skilled in the installation of the type of work specified in this section and is acceptable to the Architect. B. Materials and methods of construction will comply with the following standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM) . 2 . American Concrete Institute, (ACI) . 3 . Applicable operations, materials and methods shall be in accordance with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department, "Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges" , 1988 and Addenda (MAHD) , except where otherwise specified herein. C. Do not change source or brands of cement and aggregate materials during the course of the work. 239 CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02512-1 2980 determination less than 950 of average density of laboratory specimens . 2 . Perform 1 test for density for each course for each day' s work. 3 . Thickness : Make at least 1 test for each 5, 000 sq. ft . of each type of paving. G. Test for surface smoothness with 10' -0" straight- edge. Define, remove, and replace, or adjust deficient areas to design thickness by methods acceptable to Architect . H. During progress of work when field tests indicate that installed compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective materials, install new materials, and re-test at Contractor' s expense, as directed by the Architect. 3 . 09 PROTECTION A. Protect work from damage due to construction and vehicular traffic until final acceptance. 3 . 10 CLEANING A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from paving operations. B. Sweep pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material immediately prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-12 2980 and correct any variation from true line exceeding 1/4" to satisfaction of Architect . F. Cut endings cleanly. Maintain uniform compaction; smooth consistent visual appearance; and integrity of curbing. Correct, repair and replace defective sections to satisfaction of Architect . G. Keep area free of traffic for period of at least 24 hours and until curbing has set sufficiently to bear traffic without damage. 3 . 08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide field quality control testing and inspection during asphaltic concrete paving operations . B. Contractor shall provide adequate notice, cooperate with, provide access to the work, obtain samples, and assist Test Agency and their representatives in execution of their function. C. Before construction of granular subbase course, field verify that subgrade surfaces are adequate and meet or exceed design bearing values. Provide a minimum of 1 test for each type of paving required. D. When requested, perform laboratory tests on asphalt pavement mixes to determine compliance with specified requirements. E. Perform 1 series of compaction tests for granular subbase for each course for each day' s work. F. Test in-place asphaltic concrete base course and surface courses for compliance with density and thickness . Take no smaller than 4" diameter pavement specimens of each completed course. Repair test specimen holes to match adjacent work. 1 . Average density of in-place material : Equal to or greater than 97%, with no individual 230 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-11 2980 4 . Spray paint to uniform density at rate of 400 ,"k square feet/gallon and to 5 . 0 total dry mil thickness unless manufacturer recommends otherwise . 5 . Make lines uniform 4" width unless otherwise indicated on Drawings . Markings and lines shall have crisp edges without noticeable fogging or overruns . Lines shall be truly straight or curved as required. Work shall have uniform coloring and appearance. 6 . Protect and keep surrounding surfaces free of spills, overruns and other damage . Clean immediately. Restore surfaces by approved methods . 3 . 07 INSTALLATION: ASPHALTIC SLOPED CURB A. Lay and compact curbing with approved mechanical curbing machine. Hand-lay curbing only where machine laying is not possible and it has been approved by Architect . B. Prior to arrival of asphaltic concrete mixture on job clean surface of paving of loose and foreign material. Just prior to placing mixture, when surface is clean and dry, coat it with tack coat . C. Transfer mixture from delivery truck into hopper of curbing machine on job site. Keep mixture free of dirt and foreign material during transfer and installation. D. If design of curbing machine is such that outside wheels must operate outside of curb, obtain smooth surface by grading and consolidating area on which outside wheel of machine rides at Contractor' s expense. E. Install curbing true to required radii and lines. Test surface of curbing with 10-foot straight edge ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-10 2980 Continue rolling until all roller marks are eliminated. Provide a smooth compacted surface true to thickness and elevations required. J. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on the pavement until it has cooled and hardened, and in no case sooner than 8 hours . K. Protect newly placed material from traffic by barricades or other suitable methods acceptable to the Architect . 3 . 06 INSTALLATION: TRAFFIC STRIPING, MARKING AND SIGNS A. General : 1 . Provide lines, lettering and markings required to define vehicular parking and standing spaces, and vehicular and pedestrian traffic flow. 2 . Use approved traffic marking stencils for pavement signs and markings. 3 . Erect poles and mount signs, plumb and secure. B. Disabled Parking Stalls and Passenger Loading Zones : Provide special mounted signs, markings, striping and stenciled pavement signs conforming to State Code requirements. C. Installation: 1 . Thoroughly clean finished asphalt surfaces before striping and marking. Remove loose materials, dirt, and dust. 2 . Perform sample brush-out to determine if pavement is fully cured. If pavement crazes, spalls or shows other evidence of not being cured, allow further time as necessary. 3 . Lay out work with chalk for approval by Architect prior to painting. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-9 2980 Do not start surface work until all other work which may damage the finish surface is completed. B. When asphaltic concrete surface material is not installed immediately following the asphaltic concrete base course installation, apply tack coat to base course at the rate of 0 . 05 to 0 . 10 gallons per sq. yd. Allow to dry and cure . C. Install asphaltic concrete surface material in single course. D. Place, spread, and strike off the asphaltic concrete mixture on a properly prepared and conditioned surface. Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand. Place each course to grade, cross-section, and compacted thickness indicated on Drawings . E. Place materials in strips not less than 10 ' -0" wide. After the first strip has been placed and rolled, place all succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete base course for a section before placing surface course materials . F. Carefully make joints between old and new pavements, and between successive day' s work, to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have the same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the asphalt concrete course. G. Apply appropriate tack or prime coat to contact surfaces of existing pavement, curbs, and structures that will abut new pavement. H. Begin rolling operations when the asphaltic concrete mixture will bear the weight of the roller without excessive displacement . Compact areas inaccessible to rollers with vibrating plate compactors. I . Perform breakdown, second and finish rolling until the asphalt concrete mixture has been compacted to the required surface density and smoothness. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-8 2980 2 . Fill seams with an emulsion slurry or liquid asphalt mixed with sand. 3 . Wipe treated surface, with a rubber edged squeegee to eliminate build-up. D. Pavement Butt Type Joints : Cut and remove existing paving. Install prime or tack coat as applicable followed by surface course. E. Transition Surface Course for Existing Pavement : Install tack coat over entire transition area followed by surface course as indicated on Drawings. 3 . 04 INSTALLATION: POROUS FILL, GRANULAR SUBBASE OR RECLAIMED BASE COURSE AND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE BASE A. Install porous fill and granular subbase or reclaimed base course material up to 6" thickness in single course; install 6" and greater thickness in 2 equal courses . B. Install asphaltic concrete base materials in single course to total compacted depth indicated on Drawings. C. Compact porous fill and granular subbase or reclaimed base course material to 1000 of ASTM D698 maximum dry density until a uniformly-smooth, hard surface, complying with the lines, grades, elevations, and cross-sections shown has been established. Moisture may be added at job site to aid compaction. D. Compact asphaltic concrete base materials to 1000 of ASTM D698 maximum dry density until a uniformly- smooth, hard surface, complying with the lines, grades, elevations, and cross-sections shown has been established. 3 . 05 INSTALLATION: ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACE MATERIAL A. Remove loose and foreign material from compacted base immediately before application of surface material. � ry ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-7 2980 B. Frame Adjustments : 1 . Verify frames for manholes, catch basins, and other such structures within areas to be paved are at their proper elevation and alignment . 2 . Adjust frames as required to match paving. Provide temporary closures over openings until completion of rolling operations . Remove closures at completion of the work. Set covers to grade, flush with the surface of adjoining pavement surface. C. Coordinate junction of new and existing pavement . Saw cut existing pavement to provide a uniform straight line transition. Meet existing surface levels and maintain drainage slopes . Feathering of transitions is not acceptable. D. Repair existing pavement before installing new overlay materials. Cut out depressions minimum depth of 1" with vertical cuts . Install fresh surface materials and compact with rolling equipment . Feathering of patches is not acceptable. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of existing pavement, curbs, and structures abutting pavement . 3 . 03 INSTALLATION: GENERAL A. Transport asphaltic concrete mixtures from the mixing plant to the project site in trucks with tight, clean compartments. B. Thoroughly clean existing pavement surfaces by air blowing, brooming or vacuuming before starting repair or resurfacing operations. C. Pavement seams in transition area of existing pavement : 1 . Remove and waste existing loose asphaltic concrete surface material. AM%. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-6 2980 accessories . "Telespar Sign Support System" by Unistrut Corp. , Wayne, Michigan (313) 721-4040 . 2 . Signs : Conforming to MAHD, Aluminum Sign Panels, M8 . 19 . 1. 2 . 02 EQUIPMENT A. Paving equipment : Spreading, self-propelled asphalt paving machines capable of maintaining line, grade, and thickness shown. B. Compacting equipment : Self-propelled rollers, minimum 10 ton weight . C. Hand tools : Rakes, shovels, tampers, and other miscellaneous equipment required to complete the work. D. Pavement painting equipment : Atomizing spray machines specifically designed for work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Examine subgrades and installation conditions. Do not start asphaltic concrete paving work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Proof roll subgrade of vehicular traffic-bearing pavings and do necessary rolling and compacting to obtain firm, even subgrade surface. Fill and consolidate depressed areas. Remove uncompactable materials, replace with clean fill, and compact to 95% of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698 Standard Proctor Method. Z3/ ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-5 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS A. Porous Fill : AASHTO M43 , #6 (3/8" to 3/4") uniformly graded, clean-crushed stone or gravel . B. Granular Subbase : MAHD: Dense-graded, Crushed Stone for Subbase, M2 . 01 . 7 . C. Reclaimed Base Course : MAHD, Reclaimed Base Course, Section 403 .40 and Section M1 . 11 . 0; except that 1000 shall pass 2" sieve. D. Asphaltic Concrete Base : MAHD Class 1, Bituminous Concrete; Section M3 .11 . 03, Table A, Dense Binder Course. E. Asphaltic Concrete Surface : MAHD Class 1, Bituminous Concrete; Section M3 . 11 . 03 , Table A, Dense Mix. F. Prime Coat : Cutback asphalt, AASHTO M82, MC-30, MC- 70 or MC-250, medium curing. G. Tack Coat : Asphalt emulsion, AASHTO M-140 or M-208 SS-1, SS-1h, CRS-1, CSS-1, or CSS-1h. H. Traffic Striping and Marking Paint : Factory-mixed, quick-drying, non-bleeding paint specifically formulated for marking asphaltic concrete surfaces . White in color and as otherwise required by local regulations, state code and Architect . I . Asphaltic Sloped Curb: MAHD Class 1, Bituminous Concrete Curb, Section M3 . 11. 03, Table A, Dense Mix. J. Traffic Signage: Provide approved poles, signs, ground mounts, wall mounts and accessories. 1 . Sign Mounting Posts: Posts, anchors and stiffeners of perforated, galvanized, square steel tubing with drive rivets, corner bolts, jam nuts, anchor sleeves and tubes, and other ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-4 2980 3 . Subbase materials (granular subbase or reclaimed base course) . 4 . Base materials . 5 . Surface materials. 6 . Compaction operations . 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured products in manufacturer' s original, unopened, and undamaged containers with labels intact and legible. Store and handle manufactured products to prevent damage and deterioration. 1 . 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather limitations: 1 . Do not install paving materials on wet or frozen subgrade surfaces. 2 . Do not apply prime and tack coat materials when temperature is 50 degrees F. or below. Do not apply to wet base surface. 3 . Install asphalt base and surface materials only when underlying surface is dry and air temperature is 40 degrees F. or above. B. Grade control : Establish and maintain the required lines and grades, including crown, inverted crown, and cross-slopes, for each course during paving operations. C. Provide temporary barricades and warning lights as required for protection of project work and public safety. D. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling, and staining during paving operations. ZZg ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-3 2980 C. Provide aggregate and asphaltic concrete materials from sources, producers, and plants accepted within Aw* the preceding 12 months on other projects for the Commonwealth of Massachusetts having similar type specifications or requirements . D. Tolerances : 1 . In-place compacted thickness : a. Subbase course : Maximum 1/2" plus, minus 011 . b. Base and Surface course : Maximum 1/4" plus, minus 0" . 2 . Finished surface smoothness : a. Subbase course : Maximum 3/8" in 10 ' -011 . b. Base and Surface course : Maximum 1/4" in 10 ' -011 , any direction. 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following to the Architect for his approval prior to ordering. 1 . 2 copies of materials certificates signed by the material producer and the Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceed specified requirements . 2 . Traffic striping and marking paint product data with recommended application rate and methods of application. B. Submit reports for testing and inspection of the following: 1 . Subgrade surfaces. 2 . Porous fill materials. A ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-2 2980 SECTION 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 . Final subgrade preparation, porous fill and subbase course . 2 . Roadway, parking, and walkway paving. 3 . Traffic stripping and signs . 4 . Asphaltic sloped curbs . 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Earthwork: Section 02210 . B. Concrete Paving and Curbs: Section 02512 . C. Granite Curbs : Section 02525 . D. Site Drainage : Section 02720 . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Owner will provide and pay for testing and inspecting during paving operations by an independent testing laboratory. B. Applicable operations, materials and methods shall be in accordance with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Highway Department, "Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges" , 1988 and Addenda (MAHD) , except where otherwise specified herein. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING AND CURBS 02510-1 2980 2 . The excavation made east of Column Line N (to allow construction of the East Wall) , must be backfilled to minimum Elevation 220 within two months after it is begun. 3 . A minimum waiting period of six weeks must elapse following placing of fill materials to within two feet of proposed final grades in an area within 50 feet of the East Wall, prior to constructing the windows and cladding on the above-grade portions of the East Wall . The duration of the waiting period may be adjusted by the Geotechnical Engineer upon verification that the rate of settlement has sufficiently diminished. END OF SECTION ao1 EARTHWORK 02200-17 2980 B. When testing agency reports that fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained. 3 .21 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas : Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris . B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions . 1 . Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect; reshape and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density. C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3 .22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner' s property. 3 .23 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING A. The following restrictions are imposed on the construction sequence of earthwork operations to limit delayed settlement experienced by the new structure. 1. Excavation of the basement must be completed (to maximum Elevation 209) within a minimum 50-foot distance from the "East Wall" (Column Line N) , prior to constructing the east wall 's foundations. AMW EARTHWORK 02200-16 2980 3 .19 DRAINAGE FILL A. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage fill course on prepared subgrade. 1 . Compact drainage fill to required cross sections and thickness . 2 . When compacted thickness of drainage fill is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 3 . When compacted thickness of drainage fill exceeds 6 inches thick place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick nor less than 3 inches thick when compacted. 3 .20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency Services : Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements . 1 . Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D1556 (sand cone method) , ASTM D2167 (rubber balloon method) , or ASTM D2937 (drive cylinder method) , as applicable. a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to ASTM D2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D3017 . b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect . 2 . Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, .perform at least one field in-place density test for every 2, 000 square feet or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 3 . Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in- place density test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall face. 4. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place density test for each 150 feet or less of trench, but no fewer than two tests. a a 3 EARTHWORK 02200-15 2980 or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry density. 3 .17 GRADING A. Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes . Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1 . Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades . 2 . Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances . B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances : 1 . Lawn or Unpaved Areas : Plus or minus 0 .10 foot . 2 . Walks : Plus or minus 0 .10 foot . 3 . Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading Inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. 3 . 18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared subgrades . Place base course material over subbases to pavements. 1 . Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D4254 relative density. 2 . Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades . 3 . When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. B. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement . Construct shoulders at least 12 inches wide of acceptable soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer. EARTHWORK 02200-14 2980 3 . 15 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content . 1 . Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2 . Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact to specified density. a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material . 3 .16 COMPACTION A. Minimum Compaction Standards : The compaction alternatives given below are stated to provide minimum compaction standards only and in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to achieve the above- specified degree of compaction by whatever additional effort necessary. 1 . Place fill in loose layers not more than twelve inches (12" ) thick and compact by four (4) passes of D-8 crawler or vibratory drum roller having a ten thousand pound (10, 000 lb. ) drum. In confined areas, place six-inch (611 ) layers and compact with four (4) passes of approved, manually-operated, powered vibratory plate or drum compactor. In areas which are too restricted to permit the use of mechanical compactors, fill may be placed in three-inch (311 ) layers and compacted by hand rammer or pneumatic tools to the specified densities . B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations . Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D1557 : 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, compact the top 12 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density. 2 . Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density. 3 . Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each layer of backfill Afw a a� EARTHWORK 02200-13 2980 3 .13 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE BACKFILL a" A. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of filter fabric around perimeter of drainage trench or at footing, as indicated. Place a 6 inch compacted course of filtering material on filter fabric to support drainage pipe. After installing and testing, encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 6 inches of compacted filtering material and wrap in filter fabric, overlapping edges at least 6 inches. B. Drainage Backfill : Place and compact drainage backfill of filtering material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of filter fabric, overlapping edges at least 6 inches . C. Impervious Fill : Place and compact impervious fill material over drainage backfill to final subgrade. 3 .14 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. 1. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing surface. B. When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill, break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture-condition or aerate soil and recompact to required density. C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below. 1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 2 . Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 3 . Under steps and ramps, use subbase material. 4. Under building slabs, use drainage fill material. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. EARTHWORK 02200-12 2980 2 . Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents . 3 . Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities . 4 . Concrete formwork removal . 5 . Removal of trash and debris from excavation. 6 . Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7 . Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls . 3 .12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits . B. Concrete backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings. C. Provide 4 inch thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 2 feet 6 inches below surface of roadways . After installation and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. D. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1 . Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed. G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. EARTHWORK 02200-11 2980 3 . 08 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached Aw*k required subgrade. B. When Architect determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1 . Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the Contract provisions for changes in Work. C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by the Architect . 3 . 09 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending indicated bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position when acceptable to the Architect . 1 . Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction as directed by the Architect. B. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation procedures, as required by the Architect . 3 .10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow materials . Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3 .11 BACKFILL A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. EARTHWORK 02200-10 2980 B. The Contractor shall follow a construction procedure which permits visual identification of excavation bottom. In the event that groundwater is encountered, the Architect may require that the size of the open excavation be limited to that which can be handled by the Contractor' s chosen method of dewatering and which will allow visual observation of the bottom and backfill in the dry. 3 . 06 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades . 3 . 07 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations . 1 . Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit . Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. C. Trench Bottoms : Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit . Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits . Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading. 1 . For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2 . For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3 . Where encountering rock or another unyielding bearing surface, carry trench excavation 6 inches below invert elevation to receive bedding course. a EARTHWORK 02200-9 2980 excavating equipment without systematic drilling or ripping. a. Rock material includes boulders 1/2 cu. yd. or more in volume and rock in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits . 3 . Rock excavating equipment for footings, trenches, and pits shall be equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 215D LC track-mounted hydraulic excavator, equipped with a 42 inch wide short-tip radius rock bucket, rated at not less than 120 hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 25, 000 lb and stick-crowd force of not less than 18, 700 lb, measured according to SAE Standard J1179 . 4 . Rock-excavating equipment for open excavations shall be equivalent to Caterpillar Model No. 973, heavy-duty, track-mounted loader, rated at not less than 210 hp flywheel power and developing minimum of 45, 000 lb breakout force, measured according to SAE Standard J732c-69 . a. Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width are defined as open excavations . 5 . Rock excavation will be paid by unit prices included in the Contract Documents . 6. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by Architect. 3 . 04 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations. 3 . 05 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 0 .10 foot. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2 . Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Appurtenances: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. EARTHWORK 02200-8 2980 B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost . Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways . 3 . 02 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. C. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, pumping and drainage facilities adequate to keep the excavated area sufficiently dry from groundwater and/or surface runoff and so as not to adversely affect construction procedures or cause excessive disturbance of underlying natural ground. The drainage of all water resulting from pumping shall be arranged so as not to cause damage to adjacent property. 3 . 03 EXCAVATION A. Explosives : Do not use explosives . B. Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations. Excavation will be classified as earth excavation or rock excavation as follows: 1. Earth excavation includes excavation of pavements and other obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be demolished and removed; together with soil and other materials encountered that are not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling or ripping to increase production and not necessary to permit excavation of material encountered will be classified as earth excavation. 2 . Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock material and obstructions encountered that cannot be removed by the following heavy-duty rock aI� EARTHWORK 02200-7 2980 marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick minimum, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 2 feet 6 inches deep. C. Tape Colors : Provide tape colors to utilities as follows : 1 . Red: Electric. 2 . Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials . 3 . Orange: Telephone and other communications . 4 . Blue: Water systems . 5. Green: Sewer systems. D. Filter Fabric: Filter fabric for use in retaining wall, footing, and slab drains shall be a non-rotting, acid and alkali resistant, non-woven polyester geotextile and have sufficient strength and permeability for the purpose intended, including handling and backfilling operations . The fiber network must be dimensionally stable and resistant to delamination. The fabric shall be free of any chemical treatment or coating that will reduce its permeability. Torn or punctured fabrics shall not be used. For each specified use, only commercially available fabric that is certified in writing by the manufacturer for the purpose intended shall be used. The Contractor shall submit a one square foot sample of each type of fabric to be used along with the manufacturers technical data sheet . Filter fabric shall meet the following criteria: Apparent opening size (US Standard Sieve ASTM D-4751) 70 Mullen Burst Strength (ASTM D-3786) 125 psi minimum Grab Strength (ASTM D-4632) 150 lb. minimum 2 .03 SETTLEMENT TARGETS A. Settlement targets shall consist of steel or brass pins set into the concrete at the time that wall footing and wall stems are formed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. EARTHWORK 02200-6 2980 E. Subbase and Base Material : Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D2940, with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Engineered Fill : Engineered fill to be obtained from on-site sources to the extent possible or off-site borrow sources for use as backfill under building areas and footings and other applications as specified or detailed, shall be hard, durable sand and gravel and shall be free from ice, snow, trash, debris, stumps, roots and organic materials and other deleterious materials and shall conform to the following gradation requirements : Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 2/3 of Lift Thickness 100 No. 10 30-95 No. 40 10-65 No. 200 0-15 G. Bedding Material : Subbase or base materials with 100 percent passing a 1 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. H. Drainage Fill : Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D448, coarse aggregate grading size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. I. Filtering Material : Evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and natural sand, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 50 sieve. J. Impervious Fill : Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2 .02 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for EARTHWORK 02200-5 2980 C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings . " 1 . Before commencing earthwork, meet with representatives of the governing authorities, Owner, Architect, consultants, Geotechnical Engineer, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities . Review earthwork procedures and responsibilities including testing and inspection procedures and requirements . Notify participants at least 3 working days prior to convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant . 1 . 07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities : Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 1 . Provide a minimum 48 hours ' notice to the Architect and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials : ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT. D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials. EARTHWORK 02200-4 2980 G. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without direction by the Architect . Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor' s expense. H. Structures : Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. I. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within building lines. 1 .05 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300 . B. Submit product data for the following: 1. Each type of plastic warning tape. 2 . Filter fabric. C. Submit samples of the following: 1 . 20 pound samples, sealed in air-tight containers, of each proposed fill and backfill soil material from on-site or borrow sources . 2 . 12 by 12 inch sample of filter fabric. D. Test Reports: In addition to test reports required under field quality control, submit the following: 1. Laboratory analysis of each soil material proposed for fill and backfill from on-site and borrow sources. 2 . One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each soil material. E. Photographs: Submit photographs of existing adjacent structures and site improvements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing. I I EARTHWORK 02200-3 2980 K. Section 03300 - Cast-In Place Concrete: Concrete encasings, cradles, and appurtenances for utility systems . L. Division 15 & 16 : Mechanical and Electrical Underground Utilities . 1 . 03 UNIT PRICES A. Rock Measurement : Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to exceed the following: 1 . 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings . 2 . 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings . 3 . 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. 4 . 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. 5. 6 inches beneath invert elevation of pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe diameter or 42 inches wide. B. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials . 1 . 04 DEFINITIONS A. Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse or disposal of materials removed. B. Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not available from excavations. D. Subbase Course: The layer placed between the subgrade and base course in a paving system or the layer placed between the subgrade and surface of a pavement or walk. E. Base Course: The layer placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a paving system. F. Drainage Fill : Course of washed granular material supporting slab-on-grade placed to cut off upward capillary flow of pore water. EARTHWORK 02200-2 2980 SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on- grade, walks, pavements, and landscaping. 2 . Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures . 3 . Drainage and moisture-control fill course for slabs-on-grade. 4 . Subbase course for walks and pavements . 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 6 . Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. 7 . Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and appurtenances. 8 . Drainage and dewatering required to perform all work in the dry. 9 . Sequencing of earthwork operations . 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02100 - Site Preparation: Site stripping, grubbing, topsoil removal, and tree protection. B. Section 02110 - Tree and Plant Protection. C. Section 02150 - Shoring And Bracing. D. Section 02510 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving and Curbs . E. Section 02512 - Concrete Paving and Curbs . F. Section 02525 - Granite Curbs . G. Section 02800 - Site Improvements. H. Section 02920 - Topsoil. I. Section 02935 - Seeded Lawns. J. Section 02950 - Topsoil Mixtures and Planting. '101 EARTHWORK 02200-1 2980 b. Moderate fills of 4" - 12" : Place layer of +* approved drainage fill material to 4" deep subgrade and cover with approved drainage fabric. Fill with topsoil placed in single layer and fine grade. Provide drainage system indicated on Drawings and as directed by Architect . c. Deep fills: Construct as indicated on Drawings . 3 . 04 MAINTENANCE A. Routinely inspect protective barriers, trees, shrubs and vegetated areas for damage and conditions which are causing damage and may cause damage. Repair, treat and take corrective action without delay. 1 . Inspect immediately after rains and during periods of runoff for ponding and silting caused by drainage from construction areas. Promptly drain and remove mud and silt back to natural grade. 2 . Inspect and remove boulders, rocks, soil, stumps, limbs, vegetative matter, debris, rubbish and waste that has been disposed of and accidentally accumulated, particularly in shrub masses and wooded areas. 3 . Water trees and plants to remain as required to maintain their health through construction period. 3 . 05 CLEANING A. Remove protection materials at end of construction period when directed by Architect and dispose of off site. END OF SECTION TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 02110-7 2980 2 . Tunnel under and around major roots by hand digging. Do not cut main lateral roots and tap -Oftk, roots . Cut only smaller roots which interfere with installation of new work with sharp pruning instruments. Do not break and chop roots . E. Cutting and Filling: 1 . Where grade cuts expose major roots and massive root systems promptly spread 6" protective covering of topsoil over the tops and ends of the exposed roots and water in. Protect roots from further hazards and construction operations . 2 . When existing grade at edge of canopy spread of trees and shrubs is higher than adjacent proposed subgrade, cut gently, sloping transition outward from edge and down to proposed subgrade . 3 . When existing grade at edge of canopy spread of trees and shrubs is lower than adjacent proposed subgrade, place fill to form gently sloping transition outward from edge of canopy spread and upward to proposed subgrade. F. Topsoiling: 1. When installing topsoil in stripped areas adjacent to canopy edges and vegetated areas to remain undisturbed, do not cover adjacent edges with soil unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, approved by Architect an except as follows : a. In order to eliminate sharp grade breaks in proposed finish grades up and down, feather depth of topsoil out over short distance into vegetated area and area beneath canopy blending surfaces together smoothly. TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 02110-6 2980 on center along perimeter of each area as shown on the Drawings . B. Individual Tree Protection: Install protective barrier fencing on existing grade as shown on the Drawings. 3 . 03 WORKING AROUND EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS TO REMAIN AND VEGETATED AREAS TO BE LEFT UNDISTURBED: A. General : 1 . When working within canopy spread of trees and in immediate vicinity of shrubs, use care not to damage roots and their soil environment . 2 . Relocated work to avoid damage if so directed by Architect . 3 . Perform working using manual methods unless Architect approves each specific piece of mechanical equipment being proposed for use. B. Grubbing: 1 . Strip grass and herbaceous plants by scalping top growth and thatch; then carefully till or scarify existing grade to depth of i" , raking away loosened root crowns and debris. 2 . Neatly cut out and remove root crowns of woody undergrowth with hand tools using care not to disturb intervening soil area. Promptly fill holes with topsoil. C. Stripping Topsoil: Remove only along approved, staked out corridors and edges in careful, neat manner so as to minimize damage to adjacent, undisturbed areas. D. Excavating and Trenching: 1. Limit excavating and trenching to only that required by Architect. �p TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 02110-5 2980 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS A. Fencing: Orange color, polypropylene, 4 ' high "Barricade Fencing" by Ben Meadows Co. , or equivalent, with 6' long wood or metal posts as approved by the Architect . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Prior to beginning work, examine trees and shrubs to remain and vegetated areas to be left undisturbed in review with Architect and Arborist . 1 . Arborist shall make recommendations for treatment of trees and shrubs to be pruned or tied back to clear way for work for approval by Architect . 2 . Architect will review type, locations and extent of protective barriers to be installed as indicated on Drawings. In order to minimize damage to trees, shrubs and undisturbed areas, to account for construction and field conditions and improve protection, Architect may direct that : a. Locations of layouts corridors, accessways, and work limits be adjusted. b. Locations of area protection fencing and individual tree protection be adjusted. 3 . Contractor shall determine what additional protective barriers he may need for adequate protection. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTIVE BARRIERS A. Vegetated Area Protection: Install protective barrier fencing attached to posts set no more than 6 ' TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 02110-4 2980 7 . Nailing, hanging, cutting or attaching. 8 . Unapproved pruning. 9 . Unapproved excavation within shrub masses and tree canopies. 10 . Unapproved cutting of major roots . 11 . Damage to root system by flooding, ponding, filling, mud or silt buildup. 12 . Damage by moving vehicles and equipment . 13 . Trampling, foot traffic, congregations and other intrusions by workmen. 14 . Other damaging occurrences. C. If trees and shrubs to remain are severely injured and killed by construction operations and inadequate care, Contractor shall : 1 . Replace trees and shrubs under 3" cal. with new plants of same size, quality, and species meeting same requirements and installed and maintained as new plants under Planting Section. 2 . Pay as fixed and agreed liquidated damages : a. $800 . 00 for each tree 3"-5" caliper. b. $1, 800 . 00 for each tree 6"-11" caliper. C. $5, 000 . 00 for each tree 12" caliper or more. D. Restore vegetated areas to be left undisturbed which are damaged with grasses and ground covers according to applicable provisions of Lawns and Planting Sections to satisfaction of Architect and replace and liquidate trees and shrubs within areas as required in subparagraph 1 . 04, C. 1 and 2 . above. 00"k �b3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 02110-3 2980 conditions which cause damage, preparing and submitting written report promptly for each inspection. 2 . Tying back branches and pruning of branches and roots for clearance and construction 3 . Treating, pruning and caring for trees and shrubs damaged by construction, maintaining their health throughout construction period. 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Arborist' s inspection reports listing tree and shrub conditions needing attention, corrective actions needed and treatments necessary. 1 . 05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Install protective barriers when site areas, utility corridors and construction accessways have been staked out and work limits established during clearing and grubbing prior to beginning topsoil stripping, earthwork and other construction. Maintain in repair throughout construction period. B. Throughout construction period protect existing trees and shrubs to remain and vegetated areas to be left undisturbed from damage by construction activity including: 1 . Root area compaction. 2 . Materials and equipment storage and stockpiles. 3 . Contaminated runoff from equipment cleaning and spillages of harmful substances. 4 . Disposal of boulders, rocks, soil, stumps, limbs, vegetative matter, debris, rubbish or waste. 5 . Avoidable cutting of roots. 6 . Breakage and barking. TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 02110-2 2980 SECTION 02110 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1 . Protection throughout construction period of existing trees and shrubs to remain, and vegetated areas to be left undisturbed. 2 . Working around existing trees and shrubs to remain, and vegetated areas to be left undisturbed. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Site Preparation: Section 02100 . B. Earthwork: Section 02210 . C. Site Drainage : Section 02720 . D. Topsoil : Section 02920 . E. Seeded Lawns : Section 02935 . F. Topsoil Mixtures and Planting: Section 02950 . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage licensed and approved Arborist with good reputation, successful record over past 5 years on similar projects and who is regularly engaged in and who maintains regular force of experienced workmen skilled in tree work to perform the following services : 1 . Conducting an initial inspection followed by inspections every 3 months through construction period of trees and shrubs for damage and TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 02110-1 2980 3 . 07 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Prior to removing existing trees and shrubs, Architect will review and tag these plants on site; otherwise they shall not be removed. B. Clear trees, shrubs, stumps, branches and debris from areas indicated and required to complete project work. Grub out and remove stumps, root crowns, 2" and larger roots and matted roots. C. Conduct clearing and grubbing work around existing trees and plants to remain as required in Section 02110, Tree and Plant Protection. D. Fill excavations made below sub-grade surface during removal of trees, shrubs, stumps, root crowns and roots with suitable material, compacted thoroughly in accordance with the provisions governing formation of fills in Section 02200, Site Earthwork. 3 . 08 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Do not burn on Owner' s property. B. Remove waste materials from Owner' s property and dispose off site in legal manner. 3 . 09 CLEANING A. Remove waste and debris as they accumulate to keep site clear. B. Secure waste and debris so as not to cause hazard and nuisance. C. Leave site clean and neat on completion of work. D. Remove temporary protection and erosion control materials and legally dispose of off site at such time they are no longer necessary for the purpose intended or are ordered removed by the Architect. END OF SECTION SITE PREPARATION 02100-12 2980 3 . 05 SALVAGE OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS A. Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged, and store where directed. B. Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements to be salvaged. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition to satisfaction of Architect . 3 . 06 REMOVAL OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS A. Demolish and remove from site above grade and below grade improvements and existing conditions required for completion of project work. B. Abandonment and removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is included under work of those sections. Removal of abandoned underground piping and conduits interfering with construction is included under this Section. C. Scarify and remove existing bituminous, concrete and other pavements and gravel bases to be removed, including any reinforcement . D. Where sections of existing bituminous pavement are removed, make clean, continuous vertical saw cut through pavement between material to be removed and material to remain. Protect vertical edges of material to remain from damage. E. Remove concrete sections to the first control joint or expansion joint beyond new work as otherwise indicated on Drawings. Saw cut clean continuous vertical edge at control joints. F. Remove curbing at existing joint. G. Unearth and completely remove underground structures, bases, foundations, footings. SITE PREPARATION 02100-11 2980 2 . Stake hay bales securely to hold them in place. NN* Erect silt fences burying bottom edges in accordance with the manufacturer' s recommended installation instructions. 3 . Provide sufficient number of hay bales and length of fence to accommodate runoff without causing flooding and to adequately store silt, sediment, and debris reaching it . 4 . Stockpiles and earth surfaces which will be exposed for extended periods and intervals during construction period may be ordered to be seeded with rye grass to obtain temporary cover. Sow seed at rate of approximately one pound, P.L.S. per 1, 000 s. f. Promptly mulch area after seeding. C. Maintenance and Cleaning 1 . If temporary erosion and sediment control measures are disturbed, repair immediately. 2 . If seed is washed out before germination and otherwise fails to germinate and establish, repair damage and reseed. 3 . Maintain temporary control measures until permanent control measures are established and until such time as such features are no longer needed. 4 . Clean out ditches, catch basins, drains, culverts and other drainage as required. 3 . 04 CONSTRUCTION FENCE: A. Install and maintain fences and gates rigid and plumb with fabric tight and in tension. Keep secure and neat. Repair damage to fence and gates. A SITE PREPARATION 02100-10 2980 3 . 03 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Install sedimentation ponds, haybales, silt fences, and antitracking stone pads where required, indicated, or ordered by the Architect . Sedimentation and Erosion Control installations shall be installed prior to any excavation or filling operations on site. The Architect has the authority to control, the surface area of earth materials exposed by construction operations and to direct the Contractor to immediately provide permanent or temporary pollution control measure3 to prevent contamination of adjacent streams, watercourses, lakes, ponds, or other areas of water impoundment . Every effort shall be made by the Contractor to immediately provide permanent or temporary pollution control measures to prevent contamination of adjacent streams, watercourses, lakes, ponds, or other areas of water impoundment . Every effort shall be made by the Contractor to prevent erosion on the site and abutting property. The Architect has the authority to direct the Contractor to divert surface water runoff away from exposed raw earth surface through the use of temporary berms, dikes, and diversion channels. Control measures as shown and detailed on the Drawings shall be subject to addition and/or modification as necessary or required to meet actual conditions or as ordered by a Local, State or Federal authority. B. Hay Bales and Silt Fences 1. Install hay bales and silt fences, as required, for temporary control of erosion and to prevent silt and sediment from reaching adjacent properties, entering catch basins, and damaging the work in progress. SITE PREPARATION 02100-9 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which site preparation will be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 . 02 STAKE-OUT A. The Survey Engineer shall provide and maintain staking throughout the construction period as required for accurate construction of each stage of the work and adequate for Architect ' s inspection as follows : 1 . Stake-out locations of boundaries and Limits of Work, proposed buildings, utility structures and changes of direction of utility lines, horizontal alignments, edges and curbs of paved areas, walkways and walls and other elements to be installed to dimensional requirements indicated on Drawings . 2 . Install grade stakes for finish grade and subgrade elevations for rough and finish grading and paved areas. In general, set stakes at intervals no more than 50 ' apart and at closer intervals at high and low points, along ridge lines, prominent grade breaks, saddles, toes and shoulders of slopes, and drainage lines . 3 . Install grade stakes for vertical alignments of roadways and walks including high and low points at 50 ' intervals or closer as required. 4 . Set inverts of underground utilities. 5. Set elevations for footings, foundations, utility structures, walls, curbs, fences, paving, pads, slabs, equipment, signs, lights and proposed other elements. SITE PREPARATION 02100-8 2980 are encountered during sitework operations, notify applicable utility company immediately to obtain procedure directions . Cooperate with utility company in maintaining active services in operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS A. Erosion Control : 1 . Hay Bales : Rectangular shaped bales of hay or straw weighing at least 40 pounds each without rot and mold and free from noxious weed seeds and woody material . Provide two 4 ' long, sound, hardwood stakes per bale. 2 . Silt Fence : "Geo-fab Silt Fence" by Merchatile Development, Inc. , "Mirafi 140 by Celanese Fibers Marketing Co. , or approved equivalent . 3 . Fiber Mat: "Curlex Blanket" by Amxco, "Ero-Mat" by Armco, or approved equivalent . 4 . Filter Fabric: "Terra Bond" by Warren' s, "Trevira Spunbond" by Hoechst, or approved equivalent. Product shall be of type specifically manufactured for the purpose intended. 5 . Seed for Temporary Erosion Control Cover: Annual rye grass seed. B. Construction Fence: 6 ' height, galvanized ASTM A392, A120 or A1123) , including fabric, posts and other framework, hardware and accessories for complete fence sections and locking swing gates. l SITE PREPARATION 02100-7 2980 I . Stake Out : 1 . If during stake out operations conflicts are found in proposed dimensional layout, spot grades and elevations indicated on Drawings notify Architect and obtain his direction for resolution. 2 . At completion of stake-out, the Architect reserves right to adjust location and elevations of layouts to minimize damage trees, shrub and improvements to remain, areas to be left undisturbed, and areas adjacent to site . J. Safety: 1 . Provide for worker safety. 2 . Provide barricades and other warning equipment set up to keep Owner and public safe. 3 . Minimize adverse noise impact to workers and surrounding Owner and public. 4 . Provide construction fences and gates enclosing perimeters of staging and work areas, located and arrange for security of site and safety of Owner and public. K. Utilities and Services : 1 . Locate and identify existing underground and overhead services and utilities within work areas. Provide adequate means of protection of utilities and services to remain. 2 . Arrange for disconnection, disconnect, seal and cap utilities and services to be removed before start of sitework operations. Perform work in accordance with the requirements of applicable utility company or agency. 3 . When uncharted and incorrectly charted underground piping, other utilities and services SITE PREPARATION 02100-6 2980 exposed by construction at any one time to a minimum. 3 . Install erosion control measures including water diversion structures and ditches, sedimentation basins or raps, berms, staked hay bales, and seeding, mulching, covering with netting, sodding, and seeding disturbed areas in compliance with U.S.D.A. "Guidelines for Soil and Water Conservation in Urbanized Areas of Massachusetts" . 4 . Prevent silting of water courses, streams, drainage, ditches, swales, wetlands, or watersheds, and water supplies, reservoirs, or impoundments . 5 . Prevent silting and clogging of existing storm drainage system. 6 . Should it become necessary to suspend construction for any length of time, provide and maintain temporary erosion and sediment control measures until permanent drainage facilities and erosion control features have been completed and are operational . 7. Provide temporary cover on stockpiled topsoil, spoils, excavated and backfill materials. 8 . Take special precautions to avoid interference and damage to temporary and permanent drainage facilities and erosion control measures when constructing temporary structures, placing construction material and moving vehicles. a. If interference is unavoidable, take measures to reroute drainage and control erosion effect . Repair damaged control facilities and measures. H. Make continued timely cleaning, maintenance, repair and replacement of temporary control and protective facilities and measures throughout construction period. P3 SITE PREPARATION 02100-5 2980 1 . Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner' s property. AWhA 2 . Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, acceptable to parties having jurisdiction. 3 . Locate, protect, and maintain bench marks, monuments, control points, and project engineering reference points. 4 . Protect adjoining pavements, curbs, and other structures to remain from damage . Do not allow these to be undermined by the removal of supporting bases, footings, and subgrade. 5 . Protect existing utility and service lines and structures to be re-engaged in new systems . E. Tree and Plant Protection: Protect exiting trees and plants as specified in Section 02110 . F. Dust Control : Take care to eliminate dust caused by construction operations before it leaves site. Dampen with water and take other measures as necessary. G. Erosion and Sediment Control Measures. Work shall conform with the "Order of Conditions" issued by the Northampton Conservation Commission. 1 . Take temporary and permanent erosion control measures before and during construction to avoid erosion of exposed, incomplete cut slopes, cleared or grubbed embankments, trenches, excavation, and site graded areas. Continue erosion control measures until permanent measures have been established and are capable of controlling erosion on their own. 2 . Schedule and conduct operations to minimize erosion of soils and to prevent silting and muddying of buildings, walks and lands adjacent to and affected by the work. Keep area of soil SITE PREPARATION 02100-4 2980 Architect for variations of conditions found at Site. 3 . Verification of Conditions : Consult Records and Drawings of adjacent work of existing services and utilities which may affect site work operations . Carefully examine the site and conditions affecting work of this Section. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of knowledge of conditions . B. Accommodating Owner: 1. Owner will occupy premises and adjacent facilities during entire period of construction. Perform sitework operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner' s use of premises and conduct of his normal operations. 2 . Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner and others without approval of Architect and then only after temporary utility services have been provided, if required by Architect . 3 . Carry out work in way that minimizes inconvenience to Owner. 4 . Install temporary accessways for Owner access to occupied premises of design and materials satisfactory to Owner in locations required and approved by Architect . Keep accessways safe and clear of construction materials and equipment . C. Traffic: Conduct site preparation operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used facilities . Do not close and obstruct streets, walks and other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. D. Protection of Existing Improvements : Provide protection measures and devices as necessary to prevent damage as follows: SITE PREPARATION 02100-3 2980 C. Engage licensed Survey Engineer acceptable to Architect to do layout and grade staking of work Avkk through construction period. D. Qualifications : One person, designated by Installer, shall be present during work operations who is thoroughly familiar with operations, types of materials being installed and proper methods for their installation and shall supervise work performed under this Section. 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit schedule indicating proposed work methods, operations and sequence. Include termination and continuation of utility services required by project conditions . Obtain Architect ' s approval before starting work. B. Submit for approval plans indicating staging areas, trailer and stockpile locations, construction traffic and parking plans, temporary signage, off-site staging, storage areas, setup areas and construction phasing. Coordinate plans with erosion and sediment control measures, as required. 1 . 05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General : 1 . Work to be done is generally included within the Work Limit Lines, but work as indicated and required shall be performed beyond Lines. If Contractor uses portions of property beyond Limit Lines to accomplish work, restore these portions at completion of work to satisfaction of Architect . 2 . Data shown on Site Plans has been taken from Topographic Survey of Site made by others and is not guaranteed by Architect and Owner. The Contractor shall satisfy himself by field examination as to accuracy of information shown. No responsibility is assumed by Owner and SITE PREPARATION 02100-2 2980 SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Verification of existing conditions . 2 . Layout and grade staking. 3 . Erosion and sediment control . 4 . Removal and salvage of existing improvements . S . Removal and disposal of existing improvements. 6 . Clearing and grubbing. 7 . Protection of utilities . 8 . Traffic control . 9 . Owner accommodations. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Tree and Plant Protection: Section 02110 . B. Earthwork: Section 02210 . C. Site Drainage : Section 02720 D. Topsoil : Section 02920 . E. Seeded Lawns : Section 02935 . 1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform work to applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations having jurisdiction. B. Conform erosion and sediment control materials and methods to standards set in U.S.D.A. Soil Conservation Service, "Guidelines for Soil and Water Conservation in Urbanized Areas of Massachusetts" . SITE PREPARATION 02100-1 2980 3 . 06 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations . B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching. " 3 .07 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Promptly dispose of demolished materials . Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials . C. Disposal : Transport demolished materials off Owner' s property and legally dispose of them. 3 . 08 CLEANING A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation. B. Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations . 3 .09 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Remove and salvage the following, including but not limited to: 1 . Doors and hardware. 2 . Millwork/casework. 3 . Hollow metal work. 4. Curtain track. END OF SECTION o SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-9 2980 least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3 . Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces . 4 . Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials . At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations . Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame- cutting operations . 5 . Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches . 6 . Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7 . Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8 . Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9 . Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 10 . Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition operations. B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections . Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact tools . C. Break up and remove concrete slabs on grade, unless otherwise shown to remain. D. Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the Resilient Floor Covering Institute's (RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings" and Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. E. Remove air-conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants . SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-8 2980 1 . Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4 inch (1-0("i ran; studs, 5/8 inch i 16 r) gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2 inch 13 iimi fire-retardant plywood on the demolition side. 2 . Insulate partition to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 3 . Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks . 4 . Protect air-handling equipment . 5 . Weatherstrip openings. E. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished. 1 . Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3 . 04 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt . Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 1 . Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas . 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level. C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition. 3 .05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows : 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level . Complete selective demolition work above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on lower levels . 2 . Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-7 2980 connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition. "'k 3 . Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3 . 03 PREPARATION A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations . B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities . 1 . Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1 . Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2 . Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3 . Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. 4. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas . S. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed during selective demolition operations. 6 . Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. D. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. A SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-6 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict . Promptly submit a written report to the Architect . E. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition. F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities . 3 .02 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities . a. Provide not less than 72 hours ' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving building to be selectively demolished. 1 . Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2 . Where utility services are required to be removed, OW relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass 1'�b3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-5 2980 notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner' s operations . B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively demolished. 1 . Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical . C. Asbestos : Asbestos is present in the building to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of asbestos is on file for review and use. Examine the report to become aware of locations where asbestos is present . 1 . Asbestos abatement is being performed under another contract . 2 . Do not disturb asbestos or any material suspected of containing asbestos . D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. 1 . 08 SCHEDULING A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations . 1. 09 WARRANTY A. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials . 1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2 . Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. A SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-4 2980 5 . Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner' s on-site operations . 6 . Coordination of Owner' s continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner' s partial occupancy of completed Work. 7 . Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress . E. Submit inventory of items to be removed and salvaged. F. Submit inventory of items to be removed by Owner. G. Submit photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. H. Submit record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout . " 1 . Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions . I. Submit landfill records indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes . 1 .06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications : Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project . B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with preinstallation conference requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings . " 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours ' SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-3 2980 1 . 03 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except ' those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner' s property. B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner' s property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate items to protectZ against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to Owner' s designated storage area. C. Remove and Reinstall : Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them fDr reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations . 1. 04 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be mused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner' s property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor' s property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor' s option. 1 .05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Section 01300, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. B. Submit proposed dust-control measures. C. Submit proposed noise-control measures . D. Submit schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2 . Interruption of utility services. 3 . Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-2 2980 SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes the following: 1 . Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building. 2 . Patching and repairs. 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: 1 . Use of the building and phasing requirements . B. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching: 1 . Cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations . C. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls: 1 . Temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures for selective demolition operations . D. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents: 1 . Record document requirements. E. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: 1 . Material and construction requirements for temporary enclosures . F. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: 1 . Material and construction requirements for temporary enclosures . G. Division 15 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. H. Division 16 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070-1 2980 1 . Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties . C. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile 2 copies of each required warranty properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual . D. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial- quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2 by 11 inch (115 by 280 mm) paper. 1 . Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer. 2 . Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES, " Project title or name, and name of the Contractor. 3 . When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 LIST OF WARRANTIES A. Schedule: Provide warranties on products and installations as specified in the respective sections of specifications . END OF SECTION ) 7 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740-3 2980 C. Replacement Cost : Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents . The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner' s Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies . 1 . Rejection of Warranties : The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents . E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect 's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect . 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. Amok WAR.RANPIES AND BONDS 01740-2 2980 SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SUMMARY A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties . 1 . Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor' s period for correction of the Work. B. Related Sections : The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1 . Section 01300 - Submittals : Specifies procedures for submitting warranties . 2 . Section 01700 - Contract Closeout : Specifies contract closeout procedures . 3 . Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 4 . Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents . C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer' s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. 1 .02 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740-1 2980 1 . 07 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection, instruct the Owner' s personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems . Provide instruction at mutually agreed upon times . 1. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction during other seasons . 2 . Use operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment or system as the basis of instruction. Review contents in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-8 2980 f. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 2 . Manufacturer' s Information: For each manufacturer of a component part or piece of equipment, provide the following: a. Printed operation and maintenance instructions . b. Assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. c. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts . 3 . Maintenance Procedures : Provide information detailing essential maintenance procedures, including the following: a. Routine operations . b. Troubleshooting guide. c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking. 4. Operating Procedures : Provide information on equipment and system operating procedures, including the following: a. Startup procedures . b. Equipment or system break-in. c. Routine and normal operating instructions . d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Instructions on stopping. f. Shutdown and emergency instructions. g. Summer and winter operating instructions . h. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems . i. Special operating instructions. 5. Servicing Schedule: Provide a schedule of routine servicing and lubrication requirements, including a list of required lubricants for equipment with moving parts . 6. Controls: Provide a description of the sequence of operation and as-installed control diagrams by the control manufacturer for systems requiring controls . 7. Coordination Drawings : Provide each Contractor' s Coordination Drawings. a. Provide as-installed, color-coded, piping diagrams, where required for identification. 8. Valve Tags: Provide charts of valve-tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 9. Circuit Directories : For electric and electronic systems, provide complete circuit directories of panelboards, including the following: a. Electric service. b. Controls . c. Communication. C. Schedule: Provide complete information on the equipment and systems manual on products specified in and required by Divisions 15 and 16. / 3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-7 2980 c. Material composition. d. Color. e. Texture. f. Reordering information for specially manufactured products . 2 . Care and Maintenance Instructions : Provide information on care and maintenance, including manufacturer' s recommendations for types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. Provide information on cleaning agents and methods that could prove detrimental to the product . Include manufacturer' s recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture Protection and Products Exposed to the Weather: Provide complete manufacturer' s data with instructions on inspection, maintenance, and repair of products exposed to the weather or designed for moisture-protection purposes . 1. Manufacturer' s Data: Provide manufacturer' s data giving detailed information, including the following, as applicable: a. Applicable standards . b. Chemical composition. c. -Installation details . d. Inspection procedures . e. Maintenance information. f . Repair procedures. 1 . 06 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Submit 6 copies of each manual, in final form, on equipment and systems to the Architect for distribution. Provide separate manuals for each unit of equipment, each operating system, and each electric and electronic system. 1. Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements on operation and maintenance of the various pieces of equipment and operating systems . B. Equipment and Systems: Provide the following information for each piece of equipment, each building operating system, and each electric or electronic system. 1. Description: Provide a complete description of each unit and related component parts, including the following: a. Equipment or system function. b. Operating characteristics . c. Limiting conditions. d. Performance curves. e. Engineering data and tests. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-6 2980 5. Written Text : Prepare written text to provide necessary information where manufacturer' s standard printed data is not available, and the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems . Prepare written text where it is necessary to provide additional information or to supplement data included in the manual. Organize text in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures . Where necessary, provide a logical sequence of instruction for each operation or maintenance procedure. 6. Drawings: Provide specially prepared drawings where necessary to supplement manufacturer's printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment or systems or to provide control or flow diagrams . Coordinate these drawings with information contained in project record drawings to assure correct illustration of the completed installation. a. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals . 7. Warranties, Bonds, and Service Contracts : Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, or. service contract in the appropriate manual for the information of the Owner' s operating personnel. Provide written data outlining procedures to follow in the event of product failure. List circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranty or bond. 1 .05 MATERIAL AND FINISHES MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Submit 3 copies of each manual, in final form, on material and finishes to the Architect for distribution. Provide one section for architectural products, including applied materials and finishes . Provide a second section for products designed for moisture protection and products exposed to the weather. 1. Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements on care and maintenance of materials and finishes . B. Architectural Products: Provide manufacturer's data and instructions on care and maintenance of architectural products, including applied materials and finishes. 1. Manufacturer' s Data: Provide complete information on architectural products, including the following, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog number. b. Size. �►�/ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-5 2980 13 . Sources of required maintenance materials and related services . 14 . Manual index. B. Organize each manual into separate Sections for each piece of related equipment . As a minimum, each manual shall contain a title page; a table of contents; copies of Product Data, supplemented by Drawings and written text; and copies of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued. 1. Title Page: Provide a title page in a transparent, plastic envelope as the first sheet of each manual . Provide the following information: a. Subject matter covered by the manual . b. Name and address of the Project . C. Date of submittal. d. Name, address, and telephone number of the Contractor. e. Name and address of the Architect . f . Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals . 2 . Table of Contents : After title page, include a typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged systematically according to the Project Manual format . Include a list of each product included, identified by product name or other appropriate identifying symbol and indexed to the content of the volume. a. Where a system requires more than one volume to accommodate data, provide a comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set . 3 . General Information: Provide a general information Section immediately following table of contents, listing each product included in the manual, identified by product name. Under each product, list the name, address, and telephone number of the subcontractor or Installer and the maintenance contractor. Clearly delineate the extent of responsibility of each of these . entities . Include a local source for replacement parts and equipment. 4. Product Data: Where the manuals include manufacturer' s standard printed data, include only sheets that are pertinent to the part or product installed. Mark each sheet to identify each part or product included in the installation. Where the Project includes more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item, using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data that is applicable to the installation, and delete references to information that is not applicable. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-4 2980 2 . Dividers : Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid-covered tabs for each separate Section. Mark each tab to indicate contents . Provide a typed description of the product and major parts of equipment included in the Section on each divider. 3 . Protective Plastic Jackets : Provide protective, transparent, plastic jackets designed to enclose diagnostic software for computerized electronic equipment . 4. Text Material : Where maintenance manuals require written material, use the manufacturer 's standard printed material . If manufacturer' s standard printed material is not available, provide specially prepared data, neatly typewritten, on 8-1/2 by 11 inch ( 115 hi- 280 nm': , 20-lb/sq. ft . g/wq. in) white bond paper. 5. Drawings : Where maintenance manuals require drawings or diagrams, provide reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind in with text . a. Where oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to the same size as text pages and use as a foldout. b. If drawings are too large� to be used practically as a foldout, place the drawing, neatly folded, in a labeled envelope in front or rear pocket of binder. Insert a typewritten page indicating drawing title, description of contents, and drawing location at the appropriate location in the manual. 1 .04 MANUAL CONTENT A. In each manual include information specified in the individual Specification Section and the following information for each major component of building equipment and its controls: 1. General system or equipment description. 2 . Design factors and assumptions . 3 . Copies of applicable Shop Drawings and Product Data. 4. System or equipment identification, including: a. Name of manufacturer. b. Model number. c. Serial number of each component . 5. Operating instructions . 6. Emergency instructions. 7. Wiring diagrams. 8. Inspection and test procedures. 9. Maintenance procedures and schedules. 10. Precautions against improper use and maintenance. 11. Copies of warranties. 12 . Repair instructions including spare parts listing. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-3 2980 or system involved to instruct the Owner' s operation and maintenance personnel . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Comply with the following schedule for submitting operation and maintenance manuals : 1. Before Substantial Completion, when each installation that requires operation and maintenance manuals is nominally complete, submit 2 draft copies of each manual to the Architect for review. Include a complete index or table of contents of each manual. a. The Architect will return 1 copy of the draft with comments within 15 days of receipt . 2 . Submit 1 copy of data in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. The Architect will return this copy within 15 days after final inspection, with comments . 3 . After final inspection, make corrections or modifications to comply with the Architect ' s comments . Submit the specified number of copies of each approved manual to the Architect within 15 days of receipt of the Architect ' s comments . B. Form of Submittal: Prepare operation and maintenance manuals in the form of an instructional manual for use by the Owner's operating personnel . Organize into suitable sets of manageable size. Where possible, assemble instructions for similar equipment into a single binder. 1. Binders : For each manual, provide heavy-duty, commercial-quality, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose- leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to receive 8-1/2 by 11 inch ;115 by 80 =,. 0 paper. Provide a clear plastic sleeve on the spine to hold labels describing contents. Provide pockets in the covers to receive folded sheets . a. Where 2 or more binders are necessary to accommodate data, correlate data in each binder into related groupings according to the Project Manual table of contents. Cross-reference other binders where necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of the piece of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, " Project title or name, and subject matter covered. Indicate volume number for multiple volume sets of manuals . , OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-2 2980 SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Preparing and submitting operation and maintenance manuals for building operating systems and equipment . 2. Preparing and submitting, instruction manuals covering the care, preservation, and maintenance of architectural products and finishes . 3 . Instruction of the Owner' s operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of building systems and equipment. B. Related Sections : The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 01300 - Submittals : Specifies preparation of Shop Drawings and Product Data. 2 . Section 01700 - Contract Closeout : Specifies general closeout requirements . 3 . Section 01720 - Project Record Documents : Specifies general requirements for submitting project record documents. 4. Appropriate Sections of Divisions 2 through 16 specify special operation and maintenance data requirements for specific pieces of equipment or building operating systems. 1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintenance Manual Preparation: In preparation of maintenance manuals, use personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment or system involved. 1. Where maintenance manuals require written instructions, use personnel skilled in technical writing where necessary for communication of essential data. 2 . Where maintenance manuals require drawings or diagrams, use draftsmen capable of preparing drawings clearly in an understandable format. B. Instructions for the Owner's Personnel: Use experienced instructors thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-1 2980 h. Ambient and substrate condition tests . i. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products . j . Batch mixing and bulk delivery records . k. Testing and qualification of tradesmen. 1 . Documented qualification of installation firms . m. Load and performance testing. n. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities . o. Leakage and water-penetration tests . p. Fire resistance and flame spread test results . q. Final inspection and correction procedures . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 RECORDING A. Post changes and modifications to the Documents as they occur. Do not wait until the end of Project . Architect will periodically review record documents to assure compliance with this requirement . END OF SECTION AWk PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-5 2980 submitted. Include significant changes in the product delivered to the site, and changes in manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations Ad** for installation. 2 . Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 3 . Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record Drawings, where applicable. 4 . Upon completion of mark-up, submit a complete set of record Product Data to Architect for Owner' s records . 5. Where record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual, instead of submittal as record Product Data. 1 . 05 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL A. Immediately prior to date of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall meet Architect and, if desired, the Owner' s personnel at the site to determine which of the Samples maintained during the construction period shall be transmitted to Owner for record purposes . Comply with Architect ' s instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to Owner' s Sample storage space. Dispose of other Samples in manner specified for disposal of surplus and waste materials . 1 . 06 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities . Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records . 1. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to the following: a. Field records on excavations and foundations . b. Field records on underground construction and similar Work. c. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines. d. Invert elevations of drainage piping. e. Surveys establishing building lines and levels. f. Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or allowances. g. Records of plant treatment. - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-4 2980 the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are � .. suitable to show actual installation. 1 . Consult with Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. When completed and accepted, integrate newly prepared Drawings with procedures specified for organizing, copying, binding and submittal of Record Drawings . 1 . 03 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. During construction period, maintain one copy of the Project Specifications, including addenda and modifications issued, for Project Record Document purposes . 1 . Mark Specifications to indicate actual installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Specifications and modifications issued. Note related Project Record Drawing information, where applicable. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of product options, and information on concealed installations that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. a. In each Specification Section where products, materials or units of equipment are specified or scheduled, mark the copy with the proprietary name and model number of the product furnished. b. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier and installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made and to document coordination with record Product Data submittals and maintenance manuals . c. Note related record Product Data, where applicable. For each principal product specified, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in maintenance manual instead of submitted as record Product Data. 2 . Upon completion of mark-up, submit record Specifications to Architect for Owner's records. 1.04 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. During construction period, maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal for Project Record Document purposes. 1. Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where the installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-3 2980 originally. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements which would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. A Items required to be marked include but are not limited to: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings . b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings . c. Depths of foundations below the first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities . e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits . f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations . h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities . j . Changes made by Change Order. k. Details not on original Contract Drawings . 2 . Mark completely and accurately record prints of Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions . Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings location. 3 . Mark record sets with red erasable colored pencil; use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 4 . Mark important additional information which was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings . 5. Note construction change directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers and similar identification. 6 . Responsibility for Mark-up: Where feasible, the individual or entity who obtained record data, . whether the individual or entity is the installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, is required to prepare the mark-up on record Drawings. a. Accurately record information in an understandable Drawing technique. b. Record data as soon as possible after it has been obtained. In the case of concealed installations, record and check the mark-up prior to concealment. 7 . At time of Substantial Completion, submit record Drawings to Architect for Owner's records. Organize into sets, bind and label sets for Owner' s continued use. B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of following procedures specified for preparation of Record Drawings where new Drawings are required by a Change Order issued as a result of acceptance of an alternate, substitution, or other modification, and Architect determines that neither PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-2 2980 SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents . B. Project Record Documents required include: 1 . Marked-up copies of Contract Drawings . 2 . Marked-up copies of Shop Drawings . 3 . Newly prepared Drawings . 4 . Marked-up copies of Specifications, addenda and Change Orders. 5 . Marked-up Product Data submittals . 6 . Record Samples . 7 . Field records for variable and concealed conditions . 8 . Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically. C. Specific record copy requirements that expand requirements of this Section are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 16. D. General project closeout requirements are included in Section 01700 . E. General requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents are included in Section 01300. F. Maintenance of Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from Contract Documents used for construction. Do not permit Project Record Documents to be used for construction purposes . Maintain record documents in good order, and in a clean, dry, legible condition. Make documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by Architect . 1.02 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Mark-up Procedure: During the construction period, maintain a set of blue or black-line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for Project Record Document purposes. 1. Mark these Drawings to indicate the actual installation where the installation varies appreciably from the installation shown PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-1 2980 14 . Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. 15. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters . Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills . 16. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. 17. Clean food-service equipment to a sanitary condition, ready and acceptable for its intended use. 18 . Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures. 19 . Leave the Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed during construction to protect previously completed installations during the remainder of the construction period. D. Compliances: Comply with governing regulations and safety standards for cleaning operations . Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully. 1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner. END OF SECTION S 9 FINAL CLEANING 01710-3 2980 building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer ' s instructions . B. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for the entire Project or a portion of the Project . 1. Clean the Project Site, yard and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and foreign substances . 2 . Sweep paved areas broom clean. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even- textured surface. 3 . Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits . 4. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from the site. 5. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to the building. 6. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances . Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces . Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. 7. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces . 8. Broom clean concrete floors in unoccupied spaces . 9. Vacuum clean carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap. Shampoo, if required. 10 . Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows . Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials . Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 11. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 12 . Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates . 13 . Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances . FINAL CLEANING 01710-2 2980 SECTION 01710 FINAL CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SUMMARY A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at Substantial Completion. B. Related Sections : The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Specifies general cleanup and waste-removal requirements . 2 . Section 01700 - Contract Closeout : Specifies general contract closeout requirements . 3 . Special cleaning requirements for specific construction elements are included in appropriate Sections of Divisions 2 through 16. C. Environmental Requirements : Conduct cleaning and waste-disposal operations in compliance with local laws and ordinances. Comply fully with federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations . 1. Do not dispose of volatile wastes, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, in storm or sanitary drains . 2 . Burning or burying of debris, rubbish, or other waste material on the premises is not permitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 FINAL CLEANING A. Provide final-cleaning operations when indicated. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit of Work to the condition expected from a commercial I5� FINAL CLEANING 01710-1 2980 B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Architect . 1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2 . If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-3 2980 7 . Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner' s personnel of changeover in security provisions . "'*6 8 . Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner' s operation and maintenance personnel . Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements . B. Inspection Procedures : On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements . The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1 . The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially complete. 2 . Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1 . 03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request . 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. 2 . Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3 . Submit a certified copy of the Architect 's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect . The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements . CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-2 2980 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SUMMARY A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures . B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. 1 .02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures : Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request . 1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. a. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2 . Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3 . Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-1 2980 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION Contractor: Architect: Address: Address: Phone: Phone: Project Name: Project Location: RFI Number: Date of Request: Date Response Required (5 business days minimum: Description of RFI: As-built Sketches Enclosed: Specification Paragraph Drawing Reference: Reference: Contractor's Recommendation: Cost Impact: Schedule Impact: Subcontractors Affected: Subcontractors Coordinated With: Submitted By: Architect's Response: By: Date of Response: REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) 01635-3 2980 a. Identify Work affected by RFI by listing pertinent Drawing Numbers (and details) and Specification paragraph numbers . b. Identify pertinent field conditions and A as-built conditions on sketches and attach them to RFI Form. c. If RFI addresses a conflict in Contract Documents, describe dimensions, materials and other data necessary to enable Architect to formulate a response. d. Include a suggested solution and state if the suggested solution will affect Construction Time or Construction Cost . B. Architect ' s Action: 1 . Architect may request additional information or documentation as necessary for evaluation of RFI . 2 . As required, Architect will respond with reasonable promptness in writing and will issue a "Bulletin" as a clarification .to the Contract Documents, (in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract, Paragraph 4.2 .12 and Supplementary Conditions, paragraph 7 .1 .2 .1 . ) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 ATTACHMENTS A. Copy and use the following Request For Information (RFI) Form (1 page) REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) 01635-2 2980 SECTION 01635 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for information (RFIs) made after award of Contract . 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals : Contractor ' s Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals. B. Section 01600 - Materials And Equipment : Administrative and procedural requirements for requests for substitutions . 1 .03 DEFINITIONS A. Request For Information (RFI) : Requests for additional information by Contractor on products, materials, equipment, construction details and other requirements of Contract Documents after award of Contract are considered "requests for information (RFI) . " B. Bulletins: Refer to Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions, subparagraph 7 .1.2 .1 for the definition of Bulletins . 1. 04 SUBMITTALS A. Request For Information (RFI) Submittal : Requests for information will be considered if submitted on a copy of RFI form attached at end of this section. Incomplete RFIs and RFIs not complying with requirements of this section will not be considered, and will be returned to Contractor with "no action taken" by Architect. 1. Submit properly completed RFI forms to Architect with copies to Owner and appropriate Consulting Engineers. 2 . Before submitting RFI to Architect, have every supplier and subcontractor involved or affected by the RFI, review it for comment. 3 . Include the following minimum information: I�9 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) 01635-1 2980 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST [FILL IN PROJECT NAME] SBRA Project No. The undersigned, as Contractor for the Project, requests that: as manufactured by be accepted for use in the Project in lieu of the "named" product or products specified in Paragraph of Section Reason for request: Attached data includes product description,specifications, drawings,photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs,unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design,including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades,the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The undersigned further staes that the function,appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. All changes to Contract Sum related to use of proposed substitution are included in price listed below. Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to acceptance of substitution which may subsequently become apparent. If proposed substitution is accepted,Contract Sum will be: INCREASED BY: $ DECREASED BY: $ Signature: Date: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: SUBSTITUTIONS 01631-5 2980 where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 10 . The specified product or method of construction "ft" cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty. B. The Contractor' s submittal and the Architect ' s acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they, constitute approval . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 02 ATTACHMENTS A. The following is the format for the Substitution Request Form to be used (1 page. ) SUBSTITUTIONS 01631-4 2980 is later. Acceptance will be in the form of a #^ change order. a. Use the product specified if the Architect cannot make a decision on the use of a proposed substitute within the time allocated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conditions : The Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect . If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements . 1 . Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2 . Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents . 3 . The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted. 4 . The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 5 . The request is directly related to an "or-equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents . 6. The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must assume. The Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner, and similar considerations . 7 . The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 9 . The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and SUBSTITUTIONS 01631-3 2980 received more than 60 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect . Afth 1 . Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests as per the attached "Substitution Request Form" at the end of this section 2 . Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request . Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers . 3 . Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. b. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect . c. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures . d. Samples, where applicable or requested. e. A statement indicating the substitution' s effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. The Contractor' s certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements in the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated. h. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. 4. Architect 's Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever SUBSTITUTIONS 01631-2 2980 SECTION 01631 SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SUMMARY A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract . B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Section 01300 - Submittals: Specifies requirements for submitting the Contractor' s Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule. 2 . Section 01600 - Material and Equipment : Specifies requirements governing the Contractor' s selection of products and product options . 1 . 02 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B. Substitutions : Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be requests for substitutions . The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions: 1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions. 2 . Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3 . Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents . 4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 1 .03 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests SUBSTITUTIONS 01631-1 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS Alopk A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other work. 1 . Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom for damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-6 2980 product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements . 4 . Performance Specification Requirements : Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. a. Manufacturer' s recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the manufacturer' s certification of performance. 5 . Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations : Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified. 6 . Visual Matching: Where specifications require matching an established sample, the Architect ' s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category. 7 . Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase " . . .as selected from manufacturer' s standard colors, patterns, textures. . . " or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected. 8. Allowances : Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for processing such selections. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-5 2980 5 . Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity Aak or counting of units . 6 . Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. 7 . Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer ' s instructions . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation. 1 . Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. 2 . Standard Products : Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects . B. Product Selection Procedures : Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1 . Proprietary Specification Requirements : Where Specifications name only a single product or manufacturer, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. 2 . Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements : Where Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers, provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied by the tern "or equal" or "or approved equal, " comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 3 . Descriptive Specification Requirements : Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-4 2980 B. Compatibility of Options : When the Contractor is * given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options . C. Nameplates : Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer' s or producer' s nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels : Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous . 2 . Equipment Nameplates : Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment . Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces . The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings . 1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer' s recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft . 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2 . Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses. 3 . Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer' s original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing. 4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 139 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-3 2980 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Product List : Prepare a list showing products specified in a tabular form acceptable to the Architect . Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer' s name and proprietary product names for each item listed. 1 . Coordinate the product list schedule with the Contractor' s Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals . 2 . Form: Prepare the product listing schedule with information on each item tabulated under the following column headings : a. Related Specification Section number. b. Generic name used in Contract Documents C. Proprietary name, model number and similar designations . d. Manufacturer's name and address . e. Supplier' s name and address . f. Installer' s name and address . g. Projected delivery date, or time span of delivery period. 3 . Initial Submittals : Within 30 days after date of commencement of the work, submit 3 copies of an initial product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements . a. At the Contractor' s option, the initial submission may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in the Contract period. 4 . Completed Schedule: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the work, submit 3 copies of the completed product list schedule. Provide a written explanation for omissions of data, and for known variations from Contract requirements. 5 . Architect 's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to the Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the completed product list schedule. No response within this time period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products, but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents . The Architect 's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action. 1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-2 2980 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor' s selection of products for use in the Project . B. Related Sections : The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1 . Section 01300 - Submittals : Requirements for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule. 2 . Section 01631 - Substitutions: Specifies administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract . 1 . 02 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties, " "systems, " "structure, " "finishes, " "accessories, " and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material, " "equipment, " "system, " and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 2 . "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the work. 3 . "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1 2980 1 . Solvent based materials shall not be submitted or substituted for water based products specified. B. Ensure that quantities of hazardous materials used are minimized and that toxic substances are properly stored at the job site to prevent evaporation into the building environment . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 CONTAINMENT BARRIERS A. Erect suitable containment barriers to prevent the migration of dust, fumes, mist and vapor from work areas into occupied areas of the building. Refer to Section 01500 for construction of temporary enclosures . 1 . Provide dry wall construction for containment barriers . Seal perimeters of drywall containment barriers . Seal all penetrations through containment barriers . 2 . Provide 1-3/4 inch thick hollow core doors in containment barriers for access to work areas . Provide gasketed door frames and insure doors close tightly and securely. B. Cover and tape or seal HVAC inlets in work areas with 6 mil polyethylene to prevent contaminants from entering or migrating into building systems. C. Maintain containment barriers during construction period of the Project. Inspect containment barriers daily. Repair damage and holes in containment barriers immediately. 3 .02 EXHAUST VENTILATION A. Provide local exhaust ventilation to collect air contaminants at the source of generation inside the contained area and direct them into a suitable air cleaning device or outside of the building. System outlet ducting shall be directed away from the building HVAC system inlets (mechanical or natural) and other migration pathways into the building. Capture velocities shall be sufficient (as specified in ACGIH Industrial Ventilation Manual) to maintain the levels of air contaminants in the work areas to less than one-half the Permissible Exposure Limit as defined in 29 CFR 1910.1000 and the Threshold Limit Value. Provide the CIH with industrial hygiene air quality information to verify this requirement . I INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE AND INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01565-3 2980 b. 29 CFR 1910 . 95 Occupational Noise Exposure. C. 29 CFR 1910 .146 Permit Required Confined Spaces . d. 29 CFR 1910 .1000 Air Contaminants . e. 29 CFR 1910 .1200 Hazard Communication. 3 . AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS a. Threshold Limit Values (TLV) for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents . b. Industrial Ventilation Manual of Recommended Practice. 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300, except submittals shall be to the CIH for review and approval . Send copies of submittals to Architect for information only. B. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) : Prior to construction, submit MSDS's for products proposed to be used on the Project . 1 . Contractor shall maintain on the job site, a file with copies of MSDS 's for all materials used on the Project . Contractor shall update the MSDS file weekly. C. Containment Barriers : Submit shop drawings depicting the construction and location of barriers erected to prevent the entry of dust, fumes, mists or vapors or excessive noise levels into normally occupied building spaces adjacent to or affected by demolition and construction activities . D. Exhaust Fans: Submit shop drawings and product data showing locations, capacities and specifications of exhaust fans used to minimize airborne contamination generated by demolition and construction activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Ensure that materials used for the project are the least toxic available which will accomplish the intended performance for each application. The CIH will review submittals for compliance with the requirements of this section. The CIH will make recommendations regarding submittals and requests for substitutions. Recommendations of the CIH will be reviewed by the Architect for conformance with the design intent. INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE AND INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01565-2 2980 SECTION 01565 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE AND INDOOR AIR QUALITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Ensure that the indoor air quality in the building is not adversely impacted by construction activities so as to cause unhealthy or uncomfortable conditions for building occupants and construction workers . Do not expose building occupants or construction workers to air contaminants or dust in excess of one-half of those specified in 29 CFR 1910 .1000 and the Threshold Limit Values . B. Owner, at their discretion, will employ and pay for a separate Certified Industrial Hygienist to perform indoor air quality inspections and investigations . C. Terminology: 1 . Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) : An individual who by virtue of experience and education is qualified to conduct indoor air quality inspections and investigations. For purposes of this specification, the CIH is designated the "competent person" (as defined in 29 CFR 1910 .146) for all indoor air quality project activities. CIH will make recommendations to Owner to direct Contractor to make engineering control changes to mitigate unacceptable air quality. CIH will make recommendations regarding work practices, conduct indoor air quality testing, and review the toxicological properties of construction materials . CIH will advise the Owner regarding the necessity of Stop Work Orders due to failure of Contractor to maintain minimum air quality standards. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The references listed below form a part of this specification when referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by reference number only. 1. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC. a. ASHRAE Standard 62-1989 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. 2 . OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS a. 29 CFR 1926.59 Hazard Communication. i 33 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE AND INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01565-1 2980 might impair growth of plant materials or lawns . Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority. 3 . At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period including, but not limited to, the following: a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings . b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions . c. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-16 2980 , �. H. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result . Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. 3 .18 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities . Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements . 1 . Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2 . Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines . Protect from damage during excavation operations . C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of project identification signs . 2 . Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-15 2980 C. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete installation of the permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities . D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights : Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades . Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against . Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. E. Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates . Locate where indicated, or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates . 1. Provide open-mesh, chainlink fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel and earth. F. Covered Walkway: Erect a structurally adequate, protective covered walkway for passage of persons along the adjacent public street. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions . Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. Provide wood plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. Extend the back wall beyond the structure to complete the enclosure fence. Paint and maintain in a manner acceptable to the Owner and the Architect. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. 1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-14 2980 3 .15 RODENT AND PEST CONTROL A. Rodent and Pest Control : Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests . Employ this service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials . 3 .16 STAIRS A. Stairs : Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with a protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at the time of acceptance. 3 .17 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or longer, as requested by the Architect . B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses . Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations . " 1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2 . Store combustible materials in containers in fire- safe locations. 3 . Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire- protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires . Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. dal CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-13 2980 enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat . Coordinate enclosure with Aft* ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects . 2 . Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials . Close openings of 25 sq. ft . (2 .3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar materials . 3 . Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood-framed construction. 4 . Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft . (9 .2 sq. m) in area, use UL-labeled, fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing. 3 .13 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND TEMPORARY SIGNS A. Prepare project identification and other signs of size indicated, or if not indicated, of a size as directed by the Architect. Install signs where required to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project . Support on posts or framing of preservative- treated wood or steel . Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs . 1. Project Identification Signs : Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics . Comply with details indicated. 2 . Temporary Signs : Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. B. Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights so signs are visible when Work is being performed. 3 .14 WASTE A. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris . Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C) . Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. A CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-12 2980 open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the op"'. building or elsewhere on-site. 3 .10 TEMPORARY PAVING A. Temporary Paving: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to support the indicated loading adequately and to withstand exposure to traffic during the construction period. Locate temporary paving for roads, storage areas, and parking where the same permanent facilities will be located. Review proposed modifications to permanent paving with the Architect . 1 . Paving: Comply with Division 2 Section for paving, for construction and maintenance of temporary paving. 2 . Coordinate temporary paving development with subgrade grading, compaction, installation and stabilization of subbase, and installation of base and finish courses of permanent paving. 3 . Install temporary paving to minimize the need to rework the installations and to result in permanent roads and paved areas without damage or deterioration when occupied by the Owner. 4. Delay installation of the final course of. permanent asphalt concrete paving until immediately before Substantial Completion. Coordinate with weather conditions to avoid unsatisfactory results. 5. Extend temporary paving in and around the construction area as necessary to accommodate delivery and storage of materials, equipment usage, administration, and supervision. 3 .11 DEWATERING FACILITIES AND DRAINS A. For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections. Where feasible, utilize the same facilities . Maintain the site, excavations, and construction free of water. 3 .12 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. 1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary �Ia CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-11 2980 used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner. 1 . Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. 2 . Connect temporary sewers to the municipal system, as directed by sewer department officials . 3 . Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. Following heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. B. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgr_ade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. 3 . 09 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access . 1 . Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner. B. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within the construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. C. Field Offices : Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at the Project Site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small progress meetings. Furnish and equip offices as follows : 1. Furnish with a desk and chairs, a 4-drawer file cabinet, plan table, plan rack, and a 6-shelf bookcase. 2 . Equip with a water cooler and private toilet complete with water closet, lavatory, and medicine cabinet unit with a mirror. D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may be CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-10 2980 a. Where an office has more than 2 occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants . b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for a fax machine in the field office. 2 . At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. 3 . 07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures . Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities . Install where facilities will best serve the Project 's needs . 1 . Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material . B. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units . Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit-type privies will not be permitted. 1 . Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. C. Wash Facilities : Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition. 1 . Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel. D. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper supply. 1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7 to 13 deg C) . 3 .08 SEWER AND DRAINAGE A. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-9 2980 3 . 05 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. B. Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide vented, self- contained, LP-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control . 1 . Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. C. Use of permanent system: Prior to use of permanent system for temporary heat, obtain written permission of Owner, which will define conditions of use and provisions relating to guarantees on equipment . 1 . Provide additional coverage to extend warranty period on permanent heating system to allow for full warranty period, as specified, from time of substantial completion of the Project . 2 . Pay for costs of energy used from the permanent system. D. Operation of permanent equipment : 1 . Place operational zones of permanent HVAC system in use sequentially as respective areas of project become adequately enclosed for efficient operation. 2 . Prior to operation verify that inspection has been made by proper authorities and installation has been approved for operation. 3 . Install temporary filters for air handling units and for permanent ducts. 4 . Protect permanent radiation units, such as convectors or finned pipe. 5. Provide operation and maintenance of systems . 3 .06 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service throughout the construction period for all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install telephone on a separate line for each temporary office and first-aid station. 1. Separate Telephone Lines: Provide additional telephone lines for the following: CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-8 2980 to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts AC, 20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance. 3 . Provide temporary feeders of sufficient size from the service location to provide for temporary electric light and power requirements for the work. Provide power for motors to a maximum of 1/2 HP only. Install sufficient wiring and outlets to insure proper lighting in all corridors . a. The Work of this Section does not include temporary power for hoisting, welding or compressor equipment . 4 . Provide all necessary poles, raceways, transformers, cables, panelboards, switches, and such other items required for installation of temporary lighting and power. Connect to all temporary heating equipment requiring electricity. 5 . Install and maintain on each floor or level of the Work a feeder or feeders of sufficient capacity for requirements of the entire floor and provide a sufficient number of outlets, located at convenient points, so that extension cords of not over 50 feet in length will reach all areas of the Work requiring temporary light and power. 6 . Install and maintain the wiring to the field office of Contractor. 7 . Each subcontractor shall furnish all extension cords, sockets, lamps, motors, and accessories required for the execution of his Work. 8. Provide ground-fault protection for equipment . 9 . Do not use permanent lighting fixtures, lamps, feeders, and branch circuit wiring for temporary lighting. C. Temporary Lighting: When overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions . 2 . Provide a minimum of 40 foot candles of illumination at 30 inches above the floor in all areas and spaces . 3 . Do not use permanent lighting fixtures, lamps, feeders, and branch circuit wiring for temporary lighting. , CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-7 2980 3 . 02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment . Comply with company recommendations . 1 . Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services . 2 . Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services . 3 . Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner' s easements cannot be used for that purpose. 4 . Use Charges : Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders. 3 . 03 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construc- tion until permanent water service is in use. 1 . Install branch piping with taps located so that water is available throughout the construction by the use of hoses. Protect piping and fittings against freezing. 2 . Sterizilation: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use. 3 . 04 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC POWER AND LIGHTING A. Arrange with utility company, provide service required for power and lighting, and pay all costs for service and for power used. B. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switch gear. 1. Install electric power service underground, except where overhead service must be used. 2 . Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-6 2980 E. Lamps and Light Fixtures : Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. F. Heating Units : Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. G. Temporary Offices : Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes . Provide heated and air-conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading. H. Temporary Toilet Units : Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass-fiber- reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. I. Fire Extinguishers : Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces . In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures. 1 . Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities . r /ar CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-5 2980 provide exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer. 2 . For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. 3 . For interior walls of temporary offices, provide 2 coats interior latex-flat wall paint . F. Tarpaulins : Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL- labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less . For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon-reinforced, laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride, fire-retardant tarpaulins . G. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities . H. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 0 .120 inch (3 mm) thick, galvanized 2 inch (50 mm) chainlink fabric fencing 6 feet (2 m) high with galvanized barbed-wire top strand and galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) I.D. for corner posts . 2 . 02 EQUIPMENT A. Provide new equipment . If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4 inch (19 mm) , heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet (30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge. C. Electrical Outlets : Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110 to 120 Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment . D. Electrical Power Cords : Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress . Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-4 2980 1 . 05 PROJECT CONDITIONS oft A. Temporary Utilities : Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses . Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress . Take necessary fire-prevention measures . Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 .01 MATERIALS A. Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Section 06100 . 1. For job-built temporary offices, shops, and sheds within the construction area, provide UL-labeled, fire-treated lumber and plywood for framing, sheathing, and siding. 2 . For signs and directory boards, provide exterior- type, Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood of sizes and thicknesses indicated. 3 . For fences and vision barriers, provide minimum 3/8 inch (9 . 5 mm) thick exterior plywood. 4. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick exterior plywood. C. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide gypsum wallboard on interior walls of temporary offices. D. Roofing Materials: Provide UL Class A standard-weight asphalt shingles or UL Class C mineral-surfaced roll roofing on roofs of job-built temporary offices, shops, and sheds. E. Paint: Comply with requirements in Section 09900 . 1. For job-built temporary offices, shops, sheds, fences, and other exposed lumber and plywood, CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-3 2980 D. Section 14240 - Hydraulic Elevators : 1 . Use of elevators for moving of materials during construction. E. Division 15 - Plumbing. F. Division 15 - Heating, Ventilating And Air Conditioning. G. Division 16 - Electrical . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utilities : Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities . B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of the date established for commencement of the Work, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility. 1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Building code requirements . 2 . Health and safety regulations . 3 . Utility company regulations. 4 . Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules . 5. Environmental protection regulations. B. Standards : Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations, " ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition, " and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities. " 1 . Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code. " C. Inspections : Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits . CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-2 2980 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL . 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Water service and distribution. 2 . Temporary electric power and light . 3 . Temporary heat . 4 . Ventilation. 5. Telephone service. 6 . Sanitary facilities, including drinking water. 7 . Storm and sanitary sewer. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Field offices and storage sheds . 2 . Temporary roads and paving. 3 . Dewatering facilities and drains . 4 . Temporary enclosures. 5. Hoists and temporary elevator use. 6 . Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards . 7 . Waste disposal services . 8. Rodent and pest control. 9 . Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities . D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 . Temporary fire protection. 2 . Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 3 . Sidewalk bridge or enclosure fence for the site. 4. Environmental protection. 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01565 - Industrial Hygiene And Indoor Air Quality. B. Section 02500 - Paving And Surfacing. C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-1 2980 B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction. C. Repair and protection is Contractor' s responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services . END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL 01400-5 2980 d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections . e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test . f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and an interpretation of test results . j . Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements . 1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. M. Recommendations on retesting. 1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Service Agencies : Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories ' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. 1 . Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching. " QUALITY CONTROL 01400-4 2980 6 . Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. 7 . Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site. D. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests . 1. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2 . The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3 . The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. E. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1 . The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. 1. 04 SUBMITTALS A. Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Architect . If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service through the Contractor. 1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs . 2 . Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing "* agency. QUALITY CONTROL 01400-3 2980 and other quality-control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. 1 . Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the Contractor' s responsibility, the Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality-control services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. 2 . Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the Owner' s responsibility, the owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services . 3 . Where the Owner has engaged a testing agency for testing and inspecting part of the Work, and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity for the same or related element, the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the Owner, unless agreed to in writing by the Owner. B. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor' s responsibility. 1 . The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor' s responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements. C. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Provide access to the Work. 2 . Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests . 3 . Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking samples. 4. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples. 5. Deliver samples to testing laboratories. QUALITY CONTROL 01400-2 2980 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services . B. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities . They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect . C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements . D. Requirements of this section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products . 1 . Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the sections that specify those activities . Requirements in those sections may also cover production of standard products. 2 . Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor' s quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements . 3 . Requirements for Contractor to provide quality- control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this section. 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching: Requirements for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities . 1.03 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, QUALITY CONTROL 01400-1 2980 B. Take 5 black-and-white project photographs, in accordance with requirements indicated, to best show the status of construction and progress since taking previous photographs . 1 . Frequency: Take photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment . 2 . Vantage Points : Following suggestions by the Architect and the Contractor, the photographer shall select vantage points . During each of the following construction phases, take not less than 2 of the required shots from the same vantage point each time to create a time-lapse sequence as follows : a. Commencement of the Work, through completion of subgrade construction. b. Above-grade structural framing. c. Exterior building enclosure. d. Interior Work, through date of Substantial Completion. C. Additional Photographs : From time to time the Architect may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Orders and are not included in the Contract Sum or an allowance. 1 . The Architect will give the photographer 3 days ' notice, where feasible. 2 . In emergency situations, the photographer shall take additional photographs within 24 hours of the Architect 's request . 3 . Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of Work. b. The Owner' s request for special publicity photographs. c. Special events planned at the Project Site. d. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. e. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from the Project Site. These are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances . f. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. END OF SECTION Id-14 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 01380-3 2980 regularly engaged as a professional photographer for not less than 3 years . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 PHOTOGRAPHIC COPIES A. Prints : Provide 8-by-10-inch (200-by-250-mm) smooth surface matte, black-and-white prints on single-weight commercial-grade stock, mounted on muslin. Allow a 1- inch (25-mm) wide margin punched for standard 3-ring binder. Place margin on the left edge for vertical shots and at the top for horizontal shots . B. Identification: Label each photograph on the front in the bottom margin with project name and date the photograph was taken. On the back of each print provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: 1 . Name of the Project . 2 . Name and address of the photographer. 3 . Name of the Architect . 4 . Name of the Contractor. 5 . Date the photograph was taken. 6. Vantage Point: Description of vantage point, in terms of location, direction (by compass point) , and elevation or story of construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Before starting construction, take photographs of the site and surrounding properties from different points of view, as selected by the Architect. 1 . Take photographs in sufficient number to show existing conditions adjacent to the property before starting Work. 2 . Take photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining the property in sufficient detail to record accurately the physical conditions at the start of construction. 3 .02 PHOTOGRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS A. Associated Services: Cooperate with the Photographer's work. Provide auxiliary services as requested, including access to the Project Site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting. CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS -- 01380-2 2980 SECTION 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for construction photographs . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals : General requirements for submitting photographs . 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Prints: The Contractor will distribute the prints as follows: 1 . Owner: One print for the Owner' s permanent record. 2 . Architect : One print for the Architect ' s files . 3 . Contractor: One print for the Contractor. The Contractor shall retain the print in the field office at the Project Site. The print shall be available at all times for reference. B. Extra Prints : When requested by the Architect, the photographer shall prepare extra prints of photographs . The photographer shall distribute these prints directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints directly to the photographer. C. Negatives to be submitted to the Owner: with each submittal, include photographic negatives, in protective envelopes, identified by date photographs were taken. The negatives shall be ready for transmittal to the Owner and for the Owner's unrestricted use. 1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engage a qualified commercial photographer to take photographs during construction. B. Photographer's Qualifications: Photographer shall be an individual of established reputation who has been �a7 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 01380-1 2980 shop drawings and copies of product data which carry the Architect ' s stamp of approval to: a. Jobsite file. b. Record Documents file. c. Other affected contractors . d. Subcontractors . e. Supplier or fabricator. 3 . Distribute samples which carry the Architect 's stamp of approval as directed by the Architect . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION A SUBMITTALS 01300-8 2980 B. Above indicated notations on the Submittal Review Stamp mean the following: 1 . Submittals marked as indicated in items A.1 . and A.2 . above are self explanatory. 2 . When the submittal is marked as "Resubmission Required" , do not proceed with the work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise the submittal or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the Architect 's notations which states the reasons for returning the submittal; resubmit the submittal without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action marking. Do not permit submittals marked "Resubmission Required" to be used at the project site, or elsewhere where work is in progress . 3 . When the submittal is marked "Disapproved" , do not proceed with the work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Rejected submittals are considered as being non-responsive to the requirements of the Contract Documents . Prepare a new submittal in accordance with the Contract Requirements; resub- mit the submittal without delay. Repeat submittal process until a different action marking is obtained. Do not permit submittals marked "Disapproved" to be used at the project site, or elsewhere where work is in progress . 1 . 09 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS A. Construction Schedule: 1. Distribute copies of the reviewed construction schedule to: a. Owner. b. Architect. c. Jobsite file. d. Subcontractors . e. Other concerned parties. 2 . Instruct recipients to report promptly to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections shown in the schedule. B. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples : 1. The Architect, after reviewing shop drawings, will keep a record print or copy of each submittal and will return the reproducible transparency or extra copies of product data and samples to the Contractor. 2 . The Contractor shall make black line prints of the approved shop drawings (reproducible transparencies) and distribute reproductions of IOS� SUBMITTALS 01300-7 2980 h. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers . i. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents . j . Identification of revisions on resubmittals . k. An 8 inch by 3 inch blank space for Contractor and Architect ' s stamps . 4 . Each submittal shall contain the Contractor' s stamp, dated and initialed or signed, certifying to review and approval of submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents . Submittals which do not have the Contractor' s stamp, dated and initialed or signed, will be returned to the Contractor, without being reviewed, for resubmittal . a. The Contractor' s stamp shall contain the words "Reviewed and Approved as being in conformance with requirements of Contract Documents" . F. Resubmission Requirements : 1 . Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Architect and resubmit until approved. 2 . Shop Drawings and Product Data: a. Revise initial shop drawings or product data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal . b. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Architect. 3 . Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1 .08 ARCHITECT'S ACTION STAMP A. Except for submittals which are for "Architect 's information" , the Architect will stamp each submittal to be returned with a self explanatory action stamp, appropriately marked, dated and initialed or signed, as follows: 1. Reviewed as required by the construction contract documents and approved, but only for conformance to the design concept of the work, and subject to further limitations and requirements contained in the construction contract documents . 2 . Reviewed and approved, except as noted, subject to limitations noted above. Resubmission not required. 3 . Resubmission Required. 4 . Disapproved. SUBMITTALS 01300-6 2980 b. Field construction criteria. *► c. Catalog numbers and similar data. d. Conformance with Contract Documents . 3 . Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and with the requirements of the Contract Documents . 4 . Notify the Architect in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents . 5. Begin no fabrication or work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect approval . E. Submission Requirements : 1 . Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the Work of any other Contractor. a. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned to the sender "without action" . b. Submittals received which are not required nor requested by the Contract Documents will be returned to sender "without action, submittal not required" . c. Submittals received which are required for "Architect 's information" such as inspection and test reports, survey data and fabricator' s design calculations, will not be returned. 2 . Number of submittals required: a. Shop Drawings: Submit one reproducible transparency and two opaque reproductions . b. Product Data: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two which will be retained by the Architect . c. Samples: Submit the number stated in each specification section, or if not stated, submit 2 samples each. 3 . Submittals shall contain: a. The date submission and the dates of any previous submissions. b. The Project title and number. c. Contract identification. d. The names of: 1) Contractor 2) Supplier 3) Manufacturer e. Identification of the product, with specification section number, article and paragraph number. f. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. g. Relation to adjacent or critical features of Work or materials. O 10 3 SUBMITTALS 01300-5 2980 1 . 06 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site; and submit duplicate copies of the Architect at weekly intervals : 1 . List of subcontractors at the site. 2 . Approximate count of personnel at the site. 3 . High and low temperatures, general weather conditions 4 . Accidents and unusual events . 5 . Meetings and significant decisions . 6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses . 7 . Meter readings and similar recordings . 8 . Emergency procedures . 9 . Orders and requests of governing authorities . 10 . Change Orders received, implemented. 11 . Services connected, disconnected. 12 . Equipment or system tests and start-ups . 13 . Partial Completions, occupancies . 14 . Substantial Completions authorized. 1 . 07 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES A. Shop drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1 . Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings . 2 . Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches. B. Product data preparation: 1 . Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models . 2 . Show performance characteristics and capacities . 3 . Show dimensions and clearances required. 4 . Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls . 5. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the Work. 6 . Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. C. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2 . Full range of color, texture and pattern. D. Contractor Responsibilities : 1 . Review and approve shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission. 2 . Determine and verify: a. Field measurements. SUBMITTALS 01300-4 2980 1 . 05 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals . Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for establishment of the Contractor' s construction schedule. 1 . Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list of products as well as the Contractor' s construction schedule. 2 . Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during the first 90 days of construction. Provide the following information: a. Schedule date for the first submittal . b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the part of the work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmittal . g. Scheduled date for the Architect 's final release or approval . 3 . Allow a minimum of 10 working days for reveiw of each submittal . Allow a minimum of 15 working days for the more complex submittals, such as structural sytems and mechanical systems . 4. Submittal schedule shall be revised if, in the opinion of the Architect, sufficient time is not being allowed between scheduled dates of submittal and scheduled dates for the Architect 's final release or approval . 5 . No submittals will be processed until the Submittal Schedule has been submitted to Architect and approved. B. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, owner, subcontractors and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the project meeting room and field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations . Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the work and are no longer involved in construction activities. C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. (O ( SUBMITTALS 01300-3 2980 that processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. , a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Submittal Transmittal : Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1 . On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations . Include Contractor' s certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements 1 .04 CONTRACTOR' S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Prepare the construction schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart . 1 . Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. 2 . Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week. 3 . Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions . 4 . Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches . B. Content of Construction Progress Schedule: 1 . Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. 2 . Show the dates for the earliest start/latest start, and earliest completion/latest completion of each major element of construction. 3 . Show projected percentage of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. C. Progress Revisions: 1. Indicate actual progress of each activity to date of submission. 2 . Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule. 3 . Provide a narrative report as needed to define: a. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. b. Corrective action recommended and its effect. SUBMITTALS 01300-2 2980 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the work, including: 1 . Contractor's construction schedule. 2 . Submittal schedule. 3 . Daily construction reports . 4. Shop drawings, product data and samples 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Administrative Submittals : Refer to other Division 1 sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals . Such submittals include, but are not limited to: 1 . Permits . 2 . Applications for payment. 3 . Performance and payment bonds. 4 . Insurance certificates. 5. List of Subcontractors . B. Section 01027 - Applications for Payment : Schedule of Values submitted. C. Section 01400 - Quality Control : Quality control services . D. Refer to individual specification sections for specific submittal requirements specified in each section. 1 .03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2 . Coordinate transmittal of difference types of submittals for related elements of the work so a SUBMITTALS 01300-1 2980 insure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 2 . Review the present and future needs of each entity A"ok present, including the following: a. Interface requirements . b. Time. c. Sequences . d. Status of submittals . e. Deliveries . f. Off-site fabrication problems . g. Access . h. Site utilization. i . Temporary facilities and services . j . Hours of work. k. Hazards and risks . 1 . Housekeeping. M. Quality and work standards . n. Change Orders . o. Documentation of information for payment requests . D. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present . Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report . 1. Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-4 2980 k. Weather limitations . 1 . Manufacturer' s recommendations . m. Warranty requirements . n. Compatibility of materials . o. Acceptability of substrates . p. Temporary facilities . q. Space and access limitations . r. Governing regulations. s . Safety. t . Inspecting and testing requirements . u. Required performance results . v. Recording requirements . w. Protection. 2 . Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the Architect . 3 . Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. 1 .06 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regular intervals. Notify the Owner and the Architect of scheduled meeting dates . Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment request . B. Attendees : In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, each subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings . All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress . Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project. 1. Contractor' s Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to 9J PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-3 2980 C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: Awk 1. Tentative construction schedule. 2 . Critical work sequencing. 3 . Designation of responsible personnel . 4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders . 5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment . 6. Distribution of Contract Documents . 7 . Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples . 8. Preparation of record documents . 9. Use of the premises. 10 . Parking availability. 11 . Office, work, and storage areas. 12 . Equipment deliveries and priorities . 13 . Safety procedures . 14 . First aid. 15 . Security. 16. Housekeeping. 17 . Working hours . 1 . 05 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. B. Attendees : The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates . . 1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options . c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality- control samples. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i . Compatibility problems. j . Time schedules. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-2 2980 SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings including but not limited to: 1. Preconstruction conferences . 2 . Preinstallation conferences . 3 . Progress meetings . 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01040 - Coordination: Meetings and procedures for coordinating project construction operations including, general project coordination procedures and coordination drawings . B. Section 01300 - Submittals : Construction schedules . 1 . 03 PRECONSTRUCTION ORIENTATION A. The Contractor and all major subcontractors will be required to attend a hospital orientation, where patient 's rights, infection control, safety, etc . will be discussed. The orientation will be held at the project site, at a time and place to be determined by the Owner. 1 . 04 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Owner and the Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement . Hold the conference at the Project Site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments . B. Attendees : Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-1 2980 construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3 . Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat . 4. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Trim and refinish existing wood doors as necessary to clear new floors . D. Damaged Surfaces : Patch or replace any portion of an existing finished surface which is found to be damaged, lifted, discolored, or shows other imperfections, with matching material . 1. Provide adequate support of substrate prior to patching the finish. 2 . Refinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to produce uniform color and texture over entire surface. 3 . When existing surface finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections . E. Plaster Installation: Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and install thickness and coats as indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 3-coat work. 2 . Finish gypsum plaster to match existing adjacent surfaces . Sand lightly to remove trowel marks and arrises. 3 . Cut, patch, point-up, and repair plaster to accommodate other construction. 3 .04 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-6 2980 D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3 . 03 PERFORMANCE A. Employ skilled workpersons to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original Installer; comply with the original Installer' s recommendations . 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces . Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2 . To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces . 3 . Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond- core drill. 4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. 5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2 . Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining Ct3 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-5 2980 with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 . 01 MATERIALS A. Use materials identical to existing materials . For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials . B. Plaster: Comply with ASTM C842 . 1. Base Coat : Ready-mixed, sand aggregate gypsum plaster base. 2 . Finish Coat : Ready-mixed gypsum finish plaster. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding. 1 . Before proceeding, meet at the Project Site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades . Review areas of potential interference and conflict . Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support : Provide temporary support of work to be cut . B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations . C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-4 2980 j . Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment . B. Operational Limitations : Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems : a. Primary operational systems and equipment . b. Air or smoke barriers . c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers . d. Membranes and flashings . e. Fire protection systems . f. Noise and vibration control elements and systems . g. Control systems. h. Communication systems . i . Conveying systems. j . Electrical wiring systems . C. Visual Requirements : Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect ' s opinion, reduce the building' s aesthetic qualities . Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1. If possible retain the original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch the exposed Work listed below. If it is impossible to engage the original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm. a. Processed concrete finishes . b. Stonework and stone masonry. c. Ornamental metal . d. Matched-veneer woodwork. e. Firestopping. f . Acoustical ceilings . g. Fluid-applied flooring. h. Carpeting. i . Wall covering. j . HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and t Ct' CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-3 2980 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal : Submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed if the Owner requires approval of these procedures before proceeding. Request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal : 1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed and indicate why it cannot be avoided. 2 . Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building' s appearance and other significant visual elements . 3 . List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work. 4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities : List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect . List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. 7 . Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the Architect 's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1 . 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following structural elements: a. Foundation construction. b. Bearing and retaining walls. c. Structural concrete. d. Structural steel. e. Lintels. f. Structural decking. g. Stair systems. h. Miscellaneous structural metals . i . Equipment supports. A CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-2 2980 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. 1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01040 - Coordination: Procedures for coordinating cutting and patching with other construction activities . B. Section 02070 - Selective Demolition: Demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations . C. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Cutting and patching of masonry. D. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim: Cutting and patching of metal roofing and siding and sheet metal work. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting or touch-up painting of surfaces after cutting and patching work is performed. F. Division 15 - Plumbing: Cutting and patching of plumbing systems (but does not include walls, floors, ceilings, and structures) . G. Division 15 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: Cutting and patching of HVAC systems (but does not include walls, floors, ceilings, and structures) . H. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. !�q CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-1 2980 20 . High-speed operation. 21 . Improper lubrication. 22 . Unusual wear or other misuse . 23 . Contact between incompatible materials . 24 . Destructive testing. 25 . Misalignment . 26 . Excessive weathering. 27 . Unprotected storage. 28 . Improper shipping or handling. 29 . Theft . 30 . Vandalism. END OF SECTION COORDINATION 01040-6 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions : Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. 3 .02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects . C. Limiting Exposures : Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 2 . Excessive internal or external pressures . 3 . Excessively high or low temperatures . 4. Thermal shock. 5. Excessively high or low humidity. 6. Air contamination or pollution. 7 . Water or ice. 8. Solvents . 9 . Chemicals. 10 . Light. 11. Radiation. 12 . Puncture. 13 . Abrasion. 14. Heavy traffic. 15. Soiling, staining, and corrosion. 16. Bacteria. 17 . Rodent and insect infestation. 18 . Combustion. 19 . Electrical current. COORDINATION 01040-5 2980 7 . Fire rating of partition penetrations . 8. Acoustical ceiling layout . 9 . Duct layout . , 10 . Access panels . 11 . Existing construction (including existing mechanical services) in the areas where new systems will be installed. E. Copies of the coordination drawings shall be distributed to each subcontractor and subsequently each trade shall locate its work and shall show elevations, sizes, access panels, pipe insulation, junction boxes, and fixture sizes . F. The following colors shall be used to denote the various systems : 1. HVAC - Dark Blue. 2 . Plumbing - Dark Green. 3 . Sprinkler - Red. 4. Electrical - Orange. 5. Other - Brown G. Overlays of the various layouts shall be placed on a light table to reveal conflicts . Conflicts shall be flagged for immediate attention and resolution. Upon resolution of all conflicts, the coordinated drawings shall be signed by all trades and submitted to the Architect in accordance with Section 01300, for review and confirmation of compliance with the Contract Documents . H. At Contractor's option, where time permits, a single reproducible transparency may be prepared by the Contractor for use by all subcontractors in progressive order to show all systems on a single composite drawing. I . All subcontractors shall be responsible for fitting their work in accordance with the Contract Drawings . No subcontractor shall have the preemptive right to lay-out or install his work to effectively preclude the Work of others . J. Additional work required to accommodate a trade that failed to coordinate his work will be paid for by the subcontractor who failed to coordinate his work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) COORDINATION 01040-4 2980 1 . 05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings : Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities . Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components . 1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings . 2 . Indicate required installation sequences . 3 . Comply with requirements contained in Section 01300 . B. Prepare coordination drawings where mechanical and electrical systems are to be installed in areas of limited space (such as above ceilings or in mechanical shafts) and work by subcontractors or fabricators requires off-site fabrication of products and materials which must accurately interface. Coordination drawings shall indicate how work shown by separate shop drawings will interface, and shall indicate sequence for installation. Nothing in this procedure shall be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to comply with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents . 1. Shop drawings required under work of individual specification sections will not be approved until coordination drawings have been approved. C. Coordination drawings shall be required to show the work of all major trades and without excluding the work of any particular trade, and shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Sheet metal (HVAC) subcontractor. 2 . Plumbing subcontractor. 3 . Steamfitting subcontractor. 4. Sprinkler subcontractor. 5. Electrical subcontractor. 6. Acoustical ceiling subcontractor. 7. Drywall subcontractor. 8. Pneumatic tube system subcontractor. D. Contractor shall produce 3/8 inch scale reproducible transparencies that shall include the following information: 1. Outline of all grid reference lines . 2 . Elevation reference lines. 3 . Structural steel beam sizes and column layout. 4. Drop panels in concrete flat-slab floor construction. 5. Partition and door layout . 6. Room or space number. COORDINATION 01040-3 2980 installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2 . Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3 . Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings . 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required. C. Administrative Procedures : Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Wo-k. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2 . Installation and removal of temporary facilities . 3 . Delivery and processing of submittals . 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities . D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials . 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the Work. 1 .04 SUBMITTALS A. Staff Names : Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities . List their addresses and telephone numbers. 1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each temporary telephone. COORDINATION 01040-2 2980 SECTION 01040 lam" COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures . 2 . Conservation. 3 . Coordination Drawings . 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel . 5. Cleaning and protection. 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01200 - Project Meetings : Progress meetings, coordination meetings, and preinstallation conferences . B. Section 01300 - Submittals : Preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment : Requirements for coordinating general installation. D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout : Requirements for coordinating contract closeout . E. Division 15 sections : Requirements for shop drawings of individual systems . F. Division 16 sections: Requirements for shop drawings of individual systems . 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on COORDINATION 01040-1 2980 the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred „ for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates . C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract . D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this section. Specification sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 SCHEDULE OF ADD ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 : Construct Canopy at Same Day Care. B. Alternate No. 2 : Provide new Exterior Emergency Generator. C. Alternate No. 3 : Fire Alarm upgrade in existing Patient Care Areas . (To be carried as a line item of 3 . 02 SCHEDULE OF DEDUCT ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: Emergency Department. B. Alternate No. 2 : Same Day Care. NOTE: Refer to Drawing D-2 .1 for location of Deduct Alternates . 3 .03 SCHEDULE OF ADD/DEDUCT ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 : Provide CSPE single-ply membrane roofing in lieu of EPDM single-ply roofing, as specified in Section 07530. END OF SECTION ALTERNATES 01030-2 2980 SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1. 01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates . 1 . 02 DEFINITIONS A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents . 1 . The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1 .03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Bid Forms : Quotation of cost of each Alternate. B. Owner-Contractor Agreement : Alternates accepted by Owner for incorporation into the Work. C. Sections of Specifications identified in each Alternate. 1 .04 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of ALTERNATES 01030-1 2980 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14100 Dumbwaiters 070 STP. 14210 Electric Elevators 070 STP. 14240 Hydraulic Elevators 070 STP. 14300 Moving Stairs and Walks 070 LF 14420 Wheelchair Lifts 070 EA : 14440 Sidewalk Lifts 070 EA 14520 Hospital Transport Systems 070 LF 14580 Pneumatic Tube Systems 070 LF 15 MECHANICAL FIRE PROTECTION 15300 Water supply(Fire Prot.-within building) 083 LF 15300 Sprinklers 083 HD 15300 Sprinkler Piping 083 LF 15300 Standpipe Systems 083 LF 15300 Fire Extinguishers 083 EA 15300 Special Fire Protection Systems 084 SF 15300 Water Supply and exterior Fire Hydr.(Site) 121 LF 15300 General Construction Items(Sleeving,etc) 083 IS 15300 O&M Manuals,As Built&Record Drawings 083 IS PLUMBING 15400 Domestic Water Supply System 081 LF 15400 Water supply(Outside Building and) 081 LF 15400 Sanitary Waste and Vent System 081 LF 15400 Rainwater Drainage System 081 LF 15400 Plumbing Fixtures 081 IS 15400 Medical Gas Systems 084 LS 15400 Special Plumbing Systems 081 LS 15400 Insulation 081 LS 15400 General Construction Items(Sleeving,etc) 081 IS 15400 O&M Manuals,As Built&Record Drawings 081 LS HVAC 15500 Energy Supply(Total Heating and Cooling) 082 MBH 15500 Heat Generating System 082 MBH 15500 Cooling Generating System 082 TONS 15500 HVAC Piping 082 IS 15500 HVAC Insulation 082 LS 15500 Ductwork 082 TONS 15500 Terminal and Package Units 082 LS 15500 Controls and Instrumentation 082 LS 15500 Systems Testing and Balancing 082 IS 15500 General Construction Items(Sleeving,etc) 081 IS 15500 O&M Manuals,As Built&Record Drawings 082 IS 16 ELECTRICAL 16100 High Tension Switchgear and Distribution 091 KVA 16100 Low Tension Switchgear and Distribution 091 KVA 16100 Panelboards 091 IS 16100 Branch Wiring 092 LS 16100 Lighting 092 IS 16100 Communications systems 093 IS 16100 Fire Alarm Systems 093 LS 16100 Emergency Light and Power 093 LS 16100 Electric Heating 093 LS 16100 Raceway Systems 093 LS 16100 Other Special Systems and Devices 093 IS 16100 General Construction Items(Sleeving,etc) 093 LS 16100 O&M Manuals,As Built&Record Drawings 093 IS TOTAL NOTES: I This Schedule of Values is to be completed by the Contractor within the time period specified in the Contract Documents.When approved by the Architect,who may require supporting evidence as to its correctness,the Schedule shall be used as a basis for certificates of payment 2 Any item listed can be broken down in further detail and additional items added as appropriate,and non-applicable items deleted. 3 Unit Prices shown above are for convenience only and do not necessarily form a basis for changes to the Contract Documents,unless specifically agreed to by Owner and Contractor. 4 The code numbers appearing under"UF Code"refer to the UNIFORMAT system,a copy of which may be obtained from the Architect 5 Submit this Schedule to the Architect in hardcopy and electronic spreadsheet form. 6 On approval of this Schedule,items with values against them should be trarofared to AIA Documents G702 and G702A,"Application and Certificate for Payment". SCHEDULE OF VALUES-Page 4 of 4 Pages APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT-01027 2980 08520 Aluminum Windows(Exterior Walls) 042 SF 08610 Wood Windows(Exterior Walls) 042 SF 08655 Roof Windows(Roofs) 050 SF 08700 Hardware(Exterior Doors) 042 LEAF 08700 Hardware(Interior) 061 LEAF 08800 Glazing(Exterior) 042 SF 08800 Glazing(Interior) 061 SF 08800 Glazing(Mirrors.etc.) 063 SF 08900 Glazed Curtain Walls(Exterior Wall) 041 SF 9 FINISHES 09200 Lath and Plaster(Exterior walls and soffits) 041 SF 09200 Lath and Plaster(Interior Walls) 062 SF 09200 Lath and Plaster(Interior Ceilings) 062 SF 09215 Veneer Plaster(Interior Walls) 062 SF 09215 Veneer Plaster(Interior Ceilings) 062 SF 09250 Gypsum Board(Exterior Soffits) 041 SF 09250 Gypsum Board(Interior Walls) 062 SF 09250 Gypsum Board(Interior Ceilings) 062 SF 09300 Tile 062 SF 09535 Wood Ceiling System 062 SF 09540 Reinforced Gypsum Units 062 LF/SF 09550 Wood Flooring 062 SF 09650 Resilient Flooring 062 SF 09680 Carpet 062 SF 09690 CarpetTile 062 SF 09705 Resinous Flooring 062 SF 09816 Epoxy Wall Coamg System 062 SF 09835 Textured Plastic Cosatings 062 SF 09900 Painting(Interior) 062 SF 09900 Painting(Exterior Walls) 042 SF 09900 Painting(Sitework) 121 SF 09950 Wall Covering 062 SF 10 SPECIALTIES 10100 Visual Display Boards 063 EA. 10150 Compaumtents and Cubicles 061 EA 10200 Louvers and Vents 041 SF 10270 Access Flooring 063 SF 10500 Lockers 063 EA. 10522 Fire Extinguishers Cabinets and Accessories 063 LS 10605 Wire Mesh Partitions 061 SF 10650 Operable Partitions 061 SF 10655 Accordion Folding Partitions 061 SF 11 EQUIPMENT 11050 Library Equipment 111 LF 11054 Library Stack Systems 111 LF 11055 Library Multi-Tier Stack Systems 111 LF 11132 Projection Screens 111 EA. 11150 Parking Control Equipment 111 LS 11160 Loading Dock Equipment 111 LS 11400 Food Service Equipment 111 LS 11460 Unit Kitchens 111 LS 11470 Darkroom Equipment 111 LS 11610 Fume Hoods 111 IS 12 IFURNISHINGS 12300 Manufactured Casewok 111 IS 12345 Laboratory Casework 111 IS 12500 Window Treatment 112 SF 12670 Entrance Mats 112 SF 12680 Foot Grilles 112 SF 12690 Flow Mats and Frames 112 SF 12700 Multiple Seating 112 EA 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13037 Environmental Rooms 113 LS 130138 Cold Storage Rooms 113 IS 13090 Radiation Protection 113 LS SCHEDULE OF VALUES-Page 3 of 4 Pages APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT-01027 2980 04435 Cast Stone(Interior Partitions) 041 SF/LF 04435 Cast Stone(Sitework) 121 SF/LF 5 METALS 05100 Structural Metal Framing(Foundations) 012 T AMON 05100 Structural Metal Framing(Superstructure) 030 T 05200 Metal Joists 030 T 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing(Exterior Walls) 041 SF 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing(Interior) 061 SF 05500 Metal Fabrications(Stairs) 030 FLTS 05500 Metal Fabrications(Exterior Walls) 041 LS 05500 Metal Fabrications(Interior) 063 LS 05500 Metal Fabrications(Sitework) 121 LS 05700 Ornamental Metal(Exterior Walls) 041 LS 05700 Ornamental Metal(Interior) 063 LS 05700 Ornamental Metal(Roof) 050 LS 05700 Ornamental Metal(Sitework) 121 LS 05810 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 063 LF 6 WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 Rough Carpentry(Framing and Decking) 030 SF 06100 Rough Carpentry(Exterior Wall) 041 SF 06100 Rough Carpentry(Roofing) 050 LS 06100 Rough Carpentry(Interior) 061 LS 06100 Rough Carpentry(Sitework) 121 IS 06130 Heavy Timber Construction 030 SF 06200 Finish Carpentry(Exterior Trim) 041 IS 06200 Finish Carpentry(Interior) 063 LS 06400 Architectural Woodwork 041 LS 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07110 Membrane Waterproofing(Slab on Grade) 021 SF 07110 Membrane Waterproofing(Basement Walls) 023 SF 07110 Membrane Waterproofing(Docks) 050 SF 07146 Crystalline Waterproofing(Slab on Grade) 021 SF 07146 Crystalline Waterproofing(Basement Walls) 023 SF 07146 Crystalline Waterproofing(Decks) 031 SF 07150 Dampproofmg(Basement Walls) 023 SF 07150 Dampproofmg(Exterior Walls) 041 I SF 07150 Dampproofmg(Sitework) 121 SF 07200 Insulation(Slab on Grade) 021 SF 07200 Insulation(Basement Walls) 023 SF 07200 Insulation(Exterior Walls) 041 SF 07200 Insulation(Roofs) 050 SF 07240 Insul.and Finish SysL(Dryvit)(Ext.Walls) 041 SF 07250 Fireproofing&Firestopping 031 SF 07310 Shingles 050 SF 07500 Membrane Roofing 050 SF 07570 Traffic Topping 050 SF 07600 Flashing and Sheetmetal(Exterior Walls) 041 LF 07600 Flashing and Sheetmetal(Roof) 050 LF/SF 07600 Flashing and Sheetmetal(Sitework) 121 LF/SF 07720 Roof Accessories 050 LS 07800 Skylights 050 SF 07900 Joint Sealers(Exterior Walls) 041 LF 07900 Joint Scalers(Interior) 063 LF 07900 Joint Scalers(Roofing) 050 LF 07900 Joint Sealers(Sitework) 121 IF 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Metal Doors and Frames(Exterior Wall) 042 LEAF 08100 Metal Doors and Frames(Interior) 061 LEAF 08100 Metal Doors and Frames(Sitework) 121 LEAF 08210 Wood Doors(Exterior Walls) 042 LEAF 06210 Wood Doors(Interior) 061 LEAF 08210 Sliding Doors 061 LEAF 08330 Coiling Doors(Exterior Walls) 041 SF 08330 Coiling Doors&Grilles(Interior) 061 SF 08385 Safety Glass Doors(Exterior Walls) 042 LEAF 08385 Safety Glass Doors(Interior) 061 LEAF 08400 Entrances and Storefronts(Exterior Walls) 042 SF 06400 jEntrmes and storefronts(Interior) 1 061 1 1 1 SF SCHEDULE OF VALUES-Page 2 of 4 Pages APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT-01027 2980 SCHEDULE OF VALUES atek Project: Cooley Dickinson Hospital Architect: SBRA Project No: 2980 Northampton,MA Owner: Cooley Dickinson Hospital Contractor: Date: 3ECTION ITEM DESCRIPTION OF AMOUNT QUANTITY UNIT UNIT % SUB-CONTRACTOR OR SUPPLIER No. COD COST CONT 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Bonds 100 LS Budding Permit 100 LS Other Mobilization Expenses 100 LS Temporary facilities 100 LS Cutting and Patching 100 LS Staging 100 LS Temporary Heat 100 IS Construction Equipment 100 LS Coordination Drawings 100 LS Site Overheads and Fee 100 LS Cleaning&Contract Closeout 100 LS Project Record Documents 100 LS 2 SITEWORK 02050 Demolition 121 LS 02070 Selective Demolition 063 LS 02100 Site Preparation 121 LS 02200 Grading and Earthwork(Site) 121 LS 02200 Excavation(Basement&Foundations) 011 CY 02200 Backfill(Basement) 022 CY 02200 Shoring 022 SF 02200 Fill below grade slab 021 CY 02512 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 121 SF 02514 Portland Cement Concrete Paving(Site) 121 SF 02710 Subdrainage systems 021 LS 02720 Storm Sewage Systems 121 LS 02730 Sanitary Sewage Systems 121 LS 02800 Site Improvements 121 LS 02900 Fine Grading and Loam 121 SF 02900 Planting 121 LS 02930 Lawns and Grasses 121 SF 3 CONCRETE 03300 Conc.+Forms+Reinf.(Foundations) 011 CY 03300 Conc.+Forms+Reinf.(Slab on Grade) 021 SF 03300 Spec.Found.(incl.Dewatering,underpin.) 012 IS 03300 Cone.+Forms+Reinf.(Basement Walls) 023 SF 03300 Cone.+Forms+Reinf.(Int.Superstructure) 030 CY 03300 Concrete on Metal Dock(Structure) 030 SF 03300 Conc.+Form+Reinf.(Exterior Walls) 041 SF 03300 Cone.+Forms+Reinf.(Sitework) 121 CY 03400 Precast Concrete(Structural Components) 030 SF 03450 Arch.Precast Conc.(Ext.Wall Components) 041 SF 03450 Arch.Precut Cone.(Sitework) 121 LF 03550 Self-Leveling Concrete Underlayments 062 SF 4 MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry(Foundations) Oil SF 04200 Unit Masonry(Basement Walls) 023 SF 04200 Unit Masonry(Exterior walls,CMU) 041 SF 04200 Unit Masonry(Exterior walls,Brick) 041 SF 04200 Unit Masonry(Interior,Bearing) 031 SF 04200 Unit Masonry(Interior Partitions) 061 SF 04200 Unit Masonry(Sitework) 121 SF 04200 Unit Masonry(Sitework paving) 121 SF 04200 Unit Masonry(Interior paving) 062 SF 04400 Stone(Exterior walls) 041 SFALF 04400 Stone(Interior Walk) 061 SF 04400 Stone(Interior Floors) 062 SF 04400 Stone(Sitework Walk) 121 SFAF 04400 Stone(Sitework Paving) 121 SF 7 7 04435 lCast Stone nor Walk 1 041 1 1SF/LF1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES-Page 1 of 4 Pages APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT-01027 2980 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 SCHEDULE A. The following 4 pages comprise the "format" for the Schedule of Values to be used. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-6 2980 H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial " Completion, submit an Application for Payment; this application shall reflect any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the work. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include: 1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals . 2 . Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements . 3 . Test/adjust/balance records . 4. Maintenance instructions . 5. Meter readings . 6. Start-up performance reports . 7 . Change-over information related to Owner' s occupancy, use, operation and maintenance. 8. Final cleaning. 9 . Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety. 10 . Advice on shifting insurance coverages . 11. Final progress photographs . 12 . List of incomplete work, recognized as exceptions to Architect ' s Certificate of Substantial Completion. I . Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following: 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements . 2 . Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3 . Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. 4. Assurance that work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue delay. 5. Transmittal of required project construction records to Owner. 6. Certified property survey. 7. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid. 8. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 9. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements . 10 . Change of door locks to Owner's access. 11. Submittal of an electronic copy of the Schedule(s) of Values . Submittal shall be in Macintosh Excel or IBM-compatible Excel or Lotus 1-2-3 format. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) -� APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-5 2980 E. Transmittal : Submit 3 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours; one copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required. Submit one electronic copy in Macintosh Excel or IBM-compatible Excel or Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet . 1. Transmit the above with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect . F. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment submit waivers of mechanics liens from subcontractors or sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on each item. 2 . When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers . 3 . The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the work must submit waivers . 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of work covered by the application who could lawfully be entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms : Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. G. Initial application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors . 2 . List of principal supplies and fabricators. 3 . Schedule of Values . 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final) . 5. Schedule of principal products. 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final) . 8. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 9. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the work. 12 . Initial progress report . 13 . Report of pre-construction meeting. 14 . Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. A APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-4 2980 for Payment . Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin. 1 . General Conditions, Division One Costs and Contractor' s Overhead and Fee shall appear on the Schedule of Values as separate line items . E. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the contract sum. Modify the Schedule of Values to reflect changes made to affected line items, aggregating the new Contract Sum. The Schedule of Values shall list each change order as a separate line item. 1. List breakdown of each change order on a separate sheet . Show breakdown of change order, referenced back to each line item affected in the Schedule of Values by Uniformat Code. 1. 03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. 1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements . B. Payment Application Times : Each progress payment date is as indicated in the Agreement . The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement . C. Payment Application Forms : Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for Application for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 2 . Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. ?3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-3 2980 2 . Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Generic name. b. Related Specification Section. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that have affected value. g. Dollar value. h. Percentage of contract sum to the nearest one hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3 . Provide a breakdown of the contract sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports . Provide Schedules of Values as follows : a. New Work (each building separately) . b. Alteration Work in Existing Building (each building separately) . c. Further, break down New Work and Alterations Work into "Building" (or each Building) and "Site. " Exclude from "Building" all work outside the building such as site improvements, grading, site utilities, lighting, mechanical and other work not directly attributed to the square footage of the building. d. Tie-Ins : For connecting new work to the existing, such as connecting utilities, tunnels, links, covered walks and bridges, and building interfaces. 4. Break down General Conditions and Division 1 costs proportionately assigning them to each Schedule. 5. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the contract sum. 6. For each part of the work where an Application for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the work. C. Unit Cost Allowances : Show line item value of unit cost allowances as a product of unit cost times measured quantity as estimated from the best indication in the Contract Documents. D. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to the extent that such items will be listed individually in Applications APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-2 2980 SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor' s Applications for Payment . 1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor' s Construction Schedule, List of Subcontracts, and Submittal Schedule. 1 . 02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor 's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: a. Contractor's construction schedule. b. Application for Payment form. c. List of subcontractors . d. Schedule of allowances . e. Schedule of alternates . f. List of products . g. List of principal suppliers and fabricators . h. Schedule of submittals. 2 . Submit the Schedule of Values to the Owner and Architect at the earliest feasible date, but in no case later than 14 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment . 3 . Sub-Schedules : Where the work is separated into phases that require separately phased payments, provide sub-schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment . B. Format and Content : Use the attached format for the "Schedule of Values" as a guide to establish the headings and Uniformat Coding for the Schedule(s) of Values. 1. Identification: Include the following project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect . c. Project number. d. Contractor' s name and address. e. Date of submittal. ( 1 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-1 2980 3 . 03 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1 : Interior Signage. 1 . Include the sum of $80, 000 for the purchase and installation of interior and exterior signage. B. Allowance No. 2 : Vinyl Wall Covering: 1 . VWC-4 $15 . 00 per yard (material only) 2 . VWC-5 $15 . 00 per yard (material only) 3 . VWC-6 $15 . 00 per yard (material only) C. Allowance No. 3 : Large porcelain bodied tile. 1 . Include the cost of $300 per room to receive large porcelain bodied tile. D. Allowance No. 4 : "Motif" glass . 1. Include the cost of $200 per room for each of twenty (20) rooms to receive this glass type, indicated on the drawings as Type "M" . END OF SECTION ALLOWANCES 01020-3 2980 C. Purchase products and systems selected by the Architect from the designated supplier. 1 . 04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders . B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show the actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. 1 .05 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials to the manufacturer or supplier for credit to the Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1 . When requested by the Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner where it is not economically practical to return the material for credit . When directed by the Architect, deliver unused material to the Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is the Contractor' s responsibility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 . 01 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage or defects . 3 . 02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. ALLOWANCES 01020-2 2980 SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances . 1. Selected materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances . In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances . 2 . Unit-price allowances . 1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00700 - General Conditions of the Contract . B. Section 01300 - Submittals : Product delivery and installation dates . C. Individual Specifications Sections Listed Under Schedule of Allowances : Specification of products and installation under Allowances. D. Section 01400 - "Quality Control" specifies procedures governing the use of allowances for inspection and testing. 1. 03 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise the Architect of the date when the final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At the Architect 's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections . Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C�7 ALLOWANCES 01020-1 2980 1 . 04 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct work in stages as follows : °" 1 . New Building and Chiller Plant 2 . Phased Renovations (refer to Drawing D- 2 . 1 for renovation phasing. ) 1 . 05 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Contractor shall have limited use of premises and allow for owner and public use. B. Contractor shall have limited use of site in designated areas . 1 . Approach to site: from lower Elm Street, up Hospital Road 2 . Site storage areas : Area to the east of existing facility, exact extent and coordinated with Construction Manager. 3 . Restricted areas : Main Entrance and all other parking areas not 1 . 06 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner' s operations . 1 . 07 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. The Owner will furnish equipment per the Equipment List included in this specification. Refer to the List for Contractor's responsibilities . as a result of his operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2 2980 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Project consists of an addition and renovations at the existing Cooley Dickinson Hospital . The addition is three (3) stories, including a below grade lower level . The renovations consist of a 2-phase renovation to the existing emergency and same day care departments . The work also includes an expansion to the existing chiller plant to house new equipment. The site is reworked to incorporate expanded parking and revised site circulation. 1 . Project Location: 30 Locust Street, Northampton, MA. 2 . Owner: Cooley Dickinson Hospital . B. Contract Documents, dated July 15, 1996 were prepared for the Project by Shepley Bulfinch Richardson And Abbott, 40 Broad Street, Boston, Massachusetts 02109 . C. The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract . 1 . 02 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Separate Contract : The Owner has awarded a separate contract for performance of certain construction operations at the site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. The separate contract includes the following: 1. Asbestos removal . B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. 1.03 FUTURE WORK A. Coordinate work in this contract with the following future work: 1. Owner equipment installation, Owner communications and security installation. SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-1 0 W � LL W ^ � r •O C1. y N O C f N C d O N d M M Z O d C C U Cl) U) Q M M M C6 M M ( J J �] � � a: aaaa a aJ. a a a a N M N N It M N C7 M N N M M M M M M M N m m m m m m m m o o m m N m m m o 0 0 o m m m m m m m m m m CDUcntn0U cno > (.5 cn (n C-) U) W m > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > J p to WT r M M M r T r M T M T M MLO r T LO S o F- F- F- F- > F- F- F- F- F- I- F- F- F- N F- F- ~ v_ Q F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- FL o a U a a = U a a a U a U a a a a r V a U U U U U U U U U LL U > U U u> > U U U > U > U U V U U U > > > > > > > > >Cl) U M QJ tf) N N N N M M Nqt N mot' N N z a N N N N N N to N w C � � � � J Z _ F- 1- F- F- F- F- a a F- F- F- F- F- F- H ti V U U U U Q F- FU - U U a U U U U U U a (L CL a FUU U aaaaaa » aaaaaao U Q Q Q Q Q Q Q UF- Q UF- a v H CO Q � Z U cn co to cc CL cc a a s a a w a x a N N J ¢ •. r r r (� T r r N N tnaa � aT � T � > a > aaa � r` � r� U? Oa7 -C7 aari. a. a. d > > awaaaa > � � > > w aaaa a 0o rn b o\ c z Cc Q m cc A c L fn CD U O p w L t m > O O Q V ¢ M w d L y_ N x o w a C C) a y U O N r N Uy x W ' O ~ O C . N N (0 j L >+ �` y Z Y toir ° m v � iir �' °-' `� 1° fx� W d C, in N C V) c, c °—' w m N N C V U z!-y p Q c rn rn �' m m m 60 o o O m c Q o rn a) «Y+ O � 0 nS m t 7 C 0 V 0 N 'C 'fl N -0 •` CD ` C id '0 to CD A= w � Q � w3 � J = Uino60XC`C > .°� u� wc~on > F- F- LD 101 N CM �qt r O v (O � M v v O T N M n 0 O O O O O O CA N O N r N N N M sN t N LA N CD N t\ N O z vv vo U C7 C7 C7 C7 c7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C'3 C7 C7 bC7 c) oac) oC7J (DC'3oC7aC'3 W N 0a W G1. ¢ o c 0 O � N C C) ` o m c N d U c0 O � O N N r N r � M M N M W C) N C) C) 2 c c c c 0 (1) U U) U) I( C/) N O Nt 1q T M GM M M (M J 1 a a °- a n il.. aa N N M M N M It N M N N m m m ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Cp ❑ m CO ❑ ❑ N UM U ❑� N N N M M O ❑ CO m m m m m ❑ O m O m m � cncnnUU m m CD U3: Ucn3: 3;� U3: 3: 0 5 co0cnCOw W m > > > >> > » » » » > » » > J 0 F N W M T Q 1 F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 = o F- Q Q F- 2 F- F- F- a F- Q F- F- F- F- F- > > F- F- F- F- F- F- > F- F- F- F- F- F- F- o a g a T a a U a U a a U a a = = a U a a a U = a a a a a U U V u U UF_ UU > > UU > vUcncnU > UUU > cnUUUUU » Cl) (L F- CC S U) O) N N M M r �t r ' M N '�t N N N N q - M N N N N N 1 1 , , I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Z � U H a H d d F- H F- H a a a F- a F- H H F- F- F- F- F- F- H d a F- F- F- F- F- U a a U U U U U a U U U U U U U U U U a U U U 00 LL U Q Q > > Q Q Q Q Q > Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q > Q Q Q Q Q « CD 3 w � U co c� co FFFin U J Q a d c0 c0 c0 c0 J Q > > a a a a u J N N N ¢ T T N T r M 1 1 r 1 1 c cn Co 1 cn Cl) cn Cl) CO cn Cl) CO CO cn CO U)Lf) 0 a > > � > > a > a > a > a > > aCLaa > a > aa > > > aaaa. m 0 rn � N z O 0 vQQ' c s = as c p cn ¢ ca/) «N L a) V a) O O (D x 0 '5 0 Cl) () a) LL _ ,r ~ ,Ui x W cm o a o e N � (D azi o vNi z °� rn 3 C7 t V a) > > o C7 c F- v� x v � v c a) o 1 0 0)) (L d v, ma —° � � a) 1 (D rn cm m m m L rn I l m N W 1 CA ' o o) (7 yto v) ? Co c = rn d rn p, c ca « « CD c) d �_ c LL aG 3 p 7 p '' N M :, fn l0 a) l0 l� �. :+ fA L p .Y (D « p « Q U > m m ig 2 m y N m U O Cl D U U y p p 41~ U v � N Rf c0 p p = O p O O F— m p p c0 O O X N O O p a) O p 3 0 X G cc CO c° � > aJ3: 5 nUcncf) n � aF- F- OfnW1) C6 � � UF- amW O CO 1� M CD O r N CO c0 f� CD O O r N M st U) cp N w O O r N M It to 0 f- CD 0 Q CO t0 CD cD t` r- r- I*- n n n n n O CO O CO OJ O co CD O CO O O Cn 0) 0) M M 0) M c09 W O C Z O M cO M Cl) M M M M M M c) M M M M M M M M M c) M M V) M 1 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 U C7 C7 C7 0 CD U' C7 0 C7 C7 C7 6 6 0 (7 0 ('3 C3 C7 U) 6 6 6 (4 6 (9 0 0 (9 (7 10 C9 (7 (D v) C O w `O > a w Q a� c o° a` ai Z 0 ro c o m � U O w N (p y r a F- ri z (1) w � c O U N Q M M M M T M M M M M M C6 U? J a J J a a as as a a a. a. a CL (L C? M co 'ct M M N M N M '* C'9 N N M M -* M N M M N N N N N N N N N y m m m m m m m V m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m o UUUUUU � c4Uc) UUUc ncnC) 000wooci) cn (j) (1) c15 cncn (1) c1 � W m > > > > > > > ap > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > J U > > Q N 1 W M T T M T T T M t T M T M T M M T T M T M T T M M M M M M M M CO T 1 1 11 1 1 11 U 1 L1 1 11 1 L1 . 11 1 1 11 L1 L1 1 11 L1 L1 0 > r r > F- F� F- F-�\ F- F- F- > F- F- F- r> �"' F- F� F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F— F- F- ~ 0 2 U U 2 U U d CL M (� d U 2 U d d U U 2 U d U U a n. C. n. d CL d CL CL CL Cl) u- co >> > > U = > U > w > UU >> > U » UUUUUUUUUU 2 CO c st N N "t N N V N It N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F- F- F- F- a F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- ►- H F- F- F- F- M U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U a. LL � aaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa ' v F JQ !nZ z cn cnzZzcn z coca w J CO CO co CO CO (O CO E- a as a a aaaan. a acC x 3 u2 z CL Co M T M T M 1 1 1 T N LO Lf) to to d d d to o M w to to In w In a 0 to o w to 0 In M to o m > OW 0 o. aaaL d. a » Ua > cLaaaL. n. a. ari. cL > ad. ari. ri cLcLo. ada as 00 o is o CT L L = _ N z ca ca m ' 0 C 0 a 9 = 2 = d O w a ca c C a C C C voi .. o 0 0 0 m o ca x x c c a) c = a ap v a °' � Cj z w m F- m o c °) 9 ' v C N c o U c� $ O d O o U n. accnna. cco m ° CO � COCLw 00 o ga0 � � a $ � eu � u- � - /yy S 1 1 1 1 1 a a \ m 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ` 1 O 1 1 M �+ 1 1 N � N ISM G m E E m -i ID 'o W� m E (D al E E m E -� N E WN - c°i '>< U .o `V a O aUi o .o o o to x o x ° x o o ca ° O o ., F- w F- 3acaF- co . F- uSoowu� F- w 3zwU0o3U3oo3 � c as Q Q O U-CCTO4 cm M m ° T c) o r N ch cn co n co rn ° N M qw LO Z c`i chi ci c`i cn � m LO to ° ° m cc m cn CJ M C7 1 M M M C7 M M M t� M M M M M M M M C7 C'3 C9 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 0 6 C7 6 C7 C9 (b C7 C7 C7 C7 6 C7 0' C'3 C7 in CN O CN Cr w N Q M '. 0 > a w c .L N N O C (d d C N O m N M F- z w 0 U g L M w M 0 M C? C? J _J J J J J J a s a m a a n n a a M M M CM N N N M M � N N N N N co N N N N N d N N N N M CM M N �t co cM N M N i i , , , , , i , , i , , , i , m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m CIO U U U c n [n (D U U w 0 0 I n w U w w w w w U w w w w 0 0 0 c4 U U U cn U W m > > > > > > > U > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > J W r r r M C7 M r N M M M M M M r M M Lh M M M M M M M M CM r T CM r S o F' > > F- F- F- > F- F- F- F- H F- F- F- F- F- F- > F- F- F- F- 2 2 2 > F- F- o U22MMm0 �iMMMMMM0MMMMM aan. a a = UUd0 V u. > cncnUUU > UcAUUUUU > UUUUUu� UUUU Ucn » U > N S cn M 't Nt N N N " � N N N N N N N N N N t � N N N w w w N �t N N C , , i i i , , , , , , Z _ F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- d F- F- Z Z Z F- U U U U U U U U U U U U U U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LL � aaaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaazzzaaaaaa H � a Z C -' m x a `O > a a a 3 , N r M c� waa ao. aad. aad. aammmM(L >> > mmmmmwaaa o b 00 0 N o z o (, c p ¢ c rn - m E m cm Cl) a m ccu ° �, (D w E ci � co m x o@ 2 m Co m m c o, c tM U O c c 0 m m E L� w O m c_ z m a� o Q � � � co nV o >. 6 = EL (D 0 x O cn da U Co a)� � > j � � _ cw 'cZ � w � � d 7U Z 0) m m U U m O t0 O O O O m D q y 3 m m m m > > ° U v p p E m a� Y E w R m N N O U Yp U p L p ` Y , i ►� ►`� m E V O U C p 'p m m 0 2 Z .O e p O � V O O o O p C O O O E O O E p O O p X A °C a F- F- 0wcoF- o0JJoa33aU -1 F- 000U WIZ 0OF- = cn -i w . w CD O l(CID.)10H Cl) et LO O r N CO n W O O r a a c0 n ao Of O T N M - to <O n CD O M Ln 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .- T r T r r T T T N N N N N N N N N N M M O Q z N N M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M C9 M M , , , , , , , , , , , , , U C'3 C'3 C7 C7 :7C7 C7C7C7C7C7C7C7C7C7C7C7C7C7C3U' C7 C7 C7 C3 C7 C7 C7C76 (3 v� °O W � N a w i Q V nr 0 C (V C rp. coO L _0 L(U r Z cw CL G O M CC) O Co co I� N � � ►� � � M C7 Ch O CD (� CO CD (� CD CO 1 CO CD CD co CO CD J J J _.I J a J J J J J J a a a a J J J a J J J a a aaaa an. aaan. (L n. a aaa M C9 C9 M M C9 N N N CO M C7 CO M M C7 Ch M M M N co co m C7 CM m co C7 co C7 Ch m m m m m m m m m m m m Cm m m CO CO CO m m m m m m m m m m m m 66 ca 0 0 0 0 0 0 0w (n UUU UUUUUUUUCDUUUUUUUUUUU W m > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > J O WM Cl) T T T T T T T T T T T M T T T T T T T T T T T t I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 = 0- > > F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- p F• F- F• F- F- F- F- F- F- !- F- F- F- !- F- F- F- F- F- 0 U = = U U U a s a U U U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U) �- > U U > > > U U U > > > > > > > > > > > U > > > > > > > > > > > C N V N st N N N N N N N N N N to N N N N Cn N N N N 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 F- F- F- y F- F- F- F- a a !- F- F- a a H F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U u. � ¢ aaaaaaa aaaa aaaa aaa aaaaaaaaa r _ Z Z Z Z Z Z M � E Z N m fA m N V M Crl co co M M 1 dci aaad U Mc� Uc+� (hMC� o. a aaan. a n a w w w w w w w w w w w w x 3 u a) W LO in to r� r-m ■. T T T T T T T 1 T T T T T T T T r T T T c 1 1 1 1 1 Ln d. a d. a d. d. d. d > ww awwww OZZ " '` aa aaaa ri. aww wwww o t ¢ N co 1 = z o O r N > z co 24 r r �+ r p w N 1�+ x mcc ? c cam v 00 z w m m V m rn r N rte— Co et cA c0 _U O f CO of Y Y C{f Y Y Y Y �- •' �-' O ZZZ o a a m m 0. •o o a o 0 o v 0 3 3 c c c c c c U z I m o l m d 2 CL m m a m c o ca a� -oo .. H H H ~ > > a o c 3 > ? v c E E a E E E E 3 v cv m r r tr/� v, p a) ~ m 'O o N c0 r0 O 0O (0 'o ca ly0 t N V 2 `8 C�0 % O 02 •5 ? d -co o d9 N m A a F- F- a a > O m c O U LL LL F- ti u. ti a ¢ Q U a to ¢ ¢ Cn U F- F- F- F- F- F- m 5 5 W O O r N M m CO r m m O Co O O r N M m CD f- m O O r N C7 d 1D CO I- .Wa ~� O m m ao m ao ao ao CA O r t` r- n ao ao ao m w w w O w 0 O O 0 0 O O O a m`Z O O O O O O O O O O O N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 U C7 C7 C7 C7 01010 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C'3 0 0 0 C7 C3 C7 C7 C3 a O 0 C7 C7 a a 0 CD a C7 0 0 CA y w N LL w a: c7 N C y N p O C y N � a) � C - O O (O , N M N a i > 4 Q z a) m a) N a) °c -6 pc cc E pc cc °c O0 aa)) a) ate) a9) a) a) a) co En U) U) v_ �n � aD � �t � 5 C i c*i cri M vi vi co RS M ai ri J J J J a d a J J a J J J a J J a: a aaa a a a a. a a a M M M M M M N N M M N N N M M mot' N M M M N � M M M M M M M M N M M M m CD m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m N U �..� UU �..� U (ncnUUCncncnc.� UUcn000cn (.� UUUUUUUU (nUUU W m > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > J D Wr r T T T M M r T M M M T T M M r T r M M T T T r T T T M T T 1 , 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 , 1 1 _ `p F- > F- F- F- Q F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- !- > F- > F- F- F- > F- F- F- F- Q F- F- F- F- F- = F- o U 2 0 0 0 g a o- 00 a a a U U M a M U U n. = 000 U g U U U a U U > cn » > U U >> > > cn 0 cn » U cn » » >> > U > > LA N N N N N N N It N N N N N d' st N N d' N O N LO N Ln LO > N W N G , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Z = F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- a F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- Z 1- m U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U O U U. � aaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa F- aZa a � z H cn O Z Z Z M N Z Z V U (7 V (n fn C 1 z Cl) fn �j � a co La Ln co w co cp a co co 3 co co ca t� a d_ a a d > d. a. d. w d. d. > d. d_ a v VJ VJ ¢ r a a- 6 T r T r r r 1 1 0 0 w LO M � LO � co ca � � � Ln � Ln Ln T a U n � d. Ln U d_ W a � v? LO CO LO Orr c� aad_ ad. a d. ad_ d. aaad- aad. aW aaWa CL d. ad- 0 00 C N ed O a Ln ¢ a) U P4 ca cd LO co N P4 p a) E '2 r r r r ¢ Cc A x w E E a) t \ Q U y M U > > C > > Z L7) cLS co > c '�-' a m c v v m v v x O . j N m N V p p c 7 p C . a) a) a) p ` a) a) U z S °,' cnHF- � o cTV) a ao cm '= � E aa � � � o � o oU) cwt O N p E E O C O Y a) 'D C p C �+ E i p 0 �. a) O :� N fl O a) i L4 "' C !_' �. �' Ut� ld N N d a C C C E t1 a) a U � C 'p C x X N 0 0 0 0 a)a) O O a) 'p X O O d O 'p O T O a) 0 0 0 7 E E N �7 p wF- � ww > U3: n3 or 03 acUF- wF- cnF- UHacnaU > = UUZawa a r N M Lo LO 1- M O O r N M qt LO c0 h O O r N M sf M W f� M O M sP LO W 1- W O S O v v v 0 v v v v LO LO LO Ln Ln LO Ln Ln Ln co co co co co co co m co r• r� r� n a z o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0�9� O ¢ C7 C7 C7 09 (7 C3 C'3 C9 C7 C7 C7 C'3 C7 C'3 C'3 C'3 t7 C7 (S (7 C7 (� C7 C7 C'3 C'3 C7 C7 C'3 C'3 C7 C7 C7 W t C N to cl w 'o a a� 0 c m d r_ N cc r- Q Q Q H W c c c c c c U Cal `aCoal g J o? M M CL (L a a a M M M M M M M M M M M M M M N N M M M N M M M M M C? M M M C? M y m m m m m m m m m m m m v m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m co U U U U U U U U U U U U M U c/J c 4 U U U c n U U U U U U U U U U U W m > > > > > > > > > > > > m > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > J U > > Q N WT T T T T T T T T N M T T T M T T T T T T T T T T T ` I I I t 1 I I I 1 I 1 I I 1 I I 1 1 I 1 I I 1 = 0 2 = _ F- F- F- F- !- F- > = F- F- F- U F- F- F- > F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- U o U U U U U U U = U U U T U a a = U U a. 00 U U U U U U U U U CO U. » » » > cn >> > j > U 0 > > U » » » » » > m 2 N Of It N N N N W N N d to N N N N �t N N N N N c I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N. 1 Z :m F- a F- F- F- a F- F- Z F- a F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- H F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- U U U U U U O U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U u. a aaa aaz < a a a a a aQaaaa < < < < < < aaa U FF JCl) < z Z z W W W fn Z E-I CO CO CO CO CO �O �D CO CO T a aaaa a aaa a a x 3 U CL ¢ C? OD CL u9 om cad. aw aaaaaaaaaaaUaaaaWaaaaaaaaaaaad E N cc C z CD � c 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m `� 'a +° c c o m cz Z c c c v 0 v a 00 cA ti 2 ca (1) W m w v c x C rm O I O L a a a CD cc c cr cc o c w m o m O 0 N — ftf O Z m 7 CO � � 0 0 O O m 41 N. O `O p 0 0 0 $ 0 0 m 0 Uco = a0- a011 wapac) 0 -1 -1 I .7�fC3i.1 = UJZ � = = cAUUcAW 3t cn at tLy O T N Cl) d' Cn CO 1l. CO O O T Cl) CA CO f- co O O r N Cl) lq c0 f- CO O O O N M to O T T T T T T T r T T N N N N N N N N N M M M M M M M M M a+ O U Z " ' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a a a 1 I 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 U U U U 0 C7 C7 C'3 C7 0 6 cb 6 6 6 6 6 C'3 C'3 C'3 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C'3 C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 C'3 C7 C7 C7 v� N 0 rn w > i a w Q o c N N O c f 41 c c O N � U C\ 3 z c gcc ca O c O � Q CV) M Co M M M M M J J J J J J J J IL as a aan. a J N a CV) C'7 C'7 M M M C9 N M M M M N N M M M N M N M M M M M M M m (} m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m N Cn W U U UUUUU m U U U U Cn m U U U m U m U U U U U U U U U W m > Z > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > J — D C W C� T T N M T T T T M M T T T M r M M M r r r N N M M � = p F- W F- S S F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- > > F- F- H > > F- F- F- F- F- 2 S S o a L) UUn. 000Uad0SS (LL) CL UUUUU V U °C > ¢ ¢ >> >>> > > CnCnU > Utncn » » > Ch cn 2 Of N � W W � d' N IT IT qT 'I N N i IF N i N d i 'I qT IT qT •V' 't w c i i i i i � i Z _ F- M-- F- F- F- Z Z F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- d. H F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- Z r v U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 ti � a aaaazzaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaa az O F a CA U J > a Q F C O r r r r 0 CA In CD M O O CD O CD CO CO CO OO aD CL CO CO CD M aD to CfJ O O OM a� aada a m C7 a wwwwn. aaaan. aaaaan- aaawn. aaaaaaa aa -CL M E 000 Y C N O c3 E z a ca a o En ca 0 U A x ¢ Y w> O d N r ' L E ¢ J — y cn c co ca °O cm o E cr- +L c m U o x uw " E a) E .0 � v LL CO CD C m O t L w Y C u V C6 Y L Q > J a. z V 0 0 o f ¢ o l a a -0 as •c v � d c o E 8 O O ._ a) O 0 i O E O O 7 V . a) O � O 'm CT 0 0 0 00 0 O U cr p O O O r- O E 0 z USA n to U C/) Cl) Cn U w J co w S Cn O h m . .IC x a N M I t!) co r- co to O r N M d to c0 t` ao O O r N t9 T J040) V to �O t` a0 O O N N N N N N N N M M M M M M M M M M `tt g It � w � Ln In In Ln �O CD m Z m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m U ai CM Cj � W rn pip U N a w •c a y N O C N c Q7 N 1� f� O cm C C � T r N Cn C O C co y 4 Lo a) LO m Ln a U) Cl) N Z N C a) W .2 T 0 r 0 O 0 D a) a a) n' a) U a) U co otf w 06 cA > (n O O M M M M 1 1 1 r J r r r r r r r a s a s a n. aaa dada C? C? - c? C7 !j M cM M (? M M M M M M M M M M M c'7 M N M N M M M M M M M M M N W m > U > U > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > U > > > Q = Fr 1 r 1 FT 1 r I 1 1 1 1 FF F 1 F 1 F *N W N N T C\l LL T r L; =r = a M T M T � T � r r r 0 r M T V 1 1 1 F E F- F W > > F- O T F 1 T o = U 0F = UUUUUUUUUa0a0UU U U L` » > >>n > � m > cco0 N > > = = c4 = m m m NC t N r cD VI c0 c0 CO N d N c0 I� I� I� c0 c0 V1 et N Z N F a a a F F F a a a a 0000000000000000000000 F F- F F F F= F- F' F- F- F F F F F 1 F- F- F 1- F F- 1 U U U U E V U a V a Q Q Q a a a a a a a a a a a a Q a a a a a Q Q a Q a z LO F C/) O U J a aaaa a M I I IT � M C cb 6 U U r- r- 00 U U r ♦b r r T r T T r r F+ m a a '; in a s co w a w a OP a ao a a a a a a 'n 5 co ao O o > o > U a a a wl>1 a ri. w w w d w d w w w w w w a U a a a 12 o �) Q 00 e O N co Q a) F cc a J m N cm = c� •. m E O c O E O Oyp � � m m U x w C u U O c c 0 C O N Q W E `° m � O OS y O3 J > O J J O —� W O N O atS 0 0 U ZZ a m a 1 L a s 1 1 1 1 L E L a) L O 7 m N m 0 0 ►. L I L r 1 F 1 O 1 1 m m a) a) O p V 00 O fA N N IC O O N 1 I «. .. > v .. > > > > o a, a co m Y c d U Q _ O E m O O O O i > > j d 0 U Ri O �. •t+ Ql � O ca O V O O O D U V V O O a) O N O NL O O d ® O O C p L O O S a JF W FQUFFQQQQU W wcncnWOinOmJamv� 3cnJUcnFFJ G4 S „Wj r I!Cli M to co r� co O O r N O r N M et 120 cO f� O Acr) O r N co cA V, t- co O O O O O O O O O O O O r r r O 0 0 0 0 0 r r r r N N/;J Z M M M M M M c9 M M M M N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N O 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I 1 U r r r r r r T T T r T Co CO Co CO CO m m m m m m m m m m m m m m m (/J M LO �r CD 0. W h cc c d 0 c O ao M M M O ao ao ao aD r T r r T T r T T r C O C (0 0) CCY) C O C CA C O C CA C O Cn C O C L ° _ LO LO Lf) a> Ln m LO ° Lri a> LO a> LO ° LO LO a> LO (1) U) T co V' V, zo U T (n y v' � V) cn V/ � VI y VI � V/ N � v' N co z m a� a� a� a� m a� a� a� a� w a) a�cm T 0 T O O O O T O r O T O T O r O T O O T O r 1 C 1 C C C C 1 C 1 C C I C 1 C C C C I J J r J J J J J J J J a a) a m CD m a) a 0) a m a 0) a a) a a� a� a� a a� a O a> N a) a) a> a) a) a) a) a) CD a> CD (1) U ad cnad (1) oad cnad m 06 Cl) 0 Cl) ad cnQcn U) 06cnad � O � O r O r 0 r M O r O r O r 0 O r O r J J J J J J .J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J J a. a. aa a. a. aC. C. C. C. a. a. aa. aC. aa a. aaa M (h M M M M M M C7 M C7 1 ' C9 N co N co N CO co C0 CO M M C9 co CM C0 CM M M M M N N 1 , 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 m U m U Cn m m m m m m U m U m m U m m [� m U m U m U m m m U m U in U m N M U M fn U (n U U U U M U M U U M U U U U f7 U M U M U U U M U M in M m W m > ' > > > > > > > ' > ' > > > > > > > > > > > > ' > > m m m m m m [n m m m m ..1 U U U U U U U U U U U > > > > > > > > > > > W LL N F- M r M N M N N N �j N r � T r r N N r N r N r N r N r M r M 2 O r r r T r r 11 I T r 1 T 1 T 1 T 1 r 1 11 /1 U 1 U r 1 1 I V 1 U r U r 1 U 1 > 1 > > > 1 > r \J �!■ O T T M U I.I. a. ��F- F- F- F- F- \/ a: U I U > U U U U U T U T U > T > > > U � U U U U U Cn U U U Cn U ' a. Cl) _ > _ > > > _ > _ > _ > > > > > > > = U U > CO > U >> U >> m m m Cl) LA ti > � st N N N N > It 3' 7 N N > �t 3: I-t N It d N It N C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Z - F- aF- � �- ►- F F �- aF- aF- aaF- F- F- aaaaF- aF- F- F- a � aF F �- �- U 1 0 0 0 U U U U 1 U 1 U U U U 1 U 1 0 0 0 U 1 U U U U LL � a � aaaaaaa � a � aF- aaa � a � aaaFL a � aaaa a a a a a a a a � z v LO Ln U (n U U J Q 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 Q > a. a- a_ aa. aa_ a aama. a. a C. aaa a ¢ rZ;5 r r M r L\7 T r M r M r M r M T M M E" c nnnUUU � F- Cn ch n U � Cb 6 n n O ° n � T � a 3 a a T � co n. a a T m a. T T C7 U > UC. C. n. » > > U > U > aUC. a > > U > U > U > a > U > UIL0M o 'ti 00 N z o O -j 0 Y ) U O T x w E $ aEi �' E $ E m E a°i o a-' (D m E m aci ° z .� r co LL- n r r co m E cd co co $ ;d co co \ N U a. aa ° (' E ca C. 0a. ca a $ as a. amm a a cmi I C O O O a- I a 1 a . L O I z r I a+ a1 C O 'C .0 � r LO �"' v co w N r 3 m y N Y f0 Y 'i RS N m N m N m a3 •- O y m E Q ca O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ° 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nY O O D O L t A Hal°- � U � c.> cnUa �- aF- IL NF- ml4aa. M- -jj 1-i LL -i UfnO n ao CA O r N CO et LO LO n co 0) O r N M "t LO V, n O CA O r UC:,)j tO LO n a0 CA O O O cocoronnnnnnnnnnacaoaoaoaoa� aoZ N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N M 1 1 1 . I 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 I . U T T r T r r r T T T r r T T T T T J r T r r T r T r r T T r N w C CL w CY v a� c a 0 C ca O CD OD co O Cn 4) n r n N W !� >. + p O O O O C 0) c C Q? 05 C N CD 0) C CY) C O LO N Cn Cn N .�.+ L( In N Lo N In T (V ( T T a) V r T Q) T a) T pCn N C0 co y Z CV O CV CU a) 0 :: ) N LLI Y C 1 T C C �' O C C T C T C 0 d aa) a d CD a �yU (2)i (1) CL CL ai a a) U 06 m °6 ad m CO ca > U cn 06 cn C-6 CO M co C? r M r M M T T M M M T r Cl) M T r T r r T r J •J _11 J J J J J J J J J J J aaaaaa a aaaa n- aaaa (L0- as aaaa Ch M M M C7 C'7 M 1 1 1 N N N M N M M C+M M M N M M M M C? M `j M M C7 N C7 M M M T m m m m U m m m U m m U m CD m m m m m m m U m m m m m 6 U U m m U m Cn cn !n M U (n U U U — ch U U (A U U U U U U e 5 U U U m U (.) C\7 ch U U eM U W m > > > m > > > ao > > ao > > > > > > > > > ao > > > > > > mm > > oo > -� > > > > > > > T F- N `T F N N F N N F- N F- N W M M CO M T L.L T T T LL T M T T T f T LL r r T C7 T T U T T L T 1 1 T I I T 1 1 1 1 r F(-� '/� U 1 F F- F- F- _U F- F• F F I 1 U 1 _ 8 CL a (L T F- a U T U �+ c T F U 0- U U U U U F- r v U v o- F- F- V d: U U U ' U U > ' > > : >1 U > U > > > > > U ' > > > U U U U 1 U m m m m Cl) CO m co In co m N >�R N N �t d 3 �r 'T '* N > v v U) 1 1 1 1 1 1 a 1 V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 �' 1 1 a F- F- F- w F- a F- F- F- F- F- F- F- a F- F- F- F- a F- F- F- F- a F a m UUU U U U U U U m U l U U U U U U U l U U U U 1 U U U U U u. � aQQQQQ Qaa > a � QaQQQaQVQaaa � a � QQQ � Q � 0 Q Q Q Q Q Q w co N U J Q 1 1 I 1 [E3•J" a 3 w U n n n h n h n a a n as as aaa aaa ¢ M �t M r 1A to r M M T Cl) T hhnF- UnnF- nNUF- (Nnnn +; nh � nn >UU � F- F- U � E2- U T T T 2 T T T T �••� r T r a a T T > a- 3: > a / a c9 a a a U a a U a w w U > w a a a w a a > U W a a > U U > U > m ¢ o °) •o CA N z 1 � � O �¢ F Z U o ¢ a in a 2 c x to c mE Z, a ?' � _ a c o D o = aci 3 a 3. yob z to Z5- - - (L ca � 0 .2 CL ° ° a aaY � din 0aaL = aaa cl,n U U �I. ' Q « C D �/�� 1 N O r , �' m (q c c c 0 c c y •o m o o o 0 0 0 c 0 0 0 0 o m o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 OOOF- QO F- U (AUF- a0Ow (n2: < CO 2Z2ZUaF- F- ZaF- a as a Q M It Cn (D h CC) O O .- N cr) CO (O h O O O r N M Cn CD n OD O O T N It Cn O a Q O M M M M M M M st d d d to to t0 to to m m tq m CO CO CD CO (CO) CO (D co W 0 LC ,Z N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 1 1 1 1 1 , 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 , 1 1 , I 1 1 1 1 , 1 1 , 1 1 , , , 1 1 1 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T r r r r T Q � rn pip W N > h W c a m 0 c m a� o` m o — O co N a) 'ca � LO T T w O 3 T Y «� U +� O q C :a 'n C C cfl U J U CD w CD CL can) co c� c? W M M N N N T N M M co co co N co N N co T r M M M CO N J w mommmmmomo ommmmmmmmm6Um0000mcomcom U cc U3: Ucncococn3; cn3: co m > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > > oo > > > > > > > ao C W > I > N r V LO LO , , (n �} r M M M N N M d '7 T r CO N CO CO r N N N N N T T N M , 1 T 1 ~ _ _ _ > H H F- 0 � cL F- 1- h- 1- o � c,� aaaaaa � F:. 0 = a � aaU •- aaaa a T _ o n. > UUUUUUa a > UUUUU > jUUUUU > cnUU j c U � U U U > 2 > > 2 Z = m m LL m m Z N N N N N w w It , � a � FL FL FL � � � � � a � FL � FL FL FL Ua. 000UUa a a0000UUUUUUUUaa UUUUU U � a aaaaa aazzQaaaaQaa � aaaaa a H a a un n T r N T T T T T T T r T x � n n n n T a � n n � n d V (n T T T r (n (n Cl) T T T T U T T T M U T T U T 1° a a � a > a a a a s a a a a 3 > a a a a > g > > > a a a a a a a > > > > a a a U U O a1 M Q °O c z Q E o M c O . c E, o � U CD o E w a m dM = J aC CO v� 0 w m v� ci cn x 0 t In c aci O o °� «. U x w c a� z w ca r o o I rn o c a ca L e CD N ' _a o o o m o s' rn o _Uca ,UU Uo m' o i acm a i «°°. ctp n z > p O m m m a p E � p U Q ca U � O O O N O O E O U p � ca N 0 0 u� � O a O wUa0 aUZUcZw cnaoU 0a. ZF u Cu�, W TTcu�; ljj-r M 't to c0 n CD O O T N M et W W n OD O O T N M et cn CO n iUc�31)j O T N 0 g O O O O O O O O T T r r r r T T r t- N N N N N N N N M M M Z N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N T 1 T T T T T T r T T r T T T r —1.r r T r T r r r T r T General Notes for Finish Schedule 1. Colors to be determined. See Palette 1 or 2. 2. See F-1.0 Finish Plan, Lower Level and corresponding elevations &/or details 3. See F-2.0 Finish Plan, Ground Floor New and corresponding elevations &/or details 4. See F-2.1 Finish Plan, Ground Floor Renovations and corresponding elevations &/or details 5. See F-3.0 Finish Plan,First Floor and corresponding elevations &/or details 6. See 5/A - 8.22 re.elevation at patient room entrance 7. See A- 8.20 re.ceramic wall file pattern(Patient room toilets only) 8. See A- re. ceramic floor file pattrns(Patient room toilets only) 9. See A- 8.20 re. patent room elevations 10. 11. 12. See A- 8.6 re. coffee shop ceramic tile elevation 13. Legend refers to only paint color,not finish 14. All metal door frames to be painted P-12,except as noted on elevations 15. 16. All GWB ceilings to be painted P-3 (unless otherwise noted) 17. All door frames of Maternity to be painted P-13 (unless otherwise noted- see note 6) 18. Coordinate ceramic and porcelain tile grout samples with architect S'1 ROOM FENISH SCHEDULE 00870-7 Finish Palette 2 Patient Room Floor Finish: VCT- 1 Primary VCT- 2 Secondary VCT- 3 Accent VCT-4 Accent Wall Base: VCB - 3 Wall Finish: VPS - 1 P- 10 WB -2 Plastic Laminate: PL- 9 Wood Finish: WF- 1 WF- 3 Fabrics: F- 2 F -4 Toilet Room Ceramic Wall Tile: CWT- 3 &4 Field CWT- 6 Accent CWT- 7 Custom decorative tile Ceramic Floor Tile: CFT- 1 Field CFT- 3 Accent Sheet Vinyl: SHV - 1 Wall Base: VCB - 3 Plastic Laminate: PL- 10 PL- Wall Border: LDR toilets only WB -2 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 00870-6 Finish Palette 1 Patient Room Floor Finish: VCT- 1 Primary VCT-2 Secondary VCT-4 Accent VCT-5 Accent Wall Base: VCB - 3 Wall Finish: VPS - 1 P- 9 WB - 1 Plastic Laminate: PL-9 Wood Finish: WF- 1 WF- 3 Fabrics: F- 2 F -4 Toilet Room Ceramic Wall Tile: CWT-3 &4 Field CWT-5 Accent CWT-7 Custom decorative tile Ceramic Floor Tile: CFT- 1 Field CFT-2 Accent Sheet Vinyl: SHV- 1 Wall Base: VCB -3 Plastic Laminate: PL- 10 PL- Wall Border. LDR toilets only WB - 1 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 00870-5 Fabrics: Ask F - 1 Vinyl Willowtex, Inc., 121T Junoir, Wisteria F - 2 Vinyl Allowance for material only $25/yd. F - 3 Fabric Architex, Kraftweave, Color: Handmade F- 4 Fabric Allowance for matrial only $55/yd. Miscellaneous: ACT- 1 Acoustical ceiling tile; 2 x 2,mineral fiberboard,exposed tee trim line 9/16" suspension system, tegular edge. ACT-2 Acoustical ceiling tile; 2 x 2,mineral fiberboard,exposed suspension, tegular edge. ACT-3 Acoustical ceiling tile; 2 x 2,vinyl-faced aluminum surfaced mineral fiberboard,exposed suspension, square edge. ACT-4 Acoustical ceiling tile; 2 x 2,mineral fiberboard, exposed suspension, square edge. ACT-5 Acoustical ceiling tile,2 x 2,white fiberglass nubby tweed w/foil attenuation backing, NRC .90-1.00, STC 24, exposed suspension, tegular edge. ACT-6 Acoustical ceiling tile; 2 x 4,mineral fiberboard,exposed suspension, square edge. ACT-7 Acoustical ceiling tile; 2 x 4,vinyl-faced alluminum surfaced mineral fiberboard,exposed suspension, square edge. BR Brick CMU Concrete block GR Granite CONC Concrete GL Glass GWB Gypsum wall board VP Veneer plaster H Hardener on concrete p Patch existing r Remove existing s Save existing ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 00870-4 P- 1 Paint Benjamin Moore, P- 2 Paint Benjamin Moore, P- 3 Paint Benjamin Moore, P -4 Paint Benjamin Moore, P - 5 Paint Benjamin Moore, P - 6 Paint Benjamin Moore, P - 7 Paint Benjamin Moore, P - 8 Paint Benjamin Moore, P - 9 Paint Benjamin Moore, P- 10 Paint Benjamin Moore, P- 11 Paint Benjamin Moore, P- 12 Paint Benjamin Moore, P- 13 Paint Benjamin Moore, P- 14 Paint Benjamin Moore, P- 15 Not used P- 16 Paint Benjamin Moore, P - 17 Paint Benjamin Moore, Plastic Laminate: PL- 1 Plastic laminate PL- 2 Plastic laminate Nevamar,Maize Shibori SH-2-2T PL- 3 Plastic laminate PL-4 Plastic laminate PL- 5 Plastic laminate PL- 6 Plastic laminate PL- 7 Plastic laminate PL- 8 Plastic laminate PL- 9 Plastic laminate Abet Laminati,Pattern:Fiber(color to be determined) PL- 10 Plastic laminate PL- 11 Plastic laminate PL- 12 Plastic laminate PL- 13 Plastic laminate PL- 14 Plastic laminate Nevamar,Blueberry Matrix,MR- 3-7T Wood Finish: (Control sample for general door finish required) MV- 1 Base maple finish for millwork, (color to match architect's sample,not a clear finish) MV-2 Accent maple finish for millwork (color to match architect's sample,not a clear finish) MV-3 General maple door finish CO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 00870-3 Wall Base and Transition Strips: ,0" WD Wood base VSB - 1 Straight vinyl wall base VSB - 2 Straight vinyl wall base VCB - 3 Cove vinyl wall base VCB -4 Cove vinyl wall base TS - 1 Porcelain tile to carpet, stainless edge TS - 2 CPT-1 to VCT TS - 3 CPT-1 to SHV-2 TS -4 CPT-2 to SHV-2 TS - 5 CPT-3 to SHV-3 Wall Finish: VPS - 1 Base textured coating Zolatone,43-16894 (water based) VPS - 2 Accent textured coating Zolatone,43-14827DS (water based) VPS - 3 Accent textured coating Zolatone,43-28591SS (water based) VWC- 1 Vinyl wall covering Vicretex, Belle Isle,Nantucket,BL21-21 VWC-2 Vinyl wall covering Vicretex, Belle Isle, color T.B.D. VWC- 3 Vinyl wall covering Crown Berger,RD863 Anaglypta Luxury Vinyl VWC -4 Vinyl wall covering Allowance for material only $ 15/yd. VWC-5 Vinyl wall covering Allowance for material only $ 15/yd. VWC -6 Vinyl wall covering Allowance for material only $ 15/yd. VWC-7 Vinyl wall covering J.M.Lynne, Fresco,Stoney Glade,FR-4716 CWT- 1 Ceramic wall file Dal Tile,D-1452 Cypress CWT-2 Ceramic wall tile Dal Tile,D-150 Honeycomb CWT- 3 Ceramic wall tile American Olean,57 Matte Linen CWT-4 Ceramic wall tile American Olean,53 Matte Chestnut CWT-5 Ceramic wall tile Dal Tile,D-128 Suntan CWT-6 Ceramic wall file Dal Tile,D-1467 Wood Violet CWT- 7 Custom decorative tile Allowance for material only$300 per room WB -1 Wall covering border Crown Berger,RD 690(to be painted,Palette 1) WB -2 Wall covering border Crown Berger,RD 690(to be painted,Palette 2) EP- 1 Epoxy paint EP- 2 Epoxy paint EP- 3 Epoxy paint EPC- 1 Fiberglass epoxy coating EPC- 2 Fiberglass epoxy coating ROOM FIlWISH SCHEDULE 00870-2 SECTION 00870 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Floor Finish: CPT- 1 Carpet tile Interface,Caribbean, 1660760000,3071 St. Thomas CPT- 2 Broadloom Interface,Pallisander, 16603667600, 3621 Bergamo CPT- 3 Broadloom Lees, Pebbleweave II, DF506, 225 Amberglow CPT-4 Broadloom accent Lees, Best Transitions, 301 Ash Green CPT- 5 Broadloom accent Lees, Best Transitions, 535 Lilac Shadows CPT- 6 Broadloom accent Lees, Best Transitions, 214 Honey Bear SHV- 1 Sheet vinyl Armstrong,Possibilities, 86065 Almond White SHV - 2 Sheet vinyl Armstrong, Possibilities, 86104 Neutral Stone SHV - 3 Sheet vinyl Armstrong, Possibilities, 86103 Mid Gray RS - 1 Rubber sheet Noraplan,NP Mega 1579, Desert Flower RT- 1 Rubber file Noraplan,NP Plus 1402, Cabana RT- 2 Rubber file Norament,925B Grano, 1592 Adobe RT- 3 Rubber file Norament, 825C 1910, 1350 Purple Fog VCT- 1 Vinyl composite tile Armstrong,Stonetex, 52128 Desert Dust VCT-2 Vinyl composite tile Armstrong, Stonetex,52127 Stone White VCT- 3 Vinyl composite file Armstrong, Stonetex, 52146 Shale Lavender VCT-4 Vinyl composite tile Armstrong, Stonetex, 52143 Sandstone Tan VCT-5 Vinyl composite tile Armstrong,Stonetex, 52145 Granite Rose VCT-6 Slip resistant tile Armstrong,Step Master, 50703 Granite PT- 1 Porcelain tile Cerim Flor-Gres, Livingstone "Grigio", 11223 (12"x 12") PT-2 Porcelain file Cerim Flor-Gres,Chromtech Pietre Naturali "Argoat", 8806(12"xl2") PT-2a Porcelain file Cerim Flor-Gres,Chromtech Pietre Naturali "Argoat", 8882(6"x6"-40%pattern mix) CFT- 1 Ceramic floor tile American Olean,AO3 Chestnut CFT- 2 Ceramic floor tile American Olean,AO7 Linen RES Resinous flooring MAT Entrance mat ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 00870- 1 2980 SECTION 00870 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 . 01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The following nineteen (19) pages comprise the Room Finish Schedule for this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 00870-0 2980 MG-3 .0 First Floor Medical Gas Plan - New MG-4. 0 Medical Gas Schedules and Details END OF SECTION LIST OF DRAWINGS 00860-5 2980 H-5.1 Chilled and Condenser Water Flow Diagram H-5 .2 Steam, Condensate and Hot Water Flow Diagrams H-5 .3 Sections H-6. 0 HVAC Schedules and Legends H-6.1 HVAC Schedules H-7 . 0 HVAC Details H-7 . 1 HVAC Details H-7 .2 HVAC Details H-8 . 0 Chiller Plant - Mechanical Plan ELECTRICAL E-1 . 0 Lower Level Electrical Lighting Plan - New E-1 .1 Lower Level Electrical Power Plan - New E-1 .2 Lower Level Electrical Floor Plan - OP Area E-2 . 0 Ground Floor Electrical Lighting Plan - New E-2 .1 Ground Floor Electrical Power Plan - New E-2 .2 Ground Floor Electrical Lighting Plan - Renovations E-2 .3 Ground Floor Electrical Power Plan - Renovations E-3 .0 First Floor Electrical Lighting Plan - New E-3 .1 First Floor Electrical Power Plan - New E-4 .0 Electrical Part Plans E-4 .1 Electrical Schedules, Notes and Legend E-4 .2 Electrical Schedules E-4 .3 Power Riser Diagram - Electrical E-5 . 0 Chiller Plant - Electrical Plan E-5 .1 Chiller Plant Part Plan, Schedules and Risers ME-1 .0 Seismic Sheet ME-2 . 0 Seismic Sheet ME-3 .0 Mechanical/Electrical and Medical Equipment Schedules PLUMBING / FIRE PROTECTION PD-1 .0 Ground Level Plumbing / Fire Protection Plan - Demolition P-1.0 Lower Level Plumbing and Fire Protection Plan - New P-1.1 Lower Level Plumbing and Fire Protection Plan - OP Area P-1 .2 Lower Level Plumbing and Fire Protection Plan - East Wing P-2 . 0 Ground Floor Plumbing and Fire Protection Plan - New P-2 .1 Ground Floor Plumbing and Fire Protection Plan - Reno P-3 .0 First Floor Plumbing and Fire Protection Plan - New P-4.0 Plumbing and Fire Protection Risers P-4.1 Plumbing Schedules P-4.2 Plumbing Symbols List and Details MG-1 .0 Lower Level Medical Gas Floor Plan - New MG-1.1 Lower Level Medical Gas Floor Plan - OP Area MG-1.2 Lower Level Medical Gas Floor Plan - East Wing MG-2 . 0 Ground Floor Medical Gas Plan - New MG-2 .1 Ground Floor Medical Gas Plan - Renovations LIST OF DRAWINGS 00860-4 2980 A-9 .2 Interior Elevations - Arcade A-9 .3 Interior Elevations - Arcade A-9 .4 Interior Details A-9 .5 Interior Details A-9 .9 Typical Casework Elevations A-9 .10 Typical Casework and Millwork Details A-9 .11 Typical Casework and Millwork Details A-9 .12 Typical Interior Details A-9 .13 Typical Interior Details A-9 .20 Door Types / Details A-10 .0 Power Plant Plans and Elevations A-10.1 Power Plant Sections and Details F-1.0 Lower Level Finish Plan F-2 .0 Ground Floor Finish Plan - New F-2 .1 Ground Floor Finish Plan - Renovations F-3 .0 First Floor Finish Plan - New STRUCTURAL S-0.1 General Notes and Typical Details S-0 .2 Typical Details S-0 .3 Typical Details S-1.0 Lower Level and Foundation Plan S-2 .0 Ground Floor Framing Plan - New S-2 .1 Ground Floor Plan - Renovations S-3 .0 First Floor Framing Plan - New S-3 .1 First Floor Plan - Renovations S-4.0 Roof Plan - New S-5.0 Plant Room Plan and Details S-6. 0 Cooling Tower Support Plan and Details S-7 .0 Sections S-8.0 Sections S-9 .0 Sections S-10 .0 Frame Elevations S-11.0 Column Schedule MECHANICAL H-1.0 Lower Level HVAC Floor Plan - New H-1 .1 Lower Level HVAC Piping Floor Plan - New H-1.2 Lower Level Mechanical Room HVAC Plan - New H-1.3 Lower Level HVAC Piping Floor Plan - Mechanical Room H-1.4 Lower Level HVAC Piping Floor Plan - Renovations H-1.5 Lower Level HVAC Floor Plan - Renovations H-2 .0 Ground Floor HVAC Floor Plan - New H-2 .1 Ground Floor HVAC Piping Floor Plan - New H-2 .2 Ground Floor HVAC Floor Plan - Renovations H-2 .3 Ground Floor HVAC Piping Floor Plan - Renovations H-3 .0 First Floor HVAC Floor Plan - New H-3 .1 First Floor HVAC Piping Floor Plan - New H-4 .0 Roof HVAC Plan - New H-5.0 Air Riser Diagrams 35 LIST OF DRAWINGS 00860-3 2980 A-2 .4 Ground Floor Detail Plan - Renovation - Emergency A-2 .5 Ground Floor Detail Plan - Renovation - SDC A-2 . 6 Ground Floor Detail Plan - Renovation - SDC A-3 . 0 First Floor Plan - New A-3 . OR First Floor Plan - Reflected Ceiling Plan - New A-3 .3 First Floor Detail Plan - New A-3 .4 First Floor Detail Plan - New A-4 . 0 Roof Plan - New A-5 .0 Elevations - East and South A-5 .1 Elevations - North and West A-6 .0 Typical Wall Sections A-6.1 Typical Wall Sections A-6.2 Typical Wall Sections A-6 .3 Typical Wall Sections - Interface A-6 .4 Typical Wall Sections - Interface A-6 .10 Exterior Plan Details A-6 .11 Exterior Section Details A-6 . 12 Plan Details - Interface A-6 .13 Exterior Details - Interface A-6.20 Window Schedule and Entrance Plans/Elevations A-6.21 Window Details A-7 .0 Stair Plans and Sections A-7 .1 Stair Details A-7 .2 Stair No.2 Details A-7 .3 Elevator Plan and Sections A-8 .0 Interior Elevations - Mounting Heights A-8 .1 Lower Level Interior Elevations A-8 .2 Lower Level TInyteerior Elevations A T A-8 .5 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - New A-8 . 6 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - New A-8 .7 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - New A-8 .8 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - New A-8 .9 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - New A-8 .10 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - New A-8 .11 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - SDC A-8 .12 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - SDC A-8 .13 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - SDC A 8 .1:4 or-et3;;d €iAer- jpatAriar BloZciatinQa - gnr A-8.15 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - ED A-8 .16 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - ED A-8.17 Ground Floor Interior Elevations - ED A-8.20 First Floor Elevations A-8 .21 First Floor Elevations A-8.22 First Floor Elevations A-8.23 First Floor Elevations A-9 .0 Partition Types A-9 .1 Partition Details LIST OF DRAWINGS 00860-2 2980 SECTION 00860 LIST OF DRAWINGS A. The following comprises the List of Drawings for this project : Cover Sheet SITE PLANS LO .01 Existing Conditions L1. 01 Layout Plan L1. 02 Grading/Sediment- Erosion Control Plan L1 . 03 Planting Plan L1. 04 Plan Details L1 .05 Signage and Striping Plan L2 . 01 Site Details L2 .02 Site Details L2 . 03 Site Details SITE UTILITIES DSU-1 .0 Storm Drainage and Site Utilities Demolition Plan SU-1 .1 Storm Drainage, Sanitary, Sewer, Gas and Water Services Site Plan SU-1 .2 Electric, Telephone Services and Site Lighting Plan SU-2 . 0 Site Utilities Details SU-2 .1 Site Utilities Details DEMOLITION PLANS D-1 . 0 Lower Level Demolition Plan D-2 .0 Ground Floor Demolition Plan D-2 .1 Ground Floor Demolition Plan D-3 .0 First Floor Demolition Plan ARCHITECTURAL A-1. 0 Lower Level Plan - New A-1 .OR Lower Level Reflected Ceiling Plan - New A-1.1 Lower Level Detail Plan - New A-1.2 Lower Level Detail Plan - New A-1.3 Lower Level Detail Plan - New A-2 .0 Ground Floor Plan - New A-2 .OR Ground Floor Plan - Reflected Ceiling Plan - New A-2 .1 Ground Floor Plan - Renovations A-2 .1R Ground Floor Plan - Reflected Ceiling Plan - Renovations A-2 .2 Ground Floor Detail Plan - New A-2 .3 Ground Floor Detail Plan - New 31 LIST OF DRAWINGS 00860-1 2980 this Contract unless it is specifically indicated in the Contract Documents that such Work is to be done by others . In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among '" the Contract Documents, the Documents shall be interpreted on the basis of the following priorities : Highest Priority: Modifications Second Priority: Agreement Third Priority: Addenda - later date to take precedence Fourth Priority: General Requirements - Division 1 Fifth Priority: Supplementary Conditions Sixth Priority: General Conditions Seventh Priority: Drawings and Specifications In case of conflicts between Drawings and specifications, or within either the Drawings or specifications, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and materials unless otherwise directed by written Addendum or Change Order to the Contract . " E. Add the following to subparagraph 1 .2 .4 : "The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall refer to all of the Drawings, including those showing primarily the Work of the mechanical, electrical and other specialized trades, and to all of the Sections of the Specifications, and shall perform all Work reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the indicated results . " F. Add the following to subparagraph 1.2 .5 : "If the Agreement is a Guaranteed Maximum Price agreement, the words "Guaranteed Maximum Price" are substituted throughout A201 and these Supplementary Conditions for "Contract Sum, " and any reference to costs to be borne by the Contractor (or Work to be carried out at the Contractor' s expense) shall be interpreted as stating that there shall be no adjustment of the Guaranteed Maximum Price as a result of such costs, and the Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Owner on account of such costs only if and to the extent provided in the Agreement. " G. Add new subparagraphs 1.2 . 6 through 1.2 .12 as follows: 1 .2 . 6 All indications or notations which apply to one of a number of similar situations, materials or processes shall be deemed to apply to all such situations, materials or processes wherever they appear in the Work, except where a contrary result is clearly indicated by the Contract Documents . SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-2 ( C VYv " L_ .7 +.r +° r s.re..i r r .: ..Itiv r �^=- �: L.)IV V l i L L) w L L L. 59 P2n v t,D 15.CO 2980 DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS THE GENERAL CONDITIONS The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, " AIA Document A201, Fourteenth Edition (1987) , Articles 1 through 14 inclusive, is a part of this Contract . THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, delete and/or add to the General Conditions. Where any Article, Paragraph or sub-paragraph in the General Conditions is supplemented by one of the following paragraphs, the provisions of such Article, Paragraph, or s: b-paragraph shall remain in effect and the supplemental provisions shall be considered as added thereto. Where any Article, Paragraph, or sub-paragraph in the General Conditions is amended, voided or superseded by any of the following paragraphs, the provisions of such Article, Paragraph or sub-paragraph not so amended, voided, or superseded shall remain in effect . ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Change the fourth sentence of subparagraph 1 .1 .2 to read: "Except as provided in Paragraph 3 .18, nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be construed to create any contractual relationship (1) between the Architect and the Contractor, (2) between the Owner or the Architect and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. " B. Delete the fifth sentence of subparagraph 1.1 .2 . C. Add to the end of the first sentence of subparagraph 1 .2 .1: "A copy of the signed set shall be deposited with the Architect. " D. Add the following at the end of subparagraph 1.2 .3 : "All Work mentioned or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be performed by the Contractor as part of SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-1 tify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the the case may be,shall be certified by the Architect,upon appli- Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, termi- cation, and this obligation for payment shall survive termina- �a nate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any tion of the Contract. prior rights of the surety: 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equip- FOR CONVENIENCE ment,tools,and construction equipment and machin- 14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in ery thereon owned by the Contractor; writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Para- part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. graph 5.4; and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the 14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of Owner may deem expedient. performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased cost of performance, caused by suspension, delay or interrup- 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the tion. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is •1 that performance is, was or would have been so sus finished. pended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Archi- another provision of this Contract. tect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee. Printed on Recycled Paper AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 24 A201-1987 AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Sub- ARTICLE 14 paragraph 13.5.3. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR by the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and is stopped for a period of 30 days through no act or fault of the expenses. Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval of the Work under contract with the Contractor,for any of the shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be following reasons: secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public author- Architect. ity having jurisdiction; 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect emergency, making material unavailable; will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for of testing. Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Con- Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable made payment on a Certificate for Payment within delay in the Work. the time stated in the Contract Documents; .4 if repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions by the 13.6 INTEREST Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total num- 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Docu- ber of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in ments shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such any 365-day period, whichever is less; or rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the absence .5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable where the Project is located. evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and LIMITATION PERIOD Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment .1 Before Substantial Completion.As to acts or failures and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substan- damages. tial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations 14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events agents or employees or any other persons performing portions not later than such date of Substantial Completion; of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certifi- Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations Bate for Payment.As to acts or failures to act occur- under the Contract Documents with respect to matters impor- ring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial tant to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certifi- seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Cate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner shall commence to run and any alleged cause of as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE events not later than the date of issuance of the final 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Certificate for Payment; and Contractor: .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issu- enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; ance of the final Certificate for Payment, any appli- .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials cable statute of limitations shall commence to run and or labor in accordance with the respective agreements any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; accrued in any and all events not later than the date of .3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances,or rules, reg- any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to ulations or orders of a public authority having juris- any warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5,the date diction; or of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2,or the .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision date of actual commission of any other act or failure of the Contract Documents. to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon or Owner, whichever occurs last. certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to jus- AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20(X16 A201-1987 23 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. for commencement of warranties established under Sub- ARTICLE 13 paragraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,any of the Work is found MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after 13.1 GOVERNING LAW receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place Owner has previously given the Contractor a written accep- where the Project is located. tance of such condition. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substan- 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind them- tial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This selves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representa- obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive accep- tives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, tance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect Contract.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after dis- to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Con- covery of the condition. tract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of either party attempts to make such an assignment without such the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the for all obligations under the Contract. Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accor- 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly dance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reason- the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it able time fixed by written notice from the Architect,the Owner was intended,or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at mail to the last business address known to the party giving the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not pay costs notice. of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof,after deducting 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu- costs and damages that should have been bome by the Con- ments and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in tractor,including compensation for the Architect's services and addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payments Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, Owner. except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con- Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordi- tract Documents. nances,rules,regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless other- 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be con- Rise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for strued to establish a period of limitation with respect to other such tests,inspections and approvals with an independent test- obligations which the Contractor might have under the Con- ing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the tract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec- relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply tions are to be made so the Architect may observe such proce- with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, dures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced approvals which do not become requirements until after bids to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Con- are received or negotiations concluded. tractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require addi- tional testing, inspection or approval not included under Sub- 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in paragraph 13.5.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and cor- for such additional testing,inspection or approval by an entity rection, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections whether or not final payment has been made. are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. AIA DOCUMENT A201 -GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION-FOURTEENTH EDITION 22 A201-1987 AIA® -©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and insures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adja- settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest cent to the site by property insurance under policies separate shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment prop- to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection be erty insurance is to be provided on the completed Project made,arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 4.5. through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Proj- The Owner as fiduciary shall,in that case,make settlement with ect during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all insurers in accordance with directions of such arbitrators. If rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11.3.7 for distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, damages caused by fire or other perils covered by this separate the arbitrators will direct such distribution. property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or com- 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall panies providing property insurance have consented to such file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.3. Each Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, defini- consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, tions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation,lapse or cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior writ- reduction of insurance. ten notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contrac- waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their subcon- for to furnish bonds covering faithful performance er the Con- tractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the tract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stithe,ted other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate Cont in bidding requirements or specifically required in the contractors described in Article 6, if any,and any of their sub- Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. contractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obliga property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.3 or Lions arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate ARTICLE 12 contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontrac- tors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them, UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enum- erated herein.The policies shall provide such waivers of subro- 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the gation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that per- the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the son or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's observation and be contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity Contract Time. had an insurable interest in the properly damaged. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the 11.3.6 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncover- clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay ing and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs where legally required for validity,shall require Subcontractors unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for manner. payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK as fiduciary If required in writing a party in interest, the Owner 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after fiduciary. he Owner shall de Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed rY posit in a separate account pro- or completed. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting ceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accor- such rejected Work, including additional testing dance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, g g and inspec- or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the tions and compensation for the Architect's services and procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.5. If after such expenses made necessary thereby. loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of dam- 12.2.2 If,within one year after the date of Substantial Comple- j aged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order. tion of the Work or designated portion thereof,or after the date AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 21 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. .2 claims for damages because of hodily injure, occupa- other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property tional sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's required by this Paragraph 1 1.3 to be covered, whichever is employees; earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the ^04 *, or disease,or death of any person other than the Con- Work. tractor's employees; 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an all-risk policy form .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage liability coverage which are sustained(1)by a person and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false- employment of such person by the Contractor,or(2) work, temporary buildings and debris removal including by another person; demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for because of injury to or destruction of tangible prop- Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such erty, including loss of use resulting therefrom; insured loss. Coverage for other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of a person or property damage arising out of owner- 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such prop- ship, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and erty insurance required by the Contract and with all of the .7 claims involving contractual liability insurance appli- coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so cable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of 3.18. the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub- 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 1 1.1.1 shall be subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Con- the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contrac- tract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is for is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to pur- greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or chase or maintain insurance as described above, without so claims-made basis, shall he maintained without interruption notifying the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all reason- from date of commencement of the Work until date of final able costs properly attributable thereto. payment and termination of any coverage required to be main- tained after final pa yment. 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deducti- bles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Docu- 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. such deductibles.If the Owner or insurer increases the required These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the Paragraph 1 1.1 shall contain a provision that coverages Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deduc- afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to tible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given the additional costs not covered because of such increased or to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are voluntary deductibles. If deductibles are not identified in the required to remain in force after final payment and are reason- Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay costs not covered ably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation because of deductibles. of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application 11,3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information merits,this property insurance shall coyer portions of the%Fork concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the value established in the approval,and also portions of the Work Contractor's information and belief. in transit. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11,3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. Optionally, required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self- specifically cover such insured objects during installation and protection against claims which may arise from operations until final acceptance by the Owner;this insurance shall include under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- for purchasing and maintaining this optional Owner's liability subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor insurance unless specifically required by the Contract shall be named insureds. Documents. 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use located, property insurance in the amount of the initial Con- of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to tract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the fire or other hazards however caused. entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without vol- 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for untary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be main- risks other than those described herein or for other special haz- tained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents ards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof arc beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change ., made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 20 A201-1987 AIAO •0198-THE AbIERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1135 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.V.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(KN)(i WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. ARTICLE 10 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful orders w PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,main- 10 2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required by taining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reason- connection with the performance of the Contract. able safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,promulgating 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated sites and utilities. biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in qualified personnel. fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlori- (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance nated biphenyl(PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the accordance with final determination by the Architect on which Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone Article 4. for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except 10.1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner 7 to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by poh chlorinated biphenyl(PCB). either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of[hem may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the 10.1.4 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Architect, Archi- addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. tect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses,includ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of ing but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB)and has superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage, in writing to the Owner and Architect. loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom,but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by 10.3 EMERGENCIES negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, anyone directly or 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, indirectly employed by the Owner or anyone for whose acts the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to pre- the Owner may be liable, regardless of whether or not such vent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensa- claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party tion or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of 4.3 and Article 7. indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Subparagraph 10.1.4. ARTICLE 11 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY INSURANCE AND BONDS 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LU\BILITY INSURANCE safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as be affected thereby; will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo- may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations rated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally under care, custody or control of the Contractor or liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontrac- Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by tors; and any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as liable: trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, .1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relo- disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts a G cation or replacement in the course of construction. wWch are applicable to the Work to be performed; I AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIAg •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.\C'.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(X106 A201-1987 19 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. nated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the such inspection and,when the Architect finds the Work accept- Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not able under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully per- included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance formed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contrac- Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, .* for shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Com- information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's pletion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the observations and inspections,the Work has been completed in Architect. The Contractor shall then submit a request for accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Docu- another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial ments and that the entire balance found to be due the Contrac- Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is for and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Sub- representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as stantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities, have been fulfilled. damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Con- percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to tract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Comple- for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be tion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be sub- responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner) mitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written accep- have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2)a certificate evidenc- tance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a written certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason reflecting adjustment in retainage,if any,for such Work or por- that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period tion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. required by the Contract Documents, (4)consent of surety, if 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE any, to final payment and(5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or par- receipts, releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests tially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contrac- in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcon- tor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the tractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the insurer as required under Subparagraph 11.3.1 1 and authorized Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs assigned to each of them for payments, retainage if any, secu- and reasonable attorneys' fees. rity,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insur- ance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for cor- 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final com- rection of the Work and commencement of warranties pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occu- Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment pancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agree- and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not fully com- ment between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is pleted or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Con- reached, by decision of the Architect. tract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that por- 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submit- Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area ted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and determine and record the condition of the Work. conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use constitute a waiver of claims.The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Sub- of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute accep- paragraph 4.3.5. tance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Sub- 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT contractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make the waiver described in Subparagraph 4.3.5. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 18 A201-1987 AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(X" WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contrac- 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are tor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly removed, certification will be made for amounts previously due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the withheld. Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Pavment will constitute a the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notif}- Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the the Architect. Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowl- upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount edge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accor- paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's por- dance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representa- tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is tions are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion results of subsequent tests and inspections,to minor deviations of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The payments to Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. issuance of a Certificate for Pavment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontrac- amount certified.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Pay- tor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of com- ment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) pletion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por- quality or quantit} of the Work, (2) reviewed construction tions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) 9,6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner except as may otherwise be required by law. to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or (4) made examination to ascertain hov or for what purpose the Contrac- 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner for has used money previously paid on account of the Contract similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. Sum. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment,or partial 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and Contract Documents. may withhold a Certificate for Pavment in whole or in part, to 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot date established in the Contract Documents the amount cer- agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a tified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the Con- Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect tractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Archi- Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the tect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the shut-down,delay and start-up,which shall be accomplished as Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: Provided in Article 7. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 1 defective Work not remedied; 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the .2 third part} claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat- Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is suffi- ing probable filing of such claims; ciently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended erly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or use. equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com- 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a por- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; tion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit 5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com- or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com- pleted within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid plete and correct items on the list.Failure to include an item on balance would not be adequate to cover actual or such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- -- .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance ments. Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will a-7 with the Contract Documents. make an inspection to determine whether the Work or desig- AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA' •©198'THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NE C YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(NNKI A201-1987 17 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK ARTICLE 9 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the 9,1 CONTRACT SUM intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,includ effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall.carry out such written ing authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the orders promptly. Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor TIME shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup- 8.1 DEFINITIONS ported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect, of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Con- shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applica- tract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. tions for Payment. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postponed 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for whom the Contractor is responsible. an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner 8.1.4 The term "dav" as used in the Contract Documents shall or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from mean calendar da} unless otherwise specifically defined. Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the 9.3.1.1 Such applications may include requests for payment on essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Con- account of changes in the Work which have been properly tractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet for performing the Work. included in Change Orders. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agree- 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for pay- ment or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely com- mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other date of insurance required by Article 1 I to be furnished by the reason. Contractor. The date of commencement of the Work shall not 9,3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incor- given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in poration in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, writing not less than five days or other agreed period before payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. mechanic's liens and other security interests. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with ade- shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with quate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's the Contract Time. title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME storage and transportation to the site for such materials and 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the equipment stored off the site. Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an 9,3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by other and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in reasonable time as the Architect may determine. favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3. provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work. 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of dam- 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT ages for delay by either part under other provisions of the 9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contract Documents. Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 16 A201-1 987 AIA° •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS.1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. ARTICLE 7 .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percent- CHANGES IN THE WORK age fee; or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.1 CHANGES 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execu- Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the tion of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in in the Construction Change Directive for determining the pro- this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. posed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contrac- the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change for indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith,includ- Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and ing adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec- minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect tive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. alone. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under appli- with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the cable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contrac- method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Archi- tor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the tect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a those performing the Work attributable to the change, includ- minor change in the Work. ing, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or allowance for overhead and profit.In such case,and also under subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally con- Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such templated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con- form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting struction Change Directive that application of such unit prices together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: equitably adjusted. .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS unemployment insurance,fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the compensation insurance; Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, includ- stating their agreement upon all of the following: ing cost of transportation, whether incorporated or .1 a change in the Work; consumed; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum,if .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of any; and hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if others; any. .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. Work; and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office person- 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES nel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order pre- pared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, 7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contrac- both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, for to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as con- within the general scope of the Contract consisting of addi- firmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits tions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Con- covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a tract Time being adjusted accordingly. change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change.absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 7,3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the adjustment in Contract Time or the method for determining it, 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based for determination. on one of the following methods: 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the deter- .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized mination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in and supported by sufficient substantiating data to per- the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agree- mit evaluation; ment upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or sub- immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execu- sequently agreed upon; tion of an appropriate Change Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA" •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(NN)6 A201.1987 15 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activi- 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required ties of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor for validity,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate con- to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Docu- tractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction sched- ments,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations ules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these.Docu- revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Stun ments,assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcon- deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. tract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so Owner until subsequently revised. that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all when the Owner performs construction or operations related rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the Contractor,remedies the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each same rights which apply cl the Contractor under the C hers, Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-sub- those stated the Contract, including, without excluding others, contractors. The Contractor shall make available to each pro- those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. posed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and condi- 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate con- tions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at tractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall their materials and equipment and performance of their activi- similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents ties and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con- available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS Documents. 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work i§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: execution or results upon construction or operations by the .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Para- proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to graph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcon- construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper tractor in writing; and execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or sepa- 2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, rate contractors'completed or partially completed construction if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work,except as to 5.4.2 If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, defects not then reasonably discoverable. the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted. 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsi- ARTICLE 6 ble therefor. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrong- fully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially com- OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be sub- operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, ject to the provisions of Paragraph 4.3 provided the separate and to award separate contracts in connection with other por- contractor has reciprocal obligations. tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially 6.2.6 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the similar to these including those portions related to insurance same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay for the Contractor in Paragraph 3.14. or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided else- 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP where in the Contract Documents. 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate con- 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different por- tractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surround- site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each ing area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Paragraph 3.15,the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost Owner-Contractor Agreement. among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 14 A201-1987 AIA° •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 4.5.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration. Claims between the 4.5.6 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A party who Owner and Contractor not resolved under Paragraph 4.4 shall, files a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the a if subject to arbitration under Subparagraph 4.5.1, be decided demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitra- by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry tion is permitted to be demanded.When a party fails to include Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association cur- a Claim through oversight, inadvertence or excusable neglect, rently in effect, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. or when a Claim has matured or been acquired subsequently, Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the arbitrator or arbitrators may permit amendment. the other party to the Agreement between the Owner and Con- tractor and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court 4.5.3 Contract Performance During Arbitration.During arbi- having jurisdiction thereof. [ration proceedings, the Owner and Contractor shall comply with Subparagraph 4.3.4. ARTICLE 5 4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded.Demand for arbi- tration of any Claim may not be made until the earlier of(1)the SUBCONTRACTORS date on which the Architect has rendered a final written deci- 5.1 DEFINITIONS sion on the Claim, (2)the tenth day after the parties have pre- sented evidence to the Architect or have been given reasonable 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered a final contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work written decision by that date, or (3) any of the five events at the site. The term "Subcontractor"is referred to throughout described in Subparagraph 4.3.2. the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a 4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1) Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcon- the decision n final but subject to arbitration and states e demand tractor. The term"Subcontractor" does not include a separate for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. made within 30 days after the date on which the party making 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in portion of the Work at the site.The term "Sub-subcontractor" the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized arbitration proceedings have been initiated,such decision may representative of the Sub-subcontractor. be entered as evidence,but shall not supersede arbitration pro- ceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER concerned. CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.5.1 and 4.5.4 and Clause the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as prac- 4.5.4.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable ticable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to time after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it be made the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or enti- after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings ties(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute fabricated to a special design)proposed for each principal por- of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. tion of the Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Con- tractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the 4.5.5 Limitation on Consolidation Or Joinder. No arbitration Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reason- the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants,except able objection. by written consent containing specific reference to the Agree- 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed per- ment and signed by the Architect,Owner,Contractor and any son or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made rea- other person or entity sought to be joined.No arbitration shall sonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contrac- made reasonable objection. for as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration.No person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an orig- reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or inal third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued.However,no involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change consent to arbitration of a dispute not described therein or with unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in a person or entity not named or described therein. The fore- submitting names as required. going agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person !0' to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under appli- or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes cable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. reasonable objection to such change. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA° •©198-THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 13 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final reso- substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the lution of a Claim including arbitration, unless otherwise agreed period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfor- and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the mance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make scheduled construction. payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party 4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The making of final to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner because of an act or omission of the other party,of any of the except those arising from: other party's employees or agents, or of others for whose acts .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances aris- such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or ing out of the Contract and unsettled; damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first of the Contract Documents; or observance. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. If a Claim for addi- 3 terms of special warranties required b} the Contract tional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted,it shall Documents. be filed as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.7 or 4.3.8. 4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If con- 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES ditions are encountered at the site which are(1)subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materi- 4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of ally from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which dif- Claim:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant, fer materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally (2)submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi- recognized as inherent in construction activities of the tect expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in character provided for in the Contract Documents,then notice part, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of by the observing party shall be given to the other party the Claim by the other party or(5)suggest a compromise. The promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Archi- any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. tect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's 4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved,the Architect will prepare or cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the obtain appropriate documentation. Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract 4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's preliminary the conditions at the site are not materially different from those response,take one or more of the following actions:(1)submit indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2) terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify modify the initial Claim or(3)notify the Architect that the initial the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claim stands. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given 4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the notice of the decision. If the Owner and Contractor cannot foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, requested by the Architect, the Architect will notify the parties the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial deter- in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within mination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph seven days, which decision shall be final and binding on the 4.4. parties but subject to arbitration. Upon expiration of such time 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to period, the Architect will render to the parties the Architect's make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,written notice written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. If there is a surety the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor's default, emergency endangering life or property arising under Para- the Architect may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and graph 10.3. If the Contractor believes additional cost is request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. involved for reasons including but not limited to(1)a written interpretation from the Architect,(2)an order by the Owner to 4.5 ARBITRATION stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault,(3)a writ- 4.5.1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration.Any ten order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Archi- controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, tect,(4)failure of payment by the Owner,(5)termination of the or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accor- Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the procedure established herein. award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be entered 4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time in any court having jurisdiction thereof, except controversies 4.3.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase or Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as in the Contract Time,written notice as provided herein shall be provided for in Subparagraph 4.3.5. Such controversies or given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost Claims upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4 shall be subject to case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. arbitration upon written demand of either party. Arbitration may be commenced when 45 days have passed after a Claim 4.3.8.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim has been referred to the Architect as provided in Paragraph 4.3 A10% for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data and no decision has been rendered. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 12 A201-1987 AIA° •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(NN)6 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. tractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or of any out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, other persons performing portions of the Work. responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administra- representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorpo- tion. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents rated in the Contract Documents. or when direct communications have been specially autho- 4,2,11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concern- rized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to commum- ing performance under and requirements of the Contract Cate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac- Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Commu- tor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made nications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within separate contractors shall be through the Owner. which interpretations required of the Architect shall be fur- 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of nished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur- review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will nish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. made for them. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementa- Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of tion of the intent of the Contract Documents,the Architect will drawings.When making such interpretations and decisions,the have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or completed. will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision rendered in good faith. made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi- 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic tect to the Contractor,Subcontractors,material and equipment effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons perform- Contract Documents. ing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the the parties seeking,as a matter of right,adjustment or interpre- limited purpose of checking for conformance with information tation of Contract terms,payment of money,extension of time given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Docu- or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The ments. The Architect's action will be taken with such reason- term "Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in ques- able promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the tion between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relat- activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the judgment to permit adequate review.Review of such submittals party making the Claim. is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and 4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or an error or omission by the Architect,shall be referred initially performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4.A deci- responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract sion by the Architect,as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4,shall Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submit- be required as a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation tals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under of a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as to all such Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not matters arising prior to the date final payment is due,regardless constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise of(1)whether such matters relate to execution and progress of specifically stated by the Architect,of any construction means, the Work or(2)the extent to which the Work has been com- methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's pleted. The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an shall not be a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation in assembly of which the item is a component. the event(1)the position of Architect is vacant,(2)the Architect 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construc- has not received evidence or has failed to render a decision within agreed time limits, (3) the Architect has failed to take the tion Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in action required under Subparagraph 4.4.4 within 30 days after e Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. the Claim is made, 4 45 have O days y passed after the Claim has 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final mechanic's lien. completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written warranties and related 4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be documents required by the Contract and assembled by the made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later.Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim made 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will pro- after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order vide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA" •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(NX)6 A201-1987 11 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of tect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall arising out of(1)the preparation or approval of maps,drawings, not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unrea- opinions,reports,surveys,Change Orders,designs or specifica- sonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the tions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or "ook Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or 3.15 CLEANING UP failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround- ing area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the ARTICLE 4 Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 4.1 ARCHITECT 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden- thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. tified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever representative. located. 4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unrea- The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of sonably withheld. patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, such defense or loss when a particular design,process or prod- the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Con- uct of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by tractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has rea- the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. son to believe that the required design,process or product is an 4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 infringement of a patent,the Contractor shall be responsible for shall be subject to arbitration. such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Archi- Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final tect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,includ- time to time during the correction period described in Para- ing but not limited to attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting graph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,dam- Owner.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the age, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible prop- unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance erty(other than the Work itself)including loss of use resulting with other provisions of the Contract. therefrom,but only to the extent caused in whole or in pan by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor, 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicat- indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed ing that the Work,when completed,will be in accordance with to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections described in this Paragraph 3.18. to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on- site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified Owner informed of progress of the Work,and will endeavor to under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,a guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnifica- 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and tion obligation under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not be limited by will not be responsible for construction means, methods, a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or techniques,sequences or procedures,or for safety precautions benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor and programs in connection with the Work, since these are under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 3.3. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract 3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge Ask 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect,the Archi- of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Con- AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 10 A201-1987 AIA° •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. .3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and to conform to the information given and the design concept other expenses contemplated for stated allowance expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. not in the allowances; .4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review,approve and submit to the the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall submittals required by the Contract Documents with reason- reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the able promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in allowances under Clause 3.8.2.2 and (2)2 changes he Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con- Contractor's in tractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.3. required by the Contract Documents may be returned without 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT action. 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten- 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Project site during performance of the Work. The superinten- Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submit- dent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given tal has been approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Con- accordance with approved submittals. tractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writ- ing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product written request in each case. Data, Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor represents 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or 3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Con- � ill do so, and has checked and coordinated the information tract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's contained within such submittals with the requirements of the information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. Work and of the Contract Documents. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practi- Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has cable execution of the Work. specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordi- relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Draw- nated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows ings, product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Archi- the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. tect's approval thereof. The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedules. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing sched or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner the Architect on previous submittals. one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in marked currently to record changes and selections made during the Contract Documents. construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod- 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria uct Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall of materials,systems or equipment is required by the Contract be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Archi- Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the tect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifi- 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES cations. 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and 3.13 USE OF SITE other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or areas permitted b law, ordinances, distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. P Y permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, per- materials or equipment. formance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its pans 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate fit together properly. materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the 3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar sub- Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or other- #W mittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their sub- wise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contrac- `� mittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for for shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA` •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEVf'YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 9 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND 3.5 WARRANTY FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be .00%, Contract Documents with each other and with information of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permit- furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and red by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsis- Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these require- tencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the ments, including substitutions not properly approved and Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Con- warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by tractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves abuse,modifications not executed by the Contractor,improper a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contrac- wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect, for shall assume appropriate responsibility for such perfor- the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind mince and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable and quality of materials and equipment. costs for correction. 3.6 TAXES 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and vcrify 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar field conditions and shall carefully compare such field mea taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Con- surements and conditions and other information known to the tractor which are legally enacted when bids arc received or Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or mereh. activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall scheduled to go into effect. be reported to the Architect at once. 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pur- 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, suant to Paragraph 3.12. the Contractor shall secure and pay-for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor and which are legally required when bids are received or nego- nations concluded. shall be solely responsible for and have control over construe tion means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Con- required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful tract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instruc- orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the tions concerning these matters. Work. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable and their agents and employees,and other persons performing laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and regula- portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. tions. However,if the Contractor observes that portions of the 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to per- Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and form the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's Modification. administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be con- Contractor. trary to laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of por- regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, bons of Work already performed under this Contract to deter- the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs. mine that such portions are in proper condition to receive sub- sequent Work. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,materials,equip- by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, persons or entities as the Owner may direct,but the Contractor heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services shall not be required to employ persons or entities against necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorpo- 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: rated or to he incorporated in the Work. .1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be 3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in the order among the Contractor's employees and other persons Work; carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit .2 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks materials and equipment delivered at the site and all assigned to them. required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 8 A201-1987 AIAS •©198"THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(NN)6 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and ments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited facilities. license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Draw- ings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the 2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work. this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet the Contractor will be furnished,free of charge,such copies of official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in con- Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for nection with this Project is not to be construed as publication execution of the Work. in derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved rights. 2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and respon- sibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those 1.4 CAPITALIZATION in respect to Article 6(Construction by Owner or by Separate 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include Contractors), Article 9(Payments and Completion)and Article those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of num- 1l (Insurance and Bonds). bered articles and identified references to Paragraphs,Subpara- 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK graphs and Clauses in the document or(3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents 1.5 INTERPRETATION as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents fre- Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner, quently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"and arti- by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so cles such as "the" and "an,"but the fact that a modifier or an empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contrac- article is absent from one statement and appears in another is for to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con- ARTICLE 2 tractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. OWNER 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.1 DEFINITION 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract within a seven-da}I period after receipt of written notice from Documents as if singular in number.The term"Owner"means the Owner to commence and continue correction of such the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shall furnish may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second to the Contractor in writing information which is necessary and written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or seven-day period. If the Contractor within such second seven- enforce mechanic's lien rights.Such information shall include a me' Period after receipt co such second notice fails to weer correct statement of the record legal title to the property on mence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner g p P v may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,and have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution of the Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or Agreement and, within five days after any change,information thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such defi- of such change in title, recorded or unrecorded. ciencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to REQUIRED OF THE OWNER the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Archi- 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor,prior tect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that difference to the Owner. financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.[Note: Unless such reasonable ARTICLE 3 evicence were furnisbed on request prior to the execution of the Agreement, the prospective contractor would not be required to execute the Agreement or to commence the Work.] CONTRACTOR 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical 3.1 DEFINITION characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized i 1 shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements,assess- representative. AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(NNK' A201-1987 7 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION AM* ARTICLE 1 ment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1,1,7 THE PROJECT MANUAL 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between 1.2 EXECUTION,CORRELATION AND INTENT Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement),Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner Drawings, Specifications,addenda issued prior to execution of and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modifi- Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Docu- cation is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change menu upon request. Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre- issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the sentation that the Contractor has visited the site,become famil- Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other iar with local conditions under which the Work is to be per- documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or formed and correlated personal observations with require- invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the ments of the Contract Documents. Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements). 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are comple- The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. mentary', and what is required by one shall be as binding as if The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Docu- representations or agreements,either written or oral.The Con- ments and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary tract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The to produce the intended results. Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contrac- tual relationship of any kind(1)between the Architect and Con- 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections tractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub- and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the subcontractor or(3)between any persons or entities other than Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the words which have well-known technical or construction indus- Architect's duties. try meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord- 1.1.3 THE WORK ance with such recognized meanings. The term "Work" means the construction and services 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, DOCUMENTS equipment and services provided or to be provided by the 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. service through which the Work to be executed by the Con- 1.1.4 THE PROJECT tractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract The Project is the total construction of which the Work per- record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor,Sub- formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or part and which may include construction by the Owner or by claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other separate contractors. documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS will retain all common law,statutory and other reserved rights, The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Con- in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the tract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably accounted showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, for to the Architect,on request,upon completion of the Work. generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, sched- The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared ules and diagrams. by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contrac- 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS tor,are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub- The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other proj- consisting of the written requirements for materials, equip- ects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the AIA HE CONDITIONS CONTRACT CONSTRUCTION EDITION 6 A201-1987 AIA°DOCUMENT 18T AMERICAN INSTITUTE OFF ARCHITECTS,135EW YORK AVENUE,NW,WA HINGTO D D.C.C..2 0006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Rules and Notices for Arbitration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.5.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Safety of Persons and Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Suspension of the work . .. . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.,,5.41, 14.1.1.4, 14.1 Safety Precautions and Programs . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 3,4.2.-,10.1 Suspension or Termination of the Contract . . . . . . 4.3.,,5.4.1.1, 14 Samples,Definition of . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.3 Taxes . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6,73.0.4 Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and . . . 3.1 1.3.12,4.2.' Termination by the Contractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 Samples at the Site,Documents and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 Termination by the Owner for Cause. . .. . . . . . . . . . 5.4 1.1,14.2 Schedule of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2,9.3.1 Termination of the Architect 4.1.1 Schedules,Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.l0 Termination of the Contractor . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.4,3.141.4.2.4, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT . . . . . . 14 4.55,6, 1 1.3.-, 12.1.2. 12.25 Tests and Inspections . . . . . 3.3.3,4.2 6..4.2.9.9.-,.2. 12.2.1,13.5 Shop Drawings,Definition of. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 1.12.1 TIME . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 8 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples . . . . 3.1 1.3.12,-4.27 Time,Delays and Extensions of . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 4.3.8,-,2,1.8.3 Site,Use of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13,0.1.1,61.1 Time Limits,Specific . . . . .. . . . 2.11,21.1,2.-1,3.111,3.1 1.3.15.1, Site Inspections . ..1??,3.3.4,-+?.2.4.2.9,-4.3.6,9X2.9.10.1, 13.5 -t.2.1, 4.2.11, -(.3. 4.4, 4.5, 5.1, 5.4, '.3.5, '.3.9, 81, 9?. 9.1.1. Site Visits,Architects . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 4.21,41.5,a?.9.-+.3.6. 9.3.3,9.4.1. 9.6.1.9.-.9.8?,9.10?, 1 1.1.3, 1 1.3.6. 1 1.1.1 n. 9.4.2, 9.5.1. 9.81, 9.91,9.10.1, 13.5 11.3.11, 121?. 12?.4. 121.6. 137, 1-+ Special Inspections and Testing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6. 12.2.1. 13.5 Time Limits on Claims. . . . . . . . . 4.3.2,4.3.3,-1.3.6,4.3.9.4.4.-4.5 Specifications,Definition of the. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. 1.1.6 Tale to',Y'ork . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93-2.9-3,3 Specifications,The . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1.1.1.6, 1.17, 11.4, 1.3.3.1 1 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK . . . . . .. . . . . . . 12 Statutes of Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+5.-11, 12.2.6, 13.E Uncovering of Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 Stopping the Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3,4.37,9.-, 10.1.2. 10.3, 14.l Unforeseen Conditions 4.3.6,8.3.1, 10.1 Stored Materials . . . . . . . . . . . 61.1.9.31, 10.2.11, 11.3.1.-4, 12.2.-1 Unit Prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -.1.-4,-.3.3.2 Subcontractor,Definition of. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. 5.1.1 Use of Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.t.I, 1.3,2.2-5,3.127,5,i SUBCONTRACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 5 Use of Site . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.'1 Subcontractors,\t'ork by. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.4,3.3?,3.12.1, Values,Schedule of 9.2,9.'1.1 4.2.3, 5.3, 5.4 Waiver of Claims:Final Payment. . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.5,4.5.1,9.l .3 Subeontraetual Relations. . . . .. . . . . . . . . 5.3,5.4,9.3.1?,9.6?, Waiver of Claims by the Architect. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .... . . . 13.4 9.6.3,9.6.4, 101.1, 11-3.7, 1 1.3.8, 14.1.1, 14.2.11, 14.3? Waiver of Claims be the Contractor. . . . . .. . . 9.10.-1, 11.3.-, 13.4.2 Submittals . . . . . . . . . 1.3,3.2-3,3 10,3.1 1,3.12.41.',5.2.1.51.3, waiver of Claims by the Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -1.3.5,4.5.1.99.3. .3.6,9.2.9.3.1,9.81, 9.9.1, 9.10.2.9.10.3. 10.1.2, 1 1.1.3 9.10.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.5. 11.3.', 13.4.2 Subrogation,Waivers of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1. 1 1.3.5,11.3.7 Waiver of Liens. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 9.111.2 Substantial Completion. . . . . . .. . . . . . 4.2.9,4.3.5.2,8.1.I.8.1-3, waivers of Subrogation. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 6.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.' 8.2-3.9-8, 9.9.1, 121.1, 12.21, 13.- Warranty and warranties. . . . . . . . . . 3.5,41.9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Substantial Completion.Definition of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.1 4.35.3.9.3.3.9.8?.9.9.1, 121.2. 13.'.1.3 Substitution Of Subcontractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3,5.2.4 V eather Delays . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 4.3.81 Substitution of the Architect. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1.3 When Arbitration May Be Demanded . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 4.5.4 Substitutions of Materials . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1 Work,Definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 1.1.1 Sub-subcontractor.Definition of .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Written Consent . . . . .. . . .. . . . . 1.3.1,3.12.8,3.14?,4.1?,4.3-4, Subsurface Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . -1.3.6 45.5,9.3?,9.8?, 9.9.1,9.10?, 9.10.3, 10.11, 10.1.3, Successors and Assigns . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. 13.2 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4, 11.3.11, 131. 13.41 Superintendent . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9, 101.6 Written Interpretations . . . .. . . . . . ... . . . . . . 41.1 1.4.2.12.4.37 Supervision and Construction Procedures . .. .. . 1?.4,3.3,3.4. Written Notice . . . . . . . . . .. 2.3,2.4,3.9,3.12.8,3.12.9,4.3,4.4.4, 4.2.3, 4.3.4,6.1.3,6.2.4,7.1.3.'.3.4,8.2,8.3.1. 10. 12, 1-4 45, 5?.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1. 8 2.2.9.4.1,95.1,9.',9.10, 10.1?. Surety . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . 4.4.1,4.4.4,5.4.1?,9.101,9.10.3, 141.2 10?.6, 11.1.3, 11.3, 12?.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 1351, 14 Surety,Consent of. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Written Orders. . . .. . . . . ... . . ... . . . ... . . . .. . . 2-3-3.9,+3--, Surveys. .. .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . 2.2.2.3.18.3 -.8??, 1 1.3.9, 12.1, 12?, 13.5?. 1-4-3.1 f!5 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIA" •G 198'THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1'35 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.w.,WASHINGTON,D.C.2(I(HI() A201-1987 5 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Limitations of Liability . . . . 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.11, Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 3.17, 3.18, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12,6.2.2, 9.4.2,9.6.4,9.10.4, Award Separate Contracts 6.1 10.1.4, 10.2-5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, t 1.3.7, 13.4.2, 13.5.2 Owner's Right to Stop the Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 2.3,4.3.7 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 14.3 Limitations of Time,General . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1,2.2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3, Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2 3.8.2, 3.10, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.3.2, Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings,Specifications 4.3.3, 4.3.,0.3.6,4.3.9, 4.5.4.2, 5.2.1, 5.2.3,6.2.4,7.3.4, 7.4, and Other Documents . . . . . . . 8.2,9.5, 9.6.2, 9.8, 9.9,9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.2, 11.3.5, 1.1.1,1.3,2.2.5,5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use . . . ....... . . . . . . 9.6.6,9.9, 11.3.t 1 11.3.6, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 13.5, 13.7 Patching,Cutting and . . .. . . ... . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 3.14,6.2.6 Limitations of Time,Specific . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2,2.2.1,2.4,3.10,3.1 1, Patents,Royalties and .. . .. ... . . . ... . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . 3.17 3.15.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.11,4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 5.3, 5.4, 7.3.5, 7.3.9, 8.2, Payment,Applications for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5,9.2,9.3,9.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1,9.6.1, 9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 9.5.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4, 14.2.4 11.3-10, 11.3.1 1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 12.2.6, 13.7, 14 Payment,Certificates for. . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5, Loss of Use Insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . 11.3.3 9.6.1,9.6.6, 9.7.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Material Suppliers . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 1.3.1,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1, Payment,Failure of. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . 4.3.7,9.5.1.3, 9.3.1,9.3.1.2,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.6.5,9.10.4 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Materials,Hazardous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1,10.2.4 Payment,Final . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,4.3.5,9.10, 11.1.2, Materials,Labor,Equipment and . . .. . I.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5-1,3.8.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.5, 12.3.1 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13, 3.15.1,4.2.7,6.2.1, Payment Bond,Performance Bond and .. . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.3.6.4, 7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3, 12.2.4, 14 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Payments,Progress . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 4.3.4,9.3,9.6, Procedures of Construction. .. . .. . . . . 3.3.1,4.2.3,4.2.7,9.4.2 9.8.3,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 Minor Changes in the Work. . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1,4.2.8,4.3.7,7.1,7.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 9, 14 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 13 Payments to Subcontractors . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . 5.4.2,9.5.1.3, Modifications,Definition of . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ... .. . . . . 1.1.1 9.6.2,9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.8, 14.2.1.2 Modifications to the Contract . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1,1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11, PCB. . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . .... . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 10.1 4.1.2,4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7,8.3.1,9.7 Performance Bond and Payment Bond.. . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. 7.3.6.4, Mutual Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 6.2 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 Permits,Fees and Notices . . . . . . . 2.2.3,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of . . . . . . . . 2.3.1, PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION OF . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 4:3.5,9.5.2,9.8.2, 12, 13.7.1.3 Polychlorinated Biphenyl . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . ... . . 10.1 Notice. .. . . . . . . . . . . 2.3,2.4,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.7.3,3.7.4,3.9,3.12.8, Product Data,Definition of. . . .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . ... . . . . 3.12.2 3.12.9, 3.17, 4.3, 4.4.4,4.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1,8.2.2,9.4.1, Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings .. . . 3.1 1,3.12,4.2.7 9.5.1,9.6.t, 9.7,9.10, 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11-1.3, 11.3, 12.2.2, Progress and Completion .. . . . . . . .. . .... ... . 4.2.2,4.3.4,8.2 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5?, 14 Progress Payments . . . . . . ... . . .. . . ... . . .. . . . . . . 4.3.4,9.3, Notice,Written . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3,2.4,3.9,3.12.8,3.129,4.3, 9.6, 9.8.3,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 4.4.4. +.5, 5?.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1,8.2.2, 9.4.1,9.5.1,9.7,9.10, Project,Definition of the. . . . . . .. . ... . . . . . . . .. . ... .. . . 1.1.4 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11-1.3, 1 1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.2, 14 Project Manual,Definition of the . . . .. . . . . . .... . .. .... . 1.1.7 Notice of Testing and Inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 13.5.1,13.5.2 Project Manuals .. .... . . . ... . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . ..... . . . 2.2.5 Notice to Proceed. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Project Representatives ..... . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . .. .. . ... . 4.2.10 Notices,Permits,Fees and . . . . . . 2.2 3,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Property Insurance .. . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.2.5,11.3 Observations,Architect's On-Site . . ... . . . . ... . . . . . 4.2.2,4.25, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY.. . . . . . . . . . . . 10 4.3.6, 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1, 13.5 Regulations and Laws .. . . .... .. .. 1.3,3.6,3.7,3.13,4.1.1,4.5.5, Observations,Contractor's. . . . . ... . .. . . ... .... ... 1.2.2,3.2.2 4.5.7, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Occupancy. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. ... . .. . . . 9.6.6,9.8.1,9.9,1 1.3.1 1 Rejection of Work .. .. . . . ... . . . . . ..... . .. .. 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.2 On-Site Inspections by the Architect . ... . . . . . . 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.6, Releases of Waivers and Liens. .. . ... . .... . .. . ..... .. . . 9.10.2 9.4.2,9.8.2,9.9.2,9.10.1 Representations ....... . ...... . .... .. . .. . 1.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.7, On-Site Observations by the Architect . . ... . .. . 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.3.6, 6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.10.1 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1, 13.5 Representatives. . . ....... ...... .. .... . ... . . 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9, Orders,Written . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3,3.9,4.3.7,7,8.2.2,11.3.9,12.1, 4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10, 5.1.1,5.1.2, 13.2.1 12.2, 13.5?, 14.3.1 Resolution of Claims and Disputes . .... . .. . . ........ 4.4,4.5 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work . ... . . . ..... 3.3.2, OWNER. . . . . . . . . . .. . . ....... . .. ..... ... . . . ..... . .... 2 owner,Definition of . . . ... . .. . ... . .. . . ... . . ........ . . 2.1 4.2.3,6.1.3,6.2, 10 Retainage . .. .. .......... 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Owner,Information and Services Required of the. .... ... 2.1.2, Review of Contract Documents and Field 2.2, -1.3.4,6,9, 10.1.4, 1 t.2, 1 1.3, 13.5.1, 14.1.1.5, 14.1.3 Conditions by Contractor... . . . ... .. . 1.2.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7 Owner's Authority .. . . . .. . . 3.8.1,4.1.3,4.2.9,5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1, Review of Contractor's Submittals by 7.3.1,8??,9.3.1,9.3.2, 11.4.1, 12.2.4, 13.5.2, 14.2, 14.3.1 Owner and Architect .. 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12, Owner's Financial Capability . . ... .. .. . .. . . .. ... 2.2.1,14.1.1.5 4.2.7,4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.3,9.2,9.8.2 Owner's Liability Insurance .... .... ... ... ..... . ...... 11.2 Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data Owner's Loss of Use Insurance... .. ..... ..... . . ....... 11-3.3 and Samples by Contractor........................ 3.12.5 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors ...... ......... 1.1.2, Rights and Remedies . .. ..... 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2, 5.2.1,5.4.1,9.6.4 4.2.6,4.3.6,4.5, 5.3,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work. ....... 2.4,12.2.4,14.2.2.2 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.4 14 Owner's Right to Clean Up . ... ......... ............... 6.3 Royalties and Patents............................... 3.17 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION 4 A201-1987 AIA° •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. CONTRACTOR . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . ... . . . . . . . .. .. . . 3 Emergencies . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.7,10.3 Contractor,Definition of .. . . . .. . . . ... . . . .. . .. . . . . 3.1,6.1.2 Employees,Contractor's .. .. . . .. . 3.3.2,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.1, Contractor's Bid. . ... . . . . . .. . ... . .. . . .. ... . . . . . . .. . . 1.1.1 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractor's Construction Schedules . . . .. .. ... . . . 3.10,6.1.3 Equipment,Labor,Materials and . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1, Contractor's Employees ...... .. 3.3.2,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.9,3.18,4.2.3, 3.8.2,3.12.3,3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13, 3.15.1,4.2.7, 4.2.6,8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.4, 14 Contractor's Liability Insurance.. . .. . . ... . .. .. . .. . . . . . 11.1 Execution and Progress of the Work . . . . . . . 1.1.3,1.2.3,3.2,3.4.1, Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 3.5.1,4.2.2,4.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.8,6.2.2,7.1.3, and Owner's Forces . . ... . 2.2.6,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6,12.2.5 7.3.9,8.2,8.3,9.5,9.9.1, 10.2, 14.2, 14.3 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors ... .... 1.2.4,3.3.2, Execution, Correlation and Intent of the 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5.2, 5.3,5.4,9.6.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8, 14.2.1.2 Contract Documents .. . .... . . .. . .... . . . . . . .. . . 1.2,3.7.1 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect . . .. 1.1.2,3.2.1,3.2.2, Extensions of Time .. . . .. .. . . .. . 4.3.1,4.3.8,7.2.1.3,8.3,10.3.1 3.3.3, 3.5.1,3.7.3, 3.11,3.12.8 3.16, 3.18,4.2.3, 4.2.4,4.2.6, Failure of Payment by Contractor.... . . . .. . . . . . 9.5.1.3,14.2.1.2 4.2.12, 5.2,6.2.2, 7.3.4,9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.I, 13.5 Failure of Payment by Owner .... . . . . . .. . . . . . 4.3.7,9.7,14.1.3 Contractor's Representations.. 1.2.2,3.5.1,3.12.7,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3 Faulty Work(See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Contractor's Responsibility for Those Final Completion and Final Payment . . . . . . . . 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2, Performing the Work .. . . . . ... . . . . . . .. 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3, 10 4.3.5,9.10, 11.1.2, 11-1.3, 11.3.5, 12.3.1, 13.7 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents. ... . . 1.2.2,3.2,3.7.3 Financial Arrangements,Owner's. . . ... . ... . . . . . .. . .. . . . 2.2.1 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work . . . .. . . .... . . .. . . . . . .. 9.7 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance . . . .. . ... .. . . . .. . . . 11.3 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract . . .... . . ... . . . 14.1 Contractor's Submittals . .. . . .. 3.10,3.1 I,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3, GENERAL PROVISIONS. . ...... . . .. . ... . . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. 1 7.3.6,9.2,9.3.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2, Governing Law . .... . . . . .. ... . . .. . .... . . . . .. . ..... 13.1 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 Guarantees(See Warranty and Warranties) Contractor's Superintendent . ... .. . . .. . .. . . ... . . . . 3.9,10.2.6 Hazardous Materials. .. . . . . ...... . .. . . .. . ..... .. 10.1, 10.2.4 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures.. . . . . 1.2.4, Identification of Contract Documents .. . .. . ..... . ....... 1.2.1 3.3, 3.4,4.2.3,8.2.2, 8.2.3, 10 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers . . . .... ... . . . 5.2.1 Contractual Liability Insurance.. .... . . ... . . ... . 11.1.1.7, 11.2.1 Indemnification . . . . .. . 3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.1.4,11-3.1.2,11.3.7 Coordination and Correlation .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . 1.2.2,1.2.4,3.3.1, Information and Services Required of the Owner. .... 2.1.2,2.2, 3.10,3.12.7,6.1.3,6.2.1 4.3.4,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.6,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.8.3,9.9.2, Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications ... 1.3,2.2.5,3.11 9.10.3, 10.1.4, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Correction of Work . . ... . . .. . . .... . ... . . 2.3,2.4,4.2.1,9.8.2, Injury or Damage to Person or Property . .. . . . . ....... . . 4.3.9 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 13.7.1.3 Inspections. ... . .... . . . . ...... . . ... . 3.3.3,3.3.4,3.7.1,4.2.2, Cost,Definition of .. . .. .. . ........ .. . . .... . ... 7.3.6,14.3.5 4.2.6,4.2.9, 4.3.6,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 Costs ... . 2.4,3.2.1,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.8.1,5.2.3, Instructions to Bidders. . . . . . ...... . ... . . . .... . . . . .. .. 1.1.1 6.1.1,6.2.3,6.3,7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,9.7,9.8.2,9.10.2, 11.3.1.2, Instructions to the Contractor... . 3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7,12.1,13.5.2 11.3.1.3,11.3.4,11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.1,12.2.4,12.2.5, 13.5,14 Insurance. . . . .. . 4.3.9.6.1.1,7.3.6.4,9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2,11 Cutting and Patching... . . .... ... . . . .... . .. .. .. . 3.14,6.2.6 Insurance,Boiler and Machinery .. . . . . ... . . . ... . . .. . 11.3.2 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, Insurance,Contractor's Liability .. .. . . ...... . . . . .... . . 11.1 6.2.4,9.5.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.3, 11.1, 11.3, 12.2.5 Insurance,Effective Date of .... . . . ... . ... . . ..... 8.2.2,11.1.2 Damage to the Work . .. .. 3.14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2,10.2.5, 10.3,11.3 Insurance,Loss of Use...... . .... . .. .. . ..... . .... .. 11.3.3 Damages,Claims for.. 3.18,4.3.9,6.1.1,6.2.5,8.3.2,9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Insurance,Owner's Liability.. . . .... .... . ..... .. ... . .. 11.2 Damages for Delay. ..... . ... .. ..... . . . 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7 Insurance,Property.. ...... ...... ..... . ... . . .. 10.2.5,11.3 Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of. . . ..... . 8.1.2 Insurance,Stored Materials ....... . ...... ... . .. 9.3.2,11.3.1.4 Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of. .... ....... . . 8.1.3 INSURANCE AND BONDS ..... .. .. . . ...... .. . ..... .... 11 Day,Definition of. .... . . .. . . ..... ... . . ... ..... . . ... . 8.1.4 Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy . .9.9.1,11.3.11 Decisions of the Architect.. .. .. 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13, Insurance Companies,Settlement with.... .... . . .. . .... 11.3.10 4.3.2,4.3.6,4.4.1,4.4.4,4.5,6.3,7.3.6, 7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2, Intent of the Contract Documents ....... .. .. . . ... 1.2.3,3.12.4, 9.4,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.1.2, 135.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 Decisions to Withhold Certification . .... ..... 9.5,9.7,14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, Interest atio ... . . ..... 2.5;1 4 . 4. ,4 1. 4 4 4 4. . 5. ,6 1.. 13.8 Rejection and Correction of ....... ..... 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.1, Interpretation.. . . .... 1.2.5:1.4,1.5,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4 4.2.6,4.3.5,9.5.2,9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.2.5, 12, 13.7.1.3 Interpretations,Written ........... .. ..... 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.7 Defective Work,Definition of .. .............. .... . .... 3.5.1 joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required .. .. ....... . . 4.5.6 Definitions.. ... . 1.1,2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, Judgment on Final Award . .. ............. 4.5.1,4.5.4.1,4.5.7 4.3.1, 5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1,9.1,9.8.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment . 1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2, Delays and Extensions of Time ... ....... 4.3.1,4.3.8.1,4.3.8.2, 3.12.2,3.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13,3.15.1, 6.1.1,6.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, 7.3.4, 7.3.5,7.3.8, 4.2.7,6.2.1,7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 12.2.4, 14 7.3.9,8.1.1,8.3, 10.3.1, 14.1.1.4 Labor Disputes................... ..... . ....... ..... 8.3.1 Disputes ..... . .. .. . . 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,6.2.5,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.1.2 Laws and Regulations ..... .. 1.3,3.6,3.7,3.13,4.1.1,4.5.5,4.5.7, Documents and Samples at the Site ....... ....... . ... .... 3.11 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6 Drawings,Definition of .. ............... ........ ..... 1.1.5 Liens .................. 2.1.2,4.3.2,4.3.5.1,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10.2 Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of..... 1.1.1,1.3, Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder ................ 4.5.5 2.2.5,3.11, 5.3 Limitations,Statutes of . .................. 4.5.4.2,12.2.6,13.7 Duty to Review Contract Documents and Field Conditions..... 3.2 Limitations of Authority................. ... 3.3.1,4.1.2,4.2.1, FS Effective Date of Insurance.... ... .... ........... 8.2.2,11.1.2 4.2.3,4.2.7,4.2.10, 5.2.2,5.2.4,7.4, 11.3.10 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION AIAO •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 3 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. INDEX Acceptance of Nonconforming Work . .. . . . . . . 9.6.6,9.9-3,12.3 Building Permit . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .... . . . . . .. ..... . . . 3.7.1 Acceptance of Work . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3 Capitalization. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . 1.4 Access to Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 9.8.2 Accident Prevention. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-3, 10 Certificates for Payment. .. . . . . 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1, Acts and Omissions . . . 3.2.1,3.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.2, 9.6.6, 9.7.1,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 4.3.9,8.3.1, 10.1.4, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval . .. . . 3.12.11,13.5.4 Addenda . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.1,3.1 1 Certificates of Insurance ... . . . . . .. . .. . . . . 9.3.2,9.10.2, 11-1.3 Additional Cost,Claims for. . . .. . . . . 4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.9,6.1.1,10.3 Change Orders. . . . . . 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.8.2.4,3.11,4.2.8,43.3,5.2.3, Additional Inspections and Testing... . . . . 4.2.6,9.8.2, 12.2.1,13.5 7.1,7.2, 7.3.2,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 11.3.1.2, Additional Time,Claims for.. .. . . .. .. .. . 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.3.9,8.3.2 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT . .. . . . . 3.3-3,4,9.4,9.5 Change Orders,Definition of.. . . .... . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . . . 7.2.1 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid .. . . . .. . . . . . . . ... . . . . . 1.1.1 Changes.. . .... .. . .... . . .. ... . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . ... . . 7.1 Aesthetic Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . 4.2.13,4.5.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK . . . . 3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 10.1.3 Allowances .. . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . .. . . 3.8 Claim,Definition of.. ... . .. ... . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 All-risk Insurance.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 11.3.1.1 Claims and Disputes . . . ... . . . . . . 4.3,4.4,4.5,6.2.5,8.3.2, Applications for Payment . . 4.2.5,7.3.7,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3, 9.3.1.2,9.3.3,9.10.4, 10.1.4 9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.4, 11.1.3, 14.2.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims ... . ... .. . . . .... 4.5.6 . . ... .. . . . .. Approvals . . . . 2.4,3.3.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12.4 through 3.12.8,3.18.3, Claims for Additional Cost.. . .. . .. 4.3.6,4.3.7,4.3.9,6.1.1,10.3 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 11.3.1.4, 13.4.2, 13.5 Claims for Additional Time. . . . . .. . .. . . 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.3.9,8.3.2 Arbitration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4,4.3.2,4.3.4,4.4.4,4.5, Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. . . . . . . .. . . 4.3.6 8.3.1, 10.1.2, 11.3.9, 11-3.10 Claims for Damages. . .3.18,4.3.9,6.1.1,6.2.5,8.3.2,9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Architect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 4.1 Claims Subject to Arbitration. . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . 4-3.2,4A.4,4-5-1 Architect,Definition of. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Cleaning Up . .. .. .. . . .... . . . . . . ... . . . . . . 3.15,6.3 Architect,Extent of Authority. . . . . . . . 2.4,3.12.6,4.2,4.3.2,4.3.6, Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period . . . .. . . . .. 13.7 4.4, 5.2,6.3,7.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.6, 7.4,9.2,9.3.1, Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to . .. .. . . 2.1.2, 9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.7.1, 3.10.1,3.12.6, 4.3.7, 5.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,9.2, 11.13, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Architect,Limitations of Authority and Responsibility . 3.3.3,3.12.8, Commencement of the Work,Definition of. .. .. . ......... 8.1.2 3.12.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2,4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12, Communications Facilitating Contract 4.2.13,4.3.2, 5.2.1, 7.4,9.4.2, 9.6.4,9.6.6 Administration . 3.9.1,4.2.4,5.2.1 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses . . . . . . . .. . 2.4,9.8.2, Completion,Conditions Relating to . ... .. . 3.1 1,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 4.3.2,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10, 11.3.5, 12.2.2, 13.7.1 Architect's Administration of the Contract.. . . . .. . . . 4.2,4.3.6, COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND..... .. . .. . . .. . ...... .. . . 9 4.3.7,4.4,9.4,9.5 Completion,Substantial.. . . . . ... 4.2.9,4.3.5.2,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3, Architect's Approvals 2.4,3.5.1,3.10.2,3.12.6,3.12.8,3.18.3,4.2.7 9.8,9.9.1, 12.2.2, 13.7 Architect's Authority to Reject Work. . . . 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2,12.2.1 Compliance with Laws. ..... 1.3,3.6,3.7,3.13,4.1.1,10.2.2,1 1.1, Architect's Copyright . . .. . .. .. . . .. . . ... 1.3 11.3, 13.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 Architect's Decisions. . . . . . . . .. 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13, Concealed or Unknown Conditions.. . .. . . .. . . ... . . .. ... 4.3.6 4.3.2,4.3.6, 4.4.1, 4.4.4,4.5,6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1, Conditions of the Contract .... . . .. . . ....... . 1.1.1,1.1.7,6.1.1 9.2, 9.4,9.5-1,9.8.2,9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Consent,Written . . . . ....... . . .. . .. 1.3.1,3.12.8,3-14.2,4.1.29 Architect's Inspections . . . . . . ... . . 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.6,9.4.2,9.8.2, 4.3.4,4.5.5,9.3.2,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,10.1.2, 10.1.3, 9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4, 11.3.11, 13.2, 13.4.2 Architect's Instructions. . 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,4.3.7,7.4.1,12.1,13-5.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE Architect's Interpretations........ ... . . ... . 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.7 CONTRACTORS ..... .... . 1.1.4,6 ....... . ... ........ Architect's On-Site Observations .. . .. . .. 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.3.6,9.4.2, Construction Change Directive,Definition of. ..... . ....... 7.3.1 9.5.1,9.10.1, 13.5 Construction Change Directives .... 1.1.1,4.2.8,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 Architect's Project Representative ..... ... ... . ..... .... 4.2.10 Construction Schedules,Contractor's .. ... . . ...... .. 3.10,6.1.3 Architect's Relationship with Contractor .. . . .. . 1.1.2,3.2.1,3.2.2, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts ... ........... .. 5.4 3.3.3,3.5.1, 3.7.3.3.11, 3.12.8, 3.12.11,3.16,3.18,4.2.3,4.2.4, Continuing Contract Performance .. ...... .. .. ...... .. 4.3.4 4.2.6,4.2.12, 5.2,6.2.29 7.3.4,9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Contract,Definition of... . .. ........ ... . ............. 1.1.2 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors. . . . 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4, CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR 4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.3.7 SUSPENSION OF THE ...... . ........... 4.3.7,5.4.1.1,14 Architect's Representations. ..... ....... .... 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 Contract Administration ........ . ..... .... ... 3.3.3,4,9.4,9.5 Architect's Site Visits. . . .. . .. 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.6,9.4.2,9.5.1, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating to...... 3.7.1, 9:8:2,9.9'2,9.10.1, 13.5 3.10, 5.2,9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Asbestos . .. . .. .. .. . . . . .. . .. .. .... ......... .... ... . 10.1 Contract Documents,The ...... ..... .... ........ 1.1, 1.2,7 Attorneys'Fees . .. . ... . ..... .. . .... . . .. 3.18.1,9.10.2,10.1.4 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of.. . 1.3,2.2.5,5.3 Award of Separate Contracts... .. ... . ......... ......... 6.1.1 Contract Documents,Definition of ....... ........ ... .. . 1.1.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Contract Performance During Arbitration...... ...... 4.3.4,4.5.3 Portions of the Work . .... ........ .... .... ......... 5.2 Contract Sum.... ............... 3.8,4.3.6,4.3.7,4.4.4,5.2.3, Basic Definitions. .... . .... ............... ........... 1.1 6.1.3,7.2,7.3.9.1,9.7, 11.3.1, 12.2.4, 12.3, 14.2.4 Bidding Requirements.. ...... ... ..... 1.1.1,1.1.7,5:2.1,11.4.1 Contract Sum,Definition of............ ................ 9.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance ....... 11.3.2 Contract Time ... ............ .. 4.3.6,4.3.8,4.4.4,7.2.1.3,7.3, Bonds,Lien .. . ..... . .... ......................... 9.10.2 8.2.1,8.3.1,9.7, 12.1.1 Vie. Bonds,Performance and Payment..... 7.3.6.4,9.10.3,11.3.9,11.4 Contract Time,Definition of.......................... 8.1.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION-FOURTEENTH EDITION 2 A201-1987 AIA® •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution. T H E A M E R I C A N I N S T I T U T E O F A R C H I T E C T S OPK il AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction THIS DOCUMENT HAS L1IPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH ANA TTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFICATION 1987 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 8. TIME 2. OWNER 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3. CONTRACTOR 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK CONTRACT This document has been approved and endorsed by the Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1911,1915,1918,1925, 1937, 1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1967,1970,1976,©1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue,N.W.,Washington,D.C.,20006.Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecutions. 1 1 CAUTION: You should use an original AIA document which has this caution printed in red. An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced. li AIA DOCUMENT A201 •GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•FOURTEENTH EDITION ALk@ •©1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINGTON,D.C.20006 A201-1987 1 WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. 2980 _. DOCUMENT 00220 40ft GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1- GENERAL 1 . 01 DOCUMENT INCLUDES A. For the convenience of the Bidders, a geotechnical report, dated May 10, 1996, prepared by GeoDesign, Inc . , Middlebury, CT, is provided. B. Bidders are urged to examine the geotechnical data and to make their own investigation of the site before bidding. 1 . 02 OWNER'S DISCLAIMER A. The data provided is intended only for the general information and convenience of the Bidders . B. The Owner and Architect disclaim all responsibility for the accuracy, true location and extent of the geotechnical data that has been prepared by others . They further disclaim responsibility for interpretation of such data by Bidders, as in pro- jecting soil bearing values, rock profiles, soil stability and the presence, level and extent of underground water, rock or ledge. C. All determinations or judgments made by or in behalf of the successful Bidder shall be solely the responsibility of the successful Bidder. D. Geotechnical data is not part of the Contract Documents . PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (not used) 9 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00220-1 2980 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Pages 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements 7 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials And Methods 10 16100 - Raceways, Boxes, And Cabinets 11 16111 - Cable Trays 6 16119 - Underground Ducts And Utility Structures 13 16120 - Wires And Cables 5 16124 - Medium-Voltage Cables 9 16140 - Wiring Devices 6 16195 - Electrical Identification 9 16312 - Secondary Unit Substations 10 16320 - Medium-Voltage Transformers 7 16425 - Switchboards 13 16452 - Grounding 9 16460 - Transformers 7 16470 - Panelboards 9 16475 - Fuses 4 16476 - Disconnects And Circuit Breakers 6 16481 - Motor Controllers 13 16482 - Motor Control Centers 10 16495 - Transfer Switches 10 16515 - Interior Lighting 10 16525 - Exterior Lighting 8 16620 - Packaged Engine Generator Systems 23 16621 - Generator And Paralleling Control Switchboard 22 16660 - Ground Fault Protection Systems 5 16721 - Fire Alarm Systems 19 16750 - Nurse Call Systems 14 16856 - Electric Heating Cables 7 16915 - Lighting Control Equipment 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-5 2980 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Pages 14240 - Hydraulic Elevators 21 AOW* 14560 - Chutes 5 VOLUME NO. II DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements 10 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials And Methods 19 15100 - Valves 12 15125 - Pipe Expansion Joints 7 15135 - Meters And Gages 11 15145 - Hangers And Supports 8 15170 - Motors 5 15190 - Mechanical Identification 7 15241 - Vibration Control 9 15250 - Mechanical Insulation 25 15326 - Standpipe And Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 24 15410 - Plumbing Piping 19 15430 - Plumbing Specialties 19 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures 13 15452 - Sewage And Sump Pumps 11 15483 - Fuel Oil Piping Systems 7 15485 - Medical Gas Piping Systems 17 15486 - Medical Gas Systems Equipment 11 15510 - Hydronic Piping 17 15520 - Steam And Condensate Piping 16 15540 - HVAC Pumps 10 15582 - Steam Condensate Return Units 6 15681 - Absorption Chillers 8 15685 - Water-Cooled Centrifugal Chillers 7 15711 - Factory-Fabricated Cooling Towers 7 15755 - Heat Exchangers 4 15810 - Humidifiers 4 15832 - Finned-Tube Radiation 4 15833 - Radiant Heating Panels 3 15851 - Centrifugal Fans 7 15852 - Axial Fans 8 15854 - Central-Station Air-Handling Units 12 15891 - Metal Ductwork 12 15910 - Duct Accessories 9 15932 - Air Outlets And Inlets 5 15933 - Air Terminals 5 15975 - Control Systems Equipment 75 15990 - Teating, Adjusting, And Balancing 10 A TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-4 2980 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Pages 08110 - Steel Doors And Frames 8 08211 - Flush Wood Doors 8 08212 - Stile and Rail Wood Doors 5 08305 - Access Doors 4 08312 - Sliding/Swinging Breakaway Doors 6 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors 6 08335 - Coiling Counter Doors 5 08410 - Aluminum Entrances And Storefronts 14 08470 - Revolving Entrance Doors 9 08520 - Aluminum Windows 11 08700 - Door Schedule 13 08710 - Finish Hardware 34 08800 - Glazing 15 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09215 - Veneer Plaster 14 09250 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 25 09300 - Tile 12 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings 12 09540 - Glassfiber Reinforced Gypsum Units 3 09660 - Resilient Tile Flooring 8 09666 - Resilient Sheet Floor Coverings 10 09680 - Carpet 9 09816 - Epoxy Wall Coating System 6 09900 - Painting 17 09921 - Multicolored Interior Coatings 7 09950 - Wall Coverings 5 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10190 - IV/Curtain Tracks 4 10200 - Louvers And Vents 9 10265 - Wall Surface Protection Systems 6 10505 - Metal Lockers 7 10522 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets And Accessories 5 10800 - Toilet And Bath Accessories 16 10990 - Miscellaneous Specialties 2 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11005 - Equipment Schedule 52 11132 - Projection Screens 3 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12690 - Floor Mats And Frames 3 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13091 - X-Ray Protection 7 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-3 2980 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Pages 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete 19 ` 03450 - Architectural Precast Concrete 16 03551 - Cementitious Floor Underlayment 4 DIVISION 4- MASONRY 04200 - Unit Masonry 27 04300 - Reinforced Unit Masonry 3 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 - Structural Steel 11 05150 - Shear Connectors 4 05300 - Metal Decking 8 05500 - Metal Fabrications 22 05720 - Ornamental Handrails And Railings 9 05810 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 8 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 - Rough Carpentry 9 06400 - Architectural Woodwork 17 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07146 - Cementitious Crystalline Waterproofing 4 07160 - Bituminous Dampproofing 5 07190 - (SRAB) Vapor Barriers 4 07210 - Building Insulation 7 07250 - Fireproofing 12 07270 - Firestopping 13 07500 - Membrane Roofing 10 07530 - CSPE Membrane Roofing 7 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 10 07720 - Roof Accessories 5 07820 - Metal-Framed Skylights 13 07900 - Joint Sealers 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-2 2980 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME NO. I BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Pages 00220 - Geotechnical Data 1 00700 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition) 24 00800 - Supplementary Conditions 31 00860 - List of Drawings 5 00870 - Room Finish Schedule 20 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 - Summary of Work 2 01020 - Allowances 3 01027 - Applications for Payment 10 01030 - Alternates 2 01040 - Coordination 6 01045 - Cutting and Patching 6 01200 - Project Meetings 4 01300 - Submittals 8 01380 - Construction Photographs 3 01400 - Quality Control 5 01500 - Construction Facilities And Temporary Controls 16 01565 - Industrial Hygiene And Indoor Air Quality 5 01600 - Material And Equipment 6 01631 - Substitutions 5 01635 - Requests For Information (RFI) 3 01700 - Contract Closeout 3 01710 - Final Cleaning 3 01720 - Project Record Documents 5 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data 8 01740 - Warranties and Bonds 3 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORR 02070 - Selective Demolition 9 02100 - Site Preparation 12 02110 - Tree and Plant Protection 7 02200 - Earthwork 17 02510 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving and Curbs 12 02512 - Concrete Paving and Curbs 11 02525 - Granite Curbs 4 02660 - Water Service 10 02690 - Oil Distribution Systems 16 02700 - Sewerage and Drainage 12 02800 - Site Improvements 10 02920 - Topsoil 7 02935 - Seeded Lawns 9 02950 - Topsoil Mixtures and Planting 22 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1 A*W- SSO (I(( PROJECT MANUAL COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL PROJECT 2000 NEW BUILDING & RENOVATIONS Northampton, Massachusetts VOLUME T July 15, 1996 SBRA Project No. 2980 SHEPL.EY BULFINCH RICHARDSON AND ABBOTT ARCHITCC'' INCORPORATED 40 Broad Street Boston,Massachusetts 02109 ROLLAIND/TONVERS LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT 85 Willow Street New Haven,Connecticut -SOUZA,TRUE AND PARTNERS, INC. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER 53 Mount Auburn Street atertown,Massachusetts B VH ENGINEERS MECHANICAL,ELECTRICAL, '50 Griffen Road South PLUMBING ENGINEERS Bloomfield,Connecticut THE JOINT VENTURE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER P.O. Box 656,Texas Road Northampton,Massachusetts